Loading...
The URL can be used to link to this page
Your browser does not support the video tag.
NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 5-8 REHABILITATION - 12-0025-UT
CIli i( i`. A.",I!Mir'I L I l ['a.3 L i sa V,I CERTIFICA`l FOF SUBSTANTIAL;TIAI, COMPLETIO Project: North Fast WRF Cla_•ifiers 5-8 Rehabilitation Project Contract Number: 12-007...5-U'T Location. North last Water Reclamation Facility: 1290 SR580 Safety Harbor. Ff, 34695 Contract Date: 2/13/2015 Notice to Proceed Date: 313/2015 Substantial Completion Date: 2/5/2016 Clarifiers ---)&6: 12110115 C111ar iflers 2r'i'',1:f l r Warranter Expiration for Installation,: 121912016 2i6/21117 Warrant), Expiration OvivoEquipment: 121912017 2/4000 8 The work performed under this Contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the (-)wner, Contractor, and Consultant, and the Project (or specified part of the Project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date. DEFINITION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Substantiai c•ony)letior7 is the stage in construction when aj.)rojeet or desi ncatedpor°tion thersc of is sq icienily ccarnl)lete in occordance with contract docxrmenis so that the C.rdmer can use the work or- portion thereoffior its intended use. lienr.s° that cfffc}ct o mr ational integrity crrzd iincthm cif the= i or•k must he calacxhle cif`continuous use. I ... Inc.rLn x A,q ..tedy Consultant Authorized Representative Bate The Contractor accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated. Poole & Kent Company of Florida B Contractor ALrtl1011/ed Representative Date The Owner accepts the specified area of the Project as Substantially Complete and will assume full possession of the specified area of the Project on 2016. The responsibility for utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set forth in the Contract Documents. Jeff Walker, P=L„, CBO, Lid.ED Al' By: ,f dr C � City of Clearwater At 1����' Representative <Dat6 Certificate of Substantial Completion, Pad e 2 of A lunch list of items to be completed or corrected by 2016 is appended hereto. This list may not be exhaustive. and the, failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the Contractors to completc all the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. PROJECTONE YEAR WARRANTY Contract Section 11f, 13.5 llllARRANTYICORRECTION PERIOD ff ivithin one'vear gfter-the date cif.iubstantial Completion or such ion,ger period of Littre asmcry he prescribed by Ls or Regulations or i?y the terms of any applicable speciol guarantee required ky the Contract Doctaneitis or by my.speerfic provision r?f the C:onlr oct DoClrrraents. a y Work is.1bund to be deftctivc, Contractor shall proraaptl�r tivithout cost to the Otivner and in accordance tiff ith the 0)vner'.s ivritten instructions,' (i) correct such tic, fictive Work, or, if it hags been rcfectc3c7 by the eta net, rc5mtjue it_frorar tires site and replace it ivith tl'ork that is not defective and(ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace ani dcrrngr'e to other Work or the tivork of'others resulting therefrom.... Where de fective Work (arid damage to other Work resulting there frorr�) hcas been cava ected, retracrved o replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to,such York ivill be extended,for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been scati#. clorily completed Substantial Completion hate. 215116 Warranty expiration late. 12/10/1 & 2/5/16 A copy of this sidled and executed document should be provided to the following parties. Project Owner Project Contractor Project Consultant(if applicable) City Construction Office Specialist Project File r( t] ��pp yyff YY AN r YY 55 1 �!vg-p j p}5 t F yp ]'B U Cr ANXI) At YI kC t�4 Ll;'GY I.�.)F�I,a CH ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT CONSTRUCTION DIVISION OFFICE COMMUNICATION TO: Jeff Walker SUBJECT. One Year Warranty Check CEI/INSPECTOR- PROJECT COMPLETION DA'Z'E: 2/5/2016 PROJECT NAME: North East WRF Clarifiers 5-8 Rehabilitation Pro'ect Clarifiers 7&8 OVIVO E ui merit Warranty DUE Zf9/2018 CONTRACTOR: Poole & Dent Company of Florida 1715 Leman Street Tam a, FL 33606 INSPECTOR: .)c- 0. t,� DATE: Zc, 5' COMMENTS: SIGNATURE: 4 1ARIGI AND hEA FT U Li) BA Y jet 11T.A(A--Fa CERTIFICATE OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Project: North East WRF Clarifiers 5-8 Rehabilitation Project Contract Number: 12-0025-UT Location: North East Water Reclamation Facility: 3290 SR580 Safety Harbor, FL 34695 Contract Date: 2/13/2015 Notice to Proceed Date: 3/3/2015 Substantial Completion Date: 2/5/2016 Clarifiers 5&6: 12/10/15 Clarifiers 7&8: 2/5/2016 Warranty Expiration for Installation: 12/9/2 2/6/2017 Warranty Expiration Ovivo Equipment: 12/9/2017 2/4/2018 The work performed under this Contract has been inspected by authorized representatives of the Owner, Contractor, and Consultant, and the Project(or specified part of the Project, as indicated above) is hereby declared to be substantially completed on the above date. DEFINITION OF SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION Substantial completion is the stage in construction when a project or designated portion thereof is sufficiently complete in accordance with contract documents so that the Owner can use the work or portion thereof for its intended use. Items that affect operational integrity and function of the work must be capable of continuous use. King Engineering Associates,Inc. By: Consultant Authorized Representative Date The Contractor accepts the above Certificate of Substantial Completion and agrees to complete and correct the items on the tentative list within the time indicated. Poole & Kent Company of Florida By: Contractor Authorized Representative Date The Owner accepts the specified area of the Project as Substantially Complete and will assume full possession of the specified area of the Project on 2016. The responsibility for utilities, security, and insurance under the Contract Documents shall be as set forth in the Contract Documents. Jeff Walker, P.E., CBO, LEED AP By: City of Clearwater Authorized Representative Date . Certificate of Substantial Completion, Page 2 of 2 PROJECT PUNCH LIST A punch list of items to be completed or corrected by , 2016 is appended hereto. This list may not be exhaustive, and the failure to include an item on it does not alter the responsibility of the Contractors to complete all the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. PROJECT ONE YEAR WARRANTY Contract Section III, 13.5 WARRANTY/CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and(ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom... Where defective Work(and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. Substantial Completion Date: 2/5/16 Warranty Expiration Date: 12/10/15 & 2/5/16 A copy of this signed and executed document should be provided to the following parties: Project Owner Project Contractor Project Consultant (if applicable) City Construction Office Specialist Project File i � CLEARWATER CLARIFIER � REHABILITATION 1 � Northeast WRF Clarifiers 5 -8 Rehabilitation 1 � (PROJECT No. 12-0025-UT) ' CONTRACT DOCUMENTS & SPECIFICATIONS 1 � Prepared for LL ° Clear Water 1 1 BID DOCUMENTS OCTOBER 2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ADDENDUM NO. 1 2 for 3 NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION 4 Project Number 12- 0025 -UT 5 6 DATE: November 24, 2014 7 8 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 1 9 10 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned 11 12 13 Bidders on this project are hereby notified that Addendum No. 1 shall be attached to and made 14 part of the above -named Bid Documents, dated October 2014. 15 16 The following items are issued to add to, modify, and clarify the Bid Documents. These items 17 shall have full force and effect as the Bid Documents, and the cost involved shall be included in 18 the various prices bid. Bids, to be submitted on the specified bid date, shall conform to the 19 additions and revisions listed herein. 20 21 Responses to Bidder's Questions 22 23 QUESTION 1: Bid form item 1A indicates Clarifiers 5 — 8 to be ODP items. The 24 measurement and payment item 1A indicates the Clarifiers and RAS pumps are to be ODP. 25 The measurement and payment item 2 indicates payment for the RAS pumps and motors are 26 it item 2. What is to be included in bid item lA to be considered as an ODP item? 27 28 RESPONSE 1: Bid Item 1A should include the clarifier mechanical equipment and 29 the two RAS pumps in accordance with Section 01150 3.01 A. 30 31 QUESTION 2: The spec calls for the Square D VFDs to be provided by the pump vendor. 32 Are the VFDs also to be an ODP item? 33 34 RESPONSE 2: The VFDs are not an ODP item. The VFDs do not have to be 35 furnished by the pump vendor. 36 37 QUESTION 3: Spec section 09900 -8 has a requirement for painting galvanized submerged 38 metals. Spec section 09900 -24 has a paint schedule that does not include the galvanized 39 clarifier mechanisms. Do the 4 new galvanized clarifiers get painted? Is the paint schedule 40 complete? 41 42 RESPONSE 3: The galvanized clarifier mechanisms do not get painted. The paint 43 schedule at the end of Section 09900 is complete. Item F of the paint schedule 44 applies to the interior of the RAS Pump Equipment Buildings. No exterior painting of 45 the RAS Pump Equipment Buildings is intended. 46 Page 1 of 5 Addendum Nol November 24, 2014 I QUESTION 4: Section III item 13 has the contractor paying for the testing lab. Section 2 IVA 01005 -7 says the owner will pay for the testing lab costs. Spec 01410 says the 3 contractor to pay for the testing lab. Who will pay for the testing lab services? 4 5 RESPONSE 4: The Contractor shall pay for the testing lab services. 6 7 QUESTION 5: Spec section 11310 indicates 2 new pumps at the North RAS building and 2 8 new pumps at the South RAS building. Is this correct? 9 10 RESPONSE 5: Only the two RAS pumps in the South RAS pump building are being 11 replaced as indicated in Specification Section 11310 Part 1, 1.01 B. 12 13 QUESTION 6: On drawing NES -62 we are to replace 4 drain valves approximately 15' 14 deep. Are there any buried utility conflicts in these 4 areas such as existing electrical 15 conduits, water lines, additional utility lines, etc.? If yes can you provide as -built drawings 16 of these areas showing these conflicts to quantify these excavations? 17 18 RESPONSE 6: Electronic Copies of the drawings from the initial construction of 19 Clarifiers 5 -8 and the South RAS Pump Equipment Building have been made 20 available to registered plan holders at the Jiffy Plan Room through a link on the City 21 website: http:// www. mvclearwater. com/ apps20/ cityproiects /invitationtobid.aspx. 22 Others may contact cathv.tefftCc�mvclearwater.com. 23 24 QUESTION 7: Does the submerged piping at the North & South RAS Building require to 25 be painted? 26 27 RESPONSE 7: No 28 29 QUESTION 8: The Clarifier equipment calls to be galvanized. Does the galvanized 30 clarifiers get coated? 31 32 RESPONSE 8: See response to Question 3. 33 34 IN THE SPECIFICATIONS 35 36 1. APPENDIX — PAGE i 37 38 CHANGE the text under the heading PROJECT PERMITS to read as follows: 39 40 The Owner has obtained the City of Clearwater Building Department Permit for this 41 project. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all other City of Clearwater 42 Permits and Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from Any Non - 43 Contaminated Site Activity as applicable. 44 45 2. APPENDIX — PAGE WITH THE HEADING PROJECT PERMITS 46 Page 2 of 5 Addendum Nol November 24, 2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CHANGE The text on this page to read as follows: 2 3 The Owner has obtained the City of Clearwater Building Department Permit for this 4 project. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all other City of Clearwater 5 Permits and Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from Any Non - 6 Contaminated Site Activity as applicable. 7 8 3. SECTION IV — SECTION 1.1, PAGE 1 of 134 9 10 CHANGE the words "all eight clarifiers." in the second sentence of the paragraph titled 11 Restriction for this Project to read as follows: 12 13 "Clarifiers 5 thru 8, ". 14 15 4. SECTION IVA — SECTION 01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 16 17 CHANGE the word "Owner" to "Contractor" on Line 18 of Part 1.04 B. on page 01005 -7 18 19 5. SECTION IVA — SECTION 01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 20 21 CHANGE the words "without cost to the Contractor" to "at the Contractor's expense" on 22 Line 19 of Part 1.04 B. on page 01005 -7 23 24 6. SECTION IVA — SECTION 13615 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND 25 EQUIPMENT 26 27 CHANGE Lines 23 and 24 Part 2.03 A. on page 13615 -6 to read as follows: 28 29 The Sludge blanket level system shall be the EchoSmart Interface Level Analyzer. In 30 order to maintain consistency with existing equipment, substitutions will not be 31 considered by the City. 32 33 7. SECTION IVA — SECTION 16775 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 34 35 CHANGE the word "DeviceNet" to the word "Ethernet" on page 16775 -1, Part 1.02 B. 36 4, Line 40. 37 38 8. SECTION IVA — SECTION 16775 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 39 40 ADD the following to PART 1 - GENERAL on page 16775 -2: 41 42 1.06 SPARE PARTS 43 44 A. Spare cards for the RAS VFDs shall be provided as follows: 45 46 1. One spare Ethernet IP card. Page 3 of 5 Addendum Nol November 24, 2014 1 2. One spare Water Solutions multi pump card. 2 3. One spare VFD drive card as applicable. 3 4 B. Spare cards for the WAS VFDs shall be provided as follows: 5 6 1. One spare Ethernet IP card. 7 2. One spare Water Solutions multi pump card. 8 3. One spare VFD drive card as applicable. 9 10 9. SECTION IVA — SECTION 16775 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 11 12 DELETE the first sentence of Specification Section 16775 1.02 A. 13 14 10. SECTION IVA — SECTION 16775 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 15 16 DELETE the words "regardless of which pump manufacturer supplies the VFD" from 17 the second sentence of Specification Section 16775 1.02 A. 18 19 20 IN THE DRAWINGS 21 22 1. SHEET NES - E0.1 NORTHEAST WRF (SOUTH) ELEC. SYMBOLS LEGEND & 23 GENERAL NOTES 24 25 DELETE the existing drawing and ADD the attached drawing. 26 27 2. SHEET NES - E1.0 NORTHEAST WRF RAS PUMP BLDG. (SOUTH) 28 ELECTRICAL PLANS 29 30 DELETE the existing drawing and ADD the attached drawing. 31 32 3. SHEET NES - E2.0 NORTHEAST PLANT CLARIFIERS 5, 6, 7 & 8 - 33 ELECTRICAL PLAN 34 35 DELETE the existing drawing and ADD the attached drawing. 36 37 4. SHEET NES - E3.0 NORTHEAST WRF RAS PUMP BLDG. (SOUTH) PWR. 38 ONE -LINE DIA. (TEMP.) 39 40 DELETE the existing drawing and ADD the attached drawing. 41 42 5. SHEET NES - E4.0 NORTHEAST WRF RAS PUMP BLDG. (SOUTH) PWR. 43 ONE -LINE DIA. (NEW CON) 44 45 DELETE the existing drawing and ADD the attached drawing. 46 Page 4 of 5 Addendum Nol November 24, 2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 6. SHEET NES - E5.0 NORTHEAST WRF RAS PUMP BLDG. (SOUTH) PANEL 2 SCHEDULES 3 4 DELETE the existing drawing and ADD the attached drawing 5 6 7 8 9 10 END OF ADDENDUM NO.1 11 12 13 THE CITY OF CLEARWATER 14 PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA 15 By: /s/William B. Horne, II 16 City Manager 17 18 Page 5 of 5 Addendum Nol November 24, 2014 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ADDENDUM NO.2 2 for 3 NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION 4 Project Number 12- 0025 -UT 5 6 DATE: December 1, 2014 7 8 SUBJECT: Addendum No. 2 9 10 TO: Prospective Bidders and Others Concerned 11 12 13 Bidders on this project are hereby notified that Addendum No. 2 shall be attached to and made 14 part of the above -named Bid Documents, dated October 2014. 15 16 The following items are issued to add to, modify, and clarify the Bid Documents. These items 17 shall have full force and effect as the Bid Documents, and the cost involved shall be included in 18 the various prices bid. Bids, to be submitted on the specified bid date, shall conform to the 19 additions and revisions listed herein. 20 21 Responses to Bidder's Questions 22 23 QUESTION 1: Sheet NEN -67 calls for the Northwest corner of the Sludge Well to be 24 Injection Grouted prior to painting. Are the interior of the Sludge Wells being painted? If 25 so, please provide detailed drawings of the Sludge Well. Also, please provide lineal footage 26 of cracks to be repaired for pricing. 27 28 RESPONSE 1: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 29 30 QUESTION 2: Sheet D -1 shows the Details for the new Spray Water system to be 31 installed. Is the schedule 80 PVC piping being painted? If so, it is not in the paint schedule. 32 33 RESPONSE 2: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 34 35 QUESTION 3: Are site visits available for a subcontractor to come out? 36 37 RESPONSE 3: Yes. Please make arrangements with the lead operator Jeff Borden 38 at 727 - 224 -7682. 39 40 QUESTION 4: The plans show an existing splice box at the existing MCC feeder. We 41 could not locate one. Should we include installing a splice box in the existing feeder 42 conduit? 43 44 RESPONSE 4: See Note 8 on Sheet NES E1.0 45 Page 1 Addendum No. 2 December 1, 2014 1 QUESTION 5: How long can the MCC feeder be de- energized while the temporary splice 2 to the temporary power panel is installed? 3 4 RESPONSE 5: See Item 1 under the IN THE SPECIFICATIONS Section below. 5 6 QUESTION 6: Are the concrete embedded portion of the existing RAS feeder conduits 7 required to be replaced? 8 9 RESPONSE 6: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 10 11 QUESTION 7: Are the (2) existing RAS Flowmatcher panels for the existing RAS breaks? 12 If so, can they be removed so the new RAS VFD's can be installed? 13 14 RESPONSE 7: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 15 16 QUESTION 8: The plans show to relocate the existing breaker panels R8 and L8 and 17 associated transformer. They do not appear to be in the way of the new WAS VFD's. Do 18 they have to be relocated? 19 20 RESPONSE 8: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 21 22 QUESTION 9: Can you provide some insight on a suggested basic sequence on the 23 progression from transitioning from the existing electrical gear to the new gear? We are 24 aware that a temporary 480v MDP and L8 and Clarifier starters will be installed and wired, 25 but without be able to remove the RAS VFD's and controls, there is no way to install the new 26 RAS and WAS VFD's. 27 28 RESPONSE 9: The drawings and specifications identify the work as issued. 29 30 31 IN THE SPECIFICATIONS 32 33 1. SPECIFICATION SECTION 01014 34 35 ADD The following new section to 1.04 Paragraph 1.04 B .1 36 37 " e. The contractor will be allowed not more than 1/2 hour to make the temporary 38 splice shown on NES -E3.0" 39 40 41 ON THE DRAWINGS 42 43 1. SHEET NE -I1 44 Page 2 Addendum No. 2 December 1, 2014 1 CHANGE the note inside Clarifier 7 to read "Sludge Blanket Level el Transmitter for 2 Clarifiers 5 thru 8" 13 4 2. SHEET NE -I1 5 6 7 DELETE the note directly below Clarifier 7. 8 I10 END OF ADDENDUM NO. 2 11 I12 13 THE CITY OF CLEARWATER 14 PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA 15 By: /s /William B. Horne, H l 6 City Manager 17 18 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Page 3 Addendum No. 2 December 1, 2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 City of Clearwater, Florida CLARIFIER REHABILITATION (13- 0025 -UT) Northeast WRF Clarifiers 5 -8 Rehabilitation SECTION I SECTION II SECTION III SECTION IIIA SECTION IV SECTION IVA APPENDIX SECTION V TABLE OF CONTENTS ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS GENERAL CONDITIONS SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Prepared in the Office of the City Engineer 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION I ADVERTISEMENT OF BIDS & NOTICE TO CONTRACTORS NORTHEAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION PROJECT CONTRACT #12- 0025 -UT CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Copies of the Contract Documents and Plans for this Project are available for inspection and/or purchase by prospective bidders at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room - website address: www .myClearwater.com /cityprojects, ON THURSDAY, OCTOBER 30, 2014, until no later than close of business three (3) days preceding the bid opening. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the website, reflects reproduction cost only. The work for which proposals are invited consists of the rehabilitation of four existing circular clarifiers (5-8) at the Northeast Water Reclamation Facility, including miscellaneous improvements to clarifiers 1 -4 and to the South and North RAS pump houses. MANDATORY Pre -Bid Conference for all prospective bidders will be held on THURSDAY, NOVEMBER 13, 2014, at 2:00 P.M., at the Municipal Services Building, Conference Room 130, Clearwater, Florida, 33756. Representatives of the Owner and Consulting Engineer will be present to discuss this Project. Sealed proposals will be received by the Purchasing Manager, at the Purchasing Office, located at the Municipal Services Bldg., 100 S. Myrtle Ave., 3rd Floor, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520, until 2:30 P.M. on THURSDAY, DECEMBER 4, 2014. The bids will be publicly opened in Purchasing Conference Room 342 and read at that hour and place for NORTHEAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION PROJECT CONTRACT #12- 0025 -UT. A complete bidders package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and proposal form is available to the general public (Contractors, Sub - contractors, suppliers, vendors, etc.) for review and purchase. However, sealed proposals will only be accepted from those Contractors that are currently City pre - qualified Contractors in the construction category of Wastewater/Water Treatment Facilities with a minimum pre - qualification amount of $1,500,000. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid this project must do so two (2) weeks /ten (10) workdays prior to the bid opening date. A 10% bid bond is required for all City of Clearwater projects. The right is reserved by the City Manager of the City of Clearwater, Florida to reject any or all bids. The City of Clearwater, Florida Alyce Benge, Purchasing Manager (727) 562-4633 Sectionl.docx Page 1 of 1 8/12/2014 SECTION II INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS Table of Contents: 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 1 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 1 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 2 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 3 6 CONTRACT TIME 3 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 3 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 3 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 3 10 BID/PROPOSAL FORM 4 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 4 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 5 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 5 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 5 15 OPENING OF BIDS 5 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 5 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS/VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 6 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 7 19 BID PROTEST 8 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 9 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 9 SectionIl.docx i 7/29/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 11— Instructions to Bidders 1 COPIES OF BIDDING DOCUMENTS 1.1 Complete sets of the Bidding Documents are available at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address: www.myclearwater.com /cityprojects. Price of Contract Documents and Plans, as indicated on the City's Website, reflects reproduction costs only, which is non - refundable. A complete bidder's package containing plans, specifications, bond forms, contract form, affidavits and bid /proposal form is available only to pre - qualified bidders. Contractors, suppliers, or others who are not pre - qualified but who may be a possible subcontractor, supplier, or other interested person may purchase a "Subcontractor" package consisting of plans, specifications, and list of pay items. 1.2 Complete sets of Bidding Documents must be used in preparing bids. Neither the City nor the Engineer shall be liable for errors or misinterpretations resulting from the use of incomplete sets of Bidding Documents, by Bidders, sub - bidders or others. 1.3 The City, in making copies of Bidding Documents available on the above terms, does so only for the purpose of obtaining Bids on the Work and does not confer a license or grant any other permission to use the documents for any other purpose. 2 QUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS 2.1 Each prospective Bidder must pre - qualify to demonstrate, to the complete satisfaction of the City of Clearwater, that the Bidder has the necessary facilities, equipment, ability, financial resources and experience to perform the work in a satisfactory manner before obtaining drawings, specifications and contract documents. An application package for pre - qualification may be obtained by contacting the City of Clearwater, Engineering Department, P.O. Box 4748, Clearwater, Florida 33758 -4748 (mailing address); 100 South Myrtle Avenue, Clearwater, Florida 33756 -5520 (street address only) or by phone at (727) 562 -4750. Pre - Qualification requirements information is also available on City of Clearwater Website at address: www. myclearwater. com/ gov/ depts/ pwa/ engin/Construction/prequal.asp. Contractors wanting to pre - qualify to bid on a project as a General Contractor must do so two weeks (ten work days) prior to the bid opening date. Bidders currently pre - qualified by the City do not have to make reapplication. 3 EXAMINATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND SITE 3.1 It is the responsibility of each Bidder, before submitting a Bid, to (a) examine the Contract Documents thoroughly; (b) visit the site to become familiar with local conditions that may in any manner affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing of the work; (c) consider and abide by all applicable federal, state and local laws, ordinances, rules and regulations; and (d) study and carefully correlate Bidder's observations with the Contract Documents, and notify Engineer of all conflicts, errors or discrepancies in the Contract Documents. 3.2 In reference to the Technical Specifications and/or the Scope of the Work for identification of those reports of explorations and tests of subsurface conditions at the site which have been utilized by the Engineer in the preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such reports but not upon non - technical data, interpretations or opinions contained therein or for the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. In reference to those drawings relating to physical Sectionll.docx Page 1 of 9 7/29/2013 Section 11— Instructions to Bidders conditions of existing surface and subsurface conditions (except Underground Facilities) which are at or contiguous to the site and which have been utilized by the Engineer in preparation of the Contract Documents, bidder may rely upon the accuracy of the technical data contained in such drawings but not upon the completeness thereof for the purposes of bidding or construction. 3.3 Information and data reflected in the Contract Documents with respect to Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site are based upon information and data furnished to the City and Engineer by owners of such Underground Facilities or others, and the City does not assume responsibility for the accuracy or completeness thereof unless expressly provided in the Contract Documents. 3.4 Provisions concerning responsibilities for the adequacy of data furnished to prospective Bidders on subsurface conditions, Underground Facilities, other physical conditions, possible conditions, and possible changes in the Contract Documents due to differing conditions appear in the General Conditions. 3.5 Before submitting a Bid, each Bidder shall, at Bidder's own expense, make or obtain any additional examinations, investigations, explorations, tests and studies and obtain any additional information and data which pertain to the physical conditions (surface, subsurface and Underground Facilities) at or contiguous to the site or otherwise which may affect cost, progress, performance or furnishing the work in accordance with the time, price and other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents. 3.6 On request in advance, City will provide each Bidder access to the site to conduct such explorations and tests at Bidder's own expense as each Bidder deems necessary for submission of a Bid. Bidder shall fill all holes and clean up and restore the site to its former condition upon completion of such explorations and tests. 3.7 The lands upon which the Work is to be performed, rights -of -way and easements for access thereto and other lands designated for use by the Contractor in performing the Work are identified in the Contract Documents. All additional lands and access thereto required for temporary construction facilities or storage of materials and equipment are to be provided by the Contractor. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing structures are to be obtained and paid for by the City unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 3.8 The submission of a Bid will constitute an unequivocal representation by the Bidder that the Bidder has complied with every requirement of these Instructions to Bidders and that, without exception, the Bid is premised upon performing and furnishing the Work required by the Contract Documents by such means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction as may be indicated in or required by the Contract Documents, and that the Contract Documents are sufficient in scope and detail to indicate and convey understanding of all terms and conditions of performance and furnishing of the work. 4 INTERPRETATIONS AND ADDENDA 4.1 All questions as to the meaning or intent of the Contract Documents are to be directed to the Engineer. Interpretations or clarifications considered necessary by the Engineer in response to such questions will be issued by Addenda, by the City's planroom to all parties recorded by the City's planroom as planholders having received the Bidding Documents. Questions received after the time frame specified at the pre -bid meeting prior to the date for opening of Sectionll.docx Page 2 of 9 7/29/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 11— Instructions to Bidders Bids may not be answered. Only information provided by formal written Addenda will be binding. Oral and other interpretations of clarifications will be without legal effect. 4.2 Addenda may also be issued to modify the Bidding Documents as deemed advisable by the City or Engineer. 5 BID SECURITY OR BID BOND 5.1 Each Bid must be accompanied by Bid Security made payable to the City of Clearwater in an amount equal to ten percent (10 %) of the Bidder's maximum Bid price and in the form of a certified or cashier's check or a Bid Bond (on form attached) issued by a surety meeting the requirements of the General Conditions. A cash bid bond will not be accepted. 5.2 The Bid Security of the Successful Bidder will be retained until such Bidder has executed the Agreement and furnished the required Payment and Performance bonds, whereupon the Bid Security will be returned. If the Successful Bidder fails to execute, deliver the Agreement and furnish the required Bonds within ten (10) days after the award of contract by the City Council, the City may annul the bid and the Bid Security of the Bidder will be forfeited. The Bid Security of any Bidder whom the City believes to have a reasonable chance of receiving the award may be retained by the City until the successful execution of the agreement with the successful Bidder or for a period up to ninety (90) days following bid opening. Security of other Bidders will be returned approximately fourteen (14) days after the Bid opening. 5.3 The Bid Bond shall be issued in the favor of the City of Clearwater by a surety company qualified to do business in, and having a registered agent in the State of Florida. 6 CONTRACT TIME 6.1 The number of consecutive calendar days within which the work is to be completed is set forth in the Technical Specifications. 7 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 7.1 Provisions for liquidated damages are set forth in the Contract Agreement. 8 SUBSTITUTE MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8.1 The contract, if awarded, will be on the basis of material and equipment described in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications without consideration of possible substitute or "or equal" items. Whenever it is indicated in the Drawings or specified in the Specifications that a substitute or "or equal" item may be furnished or used, application for its acceptance will not be considered by the Engineer until after the effective date of the Contract Agreement. The procedure for submittal of any such application is described in the General Conditions and as supplemented in the Technical Specifications. 9 SUBCONTRACTORS 9.1 If requested by the City or Engineer, the Successful Bidder, and any other Bidder so requested, shall, within seven (7) days after the date of the request, submit to the Engineer an experience statement with pertinent information as to similar projects and other evidence of qualification for each Subcontractor, supplier, person and organization to be used by the Sectionll.docx Page 3 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders Contractor in the completion of the Work. The amount of subcontract work shall not exceed fifty percent (50 %) of the Work except as may be specifically approved by the Engineer. If the Engineer, after due investigation, has reasonable objection to any proposed Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization, he may, before recommending award of the Contract to the City Council, request the Successful Bidder to submit an acceptable substitute without an increase in Contract Price or Contract Time. If the Successful Bidder declines to make any such substitution, the City may award the contract to the next lowest and most responsive Bidder that proposes to use acceptable Subcontractors, Suppliers, and other persons and organizations. Declining to make requested substitutions will not constitute grounds for sacrificing the Bid security to the City of any Bidder. Any Subcontractor, supplier, other person or organization listed by the Contractor and to whom the Engineer does not make written objection prior to the recommendation of award to the City Council will be deemed acceptable to the City subject to revocation of such acceptance after the Effective Date of the Contract Agreement as provided in the General Conditions. 9.2 No Contractor shall be required to employ any Subcontractor, supplier, person or organization against whom he has reasonable objection. 10 BID /PROPOSAL FORM 10.1 The Bid/Proposal Form is included with the Contract Documents and shall be completed in ink or by typewriter. All blanks on the Bid/Proposal Forms must be completed. Unit Prices shall be to no more than two decimal points in dollars and cents. The Bidder must state in the Bid/Proposal Form in words and numerals without delineation's, alterations or erasures, the price for which he will perform the work as required by the Contract Documents. Bidders are required to bid on all items in the Bid/Proposal form. The lump sum for each section or item shall be for furnishing all equipment, materials, and labor for completing the section or item as per the plans and contract specifications. Should it be found that quantities or amounts shown on the plans or in the proposal, for any part of the work, are exceeded or should they be found to be less after the actual construction of the work, the amount bid for each section or item will be increased or decreased in direct proportion to the unit prices bid for the listed individual items. 10.2 Bids by corporations shall be executed in the corporate name by the president or a vice - president (or other corporate officer accompanied by evidence of authority to sign) and the corporate seal shall be affixed. The corporate address and state of incorporation shall be shown below the Signature. If requested, the person signing a Bid for a corporation or partnership shall produce evidence satisfactory to the City of the person's authority to bind the corporation or partnership. 10.3 Bids by partnerships shall be executed in the partnership name and signed by a general partner, whose title shall appear under the signature and the official address of the partnership shall be shown below the signature. 10.4 All names shall be typed or printed below the signature. 11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS 11.1 Sealed Bids shall be submitted at or before the time and at the place indicated in the Advertisement for Bids and shall be submitted in a 8.5 "x11" manila envelope with the project name and number on the bottom left hand corner. If forwarded by mail, the Bid shall be enclosed in another envelope with the notation "Bid Enclosed" on the face thereof and Sectionll.docx Page 4 of 9 7/29/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 11— Instructions to Bidders addressed to the City of Clearwater, attention Purchasing Manager. Bids will be received at the office indicated in the Advertisement until the time and date specified. Telegraphic or facsimile bids received by the Purchasing Manager will not be accepted. 12 MODIFICATION AND WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS 12.1 Bids may be modified or withdrawn by an appropriate document duly executed (in the manner that a Bid must be executed) and delivered as described in the Advertisement of Bids. A request for withdrawal or a modification shall be in writing and signed by a person duly authorized to do so. Withdrawal of a Bid will not prejudice the rights of a Bidder to submit a new Bid prior to the Bid Date and Time. After expiration of the period for receiving Bids, no Bid may be withdrawn or modified. 12.2 After a bid is received by the City, the bidder may request to modify the bid for typographical or scrivener's errors only. The bidder must state in writing to the City that a typographical or scrivener's error has been made by the bidder, the nature of the error, the requested correction of the error, and what the adjusted bid amount will be if the correction is accepted by the City. The City reserves the right at its sole discretion to accept, reject, or modify any bid. 13 REJECTION OF BIDS 13.1 To the extent permitted by applicable State and Federal laws and regulations, the City reserves the right to reject any and all Bids, and to waive any and all informalities. Grounds for the rejection of a bid include but are not limited to a material omission, unauthorized alteration of form, unauthorized alternate bids, incomplete or unbalanced unit prices, or irregularities of any kind. Also, the City reserves the right to reject any Bid if the City believes that it would not be in the best interest of the public to make an award to that Bidder, whether because the Bid is not responsive or the Bidder is unqualified or of doubtful financial ability or fails to meet any other pertinent standard or criteria established by the City. The City reserves the right to decide which bid is deemed to be the lowest and best in the interest of the public. 14 DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDER 14.1 Any or all bids will be rejected if there is any reason for believing that collusion exists among the bidders, the participants in such collusion will not be considered in future proposals for the same work. Each bidder shall execute the Non - Collusion Affidavit contained in the Contract Documents. 15 OPENING OF BIDS 15.1 Bids will be opened and read publicly at the location and time stated in the Advertisement for Bids. Bidders are invited to be present at the opening of bids. 16 LICENSES, PERMITS, ROYALTY FEES AND TAXES 16.1 The Contractor shall secure all licenses and permits (and shall pay all permit fees) except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The Contractor shall comply with all Federal and State Laws, County and Municipal Ordinances and regulations, which in any manner effect the prosecution of the work. City of Clearwater building permit fees SectionIl.docx Page 5 of 9 7/29/2013 Section 11— Instructions to Bidders and impact fees will be waived except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. 16.2 The Contractor shall assume all liability for the payment of royalty fees due to the use of any construction or operation process, which is protected by patent rights except as specifically stated otherwise in the Technical Specifications. The amount of royalty fee, if any, shall be stated by the Contractor. 16.3 The Contractor shall pay all applicable sales, consumer, use and other taxes required by law. The Contractor is responsible for reviewing the pertinent State Statutes involving the sales tax and sales tax exemptions and complying with all requirements. 16.4 The City of Clearwater is exempt from state sales tax on materials incorporated into the WORK. The City of Clearwater reserves the right to implement the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Scope of Work Description in Section IV — Technical Specifications and as defined in Section III — General Conditions. 17 IDENTICAL TIE BIDS /VENDOR DRUG FREE WORKPLACE 17.1 In accordance with the requirements of Section 287.087 Florida Statutes regarding a Vendor Drug Free Workplace, in the event of identical tie bids, preference shall be given to bidders with drug -free workplace programs. Whenever two or more bids which are equal with respect to price, quality, and service are received by the City for the procurement of commodities or contractual services, a bid received from a business that certifies that it has implemented a drug -free workplace program shall be given preference in the award process. Established procedures for processing tie bids will be followed if none or all of the tied bidders have a drug -free workplace program. In order to have a drug -free workplace program, a contractor shall supply the City with a certificate containing the following six statements and the accompanying certification statement: (1) Publish a statement notifying employees that the unlawful manufacture, distribution, dispensing, possession, or use of a controlled substance is prohibited in the workplace and specifying the actions that will be taken against employees for violations of such prohibition. (2) Inform employees as to the dangers of drug abuse in the workplace, the business's policy of maintaining a drug -free workplace, any available drug counseling, rehabilitation, and employee assistance programs, and the penalties that may be imposed upon employees for drug abuse violations. Give each employee engaged in providing the commodities or contractual services that are under bid a copy of the statement specified in subsection (1). (4) In the statement specified in subsection (1), notify the employees that, as a condition of working on the commodities or contractual services that are under bid, the employee will abide by the terms of the statement and will notify the employer of any conviction of, or plea of guilty or nolo contendere to, any violation of chapter 893, or of any controlled substance law, of the United States, or of any state, for a violation occurring in the workplace no later than five (5) days after such conviction. (3) SectionlI.docx Page 6 of 9 7/29/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section II — Instructions to Bidders (5) Impose a sanction on, or require the satisfactory participation in a drug abuse assistance or rehabilitation program if such is available in the employee's community, by any employee who is so convicted. (6) Make a good faith effort to continue to maintain a drug -free workplace through implementation of this section. I certify that this firm does /does not (select only one) fully comply with the above requirements. 18 AWARD OF CONTRACT 18.1 Discrepancies between words and figures will be resolved in favor of words. Discrepancies in the multiplication of units of work and unit prices will be resolved in favor of the unit prices. Discrepancies between the indicated sum of any column of figures and the correct sum thereof will be resolved in favor of the correct sum. 18.2 In evaluating the Bids, the City will consider the qualifications of the Bidders, whether or not the Bids comply with the prescribed requirements, unit prices, and other data as may be requested in the Bid/Proposal form. The City may consider the qualifications and experience of Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for the Work. The City may conduct such investigations as the City deems necessary to assist in the evaluation of any Bid and to establish the responsibility, qualifications and financial ability of Bidders, proposed Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons, and organizations to perform and furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents to the City's satisfaction within the prescribed time. 18.3 If the Contract is to be awarded, it will be awarded to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder whose evaluation by the City indicates to the City that the award will be in the best interest of the City. 18.4 Award of contract will be made for that combination of base bid and alternate bid items in the best interest of the City, however, unless otherwise specified all work awarded will be awarded to only one Contractor. 18.5 The successful bidder /contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statues (2013), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must Sectionll.docx Page 7 of 9 7/29/2013 Section II — Instructions to Bidders be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. 19 BID PROTEST 19.1 RIGHT TO PROTEST: Any actual bidder who is aggrieved in connection with the solicitation or award of a contract may seek resolution of his/her complaints initially with the Purchasing Manager, and if not satisfied, with the City Manager, in accordance with protest procedures set forth in this section. 19.2 PROTEST PROCEDURE: A. A protest with respect to the specifications of an invitation for bid or request for proposal shall be submitted in writing a minimum of five (5) work days prior to the opening of the bid or due date of the request for proposals, unless the aggrieved person could not have been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening or the closing date for proposals. Opening dates for bids or due dates for requests for proposal will be printed on the bid /request document itself. B. Protests in respect to award of contract shall be submitted in writing a maximum of five (5) work days after notice of intent to award is posted, or is mailed to each bidder, whichever is earlier. Notice of intent to award will be forwarded to bidders upon telephonic or written request. Protests of recommended award should cite specific portions of the City of Clearwater Code of Ordinances that have allegedly been violated. C. Exceptions to the five (5) day requirements noted in both A and B above may be granted if the aggrieved person could have not been reasonably expected to have knowledge of the facts giving rise to such protest prior to the bid opening, posting of intent to award, or due date for requests for proposals. Request for exceptions should be made in writing, stating reasons for the exception. D. The Purchasing Manager shall respond to the formal written protest within five (5) work days of receipt. The Purchasing Manager's response will be fully coordinated with the appropriate Department Director and the Assistant City Manager. E. If the protestor is not satisfied with the response from the Purchasing Manager, he /she may then submit in writing within five (5) work days of receipt of that response his/her reason for dissatisfaction, along with copies of his/her original formal protest letter and the response from the Purchasing Manager, to the City Manager. F. The City Manager as Purchasing Agent for the City has the final authority in the matter of protests. The City Manager will respond to the protestor within ten (10) work days of receipt of the appeal. SectionII.docx Page 8 of 9 7/29/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section II — Instructions to Bidders 19.3 PROTEST FEE: When filing a formal protest, the protesting vendor must include a fee in the amount of 5% of the selected vendor's total bid to offset the City's additional expenses related to the protest. This fee shall not exceed $2,500 nor be less than $50. If either the Purchasing Manager or the City Manager upholds the protest, the City will refund 100% of the fee paid. 19.4 STAY OF PROCUREMENT DURING PROTEST: In the event of a timely protest, the Purchasing Manager shall not proceed with the solicitation or award of contract until all administrative remedies have been exhausted or until the City Manager makes written determination that the award of contract without delay is necessary to protect the best interest of the City. 20 TRENCH SAFETY ACT 20.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the City of Clearwater's Ordinance related to trench digging (Ordinance No. 7918 -08) along with the Florida Trench Safety Act (Sections 553.60 - 553.64, Florida Statutes) and the provisions of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration's (OSHA) excavation safety standards, 29 C.F.R.s 1926.650 Subparagraph P, or current revisions of these laws. 21 CONSTRUCTION SITE EROSION AND SEDIMENT CONTROL MANAGEMENT MEASURES 21.1 The Bidder shall comply with the provisions of the Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) National Pollution Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) stormwater permit and implement stormwater pollution prevention plans (SWPPP's) or stormwater management programs (both using best management practices (BMPs) that effectively reduce or prevent the discharge of pollutants into receiving waters. A. The control of construction- related sediment loadings is critical to maintaining water quality. The implementation of proper erosion and sediment control practices during the construction stage can significantly reduce sediment loadings to surface waters. B. Prior to land disturbance, prepare and implement an approved erosion and sediment control plan or similar administrative document that contains erosion and sediment control provisions. NPDES Management Measures available at City of Clearwater Engineering Environmental Division and EPA websites to help address construction- related Best Management Practices. References EPA website SectionIl.docx Page 9 of 9 7/29/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: SECTION III GENERAL CONDITIONS Table of Contents: 1 DEFINITIONS 1 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 5 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE 5 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS 5 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT 5 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION 5 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 6 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS 6 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 7 3.1 INTENT 7 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES 7 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 8 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS 8 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS 8 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES 8 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS 9 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 9 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND 9 5.2 INSURANCE 9 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE 10 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE 10 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY 11 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS 12 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 12 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE 12 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 13 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS 14 6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS 14 6.5 USE OF PREMISES 15 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS 15 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS 15 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES 16 Sectionlll.docxx i 7/7/2014 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS 16 6.8 PERMITS 17 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION 17 6.10 EMERGENCIES 18 6.11 DRAWINGS 18 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW 18 6.11.2 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 19 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 21 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: 23 6.12 CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE 23 6.13 CONTINUING THE WORK 23 6.14 INDEMNIFICATION 24 6.15 CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION 24 7 OTHER WORK 24 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE 24 7.2 COORDINATION 25 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY 25 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 25 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE 25 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS 26 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK 26 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS 26 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES 26 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES 27 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK 28 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 28 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 28 11.2 ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT 30 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK 30 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME 31 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 31 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION 31 13.2 UNCOVERING THE WORK 32 13.3 OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK 32 13.4 CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.5 WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD 33 13.6 ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 33 13.7 OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK 34 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION 34 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT 34 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE 35 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 35 SectionllI.docxx ii 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 14.4 PARTIAL UTILIZATION 36 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION 37 14.6 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 37 14.7 FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE 37 14.8 WAIVER OF CLAIMS 38 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 38 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK 38 15.2 OWNER MAY TERMINATE 38 15.3 CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE 40 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION 40 17 MISCELLANEOUS 40 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS 40 17.2 GIVING NOTICE 40 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM 41 17.4 PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED 41 17.5 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT 41 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION 41 17.7 ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS 41 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 41 19 MATERIAL USED 41 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 42 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) OPTION 42 21.1 SALES TAX SAVINGS 42 21.2 TITLE AND OWNER RISK 42 21.3 CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS 42 21.4 ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION 43 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 44 22.1 GENERAL 44 22.2 EXAMPLE 44 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 45 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE 45 23.2 TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE 45 23.3 FIXED SIGN 45 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS 45 23.5 SIGN COLORING 46 23.6 SIGN PLACEMENT 46 23.7 SIGN MAINTENANCE 46 23.8 TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN 47 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 47 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 48 SectionlIl.docxx iii 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 1 DEFINITIONS Addenda Written or graphic instruments issued prior to the opening of Bids which clarify, correct or change the Bidding Requirements or the contract documents. Agent Architect, engineer or other outside agency, consultant or person acting on behalf of the City. Agreement The written contract between Owner and Contractor covering the Work to be performed; other Contract Documents are attached to the Agreement and made a part thereof as provided therein. Application for Payment The form accepted by Engineer which is to be used by Contractor in requesting progress or final payments and which is to be accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Contract Documents. Approve The word approve is defined to mean satisfactory review of the material, equipment or methods for general compliance with the design concepts and with the information given in the Contract Documents. It does not imply a responsibility on the part of the Engineer to verify in every detail conformance with the Drawings and Specifications. Bid The offer or proposal of the bidder submitted on the prescribed form setting forth the prices for the work to be performed. Bidding Documents The advertisement or invitation to Bid, instructions to bidders, the Bid form, and the proposed Contact Documents (including all Addenda issued prior to receipt of Bids). Bonds Performance and payment bonds and other instruments of security. Change Order A written order to Contractor signed by Owner and Contractor authorizing an addition, deletion or revision in the Work, or an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time issued on or after the effective date of the Agreement. City The City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida. Construction Inspector A person who is the authorized representative of the Construction Manager and inspects City construction projects in order to insure the Contractor's work complies with the intent of the Contract Documents. Construction Manager The person who is typically in responsible charge of City construction projects. The Construction Manager assumes responsibility for the management of construction contracts at the Preconstruction Conference. The Construction Manager chairs the Preconstruction Conference and is the authority on any disputes or decisions regarding Sectionlll.docxx Page 1 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111— General Conditions contract administration and performance. The Construction Manager typically acts as the Owner's Representative during construction. Contract Documents The Agreement, Addenda (which pertain to the Contract Documents), Contractor's Bid (including documentation accompanying the bid and any post -Bid documentation submitted prior to the execution of the Agreement) when attached as an exhibit to the Agreement, the Bonds, Instructions to Bidders, these General Conditions, any Supplementary Conditions, the Specifications and the Drawings, any other exhibits identified in the Agreement, together with all Modifications issued after the execution of the Agreement. Contract Price The Contract price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable by Owner to Contractor for performing the Work. Contract Time The number of days or the date stated in the Agreement for the completion of the Work. Contractor The Person with whom the Owner has entered into the Agreement. For the purposes of this contract, the person, firm or corporation with whom this contract or agreement has been made by the City of Clearwater or its duly authorized representative. Critical Path Method Construction Schedule —CPM A graphic format construction schedule that displays construction activities as they relate to one another for the purpose of identifying the most efficient way to perform the work in a timely manner. The critical path identifies which activity is critical to the execution of the schedule. Day A calendar day of twenty -four (24) hours measured from midnight to the next midnight. Defective An adjective which when modifying the word Work refers to Work that is unsatisfactory, faulty or deficient, or does not conform to the Contract Documents or does not meet the requirements of any inspection, reference standard, test or approval referred to in the Contract Documents, or has been damaged prior to Engineers recommendation of final payment. Drawings The drawings, which will be identified in Technical Specifications or the Agreement, which show the character and scope of the Work to be performed and which have been prepared or approved by Engineer and are referred to in the contract documents. Shop drawings are not Drawings as so defined. Engineer The duly appointed representative of the City Manager of the City of Clearwater. For the purposes of this contract, the City Engineer of the City of Clearwater, Pinellas County, Florida, or his authorized representative. For certain projects, the Engineer may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Engineer's Consultant A Person having a contract with Engineer to furnish services as Engineer's independent SectionlII.docxx Page 2 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions professional associate or consultant with respect to the Project and who is identified as such in the Supplementary Conditions. F.D.O.T Specifications The Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction as issued by the Florida Department of Transportation (latest English edition). Furnish The words "furnish ", "furnish and install ", "install ", and "provide" or words of similar meaning shall be interpreted, unless otherwise specifically stated, to mean "furnish and install complete in place and ready for service ". Inspection The term "inspection" and the act of inspecting means examination of construction to ensure that it conforms to the design concept expressed in the Drawings and Specifications. These terms shall not be construed to mean supervision, superintending or overseeing. Laws and Regulations Any and all applicable laws, rules, regulations, ordinances, codes and orders of any kind of governmental bodies, agencies, authorities and courts having jurisdiction. Liens Liens, charges, security interests or encumbrances upon real property or personal property. Milestone A principal event specified in the contract Documents relating to an intermediate completion date or time prior to the final completion date. Notice to Proceed (NTP) A written notice given by the Owner to the Contractor fixing the date on which the Contract Time will commence to run and on which Contractor shall start to perform his obligations under the Contract Documents. Owner The City of Clearwater, Florida. For the purposes of this contract, the person who is the City's authorized representative from the City's Department with whom will be responsible for the maintenance and operation of the Work once the Work is completed. For certain projects, a designee of the Owner may serve as the Owner's Representative during construction. Owner's Representative Designee of the Owner with authority to act on behalf of the Owner during construction. Person A natural person, or a corporation, partnership, firm, organization, or other artificial entity. Project The total construction of which the Work to be provided under the Contract Documents may be the whole or a part as indicated elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Sectionlll.docxx Page 3 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111— General Conditions Partial Utilization Use by Owner of a substantially completed part of the Work for the purpose for which is intended (or a related purpose) prior to Final Completion of all the Work. Representative of Contractor The Contractor shall assign a responsible person or persons, one of whom shall be at the construction site at all times that work is progressing. The names and positions of these persons shall be submitted to the City Engineer at the time of the pre- construction conference. This person or persons shall not be changed without written approval of City Engineer. Request for Information (RFI) An official written request for clarification of the intent of the contract documents from the Contractor to the Engineer. Shop Drawing All drawings, diagrams, illustrations, schedules and other data which are specifically prepared by or for Contractor to illustrate some portion of the Work and all illustrations, brochures, standard schedules, performance charts, instructions, diagrams and other information prepared by a supplier and submitted by Contractor to illustrate material or equipment for some portion of the Work. Specifications Those portions of the Contract Documents consisting of written technical descriptions of materials, equipment, construction systems, standards and workmanship as applied to the Work and certain administrative details applicable thereto. Subcontractor A person having a direct contract with Contractor or with any other Subcontractor for the performance of a part of the Work at the site. Substantial Completion The Work (or a specified part thereof) which has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, as evidenced by Engineer's definitive certificate of Substantial Completion, it is sufficiently complete, in accordance with the Contract documents, so that the Work (or specified part) can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended; or if no such certificate is issued, when the Work is complete and ready for final payment as evidenced by the Engineer's recommendation of final payment. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. Supplementary Conditions The part of the Contract which amends or supplements these General Conditions. Supplier A manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, distributor, material man or vendor having a direct contract with Contractor or with any Subcontractor to furnish materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work by the Contractor. Surety Any person, firm or corporation which is bound with Contractor and which engages to be responsible for Contractor and his acceptable performance of the Work by a Bid, Performance or Payment Bond. Sectionlll.docxx Page 4 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 111— General Conditions Underground Facilities All pipelines, conduits, ducts, cables, wires manholes, vaults, tanks, tunnels or other such facilities or attachments, and any encasements containing such facilities which have been installed underground to furnish any of the following services or materials: electricity, gases, steam, liquid petroleum products, telephone or other communications, cable television, sewage and drainage removal or treatment, traffic or other control systems or water. Unit Price Work Work to be paid for on the basis of unit prices. Work The entire completed construction or the various separately identifiable parts thereof required to be furnished under the Contract Documents. Work includes and is the result of performing or furnishing labor and incorporating materials and equipment into the construction, and performing or furnishing services and furnishing documents, all as required by the Contract Documents. Work Change Directive A written directive to Contractor, issued on or after the Effective Date of the Agreement and signed by the Engineer, ordering an addition, deletion, or revision in the Work, or responding to differing or unforeseen physical conditions under which the Work is to be performed or emergencies. Work Change Directive will not change the Contract Price or Contract Time, but is evidence that the parties expect that the change directed or documented by a Work Change Directive will be incorporated in a subsequently issued Change Order following negotiations by the parties as to its effect, if any, on the Contract Price or Contract Times. 2 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 2.1 DELIVERY OF BONDS AND CERTIFICATES OF INSURANCE When Contractor delivers the executed Agreements to the Owner, Contractor shall also deliver to the Owner such Bonds and Certificates of Insurance as Contractor may be required to furnish by this contract. 2.2 COPIES OF DOCUMENTS Engineer shall furnish to Contractor one (1) copy of Contract Documents for execution. Additional copies will be furnished, upon request, at the cost of reproduction. 2.3 COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME /NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Time will commence on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. Contractor shall start to perform the work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. 2.4 BEFORE STARTING CONSTRUCTION Before undertaking each part of the Work, Contractor shall carefully study and compare the Contract Documents and check and verify pertinent figures shown thereon and all applicable Sectionlll.docxx Page 5 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions field measurements. Contractor shall promptly report in writing to Engineer any conflict, error or discrepancy which Contractor may discover; and shall obtain a written interpretation or clarification from Engineer before proceeding with any work effected thereby; however, Contractor shall not be liable to the Owner for failure to report any conflict, error or discrepancy in the Drawings or Specifications, unless Contractor had actual knowledge thereof or should reasonably have known thereof. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer, Agent or employee of the Owner or Engineer's Consultant, either before or after the execution of this Contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. Contractor shall not commence any work at any time without approved insurance required by these General Conditions. Failure to obtain this insurance will be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 2.5 PRECONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE Within twenty (20) days of Award of Contract and before the start of the Work, the Owner's Representative shall schedule a preconstruction conference to be attended by Contractor, Engineer, Owner and others as appropriate to establish a working understanding among the parties as to the Work and to discuss the schedule of the Work and general Contract procedures. Typically, oversight of the project officially passes from the Engineering Department to the Construction Department at the preconstruction conference. In these cases, the preconstruction conference is run by the Construction Department and chaired by the City's Construction Manager. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the Preconstruction Conference a color Critical Path Method (CPM) Construction Schedule. This is to be a sequence of events including submittal review and procurement. Notice to Proceed is usually established at this conference and such date can be inserted into the schedule at that time. The Contractor shall also bring a Submittal Schedule for review by the Engineer. This is to make sure that the List is complete and this schedule shall be the basis of a Submittal Log. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative at the preconstruction conference a completed Emergency Call List and a completed Authorized Signature List. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a project disk that has all of the necessary data and survey control points for the purpose of construction stakeout and as -built survey. The Owner's Representative shall deliver to the Contractor at the preconstruction conference a Contractor evaluation package. This is for the purpose of rating the Contractor's performance for reference when considering future contracts and bid prequalification. 2.6 PROGRESS MEETINGS The Contractor is required to attend Progress Meetings. These meetings will be scheduled on a weekly, bi- weekly, or monthly basis depending on the needs of the project. The Contractor shall bring to each meeting an updated submittal log, an updated request for information (RFI) log, a look -ahead schedule to cover the project activity from the current meeting to the next meeting, and all material test reports generated in the same time period. Sectionlll.docxx Page 6 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 111 — General Conditions 3 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS, INTENT 3.1 INTENT The Contract Documents comprise the entire Agreement between Owner and the Contractor concerning the Work. They may be altered only by written agreement. The Contract Documents are complementary; what is called for by one is as binding as if called for by all. It is the intent of the Contract Documents to describe a functionally complete project (or part thereof) to be constructed in accordance with the Contract Documents. Any Work, materials or equipment which may reasonably be inferred from the Contract Documents or from prevailing custom or from trade usage as being required to produce the intended result will be furnished and performed whether or not specifically called for. When words or phrases, which have a well - known technical or construction industry or trade meaning, are used to describe Work, materials or equipment, such words or phrases shall be interpreted in accordance with that meaning. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Reference to standards, specifications, manuals or codes of any technical society, organization or association, or to the code, Laws or Regulation of any governmental authority, whether such reference be specific or by implication, shall mean the latest standard specification, manual or code, or Laws or Regulations in effect at the time of opening of Bids except as may be otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents. However, no provision of any referenced standard specification, manual or code, whether or not specially incorporated by reference in the responsibilities of Owner or Contractor as set forth in the Contract Documents, shall change the duties and responsibilities of Owner, Contractor, Engineer or Owner's Representative, or any of their Agents or employees from those set forth in the Contract Documents. Clarifications and interpretations of the Contract shall be issued by the Owner's Representative. Each and every provision of law and clause required by law to be inserted in these Contract documents shall be deemed to be inserted herein, and they shall be read and enforced as through it were included herein, and if through mistake or otherwise, any such provision is not inserted, or if not correctly inserted, then upon the application of either party, the Contract Documents shall forthwith be physically amended to make such insertion. 3.2 REPORTING AND RESOLVING DISCREPANCIES If, during the performance of the Work, Contractor discovers any conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy within the Contract Documents or between the Contract Documents and any provision of any such Law or Regulation applicable to the performance of the Work or of any such standard, specification, manual or code or of any instruction of any Supplier, Contractor shall report it to the Owner's Representative in writing at once, and Contractor shall not proceed with the Work affected thereby (except in an emergency) until an amendment or supplement to Contract Documents has been issued by one of the methods provided in these General Specifications, provided however, that Contractor shall not be liable to Owner, or Owner's Representative for failure to report any such conflict, error, ambiguity or discrepancy unless Contractor knew or reasonably should have known thereof. Sectionlll.docxx Page 7 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 4 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS; SUBSURFACE AND PHYSICAL CONDITIONS; REFERENCE POINTS 4.1 AVAILABILITY OF LANDS The Owner shall furnish, as indicated in the Contract Documents, the lands upon which the Work is to be Performed, rights -of -way, easements for access thereto, and such other lands which are designated for the use of contractor. The Owner shall identify any encumbrances or restrictions not of general application but specifically related to use of lands so furnished with which contractor will have to comply in performing the Work. Easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities will be obtained and paid for by the Owner, unless otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. 4.2 INVESTIGATIONS AND REPORTS Reference is made to the Supplementary Conditions and Technical Specifications for identification of those reports of investigations and tests of subsurface and latent physical conditions at the site or otherwise affecting cost, progress or performance of the Work which have been relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications. Such reports are not guaranteed as to accuracy or completeness and are not part of the Contract Documents. Contractor shall promptly notify the Owner's Representative in writing of any subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site, or in an existing structure, differing materially from those indicated or referred to in the Contract Documents. Engineer will promptly review those conditions and advise if further investigation or tests are necessary. Owner or Engineer shall obtain the necessary additional investigations and tests and furnish copies to the Engineer and Contractor. If Engineer finds that the results of such investigations or tests indicate that there are subsurface or latent physical conditions, which differ materially from those, indicated in the contract Documents, and which could not reasonably have been anticipated by Contractor, a work change or Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions. 4.3 PHYSICAL CONDITIONS, UNDERGROUND FACILITIES The information and data shown or indicated in the Contract Documents with respect to existing Underground Facilities at or contiguous to the site is based on information and data furnished to Owner or Engineer by the owners of such Underground Facilities or by others. Unless otherwise expressly provided in the Contract Documents, Owner and Engineer shall not be responsible for the accuracy or completeness of any such information or data; and the cost of all the following will be included in the Contract Price and contractor shall have full responsibility for: (i) reviewing and checking all such information and data, (ii) locating all Underground Facilities shown or indicated in the Contract Documents, (iii) coordination of the Work with the owners of such Underground Facilities during construction, and (iv) the safety and protection of all such Underground Facilities and repairing any damage thereto resulting from the Work. The Contractor is required to call the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation per State regulations and to notify any utility owners who are not a member of the LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER prior to any excavation. The LOCAL PUBLIC UTILITY NOTIFICATION CENTER is an agency for the protection and location of utilities prior to any excavation and contact number is available in local telephone directory. SectionllI.docxx Page 8 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111 — General Conditions 4.4 REFERENCE POINTS Engineer shall provide engineering surveys to establish reference points for construction, which in Engineer's judgment are necessary to enable Contractor to proceed with the Work. Contractor shall be responsible for laying out the Work, shall protect and preserve the established reference points and shall make no changes or relocations without the prior written approval of the Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall report to Engineer whenever any reference point is lost or destroyed or requires relocation because of necessary changes in grades or locations, and shall be responsible for the accurate replacement or relocation of such reference points by a surveyor licensed in the State of Florida. The Contractor is referred to the Technical Specifications for more specific information regarding the provision of construction surveys. If a City survey crew is assigned to the project and there is excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the Engineer, the Contractor will be charged at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments with a minimum charge of one hour. 5 BONDS AND INSURANCE 5.1 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND /CONTRACT BOND Contractor shall furnish a Performance and Payment Bond in an amount at least equal to the Contract Price as security for the faithful performance and payment of all Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents. This bond shall remain in effect at least one year after the date when final payment becomes due, unless a longer period of time is prescribed by laws and regulations or by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall also furnish such other Bonds as are required by the Supplementary Conditions. All Bonds shall be in the form prescribed by the Contract Documents and shall be executed by such sureties as are named in the current list of "Companies Holding Certificates of Authority as Acceptable Sureties on Federal Bonds and as Acceptable Reinsuring Companies" as published in Circular 570 (amended) by the Audit Staff, Bureau of Government Financial Operations, U.S. Treasury Department. All bonds signed by an agent must be accompanied by a certified copy of such agents' authority to act. All bonds shall be deemed to contain all of the Conditions of Section 255.05, Florida Statutes, even if such language is not directly contained within the bond and the Surety shall be licensed and qualified to do business in the State of Florida. Owner reserves the right to reject any surety. If the Surety on any Bond furnished by the Contractor is declared bankrupt or becomes insolvent or its right to do business is terminated in any state where any part of the Project is located or it ceases to meet the requirements of these Contract Documents, the Contractor shall within five days after notice thereof substitute another Bond and surety, both of which must be acceptable to Owner. 5.2 INSURANCE Contractor shall purchase and maintain such liability and other insurance as is appropriate for the Work being performed and furnished and as will provide protection from claims set forth below which may arise out of or result from Contractor's performance and furnishing of the Work and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents, whether it is to be performed or furnished by Contractor, and Subcontractor or Supplier, or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or by anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable for the following: (i) Claims under worker's compensation, disability benefits and other similar employee benefit acts; (ii) Claims for damages because of bodily Sectionlll.docxx Page 9 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111— General Conditions injury, occupational sickness or disease, or death of Contractor's employees; (iii) Claims for damages because of bodily injury, sickness or disease, or death of any person other than Contractor's employees; (iv) Claims for damages insured by customary personal injury liability coverage which are sustained by any person as a result of an offense directly or indirectly related to the employment of such person by Contractor, or by any other person for any other reason; (v) Claims for damages, other than to the Work itself, because of injury to or destruction of tangible property wherever located, including loss of use resulting therefrom; and (vi) Claims for damages because of bodily injury or death of any person or property damage arising out of the ownership, maintenance or use of any motor vehicle. The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner, with copies to each additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions, certificates of insurance (and other evidence of insurance requested by the Owner or any other additional insured) which Contractor is required to purchase and maintain in accordance with this paragraph. The policies of insurance so required by this paragraph to be purchased and maintained shall: (i) include as additional insured (subject to any customary exclusion in respect of professional liability) Owner of Clearwater and any other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions, all of whom shall be listed as additional insured, and include coverage for the respective officers and employees of all such additional insures; (ii) include completed operations insurance; (iii) include contractual liability insurance covering Contractor's indemnity obligations in Article for Contractor's Responsibilities; (iv) contain a provision or endorsement that the coverage afforded will not be canceled, materially changed or renewal refused until at least thirty days prior written notice has been given to the Owner, and Contractor and to each other additional insured identified in the Supplemental Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued (and the certificates of insurance furnished by the Contractor as described in this paragraph); (v) remain in effect at least until final payment and at all times thereafter when Contractor may be correcting, removing or replacing defective Work in accordance with Article for Correction of Defective Work; (vi) with respect to completed operations insurance, and any insurance coverage written on a claims -made basis, shall remain in effect for at least two years after final payment. Contractor shall furnish the Owner and each other additional insured identified in the Supplementary Conditions to whom a certificate of insurance has been issued evidence satisfactory to the Owner and any such additional insured, of continuation of such insurance at final payment and one year thereafter and (vii) Name and telephone number of the authorized insurance agent for the Insurer. The limits of liability for the insurance required shall provide coverage for not less than the following amounts or greater where required by laws and regulations: 5.2.1 WORKER'S COMPENSATION INSURANCE 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise /Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products /Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Sectionlll.docxx Page 10 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Workers' Compensation Statutory Statutory (2) Employer's Liability $500,000. $1,000,000. 5.2.2 PUBLIC LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE COVERAGE Comprehensive General Liability including Premise /Operations; Explosion, Collapse and Underground Property Damage; Products /Completed Operations, Broad Form Contractual, Independent Contractors; Broad Form Property Damage; and Personal Injury liabilities: Sectionlll.docxx Page 10 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non -owned vehicles: Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (1) Bodily Injury: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate (2) Property Damage: $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate (3) Personal Injury, with employment exclusion deleted $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate $1,000,000. Annual Aggregate 5.2.3 COMPREHENSIVE AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY including all owned (private and others), hired and non -owned vehicles: Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Longshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self - insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. Sectionlll.docxx Page 11 of 51 7/7/2014 Contract Award Amount Under $1,000,000. Contract Award Amount $1,000,000. and Over (I) Bodily Injury $500,000. Each Person $500,000. Each Accident $1,000,000. Each Person $1,000,000. Each Accident (2) Property Damage $500,000. Each Occurrence $1,000,000. Each Occurrence Receipt and acceptance by Owner of the Contractor's Certificate of Insurance, or other similar document does not constitute acceptance or approval of amounts or types of coverages, which may be less than required by these Contract Documents. The Owner shall not be responsible for purchasing and maintaining any property insurance to protect the interests of Contractor, Subcontractors or others in the Work. Owner may at its option require a copy of the Contractor's Insurance Policy(s). All insurance policies required within this Contract Document shall provide full coverage from the first dollar of exposure unless otherwise stipulated. No deductibles will be accepted without prior approval from Owner. Longshore and Harbor Worker's Compensation Act: Section 32 of the Act, 33 U.S.C. 932, requires an employer, with employees in maritime employment, to secure the payment of benefits under the Act either by insuring with an insurance carrier authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor, or to be authorized by the U.S. Department of Labor as a self - insurer. For General Contractors: Section 4(a) of the Act provides that every employer shall be liable for and shall secure the payment to his employees of the compensation payable under Sections 7, 8, and 9 of the Act. In the case of an employer who is a subcontractor, only if such subcontractor fails to secure the payment of compensation shall the contractor be liable for and be required to secure the payment of compensation. Sectionlll.docxx Page 11 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 5.3 WAIVER OF RIGHTS The Owner and Contractor intend that all policies purchased in accordance with Article on Insurance will protect the Owner, Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured in such policies and will provide primary coverage for all losses and damages caused by the perils covered thereby. All such policies shall contain provisions to the effect that in the event of payment of any loss or damage the insurers will have no rights of recovery against any of the insured or additional insured thereunder, the Owner and Contractor waive all rights against each other and their respective officers, directors, employees and agents for all losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from any of the perils covered by such policies and any other property insurance applicable to the work; and, in addition, waive all such rights against Sub - contractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and all other persons or entities identified in the Supplementary Conditions to be listed as insured or additional insured under such policies for losses and damages so caused. None of the above waivers shall extend to the rights that any party making such waiver may have to the proceeds of insurance otherwise payable under any policy so issued. In addition, the Owner waives all rights against Contractor, Subcontractors, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and the officers, directors, employees and agents of any of them for: (i) loss due to business interruption, loss of use or other consequential loss extending beyond direct physical loss or damage to the Owner property or the Work caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other peril, whether or not insured by the Owner and; (ii) loss or damage to the completed Project or part thereof caused by, arising out of or resulting from fire or other insured peril covered by any property insurance maintained on the completed Project or part thereof by the Owner during partial utilization, after substantial completion or after final payment. 6 CONTRACTORS RESPONSIBILITIES 6.1 SUPERVISION AND SUPERINTENDENCE Contractor shall supervise, inspect and direct the Work competently and efficiently, devoting such attention thereto and applying such skills and expertise as may be necessary to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for the means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction. Contractor shall not be responsible for the negligence of others in the design or specification of a specific means, method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction which is shown or indicated in and expressly required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall be responsible to see that the completed work complies accurately with the Contract Documents. Contractor shall keep on the work at all times during its progress a competent resident superintendent, who shall not be replaced without notice to the Owner's Representative except under extraordinary circumstances. The superintendent will be Contractor's representative at the site and shall have authority to act on behalf of Contractor. All communications to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to Contractor. The Contractor's superintendent shall keep a mobile cell phone on his person so he can be contacted whenever necessary. Contractor shall employ only competent persons to do the work and whenever the Owner's Representative shall notify Contractor, in writing, that any person on the work appears to be incompetent, unfaithful, disorderly, or otherwise unsatisfactory, such person shall be removed Sectionlll.docxx Page 12 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions from the project and shall not again be employed on it except with the written consent of the Owner's Representative. Contractor shall reimburse Owner for additional engineering and inspection costs incurred as a result of overtime work in excess of the regular working hours or on the Owner normally approved holidays. At such times when Inspector overtime is required, the Contractor shall sign an overtime slip documenting such hours and the Contractor shall be provided a copy for his records. At the end of the project and prior to payment of withheld retainage funds, the Contractor shall deliver to the Owner a check made out to the Owner of Clearwater for full reimbursement of all Inspector overtime hours. Withheld retainage shall not be released until the Owner has received this check. Minimum number of chargeable hours for inspection costs on weekends or holidays shall be four hours. The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be $60.00 per hour. Contractor shall provide and maintain in a neat and sanitary condition, such sanitary accommodations for the use of Contractor's employees as may be necessary to comply with the requirements of Laws and Regulations and the Engineer. 6.2 LABOR, MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT Contractor shall provide competent, suitably qualified personnel to survey, lay out and construct the work as required by the Contract Documents. Contractor shall at all times maintain good discipline and order at the site. Except as otherwise required for the safety or protection of persons or the work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, and except as otherwise indicated in the Contract Documents, all work at the site shall be performed during regular working hours and Contractor will not permit overtime work or the performance of work on Saturday, Sunday, or any legal holiday without the Owner consent given after prior notice to Engineer. Unless otherwise specified in the General Requirements, Contractor shall furnish and assume full responsibility for all materials, equipment, labor, transportation, construction equipment and machinery, tools, appliances, fuel, power, light, heat, telephone, water, sanitary facilities, temporary facilities, and all other facilities and incidentals necessary for the furnishing, performance, testing, start-up and completion of the Work. All materials and equipment installed in the Work shall be of good quality and new, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If required by Engineer, Contractors shall furnish satisfactory evidence (including reports of required tests) as to the quality of materials and equipment. The Contractor shall provide suitable and secure storage for all materials to be used in the Work so that their quality shall not be impaired or injured. Materials that are improperly stored, may be rejected by the Engineer without testing. All materials and equipment shall be applied, installed, connected, erected, used, cleaned and conditioned in accordance with the instructions of the applicable manufacturer, fabricator, supplier, or distributor, except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. The City of Clearwater, at its sole discretion, reserves the right to purchase major equipment to be incorporated into the WORK under the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Option, if indicated in the Contract Documents. In such event, the Contractor shall cooperate and assist the Owner of Clearwater, at no additional cost, to implement the ODP documents and procedures. Sectionlll.docxx Page 13 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 6.3 SUBSTITUTES AND "OR EQUAL" ITEMS Whenever an item of material or equipment is specified or described in the Contract Documents by using the name of a proprietary item or the name of a particular Supplier, the specification or description is intended to establish the type, function and quality required. Unless the specification or description contains or is followed by words reading that no like, equivalent or "or equal" item or no substitution is permitted, other items of material or equipment or material or equipment of other Suppliers may be accepted by Engineer. If in Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor is functionally equal to that named and sufficiently similar so that no change in related Work will be required, it may be considered by Engineer for approval. If in the Engineer's sole discretion an item of material or equipment proposed by Contractor does not qualify as an "or equal" item, it may be considered as a proposed substitute item. Contractor shall submit sufficient information as required by the Engineer to allow the Engineer to determine that the item of material or equipment proposed is essentially equivalent to that named and is an acceptable substitute therefore. Request for review of proposed substitute and "or equal" will be not be accepted by Engineer from anyone other than Contractor. Request for substitute and "or equal" items by Contractor must be submitted in writing to Owner's Representative and will contain all information as Engineer deems necessary to make a determination. All data provided by Contractor in support of any proposed substitute or "or equal" item will be at Contractor's expense. Engineer will be allowed a reasonable time to evaluate each proposal or submittal made per this paragraph. Engineer will be sole judge of acceptability. 6.4 SUBCONTRACTORS, SUPPLIERS AND OTHERS The Contractor shall deliver to the Owner's Representative before or at the preconstruction conference a list of all Subcontractors, suppliers and other persons and organizations proposed by the Contractor for Work to be performed on the Project. The Contractor shall include with this list the qualifications and references for each Subcontractor, supplier or other person and organization for review and approval. Any changes to this list must be submitted to the Owner's Representative for approval prior to the substitution of any Subcontractors, suppliers or other persons and organizations before performing any Work on the Project for the Contractor. Contractor shall be fully responsible to Owner and Engineer for all acts and omissions of the Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor just as Contractor is responsible for Contractor's own acts and omissions. Nothing in the Contract Documents shall create for the benefit of any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person any contractual relationship between Owner or Engineer and any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person, nor shall it create any obligation on the part of Owner or Engineer to pay or to see to the payment of any moneys due any such Subcontractor, Supplier or other person. Contractor shall be solely responsible for scheduling and coordinating the work of Subcontractors, Suppliers and other persons performing or furnishing any of the work under a direct or indirect contract with Contractor. Contractor shall require all Subcontractors, Suppliers and such other persons performing or furnishing any of the work to communicate with the Engineer through Contractor. The divisions and sections of the Specifications and the identifications of any Drawings shall not control Contractor in dividing the work among Subcontractors or Suppliers or delineating the work to be performed by any specific trade. Sectionlll.docxx Page 14 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 f r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 111— General Conditions All work performed for Contractor by a Subcontractor or Supplier will be pursuant to an appropriate agreement between Contractor and the Subcontractor or Supplier which specifically binds the Subcontractor or Supplier to the applicable terms and conditions of the Contract Documents for the benefit of Owner and Engineer. Contractor shall not pay or employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization whether initially or as a substitute, against whom Owner or Engineer may have reasonable objection. Contractor shall not be required to employ any Subcontractor, Supplier or other person or organization to furnish or perform any of the work against whom Contractor has reasonable objection. Owner or Engineer will not undertake to settle any differences between Contractor and his Subcontractors or between Subcontractors. 6.5 USE OF PREMISES Contractor shall confine construction equipment, the storage of materials and equipment and the operations of works to the site and land areas identified in and permitted by the Contract Documents on other land areas permitted by Laws and Regulations, right -of -way, permits and easements, and shall not unreasonably encumber the premises with construction equipment or other materials or equipment. Contractor shall assume full responsibility for any damage to any such land or area, or to the owner or occupant thereof or of any adjacent land or areas, resulting from the performance of the Work. Should any claim be made by any such owner or occupant because of the performance of the Work, Contractor shall promptly settle with such other party by negotiation or otherwise resolve the claim by arbitration or other dispute resolution proceed in or at law. Contractor shall, to the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultant and their officials, directors, employees and agents from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any claim or action, legal or equitable, brought by any such owner or occupant against Owner, Engineer or any other party indemnified hereunder to the extent caused by or based upon Contractor's performance of the Work. During the progress of the Work, Contractor shall keep the premises free from accumulations of waste materials, rubbish and other debris resulting from the Work. At the completion of the Work or at intervals established by the Engineer, Contractor shall remove all waste materials, rubbish and debris from and about the premises as well as all tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery and surplus materials. Contractor shall restore to original condition all property not designated for alteration by the Contract Documents. 6.5.1 STAGING AREAS The Contactor shall obtain and deliver to the City written permission for the use of all staging and storage areas outside of the Limits of Construction. 6.5.2 RESTORATION TIME LIMITS The timely restoration of all impacted areas, especially right -of -ways, is very important to the Citizens of Clearwater; therefore these time limits are imposed: • Debris piles shall be removed within five (5) consecutive calendar days. • Concrete driveways and sidewalks shall be replaced within ten (10) consecutive calendar days of removal. Resident access shall be maintained at all times. Sectionlll.docxx Page 15 of 51 7/7/2014 Section I11- General Conditions • All arterial and collector roadways shall be restored ASAP. • Local streets and asphalt driveways shall be restored as soon as a sufficient quantity is generated, however, this is never to exceed fifteen (15) consecutive calendar days. Local and resident access shall be maintained at all times. • Sod must be restored within fourteen (14) consecutive calendar days of a successful pipe pressure test, removal of concrete forms, backfill of excavations, replacement of driveways or sidewalks or other project specific milestone. It must be watered for a period of thirty (30) days after it is placed. Erosion control and dust control of denuded areas must be maintained at all times. If the project or a portion of it does not involve right -of ways, then a different schedule of sod restoration may be considered. 6.6 LICENSE AND PATENT FEES, ROYALTIES AND TAXES Contractor shall pay all license fees and royalties and assume all costs incident to the use in the performance of the work or the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device which is the subject of patent rights or copyrights held by others. If a particular invention, design, process, product or device is specified in the Contract Documents for use in the performance of the work and if to the actual knowledge of Owner or Engineer its use is subject to patent rights or copyrights calling for the payment of any license fee or royalty to others, the existence of such rights shall be disclosed by Owner or Engineer in the Contract Documents. To the fullest extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages arising out of or resulting from any infringement of patent rights or copyrights incident to the use in the performance of the Work or resulting from the incorporation in the Work of any invention, design, process, product or device not specified in the Contract Documents, and shall defend all such claims in connection with any alleged infringement of such rights. Contractor shall pay all sales, consumer, use and other taxes required to be paid by Contractor in accordance with the Laws and Regulations of the State of Florida and other governmental agencies, which are applicable during the performance of the work. 6.7 LAWS AND REGULATIONS Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all Laws and Regulations applicable to furnishing and performance of the Work. Except where otherwise expressly required by applicable Laws and Regulations, neither Owner nor Owner's Representative shall be responsible for monitoring Contractor's compliance with any Laws or Regulations. If Contractor performs any work knowing or having reason to know that it is contrary to Laws or Regulations, Contractor shall bear all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or arising out of such work: however, it shall not be Contractor's primary responsibility to make certain that the Specifications and Drawings are in accordance with Laws and Regulations, but this shall not relieve Contractor of Contractor's obligations to the Owner to report and resolve discrepancies as described above. When City projects include Federal or State funding, the requirements of Executive Order 11 -02 shall be adhered to utilizing the Homeland Security E- Verify System to verify employment eligibility. Sectionlll.docxx Page 16 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 6.8 PERMITS Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, Contractor shall obtain and pay for all construction permits and licenses. The Owner shall assist Contractor, when necessary, in obtaining such permits and licenses. Contractor shall pay all governmental charges and inspection fees necessary for the prosecution of the Work, which are applicable at the time of opening of Bids. Contractor shall pay all charges of utility owners for connections to the work, and the Owner shall pay all charges of such utility owners for capital costs related thereto such as plant investment fees. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner of Clearwater Building Permit Fees will be waived. 6.9 SAFETY AND PROTECTION Contractor shall be responsible for initiating, maintaining and supervising all safety precautions and programs in connection with the Work. Contractor shall take all necessary precautions for the safety of, and shall provide the necessary protection to prevent damage, injury or loss to: (i) all persons on the work site or who may be affected by the work, (ii) all the Work and materials and equipment to be incorporated therein, whether in storage on or off the site; and (iii) other property at the site or adjacent thereto, including trees, shrubs, lawns, walks, pavements, roadways, structures, utilities and Underground Facilities not designated for removal, relocation or replacement in the course of construction. In the event of temporary suspension of the work, or during inclement weather, or whenever Owner's Representative may direct; Contractor shall, and shall cause Subcontractors, to protect carefully the Work and materials against damage or injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of the Owner's Representative, any portion of Work or materials shall have been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the Contractor or any Subcontractors to so protect the Work, such Work and materials shall be removed and replaced at the expense of Contractor. The Contractor shall initiate and maintain an accident prevention program which shall include, but shall not be limited to the establishment and supervision of programs for the education and training of employees in the recognition, avoidance and prevention of unsafe conditions and acts. Contractor shall provide first aid services and medical care to his employees. The Contractor shall develop and maintain an effective fire protection and prevention program and good housekeeping practices at the site of contract performance throughout all phases of construction, repair, alteration or demolition. Contractor shall require appropriate personal protective equipment in all operations where there is exposure to hazardous conditions. The Engineer may order that the work stop if a condition of immediate danger to the Owner's employees, equipment or if property damage exists. This provision shall not shift responsibility or risk of loss for injuries of damage sustained from the Contractor to Owner, and the Contractor shall remain solely responsible for compliance with all safety requirements and for the safety of all persons and property at the site of Contract performance. The Contractor shall instruct his employees required to handle or use toxic materials or other harmful substances regarding their safe handling and use. The Contractor shall take the necessary precautions to protect pedestrians and motorists from harm, and to prevent disruptions of such traffic due to construction activity. Contractor shall comply with all applicable Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction for safety of persons or property and to protect them from damage, injury or loss; and shall erect and maintain all necessary safeguards for such safety and protection. Contractor shall notify owners of adjacent property and of Underground Facilities and utility owners when Sectionlll.docxx Page 17 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions prosecution of the work may affect them, and shall cooperate with them in the protection, removal, relocation and replacement of their property. All damage, injury or loss to any property caused, directly or indirectly, in whole or part, by Contractor, any Subcontractor, Supplier or any other person or organization directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, shall be remedied by Contractor. Contractor's duties and responsibilities for safety and for protection of the Work shall continue until such time as all the Work is completed and Engineer has issued a notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable. 6.10 EMERGENCIES In emergencies affecting the safety or protection of persons or the Work or property at the site or adjacent thereto, Contractor, with or without special instruction or authorization from Owner or the Owner's Representative, is obligated to act to prevent damage, injury or loss. Contractor shall give Engineer prompt written notice if Contractor believes that any significant changes in the Work or variations from the Contract Documents have been caused thereby. If the Owner's Representative determines that a change in the Contract Documents is required because of the action taken by Contractor in response to such an emergency, a Work Change Directive or Change Order will be issued to document the consequences of such action. 6.11 DRAWINGS 6.11.1 SHOP DRAWINGS, SAMPLES, RFIs, and SUBMITTAL REVIEW Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to Engineer for review and approval as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. The data shown on the Shop Drawings will be complete with respect to quantities, dimensions, specified performance and design criteria, materials and similar data to show Engineer the materials and equipment Contractor proposes to provide and to enable Engineer to review the information. Contractor shall also submit Samples to Engineer for review and approval. Before submitting each Shop Drawing or Sample, Contractor shall have determined and verified: (i) all field measurements, quantities, dimensions, specified performance criteria, installation requirements, materials, catalog numbers and similar information with respect thereto, (ii) all materials with respect to intended use, fabrication, shipping, handling, storage, assembly and installation pertaining to the performance of the Work, and (iii) all information relative to Contractor's sole responsibilities in respect to means, methods, techniques, sequences and procedures of construction and safety precautions and programs incident thereto. Contractor shall also have reviewed and coordinated each Shop Drawing or Sample with other Shop Drawings and Samples with the requirements of the Work and the Contract Documents. Each submittal will bear a stamp or specific written indication that Contractor has satisfied Contractor's obligations under the Contract Documents with respect to Contractor's review and approval of that submittal. At the time of submission, Contractor shall give Engineer specific written notice of such variations, if any, that the Shop Drawing or Sample submitted may have from the requirements of the Contract Documents, such notice to be in a written communication separate from the submittal; and, in addition, shall cause a specific notation to be made on each Shop Drawing and Sample submitted to Engineer for review and approval of each such variation. The Contractor shall maintain a submittal log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each submittal within twenty -one (21) consecutive calendar days. The Sectionlll.docxx Page 18 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions Contractor shall maintain a request for information (RFI) log as mentioned in Article 2.5. The Engineer and Construction Services Department shall receive updated copies at each progress meeting, and the Engineer shall respond to each RFI within twenty -one (21) consecutive calendar days. The untimely submission of Submittal or RFIs shall not be grounds for a delay claim from the Contractor. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings and Samples will be only to determine if the items covered by the submittals will, after installation or incorporation in the Work, conform to the information given in the Contract Documents and be compatible with the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated the Contract Documents. Engineer's review and approval will not extend to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction (except where a particular means method, technique, sequence or procedure of construction is specifically and expressly called for by the Contract Documents) or to safety precautions or programs incident thereto. The review and approval of a separate item as such will not indicate approval of the assembly in which the item functions. Contractor shall make corrections required by Engineer, and shall return the required number of corrected copies of Shop Drawings and submit as required new Samples for review and approval. Contractor shall direct specific attention in writing to revisions other than the corrections called for by Engineer on previous submittals. Engineer's review and approval of Shop Drawings or Samples shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for any variation from the requirements of the Contract Documents unless Contractor has in writing called Engineer's attention to each such variation at the time of submission and Engineer has given written approval of each such variation by specific written notation thereof incorporated in or accompanying the Shop Drawing or Sample approval; nor will any approval by the Engineer relieve the Contractor from responsibility for complying with the requirements of paragraph above discussing field measurements by the Contractor. Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy in order to achieve required approval of an item within two (2) submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor, for Engineer's costs for resubmittals that account for a number greater than twenty percent (20 %) of the total number of first time submittals. Owner's Representative reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for all third submittals. The number of first time submittals shall be equal to the number of submittals agreed to by Engineer and Contractor. All costs to Engineer involved with subsequent submittal of Shop Drawings, Samples or other items requiring approval will be backcharged to Contractor at the rate of 3.0 times direct technical labor cost by deducting such costs from payments due Contractor for Work completed. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. 6.11.2 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS The Contractor shall keep and maintain one set of blueprints, As -Built Drawings, in good order and legible condition to be continuously marked -up at the job site. The Contractor shall mark and annotate neatly and clearly all project conditions, locations, configurations and any other changes or deviations which may vary from the details represented on the original Contract Plans, including revisions made necessary by Addenda, Shop Drawings, and Change Orders during the construction process. The Contractor shall record the horizontal and vertical locations, in the plan and profile, of all buried utilities that differ from the locations indicated or which were not Sectionlll.docxx Page 19 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111— General Conditions indicated on the Contract Plans and buried (or concealed), construction and utility features which are revealed during the construction period. The As -Built Drawings shall be available for inspection by the Engineer, Engineer's Consultant, and the Owner's Representative at all times during the progress of the Project. The As -Built Drawings shall be reviewed by the Owner's Representative, or his designee, for accuracy and compliance with the requirements of "As -Built Drawings" prior to submittal of the monthly pay requests. The pay requests shall be rejected if the marked -up blueline prints do not conform to the "As -Built Drawings" requirements. As -Built Drawings shall be submitted to the Owner Inspector for approval upon completion of the project and prior to acceptance of final pay request. Final pay request shall not be processed until As -Built Drawings have been reviewed by the Engineer or the Engineer's Consultant for accuracy and completeness. Prior to placing new potable water mains in service, the Contractor shall provide the Engineer intersection drawings, as specified for the water mains. The Owner's acceptance of the "As -Built Drawings" does not relieve the Contractor of the sole responsibility for the accuracy and completeness of the As -Built Drawings. 6.11.2.1 General The Contractor shall prepare an "AS -BUILT SURVEY" per chapter 5J- 17.052, Florida Administrative Code (see definition below), signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The contractor will deliver to the Owner two hard copies of signed and sealed As -Built Drawings and an AutoCAD file. 5J- 17.050 Definition: (10)(a) As -Built Survey: a survey performed to obtain horizontal and /or vertical dimensional data so that constructed improvements may be located and delineated: also knonw as Record Survey. This survey shall be clearly titled "As -Built Survey" and shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered land surveyor. The survey must be delivered to the Owner of Clearwater Construction Division upon substantial completion of the project. If this condition is not met, the Owner will procure the services of a Professional Surveyor and Mapper registered in the State of Florida and will back charge the contractor a fee of $1,800 per day or any portion thereof to provide the Owner with the required As -Built Survey. 6.11.2.2 Sanitary and Storm Sewer Piping Systems 1. Manholes and inlets shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction plans. New sanitary service connections and replaced sanitary service connections shall be dimensioned to the nearest downstream manhole. All manholes, cleanouts and catch basin invert and rim elevations, manhole and catch basin dimensions, pipe sizes, and pipe material shall also be noted on the plan view and also on the profile if one exists. 2. Pipe materials and areas of special construction shall be noted. 6.11.2.3 Pressure Pipe construction (Water, Reclaimed Water, Forcemain) All pipes shall be located by survey coordinates (northing, easting and elevation) based on the approved horizontal and vertical datum or utilize the stationing supplied on the construction Sectionlll.docxx Page 20 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 t Section 111 — General Conditions plans. Coordinates shall be at all pipe bends, tees, valves, reducers, and deflections. Also all new and replaced service connections for potable and reclaimed water will be located as described above. Additionally there must be survey coordinates no further than 100 feet apart on linear type construction and shall denote top of pipe elevation at those points. 6.11.2.4 Electrical and Control Wiring The as -built drawings shall include all changes to the original Contract Plans. The as -built drawings shall also include the size, color, and number of wires and conduit. For projects where this information is too voluminous to be contained on the blueline prints, the Contractor shall prepare supplemental drawings, on same size sheets as the blueline prints, showing the additional conduit runs, 1 -line diagrams, ladder diagrams, and other information. The wiring schematic diagrams shall show termination location and wiring identification at each point on the ladder diagram. 6.11.2.5 Horizontal and Vertical Control The As -Built survey shall be based on the original datum used for the construction design plans or if required by the Owner the datum shall be referenced to the North American Datum of 1983/90 (horizontal) and the North American Vertical Datum of 1988. The unit of measurement shall be the United States Foot. Any deviation or use of any other datum, (horizontal and or vertical), must be approved by the Owner of Clearwater Engineering Department. 6.11.2.6 Standards The As -Built survey shall meet the Minimum Technical Standards per Chapter 5J -17 and the Clearwater CAD STANDARDS set forth below. In addition to locating all improvements that pertain to the as -built survey it is the requirement of the Owner to have minimum location points at every change in direction and no more than 100 feet apart on all pressure pipes. 6.11.2.7 Other The As -Built drawings shall reflect any differences from the original Contract Plans, in the same level of detail and units of dimensions as the Plans. 6.11.3 CAD STANDARDS 6.11.3.1 Layer Naming 6.11.3.1.1 Prefixes and Suffixes DI prefix denotes digitized or scanned entities EP prefix denotes existing points - field collected EX prefix denotes existing entities - line work and symbols PR prefix denotes proposed entities - line work and symbols FU prefix denotes future entities (proposed but not part of this contract) - line work and symbols TX suffix denotes text — use for all text, no matter the prefix Sectionlll.docxx Page 21 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111— General Conditions 6.11.3.1.2 Layer Naming Definitions: GAS gas lines and appurtenances ELEC power lines and appurtenances PHONE telephone lines and appurtenances CABLE cable TV lines and appurtenances BOC curbs WALK sidewalk WATER water lines and appurtenances, sprinklers STORM storm lines and appurtenances TREES trees, bushes, planters SANITARY sanitary lines and appurtenances FENCE all fences BLDG buildings, sheds, finished floor elevation DRIVE driveways EOP edge of pavement without curbs TRAFFIC signal poles, control boxes TOPBANK top of bank TOESLOPE toe of slope TOPBERM top of berm TOEBERM toe of berm SEAWALL seawall CONCSLAB concrete slabs WALL walls, except seawall SHORE shoreline, water elevation CL centerline of road CLD centerline of ditch CLS centerline of Swale CORNER property corners, monumentation BENCH benchmark, temporary benchmarks Other layers may be created as required, using above format. 6.11.3.2 Layer Properties All layers will use standard AutoCAD linetypes, bylayer. All layers will use standard AutoCAD colors, bylayer. Sectionlll.docxx Page 22 of 51 7/7/2014 1 t 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 11I — General Conditions All text will use standard AutoCAD fonts. 6.11.3.3 Text Styles Text style for EX layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 0 °, and a text height of .008 times the plot scale. Text style for PR and FU layers will use the simplex font, oblique angle of 22.5 °, and a text height of .010 times the plot scale. 6.11.4 DELIVERABLES: The as -built survey shall be produced on bond material, 24" x 36" at a scale of 1 " =20' unless approved otherwise. The consultant shall deliver all drawing files in digital format. Acceptable file formats include: DWG, of a shape file. Please address any questions regarding format to Mr. Tom Mahony, at (727) 562 -4762 or e -mail address Thomas .Mahony(amyClearwater.com. 6.12CONTRACTOR'S GENERAL WARRANTY AND GUARANTEE Contractor warrants and guarantees to Owner, Engineer and Engineer's Consultants that all Work will be in accordance with the Contract Documents and will not be defective. Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder includes defects or damage caused by abuse, vandalism, modification or operation by persons other than Contractor, Subcontractors or Suppliers. Until the acceptance of the Work by the Owner, the Work shall be under the charge and care of the Contractor, and he shall take every necessary precaution against injury or damage to any part thereof by action of the elements, or from any other cause whatsoever, arising from the execution or non - execution of the Work. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair and make good, at his own expense, all injuries or damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and final acceptance by the Owner. In addition, "the Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one year from the date of final acceptance ". Contractor's warranty and guarantee hereunder excludes improper maintenance and operation by Owner's employees and normal wear and tear under normal usage for any portion of the Work, which has been partially accepted by the Owner for operation prior to final acceptance by the Owner. Contractor's obligation to perform and complete the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents shall be absolute. None of the following will constitute an acceptance of Work that is not in accordance with the Contract Documents or a release of Contractor's obligation to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents: (i) observations by Owner's Representative, (ii) recommendation of any progress or final payment by Owner's Representative, (iii) the issuance of a certificate of Substantial Completion or any payment by the Owner to contractor under the Contract Documents, (iv) use or occupancy of the Work or any part thereof by Owner, (v) any acceptance by Owner or any failure to do so, (vi) any review and approval of a Shop Drawing or Sample submittal or the issuance of a notice of Acceptance by the Engineer. 6.13CONTINUING THE WORK Contractor shall carry on the work and adhere to the progress schedule during all disputes or disagreements with the Owner. No work shall be delayed or postponed pending resolution of any disputes or disagreements, except as the Owner or Contractor may otherwise agree in writing. Sectionlll.docxx Page 23 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 11I — General Conditions 6.14INDEMNIFICATION Contractor shall indemnify and hold harmless Owner, Engineer, Engineer's Consultants and the officers, directors, employees, agents and other consultants of each and any of them from and against all claims, costs, losses and damages (including but not limited to all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or arbitration or other dispute resolution costs) caused by, arising out of or resulting from the performance of the Work, provided that any such claim, cost, loss or damage: (i) is attributable to bodily injury, sickness, disease or death, or to injury to or destruction of tangible property (other than the work itself), including the loss of use resulting therefrom, and (ii) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the Work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not caused in part by any negligence or omission of a person or entity indemnified hereunder or whether liability is imposed upon such indemnified party by Laws and Regulations regardless of the negligence of any such person. If, through acts of neglect on the part of Contractor, any other Contractor or any Subcontractor shall suffer loss or damage on the work, Contractor shall settle with such other Contractor or Subcontractor by agreement or arbitration if such other Contractor or Subcontractor will so settle. If such other Contractor or Subcontractor shall assert any claim against the Owner on such account of any damage alleged to have been sustained, the Owner shall notify Contractor, who shall indemnify and save harmless the Owner against any such claim. In any and all claims against Owner or Engineer or any of their respective consultants, agents, officers, directors, or employees by any employee (or the survivor or personal representative of such employee) of Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any person directly or indirectly employed by any of them to perform or furnish any of the work, or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, the indemnification obligation under this paragraph shall not be limited in any way by any limitation on the amount or type of damages, compensation or benefits payable by or for Contractor or any such Sub - contractor, Supplier or other person or organization under workers' compensation acts, disability benefit acts or other employee benefit acts. The indemnification obligations of Contractor under this paragraph shall not extend to the liability of Engineer and Engineer's Consultants, officers, directors, employees, or agents caused by the professional negligence, errors or omissions of any of them. 6.15CHANGES IN COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION Contractor shall notify Owner by US mail addressed to the City Engineer of any changes in company contact information. This includes: contact phone, address, project manager, email addresses, etc. 7 OTHER WORK 7.1 RELATED WORK AT SITE The City reserves the right to have its own forces enter the construction site at any time and perform work as necessary in order to perform infrastructure repair or maintenance, whether related to the project or not. The Contractor will allow complete access to all utility owners for these purposes. Sectionlll.docxx Page 24 of 51 7/7/2014 1 Section 111— General Conditions The City may have its own forces perform new work related to the project, however, this work will be identified in the Contract Scope of Work and coordination will be such that this activity is denoted in the Contractor's CPM Schedule so as not to cause any delays or interference with the Contractor's work or schedule. 7.2 COORDINATION If the Owner contracts with others for the performance of other work on the Project at the site, the following will be set forth in the Scope of Work: (i) the person who will have authority and responsibility for coordination of the activities among the various prime contractors will be identified; (ii) the specific matters to be covered by such authority and responsibility will be itemized; and (iii) the extent of such authority and responsibilities will be provided. Unless otherwise provided in the Supplementary Conditions, the Owner shall have sole authority and responsibility in respect of such coordination. 8 OWNERS RESPONSIBILITY Except as otherwise provided in these General Conditions, the Owner shall issue all communications from the Owner to the Contractor through Owner's Representative. The Owner shall furnish the data required of the Owner under the Contract Documents promptly and shall make payments to Contractor promptly when they are due as provided in these General Conditions. The Owner is obligated to execute Change Orders as indicated in the Article on Changes In The Work. The Owner's responsibility in respect of certain inspections, tests, and approvals is set forth in the Article on Tests and Inspections. In connection with the Owner's right to stop work or suspend work, see the Article on Engineer may Stop the Work. The Article on Suspension of Work and Termination deals with the Owner's right to terminate services of Contractor under certain circumstances. Owner shall not supervise, direct or have control or authority over, nor be responsible for, Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the Work. The Owner will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents. 9 OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S STATUS DURING CONSTRUCTION 9.1 OWNERS REPRESENTATIVE I Dependent of the project type, the Owner's Representative during the construction period will either be the Construction Manager, the Engineer, or a designee of the Project's Owner. The duties, responsibilities and the limitations of authority of Owner's Representative during 1 construction are set forth in the Contract Documents and shall not be extended without written consent of Owner and Engineer. 1 Sectionlll.docxx Page 25 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions 9.2 CLARIFICATIONS AND INTERPRETATIONS Engineer will issue with reasonable promptness such written clarifications or interpretations of the requirements of the Contract Documents regarding design issues only, in the form of Submittal responses, RFI responses, Drawings or otherwise, as Engineer may determine necessary, which shall be consistent with the intent of and reasonably inferable from Contract Documents. All other clarifications and interpretations of the Contract Documents shall be issued form the Owner's Representative. Such written clarifications and interpretations will be binding on the Owner and Contractor. If Contractor believes that a written clarification or interpretation justifies an adjustment in the Contract Price or the Contract Time and the parties are unable to agree to the amount or extent thereof, if any, Contractor may make a written claim therefore as provided in the Articles for Change of Work and Change of Contract Time. 9.3 REJECTING OF DEFECTIVE WORK The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will have authority to disapprove or reject Work which Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes to be defective, or that Owner's Representative or the Engineer believes will not produce a completed Project that conforms to the Contract Documents or that will prejudice the integrity of the design concept of the completed Project as a functioning whole as indicated by the Contract Documents. The Owner's Representative or the Engineer will also have authority to require special inspection or testing of the Work whether or not the Work is fabricated, installed or completed. 9.4 SHOP DRAWINGS, CHANGE ORDERS, AND PAYMENTS In connection with Engineer's authority as to Shop Drawings and Samples, see articles on Shop Drawings and Samples. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Change Orders, see the articles on Changes of Work, Contract Price and Contract Time. In connection with Owner's Representative authority as to Applications for Payment, see the articles on Payments to Contractor and Completion. 9.5 DECISIONS ON DISPUTES The Owner's Representative will be the initial interpreter of the requirements of the Contract Documents and judge of the acceptability of the work thereunder. Claims, disputes and other matters relating to the acceptability of the work or the interpretation of the requirements of the Contract Documents pertaining to the performance and furnishing of the work and Claims under the Articles for Changes of Work, Changes of Contract Time and Changes of Contract Price will be referred initially to Owner's Representative in writing with a request for a formal decision in accordance with this paragraph. Written notice of each such claim, dispute or other matter will be delivered by the claimant to Owner's Representative and the other party to the Agreement promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise thereto, and written supporting data will be submitted to Owner's Representative and the other party within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time for the submission of additional or more accurate data in support of such claim, dispute or other matter. The opposing party shall submit any response to Owner's Representative and the claimant within thirty (30) days after receipt of the claimant's last submittal, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time. Owner's Representative will render a formal decision in writing within thirty (30) days after receipt of the opposing party's submittal, if any, in accordance with this paragraph. Owner Representative's Sectionlll.docxx Page 26 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111— General Conditions written decision on such claim, dispute or other matter will be final and binding upon the Owner and Contractor unless (i) an appeal from Owner Representative's decision is taken within thirty (30) days of the Owner Representative's decision, or the appeal time which may be stated in a Dispute Resolution Agreement between Owner and Contractor for the settlement of disputes or (ii) if no such Dispute Resolution Agreement has been entered into, a written notice of intention to appeal from Owner Representative's written decision is delivered by the Owner or Contractor to the other and to Owner's Representative within thirty (30) days after the date of such decision and a formal proceeding is instituted by the appealing party in a forum of competent jurisdiction to exercise such rights or remedies as the appealing party may have with respect to such claim, dispute or other matter in accordance with applicable Laws and Regulations within sixty (60) days of the date of such decision, unless otherwise agreed in writing by the Owner and Contractor. When functioning as interpreter and judge, Owner's Representative will not show partiality to the Owner or Contractor and will not be liable in connection with any interpretation or decision rendered in good faith in such capacity. The rendering of a decision by Owner's Representative with respect to any such claim, dispute or other matter will be a condition precedent to any exercise by the Owner or Contractor of such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any such claim, dispute or other matter pursuant the Article on Dispute Resolution. 9.6 LIMITATIONS ON OWNER REPRESENTATIVE'S RESPONSIBILITIES Neither Owner Representative's authority or responsibility under this paragraph or under any other provision of the Contract Documents nor any decision made by Owner's Representative in good faith either to exercise or not exercise such authority or responsibility or the undertaking, exercise or performance of any authority or responsibility by Owner's Representative shall create, impose or give rise to any duty owed by Owner's Representative to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person or organization or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them. Owner's Representative will not supervise, direct, control or have authority over or be responsible for Contractor's means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures of construction, or the safety precautions and programs incident thereto, or for any failure of Contractor to comply with Laws and Regulations applicable to the furnishing or performance of the work. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for Contractor's failure to perform or furnish the work in accordance with the Contract Documents. Owner's Representative will not be responsible for the acts or omissions of Contractor or of any Subcontractor, any Supplier, or of any other person or organization performing or furnishing any of the work. Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation and all maintenance and operating instructions, schedules, guarantees, bonds and certificates of inspection, tests and approvals and other documentation required to be delivered by the Contractor will only be to determine generally that their content complies with the requirements of the Contract Documents and, in the case of certificates of inspections, tests and approvals that the results certified indicate compliance with the Contract Documents. The limitations upon authority and responsibility set forth in this paragraph shall also apply to Owner Representative's CEI, the Engineer's Consultants, and assistants. Sectionlll.docxx Page 27 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111 — General Conditions 10 CHANGES IN THE WORK Without invalidating the Agreement and without notice to any surety, the Owner may, at any time or from time to time, order additions, deletions or revisions in the Work. Such additions, deletions or revisions will be authorized by a Written Amendment, a Change Order, or a Work Change Directive. Upon receipt of any such document, Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work involved which will be performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents (except as may otherwise be specifically provided). If the Owner and Contractor are unable to agree as to the extent, if any, of an adjustment in the Contract Price or an adjustment of the Contract Time that should be allowed as a result of a Work Change Directive, a claim may be made therefore as provided in these General Conditions. Contractor shall not be entitled to an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time with respect to any Work performed that is not required by the Contract Documents as amended, modified and supplemented as provided in these General Conditions except in the case of an emergency as provided or in the case of uncovering work as provided in article for Uncovering Work. The Owner and Contractor shall execute appropriate Change Orders or Written Amendments recommended by Owner's Representative covering: changes in the work which are (i) ordered by the Owner (ii) required because of acceptance of defective work under the article for Acceptance of Defective Work or correcting defective Work under the article for Owner May Correct Defective Work or (iii) agreed to by the parties; changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which are agreed to by the parties; and changes in the Contract Price or Contract Time which embody the substance of any written decision rendered by Owner's Representative pursuant to the article for Decisions on Disputes; provided that, in lieu of executing any such Change Order, an appeal may be taken from any such decision in accordance with the provisions of the Contract Documents and applicable Laws and Regulations, but during any such appeal, Contractor shall carry on the Work and adhere to the progress schedule as provided in the article for Continuing the Work. If notice of any change affecting the general scope of the work or the provisions of the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, Contract Price or Contract Time) is required by the provisions of any Bond to be given to a surety, the giving of any such notice will be Contractor's responsibility, and the amount of each applicable Bond will be adjusted accordingly. 11 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE 11.1 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT PRICE The Contract Price constitutes the total compensation (subject to authorized adjustments) payable to Contractor for performing the Work. All duties, responsibilities and obligations assigned to or undertaken by Contractor shall be at Contractor's expense without change in the Contract Price. The Contract Price may only be adjusted by a Change Order or by a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price shall be based on a written notice of claim stating the general nature of the claim, to be delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative or promptly (but in no event later than thirty days) Sectionlll.docxx Page 28 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111— General Conditions after the start of the occurrence or event giving rise to the claim. Notice of the amount of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after the start of such occurrence or event, unless Owner's Representative allows additional time for claimant to submit additional or more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by claimant's written statement that the claimed adjustment covers all known amounts to which the claimant is entitled as a result of said occurrence or event. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be valid if not submitted in accordance with this paragraph. The value of any Work covered by a Change Order or of any claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price will be determined as follows: (i) where the Work involved is covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by application of such unit prices to the quantities of the items involved (ii) where the Work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents, by a mutually agreed lump sum (which may include an allowance for overhead and profit), (iii) where the Work is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and agreement is reached to establish unit prices for the Work. Where the work involved is not covered by unit prices contained in the Contract Documents and where the Owner's Representative, the Owner, the Engineer, the Engineer's Consultant, and Contractor cannot mutually agree on a lump sum price, the City of Clearwater shall pay for directed changes in the WORK, on "COST REIMBURSEMENT" basis. The Contractor shall apply for compensation, detailing Contractors forces, materials, equipment, subcontractors, and other items of direct costs required for the directed work. The application for Cost Reimbursement shall be limited to the following items: 1. Labor, including foremen, for those hours associated with the direct work (actual payroll cost, including wages, fringe benefits, labor insurance and labor taxes established by law). Expressly excluded from this item are all costs associated with negotiating the subject change. 2. Materials associated with the change, including sales tax. The costs of materials shall be substantiated through vendors' invoices. 3. Rental or equivalent rental costs of equipment, including necessary transportation costs if specifically used for the WORK. The rental rates shall not exceed the current rental rates prevailing in the locality or as defined in the rental Rate Blue Book for Construction Equipment (a.k.a. DataQuest Blue Book). The rental rate is defined as the full- unadjusted base rental rate for the appropriate item of construction equipment and shall cover the costs of all fuel, supplies, repairs, insurance, and other costs associated with supplying the equipment for work ordered. Contractor -owned equipment will be paid for the duration of time required to complete the work. Utilize lowest cost combination of hourly, daily, weekly, or monthly rates. Do not exceed estimated operating costs given in Blue Book. Operating costs will not be allowed for equipment on stand -by. 4. Additional costs for Bonds, Insurance if required by the City of Clearwater. The following fixed fees shall be added to the costs of the directed work performed by the Contractor or Subcontractor. A. A fixed fee of fifteen percent (15 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 1 above. If work is performed by a subcontractor, the Contractor's fee shall not exceed five percent (5 %), and the subcontractor's fee shall not exceed ten percent (10 %). B. A fixed fee of ten percent (10 %) shall be added to the costs of Item 2 above. Sectionlll.docxx Page 29 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions C. No markup shall be added to the costs of Items 3 and 4. The fixed fees shall be considered the full compensation for all cost of general supervision, overhead, profit, and other general expense. 11.2ALLOWANCES AND FINAL CONTRACT PRICE ADJUSTMENT It is understood that Contractor has included in the Contract Price all allowances so named in the Contract Documents and shall cause the Work so covered to be furnished and performed for such sums as may be acceptable to Owner and Engineer. Contractor agrees that: (i) the allowances include the cost to Contractor (less any applicable trade discounts) of materials and equipment required by the allowances to be delivered at the Site, and all applicable taxes; and (ii) Contractor's costs for unloading and handling on the site, labor, installation costs, overhead, profit and other expenses contemplated for the allowances have been included in the Contract Price and not in the allowances and no demand for additional payment on account of any of the foregoing will be valid. Prior to final payment, an appropriate Change Order will be issued as recommended by Owner's Representative to reflect actual amounts due Contractor on account of Work covered by allowances and all the Work actually performed by the Contractor, and the Contract Price shall be correspondingly adjusted. 11.3 UNIT PRICE WORK Where the Contract Documents provide that all or part of the Work is to be Unit Price Work, initially the Contract Price will be deemed to include for all Unit Price Work an amount equal to the sum of the established unit price for each separately identified item of unit price work times the estimated quantity of each item as indicated in the Agreement. The estimated quantities of items of Unit Price Work are not guaranteed and are solely for the purpose of comparison of Bids and determining an initial Contract Price. Determinations of the actual quantities and classifications of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor will be made by Owner's Representative. Each unit price will be deemed to include an amount considered by Contractor to be adequate to cover Contractor's overhead and profit for each separately identified item. The Owner or Contractor may make a claim for an adjustment in the Contract Price if: (i) the quantity of any item of Unit Price Work performed by Contractor differs materially and significantly from the estimated quantity of such item indicated in the Contract Documents; and (ii) there is no corresponding adjustment with respect to any other item of Work; and (iii) if Contractor believes that Contractor is entitled to an increase in Contract Price as a result of having incurred additional expense or the Owner believes that the Owner is entitled to a decrease in Contract Price and the parties are unable to agree as to the amount of any such increase or decrease. On unit price contracts, Owner endeavors to provide adequate unit quantities to satisfactorily complete the construction of the project. It is expected that in the normal course of project construction and completion that not all unit quantities will be used in their entirety and that a finalizing change order which adjusts contract unit quantities to those unit quantities actually used in the construction of the project will result in a net decrease from the original Contract Price. Such reasonable deduction of final Contract Price should be anticipated by the Contractor in his original bid. Sectionlll.docxx Page 30 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 12 CHANGES IN THE CONTRACT TIME The Contract Time (or Milestones) may only be changed by a Change Order or a Written Amendment. Any claim for an adjustment of the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be based on written notice delivered by the party making the claim to the other party and to Owner's Representative promptly, but in no event later than thirty (30) days, after the occurrence of the event giving rise to the claim and stating the general nature of the claim. Notice of the extent of the claim with supporting data shall be delivered within sixty (60) days after such occurrence, unless Owner's Representative allows an additional period of time to ascertain more accurate data in support of the claim, and shall be accompanied by the claimant's written statement that the adjustment claimed is the entire adjustment to which the claimant has reason to believe it is entitled as a result of the occurrence of said event. All claims for adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) shall be determined by Owner's Representative. No claim for an adjustment in the Contract Time (or Milestones) will be valid if not submitted in accordance with the requirements of this paragraph. All time limits stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Agreement. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the work within the Contract Time (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of Contractor, the Contract Time (or Milestones) may be extended in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay if a claim is made therefore as provided in the article for Changes in the Work. Delays beyond the control of Contractor shall include, but not be limited to, acts by the Owner, acts of utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by the article for Other Work, fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions or acts of God. Delays attributable to and within the control of a Subcontractor or Supplier shall be deemed to be delays within the control of Contractor. Where Contractor is prevented from completing any part of the Work within the Contract Times (or Milestones) due to delay beyond the control of both the Owner and Contractor, an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) in an amount equal to the time lost due to such delay shall be Contractor's sole and exclusive remedy for such delay. In no event shall the Owner be liable to Contractor, any Subcontractor, any Supplier, any other person, or to any surety for or employee or agent of any of them, for damages arising out of or resulting from (i) delays caused by or within the control of Contractor, or (ii) delays beyond the control of both parties including but not limited to fires, floods, epidemics, abnormal weather conditions, acts of God or acts by utility owners or other contractors performing other work as contemplated by paragraph for Other Work. 13 TESTS AND INSPECTIONS, CORRECTION, REMOVAL OR ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK 13.1 TESTS AND INSPECTION Contractor shall give Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of readiness of the Work for all required inspections, tests or approvals, and shall cooperate with inspection and testing personnel to facilitate required inspections or tests. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an independent testing laboratory to perform all inspections, tests, or approvals required by the Contract Documents. The costs for these Sectionlll.docxx Page 31 of 51 7/7/2014 Section II1 — General Conditions inspections, tests or approvals shall be borne by the Contractor except as otherwise provided in the Contract Documents. If Laws or Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction require any Work (or part thereof) specifically to be inspected, tested or approved by an employee or other representative of such public body including all Owner Building Departments and Owner Utility Departments, Contractor shall assume full responsibility for arranging and obtaining such inspections, tests or approvals, pay all costs in connection therewith, and furnish Owner's Representative the required certificates of inspection or approval. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, Owner permit and impact fees will be waived. Contractor shall also be responsible for arranging and obtaining and shall pay all costs in connection with any inspections, tests or approvals required for Owner's and Engineer's acceptance of materials or equipment to be incorporated in the Work, or of materials, mix designs, or equipment submitted for approval prior to Contractor's purchase thereof for incorporation of the Work. If any Work (or the work of others) that is to be inspected tested or approved is covered by Contractor without written concurrence of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for observation. Uncovering Work as provided in this paragraph shall be at Contractor's expense unless Contractor has given Owner's Representative and Engineer timely notice of Contractor's intention to cover the same and Owner's Representative has not acted with reasonable promptness in response to such notice. 13.2UNCOVERING THE WORK If any Work is covered contrary to the written request of Owner's Representative, it must, if requested by Owner's Representative, be uncovered for Owner Representative's observation and replaced at Contractor's expense. If Owner's Representative considers it necessary or advisable that covered Work be observed by Owner's Representative or inspected or tested by others, Contractor, at Owner Representative's request, shall uncover, expose or otherwise make available for observation, inspection or testing as Engineer or Owner's Representative may require, that portion of the Work in question, furnishing all necessary labor, material and equipment. If it is found that such Work is defective, Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by, arising out of or resulting from such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection and testing and of satisfactory replacement or reconstruction (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others); and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price for the costs of the investigation, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change in Contract Price. If, however, such Work is not found to be defective, Contractor shall be allowed an increase in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones), or both, directly attributable to such uncovering, exposure, observation, inspection, testing, replacement and reconstruction; and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount or extent thereof, Contractor may make a claim therefore as provided the article for Change in Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 13.3OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE MAY STOP THE WORK If the Work is defective, or Contractor fails to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment, or fails to furnish or perform the Work in such a way that the completed Work will conform to the Contract Documents, Engineer or Owner's Representative may order Contractor to stop the Work, or any portion thereof, until the cause for such order has been Sectionlll.docxx Page 32 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions eliminated; however, this right of Owner's Representative to stop the Work shall not give rise to any duty on the part of Owner's Representative or Owner to exercise this right for the benefit of Contractor or any surety or other party. If the Owner's Representative stops Work under this paragraph, Contractor shall be entitled to no extension of Contract Time or increase in Contract Price. 13.4CORRECTION OR REMOVAL OF DEFECTIVE WORK If required by Engineer or Owner's Representative, Contractor shall promptly, as directed, either correct all defective Work, whether or not fabricated, installed or completed, or, if the Work has been rejected by Engineer or Owner's Representative, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such correction or removal (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others). 13.5WARRANTY /CORRECTION PERIOD If within one year after the date of Substantial Completion or such longer period of time as may be prescribed by Laws or Regulations or by the terms of any applicable special guarantee required by the Contract Documents or by any specific provision of the Contract Documents, any Work is found to be defective, Contractor shall promptly, without cost to the Owner and in accordance with the Owner's written instructions; (i) correct such defective Work, or, if it has been rejected by the Owner, remove it from the site and replace it with Work that is not defective and (ii) satisfactorily correct or remove and replace any damage to other Work or the work of others resulting therefrom. If Contractor does not promptly comply with the terms of such instructions, or in an emergency where delay would cause serious risk of loss or damage, the Owner may have the defective Work corrected or the rejected. Work removed and replaced, and all claims, costs, losses and damages caused by or resulting from such removal and replacement (including but not limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others) will be paid by Contractor. In special circumstances where a particular item of equipment is placed in continuous service before Final Completion of all the Work, the correction period for that item may start to run from an earlier date if specifically and expressly so provided in the Specifications or by Written Amendment. Where defective Work (and damage to other Work resulting therefrom) has been corrected, removed or replaced under this paragraph the correction period hereunder with respect to such Work will be extended for an additional period of one year after such correction or removal and replacement has been satisfactorily completed. 13.6ACCEPTANCE OF DEFECTIVE WORK If, instead of requiring correction or removal and replacement of defective Work, the Owner prefers to accept it, the Owner may do so. Contractor shall pay all claims, costs, losses and damages attributable to the Owner's evaluation of and determination to accept such defective Work such costs to be approved by Owner's Representative as to reasonableness. If any such acceptance occurs prior to Owner Representative's recommendation of final payment, a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree Sectionlll.docxx Page 33 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111 — General Conditions as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in article for Change of Contract Price. If the acceptance occurs after the Owner Representative's recommendation for final payment an appropriate amount will be paid by Contractor to the Owner. 13.7OWNER MAY CORRECT DEFECTIVE WORK If Contractor fails within a reasonable time after written notice from Owner's Representative to correct defective Work or to remove and replace rejected Work as required by Owner's Representative in accordance with the article for Correction and Removal of Defective Work or if Contractor fails to perform the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, or if Contractor fails to comply with any other provision of the Contract Documents, the Owner may, after seven days' written notice to Contractor, correct and remedy any such deficiency. In exercising the rights and remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall proceed expeditiously. In connection with such corrective and remedial action, the Owner may exclude Contractor from all or part of the site, take possession of all or part of the Work, and suspend Contractor's services related thereto, and incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere. Contractor shall allow Owner, Owner's Representatives, Agents and employees, the Owner's other contractors, and Owner's Representative, Engineer, and Engineer's Consultants access to the site to enable the Owner to exercise the rights and remedies under this paragraph. All claims, costs, losses and damages incurred or sustained by the Owner in exercising such rights and remedies will be charged against Contractor and a Change Order will be issued incorporating the necessary revisions in the Contract Documents with respect to the Work; and the Owner shall be entitled to an appropriate decrease in the Contract Price, and, if the parties are unable to agree as to the amount thereof, the Owner may make a claim therefore as provided in the article for Change of Contract Price. Such claims, costs, losses and damages will include but not be limited to all costs of repair or replacement of work of others destroyed or damaged by correction, removal or replacement of Contractor's defective Work. Contractor shall not be allowed an extension of the Contract Time (or Milestones) because of any delay in the performance of the Work attributable to the exercise by the Owner of the Owner's rights and remedies hereunder. 14 PAYMENTS TO CONTRACTOR AND COMPLETION Requests for payment shall be processed in accordance with F.S. 218.735 and as described herein. Progress payments on account of Unit Price Work will be based on the number of units completed. 14.1 APPLICATION FOR PROGRESS PAYMENT Contractor shall submit (not more often than once a month) to Owner's Representative for review an Application for Payment filled out and signed by Contractor covering the Work completed as of the 25th of each month and accompanied by such supporting documentation as is required by the Owner's Representative and the Contract Documents. Unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, payment will not be made for materials and equipment not incorporated in the Work. Payment will only be made for that portion of the Work, which is fully installed including all materials, labor and equipment. A retainage of not less than five (5 %) of the amount of each Application for Payment for the total of all Work, including as -built survey and Inspector overtime reimbursement, completed to date will be held until final completion and SectionlII.docxx Page 34 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions acceptance of the Work covered in the Contract Documents. No progress payment shall be construed to be acceptance of any portion of the Work under contract. The Contractor shall review with the Engineer or the Construction Inspector all quantities and work for which payment is being applied for and reach agreement prior to submittal of an Official Pay Request. The Engineer or the Construction Inspector will verify that the on -site marked up as -built drawings are up to date with the work and are in compliance with the Contract Documents. In addition to all other payment provisions set out in this contract, the Owner's Representative may require the Contractor to produce for Owner, within fifteen (15) days of the approval of any progress payment, evidence and /or payment affidavit that all subcontractors and suppliers have been paid any sum or sums then due. A failure on the part of the contractor to provide the report as required herein shall result in further progress or partial payments being withheld until the report is provided. 14.2 CONTRACTOR'S WARRANTY OF TITLE Contractor warrants and guarantees that title to all Work, materials and equipment covered by any Application for Payment, whether incorporated in the Project or not, will pass to the Owner no later than the time of payment, free and clear of liens. No materials or supplies for the Work shall be purchased by Contractor or Subcontractor subject to any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale contact or other agreement by which an interest is retained by the seller. Contractor warrants that he has good title to all materials and supplies used by him in the Work, free from all liens, claims or encumbrances. Contractor shall indemnify and save the Owner harmless from all claims growing out of the lawful demands of Subcontractors, laborers, workmen, mechanics, materialmen, and furnisher's of machinery and parts thereof, equipment, power tools, and all supplies incurred in the furtherance of the performance of this Contract. Contractor shall at the Owner's request, furnish satisfactory evidence that all obligations of the nature hereinabove designated have been paid, discharged, or waived. If Contractor fails to do so, then the Owner may, after having served written notice on said Contractor either pay unpaid bills, of which the Owner has written notice, or withhold from the Contractor's unpaid compensation a sum of money deemed reasonably sufficient to pay any and all such lawful claims until satisfactory evidence is furnished that all liabilities have been fully discharged, whereupon payment to Contractor shall be resumed in accordance with the terms of this Contract, but in no event shall the provisions of this sentence be construed to impose any obligations upon the Owner to the Contractor or the Surety. In paying any unpaid bills of the Contractor, the Owner shall be deemed the agent of Contractor and any payment so made by the Owner shall be considered as payment made under the Contract by the Owner to Contractor, and the Owner shall not be liable to Contractor for any such payment made in good faith. 14.3 REVIEW OF APPLICATIONS FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS The Owner's Representative will within twenty (20) business days after receipt authorize and process payment by the Owner a properly submitted and documented Application for payment, unless the application requires review by an Agent. If the Application for payment requires review and approval by an Agent, properly submitted and documented Applications for payment will be paid by the Owner within twenty -five (25) business days. If an Application for payment is rejected, notice shall be given within twenty (20) business days of receipt indicating the reasons for refusing payment. The reasons for rejecting an Application will be submitted in writing, specifying deficiencies and identifying actions that would make the Application proper. Sectionlll.docxx Page 35 of 51 7/7/2014 Section III — General Conditions In the latter case, Contractor may make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. The Owner's Representative or Agent may refuse to recommend the whole or any part of any payment to Owner. Owner's Representative or Agent may also refuse to recommend any such payment, or, because of subsequently discovered evidence or the results of subsequent inspections or test, nullify any such payment previously recommended, to such extent as may be necessary in Owner Representative's or Agent's opinion to protect the Owner from loss because: (i) the Work is defective, or completed Work has been damaged requiring correction or replacement, (ii) the Contract Price has been reduced by amendment or Change Order, (iii) the Owner has been required to correct defective Work or complete Work, or (iv) Owner's Representative or Agent has actual knowledge of the occurrence of any of the events enumerated in the article on Suspension of Work and Termination. The Owner may refuse to make payment of the full amount recommended by the Owner's Representative or Agent because: (i) claims have been made against the Owner on account of Contractor's performance or furnishing of the Work, (ii) Liens have been filed in connection with the Work, except where Contractor has delivered a specific Bond satisfactory to the Owner to secure the satisfaction and discharge of such Liens, (iii) there are other items entitling the Owner to a set -off against the amount recommended, or (iv) the Owner has actual knowledge of any of the events described in this paragraph. The Owner shall give Contractor notice of refusal to pay in accordance with the time constraints of this section with a copy to the Owner's Representative or Agent, stating the reasons for such actions, and Owner shall promptly pay Contractor the amount so withheld, or any adjustment thereto agreed to by the Owner and Contractor, when Contractor corrects to the Owner's satisfaction the reasons for such action. 14.4PARTIAL UTILIZATION Use by the Owner at the Owner's option of any substantially completed part of the Work which (i) has specifically been identified in the Contract Documents, or (ii) Owner, Engineer, Owner's Representative, and Contractor agree constitutes a separately functioning and usable part of the Work that can be used by the Owner for its intended purpose without significant interference with Contractor's performance of the remainder of the Work, may be accomplished prior to Final Completion of all the Work subject to the following: The Owner at any time may request Contractor in writing to permit the Owner to use any such part of the Work which the Owner believes to be ready for its intended use and substantially complete. If Contractor agrees that such part of the Work is substantially complete, Contractor will certify to Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer that such part of the Work is substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Contractor at any time may notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Engineer in writing that Contractor considers any such part of the Work ready for its intended use and substantially complete and request Owner's Representative to issue a certificate of Substantial Completion for that part of the Work. Within a reasonable time after either such request, Owner, Contractor, Owner's Representative, and Engineer shall make an inspection of that part of the Work to determine its status of completion. If Engineer does not consider that part of the Work to be substantially complete, Engineer will notify Owner, Owner's Representative, and Contractor in writing giving the reasons therefore. If Engineer considers that part of the Work to be substantially complete, the provisions of the articles for Substantial Completion and Partial Utilization will apply with respect to certification of Substantial Completion of that part of the Work and the division of responsibility in respect thereof and access thereto. SectionIll.docxx Page 36 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 14.5 FINAL INSPECTION Upon written notice from Contractor that the entire Work or an agreed portion thereof is complete, Owner's Representative will make a final inspection with Engineer, Owner and Contractor and will within thirty (30) days notify Contractor in writing of particulars in which this inspection reveals that the Work is incomplete or defective. The Owner's Representative will produce a final punch list, deliver it to the Contractor within five (5) days of completion and assign a date for this work to be completed not less than thirty (30) days from delivery of the list. Failure to include any corrective work or pending items does not alter the responsibility of the contractor to complete all the construction services purchased pursuant to the contract. Contractor shall immediately take such measures as are necessary to complete such Work or remedy such deficiencies. 14.6FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT After Contractor has completed all such corrections to the satisfaction of Owner's Representative and has delivered in accordance with the Contract Documents all maintenance and operating instructions, As -built /Record Drawings, schedules, guarantees, Bonds, certificates or other evidence of insurance required by the paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, certificates of inspection, Inspector overtime reimbursement as required in the Contract Documents and other documents, Contractor may make application for final payment following the procedure for progress payments. The final Application for Payment shall be accompanied (except as previously delivered) by: (i) all documentation called for in the Contract Documents, including but not limited to the evidence of insurance required by paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, (ii) consent of the surety, if any or if necessary, to final payment, and (iii) complete and legally effective releases or waivers (satisfactory to the Owner) of all Liens arising out of or filed in connection with the Work. In lieu of such releases or waivers of Liens and as approved by the Owner, Contractor may furnish receipts or releases in full and an affidavit of Contractor that: (i) the releases and receipts include all labor, services, material and equipment for which a Lien could be filed, and (ii) all payrolls, material and equipment bills and other indebtedness connected with the Work for which the Owner or the Owner's property might in any way be responsible have been paid or otherwise satisfied. If any Subcontractor or Supplier fails to furnish such a release or receipt in full, Contractor may furnish a Bond or other collateral satisfactory to the Owner to indemnify the Owner against any Lien. Prior to application for final payment, Contractor shall clean and remove from the premises all surplus and discarded materials, rubbish, and temporary structures, and shall restore in an acceptable manner all property, both public and private, which has been damaged during the prosecution of the Work, and shall leave the Work in a neat and presentable condition. 14.7FINAL PAYMENT AND ACCEPTANCE If through no fault of Contractor, final completion of the Work is significantly delayed and if Owner's Representative so confirms, the Owner shall, upon receipt of Contractor's final Application for payment and recommendation of Owner's Representative, and without terminating the Agreement, make payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and accepted. If the remaining balance to be held by the Owner for Work not fully completed or corrected is less than the retainage stipulated in the Agreement, and if Bonds have been furnished as required in paragraph for Bonds and Insurance, the written consent of the surety to the payment of the balance due for that portion of the Work fully completed and Sectionlll.docxx Page 37 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111 — General Conditions accepted shall be submitted by Contractor to Owner's Representative with the Application for such payment. Such payment shall be made under the terms and conditions governing final payment, except that such payment shall not constitute a waiver of claims. If on the basis of Owner Representative's observation of the Work during construction and final inspection, and Owner Representative's review of the final Application for Payment and accompanying documentation, all as required by the Contract Documents, Owner's Representative is satisfied that the Work has been completed and Contractor's other obligations under the Contract Documents have been fulfilled, Owner's Representative will indicate in writing his recommendation of payment and present the Application to Owner for payment. Thereupon, Owner's Representative will give written notice to Owner and Contractor that the Work is acceptable subject to the provisions of this article. Otherwise, Owner's Representative will return the Application to Contractor, indicating in writing the reasons for refusing to recommend final payment, in which case Contractor shall make the necessary corrections and resubmit the Application. If the Application and accompanying documentation are appropriate as to form and substance, the Owner shall, within twenty (20) days after receipt thereof pay contractor the amount recommended by Owner's Representative. 14.8WAIVER OF CLAIMS The making and acceptance of final payment will constitute: a waiver of all claims by the Owner against Contractor, except claims arising from unsettled Liens, from defective Work appearing after final inspection, from failure to comply with the Contract Documents or the terms of any special guarantees specified therein, or from Contractor's continuing obligations under the Contract Documents; and a waiver of all claims by Contractor against the Owner other than those previously made in writing and still unsettled. 15 SUSPENSION OF WORK AND TERMINATION 15.1 OWNER MAY SUSPEND THE WORK At any time and without cause, Owner's Representative may suspend the Work or any portion thereof for a period of not more than ninety (90) days by notice in writing to Contractor, which will fix the date on which Work will be resumed. Contractor shall resume the Work on the date so fixed. Contractor shall be allowed an adjustment in the Contract Price or an extension of the Contract Times, or both, directly attributable to any such suspension if Contractor makes an approved claim therefore as provided in the articles for Change of Contract Price and Change of Contract Time. 15.2OWNER MAY TERMINATE Upon the occurrence of any one or more of the following events; if Contractor persistently fails to perform the work in accordance with the Contract Documents (including, but not limited to, failure to supply sufficient skilled workers or suitable materials or equipment or failure to adhere to the progress schedule as adjusted from time to time); if Contractor disregards Laws and Regulations of any public body having jurisdiction; if Contractor disregards the authority of Owner's Representative; if Contractor otherwise violates in any substantial way any provisions of the Contract Documents; or if the Work to be done under this Contract is abandoned, or if this Sectionlll.docxx Page 38 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111— General Conditions Contract or any part thereof is sublet, without the previous written consent of the Owner, or if the Contract or any claim thereunder is assigned by Contractor otherwise than as herein specified, or at any time Owner's Representative certifies in writing to the Owner that the rate of progress of the Work or any part thereof is unsatisfactory or that the work or any part thereof is unnecessarily or unreasonably delayed. The Owner may, after giving Contractor (and the surety, if any), seven days' written notice and, to the extent permitted by Laws and Regulations, terminate the services of Contractor, exclude Contractor from the site and take possession of the Work and of all Contractor's tools, appliances, construction equipment and machinery at the site and use the same to the full extent they could be used by Contractor (without liability to Contractor for trespass or conversion), incorporate in the Work all materials and equipment stored at the site or for which the Owner has paid Contractor but which are stored elsewhere, and finish the Work as the Owner may deem expedient. In such case Contractor shall not be entitled to receive any further payment until the Work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the Contract Price exceeds all claims, costs, losses and damages sustained by the Owner arising out of or resulting from completing the Work such excess will be paid to Contractor. If such claims, costs, losses and damages exceed such unpaid balance, Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. Such claims, costs, losses and damages incurred by the Owner will be reviewed by Owner's Representative as to their reasonableness and when so approved by Owner's Representative incorporated in a Change Order, provided that when exercising any rights or remedies under this paragraph the Owner shall not be required to obtain the lowest price for the Work performed. Where Contractor's services have been so terminated by the Owner, the termination will not affect any rights or remedies of the Owner against Contractor then existing or which may thereafter accrue. Any retention or payment of moneys due Contractor by the Owner will not release Contractor from liability. Upon seven (7) days' written notice to Contractor and Owner's Representative, the Owner may, without cause and without prejudice to any other right or remedy of the Owner, elect to terminate the Agreement. In such case, Contractor shall be paid (without duplication of any items): for completed and acceptable Work executed in accordance with the Contract Documents prior to the effective date of termination, including fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such Work; for expenses sustained prior to the effective date of termination in performing services and furnishing labor, materials or equipment as required by the Contract Documents in connection with uncompleted Work, plus fair and reasonable sums for overhead and profit on such expenses; for all claims, costs, losses and damages incurred in settlement of terminated contracts with Subcontractors, Suppliers and others; and for reasonable expenses directly attributable to termination. Contractor shall not be paid on account of loss of anticipated profits or revenue or other economic loss arising out of or resulting from such termination. Sectionlll.docxx Page 39 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111— General Conditions 15.3CONTRACTOR MAY STOP WORK OR TERMINATE If, through no act or fault of Contractor, the Work is suspended for a period of more than ninety (90) days by the Owner or under an order of court or other public authority, or the Owner's Representative fails to act on any Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted or the Owner fails for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, then Contractor may, upon seven (7) days' written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative, and provided the Owner or Owner's Representative does not remedy such suspension or failure within that time, terminate the Agreement and recover from the Owner payment on the same terms as provided in the article for the Owner May Terminate. However, if the Work is suspended under an order of court through no fault of Owner, the Contractor shall not be entitled to payment except as the Court may direct. In lieu of terminating the Agreement and without prejudice to any other right or remedy, if Owner's Representative has failed to act on an Application for Payment within thirty (30) days after it is submitted, or the Owner has failed for thirty (30) days to pay Contractor any sum finally determined to be due, Contractor may upon seven (7) day's written notice to the Owner and Owner's Representative stop the Work until payment of all such amounts due Contractor. The provisions of this article are not intended to preclude Contractor from making claim under paragraphs for Change of Contract Price or Change of Contract Time or otherwise for expenses or damage directly attributable to Contractor's stopping Work as permitted by this article. 16 DISPUTE RESOLUTION If and to the extent that the Owner and Contractor have agreed on the method and procedure for resolving disputes between them that may arise under this Agreement, such dispute resolution method and procedure will proceed. If no such agreement on the method and procedure for resolving such disputes has been reached, subject to the provisions of the article for Decisions on Disputes, the Owner and Contractor may exercise such rights or remedies as either may otherwise have under the Contract Documents or by Laws or Regulations in respect of any dispute provided, however, that nothing herein shall require a dispute to be submitted to binding arbitration. 17 MISCELLANEOUS 17.1 SUBMITTAL AND DOCUMENT FORMS The form of all submittals, notices, change orders, pay applications, logs, schedules and other documents permitted or required to be used or transmitted under the Contract Documents shall be determined by the Owner's Representative subject to the approval of Owner. 17.2GIVING NOTICE Whenever any provision of the Contract Documents requires the giving of written notice, notice will be deemed to have been validly given if delivered in person to the individual or to a member of the firm or to an officer of the corporation for whom it is intended, or if delivered or sent by registered or certified mail, postage prepaid, to the last business address known to the giver of the notice. Sectionlll.docxx Page 40 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section III — General Conditions 17.3 NOTICE OF CLAIM Should the Owner or Contractor suffer injury or damage to person or property because of any error, omission or any act of the other party or of any of the other party's officers, employees or agents or others for whose acts the other party is legally liable, claim will be made in writing to the other party within a reasonable time of the first observance of such injury or damage. The provisions of this paragraph shall not be construed as a substitute for or a waiver of the provisions of any applicable statute of limitations or repose. 17.4PROFESSIONAL FEES AND COURT COSTS INCLUDED Whenever reference is made to "claims, costs, losses and damages," the phrase shall include in each case, but not be limited to, all fees and charges of engineers, architects, attorneys and other professionals and all court or other dispute resolution costs. 17.5ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign this contract or any part thereof or any rights thereunder without the approval of Owner, nor without the consent of surety unless the surety has waived its rights to notice of assignment. 17.6 RENEWAL OPTION Annual Contracts issued through the Engineering Department may be renewed for up to two (2) years, upon mutual consent of both the Owner and the ContractorNendor. All terms, conditions and unit prices shall remain constant unless otherwise specified in the contract specifications or in the Invitation to bid. Renewals shall be made at the sole discretion of the Owner, and must be agreed to in writing by both parties. All renewals are contingent upon the availability of funds, and the satisfactory performance of the Contractor as determined by the Construction Department. 17.7ROLL -OFF CONTAINERS AND /OR DUMPSTERS All City construction projects shall utilize City of Clearwater Solid Waste roll -off containers and/or dumpsters for their disposal needs. For availability or pricing contact Mike Pryor at the City of Clearwater, Solid Waste Department, phone: (727) 562 -4923 or email: Michael.Pryor @myClearwater.com. 18 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK The City reserves the right to accept and use any portion of the work whenever it is considered to the public interest to do so. The Engineer shall have the power to direct on what line or street the Contractor shall work and order thereof. 19 MATERIAL USED All material incorporated into the final work shall be new material unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. If requested by the Engineer, the Contractor shall furnish purchase receipts of all materials. Sectionlll.docxx Page 41 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111 — General Conditions 20 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS The various Contract Documents shall be given precedence, in case of conflict, error or discrepancy, as follows: Modifications, Contract Agreement, Addenda, Supplementary General Conditions, General Conditions, Supplementary Technical Specifications, Technical Specifications, Drawings. In a series of Modifications or Addenda the latest will govern. 21 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) 21.1 SALES TAX SAVINGS The Owner reserves the right to purchase certain portions of the materials for the Project directly in order to save applicable sales tax in compliance with Florida Law since owner is exempt from the payment of sales tax. The contract price includes Florida sales and other applicable taxes for materials, supplies, and equipment which will be a part of the Contractor's Work. Owner - purchasing of construction materials, if selected, will be administered on a deductive Change Order basis. The contract price shall be reduced by the actual cost of the materials purchased by owner plus the normally applicable sales tax, even if the actual cost is in excess of the cost for the materials as -bid by the Contractor. For purposes of calculating engineering fees, contractor fees, architects fees, and any other amounts that are based on the contract amount, however, the original, as -bid contract amount shall be used. Direct purchase shall be considered for single items that exceed $10,000 in value and /or items identified in SECTION V, Bidders Proposal. The Contractor shall provide the Owner an ODP Summary of all intended suppliers, vendors, and materials for consideration as ODP materials (refer to ODP Instructions in Contract Appendix). 21.2TITLE AND OWNER RISK Owner will issue Purchase Orders and provide a copies of Owner's Florida Consumer Certification of Tax Exemption and Certificate of Entitlement directly to the Vendor for ODP materials. Invoices for ODP materials shall be issued to the Owner in care of the Contractor. Notwithstanding the transfer of ODP materials by the Owner to the Contractor's possession, the Owner shall retain legal and equitable title to any and all ODP materials; therefore, the owner assumes the risk of damage or loss at the time of purchase or delivery of items, unless material is damaged as the result of negligence by the Contractor. 21.3CONTRACTOR'S RECEIPT OF MATERIALS The Contractor shall be fully responsible for all matters relating to the receipt of materials furnished to the Owner including, but not limited to, verifying correct quantities, verifying documents of orders in a timely manner, coordinating purchases, providing and obtaining all warranties and guarantees required by the Contract Documents, and inspection and acceptance of the goods at the time of delivery. The Contractor shall coordinate delivery schedules, sequence of delivery, loading orientation, and other arrangements normally required by the Contractor for the particular materials furnished. The Contractor shall provide all services required for the unloading and handling of materials. The Contractor agrees to indemnify and hold harmless the Sectionlll.docxx Page 42 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 111 — General Conditions Owner from any and all claims of whatever nature resulting from non - payment of goods to suppliers arising from the action of the Contractor. As ODP materials are delivered to the job site, the Contractor shall visually inspect all shipments from the suppliers, and approve the vendor's invoice for materials delivered. The Contractor shall assure that each delivery of ODP materials is accompanied by documentation adequate to identify the Purchase Order against which the purchase is made. This documentation may consist of a delivery ticket and /or an invoice from the supplier conforming to the Purchase Order together with such additional information as the Owner may require. The Contractor will then forward the invoice and additional information, if available, to the Owner for payment within thirty (30) days of receipt of said goods or materials. Such payment shall be directly from public funds. The Contractor shall insure that ODP materials conform to the Specifications and determine prior to acceptance of goods at time of delivery if such materials are patently defective, and whether such materials are identical to the materials ordered and match the description on the bill of lading. If the Contractor discovers defective or non - conformities in ODP materials upon such visual inspection, the Contractor shall not utilize such nonconforming or defective materials in the Contractor's Work and instead shall properly notify the Owner of the defective or nonconforming condition so that repair or replacement of those materials can occur without undue delay or interruption to the Project. If the Contractor fails to perform such inspection and otherwise incorporates into the Contractor's Work such defective or nonconforming ODP materials, the condition of which it either knew or should have known by performance of an inspection, Contractor shall be responsible for all damages to the Owner, resulting from Contractor's incorporation of such materials into the Project, including liquidated damages. 21.4ODP RECORDS, WARRANTIES AND INDEMNIFICATION The Contractor shall maintain records of all ODP materials it incorporates into Contractor's Work from the stock of ODP materials in its possession. The Contractor shall account monthly to the Owner for any ODP materials delivered into the Contractor's possession, indicating portions of all such materials which have been incorporated in the Contractor's Work. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining and managing all warranties and guarantees for all materials and products as required by the Contract Documents. All repair, maintenance, or damage- repair calls shall be forwarded to the Contractor for resolution with the appropriate supplier, vendor, or subcontractor. The Owner shall indemnify and hold Contractor harmless from any sales tax (and interest and penalties incurred in connection therewith) in the event there is a final determination that purchases made by Owner, which Owner treats as being exempt from sales tax, are subject to sales tax. "Final determination" shall mean an assessment by the Department of Revenue that is no longer subject to protest, or a determination of a court having jurisdiction over such matters that is final and not subject to appeal. Contractor agrees to promptly notify owner of any audit, assessment, proposed assessment or notice of deficiency issued with regard to the Project and relating to ODP materials. Sectionlll.docxx Page 43 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111 — General Conditions 22 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 22.1 GENERAL The Contractor shall notify all residents along the construction route or within a 500 -foot radius, unless stated otherwise in the Contract Documents, with a printed door hanger notice indicating the following information about the proposed construction work and the Contractor performing the work: City seal or logo; the scheduled date for the start of construction; the type of construction; general sequence and scheduling of construction events; possibility of water service disruption and /or colored water due to construction efforts; Contractor's name, the Superintendent's name, Contractor address and telephone number; Contractor's company logo (optional); requirement for residents to remove landscaping and /or other private appurtenances which are in conflict with the proposed construction; and other language as appropriate to the scope of Contract work. Sample door hanger including proposed language shall be approved by the City prior to the start of construction. Notification shall be printed on brightly colored and durable card stock and shall be a minimum of 4 -1/4 by 11 inches in size. Notification (door hanger) shall be posted to residences and businesses directly affected by the Contractor's activities no later than seven (7) days prior to the start of construction activity. Directly affected by the Contractor's activities shall mean all Contractor operations including staging areas, equipment and material storage, principal access routes across private property, etc. Contractor cannot start without proper seven (7) day notice period to residents. Contractor is required to maintain sufficient staff to answer citizen inquiries during normal business hours and to maintain appropriate message recording equipment to receive citizen inquires after business hours. Resident notification by the Contractor is a non - specific pay item to be included in the bid items provided in the contract proposal. 22.2 EXAMPLE CITY SEAL Of CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF CONSTRUCTION TODAY'S DATE: / / PLEASE EXCUSE US FOR ANY INCONVENIENCE We are the construction contractor performing (state type of contract) for the City of Clearwater in your area. The work will be performed in the public right -of -way adjacent to your property. This notice is placed a minimum of seven (7) days in advance of construction to notify property owners of the pending start of construction. (Brief description of the construction process to be expected by the property owners) The construction process may necessitate the removal of certain items from the right -of -way. Typical items such as sprinklers, grass, and postal approved mailboxes will be replaced by the contractor within a reasonably short period of time. The replacement of driveways and sidewalks will be made using standard asphalt or concrete materials. The property owner is responsible for the expense and coordination to replace driveways and sidewalks which have customized colors, textures and /or materials. Small trees, shrubs, landscaping materials, unauthorized mailboxes or structures within the right -of -way which must be removed due to the construction process will not be replaced. The property owner is responsible to relocate any such items which the property Sectionlll.docxx Page 44 of 51 7/7/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section 111— General Conditions owner wishes to save prior to the start of construction. Vehicles parked on the streets or within the right -of -way may be required to be placed elsewhere. We are available to answer any questions you may have regarding the construction process or any particular item that must be relocated. Please contact our Construction Manager at (727) . We will be more than happy to assist you. Construction is anticipated to begin on: Company Name Company Address Contractor Phone Number 23 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 23.1 SCOPE AND PURPOSE The Owner desires to inform the general public on the Owner's use and expenditure of public funding for general capital improvement and maintenance projects. To help accomplish this purpose, the Contractor is required to prepare and display public project information signs during the full course of the contract period. These signs will be displayed at all location(s) of active work. Payment to Contractor for the preparation, installation and management of project sign(s) shall be included in the cost of the work. The number of and type of signs will be stated in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 — SCOPE DESCRIPTION. 23.2TYPE OF PROJECT SIGN, FIXED OR PORTABLE Sign type shall be "fixed" on stationary projects and "portable" on projects which have extended locations or various locations. The particular wording to be used on the signs will be determined after contract award has been approved. Contractor will be provided the wording to be used on sign at the preconstruction conference. 23.3 FIXED SIGN Fixed sign shall be 4 -foot by 6 -foot (4'x6') in size and painted on a sheet of exterior grade plywood of the same size and a minimum thickness of 1/2- inches. Sign shall be attached to a minimum of two (2) 4 -inch by 4 -inch (4 "x4 ") below grade pressure treated (P.T.) wooden posts and braced as necessary for high winds. Posts shall be long enough to provide secure anchoring in the ground. Bottom of sign must be a minimum of 24- inches above the ground. Alternate mounting system or attachment to fencing or other fixed structure can be considered for approval. Sign shall be painted white on both sides with exterior rated paint. 23.4 PORTABLE SIGNS Portable sign shall be a minimum of 24- inches by 30- inches (24 "x30 ") in size and will be attached to a standard sized portable traffic barricade. Sign material shall be aluminum, 0.080 - inches or thicker, background of white reflective sheeting, and shall be silkscreen or vinyl lettering. Portable sign shall be two signs located and attached to each side of the traffic barricade. SectionlIl.docxx Page 45 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 1I1 — General Conditions 23.5SIGN COLORING Background shall be white. Project Descriptive Name shall be in blue lettering. All other lettering shall be black. Basic lettering on sign shall be in all capital letters, of size proportional to the sign itself. Each sign shall depict the City's sun and waves logo. The color of the sun shall be pantone yellow; the wave shall be process blue; and the text shall be black. 23.6SIGN PLACEMENT Signs shall be placed where they are readily visible by the general public which pass by the project site. Signs are not to be placed where they may become a hazard or impediment to either pedestrian or vehicular traffic. For construction projects outside of the Owner's right -of -way, the signs will be placed on the project site. For projects constructed inside of the Owner's right -of- way, the signs will be placed in the right -of -way. Portable signs are to be moved to the locations of active work on the project. Multiple portable signs will be necessary where work is ongoing in several locations at the same time. Fixed signs are to be placed at the start of construction and will remain in place until the request for final payment. 23.7SIGN MAINTENANCE The Contractor is responsible for preparation, installation, movement, maintenance, replacement, removal and disposal of all project signs during the full course of the contract period. The Contractor will place and secure portable signs from dislocation by wind or other actions. Signs are to be cleaned as necessary to maintain legibility and immediately replaced if defaced. SectionIII.docxx Page 46 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111 — General Conditions 23.8TYPICAL PROJECT SIGN PROJECT NAME (CONTRACT NUMBER) (DEPARTMENT NAME) PROJECT CONTRACTOR: COMPLETION DATE: FUNDING: OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE: U 1 "c4' P T Post (Typ.) 24 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE It will be required that the work will commence not later than five (5) calendar days after the Engineer gives written notice to proceed (NTP), which notice shall be given as outlined in Article 2 of these General Conditions. It is further required that all work within this contract be completed within the indicated number of consecutive calendar days as determined in SECTION IV, ARTICLE 1.1 - SCOPE DESCRIPTION. Contract date to commence at issuance of notice to proceed. If the Contractor fails to complete the work within the stipulated time, the City will retain the amount stated in the Contract, per calendar day, for each day that the contract remains incomplete. The work shall be discontinued on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved Holidays. If it becomes necessary for the Contractor to perform work on Saturdays, Sundays, and approved City of Clearwater Employee Holidays, that in the opinion of the Engineer, will require the presence of Inspectors, the Sectionlll.docxx Page 47 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 11I — General Conditions Contractor shall pay the City of Clearwater, Florida, the amount of Four Hundred Eighty Dollars ($480.00) per each eight -hour (8) day for each Inspector given such assignment. The Contractor shall remedy any defects in the work at his own expense and pay for any damage to other work resulting therefrom which appear within a period of one (1) year from the date of final acceptance. 25 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM Any company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or is engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, is ineligible for, and may not bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars. Therefore, if applicable, each entity submitting a bid, proposal, or response to a solicitation must certify to the City of Clearwater that it is not on either list or engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria at the time of submitting a bid, proposal or response, in accordance with section 287.135, Florida Statutes. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing, or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce. The certification form (the Certification) is attached hereto, and it must be submitted, along with all other relevant contract documents, at the time of submitting a bid, proposal, or response. Failure to provide the Certification may deem the entity's submittal non - responsive. If the City of Clearwater determines that an entity has submitted a false certification form, been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2011 through June 30, 2012), or submitted a false certification form, has been placed either on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List or been engaged in business operations in Cuba or Syria, (for contracts entered into or renewed on or after July 1, 2012) then the contract may be terminated at the option of the City of Clearwater. Other than the submission of a false certification, the option to waive the aforementioned deficiencies mentioned in the previous sentence may be asserted on a case -by -case basis, at the sole discretion of the City of Clearwater, if to the following conditions are found to exist: A. For Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List or the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, (all of the following must occur): 1. The scrutinized business operations were made before July 1, 2011. 2. The scrutinized business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2011. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. Sectionlll.docxx Page 48 of 51 7/7/2014 Section 111 — General Conditions 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized and is implementing a formal plan to cease scrutinized business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new scrutinized business operations. B. For Companies Engaged in Business Operations in Cuba or Syria: 1. The business operations were made before July 1, 2012. 2. The business operations have not been expanded or renewed after July 1, 2012. 3. The City of Clearwater determines that it is in the best interest of the City to contract with the company or entity. 4. The company or entity has adopted, has publicized, and is implementing a formal plan to cease business operations and to refrain from engaging in any new business operations in Cuba or Syria. Further, the City may allow a company to bid on, submit a proposal for, or enter into or renew a contract with the City of Clearwater for goods or services for an amount equal to or greater than one million ($1,000,000.00) dollars, if the City makes a public finding that, absent one of the above exemptions, the City would otherwise be unable to obtain goods or services for which the contract is offered. The City retains the right to pursue civil penalties and any other applicable rights and remedies as provided by law for the false submission of the attached certification form. Sectionlll.docxx Page 49 of 51 7/7/2014 Section II1 — General Conditions SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. Sectionlll.docxx Authorized Signature Printed Name Title Name of Entity /Corporation Page 50 of 51 7/7/2014 STATE OF COUNTY OF Section 111 — General Conditions The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this day of , 201_, by (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the (title) of (name of corporation /entity), personally known to me as described herein , or produced a (type of identification) as identification, and who did /did not take an oath. Notary Public Printed Name My Commission Expires: NOTARY SEAL ABOVE Sectionlll.docxx Page 51 of 51 7/7/2014 SECTION IIIA SUPPLEMENTAL GENERAL CONDITIONS These Supplemental General Conditions amend or supplement the General Conditions of the Construction Contract and other provisions of the Contract Documents as indicated below. All provisions that are not so amended or supplementary remain in full force and effect. The terms used in these Supplemental General Conditions have the meanings stated in the General Conditions. 1. In Paragraph 1 Definitions, delete the definition for Contract Time in its entirety and insert the following in its place: Contract Time - The number of days or the dates stated in the Contract to: (i) achieve Milestones, if any; (ii) achieve Substantial Completion; and (iii) achieve Final Completion. 2. In Paragraph 1 Definitions, add the following new paragraph: Final Completion — The time at which the Work has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of the Engineer, the Work, including all "punch list" items, is fully and finally completed in a good and workmanlike manner, in accordance with the Contract Documents; is free of all defects and deficiencies; all required final governmental inspections and approvals have been obtained; and all final paperwork, including that necessary to prepare a Final Change Order (if required), has been submitted and approved. 3. Delete Paragraph 2.3 in its entirety and insert the following in its place: COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT TIME/NOTICE TO PROCEED; STARTING THE PROJECT The Contract Times will commence to run on the day indicated in the Notice to Proceed. The Contractor shall start to perform the Work on the date the Contract Time commences to run. No Work shall be done at the site prior to the date that the Contract Time commences to run. A Notice to Proceed may be issued at any time within 60 days after the Effective Date of the Agreement. A Notice to Proceed will not be issued prior to the Contractor providing the City a certified copy of the recorded payment and performance bond, pursuant to §255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes. 4. In Paragraph 6.1, delete the last sentence in the 4th paragraph and insert the following in its place: The cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be the City's actual cost per hour, not to exceed $120 per hour. When inspection is being provided by the Engineer or a consultant to the City, the cost of overtime inspection per hour shall be 3.0 times the Engineer's or consultant's direct technical labor cost. Section IIIA.doc Page 1 of 4 6/16/2014 5. In Paragraph 6.11.1, delete the first full sentence of the first paragraph and insert the following in its place: Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings and Samples as called for in the Technical Specifications, and all other items specified to be submitted in the Division 1 specifications, to Engineer for review as called for in the Technical Specifications or required by the Engineer. Items required to be submitted in accordance with Division 1 shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements for Shop Drawings as specified in the General Requirements. 6. Delete the last paragraph in Paragraph 6.11.1 in its entirety and insert the following in its place: Contractor shall furnish required submittals with complete information and accuracy. Owner reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for Engineer's actual direct technical labor cost times a 3.0 multiplier for the review of any first time submittals that account for a number greater than sixty (60), not to exceed $570 each. Contractor may combine or group similar items into a single submittal, such as valves or valve O &M manuals, or may group submittals pertaining to a single item into a single submittal, such as a valve shop drawing and the corresponding O &M manual. Contractor shall not combine unrelated items into a single submittal, such as valves and concrete mix. Owner reserves the right to backcharge Contractor for Engineer's actual direct technical labor cost times a 3.0 multiplier for the review of any re- submittals, or submittals requiring confirmation, that account for a number greater than twelve (12), not to exceed a cost of $285 each. In the event that Contractor requests a substitution for a previously approved item, all of Engineer's costs in the reviewing and approval of the substitution will be backcharged to Contractor, unless the need for such substitution is beyond the control of Contractor. Said costs shall be Engineer's actual direct technical labor cost times a 3.0 multiplier, not to exceed $570 each. 7. Delete Paragraph 24 in its entirety and insert the following in its place: 24 CONTRACT TIMES AND LIQUIDATED DAMAGES 24.1 Time is of the Essence 24.1.1 It is mutually agreed between the parties that time is of the essence. All Contract Time(s) for Milestones, if any, Substantial Completion, Final Completion and readiness for final payment as stated in the Contract Documents are of the essence of the Contract. 24.2 Substantial Completion 24.2.1 Contractor shall achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within 360 days from the date on which Owner issues Contractor a Notice to Proceed. 24.2.2 The term Substantial Completion means the time at which the Work has progressed to the point where, in the opinion of Engineer, the Work is otherwise sufficiently complete in Section IIIA.doc Page 2 of 4 6/16/2014 1 t 1 1 1 i r 1 1 1 1 1 1 accordance with the Contract Documents, so that the Work can be utilized for the purposes for which it is intended. The terms "substantially complete" and "substantially completed" as applied to all or part of the Work refer to Substantial Completion thereof. 24.3 Final Completion 24.3.1 Contractor shall achieve Final Completion of the Work within 390 days from the date on which Owner issues Contractor a Notice to Proceed. 24.4 Liquidated Damages 24.4.1 Contractor and Owner recognize that time is of the essence of this Contract and that Owner will suffer financial loss if the Work is not completed within the times specified herein, plus any extensions thereof allowed in accordance with Article 12 of the General Conditions. The parties also recognize the delays, expense, and difficulties involved in proving in a legal or arbitration proceeding the actual loss suffered by Owner if the Work is not completed on time. Accordingly, instead of requiring any such proof, Owner and Contractor agree that as liquidated damages for delay (but not as a penalty), Contractor shall pay as follows: 24.4.2 In the event Contractor fails to achieve Substantial Completion of the Work within the time specified above, Contractor shall be required to pay Owner the sum as specified in the Contract per day for each and every calendar day elapsing after the time specified above, until the Contractor has achieved Substantial Completion. 24.4.3 In the event Contractor fails to achieve Final Completion of the Work within the time specified above, the Owner shall also have the right to: A. Terminate the Contractor without further notice; B. Complete any of the remaining items and backcharge Contractor for all costs incurred, and exercise all other rights and remedies available at law or in equity. Section IIIA.doc Page 3 of 4 6/16/2014 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK Section IIIA.doc Page 4 of 4 6/16/2014 SECTION IV TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS Table of Contents: 1 SCOPE OF WORK 1 1.1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION 1 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST 7 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 8 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR 8 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS 8 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA 9 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY 9 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS 9 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS 9 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS 9 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK 11 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK 11 6 CONCRETE 12 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 12 7.1 EXCAVATION 12 7.2 FORMS 12 8 REINFORCEMENT 13 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT 13 9 OBSTRUCTIONS 13 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT 13 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS 14 12 DEWATERING 14 12.1 GENERAL 14 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 15 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL 15 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROMANYNON- CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY 15 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 17 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE 17 13.2 PRECAST TYPE 18 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) 18 13.3 DROP MANHOLES 18 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS 18 SECTION IV i 11/26/2013 1 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS 19 I' 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES 19 14 BACKFILL 19 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. 19 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES 19 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL 20 i 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 20 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20 18 UNDERDRAINS 20 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 21 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 21 19 STORM SEWERS 21 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION 21 T 19.2 TESTING 21 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT 22 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 22 I 20.1 MATERIALS 22 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 22 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 22 20.2 INSTALLATION 22 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 22 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 23 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS 23 20.4 TESTING 23 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS 23 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS 24 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 24 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE 24 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE 24 21 DRAINAGE 24 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 24 22.1 BASE 24 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE 26 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE 26 22.2 SUBGRADE 26 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 27 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 27 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS 27 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 27 SECTION IV ii 11/26/2013 1 1 23.1.1 AGGREGATE 27 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS 27 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE 27 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES 28 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS 28 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS 29 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 29 23.6.1 CRACKS 29 23.6.2 POTHOLES 29 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES 30 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 30 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 31 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 31 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT 31 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT 32 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 32 25.1 IRRIGATION 32 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION 32 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 34 25.1.3 EXECUTION 38 25.2 LANDSCAPE 41 25.2.1 GENERAL 41 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 46 25.2.3 EXECUTION 49 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 56 26.1 INTENT 56 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 56 26.3 MATERIALS 56 26.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 57 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION 57 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION 58 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION 58 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 58 26.9 PAYMENT 58 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS 58 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 59 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 59 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS 59 29 CONCRETE CURBS 59 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 59 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 59 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 59 SECTION IV iii 11/26/2013 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS 59 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS 60 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 60 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT 60 31 SODDING 60 32 SEEDING 61 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES 61 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES 61 33.2 PRECAST TYPE 62 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT 62 34 MATERIAL USED 62 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS 62 36 STREET SIGNS 62 37 AUDIO/VIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 62 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIO /VIDEO RECORDING 62 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING 62 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS 63 37.4 EQUIPMENT 63 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO 63 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO 63 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION 63 37.8 LIGHTING 64 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL 64 37.10 VIDEO LOG /INDEX 64 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE 64 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES 64 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 64 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS 64 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES 65 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS 65 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES 65 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS 65 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES 65 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS 66 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION 66 38.9 MAINTENANCE 66 38.10 COMPLIANCE 66 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING 69 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE 69 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 69 SECTION IV iv 11/26/2013 1 t t 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i r 1 1 41.1 SCOPE 69 41.2 MATERIALS 70 41.2.1 GENERAL 70 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 70 41.2.3 GATE VALVES 72 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES 72 41.2.5 HYDRANTS 73 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES 74 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 74 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS 74 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES 75 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS 75 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 75 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 75 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 75 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 77 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES 77 41.4 TESTS 78 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS 78 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST 78 41.5 STERILIZATION 78 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT 78 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM 78 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE 78 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS 79 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS 79 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 79 41.6.1 GENERAL 79 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 80 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 80 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 80 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 80 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS 81 43 TENNIS COURTS 81 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 81 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS 81 43.1.2 BASE COURSE 81 43.1.3 PRIME COAT 81 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE 81 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE 81 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 82 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 83 43.2.1 GENERAL 83 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 84 43.2.3 SLOPE 84 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 85 SECTION IV v 11/26/2013 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 85 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 85 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER 85 43.2.8 FENCING 86 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS 86 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 86 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE 88 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) 88 43.2.13 CONCRETE 88 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 88 43.2.15 WATER COOLER 89 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION 89 43.2.17 WARRANTY 89 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 90 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 90 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 90 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY 90 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES 91 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS 91 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS 91 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 91 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 91 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN 91 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION 92 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 92 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR 92 45 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE LINING 92 45.1 INTENT 92 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY 93 45.3 MATERIALS 93 45.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION 93 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION 94 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION 94 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION 94 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION 94 45.9 PAYMENT 94 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 95 46.1 MATERIALS 95 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS 95 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL 95 46.1.3 SAMPLES 95 46.1.4 REJECTION 95 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS 95 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 96 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE 96 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS 96 SECTION IV vi 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 �I 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 A t 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING 96 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE 96 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 96 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS 96 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION 96 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS 97 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER 97 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES 97 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED 97 46.4.7 BACKFILLING 98 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR 98 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS 98 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 98 47.1 SCOPE 98 47.2 MATERIALS 98 47.3 PIPE 98 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM 99 47.5 FITTINGS 99 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 99 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT 99 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE 99 48.3 COMPOSITION 99 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS 100 48.5 MATERIALS 100 48.6 WATER 100 48.7 REINFORCEMENT 100 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS 100 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION 101 48.10 PROPORTIONING 101 48.11 MIXING 101 48.12 APPLICATION 101 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS 102 48.14 SURFACE FINISH 102 48.15 CURING 102 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION 102 48.17 INSPECTION 103 48.18 EQUIPMENT 103 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 104 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT 104 49.2 PAYMENT 104 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 104 49.3.1 MATERIALS 104 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 105 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 105 49.4.1 MATERIALS 106 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL 106 SECTION IV vii 11/26/2013 49.6 GROUTING MIX 106 49.7 LINER MIX 106 49.8 WATER 107 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS 107 49.10 EQUIPMENT 107 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 107 49.11.1 PREPARATION 107 49.11.2 MIXING 108 49.11.3 SPRAYING 108 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING 108 49.11.5 CURING 108 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE 109 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 109 49.12.1 SCOPE 109 49.12.2 MATERIALS 109 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 111 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS 113 51 IN -LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 113 51.1 SCOPE 113 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 114 51.2.1 ASPHALT 114 51.2.2 CONCRETE 114 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX 114 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 114 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE 115 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 115 51.6 PLAYING LINES 115 51.7 GENERAL 115 51.8 LIMITATIONS 115 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION 116 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 116 53.1 MATERIAL 116 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 116 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: 118 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE 119 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC 119 53.2 PERFORMANCE 119 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 120 54.1 SCOPE 120 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK 120 54.3 WORK METHODS 121 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING 121 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT 121 54.4 LITTER 121 54.5 VISUAL CHECK 121 SECTION IV viii 11/26/2013 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING 121 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) 121 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL 121 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL 122 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY 122 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION 122 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA 122 54.13 MULCH CONDITION 122 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR 122 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL 122 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION 122 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION 123 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE 123 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK 123 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL 123 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 123 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 124 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE 124 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 124 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS 125 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS 125 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES 125 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES 125 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING 125 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS 126 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 126 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT 126 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING 126 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 126 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 126 57 RIPRAP 126 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT 126 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT 127 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY 127 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL 127 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING 127 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS 127 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 128 60 SIGNING AND MARKING 128 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 128 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING 128 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 128 SECTION IV ix 11/26/2013 62 TREE PROTECTION 129 62.1 TREE BARRICADES 129 62.2 ROOT PRUNING 129 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING 130 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 131 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN 131 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES 131 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE 131 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS 132 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS 132 63.6 POSTING 132 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES 132 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 132 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS 132 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCES 133 SECTION IV x 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1 SCOPE OF WORK t1 SCOPE DESCRIPTION Project Name: NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION Project Number: 12- 0025 -UT Scope of Work: The work consists of rehabilitating four existing circular clarifiers (Numbers 5 -8) and associated equipment at the City's Northeast Water Reclamation Facility (WRF) as described herein. Restrictions for this Project: All work associated with this project is to be performed at the City of Clearwater's Northeast WRF as part of an overall program to rehabilitate the clarifiers in all of the City's WRFs. The work for this project involves the Northeast WRF Clarifiers 5 -8, equipment in the South RAS Pump House, the sludge blanket level detector instrumentation for all eight clarifiers, and equipment in the North RAS Pump House. The Contractor shall disregard any and all references to the Northeast WRF Clarifiers 1 -4, the Marshall Street WRF, and the East Plant WRF. The Owner may implement the Owner Direct Purchase option for the Clarifier Equipment identified in Section 11225, the RAS Pumps identified in Section 11310, and other equipment. The Contractor shall provide all work associated with the Owner Direct Purchased equipment including, but not limited to, all coordination, shop drawing review, approval, and submittal to the engineer, ordering and scheduling of the equipment delivery to the site, review and processing of the invoices, transportation, unloading, storage, installation in strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions, start-up services, O &M manuals and training as specified, and all other labor, materials, tools, appliances, supervision and incidentals necessary for the proper completion of the work included in the particular specification section. 1. Northeast WRF Clarifiers 1 -4 Rehabilitation (NOT IN CONTRACT) • Replace all rotating and mechanical equipment in Clarifiers 1 thru 4 including the center columns, the rotating mechanism, the drives, the walkway bridges, the walkway bridge handrail, the scum beaches, the scum troughs, the scum baffles, the scum baffle supports, the weirs, and the associated hardware and subcomponents of these items. • Replace the scum pipe wall penetrations on each clarifier from the scum trough to the first pipe joint or fitting outside the clarifier wall. Replace the link seals for the wall penetrations. Saw cut, remove and restore the overbearing concrete slab as required to replace the scum pipe wall penetrations. • Replace two RAS pumps, motors, pump bases, and VFDs. Re -grout the pump bases. Reconnect the existing seal water piping and the existing drain piping. • Remove the existing copper piping associated with the existing flow matcher VFDs. Plug the copper pipe to liquid connections with appropriate fittings on the RAS piping and at the RAS well. • Replace two RAS pump suction plug valves. SECTION IV Page 1 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Replace two RAS pump discharge check valves. • Replace two RAS pump discharge butterfly valves. • Replace two WAS pumps, motors, pump bases, and VFDs. Re -grout the bases. Reconnect the existing seal water piping and the existing drain piping. • Replace the MCC, electrical panels, conduit, and wire as shown. • Add current trip devices to the clarifier drive motor starters. Integrate the trip devices into the plant SCADA system. • Replace the seals in four telescopic valves. • Cut in and add a WAS flow meter to the WAS piping. • Replace 1 WAS plug valve. • Replace RAS piping supports. Replace all pipe supports on the suction piping for the WAS pumps. • Paint the new RAS and WAS pumps, piping, supports, and valves to match existing. • Replace the supports under the RAS pump suction valves with fabricated stainless steel supports. These are similar to Piping Technology & Products Figure 46 supports. • Replace the nosings on five sets of stairs. • Replace one ultrasonic RAS well level detector. Replace one low level switch in the RAS well. • Relocate four existing sludge blanket level detector probes from the existing walkway bridges to the new walkway bridges. • Integrate monitoring and control signals for all clarifier drives and starters, all blanket level detectors, both RAS pump motor VFDs, both WAS pump motor VFDs, the WAS flow meter, the RAS well level detector, and the RAS well low level switch into pump control logic and the plant SCADA system. • Add 8 ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each clarifier. A total of 32 ground water pressure relief valves are to be added. • Add spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to each new bridge for scum control. • Add a 1 -inch hose bib to each new clarifier access platform. • Add scum trough flush water piping, valves, and controls to each scum trough for scum control. • Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and permit a groundwater dewatering system as required to prevent clarifier tanks from becoming buoyant while empty. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused by buoyant tanks. 2. Northeast WRF Clarifiers 5 -8 Rehabilitation • Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and permit a groundwater dewatering system as required to prevent clarifier tanks from becoming buoyant while empty. SECTION IV Page 2 of 134 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 a 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Remove existing and furnish and install new clarifier drain valves as shown. • Remove the existing and furnish and install new rotating and mechanical equipment in Clarifiers 5 thru 8 including center columns, rotating mechanisms, drives, walkway bridges and handrail, scum beaches, scum troughs, scum baffles and supports, weirs, and the associated hardware and subcomponents of these items. • Remove existing and furnish and install new ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each Clarifier 5 thru 8. • Furnish and install new spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to each new bridge for scum control. • Furnish and install a new hose bib to each clarifier access platform. • Furnish and install new scum trough flush water piping, valves, and controls to each scum trough for scum control. Furnish and install a new scum trough flush control panel located inside the South RAS Equipment Building similar to that provide in the North RAS Pump House for Clarifiers 1 -4. • Remove the existing and furnish and install new scum pipe and scum pipe wall penetrations on each clarifier from the scum trough to the first pipe joint or fitting outside the clarifier wall. • Remove existing and furnish and install four new sludge blanket level detector systems for Clarifiers 5 -8.. • Integrate monitoring, control, and alarm signals for Clarifier 5 -8 drives and starters, blanket level detectors, both new RAS and WAS pump motor VFDs, the WAS flow meter, the RAS well level detector and float switches into the pump control logic and the plant SCADA system. • Remove the existing and furnish and install new RAS pumps, motors, pump bases, and VFDs. • Remove the existing flow matcher variable speed drives. • Remove existing and furnish and install two new RAS pump suction plug valves and discharge check valves. • Remove the existing and furnish and install new WAS sludge magmeter on the suction piping of the WAS pumps. Integrate the flow signal from the new meter into the plant SCADA system. • Remove the existing and furnish and install a new MCC, electrical panels, conduit, wire, and Pump VFDs in the South RAS Pump House. Integrate the equipment monitoring and control functions into the existing plant SCADA system. • Remove the existing and furnish and install new motor starters for Clarifiers 5 -8. Integrate the overload alarms into the plant SCADA system. • Remove the existing and furnish and install new seals in the Clarifier 5 -8 RAS telescopic valves. • Remove existing and furnish and install new RAS and WAS piping supports in the South RAS Pump House. SECTION IV Page 3 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Paint all new RAS and WAS pumps, piping, supports, and valves to match existing in the South RAS Pump House. • Remove existing and furnish and install a new ultrasonic RAS well level controller, detector, and float switches in the RAS well. Incorporate 1/0 into the new RAS pump VFDs and into the existing plant SCADA system. Remove existing and install new backup float controls for the RAS and WAS pumps. • Remove existing valves, install and paint new valves, and modify piping on the WAS pumping system in the North RAS Pump Equipment Building. • Furnish and install a temporary line -stop in the RAS piping inside the South RAS Pump House. Furnish and install two new replacement RAS pump discharge butterfly valves on the RAS pumps inside the South RAS Pump House. • Furnish and install a temporary line -stop in the RAS piping inside the North RAS Pump House. install two new replacement pump discharge butterfly valves on the RAS pumps inside the North RAS Pump House. The City will furnish the pump discharge butterfly valves for installation by the Contractor. • Paint the interior walls, vertical surfaces, inclined surfaces, and ceilings in the North and South RAS Pump Houses. • Paint all pumps, metallic piping, and valves in the North and South RAS Pump Houses. • Remove the existing reclaimed water (EFW) and seal water flush /drain piping and components, and furnish and install new replacement EFW and seal water flush /drain piping and components and supports to all four pumps in the South RAS Pump House. Furnish and install a new hose rack and hose bib in the South RAS Pump House. • Replace clarifier stairs and handrails /guards on Clarifiers 1 -8. • Repair wall leak in North Sludge Pump House. • Install new stainless steel grate over the effluent launder drop boxes for Clarifiers 5 -8. • Replace damaged and delaminated areas of floors in Clarifiers 5 -8. 3. Marshall Street Plant (NOT IN CONTRACT) • Replace all rotating and mechanical equipment in Clarifiers 1 thru 4 including the center column, the rotating mechanism, the drives, the walkway bridges, the walkway bridge handrail, the scum beaches, the scum troughs, the scum baffles, the scum baffle supports, the weirs, and the associated hardware and subcomponents of these items. • Replace the scum pipe wall penetrations on each clarifier from the scum trough to the scum well on the exterior of the clarifier as shown on the drawings. Use schedule 80 PVC pipe for the new installation. Replace the link seals for all wall penetrations. Install new scum trough flush water system on each clarifier. • Remove four existing ultrasonic sludge blanket level detectors from the existing walkway bridges and re- install them on the new walkway bridges. • Replace four RAS telescoping valves, valve operators, and support steel. SECTION IV Page 4 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Add spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to each new clarifier bridge for scum control. • Add a 1 -inch hose bibb and hose rack to each clarifier access platform. • Replace all ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each clarifier. • Coat the splitter box walkway with a waterproofing system and repair spalled concrete. • Remove existing splitter box gates; modify existing splitter box and piping; install new clarifier isolation valves, pipe, and fittings as shown on the drawings. • Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and permit a groundwater dewatering system as required to prevent clarifier tanks and the RAS structures from becoming buoyant while empty and to accommodate the product water from dewatering in making the pipe modifications associated with the splitter box work. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused by buoyant structures. • Perform all other work shown on the drawings, and /or described in the Technical Specifications. 4. East Plant (NOT IN CONTRACT) • Replace the scum beaches, the scum troughs, the scum baffles, the scum baffle supports, the skimmer arms, the drives, and the weirs on both clarifiers. • Repaint all rotating, mechanical, and structural ferrous equipment in both clarifiers that is not being replaced. • Replace the walkway bridge center access platform, and handrail on the East clarifier. Paint the new platform to match existing. • Replace one scum pump check valve and two scum pump discharge valves at the existing scum pump location. • Replace one clarifier effluent gate valve for the west clarifier. • Replace one clarifier drain valve for the east clarifier. Take extra precaution to prevent damage to the plant perimeter wall and the clarifier tank located near this valve. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages by excavating and repairing the drain valve. • Replace two RAS telescoping valve seals. • Replace ground water pressure relief valves in the bottom of each clarifier. • Add spray water piping, valves, and nozzles to the new bridge for scum control. • Add a 1 -inch hose bib to each clarifier access platform. • Retrofit the existing scum trough flush water piping, valves, and controls for each clarifier to the rehabilitated clarifiers. • Replace two existing ultrasonic sludge blanket level detectors with new units and mount them on the on the walkway bridges. • Furnish and install a scum decant system. SECTION IV Page 5 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Furnish, install, operate, maintain, and permit a groundwater dewatering system as required to prevent clarifier tanks from becoming buoyant while empty and during all excavations. The Contractor shall be responsible for all damages caused by buoyant tanks. 5. Project Sign The Contractor shall provide I fixed project sign(s) as described in SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 of the Contract Documents. The final number of project signs will be determined at the beginning of the project based on the Contractor's schedule of work submitted for approval. Additional project signs may be required above the indicated amount due to the Contractor's schedule of work, which will be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 6. Owner Direct Purchase The following equipment will be procured under the Owner Direct Purchase provisions of the Contract Documents: • Four Clarifier Rotating Component and Equipment Packages • Two RAS Pumps 7. Project Contract Period The Contract Period /Contract Times shall be as specified in Section IIIA. SECTION IV Page 6 of 134 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r t 1 1 1 1 i 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK CHECKLIST Project Name: NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION Project Number: 12- 0025 -UT The following Articles of the Technical Specifications will apply to this contract if marked "X" as shown below: 1 I Scope Of Work 2.1 A Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The Contractor 2.2 ❑ Line and Grade Shall Be Performed By The City 3 // Definition Of Terms 4 ❑ Order And Location Of The Work 5 ❑ Excavation For Underground Work 6 A/ Concrete 7 ❑ Excavation And Forms For Concrete Work 8 n Reinforcement 9 ■ Obstructions 10 0 Restoration Or Replacement Of Driveways, Curbs, Sidewalks And Street Pavement 11 ❑ Work In Easements Or Parkways 12 ❑ Dewatering 13 ❑ Sanitary Manholes 14 I Backfill 15 ❑ Street Crossings, Etc. 16 ❑ Raising Or Lowering Of Sanitary Sewer, Storm Drainage Structures 17 L Unsuitable Material Removal 18 ❑ Underdrains 19 ❑ Storm Sewers 20 ❑ Sanitary Sewers And Force Mains 21 ❑ Drainage 22 ❑ Roadway Base And Subgrade 23 ❑ Asphaltic Concrete Materials 24 ❑ Adjustment To The Unit Bid Price For Asphalt 25 ❑ General Planting Specifications 26 ❑ HDPE Deformed - Reformed Pipe Lining 27 ❑ Plant Mix Driveways 28 ❑ Reporting Of Tonnage Of Recycled Materials 29 ❑ Concrete Curbs 30 /1 Concrete Sidewalks And Driveways 31 A/ Sodding 32 I Seeding 33 ❑ Storm Manholes, Inlets, Catch Basins Or Other Storm Structures 34 ❑ Material Used 35 ■ Conflict Between Plans And Specifications 36 ❑ Street Signs 37 ❑ AudioNideo Recording Of Work Areas SECTION IV Page 7of134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 38 11 Erosion And Siltation Control 39 ❑ Utility Tie In Location Marking 40 ❑ Award Of Contract, Work Schedule And Guarantee 41 ❑ Potable Water Mains, Reclaimed Water Mains and Appurtenances 42 ❑ Gas System Specifications 43 ❑ Tennis Courts 44 ❑ Work Zone Traffic Control 45 ❑ Cured -In -Place Pipe Lining 46 ❑ Specifications for Polyethylene Sliplining 47 ❑ Specifications for Polyvinyl Chloride Ribbed Pipe 48 ❑ Gunite Specifications 49 ❑ Sanitary and Storm Manhole Liner Restoration 50 ❑ Project Information Signs 51 ❑ In -Line Skating Surfacing System 52 ❑ Resident Notification of Start of Construction 53 ❑ Gabions and Mattresses 54 ❑ Lawn Maintenance Specifications 55 ❑ Milling Operations 56 ❑ Clearing and Grubbing 57 ❑ Riprap 58 /1 Treatment Plant Safety 59 ❑ Traffic Signal Equipment and Materials 60 ❑ Signing And Marking 61 ❑ Roadway Lighting 62 ❑ Tree Protection 63 ❑ Project Web Pages 64 ❑ Overhead Electric Line Clearance 2 FIELD ENGINEERING 2.1 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CONTRACTOR The Contractor shall provide and pay for field engineering service required for the project. Such work shall include survey work to establish lines and levels and to locate and lay out site improvements, structures, and controlling lines and levels required for the construction of the work. Also included are such Engineering services as are specified or required to execute the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and Surveyors shall be licensed professionals under the laws of the state of Florida. The Contractor shall provide three (3) complete sets of As- built Survey to the Engineer prior to final payment being made as outlined in Section III (General Conditions), Article 6.11.2 of these Contract Documents. 2.1.1 GRADES, LINES AND LEVELS Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those designated on the Drawings or provided by the City. Control points (for alignment only) shall be established by the Engineer. The Contractor shall locate and protect control points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference points during construction. In working near any SECTION IV Page 8 of 134 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 t t 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications permanent property corners or reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any such markets. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them referenced and reset by a Land Surveyor qualified under the laws of the state of Florida. 2.1.2 LAYOUT DATA The Contractor shall layout the work at the location and to the lines and grades shown on the Drawings. Survey notes indicating the information and measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the record drawings for the project. 2.2 LINE AND GRADE SHALL BE PERFORMED BY THE CITY At the completion of all work the contractor shall be responsible to have furnished to the project inspector a replacement of the wooden lath and stakes used in the construction of this project. Excessive stake replacement caused by negligence of Contractor's forces, after initial line and grade have been set, as determined by the City Engineer, will be charged to the Contractor at the rate of $100.00 per hour. Time shall be computed for actual time on the project. All time shall be computed in one -hour increments. Minimum charge is $100.00. The City will generate the project Record construction drawings. 3 DEFINITION OF TERMS For the purpose of these Technical Specifications, the definition of terms from SECTION III, ARTICLE 1 - DEFINITIONS of these Contract Documents shall apply. For the purpose of the Estimated Quantities, the Contractor's attention is called to the fact that the estimate of quantities as shown on the Proposal Sheet is approximate and is given only as a basis of calculation upon which the award of the contract is to be made. The City does not assume any responsibility that the final quantities will remain in strict accordance with estimated quantities nor shall the contractor plead misunderstandings or deception because of such estimate of quantities or of the character or location of the work or of other conditions or situations pertaining thereto. 3.1 REFERENCE STANDARDS Reference to the standards of any technical society, organization, or associate, or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative standard adopted and published at the date of receipt of bids, unless specifically stated otherwise. 3.2 ABBREVIATIONS AND SYMBOLS Abbreviations used in the Contract Documents are defined as follows: AA Aluminum Association, Inc. AAMA Architectural Aluminum Manufacturers' Association AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation Officials ACI American Concrete Institute AISI American Iron and Steel Institute AMA Acoustical Materials Association SECTION IV Page 9 of 134 11/26/2013 SECTION IV Section IV — Technical Specifications AMCA Air Moving and Conditioning Association, Inc. ANSI American National Standards Institute APA American Plywood Association ASAE American Society of Agricultural Engineers ASCE American Society of Civil Engineers ASHRAE American Society of Heating Refrigerating and Air Conditioning ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASSE American Society of Sanitary Engineering ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials AWG American Wire Gauge AWMA Aluminum Window Manufacturer's Association AWS American Welding Society AWWA American Water Works Association CFR Code of Federal Regulations CISPI Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute CS Commercial Standards and National Bureau of Standards DEP Department of Environmental Protection (Florida) DOT Department of Transportation (Florida) EPA Environmental Protection Agency FAC Florida Administrative Code FBC Florida Building Code FFPC Florida Fire Prevention Code FGC Florida Gas Code FMC Florida Mechanical Code FPC Florida Plumbing Code FedSpec Federal Specifications HI Standards of Hydraulic Institute IBBM Iron Body, Bronzed Mounted IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IPS Iron Pipe Size MIL Military Specification NAAMM National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers NBFU National Board of Fire Underwriters NEC National Electrical Code NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA National Fire Protection Association NPT National Pipe Thread NWMA National Woodwork Manufacturers' Association PCA Portland Cement Association PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute SBC Standard Building Code (SBCCI) SBCCI Southern Building Code Congress International, Inc. SDI Steel Door Institute SFPC Standard Fire Prevention Code (SBCCI) SGC Standard Gas Code (SBCCI) SJI Steel Joist Institute Page 10 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications SMACCNA Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association SMC Standard Mechanical Code (SBCCI) SPC Standard Plumbing Code (SBCCI) SPIB Southern Pine Inspection Bureau SSPC Steel Structures Painting Council TCA Title Council of America UL Underwriters' Laboratories 4 ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 18 — ORDER AND LOCATION OF THE WORK. 5 EXCAVATION FOR UNDERGROUND WORK The contractor is responsible to take all necessary steps to conduct all excavation in a manner which provides for the successful completion of the proposed work while at all times maintaining the safety of the workmen, the general public and both public and private property. The contractor's methods of work will be consistent with the standard practices and requirements of all appropriate Safety Regulatory Agencies, particularly the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA) requirements for excavation. Unless otherwise specifically stated in these plans and specifications, the methods of safety control and compliance with regulatory agency safety requirements are the full and complete responsibility of the contractor. For the purposes of the Contractor's safety planning in the bidding process, the contractor is to consider all excavation to be done in the performance of this contract to be in soil classified as OSHA "Type C ". The Contractor's attention is called to specific requirements of OSHA for excavation shoring, employee entry, location of excavated material adjacent to excavation, the removal of water from the excavation, surface encumbrances and in particular the requirement of a "Competent Person" to control safety operations. The Contractor will identify his Competent Person to City staff at the start of construction. City staff are required from time to time to perform inspections, tests, survey location work, or other similar activity in an excavation prepared by the contractor. City staff in conformance with the OSHA Excavation Safety Requirements are to only enter an excavation in compliance with these OSHA standards. The City's staff reserve the option to refuse entry into the Contractor's excavation if, in the opinion of the City's staff, the entry into the Contractor's excavation is unsafe or does not conform OSHA requirements. If this circumstance occurs, the contractor must either provide the necessary safety requirements or provide alternate means for the accomplishment of the City's work at the Contractor's expense. The restoration quantities, if any, contained in the bid proposal for this contract to not contain sufficient quantities to allow the contractor to perform excavation work using strictly the "open cut" method whereby no shoring systems are used and trench side slopes are cut to conform to OSHA safety requirements without a shoring system. In addition to safety reasons, the Contractor is required to use excavation and trench - shoring methods in compliance with all safety requirements which allow the Contractor to control the amount of restoration work necessary to complete the project. Not more than one hundred (100) feet of trench shall be opened at one time in advance of the completed work unless written permission is received from the Engineer for the distance SECTION IV Page I I of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications specified. For pipe installation projects, the trench shall be six (6) inches wider on each side than the greatest external horizontal width of the pipe or conduit, including hubs, intended to be laid in them. The bottom of the trench under each pipe joint shall be slightly hollowed, to allow the body of the pipe to rest throughout its length. In case a trench is excavated at any place, excepting at joints, below the grade of its bottom as given, or directed by the Engineer, the filling and compaction to grade shall be done in such manner as the Engineer shall direct, without compensation. 6 CONCRETE Unless otherwise directed, all concrete work shall be performed in accordance with the latest editions of the Design and Control of Concrete Mixtures by the Portland Cement Association, the American Concrete Institute, and FDOT's Standard Specifications. All appropriate testing shall be performed according to the American Society of Testing Materials. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete shall have fiber mesh reinforcing and have a minimum compressive strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. The cement type shall be Type I and shall conform to AASHTO M -85. The aggregate shall conform to ASTM C -33. All ready mix concrete shall conform to ASTM C -94. The slump for all concrete shall be in the range of 3" to 5 ", except when admixtures or special placement considerations are required. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all concrete placement. All concrete shall be tested in the following manner: Placement of less than 5 cubic yards (cy) shall be tested at the Engineer's discretion. Otherwise, for each class, for each day, for every 50 cy or part thereof exceeding 5 cy, one set of 3 compressive strength cylinders will be required (1 at 7 days and 2 at 28 days). At the discretion of the Engineer, unacceptable test results may require the Contractor to provide further tests, as determined by the Engineer, to determine product acceptability, or need for removal, and compensation or denial thereof. 7 EXCAVATION AND FORMS FOR CONCRETE WORK 7.1 EXCAVATION Excavating for concrete work shall be made to the required depth of the subgrade or base upon which the concrete is to be placed. The base or subgrade shall be thoroughly compacted to a point 6" outside said concrete work before the forms are placed. Concrete shall be poured "in the dry". 7.2 FORMS Forms for concrete work shall be either wood or metal (except curbs, metal only, unless by written permission from Engineer). They shall be free from warps or bends, shall have a depth equal to the dimensions required for the depth of the concrete deposited against them and shall be of sufficient strength when staked to resist the pressure of concrete without moving or springing. SECTION IV Page 12 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 8 REINFORCEMENT When required, reinforcement shall be placed in the concrete work. Bar reinforcement shall be deformed: ASTMA -A 615, steel shall be billet Intermediate or Hard Grade: Rail Steel A.A.S.H.T.O. M42. Twisted Bars shall not be used, Fabric Reinforcement shall conform to the requirements of AASHTO M55 (ASTM Al 85). Welded deformed steel wire fabric for Concrete reinforcement shall meet the requirements of AASHTO M 221 (ASTM A497). Epoxy coated reinforcing Steel Bars shall meet ASTM 775/A77 M -86 requirements. 8.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Reinforcement shall not be paid for separately. The cost of such work shall be included in the contract unit price for the item of work specified. 9 OBSTRUCTIONS Any pipes, conduits, wires, mains, footings, driveways, or other structures encountered shall be carefully protected from injury or displacement. Any damage thereto shall be fully, promptly, and properly repaired by the Contractor to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the owner thereof. Should it become necessary to change the position of water or gas or other pipes, sewer drains, or poles, the Engineer shall be at once notified of the locality and circumstances, and no claims for damages arising from the delay in adjusting the pipe, sewer drains or poles shall be made. Failure of the plans to show the location, nature or extent of any existing structures or obstructions shall not be the basis of a claim for extra work. Any survey monument or benchmark which must be disturbed shall be carefully referenced before removal, and unless otherwise provided for, shall be replaced upon completion of the work by a registered land surveyor. Any concrete removed due to construction requirements shall be removed to the nearest expansion joint or by saw cut. Contractor shall consult Inspector for the approved means. 10 RESTORATION OR REPLACEMENT OF DRIVEWAYS, CURBS, SIDEWALKS AND STREET PAVEMENT Driveways, sidewalks, and curbs destroyed or damaged during construction shall be replaced and shall be the same type of material as destroyed or damaged, or to existing City Standards, whichever provides the stronger repair. All street pavement destroyed or damaged shall be replaced with the same type of material, to existing City Standards, unless the existing base is unsuitable as determined by the Engineer, then the base shall be replaced with City approved material. All replaced base shall be a minimum 8" compacted thickness, or same thickness as base destroyed plus 2 ", if over 6 ", and compacted to 98% of maximum density per AASHTO T- 180. Unless called for in the proposal as separate bid items, cost of the above work including labor, materials and equipment required shall be included in the bid price per lineal foot of main or square yard of base. The bid price for street pavement, restoration or replacement when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work, and shall be paid for on a square yard basis. When replacement is over a trench for utilities, the area of replacement shall be limited to twice the depth of the cut plus twice the inside diameter of the pipe. All over this will be at the Contractor's expense. SECTION IV Page 13 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications The bid price for restoration or placement of driveways, curbs and sidewalks, when called for in the proposals, shall include all materials, labor and equipment required to complete the work and shall be paid for on the basis of the following units: Driveways, plant mix - per square yard: concrete - per square foot; curbs - per lineal foot; sidewalk 4" or 6" thick - per square foot. Concrete walks at drives shall be a minimum of 6" thick and be reinforced with 6/6 X 10 /10 welded wire mesh (also see Articles 8 and 30). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all driveway, curb, sidewalk and street restoration and replacement work. 11 WORK IN EASEMENTS OR PARKWAYS Restoration is an important phase of construction, particularly to residents affected by the construction progress. The Contractor will be expected to complete restoration Activities within a reasonable time following primary construction activity. Failure by the Contractor to accomplish restoration within a reasonable time shall be justification for a temporary stop on primary construction activity or a delay in approval of partial payment requests. Reasonable care shall be taken for existing shrubbery. Contractor shall replace all shrubbery removed or disturbed during construction. No separate payment shall be made for this work. The contractor shall make provision and be responsible for the supply of all water, if needed, on any and all phases of the contract work. The contractor shall not obtain water from local residents or businesses except as the contractor shall obtain written permission. Reuse water is available for the Contractor's use without charge from the City's wastewater treatment plants, provided the water is used on City of Clearwater contractual work. Details for Contractor to obtain and reuse water from the treatment plants will be coordinated at the pre - construction conference. The Contractor's use of reuse water must conform to all regulatory requirements. 12 DEWATERING 12.1 GENERAL Unless specifically authorized by the Engineer, all pipe, except subdrains, shall be laid "in the dry". The contractor shall dewater trench excavation as required for the proper execution of the work, using one or more of the following approved methods: well point system, trenched gravity underdrain system, or sumps with pumps. Well point systems must be efficient enough to lower the water level in advance of the excavation and maintain it continuously in order that the trench bottom and sides shall remain firm and reasonably dry. The well points shall be designed especially for this type of service, and the pumping unit used shall be capable of maintaining a high vacuum, and at the same time, of handling large volumes of air as well as of water. The Contractor shall be responsible for disposing of all water resulting from trench dewatering operations, and shall dispose of the water without damage or undue inconvenience to the work, the surrounding area, or the general public. He shall not dam, divert, or cause water to flow in excess in existing gutters, pavements or other structures: and to do this he may be required to conduct the water to a suitable place of discharge may be determined by the Engineer. SECTION IV Page 14 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications The cost of dewatering shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structures. 12.2 PERMIT REQUIREMENTS 12.2.1 DEWATERING CONTROL The City of Clearwater will hold the Contractor responsible for obtaining a Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Groundwater from Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity prior to dewatering or discharging into the City's streets, storm sewers or waterways. Prior to discharging produced groundwater from any construction site, the contractor must collect samples and analyze the groundwater, which must meet acceptable discharge limits. The following document has been incorporated into this section for reference... 12.2.2 GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON - CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY City Notification Procedure - Contractor must provide the City of Clearwater Environmental Department with the following information prior to beginning dewatering activities: 1) A copy of all groundwater laboratory results 2) A copy of the FDEP Notification It is recommended that the Contractor call or meet with the City Environmental staff if you have any questions. You may contact the City at 562 -4750 for direction or further assistance. STATE OF FLORIDA DEPARTMENT OF ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION GENERIC PERMIT FOR THE DISCHARGE OF PRODUCED GROUND WATER FROM ANY NON - CONTAMINATED SITE ACTIVITY The facility is authorized to discharge produced ground water from any non - contaminated site activity which discharges by a point source to surface waters of the State, as defined in Chapter 62- 620, F.A.C., only if the reported values for the parameters listed in Table 1 do not exceed any of the listed screening values. Before discharge of produced ground water can occur from such sites, analytical tests on samples of the proposed untreated discharge water shall be performed to determine if contamination exists. Minimum reporting requirements for all produced ground water dischargers. The effluent shall be sampled before the commencement of discharge, again within thirty (30) days after commencement of discharge, and then once every six (6) months for the life of the project to maintain continued coverage under this generic permit. Samples taken in compliance with the provisions of this permit shall be taken prior to actual discharge or mixing with the receiving waters. The effluent shall be sampled for the parameters listed in Table 1. SECTION IV TABLE 1 Page 15 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the City of Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. SECTION IV Page 16 of 134 11/26/2013 1 1 1 t s 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 Screening Values for Discharges into: Parameter Fresh Waters Coastal Waters Total Organic Carbon (TOC) 10.0 mg/1 10.0 mg/1 PH, standard units 6.0 -8.5 6.5 -8.5 Total Recoverable Mercury — by Method 1631E 0.012 µg/1 0.025 µg/1 Total Recoverable Cadmium 9.3 µg/1 9.3 1.tg/1 Total Recoverable Copper 2.9 µg /1 2.91.1g/1 Total Recoverable Lead 0.03 mg/1 5.6 14/1 Total Recoverable Zinc 86.0 µg/1 86.0 µg/1 Total Recoverable Chromium (Hex.) 11.0 µg/1 50.0 µg/1 Benzene 1.0 µg/1 1.0 µg/1 Naphthalene 100.0 µg/1 100.0 µg/1 If any of the analytical test results exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, except TOC, the discharge is not authorized by this permit or by the City of Clearwater. (a) For initial TOC values that exceed the screening values listed in Table 1, which may be caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds, the permittee may request to be exempted from the TOC requirement. To request this exemption, the permittee shall submit additional information with a Notice of Intent (NOI), described below, which describes the method used to determine that these compounds are naturally occurring. The Department shall grant the exemption if the permittee affirmatively demonstrates that the TOC values are caused by naturally occurring, high molecular weight organic compounds. (b) The NOI shall be submitted to the appropriate Department district office thirty (30) days prior to discharge, and contain the following information: 1. the name and address of the person that the permit coverage will be issued to; 2. the name and address of the facility, including county location; 3. any applicable individual wastewater permit number(s); 4. a map showing the facility and discharge location (including latitude and longitude); 5. the name of the receiving water; and 6. the additional information required by paragraph (3)(a) of this permit. (c) Discharge shall not commence until notification of coverage is received from the Department. SECTION IV Page 16 of 134 11/26/2013 1 1 1 t s 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications For fresh waters and coastal waters, the pH of the effluent shall not be lowered to less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units for coastal waters, or raised above 8.5 units, unless the permittee submits natural background data confirming a natural background pH outside of this range. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be less than 6.0 units for fresh waters, or less than 6.5 units in coastal waters, the pH shall not vary below natural background or vary more than one (1) unit above natural background for fresh and coastal waters. If natural background of the receiving water is determined to be higher than 8.5 units, the pH shall not vary above natural background or vary more than one (1) unit below natural background of fresh and coastal waters. The permittee shall include the natural background pH of the receiving waters with the results of the analyses required under paragraph (2) of this permit. For purposes of this section only, fresh waters are those having a chloride concentration of less than 1500 mg/I, and coastal waters are those having a chloride concentration equal to or greater than 1500 mg /1. In accordance with Rule 62- 302.500(1)(a -c), F.A.C., the discharge shall at all times be free from floating solids, visible foam, turbidity, or visible oil in such amounts as to form nuisances on surface waters. If contamination exists, as indicated by the results of the analytical tests required by paragraph (2), the discharge cannot be covered by this Generic Permit. The facility shall apply for an individual wastewater permit at least ninety (90) days prior to the date discharge to surface waters of the State is expected, or, if applicable, the facility may seek coverage under any other applicable Department generic permit. No discharge is permissible without an effective permit. If the analytical tests required by paragraph (2) reveal that no contamination exists from any source, the facility can begin discharge immediately and is covered by this permit without having to submit an NOI request for coverage to the Department. A short summary of the proposed activity and copy of the analytical tests shall be sent to the applicable Department district office within one (1) week after discharge begins. These analytical tests shall be kept on site during discharge and made available to the Department if requested. Additionally, no Discharge Monitoring Report forms are required to be submitted to the Department. All of the general conditions listed in Rule 62- 621.250, F.A.C., are applicable to this Generic Permit. There are no annual fees associated with the use of this Generic Permit. 13 SANITARY MANHOLES 13.1 BUILT UP TYPE Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the drawings. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semicircular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be formed by one of the following methods: form directly into concrete manhole base, build up with brick and mortar, lay half tile in concrete, or lay full section of sewer pipe through manhole and break out top half of pipe. The manhole floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Free drop in manholes from inlet pipe invert to top of floor outside the channels shall not exceed twenty four inches. Standard Drop Manholes shall be constructed wherever free drop exceeds twenty four inches. SECTION IV Page 17 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick used may be solid only. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. 13.2 PRECAST TYPE Precast Sanitary Manholes shall conform to this specification unless otherwise approved by the City Engineer. AASHTO M 85 Type II cement shall be used throughout with a minimum wall thickness of 5 inches. The precast sections shall conform to ASTM C 478 latest revision. Section joints shall be a tongue and groove with "ram neck" gasket or "0" ring to provide a watertight joint. Minimum concrete strength shall be 4000 psi at 28 days. Three sets of shop drawings and location inventory shall be submitted to the City Engineer for approval. Approval of shop drawings does not relieve contractor of responsibility for compliance to these specifications unless letter from contractor requesting specific variance is approved by the City Engineer. Location inventory submitted with shop drawing shall detail parts of manhole per manhole as numbered on the construction plans. All manhole parts shall be numbered or lettered before being sent to the job site to permit proper construction placement. A plan or list of the numbering system shall be present on the job site when manhole components are delivered. Precast manhole dimensions, drop entry, grout flow of channel, etc., shall be as shown on City of Clearwater Engineering Detail #302 Sheet 2 of 3. Manhole sections shall be rejected if abused during shipping or placement and if pipe openings are not properly aligned. The "break in" to precast manholes for pipe entry will not be allowed. The manhole base shall be set on a pad of A 1 or A 2 Classification soil approximately five (5) inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. 13.2.1 MANHOLE ADJUSTMENT RINGS (GRADE RINGS) Between the top of the manhole cone and the manhole cover frame, a manhole adjustment ring shall be installed. The intent of the manhole adjustment ring is to accommodate future grade changes without disturbing the manhole. See Section IV, Article 23.7 — Asphaltic Concrete — Adjustment of Manholes. 13.3 DROP MANHOLES Standard drop inlets to manholes shall be constructed of commercial pipe, fittings and specials as detailed on the drawings. 13.4 FRAMES AND COVERS Manhole frames and covers shall be set in a full bed of mortar with the top of the cover flush with or higher than finished grade as directed. Refer to Detail 301. SECTION IV Page 18 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 13.5 MANHOLE COATINGS The exterior and interior of all built up manholes shall be coated with two (2) coats of Type II Asphalt emulsion, moisture and damp proof (Specification ASTM D 1227 Type II Class I) as manufactured by W.R. Meadows Sealtite or approved equal. Interior of built up manholes which have sewers entering with a free drop or which receive discharge from a force main shall have the inside plastered with 1/2 -inch of grout and coated as precast manholes below. The exterior of all precast manholes shall have a 15 mil dry thickness of PROCO EP214 -351 Sewper Coating or approved equal. The interior shall be AGRU SUREGRIP HDPE or PP -R Liner with a minimum thickness of 2 mm. 13.6 CONNECTIONS TO MANHOLES Connections to existing sanitary manholes using approved PVC sewer main shall be made with a manhole adapter coupling by Flo Control, Inc., or approved water stop coupling. 14 BACKFILL Material for backfill shall be carefully selected from the excavated material or from other sources as may be required by the Engineer. Such material shall be granular, free from organic matter or debris, contain no rocks or other hard fragments greater than 3" in the largest dimension and all fill shall be similar material. Backfill placed around pipes shall be carefully placed around the sides and top of pipe by hand shovels and thoroughly compacted to 12" above the pipe by tamping or other suitable means. Backfill under all types of paving shall be compacted in layers not to exceed 12" in thickness unless alternate method is approved by the Engineer. Backfill shall be a minimum of 98% compaction as determined by the modified Proctor Density Test to the bottom of pavement. Backfill outside of pavement areas shall be compacted the full depth to the ground surface to a minimum of 95% compaction of AASHTO T 180 Standard Density Test. The cost of backfill shall be included in the unit price bid per lineal foot of the pipe, or, in the case of other underground structures, in the cost of such structure. 15 STREET CROSSINGS, ETC. At such crossings, and other points as may be directed by the Engineer, the trenches shall be bridged in an open and secure manner, so as to prevent any serious interruption of travel upon the roadway or sidewalk, and also to afford necessary access to public or private premises. The material used, and the mode of constructing said bridges, and the approaches, thereto, must be satisfactory to the Engineer. The cost of all such work must be included in the cost of the trench excavation. 16 RAISING OR LOWERING OF SANITARY SEWER, STORM DRAINAGE STRUCTURES Sanitary Sewer or Storm Drainage Structures shall be raised or lowered as indicated on the plans or as indicated by the Engineer. SECTION IV Page 19 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 16.1 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment, unless covered by a bid item, shall be included in the cost of the work. 17 UNSUITABLE MATERIAL REMOVAL All unsuitable material, such as muck, clay, rock, etc., shall be excavated and removed from the site. All material removed is property of the Contractor, who shall dispose of said material off - site at his expense. The limits of the excavation shall be determined in the field by the Engineer. 17.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the amount of cubic yards of unsuitable material excavated and replaced with suitable material as determined by either cross sections of the excavation, truck measure, or lump sum as specified in the Scope of Work and Contract Proposal. 17.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for the removal of unsuitable material shall include: all materials, equipment, tools, labor, disposal, hauling, excavating, dredging, placing, compaction, dressing surface and incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, the removal of unsuitable material shall be included in the most appropriate bid item. 18 UNDERDRAINS The Contractor shall construct sub - surface drainage pipe as directed in the Contract Scope of Work and detail drawings contained in the Project construction plans. In general, underdrain pipe shall be embedded in a bed of #6 FDOT crushed aggregate, located behind the back of curb and aggregate surface covered with a non - degradable fibrous type filter material. A #57 aggregate may be used in lieu of #6 if it is washed and screened to remove fines. The aggregate may be stone, slag or crushed gravel. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, underdrain pipe shall be 8" diameter, polyvinyl chloride pipe, in conformance with ASTM F -758 "Standard Specification For Smooth Wall PVC Underdrain Systems for Highways" latest revision, minimum stiffness of 46 in conformance with ASTM D2412, perforations in conformance with AASHTO M -189 described in FDOT Section 948 -4.5 or latest revision and in conformance with ASTM D3034 - SDR 35. Alternate acceptable underdrain pipe material is Contech A -2000 which is a rigid PVC pipe exceeds ASTM Specifications D1784, minimum cell classification of 12454B or 12454C, manufactured per ASTM F949 -93a, minimum pipe stiffness of 50 psi, with no evidence of splitting, cracking or breaking when pipe is tested in accordance with ASTM D2412 at 60% flatting and with a double gasket joint. Underdrain pipe placed beneath existing driveways and roadways shall be non - perforated pipe with compacted backfill. All poly- chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. Where ductile iron pipe is specified, pipe material shall be the same as specified for potable water pipe in these technical specifications. All underdrain aggregate shall be fully encased in a polyester filter fabric "sock" (Mirafi 140 -N or approved equal) per the construction detail drawings. SECTION IV Page 20 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 18.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of lineal feet of 8" Sub -drain in place and accepted. 18.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be based upon the unit price per lineal foot for underdrain as measured above, which shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, and labor necessary to construct the underdrain (specifically underdrain pipe, aggregate and filter fabric). Underdrain clean -outs, sod, driveway, road and sidewalk restoration shall be paid by a separate bid item. 19 STORM SEWERS All storm drain pipe installed within the City of Clearwater shall be reinforced concrete unless otherwise specified or approved by the City Engineer. Said pipe shall comply with Section 941 of the current FDOT Specifications. All reinforced concrete pipe joints shall be wrapped with Mirafi 140N filter fabric or equivalent (as approved by the City Engineer). The cost for all pipe joint wraps shall be included in the unit price for the pipe. All pipe, just before being lowered into a trench, is to be inspected and cleaned. If any difficulty is found in the fitting the pieces together, this fitting is to be done on the surface of the street before laying the pipe, and the tops plainly marked in the order in which they are to be laid. No pipe is to be trimmed or chipped to fit. Each piece of pipe is to be solidly and evenly bedded, and not simply wedged up. Before finishing each joint, some suitable device is to be used to find that the inverts coincide and pipe is clear throughout. 19.1 AS BUILT INFORMATION The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer the stations and left or right offsets of all manholes, inlet structures and terminals ends of subdrains, as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the centerline of the sewer along with the elevations of the north edge of manhole cover, inverts of all pipe in structures, and the flow line of inlets. (Gutter) 19.2 TESTING The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly watertight sewer under all conditions. At the discretion of the City Engineer or his designee, the watertightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring the infiltration. The watertightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section of the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 150 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No trench made joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. SECTION IV Page 21 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 19.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot for storm sewer pipe in place and accepted, measured along the centerline of the storm sewer pipe to the inside face of exterior walls of storm manholes or drainage structures and to the outside face of endwalls. Said unit price includes all work required to install the pipe (i.e. all materials, equipment, filter fabric wrap, labor and incidentals, etc.). 20 SANITARY SEWERS AND FORCE MAINS 20.1 MATERIALS 20.1.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE GRAVITY SEWER PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Polyvinyl chloride pipe and fittings shall conform with ASTM specification D 3034 for S.D.R. 35. Sewer pipe with more than 10 feet of cover shall be SDR 26. The pipe shall be plainly marked with the above ASTM designation. The bell end of joints and fittings shall have a rubber sealing ring to provide a tight flexible seal in conformance with ASTM D 3212 76. The laying length of pipe joints shall be a maximum of 20 -feet. Unless otherwise noted in these specifications or construction plans, Ductile Iron pipe and fittings for gravity sewer shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for DIP water main except pipe shall be interior "polylined" in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Where sanitary sewer main is to be placed between building lots in a sideline easement, the sewer main shall, insofar as possible, be constructed without manholes or lateral connections within the side easement. The pipe material in the side easement between streets shall be C 900, SDR 18 polyvinyl chloride water main pipe as described in Technical Section 41. A two -way cleanout shall be installed on each lateral at the property line. 20.1.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE FORCE MAIN PIPE SHALL BE POLYVINYL CHLORIDE OR DUCTILE IRON. Unless otherwise noted in the specifications or construction plans, both polyvinyl chloride and ductile iron force main pipe and fittings shall conform to Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe except that DIP shall be "polylined" in accordance with manufactures recommendations. All polyvinyl chloride pipe which has become deteriorated due to exposure to ultra violet radiation shall be rejected. 20.2 INSTALLATION 20.2.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Installation of gravity sewer pipe shall be in conformance with recommended practices contained in ASTM D 2321 and Unibell UNI B 5. SECTION IV Page 22 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications The bottom trench width in an unsupported trench shall be limited to the minimum practicable width (typically pipe OD plus 8 to 12 -inch on each side) allowing working space to place and compact the haunching material. The use of trench boxes and movable sheeting shall be performed in such a manner that removal, backfill and compaction will not disturb compacted haunching material or pipe alignment. Dewatering of the trench bottom shall be accomplished using adequate means to allow preparation of bedding, placement of the haunching material and pipe in the trench without standing water. Dewatering shall continue until sufficient backfill is placed above the pipe to prevent flotation or misalignment. Where pipe bedding is insufficient to adequately support pipe, the contractor will be required to remove unsuitable material and bed pipe in Class I material (1/2" Dia. aggregate) to provide firm support of pipe. Connections to manholes with sanitary pipe shall use a joint 2 feet in length and shall use an approved water stop around pipe joint entry. The laterals shown on the plans do not necessarily reflect exact locations. The contractor is required to locate all existing laterals for reconnection and to coordinate with the construction inspector the location of all new laterals. 20.2.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Installation of force main pipe shall be in conformance with Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 20.3 AS BUILT DRAWINGS The contractor shall submit to the Engineer a marked set of "As Built" construction drawings describing both the stations and left or right offset of all lateral terminal ends as measured from the nearest downstream manhole along the center line of the sewer main. The as built drawings will also describe elevations of the north edge of the manhole cover rings and inverts of all main pipes in manholes. 20.4 TESTING 20.4.1 TESTING OF GRAVITY SEWERS The Contractor shall take all precautions to secure a perfectly water tight sewer under all conditions. The water tightness of a sewer which has a crown lying below groundwater level may be tested by measuring infiltration. The water tightness of sewers having crowns lying above groundwater level may be tested by filling the pipe with water so as to produce a hydrostatic head of two feet or more above the crown of the sewer at the upper end of the test section or the water table outside of the sewer, whichever is higher, and then measuring the exfiltration. In no case shall the infiltration or exfiltration exceed 50 gallon per inch of diameter per mile per day. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment to test the amount of infiltration or exfiltration under the Engineer's direction. Where the infiltration or exfiltration is excessive, the Contractor at his own expense shall take the necessary steps to remedy such conditions by uncovering the sewer, remaking the joints or by replacing the entire length of sewer as required by the Engineer. No such repaired joints may be backfilled until after they have been tested and found to be acceptable. Care shall be taken to avoid flotation. The SECTION IV Page 23 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Contractor shall TV inspect all mains to verify the true and uniform grade and the absence of bellies or dropped joints prior to acceptance. Any infiltration, dips or sags of more than 1/4- inches shall be cause for rejection. The above tests shall be performed at the discretion of the Engineer on any or all sections of the line. 20.4.2 TESTING OF FORCE MAINS Force mains shall be tested under a hydrostatic pressure of 150 P.S.I. for two (2) hours, as described in Section 41.04 of these Technical Specifications for the testing of water mains. 20.5 BASIS OF PAYMENT 20.5.1 GRAVITY SEWER PIPE Payment for in place sanitary sewer gravity main pipe shall be the unit price per lineal foot per appropriate range of depth of cut as contained in the contract proposal. Measurement for payment shall be along the centerline of the sewer main from center to center of manholes. Payment for laterals shall be the unit price per lineal foot of pipe as measured from the centerline of the sewer main pipe to the terminal end of the lateral pipe including a two -way cleanout at the property line. Payment for sewer pipe shall include all labor, equipment and materials necessary to complete the installation. This shall include clearing and grubbing, excavation, shoring and dewatering, backfill and grading. 20.5.2 FORCE MAIN PIPE Payment and measurement of force main pipe shall be the same as described in Section 41 of these Technical Specifications for water main pipe. 21 DRAINAGE The Contractor shall provide proper outlet for all water courses and drains interrupted during the progress of the work and replace them in as good condition as he found them. 22 ROADWAY BASE AND SUBGRADE 22.1 BASE This specification describes the construction of roadway base and subgrade. The Contractor shall refer to Section IV, Article 1 "Scope of Work" of the city's Contract Specifications for additional roadway base and subgrade items. Roadway base shall be 8" compacted minimum thickness unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The subgrade shall be 12" compacted minimum thickness with a minimum Limerock Bearing Ratio (LBR) of 40 unless otherwise noted on the plans or directed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory a Proctor and an LBR for each type material. The Contractor shall also have an independent testing laboratory perform all required density testing. Where unsuitable material is found within the SECTION IV Page 24 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications limits of the base, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. Once the roadway base is completed, it shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to the base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost for placement of prime material shall be included in the bid item for base. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all base and subgrade placement or reworking. The following base materials are acceptable: 1. SHELL BASE: Shell base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 913 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The shell shall be FDOT approved. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 2. LIMEROCK BASE: Limerock base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 200 and 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The limerock shall be from a FDOT approved certified pit. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 3. CRUSHED CONCRETE BASE: Crushed concrete base shall be constructed in accordance with Sections 204 and 901 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The crushed concrete material shall be FDOT approved. The Contractor shall provide certified laboratory tests on gradation to confirm that the crushed concrete base material conforms to the above specifications. The LBR shall be a minimum of 185. LBR and gradation tests shall be provided to the city by the Contractor once a week for continuous operations, or every 1000 tons of material, unless requested more frequently by the City Engineer or designee. The cost of the prime coat shall be included in the bid item price for base. 4. SOIL CEMENT BASE: Unless otherwise noted, soil cement base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 270 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. An Asphalt Rubber Membrane Interlayer (ARMI) shall be included in the pavement design per Section 341 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) to minimize reflective cracking unless otherwise noted in the project plans and specifications. The ARMI layer shall be overlaid with asphalt on the same day it is placed for the Contractor to receive full compensation for the work. The soil cement base design shall be by a certified lot under the direction of a Registered Florida Professional Engineer, and must be approved by the City Engineer. Said design shall provide for a minimum of 300 P.S.I. in seven days. All plant mixed soil cement shall be certified by a registered laboratory that has been approved by the Engineer. The only approved method for spreading the cement is the use of a spreader box. The use of a spreader bar for spreading cement will not be allowed. The applying of the cement shall not be allowed when the wind velocity is sufficient to jeopardize material interests SECTION IV Page 25 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications (i.e. vehicles, etc.) from airborne cement particles. The density testing frequency shall be at the discretion of the registered Florida Professional Engineer responsible for the soil cement design. 5. ASPHALT BASE: Full depth asphalt base shall be constructed in accordance with Section 280 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications, and shall have a minimum compacted thickness as shown on the plans. The cost for preparation, placement and compaction shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. The cost of the tack coat shall be included in the bid item price for asphalt or base. 6. REWORKED BASE: When the plans call for the working of the existing base, the finished reworked base shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 8" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, and be constructed in accordance with the applicable FDOT requirements for the type of material used. The density requirements (except for asphalt and soil cement base) shall be per Section 200 -7 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). For asphalt, the density requirements are per Section 330 -11, and for soil cement per Section 270 -5 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 22.1.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of base in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency shall be a half -inch (1/2 "). Areas deficient in thickness shall either be fixed by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place. 22.1.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT FOR BASE AND REWORKED BASE The unit price for base shall include: all materials, roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, prime, base, subgrade (unless the plans specify a separate pay item), stabilization, mixing, testing, equipment, tools, hauling, labor, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. Payment for asphalt base shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 22.2 SUBGRADE All subgrade shall be stabilized and constructed in accordance with Sections 160 and 914 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition) unless otherwise noted herein. All subgrade shall have a minimum compacted thickness of 12" unless otherwise shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer. If limerock is used, it shall also meet the requirements of Section 911 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Where unsuitable material is found within the limits of the subgrade, Section IV, Article 17 (Unsuitable Material Removal) of the city's Contract Specifications will apply. The extent of said removal shall be determined by the Engineer in accordance with accepted construction practices. The Contractor is responsible for clearing, grading, filling, and removing any trees or vegetation in the roadbed below the subgrade to prepare it per the plans. The cost of this work shall be included in the unit price for base or subgrade. The Contractor shall obtain from an independent testing laboratory the bearing value after the mixing of materials for the stabilized subgrade. SECTION IV Page 26 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 22.2.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square yards of stabilized subgrade in place and accepted as called for on the plans. The maximum allowable deficiency for mixing depth shall be per Section 161 -6.4 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. Acceptable bearing values shall be per Section 160-7.2 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specification. Areas deficient in thickness or bearing values shall either be corrected by the Contractor to within acceptable tolerance, or if so approved in writing by the City Engineer, may be left in place. No payment, however, will be made for such deficient areas that are left in place (latest edition). 22.2.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for subgrade shall include: roadbed preparation, placement, spreading, compaction, finishing, testing, stabilizing, mixing, materials, hauling, labor, equipment and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. If no pay item is given, subgrade shall be included in the bid item for base. 23 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE MATERIALS This specification is for the preparation and application of all S -Type Marshall Mix Design asphaltic concrete materials on roadway surfaces unless otherwise noted. 23.1 ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 23.1.1 AGGREGATE All aggregates shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 through 919 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.1.2 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.2 HOT BITUMINOUS MIXTURES - PLANT, METHODS, EQUIPMENT & QUALITY ASSURANCE The plant and methods of operation used to prepare all asphaltic concrete and bituminous materials shall conform to the requirements of Section 320 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise noted, all acceptance procedures and quality control /assurance procedures shall conform to the requirements of Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The Contractor shall note that the City shall have the right to have an independent testing laboratory select, test, and analyze, at the expense of the City, test specimens of any or all materials to be used. Tests to be performed by the independent testing laboratory every 1000 tons include, but are not limited to, Marshall stability and flow, extraction /gradation and cores to determine density and thickness. The results of such tests and analyses shall be considered, along with the tests or analyses made by the Contractor, to determine compliance with the applicable specifications for the materials so tested or analyzed. The Contractor hereby understands and accepts that wherever any portion of the work is discovered, as a result of such independent testing or investigation by the City, which fails to meet the requirements of the Contract documents, all costs of such independent inspection and investigation as well as all costs of SECTION IV Page 27 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications removal, correction, reconstruction, or repair of any such work shall be borne solely by the Contractor. Payment reductions for asphalt related items shall be determined by the following: 1. Density per Section 330 -11 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 2. Final surface or friction course tolerances per Section 330 -13 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. Thickness will be determined from core borings. Deficiencies of 1/4" or greater shall be corrected by the Contractor, without compensation, by either replacing the full thickness for a length extending at least 25' from each end of the deficient area, or when the Engineer allows for an overlay per Section 330 - 15.2.3 of FDOT's Standard Specifications 2000 edition. In addition, for excesses of 1/4" or greater, the Engineer will determine if the excess area shall be removed and replaced at no, compensation, or if the pavement in question can remain with payment to be made based on the thickness specified in the contract. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all asphalt. 23.3 ASPHALT MIX DESIGNS AND TYPES All asphalt mix designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. All asphalt mix designs shall be approved by the Engineer PRIOR to the commencement of the paving operation. Reclaimed asphalt pavement (RAP) material may be substituted for aggregate in the asphaltic concrete mixes up to 25% by weight. 23.4 ASPHALT PAVEMENT DESIGNS AND LAYER THICKNESS All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the following requirements: Table 1: Layer Thickness for Asphalt (Layers Are Listed in Sequence of Construction) COURSE THICKNESS (Inches) LAYER THICKNESS (Inches) Type S —I Type S—I with Type S —III Top Layer Type S —III FC -3 Type S —III with FC -3 Top Layer Type S —I with FC -3 Top Layer 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1st 2nd 1 1 1 1'/2 1'/2 2 11/4 3/4 * I I 21/2 11/4 I' /4 11/2 1 1'/2 1 3 11/2 11/2 2 1 2 1 * At the Engineer's discretion, 2" of S -III is acceptable for use on residential streets SECTION IV Page 28 of 134 11/26/2013 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Additional Notes: 1. Type S —III shall be limited to the final (top) structural layer (one layer only). 2. All asphalt pavement designs shall conform to the requirements of Sections 331 and 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 3. All pavement designs shall include a minimum of two inches of asphalt. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible to review the project plans for complete pavement design detail. 5. Unless otherwise specified on the plans, Type S —III per Section 331 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used as final riding surface on streets with the speed limit of less than 35 mph, streets with an average daily traffic (ADT) of less than 3000, and all residential streets. 6. An FC -3 friction course per Section 337 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications shall be used on streets with a speed limit of 35 mph or greater, and streets with an ADT of 3000 or greater. 23.5 GENERAL CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS The general construction requirements for all hot bituminous pavements (including limitations of operations, preparation of mixture, preparation of surface, placement and compaction of mixture, surface requirements, correction of unacceptable pavement, etc.) shall be in accordance with Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 23.6 CRACKS AND POTHOLE PREPARATION 23.6.1 CRACKS Cracks in roadway pavement shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris to be removed from cracks by compressed air or other suitable method. 2. Apply a multiple layered application of bituminous binder and fine aggregate, as appropriate to the depth of the crack until the void of the crack is completely filled to the level of the surrounding roadway surface. 3. If application of asphaltic concrete is not to begin immediately after crack repair, cracks are to be sanded to prevent vehicular tracking. 4. Payment for crack filling shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. 23.6.2 POTHOLES Potholes shall be repaired prior to the application of asphaltic concrete by the following steps: 1. All debris is to be removed from potholes by hand, sweeping, or other suitable method. 2. A tack coat is to be applied to the interior surface of the pothole. 3. The pothole is to be completely filled with asphaltic concrete, and thoroughly compacted. 4. Payment for pothole preparation shall be included in the unit price for asphaltic concrete. SECTION IV Page 29 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 23.7 ADJUSTMENT OF MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and storm drain manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall be paid on a per unit basis for each item. The use of manhole adjustment risers is acceptable under the following conditions: The riser shall meet or exceed all FDOT material, weld, and construction requirements. The riser shall consist of an A -36 hot rolled steel meeting or exceeding the minimum requirements of A.S.T.M. A -36. The riser shall be a single piece with a stainless steel adjustment stud and shall have a rust resistant finish. The use of cast iron, plastic, or fiberglass risers is not permitted. In addition, the installation of each riser shall be per manufacturer's specifications. Each manhole shall be individually measured, and each riser shall be physically marked to ensure that the proper riser is used. Also, the ring section shall be cleaned, and a bead of chemically resistant epoxy applied to the original casting, prior to installation of the riser. It is the Contractors responsibility to ensure that the manholes are measured, the risers are physically marked, the ring sections are thoroughly cleaned, and that the epoxy is properly applied prior to installation of each riser. If risers are not used, the adjustment of manholes shall be accomplished by the removal of pavement around manhole, grade adjustment of ring and cover, and acceptable replacement and compaction of roadway materials prior to paving. A full depth backfill using asphalt is acceptable. The use of Portland cement for backfill is not acceptable. All manhole and valve adjustments shall be accomplished prior to the application of final asphaltic concrete surface. Unless otherwise noted in the specs or on the plans, the paving operation shall occur within seven (7) calendar days from the completion of the adjustment. On arterial roadways, the manholes are to be ramped with asphalt during the time period between initial adjustment and final resurfacing. Water and gas valves, sewer cleanouts, valve boxes, tree aeration vents, etc. will be adjusted by the Contractor with the cost for this work to be included in the unit cost of the asphalt. Care must be taken around said appurtenances to ensure that they are not paved over. It is the Contractor's responsibility to inform the owners of all utilities of impending work and coordinate their adjustments so they are completed prior to the scheduled paving. 23.8 ADDITIONAL ASPHALT REQUIREMENTS 1. All impacted radius returns within project limits shall be paved unless otherwise directed by the Engineer or Project Inspector, with payment to be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt. 2. All pavement markings impacted by placement of asphalt shall be replaced prior to the road being open to traffic unless otherwise noted in the contract scope and plans. 3. All project related debris shall be hauled off the job site by the Contractor in a timely manner and at their own expense in conformance with all regulatory requirements. 4. The Contractor shall pay particular attention to sweeping when paving. The Broom Tractor way of sweeping will not be permitted. Prior to paving, all construction areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper (either vacuum or mechanical type) that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt. The sweeper must be equipped with its own water SECTION IV Page 30 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways, curbs and roadways each day before leaving the job site. 5. The application of tack and prime coats (either required or placed at the Engineer's discretion) shall be placed per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Tack shall also be applied to the face of all curbs and driveways. The cost (including heating, hauling and applying) shall be included in the per ton bid item for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 6. Leveling course and spot patching shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or as directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 7. If an asphalt rubber binder is required, it shall conform to the requirements of Section 336 of FDOT's 2000 Standard Specifications. 8. On all streets with curb and gutter, the final compacted asphalt shall be 1/4" above the lip or face of said curb per City Index 101. 23.9 SUPERPAVE ASPHALTIC CONCRETE 1. Unless otherwise noted in this section, all of the asphaltic concrete specifications in Sections 23.1 through 23.8 above shall apply to superpave asphaltic concrete. All asphaltic concrete pavement shall be designed and placed in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction (latest edition). 2. All aggregate shall be obtained from an approved FDOT source and shall conform to Sections 901 and 902 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 3. All bituminous materials shall conform to Section 916 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Asphaltic binder shall be Grade PG 67 -22 unless otherwise specified in the Scope of Work. 4. All superpave mix designs shall conform to Sections 320 and 334 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 5. All general construction requirements shall conform to Section 330 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 23.10 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Basis of measurement will be the number of tons of asphaltic concrete completed, in place and accepted. Truck scale weights will be required for all asphaltic concrete used. 23.11 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be made at the contract unit price for asphaltic concrete surface as specified and measured above. This price shall include all materials, preparation, hauling, placement, tack and /or prime coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, leveling, spot patching, filling of cracks, pothole repair, sweeping, debris removal, labor, equipment, tools, and incidentals necessary to complete the asphalt work in accordance with the plans and specifications. SECTION IV Page 31 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 24 ADJUSTMENT TO THE UNIT BID PRICE FOR ASPHALT When this Article applies to the contract, the unit bid price for asphalt will be adjusted in accordance with the following provisions: 1. Price adjustment for asphalt shall only be made when the current FDOT Asphalt Price Index varies more than 10% from the bid price at the time of the bid opening. 2. The Bituminous Material Payment Adjustment Index published monthly by the FDOT shall be used for the adjustment of unit prices. This report is available on FDOT's internet site. The address is: http://www11.myflorida.com. It is under the section "Doing Business with FDOT" in the "Contracts Administration" section under "Asphalt Index ". For additional information, call FDOT @ 850- 414 -4000. 3. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of the bid opening will be used for the initial determination of the asphalt price. 4. The FDOT Payment Adjustment Index in effect at the time of placement of the asphalt will be used for payment calculation. 5. The monthly billing period for contract payment will be the same as the monthly period for the FDOT Payment Adjustment Index. 6. No adjustment in bid prices will be made for either tack coat or prime coat. 7. No price adjustment reflecting any further increases in the cost of asphalt will be made for any month after the expiration of the allowable contract time. 8. The City reserves the right to make adjustments for decreases in the cost of asphalt. 25 GENERAL PLANTING SPECIFICATIONS 25.1 IRRIGATION 25.1.1 DESCRIPTION A. The work specified in this Section consists of the installation of an automatic underground irrigation system as shown or noted in the plans. Provide all labor, materials, equipment, services and facilities required to perform all work in connection with the underground sprinkler irrigation system, complete, as indicated on the drawings and /or specified. Work noted as "NIC ", "existing ", or "by others" is not included in this pay item. B. The irrigation plans are schematic in nature. Valves and pipes shall be located in the turf/landscape areas except at road /paving crossings. All piping under paving shall be sleeved. Changes in the irrigation system layout shall be modified with the approval of the Engineer. 25.1.1.1 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The irrigation work shall be installed by qualified personnel or a qualified irrigation subcontracting company that has experience in irrigation systems of similar size, scope, mainline, system pressure, controls, etc. SECTION IV Page 32 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications B. All applicable ANSI, ASTM, FED.SPEC. Standards and Specifications, and all applicable building codes and other public agencies having jurisdiction upon the work shall apply. C. Workmanship: All work shall be installed in a neat, orderly and responsible manner with the recognized standards of workmanship. The Engineer reserves the right to reject material or work which does not conform to the contract documents. Rejected work shall be removed or corrected at the earliest possible time at the contractor's expense. D. Operation and Maintenance Manuals: The contractor shall prepare and deliver to the Engineer within ten (10) calendar days prior to completion of construction a minimum of three (3) hard cover binders with three rings containing the following information: 1. Index sheet stating the contractor's address and business telephone number, 24 hour emergency phone number, person to contact, list of equipment with name(s) and address(es) of local manufacturer's representative(s) and local supplier where replacement equipment can be purchased. 2. Catalog and part sheet on every material and equipment installed under this contract. 3. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment. 4. Provide the Engineer and the City of Clearwater maintenance staff with written and "hands on" instructions for major equipment and show evidence in writing to the Engineer at the conclusion of the project that this service has been rendered. a. Four -hour instruction (minimum) for the Drip Emitter equipment operation and maintenance. b. Two -hour instruction (minimum) for automatic control valve operation and maintenance. 25.1.1.2 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. The Irrigation Contractor shall coordinate the work with all other trades, all underground improvements, the location and planting of trees and all other planting. Verify planting requiring excavation 24 in. diameter and larger with the Engineer prior to installation of main lines. B. Provide temporary irrigation at all times to maintain plant materials. C. The Irrigation Contractor is responsible to maintain the work area and equipment until final acceptance by the Engineer. Repairs and replacement of equipment broken, stolen, or missing as well as regular maintenance operations shall be the obligation of the contractor. D. The Irrigation Contractor shall submit a traffic control plan (per FDOT specifications) to the Engineer prior to initiating construction on the site. The Contractor shall be responsible for the maintenance of traffic signs, barriers, and any additional equipment to comply with the FDOT standards and to ensure the safety of its employees and the public. 25.1.1.3 WARRANTY A. The Manufacturer(s) shall warrant the irrigation system components to give satisfactory service for one (1) year period from the date of acceptance by the Engineer and the City SECTION IV Page 33 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications of Clearwater. Should any problems develop within the warranty period due to inferior or faulty materials, they shall be corrected at no expense to the City of Clearwater or FDOT. 25.1.2 PRODUCTS 25.1.2.1 GENERAL A. All materials throughout the system shall be new and in perfect condition. No deviations from the specifications shall be allowed except as noted. 25.1.2.2 PIPING A. The irrigation system pipe shall be as stated herein and shall be furnished, installed and tested in accordance with these specifications. B. All pipe is herein specified to be Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, 1120, Schedule 40, conforming to ASTM D2665 and D1785. C. All nipples, pipe connections, bushings, swing joints, connecting equipment to the mainline is required to be threaded Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe, Schedule 80. 25.1.2.3 PIPE FITTINGS A. All pipe fittings for Schedule 40 PVC pipe shall be as follows: Fittings shall conform to the requirements of ASTM D2466, Standard Specification for Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size, applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval. The connection of mainline pipe to the automatic control valve shall be assembled with threaded Schedule 80 fittings and threaded Schedule 80 nipples. 25.1.2.4 PVC PIPE CEMENT AND PRIMER A. Provide solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent weld pipe and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer. Pipe joints for solvent weld pipe to be belled end. B. Purple primer shall be applied after the pipe and fittings has been cut and cleaned. The Primer shall be of contrasting color and be easily recognizable against PVC pipe. 25.1.2.5 THREADED CONNECTIONS A. Threaded PVC connections shall be made using Teflon tape or Teflon pipe sealant. 25.1.2.6 GATE VALVES 25.1.2.6.1 MANUAL GATE VALVES 2 IN. AND SMALLER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. 200 -250 psi Ball Valve 2. PVC body - with Teflon Ball Seals 3. Threaded -Dual end Union Connectors 4. Non -Shock Safe -T Shear Stem SECTION IV Page 34 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 5. Safe -T Shear True Union Ball Valve as manufactured by Spears Manufacturing Company , Sylmer, California, or approved equal. 25.1.2.6.2 GATE VALVES 21/2" IN. AND LARGER A. Provide the following, unless otherwise noted on Drawings: 1. AWWA-C-509 2. 2001b. O.W.G. 3. Cast Iron body - ASTM A 126 Class B 4. Deep socket joints 5. Rising stem 6. Bolted bonnet 7. Double disc 8. Equipped with 2" square operating key with tee handle B. Provide two (2) operating keys for gate valve 3" and larger. The "street key" shall be 5' long with a 2" square operating nut. 25.1.2.7 SLEEVES A. Sleeves: (Existing by City of Clearwater) 25.1.2.8 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. The remote control valve shall be a solenoid actuated, balance - pressure across -the diaphragm type capable of having a flow rate of 25 -30 gallons per minute (GPM) with a pressure loss not to exceed 6.1 pounds per square inch (PSI). The valve pressure rating shall not be less than 150 psi. B. The valve body and bonnent shall be constructed of high impact weather resistant plastic, stainless steel and other chemical/UV resistant materials. The valve's one -piece diaphragm shall be of durable santoprene material with a clog resistant metering orifice. C. The valve body shall have a 1" inch (FNPT) inlet and outlet or a one inch slip by slip inlet and outlet for solvent weld pipe connections. D. The valve construction shall be as such to provide for all internal parts to be removable from the top of the valve without disturbing the valve installation. E. The valve shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California, or approved equal. F. Identify all control valves using metal I.D. tags numbered to match drawings. 25.1.2.9 VALVE BOXES A. For remote control drip valve assembly and UNIK control timer use a Brooks #36 concrete value box with #36 -T cast iron traffic bearing cover, or approved equal. B. For flush valve assembly use an Ametek #181014 (10 ") circular valve box with #181015 cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. SECTION IV Page 35 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications C. For air relief assembly use an Ametek #182001 (6 ") economy turf box cover comparable to Brooks, or approved equal. 25.1.2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION with #182002 25.1.2.10.1 CONSTRUCTION A. Techline shall consist of nominal sized one -half inch (1/2 ") low - density linear polyethylene tubing with internal pressure compensating, continuously self - cleaning, integral drippers at a specified spacing, (12 ", 18 ", or 24" centers). The tubing shall be brown in color and conform to an outside diameter (O.D.) of 0.67 inches and an inside diameter (I.D.) of 0.57 inches. Individual pressure compensating drippers shall be welded to the inside wall of the tubing as an integral part of the tubing assembly. These drippers shall be constructed of plastic with a hard plastic diaphragm retainer and a self - flushing/cleaning elastomer diaphragm extending the full length of the dripper. 25.1.2.10.2 OPERATION A. The drippers shall have the ability to independently regulate discharge rates, with an inlet pressure of seven to seventy (7 -70) pounds per square inch (PSI), at a constant flow and with a manufacturer's coefficient of variability (Cv) of 0.03. Recommended operating pressure shall be between 15 -45 PSI. The dripper discharge rate shall be 0.4, 0.6, or 0.9 gallons per hour (GPH) utilizing a combination turbulent flow /reduced pressure compensation cell mechanism and a diaphragm to maintain uniform discharge rates. The drippers shall continuously clean themselves while in operation. The dripperline shall be available in 12 ", 18" and 24" spacing between drippers unless otherwise specified. Techline pipe depth shall be under mulch unless otherwise specified on Plans. Maximum system pressure shall be 45 PSC. Filtration shall be 120 mesh or finer. Bending radius shall be 7 ". B. For on- surface or under mulch installations, 6" metal wire staples (TLS6) shall be installed 3' -5' on center, and two staples installed at every change of direction. 25.1.2.10.3 LINE FLUSHING VALVES A. The sub - surface system shall utilize Automatic Line Flush Valves at the end of each independent zone area. This valve shall be capable of flushing one gallon at the beginning of each irrigation cycle. The valves shall match the dripline manufacturer and connect directly to the dripline. 25.1.2.10.4 AIR/VACUUM RELIEF VALVE A. Each independent irrigation zone shall utilize an Air/Vacuum Relief Valve at its high point(s). The air and vacuum relief valve shall seal effectively from 2 to 110 psi. 25.1.2.10.5 PRESSURE REGULATORS A. The pressure regulator shall be designed to handle steady inlet pressures over 150 pounds per square inch (psi) and maintain a constant outlet pressures of 25 psi. Regulating accuracy shall be within =/ -6 %. The pressure regulator shall be manufactured from high - impact engineering grade thermoplastics. Regulation shall be accomplished by a fixed stainless steel compression spring which shall be enclosed in a chamber separate from the water passage. SECTION IV Page 36 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.2.10.6 FILTERS A. The filter shall be a multiple disc type filter with notation indicating the minimum partial size to travel through or the mesh size of the element being used. The discs shall be constructed of chemical resistant thermoplastic for corrosion resistance. 25.1.2.10.7 FITTINGS A. All connections shall be made with barb or compression type fitting connections. Fittings and dripline shall be as manufactured by the manufacturer of the dripline to ensure the integrity of the subsurface irrigation system. 25.1.2.11 AUTOMATIC CONTROL TIMER A. The irrigation controller (control module) shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device only. The program shall be communicated to the Control Module from the Field Transmitter via an infrared connection. The controller shall be of a module type which may be installed in a valve box underground. The controller shall function normally if submerged in water and the communication from the transmitter shall function if submerged in water. B. The control module shall be housed in an ABS plastic cabinet and shall be potted to insure waterproof operation. The control module shall have two mounting slots for screws allowing the module to be securely mounted inside a valve box. C. The controller shall operate on one nine volt alkaline battery for one full year regardless of the number of stations utilized. The controller shall operate 1, 2, or 4 stations either sequentially or independently. D. The controller shall have three independent programs with eight start times each, station run time capability from one minute to twelve hours in one minute increments, and a seven day calendar. The controller shall turn on stations via latching solenoids installed on the valves. Manual operations shall be initiated by attaching the Field Transmitter to the Control Module and programming a manual start. The controller shall be capable of manual single station or manual program operation. E. The controller shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.12 FIELD TRANSMITTER A. The irrigation controller shall be programmable by a separate transmitter device (Field Transmitter) only. The Field Transmitter shall communicate to the Control Module via an infrared connection. The Field Transmitter shall be water resistant and housed in ABS plastic and have a removable, reversible protective sheath. The Field Transmitter shall operate on one 9V alkaline battery. B. The Field Transmitter shall have a large LCD screen and a seven -key programming pad. A beep sound shall confirm every key stroke. The screen shall automatically turn off after one minute when not in use. C. The Field Transmitter shall be capable of programming an unlimited number of UNIK Control Modules. SECTION IV Page 37 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications D. The Field Transmitter shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.2.13 LATCHING SOLENOID A. The Latching Solenoid shall be supplied with an installed, filtered adapter allowing installation of the solenoid onto any Rain Bird DV, PGA, PEB, PES -B, GB, of EFB series valve. B. The Latching Solenoid shall be as manufactured by Rain Bird Sprinkler Mfg. Corp., Glendora, California USA. 25.1.3 EXECUTION 25.1.3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS A. Before work is commenced, hold a conference with the Engineer to discuss general details of the work. B. Verify dimensions and grades at job site before work is commenced. C. During the progress of the work, a competent superintendent and any assistants necessary shall be on site, all satisfactory to the Engineer. This superintendent shall not be changed, except with the consent of the Engineer. The superintendent shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to the superintendent shall be as binding as if given to the Contractor. D. Obtain and pay for all irrigation and plumbing permits and all inspections required by outside authorities. E. All work indicated or notes on the Drawings shall be provided whether or not specifically mentioned in these Technical Special Provisions. F. If there are ambiguities between the Drawings and Specifications, and specific interpretation or clarification is not issued prior to bidding, the interpretation or clarification will be made only by the Engineer, and the Contractor shall comply with the decisions. In event the installation contradicts the directions given, the installation shall be corrected by the Contractor at no additional cost. G. Layout of sprinkler lines shown on the Drawing is diagrammatic only. Location of sprinkler equipment is contingent upon and subject to integration with all other underground utilities. Contractor shall employ all data contained in the contract Documents and shall verify this information at the construction site to confirm the manner by which it relates to the installation. H. Do not proceed with the installation of the sprinkler system when it is apparent that obstructions or grade differences exist or if conflicts in construction details, legend, or specific notes are discovered. All such obstructions, conflicts, or discrepancies shall be brought to the attention of the Engineer. I. The disturbance of existing paving will not be permitted. Install all required sleeving prior to roadway base. SECTION IV Page 38 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.1.3.2 EXCAVATING AND BACKFILLING 25.1.3.2.1 TRENCHING - GENERAL A. Dig sides of trenches straight. Provide continuous support for pipe on bottom of trenches. Lay pipe to uniform grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings. B. Maintain 6 in. horizontal and minimum clearance between sprinkler lines and between all lines of other trades. C. Do not install sprinkler lines directly above another line of any kind. D. Maintain 6 in. vertical minimum between sprinkler lines which cross at angles of 45 degrees to 90 degrees. E. Exercise care when excavating, trenching and working near existing utilities. 25.1.3.2.2 BACKFILLING A. All pressure supply lines (mainline) shall have 18" of fill placed over the pipe. B. Initial backfill on all lines shall be of a fine granular material with no foreign matter larger than 1/4 in. C. Compact backfill according to Section 125 of FDOT Specification Book, 1996 Edition. D. Do not, under any circumstances, use equipment or vehicle wheels for compacting soil. E. Restore grades and repair damages where settling occurs. F. Compact each layer of fill with approved equipment to achieve a maximum density per AASHTO T 180 - latest edition. Under landscaped area, compaction shall not exceed 95% of maximum density. G. Compaction shall be obtained by the use of mechanical tampers or approved hand tampers. When hand tampers are used, the materials shall be deposited in layers not more than six (6 ") inches thick. The hand tampers shall be suitable for this purpose and shall have a face area of not more than 100 square inches. Special precautions shall be taken to prevent damage to the irrigation system piping and adjacent utilities. 25.1.3.2.3 ROUTING OF PIPING: A. Routing of pressure and non - pressure piping lines are indicated diagrammatically on Drawings. B. Coordinate specimen trees and shrubs with routing of lines. 1. Planting locations shall take precedence over sprinkler and piping locations. 2. Report to Owner any major deviation from routing indicated. C. Conform to Drawings layout without offsetting the various assemblies from the pressure supply line. D. Layout drip tube and make any minor adjustments required due to differences between site and Drawings. Any such deviations in layout shall be within the intent of the original Drawings, and without additional cost. SECTION IV Page 39 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications E. Layout all systems using an approved staking method, and maintain the staking of approved layout. 25.1.3.3 INSTALLATION 25.1.3.3.1 WATER SUPPLY A. Connections to the water sources shall be at the approximate locations indicated on the Drawings. Make minor changes caused by actual site conditions without additional cost to the Owner. 25.1.3.3.2 ASSEMBLIES A. Routing or pressure supply lines as indicated on Drawings is diagrammatic only. Install lines and required assemblies in accordance with details on Drawings. B. Do not install multiple assemblies on plastic lines. Provide each assembly with its own outlet. When used, the pressure relief valve shall be the last assembly. C. Install all assemblies in accord with the respective detail Drawings and these Technical Special Provisions. D. Plastic pipe and threaded fittings shall be assembled using Teflon tape, applied to the male threads only. 25.1.3.3.3 SLEEVES: (EXISTING BY CITY OF CLEARWATER) A. The contractor shall verify the location of all existing sleeves as shown on the roadway, utility and /or irrigation plans and notify the Engineer of any discrepancies. 25.1.3.3.4 PLASTIC PIPE A. Install plastic pipe in accord with manufacturer's recommendations. B. Prepare all welded joints with manufacturer's cleaner prior to applying solvent. 1. Allow welded joints as least 15 minutes setup /curing time before moving or handling. 2. Partially center load pipe in trenches to prevent arching and shifting when water pressure is on. 3. Do not permit water in pipe until a period of at least four hours has elapsed for solvent weld setting and curing, unless recommended otherwise by solvent manufacturer. C. Curing 1. When the temperature is above 80 degrees F., allow soluble weld joints at least 24 hours curing time before water is introduced under pressure. D. Flushing the system: 1. After all sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, open the control valves and flush out the system with a full head of water. E. Installing piping under existing pavement: 1. Piping under existing pavement may be installed by jacking & boring. SECTION IV Page 40 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 2. Secure permission from the Engineer before cutting or breaking any existing pavement. All repairs and replacements shall be approved by Engineer and shall be accomplished at no additional cost. 25.1.3.3.5 CONTROLLERS A. Install all automatic controllers as shown in the plans. 1. The location of all controllers shall be approved by the Engineers representative prior to installation. 25.1.3.3.6 REMOTE CONTROL VALVES A. Install at sufficient depth to provide not more than 6 in., nor less than 4 in. cover from the top of the valve to finish grade. B. Install valves in a plumb position with 24 in. minimum maintenance clearance from other equipment, 3 feet minimum from edges of sidewalks, buildings, and walls, and no closer than 7 feet from the back of curb or edge of pavement along roadways. C. Contractor shall adjust the valve to provide the proper flow rate or operating pressure for each sprinkler zone. 25.1.3.3.7 GATE VALVES A. Install where indicated and with sufficient clearance from other materials for proper maintenance. B. Check and tighten valve bonnet packing before backfill. 25.2 LANDSCAPE 25.2.1 GENERAL 25.2.1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. The Contract Documents shall include the Plans, Details, Specifications, Bid Proposal, Contract Agreement, including Installation Schedule, all Addenda, and Contractual and Special Conditions when required. 25.2.1.2 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES A. Comply with Federal, State, Local, and other duly constituted authorities and regulatory agencies, without additional cost to the Owner in matters pertaining to codes, safety, and environmental matters. B. Any permits for the installation or construction of any of the work included under the contract, which are required by any of the legally constituted authorities having jurisdiction, shall be arranged for by the Contractor and paid for directly by the Contractor, unless otherwise agreed upon in writing. 25.2.1.3 SCOPE OF WORK A. All provisions of Contract, including General and Special Provisions and Plans, apply to the work specified in this Section. The Scope of Work includes everything for and SECTION IV Page 41 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications incidental to executing and completing all landscape work shown on the Plans, Schedules, Notes and as specified herein. B. Furnish and provide all labor, plants and materials tools and equipment necessary to prepare the soil for plantings, to install and care for all plant materials (including finish grading if necessary); to remove and /or transplant existing plants if indicated; to furnish, plant, fertilize, guy and brace, water, mulch and prune all new plant materials; and to execute all other Work as described herein or indicated on the Plans. C. Work under this Section shall include labor and materials for final grading and raking to prepare the site for sodding, sprigging, or seeding, so finished lawn or playing field will appear even and uniform, will drain adequately, and will comply with the intent of the landscape drawings. D. Initial maintenance of landscape materials as specified in this document. 25.2.1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Landscape work shall be contracted to a single firm specializing in landscape work, who shall in turn subcontract no more than 40% of the work specified. All subcontractors under the control of the Contractor involved in the completion of the landscape work, shall be made known to the Owner and the Landscape Architect prior to their commencement of work on the project. B. All work of this Section shall conform to the highest standard of landscape practices. C. The Plant Material Schedule included with these Plans is provided only for the Contractor's convenience; it shall not be construed as to conflict or predominate over the Plans. If conflict between the Plans and Specifications exists, the Plan shall predominate and be considered the controlling document. D. During this work, the Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining safety among persons in his employ in accordance with the standards set by The Occupational Safety and Health Act of 1970 (and all subsequent amendments). Owner and Landscape Architect shall be held harmless from any accident, injury or any other incident resulting from compliance or non - compliance with these standards. E. The Contractor shall cooperate with and coordinate with all other trades whose work is built into or affects the work in this Section. F. All appropriate utility companies and agencies shall be contacted 72 hours prior to excavation. Call "One Call" at 1- 800 - 432 -4770. G. The Contractor shall carefully examine the site and all existing conditions affecting the work, such as: soil, obstructions, existing trees, utilities, etc. Report any conditions in conflict with the work to the Landscape Architect. 25.2.1.5 SUBMITTALS A. The Contractor is required to submit prior to the expiration of the required maintenance period, two copies of typewritten instructions recommending procedures to be established by the Owner for maintenance of landscape work for a period of one year. B. Furnish unit prices for all plant materials and inert materials, including labor for all specified work. SECTION IV Page 42 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.1.6 ALTERNATES, ADDITIONS, DELETIONS, SUBSTITUTIONS A. If there are additions /alternates included in these Plans and Specifications, the Contractor must propose prices to accomplish the work stated as additions /alternates at the time of bidding. B. The Owner, through his Project Representative, reserves the right to add or deduct any of the work stated herein without rendering the Contract void. C. The Contractor must have written approval by the Project Representative for any substitutions not previously agreed to in the purchase agreement: installation without approval is entirely at the Contractor's risk. D. All material acquired through additions or substitutions shall be subject to all conditions and warranties stated herein. 25.2.1.7 ABBREVIATIONS /DEFINITIONS O.A. or HT.: The over -all height of the plant measured from the ground to the natural, untied state of the majority of the foliage, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. C.T.: C. W.: SPR.: ST TR.: MIN.: GAL.: O.C.: DIA.: LVS.: Clear trunk is measured from the ground to the bottom of the first leaf or frond stem with no foliage from ground to specified height. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear trunk measurement includes the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Clear wood is measured from the ground to the bottom of the base of the lowest leaf sheath or boot, trimmed in a natural manner. For example, on Canary Island Date Palms or similar, the clear wood measurement does not include the "nut" at the base of the fronds. Spread, branches measured in natural untied position to the average crown diameter, not including extreme leaves, branches or fronds. Straight trunk. Minimum. Gallon container size, i.e., 1 gallon, 3 gallon, 7 gallon, etc. On center, distance between plant centers. Diameter. Leaves. SECTION IV Page 43 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications D.B.H. Diameter or caliper of main trunk of tree as measured at breast height at 4-1/2 feet above grade. CAL.: B &B: PPP: FG: STD.: Caliper, the outside diameter of up to a four inch tree is measured six inches above grade, larger trees are measured at 12 inches above grade. Balled and burlapped in accordance with horticultural standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Plants per pot. Field grown. Standard, single, straight trunk. Owner: To be known as that entity which holds title or control to the premises on which the work is performed. Owners Representative: Owner's on -site representative shall be responsible for approval of quantity and quality of materials specified and execution of installation. Contractor: Shall refer to that person or enterprise commonly known as the Landscape Contractor. Landscape Architect: This person or firm is the responsible representative of the Owner who produces the landscape Plans and Specifications. 25.2.1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING 25.2.1.8.1 PLANT MATERIALS A. Provide container grown or, if appropriate, freshly dug trees and shrubs. Do not prune prior to delivery. Do not bend or bind trees or shrubs in such a manner as to damage bark, break branches or destroy natural shape. Provide protective covering during delivery. If plant delivery is made in open vehicles, the entire load shall be suitably covered. B. All plants are to be handled at all times so that roots or root balls are adequately protected from sun, cold, or drying winds. No root balls for trees and container plants that have been cracked or broken shall be planted except upon special approval. Plants shall not be pulled by the tops or stems, nor handled in a rough or careless manner at any time. C. Balled and burlapped plants shall be moved with firm, natural, balls of soil, not less than 1 foot diameter of ball to every 1 inch caliper of trunk; root ball depth shall not be less than 2/3 of root ball diameter. B & B plants which cannot be planted upon delivery shall have their root balls covered with moist soil or mulch. SECTION IV Page 44 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications D. Trees shall be dug with adequate balls, burlapped, and wire bound if needed. Root pruning to be done a minimum of 4 weeks before removal from the field and planting at the site. Root balls may not be encased in "grow bags" or other synthetic material, except plastic shrink wrap for transport only. E. Remove all fronds form cabal palms prior to planting, but leave a minimum of 12 inches of new frond growth above the bud. Do not damage bud. On all other palms, only a minimum of palm fronds shall be removed from crown to facilitate moving and handling. Clear trunk shall be determined after minimum fronds have been removed. Boots shall be removed from trunk unless otherwise specified. Palms shall be planted within 24 hours of delivery. F. Deliver trees and shrubs after preparations for planting have been completed and plant immediately. If planting is delayed more than 6 hours after delivery, set trees and shrubs in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and cover to keep the roots moist. G. Label at least one tree and one shrub of each variety with a securely attached waterproof tag bearing legible designation of botanical and common name. H. Sod: Time delivery so that sod will be placed within twenty -four (24) hours after stripping. Protect sod against drying and breaking by covering palettes of sod or placing in a shaded area. 25.2.1.9 JOB CONDITIONS 25.2.1.9.1 ACCEPTANCE OF JOB CONDITIONS. A. The Contractor shall examine the sub - grade, verify elevations, observe the conditions under which work is to be performed and notify the Landscape Architect or Project Representative in writing of unsatisfactory conditions prior to beginning work. Do not proceed with the work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner acceptable to the Landscape Architect. Start of work shall indicate acceptance of conditions and full responsibility for the completed work. B. Proceed with and complete the landscape work as rapidly as portions of the site become available, working within the seasonal limitations for each kind of landscape work and following the approved schedule. If seasonal limitations apply, notify the Landscape Architect for adjustments to the Schedule. C. Determine locations of all underground utilities and review for conflicts with planting procedures. D. When adverse conditions to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, drainage conditions or obstruction, the Contractor shall notify the Landscape Architect in writing prior to planting. E. Plant trees and shrubs after final grades are established and prior to the planting of lawns, protecting lawn trees and promptly repairing damages from planting operations. 25.2.1.9.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK A. The work shall be carried out to completion with the utmost speed. Immediately upon award of contract, the Contractor shall prepare a construction schedule and furnish a copy SECTION IV Page 45 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications to the Owner's Representative and /or the Landscape Architect for approval. The Contractor shall carry out the work in accordance with the approved schedule. B. If the Contractor incurs unforeseen costs, such as overtime hours, holidays, etc. in order to complete the work within the time stated in the Contract, and /or to maintain the progress schedule, all said costs shall be borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. C. The Owner's Representative's may request in writing work stoppage. Upon written request from the Owner's Representative, the Landscape Contractor shall suspend delivery of material and stop all work for such a period as deemed necessary by the Owner, the Owner's Representative, or the General Contractor with respect to any additional costs which may result from work stoppage. 25.2.1.9.3 UTILITIES A. The Contractor shall perform work in a manner which will avoid conflicts with utilities. Hand excavate, as required, to minimize possibility of damage to underground utilities. Maintain grade stakes set by others until removal is mutually agreed upon by all parties concerned. 25.2.2 PRODUCTS 25.2.2.1 MATERIALS 25.2.2.1.1 PLANT MATERIALS: NOMENCLATURE A. Plant species, sizes, etc. shall be per Plans and Specifications on Plant Material Scheduled. Nomenclature is per Manual of Cultivated Plant, Standard Encyclopedia of Horticulture, L.H. Bailey, or Standardized Plant Names Dictionary, American Joint Committee on Horticultural Nomenclature (latest editions), or conforms with names accepted in the nursery trade. 25.2.2.1.2 PLANT MATERIALS: QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide healthy, vigorous stock grown under climatic conditions similar to conditions in the locality of the project. Plants shall have a habit of growth that is normal for the species and be sound, healthy, vigorous and free from insect pests or their eggs, plant diseases, defects and injuries. Plants shall be well branched and densely foliated when in leaf and shall have healthy, well- developed root systems. B. Trees shall be heavily branched or, in the case of palms, be heavily leafed. Some plant materials may be collected stock with the approval of the Landscape Architect. Provided tree species that have a single main trunk (central leader), unless otherwise stated. Trees that have the main trunk forming a "Y" shape or parallel branching are not acceptable. C. Plant materials shall be specified and shall be Florida #1 or better as to shape and quality for the species as outlined in Grades and Standards for Nursery Plants Part I and II, Florida Department of Agriculture and Consumer Services (latest edition). D. The Owner or Landscape Architect reserves the right to inspect plant materials either at the place of growth or at the project site prior to planting for compliance with requirements for name variety, size quality, or designated area. SECTION IV Page 46 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications E. Landscape materials shall be shipped with certificates of inspection as required by governmental authorities. The Contractor shall comply with all governing regulations that are applicable to landscape materials. F. Do not make substitutions. If specified landscape material is not available, submit Landscape Architect proof of it being non - available. In such event, if the Landscape Architect designates an available source, such shall be acquired from designated source. When authorized, a written change order for substitute material will be made by adjustment to Contract amount. G. Height and /or width of trees shall be measured from ground up; width measurement shall be normal crown spread of branches with plants in the normal position. This measurement shall not include immediate terminal growth. All measurements shall be taken after pruning for specified sizes. All trees and shrubs shall conform to measurements specified in the plant material schedule, except that plant material larger than specified may be used with the approval of the Owner or Landscape Architect; with no increase to the Contract price. Plant materials shall not be pruned prior to delivery. H. Plant Material shall be symmetrical, typical for variety and species. Plants used where symmetry is required shall be matched as nearly as possible. I. Balled and burlapped plants shall have firm, natural balls of earth of sufficient diameter and depth to encompass the feeding root system necessary for full development of the plant and to conform with the standards of the American Association of Nurserymen. Root balls and tree trunks shall not be damaged by improper binding and B & B procedures. J. Container -grown plants may be substituted for balled and burlapped plants or vice -versa provided the quality is equal or better than specified and the Landscape Architect approves the substitution. K. Container grown stock shall have been grown in containers for at least four months, but not over two years. If requested, samples must be shown to prove no root bound condition exists. 25.2.2.1.3 GRASSES: SOD OR SEED A. Sod or seed (as /if specified) shall be a species as stated on the Plan. Solid sod shall be of even thickness and with a good root structure, 95% free of noxious week, freshly mowed before cutting, and in healthy condition when laid. It must not be stacked more than 24 hours before laying and it must be grown in soil compatible to that in which it will be installed. Sod must be kept moist prior to and after installation. B. Seed shall be delivered to the site in unopened bags with certification tags in place. Purity, germination and weed content shall be as certification requirements. 25.2.2.1.4 MULCH A. Mulch shall be 100% Grade `B" shredded cypress bark mulch, thoroughly mixed with a pre- emergence weed killer according to the label directions as specified on the plan. B. Install mulch to an even depth of 3" before compaction. SECTION IV Page 47 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.2.1.5 FERTILIZER A. Granular fertilizer shall be uniform in composition; free flowing and suitable for application with approved equipment; received at the site in full, labeled, unopened bags bearing the name, trade name or trademark and warranty of the producer; fully conforming to State of Florida fertilizer laws. B. All fertilizer shall bear the manufacturer's statement of analysis and shall contain the appropriate minimum amounts of elements for the type of use specified herein. C. Agriform 20 -10 -5 fertilizer tablets or approved equal, shall be placed in planting pit for all plant materials at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. D. Ground cover and annual areas shall receive fertilization with Osmocote Time Release Fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. E. For sod and seeded areas, fertilize with a complete granular fertilizer on Bahia and St. Augustine grass at the rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per one thousand (1,000) square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 50% of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. The ratio of nitrogen to potash will be 1:1 or 2:1 for complete fertilizer formulations. Phosphorus shall be no more than '/4 the nitrogen level. They shall also contain magnesium and micronutrients (i.e. manganese, iron, zinc, copper, etc.). 25.2.2.1.6 STAKES AND GUYS A. For trees, approved plastic or rubber guys shall be used between the stakes and the tree trunk. Galvanized steel guy wire shall not be used. B. Stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees over 2" caliper. Stakes shall be 2" x 2" pressure treated (p.t.) stock for trees 2" caliper and under. A minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree shall be used. C. For single trunk palms, stakes shall be cut from 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock, with a minimum of 3 stakes per palm. Batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5 - 2" x 4" by 16" wood connected with two - 3/4" steel bands shall be used around the palm trunk. D. Other tree staking systems may be acceptable if approved. 25.2.2.1.7 PLANTING SOIL A. Unless stated on the plans or in the specifications, install plant material in tilled and loosened native soil backfill. It is the responsibility of the Landscape Contractor to test, prior to planting and at no additional cost to the Contract, any soils which may be unsuitable for the vigorous growth of plants. Unsuitable conditions shall be reported to the Landscape Architect immediately in writing. B. When required, planting soil media shall be provided by the Contractor and shall consist of 1/3 peat and 2/3 sandy loam, with no lumps over 1 ". C. Backfill and clean fill dirt provided by the Contractor shall be in a loose, friable soil. There must be slight acid reaction to the soil (about 6.0 — 6.5 pH) with no excess of calcium or carbonate, and it shall be free from excess weeds, clay lumps, stones, stumps, roots and toxic substances or any other materials that might be harmful to plant growth or SECTION IV Page 48 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications a hindrance to grading, planting, and maintenance procedures and operations. No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used as fill dirt. D. Bed preparation for annual beds under 1 gallon container size shall consist of 3" of Florida peat or other approved organic soil amendment spread over full length and width of planting area. Rototil organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into native soil. 25.2.2.1.8 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Terra -Sorb AG or approved equal, soil amendment shall be mixed with native or planting soil for all trees, shrubs, ground cover, and annuals according to manufacturer's recommended application rates and methods, if specified on the Plans. 25.2.2.1.9 TREE PROTECTION A. Wood fencing shall be 2" x 4" pressure treated (p.t.) stock with flagging on horizontal members. Space vertical members 6 feet to 8 feet on center. The barricade shall be placed so as to protect the critical protection zone area, which is the area surrounding a tree within a circle described by a radius of one foot for each inch of the tree's diameter at breast height DBH at 4 - Y2 feet above grade. 25.2.2.1.10 ROOT BARRIER SYSTEM A. Root barrier fabric shall be installed when specified in the plans and /or specifications for protection of adjacent paved surfaces according to specific product name or equal. Install as directed by the manufacturer. 25.2.2.1.11 PACKAGED MATERIALS A. Deliver packaged materials in containers showing weight, analysis and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at the site. 25.2.2.1.12 PESTICIDES A. Pesticides shall be only approved, safe brands applied according to manufacturer's directions. 25.2.3 EXECUTION 25.2.3.1 PREPARATION 25.2.3.1.1 OBSTRUCTIONS BELOW GROUND A. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to locate and mark all underground utilities, irrigation lines and wiring prior to commencement of the work. B. If underground construction, utilities or other obstructions are encountered in excavation of planting areas or pits, the Landscape Architect shall be immediately notified to select a relocated position for any materials necessary. 25.2.3.1.2 GRADING AND PREPARATION FOR PLANT MATERIALS A. All proposed landscape areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed landscape areas SECTION IV Page 49 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the manufacturer's specifications. B. New plant materials will not be installed until a 98% weed /turf eradication has been achieved. More than one application may be required to produce an acceptable planting bed. C. Pre - emergent herbicides are not a substitute for spray treatment of "Round -Up" or "Rodeo ", and may be used only with the written approval of the Landscape Architect. D. Should any plant material in the same, or adjacent beds be damaged by these chemicals, the same size, quantity and quality of plants shall be immediately replaced by the Contractor at no cost to the Owner. E. Any necessary corrections or repairs to the finish grades shall be accomplished by the Contractor. All planting areas shall be carefully graded and raked to smooth, even finish grade, free from depressions, lumps, stones, sticks or other debris and such that they will conform to the required finish grades and provide uniform and satisfactory surface drainage without puddling. F. The Contractor shall remove debris (sticks, stones, rubbish) over 1 - '/2 inches in any dimension form individual tree, shrub and hedge pits and dispose of the excavated material off the site. 25.2.3.1.3 PREPARATION FOR ANNUAL BED PLANTING A. Prepare native subgrade by rototilling or loosening by hand methods. Spread 3 inches of Florida peat (1/3), sandy loam (1/3), or other approved organic soil amendment over the full length and width of planting area for annuals. Rototill organic layer 6 inches to 8 inches into the native soil. Grade the planting bed by "crowning' to insure that surface drainage, percolation, and aeration occur at rapid rates. Add Osmocote time release fertilizer according to product instructions and rate. 25.2.3.1.4 PREPARATION FOR SEEDING AND SOD AREAS A. All proposed sod areas containing existing turf grass or weeds shall be treated with Monsanto's "Round -Up" per manufacturer's specifications. All proposed sod areas adjacent to water bodies shall be treated with "Rodeo" per the Manufacturer's Specifications. B. Limit preparation to areas which will be planted promptly after preparation. Loosen sub - grade of seed and sod areas to a minimum depth of 4 inches. C. Immediately prior to any turf work, the Contractor shall finish grade the soil to a smooth, even surface assuring positive drainage away from buildings and the subsequent turf flush to the tops of adjacent curbs and sidewalks. The surface shall be sloped to existing yard drains. D. A complete fertilizer shall be applied to St. Augustine or Bahia grass at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1000 square feet. Fertilizer shall be commercial grade, mixed granules, with 30% - 505 of the nitrogen being in slow or controlled release form. Thoroughly work fertilizer into the top 4 inches of soil. SECTION IV Page 50 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications E. Moisten prepared seed and sod areas before planting if soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface moisture to dry before planting lawns. Do not create a muddy soil condition. 25.2.3.2 INSTALLATION 25.2.3.2.1 BERM CONSTRUCTION (IF SPECIFIED) A. Install berms at location and design shown on Plans and at the height and slope indicated. Height stated is for finished berm with soil at natural compaction. B. Exact location and configuration of berms may require modification to allow proper drainage; such changes will be coordinated with the Landscape Architect. C. If shown on the Plan, construct berms using clean sandy loam fill dirt which is well - drained, free of rocks, roots, or other debris, with a soil pH of an acid Nature (about 6.0 - 6.5). No heavily organic soil, such as muck or peat shall be used in berm construction. 25.2.3.2.2 LAYOUT OF PLANT MATERIALS A. Unless otherwise stipulated, plant materials shall be approximately located per the plans by scale measurements using established building, columns, curbs, screen walls, etc. as the measuring reference point. Slight shifting may be required to clear wires, prevent blockage of signage, etc. B. Shrubs and ground covers shall be located and spaced as noted on the plant material schedule (if provided), otherwise plants will be placed in the planting beds at the normally accepted spacing for each species. C. Leave an 18 inch (450 millimeters) border of mulched space between outer leaves of installed plant material and the bed line, curb, or building foundation wall for all plant sizes. D. Any necessary "minor" adjustments in the layout of planting shall be made by the Contractor with the approval of the Landscape Architect in order to conform as nearly as possible to the intent of the plans. 25.2.3.2.3 PLANTING PROCEDURES A. All shrubs, trees and ground covers or vines shall be planted in pits having vertical sides and being circular in outline. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. B. Plants shall be set straight or plumb, in the locations shown, at such level that after settlement normal or natural relationship of the top of the root ball with the ground surface will be established. With regards to proper nursery practices, plants under certain conditions (i.e. low and wet areas) will benefit from being planted "high" with the root ball about 1 inch higher than the surrounding grade. C. All plant materials shall be fertilized with Agriform 20 -10 -5 planting tablets, or approved equal, at time of installation and prior to completion of pit backfilling. Agriform planting tablets shall be placed uniformly around the root mass at a depth that is between the middle and the bottom of the root mass. Application rate: SECTION IV Page 51 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1 gallon 1 - 21 gram tablet 3 gallon 2 - 21 gram tablet 5 gallon 3 - 21 gram tablet 7 gallon 4 - 21 gram tablet Trees 3 tablets each'' /" (12 millimeters) caliper Palms 7- 21 gram tablets D. Native soil shall be used in back - filling plant pits or as specified. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing additional soil for building tree saucers. E. When balled and burlapped plants are set, undisturbed native soil shall be left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Remove the top 4 inches (100 millimeters) of burlap wire, and all tie -down material from the root ball. Do not remove these materials from the bottom of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the back -fill up to the proper grade Roots of bare plants shall be properly spread out, and planting soil carefully worked in among them. Failure to comply is cause for rejection. F. Containerized plants shall be installed with undisturbed native soil left under the base of the root ball to prevent voids. Planting pit shall be 3 to 5 times the width of the root ball. Backfill tilled and loosened native soil around the sides of the root ball. Thoroughly water -in before bringing the backfill up to the proper grade. G. Plant spacing shall be "on center" and varies with the different plant species. Space each variety of plant equally in the planting areas. Shrubs and ground covers adjacent to straight or curved edges shall be triangular - spaced in rows parallel to those edges. Plant a minimum of 18 inches from the back of the curb to the outside edge of the plant. H. All azaleas shall be placed into a prepared bed of amended soil containing 50% weed -free Florida peat or approved equivalent. Root balls shall be scarified vertically at 120 degree angles in a triangular pattern. I. Sabal palms may be planted deeper than normal if conditions warrant and if approved. 25.2.3.2.4 SODDING A. During periods of drought, sod shall be watered sufficiently at its origin to moisten the soil adequately to the depth to which it is to be cut. B. An application of 6 -6 -6, 40% organic, slow or controlled release fertilizer shall be made to all lawn areas just prior to the laying of the sod at a rate of one (1) pound of nitrogen per 1,000 square feet. The ground shall be wet down before the sod is laid in place. C. Solid sod shall be laid tightly with closely abutting staggered joints with an even surface edge and sod edge, in a neat and clean manner to the edge of all the paving and shrub areas. Cut down soil level to 1 inch to 1-1/2 inches below top of walks prior to laying sod. D. Within 2 hours after installing sod and prior to rolling, irrigate the sod. Sufficient water shall be applied to wet the sod thoroughly and to wet the sod to a depth of 2 inches (50 millimeters). Watering shall be done in a manner that will avoid erosion due to the application of excessive quantities, and the watering equipment shall be a type that will prevent damage to the finished sod surface. Watering shall be repeated as necessary to keep sod moist until rooted to subgrade. SECTION IV Page 52 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications E. The sod shall be pressed firmly into contact with the sod bed using a turf roller or other approved equipment so as to eliminate air pockets, provide a true and even surface and insure knitting without any displacement of the sod or deformation of the surfaces of sodded areas. After the sodding operation has been completed, the edges of the area shall be smooth and shall conform to the grades indicated. F. If, in the opinion of the Landscape Architect, top dressing is necessary after rolling, clean silica sand shall be used to fill voids. Evenly apply sand over the entire surface to be leveled, filling -in dips and voids and thoroughly washing into the sod areas. G. On slopes steeper than 2:1 and as required, the sod shall be fastened in place with suitable wooden pins or by other approved method. 25.2.3.2.5 SEEDING A. Seed shall be installed per the specifications of the State of Florida Department of Transportation. See plan for type of seed. 25.2.3.2.6 TREE GUYING, BRACING AND STAKING A. Tree guying, staking and bracing shall be the responsibility of the Contractor per sound nursery practices, and shall be done per details shown on the Plans. For trees, a minimum of 2 stakes per tree or an optional 3 stakes per tree at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Stakes shall be driven in at an angle, then tightened to vertical supported by approved plastic or rubber guys. Trees shall be staked with a minimum of 4 feet height of stake above grade and a minimum of 30 inches of stake below grade. B. For single trunk palms, a minimum of 3 stakes per palm at 120 degree spacing shall be used. Toenail the stakes to batten consisting of 5 layers of burlap and 5- 2 inch x 4 inch x 16 inch wood connected with two 3/4 inch steel bands. Palms shall be staked with a minimum of 5 feet of stake above grade. C. Contractor shall remove all tree guying, staking, and bracing from trees six (6) months after the date of final acceptance of the landscape work. D. Stake only trees that require support to maintain a plumb position or are in potentially hazardous areas. 25.2.3.2.7 MULCHING A. All planting beds shall be weed -free prior to mulching. B. All curb, roadway, and bed line edges will be "trenched" to help contain the applied mulch. C. All plant beds and tree rings shall be mulched evenly with a 3 inch layer (before compaction) of 100% Grade B recycled cypress bark mulch, or other mulch as specified on the Plans or General Notes. D. Mulch shall not be placed against the trunks of plant materials or foundations of buildings. Maintain a minimum 3 inch clearance for trees and shrub trunks and a minimum 6 inch clearance for the walls of buildings. E. For beds of annual flowers, a 12 inch wide x 3 inch deep band of mulch shall be installed in front of the first row of annuals. Maintain a minimum 6 inches of non - mulched clearance from the outside edge of annuals. SECTION IV Page 53 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 25.2.3.2.8 PRUNING A. Pruning shall be done by an experienced certified Arborist to maintain the natural shape and form of the plant. B. Upon acceptance by the Owner, prune any broken branches, remove crossed branches, and branches hanging below the clear trunk of the tree. 25.2.3.2.9 CLEAN -UP A. During landscape work, store materials and equipment where directed by the Owner. B. The Contractor shall promptly remove any materials and equipment used on the job, keeping the area neat at all times. Upon completion of all planting, dispose of all excess soil and debris leaving pavements and work areas in safe and orderly condition. C. The clean -up of the site shall include the removal and proper disposal of the tree guying, staking, and bracing materials as described in specifications. 25.2.3.2.10 PROTECTION A. The Contractor shall provide safeguards for the protection of workmen and others on, about, or adjacent to the work, as required under the parameters of the Occupational Safety and Health Administration (O.S.H.A.) standards. B. The Contractor shall protect the Owner's and adjacent property from damage. C. the Contractor shall protect the landscape work and materials from damage due to landscape operations. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance periods. D. The Contractor shall provide protection (tree barricades) for all existing trees and palms as specified. 25.2.3.2.11 REPAIR OF DAMAGES E. The Contractor shall repair all damage caused by his operations to other materials, property, or trades to a level equal in quality to the existing condition prior to damage. F. The Contractor shall be held responsible for all damage done by his work or employees to other materials or trades' work. Patching and replacement of damaged work may be done by others, at the Owner's direction, but the cost of same shall be paid by the Contractor who is responsible for the damage. 25.2.3.3 MAINTENANCE A. The Contractor shall maintain all plant materials in a first class condition from the beginning of landscape construction until Final Acceptance. B. Operations: 1. Maintenance shall include, but not be limited to, watering of turf and planting beds, mowing, fertilizing, cultivation, weeding, pruning, disease and pest control, replacement of dead materials, straightening, turf or planter settlement corrections, replacement of rejected materials, staking and guying repair and tightening, wash -out repairs and regrading, and any other procedures consistent with the good horticultural practice necessary to insure normal, vigorous and healthy growth of all work under SECTION IV Page 54 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications the Contract. Mowing shall be consistent with the recommended height per the University of Florida Cooperative Extension Service. 2. Within the warranty period, the Contractor shall notify the Owner of any maintenance practices being followed or omitted which would be detrimental to the healthy, vigorous growth of the landscape. 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for the final watering of not less than one inch of water for all planted materials before leaving the site. 25.2.3.4 INSPECTION, REJECTION, AND ACCEPTANCE 25.2.3.4.1 INSPECTION A. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor will notify the Owner or the Owner's Representative that the job is ready for inspection. Within 15 days of notifications, the installation will be inspected by the Landscape Architect. A written and /or graphic inspection report will be sent to the Owner and /or Landscape Contractor. 25.2.3.4.2 REJECTION AND REPLACEMENT A. The Landscape Architect shall be final judge as to the suitability and acceptability of any part of the work. Plant material will be rejected if it does not meet the requirements set forth in Plans and Specifications. B. Replace any rejected materials immediately or within 15 days and notify the Landscape Architect that the correction has been made. 25.2.3.4.3 ACCEPTANCE A. After replacement of rejected plant material (if any) have been made, and completion of all other correction items, the Owner or Project Representative will accept the project in writing. B. Upon Final Acceptance, the Owner assumes responsibility for maintenance within the terms of the Contract. Acceptance will in no way invalidate the Contractor's warranty period. C. The Contractor's warranty period will begin after final acceptance of the project by the Owner. 1. If evidence exists of any lien or claim arising out of or in connection with default in performance of this Contract, the Owner shall have the right to retain any payment sufficient to discharge such claim and all costs in connection with discharging such claim. 2. Where the Specifications call for any stipulated item or an "approved equivalent ", or in words to that effect, the Contractor shall indicate the price of the type and species specified in the proposal, giving the price to be added or deducted from his Contract price. The final selection rests with the Owner or his representative. 3. Where plants installed do not meet specifications, the Owner reserves the right to request plant replacement or an appropriate deduction from the Contract amount to compensate for the value not received from the under - specified plant materials. No SECTION IV Page 55 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications additional compensation will be made to the Contractor for plants installed that exceed specifications. 25.2.3.5 WARRANTY A. The Contractor shall warranty all palms and trees furnished under this contract for a period of one (1) year and all shrubs for a period of six (6) months. Material which is either dead or in poor health during this period or at completion will be replaced at no charge to the Owner. Should any of the plant materials show 50% or more defoliation during the warranty period, due to the Contractor's use of poor quality or improper materials or workmanship, the Contractor upon notice, shall replace without delay same with no additional cost to the Owner. Should any plant require replacing, the new plant shall be given the equal amount of warranty. 1 1 1 26 HDPE DEFORMED - REFORMED PIPE LINING 26.1 INTENT 1 It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of 8" to 12" sanitary sewers by the installation of a high density polyethylene, jointless, continuous, fold and form pipe liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 26.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR/INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the fold and form liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 26.3 MATERIALS Pipe shall be made from P. E. 3408 polyethylene resins complying with ASTM D 3350, cell classification: P.E. 345434 D for High Density. It shall be Type 3, Grade 4, Class D, according to ASTM D 1248. The Contractor shall provide certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. Material shall have a minimum thickness of SDR 32.5. Pipe specimens shall comply with the minimum property values shown below with the applicable ASTM requirements: Material Property ASTM Method Value HDPE Tensile Strength D 638 3,300 psi Elasticity Modulus E= 113,000 psi SECTION IV Page 56 of 134 11/26/2013 1 1 w 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications HDPE Impact Strength D 256 A 3.0 ft -lb /in Flexure Modulus E= 136,000 psi Expansion Coeff. c =0.009 in /in /deg F At the time of manufacture, each lot of liner shall be reviewed for defects and tested in accordance with ASTM D 2837 and D 1693. At the time of delivery, the liner shall be homogeneous throughout, uniform in color, free of cracks, holes, foreign materials, blisters, or deleterious faults. The Contractor shall provide, as requested, certified test results for review by the Engineer, from the manufacturer, that the material conforms with the applicable requirements. The Engineer may at any time request the Contractor provide test results from field samples to the above requirements. Liner shall be marked at 5 -foot intervals or less with a coded number, which identifies the manufacturer, SDR, size, material, date, and shift on which the liner was extruded. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Pipe Liners, Inc. 3421 N. Causeway, Suite 321, New Orleans, LA 70002, 1- 800 -344 -3744 or approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and /or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 26.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. 26.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed - circuit color television, and recorded on VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. SECTION IV Page 57 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 26.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide a tight fit to the full interior circumference of the existing sanitary sewer and shall be a continuous, jointless liner product from inside of manhole to inside of manhole. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including liner placement, reforming to fit existing pipe, pressure and heat requirements and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. OSHA requirements for installation procedures, in particular, confined spaces are to be met. 26.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 100% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 26.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than a eight hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 26.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. 27 PLANT MIX DRIVEWAYS New driveways or existing black top driveways that must be broken back in widening the pavement (remove only enough to allow adequate grade for access to the street) shall be constructed or replaced in accordance with the specifications for paving the street with the exception that the base shall be six (6) inches. Use Section 23 G Asphaltic Concrete as specified for the street paving. SECTION IV Page 58 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications When finished surface of existing drive is gravel, replacement shall be of like material. Payment shall be the same as Plant Mix Driveways. 27.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT Measurement shall be the number of square yard of Plant Mix Driveways in place and accepted. 27.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square yard for Plant Mix Driveways as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 28 REPORTING OF TONNAGE OF RECYCLED MATERIALS This Article deleted. 29 CONCRETE CURBS Concrete Curbs shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete curbs shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 100 feet, and scored joints shall be placed at intervals not to exceed 10 feet. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete curbs. 29.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be lineal feet of curb in place and accepted. 29.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per lineal foot of curb, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 30 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS AND DRIVEWAYS 30.1 CONCRETE SIDEWALKS Concrete sidewalks shall be constructed to the line, grade and dimensions as shown on the plans or herein specified. Unless otherwise noted, all concrete sidewalks shall have fiber mesh reinforcement and have a minimum strength of 3000 p.s.i. at 28 days. Unless otherwise specified, all concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum width of four feet (4'). Concrete sidewalks shall have a minimum thickness of four inches (4 "), except at driveway crossings where a minimum thickness of six inches (6 ") is required. Also, 6/6 X 10/10 welded wire mesh reinforcement is required for all sidewalk that crosses driveways. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Expansion joints shall be placed at intervals of not SECTION IV Page 59 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications more than 100 hundred feet, and scoring marks shall be made every 5 feet. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. 30.2 CONCRETE DRIVEWAYS Concrete driveways, whether new construction or replacement, shall be a minimum of six (6) inches in thickness with 6/6 x 10 /10 welded wire mesh reinforcement and a minimum horizontal distance between expansion joints of no less than four (4) feet measured in any direction. The welded wire mesh shall be positioned in the middle to upper third of the placement. No compensation shall be given if the welded wire mesh is not properly placed. Concrete shall be poured only on compacted subgrade. In addition, all the requirements of City Articles 6, 7, and 8 shall also apply. The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the placement of all concrete sidewalks and driveways. 30.3 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be the number of square feet of 4" concrete sidewalk, 6" concrete sidewalk, and 6" concrete driveways in place and accepted. 30.4 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment shall be the unit price per square foot for each item as measured above, which price shall be full compensation for all work described in this section and other applicable parts of the specifications and shall include all materials, equipment, tools, welded wire mesh where required, labor and incidentals necessary to complete the work. 31 SODDING Unless otherwise noted herein, the contractor shall place all sod, either shown on the plans or at the direction of the Engineer, in conformance with Sections 575, 981, 982 and 983 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The area for sod application shall be loosened and excavated to a suitable depth and finished to a grade compatible with existing grass and structures. Sod shall be placed with edges in close contact and shall be compacted to uniform finished grade with a sod roller immediately after placement. In sloped areas, the sod shall be graded and placed so as to prohibit erosion and undermining of the adjacent sidewalk. No sod that has been cut for more than 72 hours can be used unless authorized by the Engineer in advance. The sod shall be thoroughly watered immediately after placement. The Contractor shall continue to water sod as needed and /or directed by the Engineer as indicated by sun exposure, soil, heat and rain conditions, to establish and assure growth, until termination of the contract. Dead sod, or sod not acceptable to the Engineer, shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at no additional compensation. Any questions concerning the type of existing sod shall be determined by the Engineer. Unless otherwise noted on the plans, payment for sod (including labor, equipment, materials, placement, rolling, watering, etc.) shall be included in other bid items. Payment for these associated bid items may be withheld until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. When this work is given as a separate bid item, it shall cover all labor, equipment and materials, (including water) required for this work and shall be paid for on the SECTION IV Page 60 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications basis of each square foot in place and accepted. No payment for sod shall be made until the Contractor provides the City a healthy, properly placed stand of grass. 32 SEEDING Seed, or seed and mulch, shall only be used when specified for certain demolition projects. The seed and /or mulch shall be placed as called for on the plans in the following manner. The area to be seeded shall be brought to the required line and grade, fertilized and seeded in basic conformance with the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications Sections 570, 981, 982 and 983. However, no wildflower seed shall be used, and Argentine Bahia Seed shall be used instead of Pensacola Bahia. No sprigging will be required. Also, the addition of 20 lb. of Rye Seed (to total 60 lb. of seed per acre) will be required during the stated periods. It is also required that the Contractor maintain said seed until growth is assured. When this work is given as a bid item, the item shall cover all labor, material, equipment (including water), required for this work, and shall be paid for on the basis of each square yard in place and accepted. If called for on the plans, but not shown as a bid item, then the cost of such work as stated above shall be included in the cost of other work. 33 STORM MANHOLES, INLETS, CATCH BASINS OR OTHER STORM STRUCTURES For details on specific design of a type of storm structure refer to Part B Index Numbers 200 to 235. When required, inlets, catch basins or other structures shall be constructed according to the plans and applicable parts of the specifications, Section Numbers 7, 8, & 9, and as approved by the Engineer. Said structures shall be protected and saved from damage by the elements or other causes until acceptance of the work. 33.1 BUILT UP TYPE STRUCTURES Manholes shall be constructed of brick with cast iron frames and covers as shown on the Index Numbers 201 and 202. Invert channels shall be constructed smooth and semi circular in shape conforming to inside of adjacent sewer section. Changes in direction of flow shall be made in a smooth curve of as large a radius as possible. Changes in size and grade of channels shall be made gradually and evenly. Invert channels shall be built up with brick and mortar on top of concrete base. The storm structure floor outside of channels shall be made smooth and sloped toward channels. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Joints shall be completely filled and the mortar shall be smoothed from inside of the manholes. The entire exterior of brick manholes shall be plastered with one half inch of mortar. Brick shall be laid radially with every sixth course being a stretcher course. In cases where a storm pipe extends inside a structure, the excess pipe will be cut off with a concrete saw and shall not be removed with a sledge hammer. SECTION IV Page 61 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 33.2 PRECAST TYPE The manhole base shall be set on a pad of dry native sand approximately five inches thick to secure proper seating and bearing. Precast Manholes and Junction Boxes: The Contractor may substitute precast manholes and junction boxes in lieu of cast in place units unless otherwise shown on the plans. Precast Inlets will not be acceptable. When precast units are substituted, the construction of such units must be in accordance with ASTM C 478, or the standard specifications at the manufacturers option. Precast structures must also meet the requirement that on the lateral faces, either inside or outside, the distance between precast openings for pipe or precast opening and top edge of precast structure be no less than wall thickness. A minimum of four courses of brick will be provided under manhole ring so that future adjustment of manhole lid can be accommodated. Manhole steps shall not be provided. Manhole using 0 ring between precast sections will not be acceptable for storm structures. 33.3 BASIS OF PAYMENT Payment for Junction Boxes, Manholes or other structures shall be on a unit basis. 34 MATERIAL USED This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 19 — MATERIAL USED. 35 CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 20 — CONFLICT BETWEEN PLANS AND SPECIFICATIONS. 36 STREET SIGNS The removal, covering or relocation of street signs by the Contractor is PROHIBITED. All street signs shall be removed, covered or relocated by the City's Traffic Engineering Division in accordance with Sections 700, 994, 995, and 996 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the City's Traffic Engineering Division a minimum of 24 hours in advance of the proposed sign relocation, covering or removal. 37 AUDIONIDEO RECORDING OF WORK AREAS 37.1 CONTRACTOR TO PREPARE AUDIONIDEO RECORDING Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color audio /video recording taken along the entire length of the Project including all affected project areas. Streets, easements, rights -of -way, lots or construction sites within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of a pre - construction conditions. 37.2 SCHEDULING OF AUDIONIDEO RECORDING The video recordings shall not be made more than twenty -one (21) days prior to construction in any area. SECTION IV Page 62 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.3 PROFESSIONAL VIDEOGRAPHERS The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer. The color audio videotapes shall be prepared by a responsible commercial firm known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of pre- construction color audio -video recording documentation. 37.4 EQUIPMENT All equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service shall be furnished by the Contractor. The total audio video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. 37.5 RECORDED INFORMATION, AUDIO Each recording shall begin with the current date, project name and be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. 37.6 RECORDED INFORMATION VIDEO All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the hour, minutes and seconds. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects will be clearly viewed during videotape playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 37.7 VIEWER ORIENTATION The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed construction location will not be readily apparent to the videotape viewer, highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. SECTION IV Page 63 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 37.8 LIGHTING All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No taping shall be done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 37.9 SPEED OF TRAVEL The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the general direction of travel of the vehicle used during taping shall not exceed forty -four (44) feet per minute. 37.10 VIDEO LOG /INDEX All videotapes shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified by videotape number and project title. Each videotape shall have a log of that videotape's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of coverage contained on the video tape in terms of the names of the streets or location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if reasonably available) and the date. 37.11 AREA OF COVERAGE Tape coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc. within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. Taped coverage shall be limited to one side of the Site, street, easement or right of way at any one time. 37.12 COSTS OF VIDEO SERVICES The cost to complete the requirements under this section shall be included in the contract items provided in the proposal sheet. There is no separate pay item for this work. 38 EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL 38.1 STABILIZATION OF DENUDED AREAS No disturbed area may be denuded for more than thirty (30) calendar days unless otherwise authorized by the City Engineer. During construction, denuded areas shall be covered by mulches such as straw, hay, filter fabric, seed and mulch, sod, or some other permanent vegetation. Within sixty (60) calendar days after final grade is established on any portion of a project site, that portion of the site shall be provided with established permanent soil stabilization measures per the original site plan, whether by impervious surface or landscaping. SECTION IV Page 64 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications 38.2 PROTECTION AND STABILIZATION OF SOIL STOCKPILES Fill material stockpiles shall be protected at all times by on -site drainage controls which prevent erosion of the stockpiled material. Control of dust from such stockpiles may be required, depending upon their location and the expected length of time the stockpiles will be present. In no case shall an unstabilized stockpile remain after thirty (30) calendar days. 38.3 PROTECTION OF EXISTING STORM SEWER SYSTEMS During construction, all storm sewer inlets in the vicinity of the project shall be protected by sediment traps such as secured hay bales, sod, stone, etc., which shall be maintained and modified as required by construction progress, and which must be approved by the City Engineer before installation. 38.4 SEDIMENT TRAPPING MEASURES Sediment basins and traps, perimeter berms, filter fences, berms, sediment barriers, vegetative buffers and other measures intended to trap sediment and /or prevent the transport of sediment onto adjacent properties, or into existing water bodies; must be installed, constructed, or, in the case of vegetative buffers, protected from disturbance, as a first step in the land alteration process. Such systems shall be fully operative and inspected by the City before any other disturbance of the site begins. Earthen structures including but not limited to berms, earth filters, dams or dikes shall be stabilized and protected from drainage damage or erosion within one week of installation. 38.5 SEDIMENTATION BASINS Areas of 3 acres or more shall be required to have temporary sedimentation basins as a positive remedy against downstream siltation and will be shown and detailed on construction plans. During development, permanent detention areas may be used in place of silt basins, provided they are maintained to the satisfaction of the City. The Contractor will be required to prohibit discharge of silt through the outfall structure during construction of any detention area and will be required to clean out the detention area before installing any permanent subdrain pipe. In addition, permanent detention areas must be totally cleaned out and operating properly at final inspection and at the end of the one year warranty period. When temporary sedimentation basins are used, they shall be capable at all times of containing at least one (1) cubic foot of sediment for each one hundred (100) square feet of area tributary to the basin. Such capacity shall be maintained throughout the project by regular removal of sediment from the basin. 38.6 WORKING IN OR CROSSING WATERWAYS OR WATERBODIES Land alteration and construction shall be minimized in both permanent and intermittent waterways and the immediately adjacent buffer of 25 feet from top of bank of the waterways and the buffer area whenever possible, and barriers shall be used to prevent access. Where in channel work cannot be avoided, precautions must be taken to stabilize the work area during land alteration, development and /or construction to minimize erosion. If the channel and buffer area are disturbed during land alteration, they must be stabilized within three (3) calendar days after the in channel work is completed. SECTION IV Page 65 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications Silt curtains or other filter /siltation reduction devices must be installed on the downstream side of the in channel alteration activity to eliminate impacts due to increased turbidity. Wherever stream crossings are required, properly sized temporary culverts shall be provided by the contractor and removed when construction is completed. The area of the crossing shall be restored to a condition as nearly as possible equal to that which existed prior to any construction activity. 38.7 SWALES, DITCHES AND CHANNELS All swales, ditches and channels leading from the site shall be sodded within three (3) days of excavation. All other interior swales, etc., including detention areas will be sodded prior to issuance of a Certificate of Occupancy. 38.8 UNDERGROUND UTILITY CONSTRUCTION The construction of underground utility lines and other structures shall be done in accordance with the following standards: a. No more than 400 lineal feet of trench shall be open at any one time; b. Wherever consistent with safety and space consideration, excavated material shall be cast to the uphill side of trenches. Trench material shall not be cast into or onto the slope of any stream, channel, road ditch or waterway. 38.9 MAINTENANCE All erosion and siltation control devices shall be checked regularly, especially after each rainfall and will be cleaned out and /or repaired as required. 38.10 COMPLIANCE Failure to comply with the aforementioned requirements may result in a fine and /or more stringent enforcement procedures such as (but not limited to) issuance of a "Stop Work Order ". City of Clearwater Standard Detail Drawings No. 601 and 607 are examples of accepted methods that may be used or required to control erosion and siltation. SECTION IV Page 66 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications City of Clearwater - Erosion Control This notice is to inform the prime contractor that the City of Clearwater holds them responsible for soil erosion control on their site. The City of Clearwater Engineering Department has the responsibility to minimize the amount of soil erosion into the City's streets, storm sewers and waterways. The construction of a new residence or commercial site and major remodeling of an existing site creates a potential for soil erosion. These instances are usually the result of contractors and subcontractors accessing the property with equipment or construction materials. Then rain storms redistribute the eroded soil into the adjacent streets, storm systems and waterways. When erosion takes place, a City Inspector will place a correction notice at the site. The procedure will be as follows: 1st occurrence Warning 2nd occurrence - $32 Re- inspection Fee 3rd occurrence - $80 Re- inspection Fee 4th occurrence Stop Work Order Dependent on the severity of the erosion, the City's Engineering Department may elect to rectify the erosion problem and charge the contractor accordingly. The attached drawings and details are recommendations for the contractor to use as means to support the site from eroding. The contractor may elect to shovel and sweep the street daily or on an as needed basis. However, erosion must be held in check. If the contractor would like to meet with a City inspector on any particular site, please contact Construction Services at 562 -4750 or Planning & Development Services at 562 -4741. Erosion Control Required - City of Clearwater's Code of Ordinances requires erosion control on all land development projects. Erosion control must be in place and maintained throughout the job. Failure to do so may result in additional costs and time delays to the permit holder. Contact Engineering Department with specific questions at 562 -4750. SECTION IV Page 67 of 134 11/26/2013 Section IV — Technical Specifications CITY OF CLEARWATER NOTICE OF EROSION VIOLATION UNDER SECTION 3 -701 (DIVISION 7 — EROSION AND SILTATION CONTROL) OF THE CITY OF CLEARWATER CODE OF ORDINANCES, THIS SITE HAS BEEN FOUND IN VIOLATION. THIS SITE MUST BE RESTORED TO AN EROSION CONTROLLED SITE PRIOR TO ANY FURTHER DEVELOPMENT TO CONTINUE. Warning $32.00 Re- inspection Fee $80.00 Re- inspection Fee Stop Work Order CITY OF CLEARWATER PLANNING & DEVELOPMENT SERVICES 727 562 -4741 ENGINEERING /CONSTRUCTION 727 562 -4750 DATE POSTED: Inspector's Name: Received by: (Signature indicates only a copy of this notice has been received and does not in any way indicate admission of guilt or concurrence with findings of the inspector.) Inspector's Signature: IT IS A VIOLATION TO REMOVE THIS NOTICE ANY UNAUTHORIZED PERSON REMOVING THIS SIGN WILL BE PROSECUTED SECTION IV Page 68 of 134 5/15/2012 ON MP r 111111 MIS r I M MN MO M IN I NM MN I I NM r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 39 UTILITY TIE IN LOCATION MARKING The tie in locations for utility laterals of water, sanitary sewer, and gas shall be plainly marked on the back of the curb. Marking placed on the curb shall be perpendicular with respect to the curb of the tie in location on the utility lateral. Marks shall not be placed on the curb where laterals cross diagonally under the curb. The tie in location shall be the end of the utility lateral prior to service connection. Markings shall be uniform in size and shape and colors in conformance with the code adopted by the American Public Works Association as follows: SAFETY RED Electric power, distribution & transmission Municipal Electric Systems HIGH VISIBILITY SAFETY YELLOW Gas Distribution and Transmission Oil Distribution and Transmission Dangerous Materials, Produce Lines, Steam Lines SAFETY ALERT ORANGE Telephone and Telegraph Systems Police and Fire Communications Cable Television SAFETY PRECAUTION BLUE Water Systems Slurry Pipe Lines SAFETY GREEN Sewer Systems LAVENDER RECLAIMED WATER WHITE PROPOSED EXCAVATION Marks placed on curbs shall be rectangular in shape and placed with the long dimension perpendicular to the flow line of the curb. Marks placed on valley gutter and modified curb shall be 6 -inch x 3 -inch and placed at the back of the curb. Marks placed on State Road and vertical curb shall be 4 -inch X 2 -inch and be placed on the curb face. 40 AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE This article not used. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 24 — AWARD OF CONTRACT, WORK SCHEDULE AND GUARANTEE. 41 POTABLE WATERMAINS, RECLAIMED WATERMAINS AND APPURTENANCES 41.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all plant, labor, materials and equipment to perform all operations in connection with the construction of potable water mains, reclaimed water mains and appurtenances including clearing, excavation, trenching, backfilling and clean up. SECTION IV Page 69 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.2 MATERIALS 41.2.1 GENERAL Materials, equipment and supplies furnished and permanently incorporated into the project shall be of first quality in every respect and shall be constructed and finished to high standards of workmanship. Materials shall be suitable for service intended, shall reflect modern design and engineering and shall be fabricated in a first class workmanlike manner. All materials, equipment and supplies shall be new and shall have not been in service at any time previous to installation, except as required in tests or incident to installation. Machined metal surfaces, exposed bearings and glands shall be protected against grit, dirt, chemical corrosion and other damaging effects during shipment and construction. 41.2.2 PIPE MATERIALS AND FITTINGS 41.2.2.1 DUCTILE IRON PIPE Ductile Iron Pipe shall be in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe thickness class, wall thickness and working pressure shall conform to the following table: Size Class Thickness (In.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) 4" 51 0.26 350 6" 50 0.25 350 8" 50 0.27 350 12" 50 0.31 350 The trench laying condition shall be Type 2, Flat bottom trench backfill lightly consolidated to centerline of pipe. Pipe shall be manufactured in accordance with ANSUAWWA C151/A21.51 81 or latest revision. Pipe shall be asphalt coated on the outside and standard cement lined and sealed coated with approved bituminous seal coat in accordance with ANSUAWWA C104/A21.4 80 or latest revision. 41.2.2.2 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe 4 -inch through 8 -inch shall be in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C900 or latest revision and the American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) Standard D 2241 and PVC Resin Compound conforming to ASTM Specification D 1784. Polyvinyl Chloride Pipe shall have the same O.D. as Cast and Ductile Iron Pipe and be compatible for use without special adapters with Cast Iron Fittings. Pipe dimension ratio, working pressure and laying length shall conform to the following table: SECTION IV Page 70 of 134 5/15/2012 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Size Dimension Ratio (OD/Thick.) Rated Water Working Pressure (PSI) Laying Length (Ft) 4 18 150 20 6 18 150 20 8 18 150 20 Pipe larger than 8 -inch shall be ductile iron. The City Engineer reserves the right to require the use of ductile iron in sizes 4 -inch through 8 -inch when needed due to laying conditions or usage. The bell of 4 -inch and larger PVC pipe shall consist of an integral wall section with a solid cross section elastomeric ring which meets the requirements ofASTM D 1869. Each length of pipe shall bear identification that will remain legible during normal handling, storage and installation and so designate the testing agency that verified the suitability of the pipe material for potable water service. All polyvinyl chloride pipe shall be laid with two (2) strands of insulated 12 gauge A.W.G. solid strand copper wire taped to the top of each joint of pipe with about 18- inches between each piece of tape. It is to be installed at every valve box through a 2 -inch PVC pipe to 12- inches minimum above the top of the concrete slab. The 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be the same length as the adjustable valve box, and the 2 -inch PVC pipe shall be plugged with a 2 -inch removable brass plug with recessed nut. This wire is to be continuous with splices made only by direct bury 3M brand splice kit approved by the Engineer. This wire is to be secured to all valves, tees and elbows. 41.2.2.3 FITTINGS AND JOINTS Fitting from 4 -inch through 16 -inch in size will be compact ductile iron cast in accordance with ANSUAWWA C153/A 21.53 with mechanical joint bells. Bolts, nuts and gaskets shall be in accordance with requirements of ANSI/AW WA C153/A 21.53. The working pressure rating shall be 350 P.S.I. Ductile iron fittings shall be coated and lined in accordance with require requirements of ANSI/AWWA C104/A21.4. Mechanical joint glands shall be ductile iron in accordance with ANSI /AWWA C111 /A 21.11. When reference is made to ANSI /AWWA Standards, the latest revisions apply. Only those fittings and accessories that are of domestic (USA) manufacture will be acceptable. 41.2.2.4 RESTRAINT Restraint of plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., shall be accomplished by the use of approved mechanical restraining rings or glands installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be restrained by the use of swivel connecting joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants shall be used only where hydrant runout length precludes the use of swivel joint connectors. 41.2.2.5 PIPE WITHIN CASING All pipe placed within casings shall be slip joint ductile iron restrained by the use of restraining gaskets designed for use with the particular joint being installed and have properly sized casing spacers (Cascade Series) installed on the pipe so that the pipe will be centered within the casing. SECTION IV Page 71 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Each end of the casing shall be properly sealed to prevent the intrusion of soil, water, or debris within the casing itself. It shall be sealed by brick and mortar, cement or any approved method by the Engineer. 41.2.3 GATE VALVES Discs of valves shall be operated by methods which will allow operation in any position with respect to the vertical. Gate valves for interior piping or exposed above grade outside structures, shall be handwheel operated with rising stems. Valves 4- inches and larger, buried in earth shall be equipped with 2 -inch square operating nuts, valve boxes and covers. Valves shall be fitted with joints suitable for the pipe with which they are to be used. The direction of opening for all valves shall be to the left (counter clockwise). Pressure Rating: Unless otherwise shown or specified, valves for high pressure service shall be rated at not less than 150 psi cold water, nonshock. The manufacturer's name and pressure rating shall be cast in raised letters on the valve body. Installation: Installation shall be in accordance with good standard practice. Exposed pipelines shall be so supported that their weight is not carried through valves. Two Inch Diameter and smaller: Not allowed. These should be approved ball valves. Three Inch Diameter: Not allowed. Four Inch to Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate Valves, 4 to 16 -inch diameter, inclusive, shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM Rubber in conformance with ANSI/A.W.W.A. Standard Specification C509 -515 latest revision. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -515, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 p.s.i. differential pressure, all internal parts removable from bonnet without removing body from pressure main, corrosion resistant bronze or stainless steel nonrising stem with 0 ring bonnet seal with epoxy coated inside and outside cast iron or ductile iron valve body.. Larger than Sixteen Inch Diameter: Gate valves larger than 16 -inch shall be suitable for the service intended and shall be resilient seated gate valves encapsulated with EPDM rubber in conformance with ANSI /AWWA. These valves shall include the following features consistent with C509 -80, full opening unobstructed waterway, zero leakage at 200 psi differential pressure. All valves shall be equipped with steel cut bevel gears, extended type gear case and rollers, bronze or babbitt tracks and scrapers and valved by -pass. 41.2.4 VALVE BOXES Valve boxes shall be of standard extension design and manufacture and shall be made of cast iron. No PVC Risers or Derisers are allowed as part of a valve box assembly. They are to be a- piece valve box assembles. The lower part of the assembly can be ordered in various heights to accommodate different depths. Suitable sizes of valve boxes and extension pieces shall be provided where shown. The valve box cover shall be of cast iron. Valve boxes and their installation shall be included in the bid price for valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve boxes and pad detail. SECTION IV Page 72 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.2.5 HYDRANTS No other hydrants, other than those listed below, may be used in extension to or replacement of the City of Clearwater potable water system: • Kennedy Guardian #K 81D Fire Hydrant, • Mueller Super Centurion 25 Fire Hydrant • AVK Nostalgic 2780. • American Darling B -84 -B. No substitutions shall be allowed without the approval of the City of Clearwater. Above hydrants shall be in accordance with the latest revision of the AWWA Specification C 502 and include the following modifications: 1. All shipments to be palletized and tailgate delivery. 2. Hydrants shall conform to A.W.W.A. Standard C -502 latest revision and must be UL /FM listed. 3. Hydrants shall be of the compression type, closing with line pressure. 4. The operating threads will be contained in an operating chamber sealed at the top and bottom with an 0-ring seal. The chamber will contain a lubricating grease or oil. 5. Hydrants shall be of the traffic model breakaway type, with the barrel made in two sections with the break flange located approximately 2 -inch above the ground line. Breakaway bolts not allowed. 6. Operating nut shall be of one -piece bronze or ductile iron construction. 7. A dirt shield shall be provided to protect the operating mechanism from grit buildup and corrosion due to moisture. 8. A thrust washer shall be supplied between the operating nut and stem lock nut to facilitate operation. 9. Operating nut shall be a #7 (1 -1/2 -inch) pentagon nut. 10. Nozzles shall be of the tamper resistant, 1/4 turn type with 0-ring seals or threaded into upper barrel. Nozzles shall be retained with a stainless steel locking device. 11. The main valve shall be of EPDM solid rubber. 12. The seat shall be of a bronze ring threaded to a bronze insert in the hydrant shoe, with 0- rings to seal the barrel from leakage of water in the shoe. 13. The main valve stem will be 304 or higher grade stainless steel and made in two sections with a breakable coupling. 14. Hydrant shall have a 6 -inch Mechanical Joint epoxy lined elbow, less accessories. 15. Hydrant shall have a 5 -1/4 -inch valve opening, and shall be a left hand operation to open. 16. Hydrant shall be without drains. 17. Hydrant shall have two (2) 2 -1/2 -inch hose nozzles and one (1) 4 -1/2 -inch pumper nozzle. Threads shall be in accordance with the National Standard Hose Coupling Thread Specifications. SECTION IV Page 73 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 18. Hydrant body shall have a factory finish of yellow paint. All paints shall comply with AWWA standard C- 502 -85 or latest revision. All hydrants will be shop tested in accordance with the latest AWWA Specification C 502. Constrained joint assemblies shall be used which have bolted mechanical and swivel joints from the hydrant tee through to the hydrant. Constrained joints shall absorb all thrust and prevent movement of the hydrant. All hydrants shall be provided with an auxiliary gate valve so that the water to the hydrant may be shut off without the necessity of closing any other valve in the distribution system. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. 41.2.6 SERVICE SADDLES Service saddles shall be used on all service taps to 4 -inch P.V.C. water main. The largest service connection allowable on 4 -inch main shall be 1 -1/2 -inch. Service saddles shall be used on all 2- inch service connections to 6 -inch and larger mains. Service saddles (JCM 406 series or Ford FC 202 series) shall be wide bodied ductile iron with epoxy or nylon coating and shall have stainless steel straps. 41.2.7 TESTS, INSPECTION AND REPAIRS 1. All materials shall be tested in accordance with the applicable Federal, ASTM or AWWA Specification and basis of rejection shall be as specified therein. Certified copies of the tests shall be submitted with each shipment of materials. 2. All materials will be subject to inspection and approved by the Engineer after delivery; and no broken, cracked, misshapen, imperfectly coated or otherwise damaged or unsatisfactory material shall be used. 3. All material found during the progress of the work to have cracks, flaws, or other defects shall be rejected and promptly removed from the site. 4. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or water main accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. 41.2.8 BACKFLOW PREVENTERS The City of Clearwater owns and maintains all backflow prevention devices that are installed within their system. Therefore, any and all devices must be purchased from the City and installed by City work forces. Backflow prevention devices installed on customer's service lines at the point of delivery (service connection) shall be of a type in accordance with AWWA specification C506 or latest revision. Two (2) different types of backflow prevention devices are allowed. Type of device, when required, is determined by the degree of hazard presented to the municipal water system from possible backflow of water within the customers private system. The types of devices allowed are: SECTION IV Page 74 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 1. Double Check Valve Assembly a device composed of two single, independently acting, approved check valves, including tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the assembly and suitable connections for testing the watertightness of each check valve. 2. Reduced pressure principle backflow prevention device a device containing a minimum of two independently acting, approved check valves, together with an automatically operated pressure differential relief valve located between the two check valves. The unit must include tightly closing shutoff valves located at each end of the device, and each device shall be fitted with properly located test cocks. 41.2.9 TAPPING SLEEVES Steel body tapping sleeves shall be JCM Industries Inc., JCM 412 or Smith -Blair 622. All steel body tapping sleeves shall have heavy welded ASTM A 285, Grade C steel body, stainless steel bolts, manufacturer's epoxy coated body, and 3/4 -inch bronze test plug. 41.2.10 BLOW OFF HYDRANTS Blow offs are not allowed. 41.3 CONSTRUCTION 41.3.1 MATERIAL HANDLING 1. Pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and accessories shall be loaded and unloaded by lifting with hoists or skidding so as to avoid shock or damage. Under no circumstances shall such materials be dropped. Pipe handled on skidways shall not be skidded rolled against pipe already on the ground. 2. Pipe shall be so handled that the coating and lining will not be damaged. If, however, any part of the coating or lining is damaged, the repair shall be made by the Contractor at his expense in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 3. In distributing the material at the site of the work, each piece shall be unloaded opposite or near the place where it is to be laid in the trench. 41.3.2 PIPE LAYING 41.3.2.1 ALIGNMENT AND GRADE The pipe shall be laid and maintained to the required lines and grades with fittings, valves and hydrants at the required locations, spigots centered in bells; and all valves and hydrant stems plumb. All pipe installed shall be pigged and properly blown off before any pressure testing and sterilization of the pipe can be completed. The depth of cover over the water main shall be a minimum of 30- inches and a maximum of 42- inches below finished grade, except where approved by the Engineer to avoid conflicts and obstructions. Whenever obstructions not shown on the plans are encountered during the progress of the work and interfere to such an extent that an alteration of the plans is required, the Engineer shall have the authority to change the plans and order a deviation from the line and grade or arrange with the Owners of the structures for the removal, relocation, or reconstruction of the obstructions. SECTION IV Page 75 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.2.2 INSTALLATION Proper implements, tools, and facilities satisfactory to the Engineer shall be provided and used by the Contractor for the safe and convenient performance of the work. All pipe, fittings, valves and hydrants shall be carefully lowered into the trench piece by piece by means of a derrick, ropes, or other suitable tools or equipment in such a manner as to prevent damage to materials and protective coatings and linings. Under no circumstances shall materials be dropped or dumped in the trench. If damage occurs to any pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants or accessories in handling, the damage shall be immediately brought to the Engineer's attention. The Engineer shall prescribe corrective repairs or rejection of the damaged items. All pipe and fittings shall be carefully examined for cracks and other defects while suspended above the trench immediately before installation in final position. Spigot ends shall be examined with particular care as this area is the most vulnerable to damage from handling. Defective pipe or fittings shall be laid aside for inspection by the Engineer who will prescribe corrective repairs or rejection. All lumps, blisters, and excess coating shall be removed from the bell and spigot end of each pipe, and the outside of the spigot and the inside of the bell shall be wire brushed and wiped clean and dry and free from oil and grease before the pipe is laid. Pipe joints shall be made up in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. Every precaution shall be taken to prevent foreign material from entering the pipe while it is being placed in the line. If the pipe laying crew cannot put the pipe into the trench and in place without getting earth into it, the Engineer may require that, before lowering the pipe into the trench, a heavy, woven canvas bag of suitable size shall be placed over each end and left there until the connection is to be made to the adjacent pipe. During laying operation, no debris, tools, clothing or other materials shall be placed in the pipe. As each length of pipe is placed in the trench, the spigot end shall be centered in the bell and the pipe forced home and brought to correct line and grade. The pipe shall be secured in place with approved backfill material tamped under it except at the bells. Precautions shall be taken to prevent dirt from entering the joint space. At times when pipe laying is not in progress, the open ends of pipe shall be closed by a watertight plug or other means approved by the Engineer. The cutting of pipe for inserting valves, fittings, or closure pieces shall be done in a neat and workmanlike manner without damage to the pipe or cement lining and so as to leave a smooth end at right angles to the axis of the pipe. Pipe shall be laid with bell ends facing in the direction of laying unless directed otherwise by the Engineer. Where pipe is laid on the grade of 10 per cent or greater, the laying shall start at bottom and shall proceed upward with the bell ends of the pipe upgrade. Wherever it is necessary to deflect pipe from a straight line, either in the vertical or horizontal plane to avoid obstructions or to plumb stems; or where long radius curves are permitted, the amount of deflection allowed shall not exceed that allowed under the latest edition of ANSI/AWWA C600 -82 and C900 81 or latest revisions. No pipe shall be laid when, in the opinion of the Engineer, trench conditions are unsuitable. SECTION IV Page 76 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.3.3 SETTING OF VALVES, HYDRANTS AND FITTINGS 41.3.3.1 GENERAL Valves, hydrants, fittings, plugs and caps shall be set and joined to pipe in the manner specified above for installation of pipe. 41.3.3.2 VALVES Valves in water mains shall, where possible, be located on the street property lines extended unless shown otherwise on the plans. All valves shall be installed at the tee in all cases, not to exceed 18- inches from the main line. The valve box shall not transmit any shock or stress to the valve and shall be centered and plumb over the wrench nut of the valve, with the box cover flush with the surface of the finished pavement or such other level as may be directed. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 1 of 5 & Sheet 2 of 5 for potable water valve pad detail, and City Index No. 502; Sheet 1 of 2 & Sheet 2 of 2 for reclaimed water valve box and pad detail. 41.3.3.3 HYDRANTS Hydrants shall be located as shown or as directed so as to provide complete accessibility and minimize the possibility of damage from vehicles or injury to pedestrians. All hydrants located 10 -feet of more from the main shall have a gate valve at the main and another gate valve at the hydrant location. No valve can be located anywhere in the hydrant run to circumvent the use of two valves. Refer to City Index No. 402; Sheet 5 of 5 for potable water hydrants. No hydrants shall be installed on the reclaimed water system unless approved by the City of Clearwater's Engineering Department. All hydrants shall stand plumb and shall have their nozzles parallel with, or at right angles to, the curb, with the pumper nozzle facing the curb. Hydrants shall be set to the established grade, with nozzles as shown or as directed by the Engineer. Each hydrant shall be connected to the main with a 6 -inch ductile iron branch controlled by an independent 6 inch gate valve. 41.3.3.4 ANCHORAGE Movement of all plugs, caps, tees, bends, etc., unless otherwise specified shall be prevented by attaching approved mechanical restraining rings or glands and installed per manufacturers recommendations. Hydrants shall be held in place with restrained swivel joints. Restraining mechanical joint glands on hydrants may be used where hydrant runout length precludes the use of hydrant connecting swivel joints. Where special anchorage is required, such anchorage shall be in accordance with details shown on the plans. 41.3.4 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING LINES Where shown on the plans or directed by the Engineer, the water lines constructed under this contract shall be connected to the existing lines now in place. No such connection shall be made until all requirements of the specifications as to tests, flushing, and sterilization have been met and the plan of the cut in to the existing line has been approved by the Engineer. SECTION IV Page 77 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Where connections are made between new work and existing work, the connections shall be made in a thorough and workmanlike manner using proper materials and fittings to suit the actual conditions. All fittings shall be properly sterilized and pipe will be properly swabbed before connections to existing facilities. All connections to existing facilities will be completed under the supervision of the City of Clearwater Water Division. 41.4 TESTS 41.4.1 HYDROSTATIC TESTS After installation of water mains, complete with all associated appurtenances including service taps, all sections of newly laid main shall be subject to a hydrostatic pressure test of 150 pounds per square inch for a period of two (2) hours and shall conform to AWWA C600 latest revision. All mains shall be pigged and flushed to remove all sand and other foreign matter before any hydrostatic test can or will be performed. The pressure test shall be applied by means of a pump connected to the pipe in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. The pump, pipe connection and all necessary apparatus, together with operating personnel, shall be furnished by the Contractor at his expense. The Contractor shall make all necessary taps into the pipe line. The Owner will furnish the water for the test. Before applying the test pressure, all air shall be expelled from the pipe line. 41.4.2 NOTICE OF TEST The Contractor shall give the City of Clearwater's Owner Representative 48 -hours advance notice of the time when the installation is ready for hydrostatic testing. 41.5 STERILIZATION Before the system is put into operation, all water mains and appurtenances and any item of new construction with which the water comes in contact, shall be thoroughly sterilized in accordance with AWWA C651. 41.5.1 STERILIZING AGENT The sterilizing agent shall be liquid chlorine, sodium hypochlorite solution conforming to Federal Specification 0 S 602B, Grade D, or dry hypochlorite, commonly known as "HTH" or "Perchloron ". 41.5.2 FLUSHING SYSTEM Prior to the application of the sterilization agent, all mains shall be thoroughly flushed. Flushing shall continue until a clean, clear stream of water flows from the hydrants. Where hydrants are not available for flushing, such flushing shall be accomplished at the installed blow off devices generally at the ends of the lines. 41.5.3 STERILIZATION PROCEDURE All piping, valves, fittings and all other appurtenances shall be sterilized with water containing a minimum chlorine concentration of 75 ppm at any point in the system. This solution shall then remain in the distribution system for a minimum contact period of eight (8) hours and never more than 24 hours before it is flushed out. All valves in the lines being sterilized shall be opened and closed several times during the contact period. SECTION IV Page 78 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.5.4 RESIDUAL CHLORINE TESTS After the sterilization outlined above has been accomplished, flushing shall continue until free residual chlorine tests not less than 0.2 ppm nor more than 3.0 ppm. Residual chlorine test shall be in accordance with standard methods using a standard DPD test set. 41.5.5 BACTERIAL TESTS After the water system has been sterilized and thoroughly flushed as specified herein, City of Clearwater Water Division or the Owner's Representative personnel shall take samples of water from remote points of the distribution system in suitable sterilized containers. The City shall forward the samples to a laboratory certified by the Florida State Board of Health for bacterial examination in accordance with AWWA C651. If tests of such samples indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the sterilization as outlined above shall be repeated until tests indicate the absence of such pollution. The bacterial tests shall be satisfactorily completed before the system is placed in operation and it shall be the Contractor's responsibility to perform the sterilization as outlined above. If methods of sterilization differ materially from those outlined above, such methods shall be in accordance with directives of the Florida State Board of Health and all methods employed shall have the approval of that agency. Definite instructions as to the collection and shipment of samples shall be secured from the laboratory prior to sterilization and shall be followed in all respects. The City of Clearwater shall secure clearance of the water main from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection before the water distribution system is put into operation. 41.6 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 41.6.1 GENERAL Bids must include all sections and items as specified herein and as listed on the Bid Form. Payment for the work of constructing the project will be made at the unit price or lump sum payment for the items of work as set forth in the Bid, which payment will constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment, and materials required to complete the work. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the applicable pay items of work: • Clearing and grubbing • Excavation, including necessary pavement removal • Shoring and /or dewatering • Structural fill • Backfill • Grading • Tracer wire • Refill materials • Joints materials • Tests and sterilization • Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. SECTION IV Page 79 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 41.6.2 FURNISH AND INSTALL WATER MAINS 41.6.2.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the actual number of feet of pipe of each size and type satisfactorily furnished and laid, as measured along the centerline of the completed pipe line, including the length of valves and fittings. 41.6.2.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials and equipment, and constructing the water mains complete and ready for operation. 41.6.3 FURNISH AND INSTALL FITTINGS 41.6.3.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment will be the number of tons, or decimal part thereof, of ductile iron fittings satisfactorily furnished and installed. Fitting weights shall be based on weights stamped on the body of the fitting, provided such weights do not exceed the theoretical weights by more than the tolerances permitted in ANSUAWWA C110 /A 21.10 82, latest revision, in which case, the weight will be based upon the theoretical weight plus the maximum tolerance. 41.6.3.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, materials, and equipment required to furnish and install ductile iron fittings. 41.6.4 FURNISH AND INSTALL GATE VALVES COMPLETE WITH BOXES AND COVERS 41.6.4.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of gate valves of each size satisfactorily furnished and installed. 41.6.4.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price for each size shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the valve complete with box and cover. 41.6.5 FURNISH AND INSTALL FIRE HYDRANTS 41.6.5.1 MEASUREMENT The quantity for payment shall be the number of fire hydrants satisfactorily furnished and installed. The only hydrants allowed to be installed in the City of Clearwater utilities system are listed in Section 41.2.5. No exceptions. 41.6.5.2 PAYMENT Payment of the applicable unit price shall be full compensation for furnishing all plant, labor, material and equipment and installing the fire hydrant complete including necessary thrust SECTION IV Page 80 of 134 5/15/2012 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications anchorage, 6 -inch pipe between the main and the hydrant and gate valve and valve box on the hydrant lead. 42 GAS SYSTEM SPECIFICATIONS This article not applicable. 43 TENNIS COURTS 43.1 PAVED TENNIS COURTS 43.1.1 SOIL TREATMENTS All soil under courts shall be treated with DSMA 184 at the rate of 2 1,000 square foot. Materials shall be brought to the job site in tagged containers. Tags into the Engineer's Office. pounds active ingredient per shall be retained and turned 43.1.2 BASE COURSE Base Course shall be Limerock 6" thick after compaction. Specifications for the base shall be the same as those for Limerock in Section IV - Article 22 of the City of Clearwater Technical Specifications. Subgrade stabilizing will not be required. Surface shall be cut to within 1/2" of true grade in preparation of 1 " leveling course. Prior to applying prime coat, surface shall be approved by the Engineer. 43.1.3 PRIME COAT The material used for prime coat shall be cut -back Asphalt Grade RC -70 or RC -250 and shall conform to Section 300 of the Florida State Department of Transportation's "Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction ". 43.1.4 LEVELING COURSE A Leveling Course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S -III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Leveling Course shall be constructed running East and West. Finish surface of leveling course shall not vary more than 1/4" when checked with a 10 foot straight edge. If a deficiency of more than 1/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.5 SURFACE COURSE Surface course shall be a minimum of 1" of Type S -III Asphaltic Concrete as specified in Section 331 of FDOT's Standard Specification (latest edition). The Surface Course shall be constructed running North and South. Finish surfaces shall not vary more than 1/4" in 10 feet. Prior to application of color coat, surface shall be checked for low areas by flooding the surface with water. Low areas shall be patched as approved by the Engineer prior to application of the color coat. No areas which retain water will SECTION IV Page 81 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications be approved. If a deficiency of more than 1/4" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. 43.1.6 COLOR COAT 43.1.6.1 MATERIALS Materials used in the patching and color coating of Tennis Courts shall be manufactured specifically for Tennis Court Application. All materials must be approved by the Engineer prior to the start of construction. Request for approval of coating materials may be submitted prior to the opening of bids. In requests for approval, the Contractor shall present manufacturer's literature along with the name, address, and date of three previous Tennis Court applications of the proposed material. 43.1.6.2 CONSTRUCTION 43.1.6.2.1 SURFACE PREPARATION The surface to be coated must be sound, smooth, and free from loose dirt or oily materials. Prior to the application of surfacing materials, the entire surface should be checked for minor depressions or irregularities. If it is determined that minor corrections are necessary, the Contractor shall make repairs using approved tack coat and /or patching mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for use. After patching the surface shall not vary more than 1/8" in ten feet in any direction. If a deficiency of more than 1/8" exists, the Engineer will determine if the surface should be leveled or removed and replaced. Such remedial work shall be without compensation. In order to provide a smooth, dense underlayment of the finish course, one or more applications of resurfacer or patch mix shall be applied to the underlaying surface as deemed necessary by the Engineer. Asphaltic concrete Surface Course with a smooth tight mix and no ponding, will not require the resurfacing or patching mix. Asphaltic Concrete Surface Course which is course and rough or is ponding water will require the use of the resurfacer or patch mix. No applications shall be covered by a succeeding application until thoroughly cured. 43.1.6.2.2 FINISH COLOR COURSE The finish course shall be applied to a clean, dry surface in accordance with the manufacturer's directions. A minimum of two applications of color coat will be required. Texture of cured color coat is to be regulated in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to provide a medium speed surface for tennis play. The color of application shall be dark green for the regulation double's playing area and red for all other others. The finished surface shall have a uniform appearance and be free from ridges and tool marks. 43.1.6.3 PLAYING LINES Forty -eight (48) hours minimum after completion of the resurfacing, 2 inch wide playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with approved marking paint. SECTION IV Page 82 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.1.6.4 WEATHER LIMITATIONS No parts of the construction involving Tennis Court surfacing or patching products shall be conducted during rainfall, or when rainfall is imminent or unless the air temperature is at least 50 degrees Fahrenheit and rising. NOTE: The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum or 24 hours in advance of all base and asphalt related work. 43.2 CLAY TENNIS COURTS 43.2.1 GENERAL 43.2.1.1 SCOPE The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials and equipment necessary for the installation of clay tennis court(s) as set forth in these specifications and /or the construction drawings. The scope of work is indicated on drawings and specified herein. Basis of design for clay courts with sub - surface irrigation system is Hydrogrid Tennis, Inc. or prior approved equal. 43.2.1.2 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS The Owner may make such investigation as he deems necessary to determine the ability of the Bidder to perform the work and the Bidder shall furnish to the Owner all such information and data for this purpose as the Owner may request. The Owner reserves the right to reject any Bid if the evidence submitted by, or investigations of such Bidders fail to satisfy the owner that such Bidder is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated herein within the time limit agreed upon. Factors to be considered in awarding the Bid shall include the successful completion of similar sub - surface irrigation clay tennis court installations of like value, scope, size and quality as this project, with in the last five (5) years. The Owner desires to award this contract to firms that have been in business for a minimum of five (5) years. The qualifications and experience of the personnel assigned to the project will be a determining factor in the award of the Bid. 43.2.1.3 STANDARDS The Contractor shall perform all work in a thorough, workmanlike manner and conform to standards for tennis court construction as prescribed or approved by the United States (Lawn) Tennis Association and the United States Tennis Court and Tract Builders Association. The Contractor shall construct the tennis courts with laser guided equipment. 43.2.1.4 BUILDING PERMITS AND TAXES The Contractor shall secure all construction permits required by law, the City of Clearwater will waive all permit fees. 43.2.1.5 COURT LAYOUT The Owner shall establish two horizontal control points and a construction bench mark. The Contractor shall locate the four corners of each battery and shall layout the courts in conformance with the specifications and drawings. SECTION IV Page 83 of 134 5/15/2012 43.2.1.6 Section IV — Technical Specifications BUILDING REQUIREMENTS The Owner shall provide and maintain reasonable access to the construction site, as well as an area adjacent to the site for storage and preparation of materials. Adequate water outlets within fifty (50) feet of the site shall be provided. 43.2.1.7 SCHEDULE The Owner desires to award the contract to firms who will complete this project in a reasonable time schedule. Consideration in awarding this bid will be given to firms who may commence and complete the project within a reasonable period of time after award of the bid. The Owner, in its sole discretion, will determine the reasonable schedule standard as it relates to the "Notice to Proceed." 43.2.2 SITE PREPARATION 43.2.2.1 SUITABILITY The Contractor shall examine the site to determine its suitability for installation of the courts. 43.2.2.2 DEMOLITION The contractor shall demo the existing tennis courts, remove the existing ten (10) foot high fence surrounding the tennis courts and all underground utilities within the limits of the construction area. Utilities extending outside the construction limits shall be capped and terminated. The existing tennis courts shall be ground into millings suitable to be mixed into the sub -grade at the proposed location of the new clay tennis courts. Any sub -grade material beneath the existing tennis courts not suitable for planting beds shall be removed and also utilized as sub -grade material beneath the new courts. All demolition materials not utilized in construction of the new courts shall be removed and disposed from the project site. The Contractor shall provide documentation of any recycled materials. 43.2.2.3 SUB -GRADE The sub -grade shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final sub -grade elevation. The sub -grade shall be graded level. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T -180 is required. The Contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.2.4 FINAL GRADE The final grades outside the tennis court areas and within the construction limits shall be graded to a tolerance of plus or minus one (1) inch of the final grade elevations with positive drainage away from tennis courts and towards drainage swales or outfall structures. A compaction to a density not less than 95% of the maximum standard density as determined by AASHTO T-180 is required. The contractor shall provide documentation of testing to the Owner. 43.2.3 SLOPE 43.2.3.1 SLOPE REQUIREMENTS Rate and direction of slope of the finished surfaces shall be one (1) inch in forty (40) feet, all in one plane, as indicated on the drawings. SECTION IV Page 84 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.4 BASE CONSTRUCTION 43.2.4.1 LINER Two layers of 6 mil construction plastic shall be installed over the sub -grade surface with a minimum overlap of five (5) feet where pieces are joined. Use only materials that are resistant to deterioration when tested in accordance with ASTM E 154, as follows: a. Polyethylene sheet, Construction Grade. 43.2.4.2 BASE COURSE The base course shall consist of six (6) inches of porous base material as supplied by Quality Aggregate of Sarasota Florida. The surface of the base course shall be smooth and even, and it shall be within one - quarter (1/4) inch of the established grade. 43.2.4.3 IRRIGATION SYSTEM Perforated pipe shall be installed in trenches in the base course. These trenches shall be in on four (4) foot centers and shall be run perpendicular to the slope of the court. The pipe shall be two and one - quarter (2 -1/4) inch diameter with a nylon needle punched sock surrounding the pipe. Six (6) water control canisters shall be installed per court with each canister controlling five (5) grid pipe trenches. Provide all required controls systems time clocks; float switches, control wiring and solenoids, etc. for a complete sub - surface irrigation system. 43.2.5 PERIMETER CURBING 43.2.5.1 CURB Brick curb shall be installed around the entire perimeter of the court area with an elevation of one - quarter (1/4) to one -half (1/2) inch above the finished screening course elevation. 43.2.6 SURFACE COURSE 43.2.6.1 COURT SURFACE A surface course of ISP Type II Aquablend or Lee Hyroblend tennis court material shall be installed over the screening course to a compacted depth of one (1) inch. The Aqua/Hydroblend material shall be watered to its full depth immediately after leveling and then compacted by rolling with a tandem roller weighing 600 to 1000 pounds. The finished surface shall not vary from specified grade by more than one - eighth (1/8) inch. 43.2.7 ROOT BARRIER Root barrier (geo -tech fabric) eighteen (18) inches height shall be placed in a trench on the outside edge of the perimeter curbing eighteen (18) inches in depth with herbicide coating buttons to prevent plant root systems in entering the sub - surface base course of the clay tennis courts. SECTION IV Page 85 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.8 FENCING 43.2.8.1 DESIGN The contractor shall provide a total color coated fencing system as indicated on drawings and described herein. All components: frames, fabric and fittings shall be black. Basis of Design Ameristar HT -25 or prior approved equal subject to strict compliance with Ameristar published specification. 43.2.8.2 POSTS All posts shall be a minimum 2 -1/2" Ameristar HT -25 pipe; top rails 1 -5/8" Ameristar HT-25 pipe with manufacturers standard "Permacoat" color system. 43.2.8.3 FENCE FABRIC Fence Fabric shall be 1 -3/4" #6 gauge mesh throughout, manufactures standard galvanized wire with PVC coating. All fabric to be knuckled on both selvages. 43.2.8.4 GATES Provide gates at locations indicated. At service gates, provide a keeper that automatically engages gate life and holds it in the open position until manually released. Provide gate stops for double gates consisting of a mushroom -type flush plate with anchors, set in concrete, and designed to engage a center drop rod or plunger -bar. Include a locking device and padlock eyes as an integral part of the latch, permitting both gate leaves to be locked with a single padlock. Provide latch, fork type or plunger -bar type to permit operation from either side of gate, with padlock eye as an integral part of the latch. Gate Hinges — Size and material to suit gate size, non - lift -off type, and offset to permit 180 - degree gate opening. Provide one and one -half (1 -1/2) pair of hinges for each leaf over six (6) foot nominal height. 43.2.9 WINDSCREENS The contractor shall provide nine (9) foot high windscreens at all ten (10) foot high fencing. Basis of design is Durashade plus by Ball Products, Inc. or equal by Putterman. Black high - density polyethylene, eight (8) oz. per square yard edges hemmed with grommets at twelve (12) inch on center. Attach to chain link fencing at the top and bottom with 50 LBS plastic ties. 43.2.10 COURT EQUIPMENT 43.2.10.1 POST FOUNDATIONS Post foundations shall be not less than thirty -six (36) inches in length, eighteen (18) inches in width and thirty (30) inches in depth. Foundations shall be placed to provide an exact distance between posts of forty -two (42) feet on a doubles court and thirty -three (33) feet on a singles court. 43.2.10.2 NET POSTS & SLEEVES Net posts shall be galvanized steel having an outside diameter of not less than two and seven - eighths (2 7/8) inches with electrostatically applied enamel finish and shall be equipped with a reel type net tightening device. Post sleeves and posts shall be set plumb and true so as to support SECTION IV Page 86 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications the net a height of forty -two (42) inches above the court surface at the posts. Post sleeves shall be Schedule 40 PVC to be set in concrete per net post manufactures recommendation. 43.2.10.3 CENTER STRAP ANCHOR A center strap anchor shall be firmly set in accordance with the rules of the USTA. 43.2.10.4 NET A tennis net conforming to the USTA regulations shall be installed on each court. The net shall have black synthetic netting, a headband of white synthetic material in double thickness with the exterior treated for resistance to mildew and sunlight, and bottom and end tapes of back synthetic material treated to prevent deterioration from the sunlight. A vinyl coated, impregnated steel cable, having a diameter of one quarter (1/4) inch and a length five (5) feet greater than length between the net post shall hold the net in suspension. The net shall have tie strings of a synthetic material at each corner. Basis of Design — Duranet DTS by Ball Products, Inc. 43.2.10.5 CENTER STRAP Provide a center strap of white heavy duty polyester webbing with black oxide coated brass slide buckles and nickel plated double end snap. Center strap shall be placed on the net and attached to the center strap anchor. 43.2.10.6 LINE TAPES Line tapes shall be 100% nylon and shall be two (2) inches in width. The tapes shall be firmly secured by aluminum nails with aluminum length of two and one -half (2 — 1/2) inches. Positioning shall be in accordance with regulations of the USTA. 43.2.10.7 MISCELLANEOUS EQUIPMENT Deliver the following equipment to the owner: 1. Ride -on Tandem Roller - Brutus AR -I Roller, automatic forward- neutral - reverse transmission; 24 inch wide drum; 3 -horse power Briggs and Stratton engine. 2. Hand drag brooms (4 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame with 4 -1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 3. Tow drag brooms (1 each) - 7' wide aluminum frame 4 -1/2" synthetic bristles; Proline. 4. Deluxe Proline Line Sweeper (4 each) - friction - driven rubber sleeves; synthetic bristle brush; with fence hook cast aluminum. 5. Scarifier/Lutes (2 each) - 30" wide all aluminum; Proline. 6. Tennis Shoe Cleaners (2 each) - steel frame construction "Scrusher" exact installation location by Owner. 7. Tennis Two Step (2 each) - polyethylene construction with two rubber panels. 8. Court Rake (1 each) — six -foot length aluminum. SECTION IV Page 87 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.11 SHADE STRUCTURE Provide shade structures as indicted on drawings. Basis of design: Suntrends, Inc. "Cabana Bench 8" — 8'Iong x 6' wide gable design with standard canvas canopy, direct burial installation. Provide concrete footing, size and reinforcement as required by shade structure manufacture. 43.2.12 WATER SOURCE (Potable) The owner shall supply water line to within fifty (50) feet of the courts with 50 pounds per square inch running pressure at its terminus. This line shall have the capacity to supply 30 gallons of water per minute for each court. 43.2.13 CONCRETE Provide concrete consisting of portland cement per ASTM C 150, aggregates per ASTM C 33, and potable water. Mix materials to obtain concrete with a minimum 28 -day compressive strength of 3,500 psi. Use at least four sacks of cement per cu. yd., 1 -inch maximum size aggregate, 3 -inch maximum slump. 43.2.14 EXISTING SPORT TENNIS COURT LIGHTING 43.2.14.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide signed and sealed electrical shop drawings by a professional electrical engineer for approval of the relocation and re- aiming of the existing tennis court sport lighting fixtures and electrical service to water coolers. The shop drawings shall include all necessary information according to local electrical codes in providing a complete operating system from the existing electrical panel. The shop drawings shall provide data showing the maximum foot candles the existing fixtures will provide at its new locations for tournament play. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.14.2 RE -LAMP The Contractor shall re -lamp and clean lens of all existing lighting fixtures after relocating the light pole and fixtures to its new location. The City will provide the new lamps. 43.2.14.3 ELECTRICAL PERMIT The Contractor shall submit electrical drawings to City of Clearwater Planning and Development Services to obtain permits for installation of the electrical works. 43.2.14.4 POLES & FIXTURES The Contractor shall install three (3) new sixty foot (60') poles and fourteen (14) new fixtures. The City will purchase and provide the new poles and fixtures for the Contractor to install, any other miscellaneous items required to provide a complete operable system shall be provided by the Contractor. Attached with this specification are the photometric lumination charts for the eight -(8) tennis courts. This information is provided by Musco Sport Lighting, 1838 East Chester Drive, Suite #104, High Point, NC 27265, phone (336) 887 -0770 fax (336) 887 -0771. Contact Douglas A. Stewart. Contractor shall install the poles and fixtures based on the following information: SECTION IV Page 88 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Pole T1 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T2 existing 12 fixture pole, remove six fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T3 existing 5 fixture pole, remove one fixture and place on pole T5 Pole T4 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T5 new pole w /existing sixteen fixtures (8 on one side and 8 on the other) and 2 circuits Pole T6 new pole with new seven fixtures and two circuits Pole T7 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T8 existing 12 fixture pole, remove four fixtures and place on pole T5 Pole T9 existing 5 fixture pole, remove two fixtures and place on pole T5 Light levels ended up at 58+ footcandles. Existing poles have concrete footing approximately one foot wide on all sides Contractor shall plan relocation light poles accordingly. 43.2.14.5 ELECTRICAL CONDUITS Existing electrical conduits are installed individually Contractor place electrical junction boxes at existing New conduits will be required for the three (3) new the cost for these electrical conduits in the relocating 43.2.15 WATER COOLER to the existing light pole, it is suggested the pole locations and utilize existing conduits. light poles and the Contractor shall include of the new light poles. 43.2.15.1 SHOP DRAWINGS The Contractor shall provide shop drawings for the installation of water cooler in the cabana area of the tennis courts, electrical, water and drainage submitted to the Parks and Recreation Department for approval. 43.2.15.2 WATER FOUNTAIN Basis for design: Halsey Taylor HOF Series — water cooler with sealed back panels, or equal. 43.2.16 DEMONSTRATION Instruct the Owner's personnel on proper operation and maintenance of court and equipment. 43.2.17 WARRANTY 43.2.17.1 EQUIPMENT The Contractor shall supply warranty cards and operation and maintenance manuals for all equipment to the Owner upon completion of construction of the project. 43.2.17.2 WARRANTY The Contractor shall warranty the courts, fencing, sidewalks and court accessories against defective materials and /or workmanship for a period of one (1) year from the date of completion. SECTION IV Page 89 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 43.2.17.3 WARRANTY SUB - SURFACE IRRIGATION SYSTEM The Contractor shall warranty the sub - surface irrigation of the clay tennis courts for a period of two years from the day of completion. 44 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL 44.1 CONTRACTOR RESPONSIBLE FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL The Contractor shall be responsible to furnish, operate, maintain and remove all work zone traffic control associated with the Project, including detours, advance warnings, channelization, hazard warnings and any other necessary features, both at the immediate work site and as may be necessary at outlying points. 44.2 WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor shall prepare a detailed traffic control plan designed to accomplish the level of performance outlined in the Scope of the Work and /or as may be required by construction permits issued by Pinellas County and /or the Florida Department of Transportation for the Project, incorporating the methods and criteria contained in Part VI, Standards and Guides for Traffic Controls for Street and Highway Construction, Maintenance, Utility and Incident Management Operations in the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices published by the U.S. Department of Transportation and adopted as amended by the Florida Department of Transportation, or most recent addition. 44.2.1 WORK ZONE SAFETY The general objectives of a program of work zone safety is to protect workers, pedestrians, bicyclists and motorists during construction and maintenance operations. This general objective may be achieved by meeting the following specific objectives: • Provide adequate advance warning and information regarding upcoming work zones. • Provide the driver clear directions to understanding the situation he will be facing as he proceeds through or around the work zone. • Reduce the consequences of an out of control vehicle. • Provide safe access and storage for equipment and material. • Promote speedy completion of projects (including thorough cleanup of the site). • Promote use of the appropriate traffic control and protection devices. • Provide safe passageways for pedestrians through, in, and /or around construction or maintenance work zones. The 2004 Design Standards (DS), Index 600 "When an existing pedestrian way or bicycle way is located within a traffic control work zone, accommodation must be maintained and provision for the disabled must be provided. Only approved temporary traffic control devices may be used to delineate a temporary traffic control zone pedestrian walkway. Advanced notification of sidewalk closures and detours marked shall be provided by appropriate signs ". 2004 Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction SECTION IV Page 90 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 102 -5 Traffic Control: 102 -5.1 Standards: FDOT Design Standards (DS) are the minimum standards for the use in the development of all traffic control plans 44.3 ROADWAY CLOSURE GUIDELINES Roadway types: Major Arterials, Minor Arterials, Local Collectors, and Local Following are typical requirements to be accomplished prior to closure. The number of requirements increase with traffic volume and the importance of access. Road closures affecting business or sole access routes will increase in process requirements as appropriate. For all but local streets, no road or lane closures are allowed during the Christmas holiday season and the designated "Spring Break" season with prior approval by the City Engineer. 44.3.1 ALL ROADWAYS Obtain permits for Pinellas County and Florida Department of Transportation roadways. Traffic control devises conform to national and state standards. 44.3.1.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Standard property owner notification prior to start of construction for properties directly affected by the construction process. 44.3.2 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS, LOCAL COLLECTORS Consult with City Traffic staff for preliminary traffic control options. Develop Formal Traffic Control Plan for Permit Submittal to Regulatory Agency as necessary. 44.3.2.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION Message Board Display, Minimum of 7 -day notice period prior to road closure and maybe longer for larger highway. The message board is to be provided by the Contractor. 44.3.3 MAJOR ARTERIALS, MINOR ARTERIALS 44.3.3.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION C -View Release 44.3.4 MAJOR ARTERIALS 44.3.4.1 PUBLIC NOTIFICATION News Release The Message Board may need to be displayed for a period longer than 7 days. 44.4 APPROVAL OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL PLAN The Contractor is invited and encouraged to confer in advance of bidding, and is required, as a specification of the work, to confer in advance of beginning any work on the Project, with the Traffic Operations Division, Municipal Services Building, 100 South Myrtle Avenue, telephone 562 -4750, for the purpose of approval of the Contractor's proposed detailed traffic control plan. SECTION IV Page 91 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications All maintenance of traffic (MOT) plans shall be signed and sealed by a Professional Engineer or an individual who is certified in the preparation of MOT plans in the State of Florida. 44.5 INSPECTION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL OPERATION The Traffic Operations Division may inspect and monitor the traffic control plan and traffic control devices of the Contractor. The City's Construction Inspector assigned to the project, may make known requirements for any alterations or adjustments to the traffic control devices. The Contractor shall take direction from the Project Engineer or Project Inspector. 44.6 PAYMENT FOR WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL Payment for work zone traffic control is a non - specific pay item to be included in the construction costs associated with other specific pay items unless specifically stated otherwise in the Scope of Work in these Technical Specifications and a bid item(s) is included for Work Zone Traffic Control in the proposal form. 44.7 CERTIFICATION OF WORK ZONE TRAFFIC CONTROL SUPERVISOR The City may require that the Supervisor or Foreman controlling the work for the Contractor on the Project have a current International Municipal Signal Association, Work Zone Traffic Control Safety Certification or Worksite Traffic Supervisor Certification from the American Traffic Safety Association with additional current Certification from the Florida Department of Transportation. This requirement for Certification will be noted in the Scope of Work and /or sections of these Technical Specifications. When the certified supervisor is required for the Project, the supervisor will be on the Project site at all times while work is being conducted. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on a 24 -hour per day basis and shall review the project on a day -to -day basis as well as being involved in all changes to traffic control. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall have access to all equipment and materials needed to maintain traffic control and handle traffic related situations. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall ensure that routine deficiencies are corrected within a 24 -hour period. The Worksite Traffic Supervisor shall be available on the site within 45 minutes after notification of an emergency situation, prepared to positively respond to repair the work zone traffic control or to provide alternate traffic arrangements. Failure of the Worksite Traffic Supervisor to comply with the provisions of this Subarticle may be grounds for decertification or removal from the project or both. Failure to maintain a designated Worksite Traffic Supervisor or failure to comply with these provisions will result in temporary suspension of all activities except traffic and erosion control and such other activities deemed to be necessary for project maintenance and safety. 45 CURED -IN -PLACE PIPE LINING 45.1 INTENT It is the intention of this specification to provide for the trenchless restoration of sanitary sewer and storm pipes by the installation if a cured in place jointless, continuous, thermosetting resin impregnated polyester flexible felt liner which is watertight and chemically resistant to withstand SECTION IV Page 92 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications exposure to domestic sewage including all labor, materials and equipment to provide for a complete, fully restored and functioning installation. 45.2 PRODUCT AND CONTRACTOR /INSTALLER ACCEPTABILITY The City requires that all contractors be prequalified. See General Conditions regarding contractor prequalification. In addition, the City requires a proven extensive tract record for the liner system to be used in this project. All contractors submitting for prequalification approval for this project must exhibit extensive satisfactory experience in the installation of the proposed liner system(s) and satisfactory evidence that the proposed liner system has been extensively and successfully installed in the Unites States and the State of Florida. The installer must be certified by the liner system manufacturer for installation of the liner system. The City reserves full and complete authority to approve the satisfactory nature of the both the liner system and the installer. 45.3 MATERIALS The liner shall be polyester fiber felt tubing saturated with a resin prior to insertion. Resin type and qualities shall be as specified by the manufacturer to obtain a cured liner with the following properties: Tensile Strength Flexural Strength Flexural Modulus of Elasticity Long Term Modulus of Elasticity (50 Years) ASTM D638 ASTM D790 ASTM D790 ASTM D2290 3,000 psi 4,500 psi 300,000 psi 150,000 psi Liner shall meet strengths as shown in ASTM F1216 unless otherwise submitted and approved by the Engineer. Lining manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer for approval as requested, complete design calculations for the liner thickness. The criteria for liner design shall be HS -20 traffic loading, water table to the ground surface, minimum expected lifetime of 50 years, and no structural strength retained from the existing pipe. Liner materials shall meet manufactures specifications of Insituform of North America, Inc., 3315 Democrat Road, Post Office Box 181071, Memphis, Tennessee 38118; or InLiner USA 1900 N.W. 44th St., Pompano Beach Florida 33064, 305- 979 -0802, or an approved equal. Any approved equal liner system must be approved by the Engineer as an equal system prior to receiving bids. Request for contractor prequalification and /or equal liner system approval must be received by the Engineer no later than 14 days prior to the date for receiving bids. 45.4 CLEANING /SURFACE PREPARATION It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to clean and prepare the existing pipes for rehabilitation. The Contractor will thoroughly clean the interior of the sewers to produce a clean interior surface free of all coatings, sand, rock, roots, sludge, or other deleterious materials prior to liner insertion. Bypass pumping will be provided by the Contractor as part of the unit cost of restoration. Bypass operations are to be so arranged as to cause minimum disruptions to local traffic, residents and particularly to commercial facilities. During the cleaning and preparation operations all necessary precautions shall be taken to protect the public, all property and the sewer from damage. All material removed from the sewers shall be the Contractor's responsibility for prompt disposal in accordance with all regulatory agency requirements. The Contractor may be required to control the rate of sewer cleaning in the sanitary system to avoid heavy pollution loads at the City's treatment plants. SECTION IV Page 93 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 45.5 TELEVISION INSPECTION After cleaning, and again after the rehabilitation work on each section of the project is completed, all pipe sections shall be visually inspected by means of closed - circuit color television, and recorded on DVD, CD VHS format tapes provided to the project engineer. The television system used shall be designed for the purpose and suitably lighted to provide a clear picture of the entire periphery of the pipe. 45.6 LINER INSTALLATION Liner shall be sized to field measurements obtained by the Contractor to provide for a tight fit on the interior of the existing pipe to be lined. Contractor shall use installation methods approved by the liner manufacturer including operations for inversion, heat curing and reconnection of laterals. The Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of any construction delays taking place during the insertion operation. Contractor shall maintain a reasonable backup system for bypass pumping should delays or problems with pumping systems develop. Liner entries at manholes shall be smooth, free of irregularities, and watertight. No pinholes, tears, cracks, thin spots, excessive wrinkling or other defects in the liner shall be permitted. Such defects shall be removed and replaced by the Contractor at his expense. 45.7 LATERAL RECONNECTION Sanitary laterals shall be reconnected as soon as possible to renew service. Laterals are to be reconnected by means of robotics, by internally cutting out the liner to 95% of the area of the original opening. All lateral reconnections are to be grouted to prevent leakage. Grouting method and material is to be approved by the Engineer. Any reconnections to laterals and connections to manholes which are observed to leak shall be resealed by the Contractor. All laterals discovered during the lining process are to be reconnected unless specifically directed otherwise by the City. The Contractor will be requested to reconnect any laterals discovered to not be reconnected at a later date. Contractor shall notify all local system users when the sanitary system will not be available for normal usage by the delivery of door hangers with appropriate information regarding the construction project. 45.8 TIME OF CONSTRUCTION Construction schedules will be submitted by the Contractor and approved by the Engineer. At no time will any sanitary sewer service connection remain inoperative for more than an eight -hour period without a service bypass being operated by the Contractor. In the event that sewage backup occurs and enters buildings, the Contractor shall be responsible for cleanup, repair and property damage costs and claims. 45.9 PAYMENT Payment for sanitary sewer restoration shall be made per lineal foot including all preparation, bypass pumping, equipment, labor, materials, operations, restoration, lateral reconnection, etc, to provide a fully completed and operational sewer. Payment shall be measured from center of manhole to center of manhole for the sanitary systems and from end of pipe to end of pipe for storm systems. SECTION IV Page 94 of 134 5/15/2012 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 46 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYETHYLENE SLIPLINING 46.1 MATERIALS 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 46.1.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS The pipe supplied under this specification shall be high performance, high molecular weight, high density polyethylene pipe (Driscopipe 1000) as manufactured by Phillips Driscopipe, Inc., Dallas, Texas and shall conform to ASTM D 1248 (Type III, Class C, Category 5, Grade P34) or approved equal. Minimum cell classification values shall be 345434C as referenced in ASTM D 3350 latest edition. If fittings are required, they will be supplied under this specification and shall be molded or manufactured from a polyethylene compound having a cell classification equal to or exceeding the compound used in the pipe. To insure compatibility of polyethylene resins, all fittings supplied under this specification shall be of the same manufacture as the pipe being supplied. 46.1.2 QUALITY CONTROL The resin used for manufacturer of the pipe shall be manufactured by the pipe manufacturer, thus maintaining complete control of the pipe quality. The pipe shall contain no recycled compound except that generated in the manufacturer's own plant from resin of the same specification from the same raw material. The pipe shall be homogeneous throughout and free of visible cracks, holes, foreign inclusions, or other deleterious defects, and shall be identical in color, density, melt index, and other physical properties. The polyethylene resin used shall have all ingredients pre compound prior to extrusion of pipe, in plant blending is not acceptable. The Engineer may request, as part of the quality control records submittal, certification that the pipe produced is represented by the quality assurance testing. Additionally, test results from manufacturer's testing or random sampling by the Engineer that do not meet appropriate ASTM standards or manufacturer's representation, may be cause for rejection of pipe represented by the testing. These tests may include density and flow rate measurements from samples taken at selected locations within the pipe wall and thermal stability determinations according to ASTM D 3350, 10.1.9. 46.1.3 SAMPLES The owner or the specifying engineer may request certified lab data to verify the physical properties of the materials supplied under this specification or may take random samples and have them tested by an independent laboratory. 46.1.4 REJECTION Polyethylene pipe and fittings may be rejected for failure to meet any of the requirements of this specification. 46.2 PIPE DIMENSIONS Pipe supplied under this specification shall have a nominal IPS (Iron Pipe Size) O.D. unless otherwise specified. The SDR (Standard Dimension Ratio) of the pipe supplied shall be as specified by the Engineer, on the construction plans and /or the scope of work. SECTION IV Page 95 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 46.3 CONSTRUCTION PRACTICES 46.3.1 HANDLING OF PIPE Pipe shall be stored on clean, level ground to prevent undue scratching or gouging of the pipe. If the pipe must be stacked for storage, such stacking should be done in accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The handling of the pipe should be done in such a manner that it is not damaged by dragging over sharp objects or cut by chokers or lifting equipment. 46.3.2 REPAIR OF DAMAGED SECTIONS Segments of pipe having cuts or gouges in excess of 10% of the wall thickness of the pipe should be cut out and removed. The undamaged portions of the pipe shall be rejoined using the butt fusion joining method. 46.3.3 PIPE JOINING Sections of polyethylene pipe should be joined into continuous lengths on the job site above ground. The joining method shall be the butt fusion method and shall be performed by the manufacturer's representative and in strict accordance with the pipe manufacturer's recommendations. The butt fusion equipment used in the joining procedures should be capable of meeting all conditions recommended by the pipe manufacturer, including, but not limited to, temperature requirements, alignment, and fusion pressures. 46.3.4 HANDLING OF FUSED PIPE Fused segments of pipe shall be handled so to avoid damage to the pipe. When lifting fused sections of pipe, chains or cable type chokers should be avoided. Nylon slings are preferred. Spreader bars should be used when lifting long fused sections. Care should be exercised to avoid cutting or gouging the pipe. 46.4 SLIPLINING PROCEDURE 46.4.1 PIPE REQUIREMENTS AND DIMENSIONS The liner(s) to be slip lined into the existing storm sewer shall have the following sizes: 12 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 15 -inch existing sewer. 16 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 18 -inch existing sewer. 18 -inch diameter liner (SDR 26) into 21 -inch existing sewer. 21'/2 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 24 -inch existing sewer. 28 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 30 -inch existing sewer. 34 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 36 -inch existing sewer. 42 -inch diameter liner (SDR 32.5) into 48 -inch existing sewer. 46.4.2 CLEANING AND INSPECTION The existing line shall be cleaned of debris and other obstructions prior to TV inspections or insertion of the polyethylene liner. Cleaning can be accomplished with a high velocity cleaner, a bucket and scrapper, root saws, corkscrews, and rodding or balling units. The method used will be determined by the condition of the existing line. Final cleaning may be required prior to inserting the liner. SECTION IV Page 96 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 46.4.3 INSERTION SHAFT AND EXCAVATIONS All excavations shall conform to OSHA requirements and any additional requirements as set by the specifying engineer or his representative. Insertion shaft excavations shall coincide with points requiring removal of obstructions or shall be determined by the engineer. An entry slope grade of 2 1/2:1 maximum shall be used to provide a safe bending radius for the polyethylene. The bottom of the entry pit should provide a straight section for ease of entry of the liner into the existing pipe. The length of the level excavation should be at least twelve times the diameter of the liner being inserted. The width of the shaft should be as narrow as possible. The required width will depend on the location, type of soil, depth of the existing sewer line and the water table. 46.4.4 INSERTION OF THE LINER After completion of the access shaft, the top half of the existing sewer shall be broken or cut and removed for the full length of the access shaft. A fabricated pulling head shall be connected to the leading end of the liner pipe. A cable shall be connected to the pulling head so that the liner pipe can be pulled into the existing sewer. Power winches used for pulling in long lengths of polyethylene liner pipe shall be rated equal to the project requirements. Once started, the pulling operation should continue to completion. Insertion is normally done at about a slow walking speed. After insertion, a minimum of 12 hours shall be allowed for the liner pipe to reach equilibrium with the sewer temperature and to allow the liner pipe to stress relieve itself. The polyethylene liner pipe should protrude at least 6 inches into the manhole where it terminates. After the 12 -hour equilibrium period, the annular space between the original pipe and the liner shall be pressure grouted. Said grouting must be from the bottom up to prevent air pockets from forming. Also the grout must be recommended for underwater application and have elastomeric properties. Products used shall be approved by the engineer. The liner shall not be displaced when the annular space is being filled. Spacers, inflatable plugs or other methods approved by the Engineer must be used to prevent displacement. The length of fused pipe that can be pulled will vary depending on field conditions, the ease of access to the area, and the working space available. 46.4.5 CONFIRMATION OF PIPE SIZES The Contractor shall be solely responsible to confirm all pipe sizes prior to ordering, fusing and installation of the liner. 46.4.6 UNDERDRAIN CONNECTIONS IF REQUIRED After the liner has been pulled into place, allowed to recover and sealed at the manholes, pipe connections okayed by the engineer shall be reconnected to the liner pipe. SECTION IV Page 97 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Pipe connections shall be connected by the use of a pre- fabricated polyethylene saddle. A neoprene gasket shall be installed between the saddle and the liner pipe so that a complete water seal is accomplished when the saddle is placed on the liner pipe and secured with stainless steel bands. 46.4.7 BACKFILLING All excavations shall be backflied using on site materials or as specified by the engineer. Cost for backfilling of access shafts and underdrain connections shall be including in the unit price bid for sliplining and reconnection of service laterals. Before any excavation is done for any purpose, it will be the responsibility of the contractor to contact the various utility companies and to determine the locations of their facilities. It will be the responsibility of the contractor to provide adequate protection for utility facilities. Any temporary construction right of way and /or storage areas will be arranged for by the contractor. 46.4.8 POINT REPAIR The engineer or his representative will determine if a point repair is necessary only after it has been demonstrated that a liner pipe cannot be pulled through the existing pipe. Payment will be made for each repair. The contractor will be expected to remove the obstruction and clear the pipe. If removing the top of the existing pipe will accomplish the removal of the obstruction, the bottom of the existing pipe should remain in place to form a cradle for the liner. 46.4.9 CLEAN UP OPERATIONS All materials not used in the backfilling operation shall be disposed of off site by the contractor. Finish grading shall be required. In locations other than street right -of -ways, the surface shall be graded smooth and sodded with the same kind of grass as the existing lawn. Excavation points in street right -of -ways shall be repaired as specified by the engineer. 47 SPECIFICATIONS FOR POLYVINYL CHLORIDE RIBBED PIPE 47.1 SCOPE This specification designates general requirements for unplasticized polyvinyl chloride (PVC) plastic (spiral wound) pipe with integral wall bell and spigot joints for the conveyance of storm water. 47.2 MATERIALS All pipe and fittings shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with specification for "Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large Diameter Ribbed Gravity Storm Sewer Pipe and Fittings Based on Controlled Inside Diameter ". The pipe and fittings shall be made of PVC plastic. 47.3 PIPE The bell shall consist of an integral wall section. The solid cross section fiber ring shall be factory assembled on the spigot. Sizes and dimensions shall be as shown in this specification. SECTION IV Page 98 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Standard laying lengths shall be 13 ft. + 1 inch. At manufacturer's option, random lengths of not more than 15% of total footage may be shipped in lieu of standard lengths. 47.4 JOINING SYSTEM Joints shall be either an integral bell gasketed joint. When the joint is assembled according to manufactures recommendation it will prevent misalignment of adjacent pipes and form a silt tight joint. 47.5 FITTINGS All fittings and accessories shall be as manufactured and furnished by the pipe supplier or approved equal and have bell and /or spigot configurations compatible with that of the pipe. 48 GUNITE SPECIFICATIONS 48.1 PRESSURE INJECTED GROUT Pressure injected grout shall be of cement and water and shall be proportioned generally in the ratio of 1.5 (one and one half) cubic foot (one and one half bags) of cement to 1 (one) cubic foot (7.50 gal.) of water. This mix shall be varied as the grouting proceeds as is necessary to provide penetration in the operator's judgment. Cement shall be Portland Cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, latest edition serial designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. Portland Cement shall weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Water used in the grout shall be fresh, clean and free from injurious amounts of oil, alkali, vegetable, sewage and /or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. Grout pump shall be of the positive displacement type and shall be capable of producing adequate pressure to penetrate the area. All pressure grouting will be at the direction of the Engineer. 48.2 REHABILITATION OF CORRUGATED METAL PIPE WITH GUNITE Guniting shall conform to all requirements of "Specifications for Materials, Proportioning, and Application of Shotcrete (ACI 506.2 77)" published by the American Concrete Institute, Detroit, Michigan, except as modified by those specifications. Steel reinforcement shall be incorporated in the Gunite as required and shall be furnished, bent, set and placed in accordance with the provisions of these specifications. The purpose of this specification is to obtain a dense and durable concrete having the specified strength. 48.3 COMPOSITION Gunite shall be composed of Portland Cement, aggregate and water so proportioned as to produce a concrete suitable for pneumatic application. SECTION IV Page 99 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.4 STRENGTH REQUIREMENTS Concrete ingredients shall be selected, proportioned in such a manner as will produce concrete which will be extremely strong, dense and resistant to weathering, and abrasion. Concrete shall have a minimum 28 -day strength of 4,000 psi. 48.5 MATERIALS Portland Cement: Cement shall be Portland cement conforming to all of the requirements of the American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C150 for Portland Cement, Type I. A bag of cement shall be deemed to weigh not less than 94 pounds per cubic foot. Fine Aggregate: Fine aggregate shall be natural siliceous sand consisting of hard, clean, strong, durable and uncoated particles, conforming to the requirements of American Society for Testing Materials Standard Specifications, Latest Serial Designation C33 for Concrete Aggregates. Fine aggregate shall not contain less than 3% nor more than 6% of moisture. Fine aggregate shall be evenly graded from fine to coarse and shall be within the following limits: Passing No. 3/8 Sieve 100% Passing No. 4 Sieve 95% to 100% Passing No. 8 Sieve 80% to 100% Passing No. 16 Sieve 50% to 85% Passing No. 30 Sieve 25% to 60% Passing No. 50 Sieve 10% to 30% Passing No. 100 Sieve 2% to 10% 48.6 WATER Water used in mixing, at the nozzle shall be fresh, clean, and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, vegetable, sewage, and /or organic matter. Water shall be considered as weighing 8.33 pounds per gallon. 48.7 REINFORCEMENT Steel mesh reinforcement shall be electrically welded, cold drawn, mild steel fabric conforming to the latest requirements of ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 185 for Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement. Mesh can be fabricated from cold drawn steel wire conforming to the requirements of the latest ASTM Standard Specifications, Serial Designation A 82 and sized as shown on Plans Page 7 of 7. 48.8 STORAGE OF MATERIALS Cement shall be stored with adequate provisions for the prevention of absorption of moisture. It shall be stored in a manner that will permit easy access for inspection and identification of each shipment. Aggregate shall be stockpiled at points selected to provide maximum drainage and to prevent the inclusion of any foreign material during rehandling. SECTION IV Page 100 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.9 SURFACE PREPARATION Unsound materials of construction and all coated, scaly, or unsound concrete in manholes and inlets shall be removed by chipping with pneumatic hammers and chisels to sound surface, all cracks and cavities shall be chipped to such formation that their sides form approximately a 45 degree angle to the exposed surface for at least one (1) inch in depth. All areas to receive pneumatic concrete shall be cleaned by flushing or scouring with water and compressed air jets to assure removal of all loose particles. All areas of existing surfaces that do not require chipping shall be given a wet sandblasting with the gunite equipment and the air pressure at the cement gun shall not be Less than 50 psi. Surface preparation of existing metal surface of a corrugated pipe shall be lightly sandblasted to remove loose material. All sandblasted areas shall then be cleaned by an /a air /water blast to remove all particles from the cleaning operation. To insure perfect bond, the newly sandblasted surface shall be thoroughly moistened with water prior to application of gunite. In no instance shall gunite be applied in an area where free running water exists. 48.10 PROPORTIONING Prior to start of guniting the Contractor shall submit to the Owner the recommended mix as a ratio of cement to aggregate. Recommended mix shall be on the basis of test data from prior experience. Provided data submitted is adequate no further testing of recommended mix will be required. If required, the Contractor shall provide all equipment necessary to control the actual amounts of all materials entering into the concrete. The types of equipment and methods used for measuring materials shall be subject to approval. 48.11 MIXING Gunite shall be thoroughly mixed by machine and then passed through a sieve to remove all large particles before placing in hopper of the cement gun. The mixture shall not be permitted to become damp. Each batch should be entirely discharged before recharging is begun. The mixer should be cleaned thoroughly enough to remove all adherent materials from the mixing vanes and from the drum at regular intervals. Water in any amount shall not be added to the mix before it enters the cement gun. Quantities of water shall be controlled by a valve at the nozzle of the gun. Water content shall be adjusted as required for proper placement, but shall in no case exceed four gallons of water per sack of cement, including the water contained in the aggregate. Remixing or tempering shall not be permitted. Mixed material that has stood 45 minutes without being used shall be discarded. Rebound materials shall not be reused. 48.12 APPLICATION Gunite shall not be placed on a frozen surface nor during freezing weather. Gunite shall not be placed when it is anticipated that the temperature during the following 24 hours will drop below 32 degrees, Fahrenheit. Sequence of application may be from bottom to top or vice versa if rebound is properly removed. Corners shall be filled first. "Shooting" shall be from an angle as near perpendicular to the SECTION IV Page 101 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications surface as practicable, with the nozzle held approximately 3 feet from the work (except in confined control). If the flow of material at the nozzle is not uniform and slugs, sand spots, or wet sloughs result, the nozzleman shall direct the nozzle away from the work until the faulty conditions are corrected. Such defects shall be replaced as the work progresses. Guniting shall be suspended if: 1. Air velocity separates the cement from the sand at the nozzle. 2. Temperature approaches freezing and the newly placed gunite cannot be protected. Gunite shall be applied in one or more layers to such total thickness as required to restore the area as detailed over the original lines of the adjoining surface, unless otherwise specified. All cavities, depressions, washouts and similar failures shall be rebuilt to original lines by use of gunite reinforced with wire mesh. Where the cavity exceeds 4 inches in depth a layer of mesh shall be used for each 3 inches of depth of gunite. In no case shall wire mesh be placed behind existing reinforcement. The time interval between successive layers in sloping vertical or overhanging work must be sufficient to allow initial but not final set to develop. At the time the initial set is developing, the surface shall be cleaned to remove the thin film of laitance in order to provide a perfect bond with succeeding applications. 48.13 CONSTRUCTION JOINTS Construction joints or day's work joints shall be sloped off to a thin, clean, regular edge, preferably at a 45- degree slope. Before placing the adjoining work, the slope portion and adjacent gunite shall be thoroughly cleaned as necessary, then moistened and scoured with an air jet. 48.14 SURFACE FINISH Nozzleman shall bring the gunite to an even plane and to well - formed corners by working up to ground wires or other guides, using lower placing velocity than normal. After the body coat has been placed, the surface shall be trued with a thin edge screed to remove high areas and expose low areas. Low areas shall be properly filled with concrete to insure a true, flat surface. After the concrete surface has been trued, the entire surface shall be given a flashcoat finish except where a special type finish is specified on the drawings. 48.15 CURING Curing shall be in accordance with either paragraph 3.7.1(d) or paragraph 3.7.5. of ACI 506.2 77 depending upon atmospheric condition. 48.16 ADJACENT SURFACE PROTECTION During progress of the work, where appearance is important, adjacent areas or grounds which may be permanently discolored, stained, or otherwise damaged by dust and rebound, shall be adequately protected sensitive areas, when contacted, shall be cleaned by early scraping, brushing or washing, as the surroundings permit. SECTION IV Page 102 of 134 5/15/2012 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 r r Section IV — Technical Specifications 48.17 INSPECTION Because of the importance of workmanship affecting the quality of the gunite, continual inspection during placing shall be maintained. Any imperfections discovered shall be cut out and replaced with sound material. 48.18 EQUIPMENT Cement Gun: The mixing and delivering equipment shall be either the vertical double chamber type or rotary type. The upper chamber of the double chamber type shall receive and pressurize the dry mix and deliver it to the lower chamber. The lower chamber shall force the pressurized mix into the delivery hose by means of a feed wheel. The type of feeder utilized should be of sufficient capacity that the lower chamber may continuously furnish all required material to the delivery hose while the upper chamber receives the recharge. The rotary type cement gun shall have an enlarged hopper to feed material into a rotating multiported cylinder. Material shall fall by gravity into a port which shall then be rotated to a position in which the material is expelled by air into a moving stream of air. All equipment must be kept in good repair. The interior of drums, feed gearing and valves shall be cleaned as often as necessary (at least once every 8 hour shift) to prevent material from caking on critical parts. Nozzle: Nozzle shall be the premixing type with perforated water feed ring inside the nozzle. The maximum length of material hose for the application of gunite shall be approximately 150 feet although it shall be permissible to use as much as 800 feet of material hose if the supply air pressure measured at the cement gun is increased to maintain proper velocity. The following table gives requirements for compressor size, hose size and air pressure using 150 feet of material hose: Comp. Cap (cfm) Max. Hose Dia. (In.) Max. Size Nozzle (In.) Min. Air Press. (psi) 365 1 5/8 1 5/8 60 600 2 2 80 750 2 1/2 2 1/2 90 For each 25 feet of material hose used in excess of 150 feet, the required air pressure shall be increased by 5 psi. Air Compressor: Any standard type of compressor shall be satisfactory if it is of sufficient capacity to provide, without interruption, the pressures and volume of air necessary for the longest hose delivery. The air compressor capacity determinations shall include allowances made for the air consumed in blowing rebound, cleaning, reinforcing and for incidental uses. Compressor equipment shall be of such capacity so as to insure air pressures at the special mixer capable of producing the required material velocities. Water Supply: The water pressure at the discharge nozzle should be sufficiently greater than the operating air pressure to assure the water is intimately mixed with the other materials. If the line water pressure is inadequate, a water pump or pressurized tank shall be introduced into the line. The water pressure shall be uniformly steady (nonpulsating). SECTION IV Page 103 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49 SANITARY AND STORM MANHOLE LINER RESTORATION 49.1 SCOPE AND INTENT It is the intent of this portion of the specification to provide for the structural rehabilitation of manhole walls and bases with solid preformed liners and made -in -place liner systems used in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and these specifications. In addition to these specifications, the Contractor shall comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for work. Purpose of work is to eliminate infiltration, provide corrosion protection, repair voids and to restore the structural integrity of the manhole. For any particular system the Contractor will submit manufacturer's technical data and application instructions. All OSHA regulations shall be met. 49.2 PAYMENT Payment for liners shall be per vertical foot of liner installed from the base to the top of the installed liner. Liners will generally be installed to the top of existing or new corbels. No separate payment will be made for the following items and the cost of such work shall be included in the pay item per linear foot of liner: Bypass pumping; Traffic Control; Debris Disposal; Excavation, including necessary pavement removal; Shoring and /or dewatering; Structural fill; Backfill and compaction; Grout and mortar; Brick; Resetting of the manhole ring and cover; Pipe extensions and connectors necessary to the installation; Replacement of unpaved roadway and grass or shrubbery plot; Replacement of roadway base and asphalt surface; and Appurtenant work as required for a complete and operable system. 49.3 FIBERGLASS LINER PRODUCTS 49.3.1 MATERIALS 49.3.1.1 LINERS Liners shall be fiberglass engineered to meet or exceed AASHTO H 20 loading of 16,000 pound vertical wheel load. Manhole liners are to be of the integral corbel design unless otherwise stipulated. Manhole liners are to be as large in diameter as will fit into the existing rnanhole. The contractor shall measure the existing manhole immediately prior to ordering materials and is solely responsible for the fitting of the liner. Contractor will be required to submit factory certification for fiberglass liners. The manhole liner shall meet all requirements of ASTM D 3753. 49.3.1.2 MORTAR Mortar shall be composed of one part Portland Cement Type I and between two and three parts clean, well graded sand, 100% of which shall pass a No. 8 sieve. 49.3.1.3 GROUTING Grouting shall be a concrete slurry of four bags of Portland Cement Type II per cubic yard of clean, well graded sand. SECTION IV Page 104 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.3.2 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION Excavate an area around the top of the existing manhole sufficiently wide and deep for the removal of the manhole ring and corbel section. Remove the frame and cover and corbel section without damaging the existing manhole walls. Care is to be taken not to allow brick or soil to fall into the existing manhole. Remove or reinsert loose brick which protrude more than one inch from the interior wall of the manhole and which could interfere with the insertion of the fiberglass liner. If the shelf of the manhole invert is not level around the perimeter, form a flat shelf with mortar. Cut the liner to the proper length. Cutouts in the manhole shall be made to accommodate existing inlet and outlet pipes, drops and cleanouts. Lower the liner into the existing manhole and set the bottom of the liner into quick setting grout. Obtain a good bottom seal to prevent the loss of grout from the annular space between the outside of the liner and the inside wall of the existing manhole. Set the liner as nearly vertically as possible. Pour six inches of quick setting grout above the initial bottom seal in the annular void to insure an adequate bottom seal. Bridge the gap from drops, laterals, force mains, cleanouts and all existing piping between the existing manhole wall and the new manhole liner with P.V.C. pipe. Use quick setting mortar to seal the area around the manhole liner and piping. Fill the annular space between the manhole liner and the existing manhole interior walls with grout. Care must be taken not to deflect the manhole liner due to head pressure. Set the existing manhole ring and cover using brick to make elevation adjustments as needed. Observe watertightness and repair any visible leakage. Backfill around the new liner and compact the backfill. Sod the disturbed area. Match existing sod. Where manholes fall in paved areas, disturbed base shall be replaced twice the original thickness and compacted in 8" layers. Asphalt shall be replaced with 1 1/2" of Pinellas County Type II surface. 49.4 STRONG SEAL MS -2 LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM This specification shall govern all work to spray apply a monolithic fiber reinforced cementitious liner to the wall and bench surfaces of brick, concrete or any other construction material; Strong Seal MS 2 product. Described are procedures for manhole preparation, cleaning, application and testing. The applicator must be approved, trained and certified as having successfully completed factory training. The applicator /contractor shall furnish all labor, equipment and materials for applying the Strong Seal MS 2 product directly to the contour of the manhole to form a structural cementitious liner of a minimum 1/2" thickness using a machine specially designed for the application. All aspects of the installation shall be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and with the following specifications which includes: 1. The elimination of active infiltration prior to making the application. 2. The removal of any loose and unsound material. SECTION IV Page 105 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. The spray application of a pre blended cementitious mix to form a monolithic liner in a 2 coat application. 49.4.1 MATERIALS 49.4.1.1 PATCHING MIX Strong Seal shall be used as a patching mix according to the manufacturer's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive Strength (ASTM C -109) 15 min., 200 psi 6 hrs., 1,400 psi 2. Shrinkage (ASTM C -596) 28 days, 150 psi 3. Bond (ASTM C -952) 28 days, 150 psi 4. Cement Sulfate resistant 5. Density, when applied 105 +/- 5 pcf 49.5 INFILTRATION CONTROL Strong Plug shall be used to stop minor water infiltration according to the manufacture's recommendations and shall have the following minimum requirements: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C -109) - 600 psi, 1 hr.; 1000 psi 24 hrs. 2. Bond (ASTM C -952) - 30 psi, 1 hr.; 80 psi, 24 hrs. 49.6 GROUTING MIX Strong -Seal Grout shall be used for stopping very active infiltration and filling voids according to the manufacture's recommendations. The grout shall be volume stable, and have a minimum 28 day compressive strength of 250 psi and a 1 day strength of 50 psi. 49.7 LINER MIX Strong Seal MS 2 shall be used to form the monolithic liner covering all interior manhole surfaces and shall have the following minimum requirements at 28 days: 1. Compressive strength (ASTM C 109) 3,000 psi 2. Tensile strength (ASTM C 496) 300 psi 3. Flexural strength (ASTM C 78) 600 psi 4. Shrinkage (ASTM C 596) 0% at 90% R.H. 5. Bond (ASTM C 952) 130 psi 6. Density, when applied 105 + pcf Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at the Job site. Bag weight shall be 50 51 pounds and contents shall have dry bulk density of 54 to 56 pounds per cubic foot. Fiberglass rods which are contained in the product shall be alkaline resistant and shall be 1/2" to 5/8" long with a diameter of 635 to 640 microns. Products shall, in the un mixed state, have a lead content not greater than two percent (2 %) by weight. SECTION IV Page 106 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Strong Seal MS 2C shall be made with Calcium Aluminate Cement and shall be used according to the manufacturer's recommendations in applications where there is evidence of severe sulfide conditions. Product must be factory blended requiring only the addition of water at job site. Bag weight shall be 50 -51 pounds and contents must have a dry bulk density of 50 56 pounds per cubic foot. Cement content must be 65 % -75% of total weight of bag. One bag of product when mixed with correct amount of water must have a wet density of 95 108 pounds per cubic foot and must yield a minimum of .67 cubic foot of volume. Fiberglass rods must be alkaline resistant with rod lengths not less than 1/2" in length nor greater than 5/8" in height. Product shall not include any basic ingredient that exceeds maximum allowable EPA limit for any heavy metal. Manufacturer must provide MSDS sheets for product(s) to be used in reconstruction process. A two coat application of liner material will be required (no exceptions) with the first coat rough troweled to force materials into cracks and crevices to set the bond. The second coat to be spray applied to assure minimum 1/2" thickness after troweling or brush finishing to a relatively smooth finish. 49.8 WATER Shall be clean and potable. 49.9 OTHER MATERIALS No other material shall be used with the mixes previously described without prior approval or recommendation from the manufacturer. 49.10 EQUIPMENT A specially designed machine consisting of an optimized progressive cavity pump capable of producing a minimum of 250 psi pumping pressure, contra blend mixer with twin ribbon paddles with discharge, and an air system for spray application of product. Equipment must be complete with water storage and metering system. Mixer and pump is to be hydraulically powered. Equipment is to be mounted to heavy duty construction tandem axle road worthy trailer complete with electric brakes and running lights. Internal combustion engine must be included to power the hydraulic system and air compressor. 49.11 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.11.1 PREPARATION 1. Place boards over inverts to prevent extraneous material from entering the sewer lines and to prevent up stream line from flooding the manhole. 2. All foreign material shall be removed from the manhole wall and bench using a high pressure water spray (minimum 1,200 psi). Loose and protruding brick, mortar and SECTION IV Page 107 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications concrete shall be removed using a mason's hammer and chisel and /or scraper. Fill any large voids with quick setting patching mix. 3. Active leaks shall be stopped using quick setting specially formulated mixes according to the manufacturer's recommendations. Some leaks may require weep holes to localize the infiltration during the application after which the weep holes shall be plugged with the quick setting mix prior to the final liner application. When severe infiltration is present, drilling may be required in order to pressure grout using a cementitious grout. Manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed when pressure grouting is required. 4. Any bench, invert or service line repairs shall be made at this time using the quick setting mix and following the manufacturer's recommendations. 5. After all preparation has been completed, remove all loose material. 49.11.2 MIXING For each bag of product, use the amount of water specified by the manufacturer and mix using the Spray Mate Model 35C or 35D equipment for 30 seconds to a minute after all materials have been placed in the mixing hopper. Place the mix into the holding hopper and prepare another batch with timing such that the nozzleman can spray in a continuous manner without interruption until each application is complete. 49.11.3 SPRAYING The surface, prior to spraying, shall be damp without noticeable free water droplets or running water. Materials shall be sprayed, applied to a minimum uniform thickness to insure that all cracks, crevices and voids are filled and a somewhat smooth surface remains after light troweling. The light troweling is performed to compact the material into voids and to set the bond. Not before the first application has begun to take an initial set (disappearance of surface sheen which could be 15 minutes to 1 hour depending upon ambient conditions) is the second application made to assure a minimum total finished thickness of 1/2 inch. The surface is then troweled to a smooth finish being careful not to over trowel so as to bring additional water to the surface and weaken it. A brush finish may be applied to the finished coat to remove trowel marks. Manufacturer's recommendation shall be followed whenever more than 24 hours have elapsed between applications. The wooden bench covers shall be removed and the bench is sprayed such that a gradual slope is produces from the walls to the invert with the thickness at the edge of the invert being no less than 1/2 inch. The wall bench intersection shall be rounded to a uniform radius, the full circumference of the intersection. The final application shall have a minimum of four (4) hours cure time before being subjected to active flow. 49.11.4 PRODUCT TESTING At some point during the application, at least four (4) 2 inch cubes may be prepared each day or from every 50 bags of product used, identified and sent, in accordance with the Owner's or Manufacturer's directions, for compression strength testing as described in ASTM C 109. 49.11.5 CURING Ambient manhole conditions are adequate for curing so long as the manhole is covered. It is imperative that the manhole be covered as soon as possible after the application has been completed. SECTION IV Page 108 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.11.6 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12 INNERLINE ENVIRONMENTAL SERVICES LINER PRODUCT SYSTEM 49.12.1 SCOPE Materials and application procedures for manhole rehabilitation for the purpose of restoring structural integrity, providing corrosion resistance, and stopping infiltration by means of: 1. Hydraulic grouting, where required, as a preliminary measure to stop high volume infiltration 2. Hydrophilic grouting (positive side waterproofing), where required, as follows: a. Hydrophilic foam - injected through wall of manhole to fill voids and /or b. Hydrophilic gel- injected through wall of manhole to stop active leaks 3. Cementitious waterproofing with crystallization (negative side waterproofing) 4. Calcium aluminate cement lining, minimum of 1/2 inch 5. Epoxy coating, minimum of 30 dry mils 49.12.2 MATERIALS 49.12.2.1 REPAIRING CEMENT A quick setting hydraulic cement compound shall be used to plug all visible minor leaks and to instantly stop major leaks, so that further waterproofing processes may proceed unhindered. The repairing cement shall be nonshrinking, nonmetallic, and noncorrosive. The compound shall have the following properties: Set Time Tensile Strength ASTM C 307 Compressive Strength ASTM -C 109 1 -3 minutes 1 day 510 psi 3 days 745 psi 28 days 855 psi 1 day 3,125 psi 7 days 7,808 psi 28 days 9,543 psi SECTION IV Page 109 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Flexural Strength ASTM C 78 1 day 410 psi 3 days 855 psi 28 days 1,245 psi 49.12.2.2 HYDROPHILIC GROUTING Based on conditions found in and around the manhole, the applicator shall pressure inject either one or both of the following materials: 1. An expansive foam grout shall be used to stop major intrusion of water and fill cracks in and voids behind the structure's surface. Physical properties are as follows: Tensile Strength 380 psi ASTM D 3574 -86 Elongation 400% ASTM D 3574 -86 Bonding Strength 250 -300 psi 2. A hydrophilic gel grout shall be used for soil stabilization behind the manhole -to prevent seepage, to provide a damming effect, and to place a hydrostatic barrier around exterior of manhole. Physical properties are as follows: Density 8.75 -9.17 lbs /gal ASTM D -3574 Tensile Strength 150 psi ASTM D- 412 Elongation 250% ASTM D -3574 Shrinkage Less than 4% ASTM D -1042 Toxicity Non Toxic 49.12.2.3 WATERPROOFING A waterproofing component based on the crystallization process shall be applied. The system combines cementitious and silicate based materials that are applied to negative side surfaces to seal and stop leakage caused by hydrostatic pressure. A combination of five coats (using three components -two powders and a special liquid) react with moisture and the constituents of the substrate to form the crystalline structure. It becomes an integral part of the structure and blocks the passage of water. With moisture present, the crystallization process will continue for approximately six months. Upon completion the color will be light grey. Physical properties are as follows: Slant/Shear bond Strength to Calcium Aluminate Cement ASTM (to be given) 1,200 1,800 psi Tensile Strength (7 day cure) ASTM C 190 Permeability (3 day cure) CRD 48 55 380 psi (2.62 MPa) 325 psi (2.24 MPa) 8.1x1011cm /sec to 7.6x10 cm /sec at 100% RH at 50% RH 49.12.2.4 CEMENT LINING A self bonding calcium aluminate cement shall be applied to restore structural integrity and provide corrosion resistance qualities. The cement (before adding fibers) shall have the following properties: Calcium Aluminate Cement 12 Hrs 24 Hrs 7 Days SECTION IV Page 110 of 134 28 Days 5/15/2012 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 t 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications Astm C 495 Compressive Strength. Psi 7000 11000 12000 13000 Astm C 293 Flexural Strength, Psi 1000 1500 1800 2000 Astm C 596 Shrinkage At 90% Humidity -- <0.04 <0.06 <0.08 Astm C 666 Freeze -Thaw Aft 300 Cycle No Damage Astm C 990 Pull - Out Strength 200 - 230 Psi Tensile Astm C 457 Air Void Content (7 Days) 3% Astm C 497 Porosity/Adsorption Test 4 - 5% Modules of Elasticity: 7.10 X 10 PSI after 24 Hrs moist curing at 68 F. The calcium aluminate cement shall be reinforced with inert fibers which comply with ASTM C 1H6 and ASTM C 1018, added at the rate of one pound per cubic yard of concrete. The mixture shall be applied to a thickness of at least one half inch, but no greater than two inches. It will have a dark grey color. 49.12.2.5 EPDXY COATING A high build, flexible waterproofing epoxy shall be applied to a minimum of 30 dry mils. This epoxy will seal structure from moisture and provide protective qualities to the surface, including excellent resistance to chemical attack and abrasion. The epoxy shall be 100% solids, can be applied to damp surfaces, cures to a tile like finish, is easy to clean, and has no toxic fumes. Its uses include sewage treatment plants and other sewer structures. The epoxy shall have the following properties at 75 degrees F: Mixing Ratio (Parts A:B), by volume 1:1 Color (other colors available on request) Light Gray Pot Life, hrs 1 Tensile Strength, psi, min 2,000 Tensile Elongation, % 10 —20 Water Extractable Substances, mg. /sq. in., max 5 Bond Strength to Cement (ASTM 882) psi 1,800 49.12.2.6 CHEMICAL RESISTANCE Alcohols, Trichloroethylene, Nitric Acid (3 %), Jet Fuels, Water, Sulfuric Acid (3% 10 %), MEK, Wine, Butyl Acetate, Beer, Lactic Acid (3 %), Gasoline, Corn Oil, Aluminum Sulfate, Paraffin Oil, Vegetable Juice, Sodium Chloride, Motor Oil, Hydrochloric Acid (3 %), and many others. 49.12.3 INSTALLATION AND EXECUTION 49.12.3.1 PROCEDURAL OVERVIEW Work shall proceed as follows: 1. Remove rungs (steps), if desired by client. 2. Clean manhole and remove debris. a. Plug lines and /or screen out displaced debris. b. Apply acid wash, if necessary, to clean and degrease. c. Hydroblast and /or sand blast structure. SECTION IV Page 111 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications d. Remove debris from work area. 3. Repair minor defects in walls, benches, and inverts, as required, with repairing cement. (Note: Major structural repairs, such as rebuilding of benches, will also be made as required by client. 4. Inject hydrophilic grout through all surfaces, as needed, to eliminate infiltration. 5. Apply cementitious /crystallization waterproofing agents to all surfaces, repeating steps as needed. 6. Spray and /or hand apply calcium aluminate cement lining to all surfaces. 7. Spray apply epoxy coating to all surfaces. NOTE: Steps 1 -5 shall be executed consecutively with minimal delays; calcium aluminate (Step 6) shall require a cure time of at least twenty -four hours for needed adhesion of epoxy (Step 7) to cement lining. 49.12.3.2 PREPARATION An acid wash shall be used (if needed) to clean and degrease. Then, if the client desires, the rungs shall be removed. Next, the entire structure is thoroughly water and /or sand blasted to remove any loose or deteriorated material. Care shall be taken to prevent any loose material from entering lines and other areas by either plugging the lines ( where feasible) or inserting protective screens. 49.12.3.3 STRUCTURAL REPAIR Hand place or spray apply hydraulic cement material as necessary to prepared surface to fill cracks and voids in structure. Allow twenty (20) minutes before applying waterproofing/crystallization. 49.12.3.4 INFILTRATION CONTROL Pressure injection of hydrophilic gel and hydrophilic foam. 1. Drill 5/8" holes through active leaking surface. 2. Install all zert fittings, as recommended by manufacturer. 3. Inject material until water flow stops. 4. Remove fittings (if necessary). 49.12.3.5 WATERPROOFING /CRYSTALLIZATION PROCESS 1. Apply a slurry coat of powder #1 to moist wall using a stiff brush, forming an undercoat. 2. Apply dry powder #2 to slurry coat by hand. 3. Brush or spray on sealing liquid during the application to penetrate and initiate the crystal forming process. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3, until there are no visible leaks. 5. Apply powder #1 as an overcoat. 6. Allow one (1) hour to cure before applying cement lining. SECTION IV Page 112 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 49.12.3.6 CEMENT LINING 1. Dampen surface. 2. Mix material in mixer as recommended for spray or hand trowel application. 3. Apply cement until required build up of at least one half inch (and no more than 2 inches) has been achieved. 4. Trowel to smooth finish, restoring contours of manhole. 5. Texture brush surface to prepare for epoxy finish. 6. Allow for a 24 -hour cure time prior to epoxy coating. NOTE: If conditions of heavy humidity prevail, a dry air blower shall be used to facilitate curing times. 49.12.3.7 EPDXY COATING Spray apply epoxy coating using airless spraying equipment until surface is visibly covered and a thickness of at least 30 mils has been achieved. Manhole may be safely entered after six (6) hours, as epoxy will be hardened. Full cure strength will be achieved at forty eight (48) hours. 49.12.3.8 CLEAN UP The work crew shall remove all debris and clean work area. 49.12.3.9 MANHOLE TESTING AND ACCEPTANCE Manhole may be vacuum tested from the top of manhole frame to the manhole base. All pipes entering the manhole shall be plugged, taking care to securely place the plug from being drawn into the manhole. The test head shall be placed and the seal inflated in accordance with the manufacturers' recommendations. A vacuum pump of ten (10) inches of mercury shall be drawn and the vacuum pump shut off. With the valves closed, the time shall be measured for the vacuum to drop to nine (9) inches. The manhole shall pass if the time is greater than sixty (60) seconds for forty eight (48) inch diameter, seventy five (75) seconds for sixty (60) inches, and ninety (90) seconds for seventy two (72) inch diameter manholes. If the manhole fails the initial test, necessary repairs shall be made. Retesting shall proceed until a satisfactory test is obtained. Tests shall be performed by the Contractor under the direction of the Project Engineer. 49.12.3.10 WARRANTY All materials and workmanship shall be warranted to the Owner for a period of five (5) years, provided that all the above mentioned repair steps are used. 50 PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 23 — PROJECT INFORMATION SIGNS. 51 IN -LINE SKATING SURFACING SYSTEM 51.1 SCOPE 1. These specifications pertain to the application of the Plexiflor Color Finish System over recreational areas intended for In -Line Skating activities. The materials specified in the SECTION IV Page 113 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications site plans shall be of colors indicated and for application over the Plexipave Acrylic Latex System. 2. The work shall consist of suitable cleaning and preparation of the surface to assure a satisfactory bond of the system to the existing surface. 3. All coverage rates are calculated prior to dilution. 4. Plexiflor In -line Skating Surfacing System • 1 Coat of Acrylic Resurfacer • 2 Coats of Fortified Plexipave • 2 Coats of Plexiflor • Plexicolor Line Paint 51.2 SURFACE PREPARATIONS 51.2.1 ASPHALT Allow new asphalt to cure a minimum of 6 months. The surface must be checked for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repaired with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. (Surfacing prior to six months may make the asphalt subject to indentation). 51.2.2 CONCRETE Concrete shall have a wood float or broom finish. DO NOT PROVIDE STEEL TROWEL FINISH. DO NOT USE CURING AGENTS OR CONCRETE HARDENERS. Allow the concrete to cure a minimum of 30 days. Acid Etch the entire surface with Concrete Preparer according to California Specification Section 10.13. Check surface for birdbaths, cracks and other irregularities and repair with Court Patch Binder according to California Specification Section 10.14. 51.2.3 COURT PATCH BINDER MIX Court Patch Binder Mix: 100 Lbs. #80 -100 Mesh Silica Sand (dry) 3 gallons Couth Patch Binder 1 to 2 gallons Portland Cement. 51.3 APPLICATION OF ACRYLIC FILLER COAT 1. Application of the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix shall be applied to the clean, dry, level surfaces to receive the Plexiflor Surfacing System. The mix shall be applied according to California Specification Section 10.8 using the following mix: Acrylic Resurfacer Water (Clean and Potable) Sand (60 -80 mesh) Liquid Yield 55 gallons 20 -40 gallons 600 -900 pounds 112 -138 gallons 2. Over asphalt surfaces, apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two coats (depending on surface porosity) at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Non - coated concrete surfaces must be neutralized with concrete preparer and primed with California Ti -Coat according to Specification Section 10.17. The Acrylic Resurfacer Mix SECTION IV Page 114 of 134 5/15/2012 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications must be applied within 3 hours of the Ti -Coat application while the primer is dry but still tacky to the touch. Apply the Acrylic Resurfacer Mix in one or two applications at a rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat. 51.4 APPLICATION OF FORTIFIED PLEXIPAVE After the filler coat application has dried, apply two coats of Fortified Plexipave at an undiluted rate of .05 -.07 gallons per square yard per coat using the following mix: Plexipave Color Base 30 gallons Plexichrome 20 gallons Water 20 gallons 51.5 PLEXIFLOR APPLICATION 1. Plexiflor is factory premixed and ready to use from the container. The material may be diluted with one (1) part water to six (6) parts Plexiflor to improve flowability and provide uniform application. 2. Apply two coats of Plexiflor at a rate of .04 -.05 gallons per square yard per coat. 3. Plexiflor is applied (in a similar manner to Plexipave) in windrows on the surface with sufficient quantity to cover as the squeegee is pulled over the surface. Apply only light pressure to the squeegee. Do not allow ridges to form between passes of the squeegee. Ridges existing after material dries should require corrective action. 4. Plexiflor and its preliminary coatings should be allowed to thoroughly dry prior to application of subsequent coats. 51.6 PLAYING LINES Four hours minimum after completion of the color resurfacing, playing lines shall be accurately located, marked and painted with Plexicolor Line Paint as specified by The National In -Line Hockey Association. 51.7 GENERAL 1. The contractor shall remove all containers, surplus materials and debris upon completion of work leaving the site in a clean, orderly condition that is acceptable to the owner. Gates shall be secured and all containers shall be disposed of in accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations. 2. Materials specified for the Plexiflor System shall tee delivered to the site in sealed, property labeled arums with California Products Corporation labels that are stenciled with the proper batch code numbers. Products packaged or labeled in any other manner will not be accepted. Mixing with clear, fresh water shall only be done at the job site. Coverage rates are based upon material prior to mixing with water as specified. 51.8 LIMITATIONS 1. Do not apply if surface temperature is less than 50 °F or more than 1 40 °F. 2. Do not apply when rain or high humidity is imminent. 3. Do not apply when surface is damp or has standing water. SECTION IV Page 115 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 4. Plexiflor will not hide surface imperfections of previous coatings. 5. Keep from freezing. Do not store in the hot sun. 6. Keep containers tightly closed when not in use. 7. Plexiflor will not prevent substrate cracks from occurring. 8. Plexiflor will mark slightly from normal use of some In -line Skates. 9. Coefficient of friction = 0.78 10. Coating Application Drying Time: 30 minutes to 1 hour at 70 °F with 60% relative hum idity. 11. Keep court clean. Excess dirt or foreign material can cause the surface to be slippery. In -Line hockey is a physical sport. Always wear NIHA recommended protective gear. 52 RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION This article deleted. See SECTION III, ARTICLE 22 - RESIDENT NOTIFICATION OF START OF CONSTRUCTION. 53 GABIONS AND MATTRESSES 53.1 MATERIAL 53.1.1 GABION AND RENO MATTRESS MATERIAL 53.1.1.1 PVC COATED WIRE MESH GABIONS & MATTRESSES Gabion & mattress basket units shall be of non - raveling construction and fabricated from a double twist by twisting each pair of wires through three half turns developing the appearance of a triple twist. The galvanized wire core shall have a diameter of 0.1063 inches (approx. US gauge 12). All wire used in the fabrication of the gabion shall comply with or exceed Federal Specifications QQ -W -461 H, possess a maximum tensile strength of 70,000 p.s.i. with a Finish 5, Class 3 zinc coating in accordance with the current ASTM A -641. The weight of zinc coating shall be determined by ASTM A -90. The grade of zinc used for coating shall be High Grade or Special High Grade, as prescribed in ASTM B -6, Table 1. Uniformity of coating shall equal or exceed four 1- minute dips by the Preece test, as determined by ASTM A -239. The PVC coating shall be extruded and adhere to the wire core prior to weaving. The PVC coated wire shall be woven into a double twisted hexagonal mesh having uniform openings of 3 1/4 inches by 4 Y2 inches. The overall diameter of the mesh wire (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) shall be 0.146 inches. Selvedge and reinforcing wire shall be of heavily galvanized wire core, 0.1338 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 10), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.173 inches. Lacing and connecting wire shall be of soft tensile strength (75,000 PSI max), heavily galvanized wire core, 0.087 inches in diameter (approx. US gauge 13 '/2), coated with PVC and having an overall diameter (galvanized wire core plus PVC coating) of 0.127 inches. The use of alternate wire fasteners shall be permitted in lieu of tie wire providing the alternate fastener produces a four (4) wire selvedge joint with a strength of 1200 lbs. per linear foot while remaining in a locked and closed condition. Properly formed interlocking fasteners shall be spaced from 4 to 6 inches and have a minimum 3/4 square inch inside area to properly confine the required selvedge wires. Tiger -Tite SECTION IV Page 116 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications Interlocking Fasteners are an approved alternate joint material. The Interlocking Wire Fastener shall meet stainless steel material specification ASTM A -313, Type 302, Class 1, or equal. All of the above wire diameters are subject to tolerance limit of 0.004 inches in accordance with ASTM A -641. 53.1.1.2 PVC (POLYVINYL CHLORIDE) COATING The coating shall be gray in color and shall have a nominal thickness of 0.0216 inches but not less than 0.015 inches in thickness. The protective PVC plastic shall be suitable to resist deleterious effects from exposure to light, immersion in salt or polluted water and shall not show any material difference in its initial compound properties. The PVC compound is also resistant to attack from acids and resistant to abrasion. 1. Specific Gravity: a. According to ASTM D -2287 and ASTM D- 792; in the range of 1.30 to 1.34. 2. Tensile Strength: a. According to ASTM D -142; not less than 2980 psi. 3. Modulus of Elasticity: a. According to ASTM D -412; not less than 2700 psi at 100% strain. 4. Resistance to Abrasion: a. According to ASTM 1242; weight loss <12% (Method B). 5. Brittleness Temperature: a. According to ASTM D -746, Procedure A; shall be at least 8.3 degrees centigrade below the minimum temperature at which the gabions will be handled or placed but not lower than -9.4 degrees centigrade. 6. Hardness: a. According to ASTM D -2240; shall be between 50 and 60 Shore D when tested. 7. Creeping Corrosion: a. Maximum corrosion penetration to the wire core from a square cut end section shall not be more than 25mm when the specimen has been immersed for 2000 hours in a 50% SOLUTION HC1 (hydrochloric acid 12 Be). 53.1.1.3 ACCELERATED AGING TESTS Variation of the initial properties will be allowed, as specified below, when the specimen is submitted to the following Accelerated Aging Tests: 1. Salt Spray Test: a. According to ASTM B -117 b. Period of test = 3000 hours. 2. Exposure to ultraviolet rays: a. According to ASTM D -1499 and ASTM G -23 (Apparatus Type E). Period of test = 3000 hours at 63 degrees centigrade. SECTION IV Page 117 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. Exposure to high temperature: a. Testing period: 240 hours at 105 degrees centigrade, when tested in accordance with ASTM D- 1203 and ASTM D -2287. 53.1.1.4 PROPERTIES AFTER AGING TESTS After the above Accelerated Aging Tests have been performed, the PVC compound shall exhibit the following properties: 1. Appearance: a. The vinyl coating shall not crack, blister or split and shall not show any remarkable change in color. 2. Specific Gravity: a. Shall not show change higher than 6% of its initial value. 3. Durometer Hardness: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 4. Tensile Strength: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 5. Elongation: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 6. Modulus of Elasticity: a. Shall not show change higher than 25% of its initial value. 7. Resistance to Abrasion: a. Shall not show change higher than 10% of its initial value. 8. Brittleness Temperature: a. Cold Bend Temperature - Shall not be lower than -20 degrees centigrade. b. Cold Flex Temperature - Shall not be higher than +18 degrees centigrade. 53.1.2 GABION AND MATTRESS FILLER MATERIAL: The filler stone shall be limestone from a source approved by the Engineer before delivery is started. Representative preliminary samples of the stone shall be submitted by the contractor or supplier for examination and testing by the Engineer. The stone shall have a minimum specific gravity of 2.3 and be of a quality and durability sufficient to insure permanency in the structure. The individual stones shall be free of cracks, seams, and other defects that would tend to promote deterioration from natural causes, or which might reduce the stones to sizes that could not be retained in the gabion or mattress baskets. The stone shall meet the following physical requirements: • Absorption, maximum 5% • Los Angeles Abrasion (FM l OT096), maximum loss 45% • Soundness (Sodium Sulphate), (FM 1- T104), maximum loss 12% SECTION IV Pagel 18 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications • Flat and elongated pieces, materials with least dimension less than one third of greatest dimension shall not exceed 5% by weight. All filler material shall be uniformly graded between 4 inch and 8 inch (equivalent spherical diameter) and shall be angular in form. Rounded stones shall not exceed 10% of the stone, by weight and 70% of the stone, by weight, shall exceed the largest dimension of the mesh opening. 53.1.3 MATTRESS WIRE Mattress wire shall conform to the same specifications as gabions except as follows: 1. The nominal diameter of the wire used in the fabrication of the netting shall be 0.0866 inches minimum, subject to diameter tolerance in accordance with the current ASTM A 641, Table 3. 2. All wire shall be galvanized according to ASTM A 641, Table 1. The minimum weight of the zinc coating shall be 0.70 ozs. /sq. ft. for the 0.0866 inch wire used for mesh and lacing and 0.80 ozs. /sq. ft. for the 0.106 wire used for selvedge. 3. Adhesion of the zinc coating to the wire shall be capable of being wrapped in a close helix at a rate not exceeding 15 turns per minute around a cylindrical steel mandrel having a diameter 3 times the nominal wire diameter being tested. After the wrap test is completed, the wire shall not exhibit any cracking or flaking of the zinc coating to such an extent that any zinc can be removed by rubbing with bare fingers. 53.1.4 GEOTEXTILE FABRIC Fabric shall conform to FDOT Standard Index 199, Type D -2, and FDOT Standard Specifications, 1996 edition, Section 985. 53.2 PERFORMANCE Gabions and Reno Mattresses shall be installed according to the manufacturer's recommendations and as shown on the Drawings. Fabrication of gabion baskets shall be in such a manner that the sides, ends, lid and diaphragms can be assembled at the construction site into rectangular baskets of the sizes specified and shown on the Drawings. Gabions and mattresses shall be of single unit construction; the base, lid ends and sides shall be either woven into a single unit or one edge of these members connected to the base section of the gabion in such a manner that the strength and flexibility at the connecting point is at least equal to that of the mesh. Where the length of the gabion and mattress exceeds one and one -half its horizontal width, they shall be equally divided by diaphragms of the same mesh and gauge as the mattresses shall be furnished with the necessary diaphragms secured in proper position on the base so that no additional tying is required at this juncture. The wire mesh is to be fabricated so that it will not ravel. This is defined as the ability to resist pulling apart at any of the twists or connections forming the mesh when a single wire strand in a section of mesh is cut. Each gabion or mattress shall be assembled by tying all untied edges with binding wire. The binding wire shall be tightly looped around every other mesh opening along seams so that single and double loops are alternated. A line of empty gabions shall be placed into position according to the contract drawings and binding wire shall be used to securely tie each unit to the adjoining one along the vertical reinforced edges and the top selvedges. The base of the empty gabions placed on top of a filled line of gabions shall be tightly wire to the latter at front and back. SECTION IV Page 119 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications To achieve better alignment and finish in retaining walls, gabion stretching is recommended. Connecting wires shall be inserted during the filling operation in the following manner: Gabions shall be filled to one third full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite faces of each cell at one third height. The gabion shall then be filled to two thirds full and one connecting wire in each direction shall be tightly tied to opposite face of each cell at one two third height. The cell shall then be filled to the top. Filler stone shall not be dropped more than 12" into the gabions and mattresses. Geotextile fabric shall be installed at locations shown in the Drawings. The surface to receive the cloth shall be prepared to a relatively smooth condition free of obstructions which may tear or cut the cloth. The panel shall be overlapped a minimum of 30 inches and secured against movement. Cloth damaged or displaced during installation, gabion work, or backfill shall be replaced or repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the contractor's expense. The work shall be scheduled so that the fabric is not exposed to ultraviolet light more than the manufacturer's recommendations or five days, whichever is Less. 54 LAWN MAINTENANCE SPECIFICATIONS 54.1 SCOPE To remove trash and debris from landscape and paved area; maintenance and fertilization of plant beds and landscape materials; maintenance, repair, and operation of irrigation systems; ornamental pest control; palm pruning; maintenance of traffic; and the cleaning of hard surfaces at designated areas. The Contractor is to work with the City in coordinating maintenance activities and reporting irregularities in the work zone. The Contractor(s) will provide the labor and materials required to maintain the landscaped street medians including: • Traffic safety and Maintenance of Traffic; • Trash and debris removal from the job site; • Removal of weeds in landscaped areas and hard surfaces; • Proper trimming and pruning of landscape plants and palms; • Proper fertilization and pest control of landscape and palms (may be subcontracted); • Irrigation service and repair; • Mulch replacement; • Cleaning of hard surfaces; and the • Reporting of irregularities at the job site. 54.2 SCHEDULING OF WORK The Contractor(s) shall accomplish all landscape maintenance required under the contract between the hours of 6:30 a.m. and 7:00 p.m. Monday through Saturday, excluding observed holidays. The City may grant, on an individual basis, permission to perform contract maintenance at other hours. All work shall be completed in a continuous manner, that is the cleanup, weeding, trimming, etc., be completed before leaving the job site. SECTION IV Page 120 of 134 5/15/2012 1 I Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.3 WORK METHODS 54.3.1 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULING The Contractor(s) will adhere to a work schedule provided by the City (see Level of Service). Any variations to that schedule, requested by either party, must be approved, either verbally or in writing by an authorized representative of the other party. 54.3.2 DUTIES PER SERVICE VISIT The contractor(s) shall provide the following service at each scheduled visit to the designated location: e 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 54.4 LITTER Remove trash and debris from the area to be maintained. Proper disposal of collected trash and debris is a requirement of the contractor. Extraordinary amounts of debris caused by hurricanes, tornadoes, vandalism, etc., would be the responsibility of the City to clean up. The contractor should report such accumulations of debris when they are encountered. Bids for the extraordinary cleanup from the contractor would be considered. 54.5 VISUAL CHECK The site should be checked for irregularities, such as irrigation leaks, vehicle damage, dead or damaged plant material, vandalism, etc., which should be reported to the City within 24 hours after providing the service. 54.6 PLANT TRIMMING AND PALM PRUNING All plant material should be trimmed in a manner that promotes the natural shape and mature size of the particular specie. Trimming should be performed at intervals that will maintain plants in a neat appearance. Trimming should be performed to promote fullness of the plants, while maintaining height restrictions in Clear Sight Zones as established on the landscape plans. Plants shall be kept trimmed to the back of curb. Brown foliage shall be removed from Liriope. Palm pruning to be performed at least once per year, preferably in late June or July following flower formation, according to the following specifications: 54.7 PHOENIX SPECIES (CANARY DATE, INDIA DATE, PYGMY DATE, ETC.) Remove all descending fronds, to the base of the frond; all parallel and ascending fronds are to remain in order to leave a full, rounded head; seed heads may remain, but remove old faded heads that are encountered in the pruning process; remove loose frond boots; remove vegetation; such as strangler figs, Brazilian Pepper, Asparagus fern, etc., growing in the frond boots or on the trunk. Provide the rounded, classic cut on all Medjool palm boots. No climbing spikes allowed on palms. 54.8 DEBRIS REMOVAL All debris from pruning process is to be removed from the job site and disposed of by the contractor. Work sites should be left in a clean and neat appearance upon completion. SECTION IV Page 121 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.9 TRAFFIC CONTROL Proper and safe work zones in vehicular traffic areas are to be set up and maintained by the contractor, according to the attached Maintenance of Traffic specifications. 54.10 PEDESTRIAN SAFETY Contractor is responsible for maintaining safe work zones in areas where pedestrian and park users are present. The City reserves the right to limit the hours of operation in certain high pedestrian use areas. 54.11 PLANT FERTILIZATION All tree and plant material should be fertilized with the appropriate amount of 20 -6 -12 sulfur coated, slow release, ornamental fertilizer, three times per year. Applications should be made in mid - February, early June, and mid - September, for the first two years. Fertilizer types and amounts will change with requirements of maturing landscape materials. 54.12 WEED REMOVAL IN LANDSCAPED AREA Weeds should be removed on a regular basis in order to keep them from being visibly noticeable. Weed control with the use of appropriate herbicides is allowable, given they are properly applied by a certified applicator. Herbicide damage to landscape material will be remedied by contractor at his /her expense. 54.13 MULCH CONDITION Should be maintained at a thickness that will discourage weed growth as well as help retain soil moisture, usually 3 inches. 54.14 IRRIGATION SERVICE AND REPAIR Should be performed at each visit to assure the systems proper operation and timing.. Drip tubing should be kept covered with mulch. Timer should be checked for proper time of day and operating schedule. Leaks or breaks in the system should be repaired before the next scheduled system running time. All repairs which will be charged at $20.00 or more must be approved in advance by the city. Minor repairs, less than $20.00, should be billed to the City in addition to the monthly maintenance fee. 54.15 LAWN AND ORNAMENTAL PEST CONTROL Should be performed by a properly licensed and certified applicator to keep pest populations at a less than damaging level. Landscape materials lost to or extensively damaged by pests will be replaced by the contractor at the contractor's expense. Diazinon products are not to be used on City properties. 54.16 PALM FERTILIZATION Apply three pounds of Magnesium sulfate and one pound of Potassium evenly, per tree, across the root zone (typically within the dripline), annually in early February. SECTION IV Page 122 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 54.17 FREEZE PROTECTION The City will provide a freeze /frost protection fabric for the Contractor to install over freeze /frost sensitive plants (Lantana and Pentas). The covering material will be stored at a City facility (yet to be determined). Contractor will remove the covering material from storage and install over the sensitive plants, securely fastening edges of the material to the ground per manufacturer's directions. The City will furnish metal pins needed for securing fabric to the ground. The City will notify the Contractor one (1) day or twenty -four (24) hours minimum prior to the need to protect plant material. After uses, the Contractor will prepare the fabric for storage and return it to the designated City facility. Protective covering shall be removed the following afternoon or remain in place as directed by the City. The City shall notify the Contractor by 11:00 a.m. about removing the cover or keeping it in place due to continued freezing temperatures. The City may cancel the freeze protection event at any time prior to the end of the scheduled installation day (5:00 p.m.) The Contractor will be compensated for the number of hours mobilization or on -site work at the contracted rate per man -hour unit price. The Contractor shall provide a unit price for the installation and removal of the covering fabric on a per event basis, as well as an hourly rate per employee required. The City and contractor will coordinate appropriate irrigation operations with weather conditions. Should freeze /frost damage occur, the Contractor shall perform remedial work as per unit basis, as directed by the City. 54.18 LEVEL OF SERVICE This location is to be serviced weekly. Repairs to damage or vandalism to be made within 7 working days of reported irregularity. Weekly visits should occur no closer than six and no further than ten calendar days apart. 54.19 COMPLETION OF WORK Within 24 hours of completing work the contractor shall notify the supervisor assigned to monitor the contract either in person or by phone of said completion. It is acceptable to leave a phone message. However, to make certain the message is received, it is advisable to call between 6:30 a.m. — 7:30 a.m. or 2:30 p.m. — 3:00 p.m. 54.20 INSPECTION AND APPROVAL Upon receiving notification from the Contractor, the City shall inspect the serviced location the following business day. If, upon inspection, the work specified has not been completed, the City shall contact the Contractor to indicate the necessary corrective measures. The Contractor will be given 48 hours from this notification to make appropriate corrections. If the work has been completed successfully then the City will pay for services billed. 54.21 SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1. This location will be newly installed and under warranty by the installer for a six month period on plants and 12 month warranty on palms. Landscape installer will coordinate irrigation operation with the Maintenance contractor to assure adequate irrigation to the landscape materials. Installer will also be responsible for the untying of palm heads /fronds as he feels appropriate. 2. All listed acreage or square footage figures are estimates. SECTION IV Page 123 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 3. All maintenance shall be performed in a good and workmanlike manner, consistent with trade practices and standards which prevail in the industry. 4. The Contractor shall be responsible for damage to any plant material or site feature caused by the Contractor or his /her employees. The Contractor shall be notified in writing of the specific nature of the damage and cost of repair. The City shall, at its option, invoice the Contractor for the payment, or reduce by the amount of the repairs the next regular payment to the Contractor. 5. Occasionally circumstances (standing water, prolonged inclement weather, parked vehicles, etc.) may make all or portions of a location unserviceable during the regular schedule. The Contractor shall notify the City Supervisor of such occurrences, and shall schedule to perform the required maintenance to the location as soon as the pertaining circumstances are relieved. 55 MILLING OPERATIONS 55.1 EQUIPMENT, CONSTRUCTION & MILLED SURFACE Unless otherwise noted in the specs, plans or this Article, the milling operation shall be performed in accordance with Section 327 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). The Contractor shall notify the Project Inspector a minimum of 24 hours in advance of all milling. 55.2 ADDITIONAL MILLING REQUIREMENTS 1. If the milling machine is equipped with preheating devices, the contractor is responsible to secure any necessary permits, and for complying with all local, state and federal environmental regulations governing operation of this type of equipment. 2. All milled surfaces must be repaved within seven days from the time it was milled, unless otherwise noted in the contract documents. 3. Prior to paving, all milled areas shall be swept with a Municipal type sweeper either of the vacuum or the mechanical type, that picks up and hauls off, dust and dirt (the Broom Tractor way of sweeping is not be permitted). The sweeper must be equipped with its own water supply for pre- wetting to minimize dust. Moreover, the Contractor shall sweep debris off of sidewalks, driveways and curbs in addition to the roadways before leaving the job site. 4. In cases where concrete valley swales are present, the adjoining pavement shall be milled to allow for the new asphalt grade to be flush with the concrete surface. 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing any asphalt that remains in the curb line and/or median curbs after the milling operation of a street is complete. The cost of this removal shall be included in the bid item for milling. 6. All radius returns on streets to be milled shall also be milled unless otherwise directed by the Engineer, with payment to be included in the bid item for milling. 7. Any leveling or base replacement required after milling shall be applied to sections of the road as noted on the plans, or directed by the Engineer, per Section 330 of F'DOT's 2000 Standard Specifications for S -Type resurfacing projects or Section 330 (latest edition) for SECTION IV Page 124 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications superpave resurfacing projects. The cost shall be included in the per ton unit cost for asphalt, unless otherwise noted in the project scope and plans. 8. Any roadway base material exposed as a result of the milling operation shall be primed that same day (unless otherwise directed by the Engineer) per Section 300 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Repairs required to said base that result from a failure to place the prime in a timely manner shall be done to the City's satisfaction, and at the Contractor's expense. No paving of the exposed base can commence until the City approves the repaired base. The cost of said prime shall be included in the bid item for milling. 9. Prior to the placement of asphalt, the face of all curbs and driveways shall be tacked after the milling operation is complete. 55.3 SALVAGEABLE MATERIALS All surplus existing materials resulting from milling operations shall remain the property of the City. The transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials shall be performed by the Contractor. The Contractor shall contact the Public Services Division at (727) 562 -4950 to schedule delivery of material. 55.4 DISPOSABLE MATERIALS All surplus materials not claimed by the City shall become the property of the Contractor. The Contractor shall dispose of the material in a timely manner and in accordance with all regulatory requirements in areas provided by the Contractor at no additional expense to the City. 55.5 ADJUSTMENT AND LOCATION OF UNDERGROUND UTILITIES All utilities and related structures requiring adjustment shall be located and adjusted by their owners at the owner's expense. The Contractor shall arrange his schedule to allow utility owners the time required for such adjustments (minimum 48 hours notice per State Statute). All utility adjustments shall be completed prior to the commencement of milling and resurfacing operations. 55.6 ADJUSTMENT OF UTILITY MANHOLES The necessary adjustments of sanitary sewer and stormwater utility manholes and appurtenances shall be accomplished by the Contractor in accordance with Section IV, Article 23.7 of the City's Technical Specifications. 55.7 TYPES OF MILLING There are two types of milling used by the City: A. Wedge — This will consist of milling a six foot wide strip along the curb line of the pavement adjacent to the curb so the new asphalt will align with the original curb height and pavement cross section. B. Full Width — This will consist of milling the entire roadway (i.e. curb line /edge of pavement to curb line /edge of pavement). All existing horizontal and vertical geometry shall remain unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Engineer. SECTION IV Page 125 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 55.8 MILLING OF INTERSECTIONS Intersections, as well as other areas (including radius returns) are to be milled and repaved to restore and /or improve the original drainage characteristics. Said work should extend approximately 50 to 100 feet in both directions from the low point of the existing swale. 55.9 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The quantity to be paid for will be the area milled, in square yards, completed and accepted. 55.10 BASIS OF PAYMENT The unit price for milling shall include: all materials, preparation, hauling, transporting and stockpiling of salvageable materials, disposal of all surplus material, any required milling of radius returns and intersections, prime and /or tack coat either required or placed at Engineer's discretion, removal of asphalt from curbs, sweeping, labor, equipment, and all incidentals necessary to complete the milling in accordance with the plans and specifications. 56 CLEARING AND GRUBBING The work included in this specification includes the removal and disposal of all structures, appurtenances, asphalt, concrete, curbs, walls, trees, roots, vegetation, boulders, conduits, poles, posts, pipes, inlets, brush, stumps, debris and other obstructions resting on or protruding through the ground surface necessary to prepare the area for construction. Clearing and grubbing shall be performed in accordance with Section 110 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). Unless otherwise specified in the contract documents, the Contractor shall take ownership of all removed material and dispose of them off -site in accordance with all Local, State and Federal Requirements. 56.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement shall be either a lump sum quantity or the number of acres cleared and grubbed as specified on the plans or directed by the Engineer. 56.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for clearing and grubbing shall include: all removal and disposal of materials and structures as well as all materials, hauling, equipment, tools, labor, leveling of terrain, landscape trimming and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. 57 RIPRAP The work included in this specification includes the construction of either sand - cement or rubble riprap as shown on the plans. The riprap shall be constructed per Section 530 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition). 57.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT The basis of measurement for riprap shall be the volume of sand used in cubic yards for sand - cement, or the dry weight in tons for rubble. SECTION IV Page 126 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 57.2 BASIS OF PAYMENT The pay item for sand - cement riprap shall include: all materials, testing, labor, grout, hauling, equipment, excavation, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of sand - cement and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. The pay item for rubble riprap shall include: all materials, required bedding stone, dressing and shaping for placement of bedding stone, filter fabric, testing, hauling, excavating, backfill, dressing and shaping for placement of rubble, and all incidentals necessary to complete the work. No payment will be granted if concrete or stone that exists on -site is used as rubble riprap. 58 TREATMENT PLANT SAFETY This article applies to all City projects located at one of the City's Wastewater Treatment Plants (WWTP) or Potable Water Reservoirs. 58.1 HAZARD POTENTIAL The Contractor shall be aware that hazardous materials are used at the WWTP's and the water reservoirs. These may include sodium hypochlorite, gaseous chlorine, sulfur dioxide and ammonia. Potential safety hazards associated with these substances include: • An accidental spill or release can impair respiratory functions and result in severe burns to the skin and eyes. At the pre- construction conference, the contractor will be provided with a copy of the City of Clearwater Public Utilities Department Emergency Response Plan, and a copy of the applicable Material Safety Data Sheets. All employees of the contractor and sub - contractor assigned to this job shall be familiar with the content of these documents. 58.2 REQUIRED CONTRACTOR TRAINING Prior to issuance of a notice to proceed, the contractor must submit documentation regarding employee safety training relating to the items in Section A above. The documentation must include: • Verification that all employees assigned to this job have received and understood training in the proper work practices necessary to safely perform the job while working around gaseous chlorine and sulfur dioxide gas. • The date of the training, and • The means used to verify that the employee understood the training. 59 TRAFFIC SIGNAL EQUIPMENT AND MATERIALS All traffic signal work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications (Sections 603 through 699), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes, but is not limited to, the following items: all necessary equipment, materials, guaranties, acceptance procedures, signal timings, field tests, grounding, conduit, signal and interconnect cable, span wire assemblies, pull and junction boxes, electrical power service assemblies, poles, signal assemblies, pedestrian assemblies, inductive loop detectors, SECTION IV Page 127 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications pedestrian detectors, traffic controller assemblies, controller cabinets and accessories, removal of existing traffic signal equipment, and internally illuminated signs. All traffic signal installations shall be mast arms and conform to the requirements of FDOT's Mast Arm Assembly standard, and shall be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm calculations, as well as the geotechnical report, shall also be signed and sealed by a professional engineer registered in the state of Florida. All mast arm colors shall be determined and approved by the City prior to ordering from the manufacturer. All traffic signal indicators for vehicles and pedestrians shall be LED's and, approved by both the City and FDOT. In addition to this, all pedestrian signal indicators shall utilize countdown features. Contractor changes to the operation of an existing signal is PROHIBITED unless directed by the City's Traffic Engineering Division. 59.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 60 SIGNING AND MARKING All signing and marking work shall be performed per the latest edition of FDOT's Standard Specifications, unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. This specification includes the following work: RPM's (Section 706), painted traffic stripes and markings (Section 710), thermoplastic stripes and markings (Section 711) and tubular delineators /flex posts (Sections 705 and 972). The Contractor is responsible to ensure that striping is correctly placed. Errors in striping or markings shall be "blacked -out" with paint, unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. No payment will be made for these incorrect or "blacked -out" areas. Omissions in striping or markings shall be corrected to the City's satisfaction prior to any payment being made. 60.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, preparation, materials and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. 61 ROADWAY LIGHTING All roadway lighting shall be constructed per Sections 715 and 992 of FDOT's Standard Specifications (latest edition), unless otherwise specified in the contract documents and plans. 61.1 BASIS OF MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT The basis of measurement and payment shall be specified in the contract documents and /or plans and shall include all equipment, materials, testing and incidentals required to complete the work per the plans. SECTION IV Page 128 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 62 TREE PROTECTION 62.1 TREE BARRICADES A. A protective barrier shall be placed around all protected trees and palms prior to land preparation or construction activities within or adjacent to the work zone, including all staging and /or lay down areas. Protective barriers shall be installed as follows: 1. At or greater than the full dripline of all species of Mangroves and Cabbage Palms. 2. At or greater than the full dripline or all protected native pine trees and other conifer species. 3. At or greater than two- thirds of the dripline of all other protected species 4. At or greater than the full dripline of trees within a specimen tree stand. B. Protective barriers are to be constructed using no less than two -inch lumber for upright posts. Upright posts are to be at least four feet in length with a minimum of one foot anchored in the ground. Upright posts are to be placed at a maximum distance of eight feet apart. Horizontal rails are to be constructed using no less than one inch by four -inch lumber and shall be securely attached to the top of the upright post. The project City's representative must approve any variation from the above requirements. C. Whenever a protective barrier is required, it shall be in place until all construction activity is terminated. The area within the barrier limits shall remain undisturbed by any activity during construction. Native ground cover and understory vegetation existing within the barriers shall remain throughout construction. Exotic plant species may only be removed by manual labor utilizing hand tools or by other means if authorized in writing by the City's representative. D. Prior to the erection of any required protective barrier, all surface foreign material, trash or debris shall be removed from the area enclosed by the barrier, and after erection of the barrier no such material or litter shall be permitted to remain within the protected area. No equipment, chemicals, soil deposits or construction materials shall be placed within such protective barriers. E. No signs, building permits, wires, or other attachments of any kind shall be attached to any protected tree or palm. F. At all times, due care shall be taken to protect the critical root zone of trees protected by this section, and root pruning requirements shall apply to such trees. 62.2 ROOT PRUNING A. Where proposed construction improvements involve excavation and /or impacts to the critical root zone of protected trees, the Contractor shall be required to have an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist perform, or directly supervise root pruning to reduce the impacts of construction. The critical root zone is equivalent to the tree's dripline. Prior to any clearing, grubbing or excavation activities, the affected roots must be severed by clean pruning cuts at the point where grubbing or excavation impacts the root system. Roots can be pruned utilizing specified root pruning equipment designed for that purpose or by hand digging a trench and pruning roots with a pruning saw, chain saw or other equipment designed for tree pruning. Root pruning by trenching equipment or excavation equipment is strictly prohibited. Roots located in the critical root zone that will be impacted by SECTION IV Page 129 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications construction activities shall be pruned to a minimum depth of 18 inches below existing grade or to the depth of the proposed impact if less than 18 inches from existing grade. Tim Kurtz, Senior Landscape Architect is the City's Representative on Engineering Department projects for root pruning issues and can be reached at (727) 562 -4737, or through the construction inspector assigned to the project. B. Root pruning shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an :International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. C. Any proposed root pruning trenches shall be identified on site (i.e. staked or painted) inspected and approved by the City's representative prior to actual root pruning. D. Root pruning shall be performed as far in advance of other construction activities as is feasible, but at a minimum shall be performed prior to ANY impacts to the soil. Associated tree protection measures should be implemented upon completion of said root pruning. E. If there is a likelihood of excessive wind and /or rain exceptional care shall be taken on any root pruning activities. F. Root pruning shall be limited to a minimum of ten inches per one inch of the tnmk diameter from the tree base. Any exception must be approved by the City's representative prior to said root pruning. G. Roots shall be cut cleanly, as far from the trunk of the tree as possible. Root pruning shall be done to a minimum depth of 18" from existing grade, or to the depth of the disturbance if less than 18 ". H. Root pruning shall be performed using a Doscocil Root Cutting Machine or equivalent. Alternate equipment or techniques must be approved by the City's representative, prior to any work adjacent to trees to be preserved. I. Root pruning shall be completed, inspected and accepted prior to the commencement of any excavation or other impacts to the critical root zones of trees to be protected. J. Excavations in an area where root are present shall not cause the tearing or ripping of tree roots. Roots must first be cleanly severed prior to continuing with the excavation, or tunneled around to prevent damage to the root. K. Tree roots shall not be exposed to drying out. Root ends shall be covered with native soil or burlap and kept moist until final backfill or final grades has been established. L. When deemed appropriate (e.g., during periods of drought) the City representative may require a temporary irrigation system be utilized in the remaining critical root zones of root pruned trees. M. When underground utility lines are to be installed within the critical root zone, the root pruning requirement may be waived if the lines are installed via tunneling or directional boring as opposed to open trenching. 62.3 PROPER TREE PRUNING A. All tree pruning and /or root pruning on existing trees to remain shall only be performed by or under the direct supervision of an International Society of Arboriculture (ISA) certified arborist. Furthermore, all tree work shall conform to the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 2001, American National Standard for tree care operations — Tree, Shrub and other Woody Plant Maintenance — Standard practices (pruning) ANSI A -300. SECTION IV Page 130 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications B. Proper pruning techniques for all lateral branches of protected trees are required. Flush cuts (pruning cuts that remove the branch collar) and stub cuts (cuts that leave a stub on the tree) are improper techniques. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. C. No protected tree shall have more than 30 percent of its foliage removed. D. No protected tree shall be topped, hat racked or lion- tailed. Any protected tree that has been improperly pruned will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. E. Tree Trunks and limbs shall be protected. The use of tree spikes or other devices that damage trunk and bark tissue on protected trees shall be prohibited. Any protected tree that has been damaged in such a manner will not be recognized as a tree left on the project in a healthy growing condition, and will require replacement consistent with the current City Codes and Ordinances. 63 PROJECT WEB PAGES 63.1 WEB PAGES DESIGN If requested by the City, Engineer shall design the Project Web Site in accordance with the current City Web Site standards and styles. Project Web Site should include general project information as: Project Name & Number, Scope description, Location, Schedule, and Project Contacts. Note: Occasionally City modifies the general design of the City's Web Site, and the Engineer shall consult the City Webmaster for the current requirements, before designing or updating the Project Web Pages. 63.2 WEB ACCESSIBILITY GUIDELINES Project Web Pages should conform to the W3C Web Accessibility Guidelines and US Section 508 guidelines whenever possible: http://www.w3.org/TR/1999/WAI-WEBCONTENT- 19990505/ http: / /www.section508.gov/ In particular, use of variable -width tables, user - adjustable /relative font sizes, ALT text for images, CSS whenever possible, etc. Accessibility should be a priority over design /aesthetics. 63.3 THE SUN AND WAVES LOGO AND ITS USE The City's Sun and Waves logo should be used for everyday business, on all print and electronic material. It should be used on all internal correspondence, brochures, advertising, vehicles, apparel and signage. It should be used only in the manner presented here, in the proportion shown here, with no alterations. It should not be condensed, lengthened, or otherwise distorted to fit a space. The logo is approved for use by city departments, and is not to be used by outside vendors without the permission of the City Manager, Assistant City Manager or Public Communications office. Electronic versions of the logo should be obtained from the Public Communications. This is for internal use only. SECTION IV Page 131 of 134 5/15/2012 Section IV — Technical Specifications 63.4 MAPS AND GRAPHICS Use of maps and graphics is recommended to illustrate the project; only approved graphics should be posted to the Project Web Pages. 63.5 INTERACTIVE FORMS The site should also include an interactive form or other options to allow Public's input sent back to the City regarding the Project. 63.6 POSTING The site should be presented to the City's Webmaster for review and posting to the City's Web Server. Posting of the Project Web Pages to a different than City's Web server, if approved, should be coordinated with the City's Webmaster for resolving all accessibility and conformity issues. 63.7 WEB PAGES UPDATES Unless otherwise specified and agreed Engineer is responsible for keeping the posted Web Pages up -to -date, by sending revisions and updates through the City Project Manager to the City's Webmaster for posting. 64 OVERHEAD ELECTRIC LINE CLEARANCE 64.1 CLEARANCE OPTIONS When working in the vicinity of overhead power lines the Contractor shall utilize one of the following options: Option 1 - Having the power lines de- energized and visibly grounded. Option 2 - Maintaining a minimum distance of 20 feet of clearance for voltages up to 350 kV an 50 feet of clearance for voltages more than 350 kV. Option 3 - Determine the line voltage and provide clearance in accordance with the table included in Section 64.2. SECTION IV Page 132 of 134 5/15/2012 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Section IV — Technical Specifications 64.2 REQUIRED MINIMUM CLEARANCE VOLTAGE (nominal, kV, alternating current) MINIMUM CLEARANCE DISTANCE (feet) Up to 50 10 Over 50 to 200 15 Over 20 to 350 20 Over 350 to 500 25 Over 500 to 750 35 Over 750 to 1,000 45 Over 1000 (as established by the utility owner /operator or registered professional engineer who is a qualified person with respect to electric power transmission and distribution) Note: The value that follows "to" is up to and includes that value. For example, over 50 to 200 means up to and including 200kV. SECTION IV Page 133 of 134 5/15/2012 SECTION IVA CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION SUPPLEMENTAL TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (PROJECT No. 12- 0025 -UT) PREPARED FOR: CITY OF CLEARWATER ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT 100 SOUTH MYRTLE AVENUE CLEARWATER, FL 33756 PREPARED BY: Kin ENGINEERINGASSOC1ATES, INC. KING ENGINEERING ASSOCIATES, INC. 4921 MEMORIAL HIGHWAY ONE MEMORIAL CENTER, SUITE 300 TAMPA, FL 33634 BID DOCUMENTS October 2014 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 1 1 1 1 - ii - 06/24/2014 I 1 Index of Technical Specifications Sign and Seal Sheet for CITY OF CLEARWATER NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION (Project No. 12-0025-UT) SPECIFICATIONS Thomas A. Traina, P.E. DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005, 01014, 01015, 01030, 01040, 01050, 01065, 01090, 01150, 01152, 01153, 01200, 01300, 01310, 01340, 01385, 01410, 01500, 01505, 01510, 01600, 01625, 01640, 01670, 01700, 01710, 01720, 01730, 01740, 01820 DIVISION 02 SITEWORK Unless otherwise specified herein, all site work and items for which a specification is not provided herein or within the City of Clearwater Standard Specifications (Section IV) shall be in accordance with the FDOT Standard Specifications for Road and Bridge Construction, 2010 edition. 02062, 02064, 02140, 02221, 02485, 02626 DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03600, 03740 DIVISION 05 METALS 05500 DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06600 DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09865, 09900 DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11225, 11310 DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13615, 13630 DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15010, 15062, 15064, 15080, 15094, 15100 �'�ORIOP �r tsiit0',�� Index of Technical Specifications Sign and Seal Sheet for CITY OF CLEARWATER NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIER NO. 5-8 REHABILITATION PROJECT (Project No. 12-0025-UT) SPECIFICATIONS Carastro & Associates, Inc. DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16010, 16110, 16120, 16135, 16142, 16143, 16170, 16190, 16195, 16452, 16460, 16470, 16481, 16483, 16620, 16775 ���AAAtiS. t CA1p11�i /11/, No. 45830 * -0 ; * ;XI: =; �J ', STATE OF S16NAL \\�� `416/1/0210\ 1 1 A 1 TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01014 SUMMARY OF WORK 01015 CONTROL OF WORK 01030 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01040 COORDINATION 01050 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01065 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01090 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01150 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01152 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01153 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01200 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 01300 SUBMITTALS 01310 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01340 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01385 COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01410 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01500 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01505 MOBILIZATION 01510 TEMPORARY UTILITIES - iii - 06/24/2014 01600 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01625 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01640 QUALITY CONTROL 01670 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01700 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01710 CLEANING 01720 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01730 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01740 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01820 TRAINING DIVISION 02 SITEWORK 02062 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 02064 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT 02140 TEMPORARY DEWATERING 02221 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02485 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02626 TEMPORARY LINE STOP SYSTEM DIVISION 03 CONCRETE 03600 GROUT 03740 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE - iv - 06/24/2014 DIVISION 05 METALS 05500 MISCELLANEOUS METAL DIVISION 06 WOOD AND PLASTICS 06600 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS DIVISION 09 FINISHES 09865 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 09900 PAINTING DIVISION 11 EQUIPMENT 11225 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11310 RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS DIVISION 13 SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION 13615 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13630 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM DIVISION 15 MECHANICAL 15010 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15062 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15094 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15100 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES - v - 06/24/2014 DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL 16010 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 16110 RACEWAYS 16120 WIRES AND CABLES 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, RACEWAYS 16142 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 16143 WIRING DEVICES 16170 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 16452 GROUNDING 16460 TRANSFORMERS 16470 PANELBOARDS 16481 MOTORS 16483 MOTOR STARTERS 16620 SURGE SUPPRESSION 16775 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES - vi - 06/24/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01005 2 3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Description 10 11 The work to be completed consists of the furnishing of all labor, materials and 12 equipment, and the performance of all Work included in this Contract. At all 13 times during the project the Wastewater Treatment Plant (WVVTP) shall remain 14 in service. Throughout the project, the Contractor shall cooperate fully with 15 plant operations staff to minimize disruption to facility operations. No facility or 16 structure shall be taken out of service, except those specifically scheduled to 17 be taken out of service, without the prior written approval of the Owner or 18 Engineer. Plant operations and regulatory compliance take priority over and 19 may impact the construction schedule. 20 21 B. Work Included 22 23 The Contractor shall furnish all labor, superintendence, materials, plant, 24 power, Tight, heat, fuel, water, tools, appliances, equipment, supplies and other 25 means of construction necessary or proper for performing and completing the 26 Work. He shall perform and complete the Work in the manner best calculated 27 to promote rapid construction consistent with safety of life and property and to 28 the satisfaction of the Engineer, and in strict accordance with the Contract 29 Documents. The Contractor shall clean up the Work and maintain it during 30 and after construction, until accepted, and shall do all work and pay all costs 31 incidental thereto. He shall repair or restore all structures and property that 32 may be damaged or disturbed during performance of the Work. 33 34 The cost of incidental work described in these General Requirements, for 35 which there are no specific Contract Items, shall be considered as part of the 36 general cost of doing the work and shall be included in the prices for the 37 various Contract Items. No additional payment will be made therefore. 38 39 The Contractor shall provide and maintain such modern plant, tools, and 40 equipment as may be necessary, in the opinion of the Engineer, to perform in 41 a satisfactory and acceptable manner all the work required by this Contract. 42 Only equipment of established reputation and proven efficiency shall be used. 43 The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the adequacy of his 44 workmanship, materials and equipment, prior approval of the Engineer 45 notwithstanding. 46 47 C. Public Utility Installation and Structures GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -1 06/24/2014 2 Public utility installations and structures shall be understood to include all 3 poles, tracks, pipes, wires, conduits, house service connections, vaults, 4 manholes and all other appurtenances and facilities pertaining thereto whether 5 owned or controlled by the Owner, other governmental bodges or privately 6 owned by individuals, firms or corporations, used to serve the public with 7 transportation, traffic control, gas, electricity, telephone, sewerage, drainage, 8 water or other public or private property which may be affected by the work I 9 shall be deemed included hereunder. 10 11 The Contractor shall protect all public utility installations and structures from 12 damage during the work. Access across any buried public utility installation, 13 or structure, shall be made only in such locations and by means approved by 14 the Engineer. The Contractor shall so arrange his operations as to avoid any I15 damage to these facilities. All required protective devices and construction 16 shall be provided by the Contractor at his expense. All existing public utilities 17 damaged by the Contractor, which are shown on the Plans or have been 18 located in the field by the utility, shall be repaired by the Contractor, at his II 19 expense, as directed by the Engineer. No separate payment shall be made 20 for such protection or repairs to public utility installations or structures. 21 I 22 Public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the Owner or 23 other governmental body, which are shown on the Plans to be removed, 24 relocated, replaced or rebuilt by the Contractor shall be considered as a part of I 25 the general cost of doing the Work and shall be included in the prices bid for 26 the various contract items. No separate payment shall be made therefore. 27 28 Where public utility installations or structures owned or controlled by the 29 Owner or other governmental body are encountered during the course of the 30 Work, and are not indicated on the Plans or in the Specifications, and when, in 31 the opinion of the Engineer, removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding is 32 necessary to complete the work under this Contract, such work shall be 33 accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction, or such work may be ordered, in I 34 writing by the Engineer, for the Contractor to accomplish. If such work is 35 accomplished by the utility having jurisdiction it will be carried out expeditiously 36 and the Contractor shall give full cooperation to permit the utility to complete I 37 the removal, relocation, replacement or rebuilding as required. If such work is 38 accomplished by the Contractor, it will be in accordance with the General and 39 Supplemental General Conditions. 40 41 The Contractor shall give written notice to Owner and other governmental 42 utility departments and other owners of public utilities of the locations of his I 43 proposed construction operations, at least forty-eight hours in advance of 44 breaking ground in any area or on any unit of the work. 45 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -2 06/24/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The maintenance, repair, removal, relocation or rebuilding of public utility 2 installations and structures, when accomplished by the Contractor as herein 3 provided, shall be done by methods approved by the Engineer. 4 5 1.02 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS 6 7 A. Drawings 8 9 When obtaining data and information from the Drawings, figures shall be used 10 in preference to scaled dimensions, and large scale drawings in preference to 11 small scale drawings. 12 13 B. Copies Furnished to Contractor 14 15 The Engineer may incorporate the addenda into a set of "conformed" drawings 16 and specifications, and may provide one electronic copy of each to the 17 Contractor. The conformed drawings and specifications shall not supersede 18 the Contract Documents provided to the Contractor. It shall be the 19 responsibility of the Contractor to check that the conformed drawings and 20 specifications properly include all revisions /addenda to the Contract 21 Documents. The Contractor shall furnish each of the subcontractors, 22 manufacturers, and suppliers such copies of the Contract Documents as may 23 be required for their work. Additional copies of the Drawings and 24 Specifications, when requested, may be furnished to the Contractor at cost of 25 reproduction. 26 27 C. Supplementary Drawings 28 29 When, in the opinion of the Engineer, it becomes necessary to explain more 30 fully the work to be done or to illustrate the work further or to show any 31 changes which may be required, Drawings known as Supplementary 32 Drawings, with Specifications pertaining thereto, will be prepared by the 33 Engineer and copies thereof will be given to the Contractor and the Owner. 34 35 D. Contractor to Check Drawings and Data 36 37 The Contractor shall verify all dimensions, quantities and details shown on the 38 Drawings, Supplementary Drawings, Schedules, Specifications or other data 39 received from the Engineer and shall notify him of any errors, omissions, 40 conflicts and discrepancies found therein. The Contractor shall submit to the 41 Engineer a Request for Information (RFI), consecutively numbered, detailing 42 all conflicts and discrepancies. Engineer shall promptly provide a response to 43 all RFIs submitted by the Contractor. Contractor will not be allowed to take 44 advantage of any conflicts and discrepancies, as full instructions will be 45 furnished by the Engineer, should such conflicts and discrepancies be 46 discovered. 47 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -3 06/24/2014 1 1 1 E. Specifications 2 3 The Technical Specifications generally consist of three parts: General, 4 Products, and Execution. The General Section contains General 5 Requirements that govern the work. Products and Execution modify and I 6 supplement these by detailed requirements for the work and shall always 7 govern whenever there appears to be a conflict. 8 9 F. Intent 10 11 All Work called for in the Specifications applicable to this Contract, but not I12 shown on the Drawings in their present form, or vice versa, shall be of like 13 effect as if shown or mentioned in both. Work not specified in either the 14 Drawings or in the Specifications, but involved in carrying out their intent or in 15 the complete and proper execution of the work, is required and shall be I 16 performed by the Contractor as though it were specifically delineated or 17 described. 18 1 19 The apparent silence of the Specifications as to any detail, or the apparent 20 omission from them of a detailed description concerning any work to be done 21 and materials to be furnished, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best 22 general practice is to prevail and that only material and workmanship of the 23 best quality is to be used, and interpretation of these Specifications shall be 24 made upon that basis. I 25 26 The inclusion of the Related Requirements (or work specified elsewhere) in 27 the General part of the specifications is only for the convenience of the I 28 Contractor, and shall not be interpreted as a complete list of related 29 Specification Sections. 30 I 31 1.03 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT 32 33 A. Manufacturer 34 35 The names of proposed manufacturers, suppliers and dealers who are to 36 furnish materials, fixtures, equipment, appliances or other fittings shall be I 37 submitted to the Engineer for approval. Such approval must be obtained 38 before shop drawings will be checked. No manufacturer will be approved for 39 any materials to be furnished under this Contract unless he shall be of good I 40 reputation and have a plant of ample capacity. He shall, upon the request of 41 the Engineer, be required to submit evidence that he has manufactured a 42 similar product to the one specified and that it has been previously used for a I 43 like purpose for a sufficient length of time to demonstrate its satisfactory 44 performance. All transactions with the manufacturers or subcontractors shall 45 be through the Contractor, unless the Contractor shall request, in writing to the 1 46 Engineer, that the manufacturer or subcontractor deal directly with the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -4 06/24/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Engineer. Any such transactions shall not in any way release the Contractor 2 from his full responsibility under this Contract. 3 4 Any two or more pieces of material or equipment of the same kind, type or 5 classification, and being used for identical types of service, shall be made by 6 the same manufacturer. 7 8 B. Delivery 9 10 The Contractor shall deliver materials in ample quantities to insure the most 11 speedy and uninterrupted progress of the work so as to complete the work 12 within the allotted time. The Contractor shall also coordinate deliveries in 13 order to avoid delay in, or impediment of, the progress of the work of any 14 related Contractor. 15 16 C. Tools and Accessories 17 18 The Contractor shall, unless otherwise stated in the Contract Documents, 19 furnish with each type, kind or size of equipment, one complete set of suitably 20 marked high grade special tools and appliances that are needed to adjust, 21 operate, maintain or repair the equipment. Such tools and appliances shall be 22 furnished in approved painted steel cases, properly labeled and equipped with 23 good grade cylinder locks and duplicate keys. 24 25 Spare parts shall be furnished as specified. Where spare parts are specified 26 to be "manufacturer's recommended" or "as recommended by the 27 manufacturer", the Contractor shall furnish those spare parts that are normally 28 or commonly recommended by the manufacturer as shown on the 29 manufacturer's readily available literature. 30 31 Each piece of equipment shall be provided with a substantial nameplate, 32 securely fastened in place and clearly inscribed with the manufacturer's name, 33 year of manufacture, serial number, weight and principal rating data. 34 35 D. Installation of Equipment 36 37 The Contractor shall have on hand sufficient proper equipment and machinery 38 of ample capacity to facilitate the work and to handle all emergencies normally 39 encountered in work of this character. 40 41 Equipment shall be erected in a neat and workmanlike manner on the 42 foundations at the locations and elevations shown on the Drawings, unless 43 directed otherwise by the Engineer during installation. All equipment shall be 44 correctly aligned, leveled and adjusted for satisfactory operation and shall be 45 installed so that proper and necessary connections can be made readily 46 between the various units. 47 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -5 06/24/2014 1 1 1 The Contractor shall furnish, install and protect all necessary anchor and 2 attachment bolts and all other appurtenances needed for the installation of the I 3 devices included in the equipment specified. Anchor bolts shall be as 4 approved by the Engineer and made of ample size and strength for the 5 purpose intended. Substantial templates and working drawings for installation I 6 shall be furnished. 7 8 The Contractor shall, at his own expense, furnish all materials and labor for, I9 and shall properly bed in non - shrink grout, each piece of equipment on its 10 supporting base that rests on masonry foundations. Grout shall completely fill 11 the space between the equipment base and the foundation. All metal surfaces 12 coming in contact with concrete or grout shall receive a coat of coal tar epoxy 13 equal to Kop -Coat 300M. 14 15 E. Service of Manufacturer's Representative 1 16 17 The prices for equipment shall include the cost of furnishing a competent and 18 experienced engineer or superintendent who shall represent the manufacturer 1 19 and shall assist the Contractor, when required, to install, adjust, test and place 20 in operation the equipment in conformity with the Contract Documents. 21 I 22 Prior to placing the equipment in operation for testing purposes, the 23 manufacturer shall furnish to the Engineer and Contractor a written Certificate 24 of Proper Installation stating that the equipment has been installed in strict I 25 accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 26 27 After the equipment is placed in operation for testing by the Contractor, such I 28 engineer or superintendent shall make all adjustments and tests required by 29 the Engineer to prove that such equipment is proper and in satisfactory 30 operating condition, and shall instruct/train such personnel as may be I 31 designated by the Owner in the proper operation and maintenance of such 32 equipment. 33 I 34 1.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING 35 36 A. General I 37 38 For tests specified to be made by the Contractor, the testing personnel shall 39 make the necessary inspections and tests and the reports thereof shall be in I 40 such form as will facilitate checking to determine compliance with the Contract 41 Documents. One original, signed copy and one electronic copy of the reports 42 shall be submitted and the authorities' certification thereof must be furnished I43 to the Engineer as a prerequisite for the acceptance of any material or 44 equipment. 45 I46 If in the making of any test of any material or equipment it is ascertained by 47 the Engineer that the material or equipment does not comply with the GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I 01005 -6 06/24/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contract, the Contractor will be notified thereof and he will be directed to 2 refrain from delivering said material or equipment, or to remove it promptly 3 from the site or from the work and replace it with acceptable material, without 4 cost to the Owner. 5 6 Tests of electrical and mechanical equipment and appliances shall be 7 conducted in accordance with recognized test codes of the ANSI, ASME, or 8 the IEEE, except as may otherwise be stated herein. 9 10 The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of equipment 11 during tests and instruction periods and shall neither have nor make any claim 12 for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the time when the Owner 13 formally takes over the operation thereof. 14 15 B. Costs 16 17 All inspection and testing of materials furnished under this Contract will be 18 performed by the Owner or duly authorized inspections engineers or 19 inspection bureaus without cost to the Contractor, unless otherwise expressly 20 specified. 21 22 The cost of shop and field tests of equipment and of certain other tests 23 specifically called for in the Contract Documents shall be borne by the 24 Contractor and such costs shall be deemed to be included in the Contract 25 price. 26 27 Materials and equipment submitted by the Contractor as equivalent to those 28 specified may be tested by the Owner for compliance with the specifications. 29 The Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for the expenditures incurred in 30 making such tests on materials and equipment that are rejected for non - 31 compliance. 32 33 C. Inspection of Materials 34 35 The Contractor shall give notice in writing to the Engineer, sufficiently in 36 advance of his intention to commence the manufacture or preparation of 37 materials especially manufactured or prepared for use in or as part of the 38 permanent construction. Such notice shall contain a request for inspection, 39 the date of commencement and the expected date of completion of the 40 manufacture or preparation of materials. Upon receipt of such notice, the 41 Engineer will arrange to have a representative present at such times during 42 the manufacture as may be necessary to inspect the materials or he will notify 43 the Contractor that the inspection will be made at a point other than the point 44 of manufacture, or he will notify the Contractor that inspection will be waived. 45 The Contractor must comply with these provisions before shipping any 46 material. Such inspection shall not release the Contractor from its GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -7 06/24/2014 1 1 1 responsibility for furnishing materials meeting the requirements of the Contract 2 Documents. 3 4 D. Certificate of Manufacture 5 I 6 When inspection is waived or when the Engineer so requires, the Contractor 7 shall furnish authoritative evidence in the form of Certificates of Manufacture 8 that the materials to be used in the work have been manufactured and tested I 9 in conformity with the Contract Documents. These certificates shall be 10 notarized and shall include copies of the results of physical tests and chemical 11 analyses, where necessary, that have been made directly on the product or on I12 similar products of the manufacturer. 13 14 E. Shop Tests of Operating Equipment I15 16 Each piece of equipment for which pressure, duty, capacity, rating, efficiency, 17 performance, function or special requirements are specified shall be tested in 18 the shop of the maker in a manner that shall conclusively prove that its I 19 characteristics comply fully with the requirements of the Contract Documents. 20 No such equipment shall be shipped to the work until the Engineer notifies the 21 Contractor, in writing, that the results of such tests are acceptable. I 22 23 One hard copy original and one electronic copy of the manufacturer's actual 24 test data and interpreted results thereof, accompanied by a certificate of 25 authenticity sworn to by a responsible official of the manufacturing company, 26 shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval. 27 28 The cost of shop tests and of furnishing manufacturer's preliminary and shop 29 test data of operating equipment shall be borne by the Contractor. 30 I 31 F. Preliminary Field Tests 32 33 As soon as conditions permit, the Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, I 34 and instruments and shall make preliminary field tests of equipment. If the 35 preliminary field tests disclose any equipment furnished under this Contract 36 that does not comply with the requirements of the Contract IDocuments, the I 37 Contractor shall, prior to the acceptance tests, make all changes, adjustments 38 and replacement required. The Contractor shall assist in the preliminary field 39 tests as applicable. I 40 41 G. Final Field Tests 42 I 43 Upon completion of the work and prior to final payment, all equipment and 44 systems installed under this Contract shall be subjected to acceptance tests 45 as specified or required to prove compliance with the Contract Documents. 46 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I 01005 -8 06/24/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 The Contractor shall furnish labor, fuel, energy, water and all other materials, 2 equipment and instruments necessary for all acceptance tests, at no additional 3 cost to the Owner. The equipment suppliers and subcontractors shall assist in 4 the final field tests, as applicable. 5 6 H. Failure of Tests 7 8 Any defects in the materials and equipment or their failure to meet the tests, 9 guarantee or requirements of the Contract Documents shall be promptly 10 corrected by the Contractor by replacement or otherwise as directed by the 11 Engineer. The decision of the Engineer as to whether or not the Contractor 12 has fulfilled his obligations under the Contract shall be final and conclusive. If 13 the Contractor fails to make these corrections or if the improved materials and 14 equipment, when tested, shall again fail to meet the guarantees or specified 15 requirements, the Owner, notwithstanding its partial payment for work, 16 materials and equipment, may reject the work, materials and equipment and 17 may order the Contractor to remove them from the site at his own expense. 18 19 I. Final Inspection 20 21 During such final inspections, the work shall be clean and free from water. In 22 no case will the final change order be prepared until the Contractor has 23 complied with all requirements set forth and the Engineer has made his final 24 inspection of the entire work and is satisfied that the entire work is properly 25 and satisfactorily constructed in accordance with the requirements of the 26 Contract Documents. 27 28 1.05 TEMPORARY STRUCTURES 29 30 A. Temporary Fences 31 32 If, during the course of the work, it is necessary to remove or disturb any fence 33 or part thereof, the Contractor shall, at his own expense, if so ordered by the 34 Engineer, provide a suitable temporary fence, which shall be maintained until 35 the permanent fence is replaced. The Engineer shall be solely responsible for 36 the determination of the necessity for providing a temporary fence and the 37 type of temporary fence to be used. 38 39 B. Temporary Driveways 40 41 At its own expense, the Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain and remove 42 all temporary driveways and access roads required to provide access to the 43 work and through the site of the work to maintain existing operations and to 44 allow construction of other projects in the area. The Contractor shall fully 45 cooperate with the Owner in providing this access. 46 47 C. Temporary Structures and Facilities GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -9 06/24/2014 1 2 The Contractor shall construct any temporary piping and facilities as required 3 in order to maintain existing treatment capacity and operations during 4 construction. 5 6 1.06 TEMPORARY SERVICES 7 8 A. First Aid 9 10 The Contractor shall keep upon the site, at each location where work is in 11 progress, a completely equipped first aid kit and shall provide ready access 12 thereto at all times when people are employed on the work. 13 14 1.07 LINE AND GRADE 15 16 A. Line and Grade 17 18 All work under this Contract shall be constructed in accordance with the lines 19 and grades shown on the Drawings, or as given by the Engineer. The full 20 responsibility for maintaining alignment and grade rests upon the Contractor. 21 22 The Contractor, prior to commencing of construction, shall have established 23 bench marks and base line controlling points. The Contractor shall so place 24 excavation and other materials as to cause no inconvenience in the use of the 25 reference marks provided. He shall remove any obstructions placed by him 26 contrary to this provision. 27 28 B. Surveys 29 30 The Contractor shall furnish and maintain, at his own expense, stakes and 31 other such materials to establish all working or construction lines and grades, 32 as required, and shall be solely responsible for the accuracy thereof. 33 34 All surveying shall be performed in accordance with Specification 01050. 35 36 C. Safeguarding Marks 37 38 The Contractor shall safeguard all points, stakes, grade marks, monuments 39 and bench marks made or established on the work, bear the cost of re- 40 establishing them if disturbed, and bear the entire expense of rectifying work 41 improperly installed due to not maintaining or protecting or to removing without 42 authorization such established points, stakes and marks. 43 44 The Contractor shall safeguard all existing and known property corners, 45 monuments and marks adjacent to but not related to the work and, if required, 46 shall bear the cost of re- establishing them if disturbed or destroyed. 47 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -10 06/24/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1.08 ADJACENT STRUCTURES AND LANDSCAPING 2 3 A. The Contractor shalt also be entirely responsible and liable for all damage or 4 injury as a result of his operations to all other adjacent public and private 5 property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto met with during the 6 progress of the work. The cost of protection, replacement in their original 7 locations and conditions or payment of damages for injuries to such adjacent 8 public and private property and structures affected by the work, whether or not 9 shown on the Drawings or specified shall be included in the various Contract 10 Items and no separate payments will be made therefore. Where such public 11 and private property, structures of any kind and appurtenances thereto are not 12 shown on the Drawings and when, in the opinion to avoid interference with the 13 work, payment therefore will be made as provided for in the General 14 Conditions. 15 16 Contractor is expressly advised that the protection of buildings structures, 17 tunnels, tanks, pipelines, etc. and related work adjacent to and in the vicinity of 18 his operations, wherever they may be, is solely his responsibility. Conditional 19 inspection of buildings or structures in the immediate vicinity of the project 20 which may reasonably be expected to be affected by the Work shall be 21 performed by and be the responsibility of the Contractor. 22 23 Contractor shall, before starting operations, make an examination of the 24 interior and exterior of the adjacent structures, buildings, facilities, etc., and 25 record by noted, measurements, photographs, etc., conditions which might be 26 aggravated by open excavation and construction. Repairs or replacement of 27 all conditions disturbed by the construction shall be made to the satisfaction of 28 the Owner and to the satisfaction of the Engineer. This does not preclude 29 conforming to the requirements of the insurance underwriters. Copies of 30 surveys, photographs, reports, etc., shall be given to the Engineer. 31 32 Prior to the beginning of any excavations, the Contractor shall advise the 33 Engineer of all buildings or structures on which he intends to perform work or 34 which performance of the project work will affect. 35 36 B. Protection of Trees 37 38 1. The Contractor shall adequately protect all trees and shrubs with boxes 39 or otherwise in accordance with ordinances governing the protection of 40 trees. No excavated materials shall be placed so as to injure such 41 trees or shrubs. Trees or shrubs destroyed through negligence of the 42 Contractor or his employees shall be replaced with new stock of similar 43 size and age, in the proper season and at the sole expense of the 44 Contractor. 45 46 2. Beneath trees or other surface structures, where possible, pipelines 47 may be built in short tunnels, backfilled with excavated materials, GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -11 06/24/2014 1 except as otherwise specified, or the trees or structures carefully 2 supported and protected from damage. 3 4 3. The Owner may order the Contractor, for the convenience of the 5 Owner, to remove trees along the line or trench excavation. If so 6 ordered, the Owner will obtain any permits required for removal of 7 trees. 8 9 C. Lawn Areas 10 11 Lawn areas shall be left in as good condition as before the starting of the work. 12 Where sod is to be removed, it shall be carefully removed, and later replaced, 13 or the area where sod has been removed shall be restored with new sod. 14 15 D. Restoration of Fences 16 17 Any fence, or part thereof, that is damaged or removed during the course of 18 the work shall be replaced or repaired by the Contractor and shall be left in as 19 good or better a condition as existed before starting the work. The manner in 20 which the fence is repaired or replaced and the materials used in such work 21 shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. No additional payment will be 22 made for the replacement or repair of any fence. 23 24 1.09 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PUBLIC 25 26 A. Barriers and Lights 27 28 During the prosecution of the work, the Contractor shall put up and maintain at 29 all times such barriers and lights as will effectively prevent accidents. The 30 Contractor shall provide suitable barricades, red lights, "danger" or "caution" or 31 "street closed" signs and watchmen at all places where the work causes 32 obstructions to the normal traffic or constitutes in any way a hazard to the 33 public. 34 35 B. Smoke Prevention 36 37 The Contractor shall use hard coal, coke, oil or gas as fuel for equipment 38 generating steam. A strict compliance with ordinances regulating the 39 production of emission of smoke will be required. No open fires will be 40 permitted. 41 42 C. Noise 43 44 The Contractor shall eliminate noise to as great an extent as practicable at all 45 times. Air compressing plants shall be equipped with silencers and the 46 exhaust of all gasoline motors or other power equipment shall be provided with 47 mufflers. In the vicinity of hospitals and schools, special care shall be used to GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -12 06/24/2014 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 avoid noise or other nuisances. The Contractor shall strictly observe all local 2 regulations and ordinances covering noise control. 3 4 Except in the event of an emergency, no work shall be done between the 5 hours of 7:00 P.M. and 7:00 A.M., or on Sundays. If the proper and efficient 6 prosecution of the work requires operations during the night, the written 7 permission of the Engineer shall be obtained before starting such items of the 8 work. 9 10 D. Access to Public Services 11 12 Neither the materials excavated nor the materials or plant used in the 13 construction of the work shall be so placed as to prevent free access to all fire 14 hydrants, valves or manholes. 15 16 E. Dust Prevention 17 18 The Contractor shall prevent dust nuisance from his operations or from traffic 19 by keeping the roads and /or construction areas sprinkled with water at all 20 times or when directed by the Owner and /or Engineer. 21 22 1.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING 23 24 A. The Contractor shall do all cutting, fitting or patching of his portion of the work 25 that may be required to make the several parts thereof join and coordinate in a 26 manner satisfactory to the Engineer and in accordance with the Drawings and 27 Specifications. The work shall be performed by competent workmen skilled in 28 the trade required by the restoration. 29 30 1.11 CLEANING 31 32 A. During construction of the work, the Contractor shall, at all times, keep the site 33 of the work and adjacent premises as free from material, debris and rubbish as 34 is practicable and shall remove the same from any portion of the site if, in the 35 opinion of the Engineer, such material, debris, or rubbish constitutes a 36 nuisance or is objectionable. 37 38 The Contractor shall remove from the site all of his surplus materials and 39 temporary structures when no further need therefore develops. 40 41 B. Final Cleaning 42 43 At the conclusion of the work, all erection plant, tools, temporary structures 44 and materials belonging to the Contractor shall be promptly taken away, and 45 he shall remove and promptly dispose of all water, dirt, rubbish or any other 46 foreign substances. 47 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -13 06/24/2014 1 The Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and materials installed by 2 him and shall deliver such materials and equipment undamaged in a bright, 3 clean, polished and new operating condition. 4 5 1.12 MISCELLANEOUS 6 7 A. Protection against Siltation and Bank Erosion 8 9 1. The Contractor shall arrange his operations to minimize siltation and 10 bank erosion on construction sites and on existing or proposed water 11 courses, drainage ditches, wetlands and other areas of concern. 12 13 2. The Contractor, at his own expense, shall remove any siltation deposits 14 and correct any erosion problems as directed by the Engineer that 15 results from his construction operations. 16 17 3. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for any fines resulting from 18 the encroachment of any environmentally protected areas. 19 20 B. Protection of Wetland Areas 21 22 The Contractor shall properly dispose of all surplus material, including soil, in 23 accordance with Local, State and Federal regulations and the permits issued 24 for this project. Under no circumstances shall surplus material be disposed of 25 in wetland areas as defined by the Florida Department of Environmental 26 Protection, Southwest Florida Water Management District, U.S. Army Corps of 27 Engineers, etc. 28 29 C. Existing Facilities 30 31 The work shall be so conducted to maintain existing facilities in operation 32 insofar as is possible. Requirements and schedules of operations for 33 maintaining existing facilities in service during construction shall be as 34 described in these Specifications. 35 36 D. Use of Chemicals 37 38 All chemicals used during project construction or furnished for project 39 operation, whether herbicide, pesticide, disinfectant, polymer, reactant, or of 40 other classification, must show approval of either EPA or USDA. Use of all 41 such chemicals and disposal of residues shall be in strict conformance with 42 manufacturers' instructions. 43 44 E. Tree Removal 45 46 The Contractor shall notify the Engineer and any regulatory authorities forty - 47 eight (48) hours in advance of any removal of trees on the project. No clearing GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -14 06/24/2014 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 shall occur and no earth moving equipment shall be placed on -site until after 2 the notice has been issued. The Contractor shall provide maintenance of the 3 tree barricades and other preventive measures to protect the trees that are to 4 remain. Failure to notify the Engineer before removing trees shall result in the 5 in -kind replacement of the tree at no additional cost to the Owner. 6 7 F. Sanitary and Storm Sewer Systems 8 9 The Contractor shall be entirely responsible for the satisfactory installation of 10 storm sewer and sanitary sewer systems to be in substantial conformance to 11 the approved Drawings. No roadway base or paving shall be constructed until 12 the Contractor has performed lamping of these lines to his and the Engineer's 13 satisfaction, and all storm sewer and sanitary sewer invert grades are verified 14 in the field by the Owner. The lamping of lines and verification of elevations in 15 no way absolves the Contractor from any of contractual obligations. 16 17 G. Related Permits 18 19 The Contractor recognizes that the Owner has applied for, and may have 20 received, certain permits pertaining to the work. At the sole discretion of the 21 Owner, the Owner may assign said permits to the Contractor and the 22 Contractor shall accept said assignments upon such request from the Owner. 23 24 H. All work in the vicinity of open waters, wetlands or any jurisdictional area is to 25 be performed in strict accordance with the environmental permits and their 26 conditions. Erosion barriers, when shown on the construction Drawings, are 27 the minimum required. If the Contractor's construction methods require that 28 additional erosion control is necessary to satisfy these permits, such controls 29 shall be supplied, installed and maintained throughout the construction 30 process by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner or Engineer. 31 32 It is the sole responsibility of the Contractor to submit, in a timely manner, any 33 information, data, etc. that is required as a condition of a permit. Required 34 information, data, etc. shall be submitted directly to the permitting agency by 35 the Contractor with copies to the permittee and the Engineer. The Contractor 36 will be held responsible for any fine(s) or other action resulting from a violation 37 of permit conditions. 38 39 1.13 DISPOSAL 40 41 A. The Contractor shall directly pay all tipping fees associated with disposal of 42 construction demolition debris. The Contractor shall include in its bid all costs 43 associated with disposal of construction debris including collection, storage, 44 hauling and tipping fees. 45 46 1.14 RESTORATION OF PROPERTY 47 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -15 06/24/2014 1 A. Responsibility. All damage resulting from construction work on existing 2 structures, wetland areas, roadway pavement, driveways, other paved areas, 3 fences, utilities, traffic control devices and any other obstruction not 4 specifically named herein, shall be repaired, restored or replaced by the 5 Contractor unless otherwise specified. 6 7 B. Temporary Repairs. All damage named in Paragraph A above shall be at 8 least temporarily repaired, restored or replaced immediately following 9 construction efforts at that location. Temporary restoration shall mean putting 10 the affected area back into a safe, usable condition. In no case shall trenches 11 remain open overnight within a street right -of -way unless the governing Traffic 12 Control Division grants specific approval. 13 14 C. Permanent Repairs. All damage shall be permanently repaired, restored, or 15 replaced not later than the 30th calendar day following the completion of 16 construction at that location unless otherwise stipulated. Permanent repairs 17 shall be accomplished in a professional workmanship -like manner in 18 accordance with Specifications contained herein, or contract documents, if 19 addressed. The Contractor may be relieved of the 30 -day time limit above 20 only by specific written agreement with the Engineer. 21 22 D. Owner Retribution. In the event that the Contractor fails to make the 23 permanent repairs within the time specified, the Owner, at its option, will, with 24 its own resources or by contract with others, cause the repair, restoration, or 25 replacement of the affected area to be accomplished. The costs of such work 26 will be deducted either from the next pay request or from any other monies 27 owed the Contractor. 28 29 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 30 31 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 32 33 34 END OF SECTION 1 1 I 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 01005 -16 06/24/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01014 2 3 SUMMARY OF WORK 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 LOCATION OF WORK 8 9 A. All Work of this Contract is located in rights -of -way, easements, or on property 10 owned by the City of Clearwater, Florida. 11 12 1.02 WORK TO BE DONE 13 14 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, tools, services and 15 incidentals to complete all work required by these Specifications and as shown 16 on the Drawings. 17 18 B. The Contractor shall perform the work complete, in place and ready for 19 continuous service, and shall include repairs, testing, permits, clean up, 20 replacements, and restoration required as a result of damages caused during 21 this construction. 22 23 C. All materials, equipment, skills, tools, and labor which is reasonably and 24 properly inferable and necessary for the proper completion of the work in a 25 substantial manner and in compliance with the requirements stated or implied 26 by these Specifications or Drawings shall be furnished and installed by the 27 Contractor without additional compensation, whether specifically indicated in 28 the Contract Documents or not. 29 30 D. The Contractor shall comply with all Municipal, County, State, Federal, and 31 other codes applicable to the proposed construction work. 32 33 1.03 GENERAL DESCRIPTION OF WORK TO BE PERFORMED 34 35 A. The work of this Contract comprises the general rehabilitation of the following 36 facilities, as shown on the Contract Drawings and as specified herein. 37 38 1. Mobilization, demobilization, insurances, permits and bonds. 39 40 2. Rehabilitation of existing facilities as described in Section IV. 41 42 43 1.04 CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITIES 44 45 A. General 46 SUMMARY OF WORK 01014 -1 06/24/14 1 1 1 1. Upon successful construction completion of each new component, and 2 pre - operational testing, Contractor shall conduct testing as required by 3 the Contract Documents. 4 5 2. Contractor shall ensure that, prior to start -up of any component, all 6 handrails, walkways, lighting and associated safety - related facilities are 7 in place. 8 9 3. Contractor shall provide Engineer a minimum of 14- calendar days 10 advance written notice of any requested change in operation to the 11 existing facility, bypass requirements or connections to existing 12 facilities, and shall obtain the Engineer's written approval before 13 scheduling this work. 14 15 B. Restrictions 16 17 1. In planning its work, the Contractor shall consider the following 18 requirements. 19 20 a. As noted elsewhere in these Specifications and on the Drawings, 21 the Contractor will be limited in the number of clarifiers and 22 pumps that can be taken out of service and the need to maintain 23 electrical service while removing and replacing electrical 24 equipment. 25 26 b. The Contractor shall not take any existing facilities out of service 27 without obtaining the Engineer's prior written approval. 28 29 c. All new facilities shall be tested in accordance with Specification 30 01625 to demonstrate to the Engineer and Owner that the new 31 facility and associated equipment properly operates prior to 32 taking any other existing facilities or equipment out of service. 33 34 d. All manipulation of valves shall be performed by the Owner's 35 personnel. The Contractor shall not be allowed to manipulate 36 any valves except in emergencies. If there is an emergency, the 37 Owner shall be notified immediately. 38 39 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 40 1 41 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 42 43 44 END OF SECTION 1 SUMMARY OF WORK 01014 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01015 2 3 CONTROL OF WORK 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 WORK PROGRESS 8 9 A. The Contractor shall provide equipment that will be efficient, safe, appropriate 10 and large enough to secure a satisfactory quality of work and a rate of 11 progress that will ensure the completion of the work within the Contract 12 Time(s). If, at any time, such facilities appear to the Engineer to be inefficient, 13 inappropriate, insufficient or unsafe for securing the quality of work required or 14 for producing the rate of progress aforesaid, he may order the Contractor to 15 increase the facilities equipment, and the Contractor shall conform to such 16 order. Failure of the Engineer to give such order shall in no way relieve the 17 Contractor of his obligations to secure the quality of the work and rate of 18 progress required to meet the Contract Time(s). 19 20 1.02 PRIVATE LAND 21 22 A. The Contractor shall not enter or occupy private land outside of easements, 23 except by permission of the Owner. 24 25 1.03 WORK LOCATIONS 26 27 A. Work shall be located substantially as indicated on the Drawings, but the 28 Engineer reserves the right to make such modifications in locations as may be 29 found desirable to avoid interference with existing structures or for other 30 reasons. Where fittings are noted on the Drawings, such notation is for the 31 Contractor's convenience and does not relieve him from laying and jointing 32 different or additional items where required. 33 34 1.04 OPEN EXCAVATIONS 35 36 A. All open excavations shall be adequately safeguarded by providing temporary 37 barricades, caution signs, lights and other means to prevent accidents to 38 persons, and damage to property. The Contractor shall, at his own expense, 39 provide suitable and safe bridges and other crossings for accommodating 40 travel by Owner's personnel, pedestrians and workmen. Bridges provided for 41 access to private property during construction shall be removed when no 42 longer required. The length of open trench will be controlled by the particular 43 surrounding conditions and does not endanger existing facilities. If the 44 excavation becomes a hazard, or if it excessively restricts traffic, construction 45 procedures such as limiting the length of open trench, prohibiting stacking 46 excavated material in the street, and requiring that the trench shall not remain 47 open overnight. CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -1 06/24/14 1 2 B. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to 3 open trenches. All trenches, excavated material, equipment, of other 4 obstacles, which could be dangerous to the public, shall be well lighted at 5 night. 6 7 1.05 TEST PITS 8 9 A. The Contractor shall excavate test pits (pot -hole) for locating underground 10 pipelines or structures in advance of construction to verify that the work can be 11 constructed as intended. Test pits shall be excavated and backfilled by the 12 Contractor so as not to create a hazardous area. Test pits shall be backfilled 13 immediately after their purpose has been satisfied and the surface restored 14 and maintained in a manner satisfactory to the Engineer. 15 16 1.06 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC 17 18 A. Unless permission to close a street is received in writing from the proper 19 authority, all excavated material shall be placed so that vehicular and 20 pedestrian traffic may be maintained at all times. If the Contractor's 21 operations cause traffic hazards, he shall repair the road surface, provide 22 temporary ways, erect wheel guards or fences, or take other measures for 23 safety satisfactory to the Engineer. 24 25 B. Detours around construction will be subject to the approval of the Owner and 26 the Engineer. Where detours are permitted, the Contractor shall provide all 27 necessary barricades and signs as required to divert the flow of traffic. While 28 traffic is detoured the Contractor shall expedite construction operations and 29 those periods when traffic is being detoured will be strictly controlled by the 30 Owner. 31 32 C. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent injury to the public due to 33 open trenches. Night watchmen may be required where special hazards exist, 34 or police protection provided for traffic while work is in progress. The 35 Contractor shall be fully responsible for damage or injuries whether or not 36 police protection has been provided. 37 38 1.07 CARE AND PROTECTION OF PROPERTY 39 40 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the preservation of all public and 41 private property, and shall use every precaution necessary to prevent damage 42 thereto. If any direct or indirect damage is done to public or private property 43 by or on account of any act, omission, neglect, or misconduct in the execution 44 of the work on the part of the Contractor, such property shall be restored by 45 the Contractor, at his expense, to a condition similar or equal to that existing 46 before the damage was done, or he shall make good the damage in other 47 manner acceptable to the Engineer. CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 B. All sidewalks that are disturbed by the Contractor's operations shall be 3 restored to their original condition with the use of similar or comparable 4 materials. All curbing shall be restored in a condition equal to the original 5 construction and in accordance with the best modern practice. 6 7 C. Along the location of the work all fences, walks, bushes, trees, shrubbery, and 8 other physical features shall be protected and restored in a thoroughly 9 workmanlike manner. Fences and other features removed by the Contractor 10 shall be replaced in the location indicated by the Engineer as soon as 11 conditions permit. All grass areas beyond the limits of construction that have 12 been damaged by the Contractor shall be restored to original conditions. 13 14 D. Trees close to the work shall be boxed or otherwise protected against injury. 15 The Contractor shall trim all branches that are susceptible to damage because 16 of his operations, but in no case shall any tree be cut or removed without prior 17 notification of the appropriate tree authority. All injuries to bark, trunk, limbs, 18 and roots of trees shall be repaired by dressing, cutting, and painting in 19 accordance with approved methods, using only approved tools and materials. 20 21 E. The protection, removal, and replacement of existing physical features shall be 22 part of the work under the Contract and all costs in connection therewith shall 23 be included in the unit and /or lump sum prices established. 24 25 1.08 PROTECTION AND RELOCATION OF EXISTING STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES 26 27 A. The Contractor shall assume full responsibility for the protection of all 28 buildings, structures, and utilities, public or private, including poles, signs, 29 services to buildings, utilities in the street, gas pipes, water pipes, hydrants, 30 sewers, drains, and electric and telephone cables, whether or not they are 31 shown on the Drawings. The Contractor shall carefully support and protect all 32 such structures and utilities from injury of any kind. Any damage resulting 33 from the Contractor's operations shall be repaired by him at his expense. 34 35 B. The Contractor shall bear full responsibility for obtaining all locations of 36 underground structures and utilities (including existing water services, drain 37 lines, and sewers). Services shall be maintained and all costs or charges 38 resulting from damage thereto shall be paid by the Contractor. 39 40 C. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, permanent relocation of a utility owned by the 41 Owner is required, the Engineer may direct the Contractor in writing, to 42 perform the work. Work so ordered will be paid for at the unit prices bid in the 43 Proposal, if applicable, or as extra work as provided for in the General 44 Conditions. If relocation of a privately owned utility is required, the Owner will 45 notify the Utility to perform the work as expeditiously as possible. The 46 Contractor shall fully cooperate with the Owner and Utility, and shall have no 47 claim for delay due to such relocation. CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -3 06/24/14 1 2 D. Underground and above ground utilities /facilities are identified on the 3 Drawings based on best information available at the time for the preparation of 4 the plans. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to locate all utilities prior to 5 any excavation. The Contractor shall be responsible for any damage to 6 existing underground utilities and facilities, and shall coordinate the protection 7 of these utilities with the Owner. 8 9 1.09 DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS AND SERVICES 10 11 A. The Contractor shall interrupt water, telephone, Cable TV, sewer, gas, or other 12 related utility services and disrupt the normal functioning of the system as little 13 as possible, and shall notify the Engineer and public well in advance of any 14 requirement for dewatering, isolating, or relocating a section of a utility, so that 15 necessary arrangements may be made with the appropriate agency. 16 17 B. If it appears that utility service will be interrupted for an extended period, the 18 Engineer may order the Contractor to provide temporary service lines. 19 Inconvenience of the users shall be the minimum, consistent with the existing 20 conditions. The safety and integrity of the system is of prime importance in 21 scheduling work. 22 23 1.10 PROTECTION OF CONSTRUCTION AND EQUIPMENT 24 25 A. All newly constructed work shall be carefully protected from injury or damage 26 in every way. No wheeling or walking or placing of heavy loads shall be 27 allowed and any portion injured or damaged shall be reconstructed by the 28 Contractor at his own expense. 29 30 1.11 WATER FOR CONSTRUCTION PURPOSES 31 32 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for providing and paying for all water 33 required for construction purposes. The Contractor shall make all connections 34 and other provisions, including backflow prevention and metering provisions, 35 necessary to obtain said water from the local utility's potable and /or reclaimed 36 water system, as required. The Contractor shall pay the appropriate party for 37 all water used for construction purposes. Bid prices shall include the costs 38 incurred for water usage. 39 40 1.12 MAINTENANCE OF FLOW 41 42 A. The Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide for the flow of sewers, drains, 43 and water courses interrupted during the progress of the work, and shall 44 immediately remove all offensive matter. The entire procedure for maintaining 45 existing flows shall be approved by the Engineer in advance of the interruption 46 of any flow. 47 CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1.13 COOPERATION WITHIN THIS CONTRACT 2 3 A. All firms or persons authorized to perform any work under this Contract shall 4 cooperate with the General Contractor and his subcontractors or trades, and 5 shall assist in incorporating the work of other trades where necessary or 6 required. 7 8 B. Cutting and patching, drilling and fitting shall be carried out where required by 9 the trade or subcontractor having jurisdiction, unless otherwise indicated 10 herein or directed by the Engineer. 11 12 1.14 COOPERATION OUTSIDE THIS CONTRACT 13 14 A. As part of normal and /or emergency system operations and maintenance, the 15 Owner may employ the services of contractors outside this contract. As such, 16 the Contractor of this Work shall coordinate their schedule with and 17 accommodate said contractor as necessary for the execution of their work. 18 This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 19 20 B. As part of normal and /or emergency system operations and maintenance, the 21 Owner has normal delivery and maintenance suppliers that will be on -site on a 22 regular basis. Contractor shall allow continuous access to all equipment and 23 facilities, so as not to impede the operation and maintenance of said facility. 24 This coordination shall be provided at no additional cost to the Owner. 25 26 1.15 CLEAN -UP 27 28 A. During the course of the work, the Contractor shall keep the site of his 29 operations in a clean and neat condition. He shall remove, transport and 30 properly dispose of all surplus broken pavement, crushed concrete, lumber, 31 excess steel, equipment, temporary structures, and any other refuse from the 32 construction operation, on a weekly basis or as directed by the Owner and /or 33 Engineer. At the conclusion of the work, remove, transport and properly 34 dispose of any surplus excavation, and refuse remaining from the construction 35 operation, and leave the entire site of his work in a neat and orderly condition. 36 37 B. The Contractor shall provide for disposal of excavated material removed from 38 the site. 39 40 1.16 COORDINATION WITH ELECTRICAL UTILITY 41 42 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating with the power company if 43 electrical service is to be supplied to the site. 44 CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -5 06/24/14 1 1.17 WORK SEQUENCE 2 3 A. The Owner may incur penalties for failure to maintain service /operations. 4 Therefore, the Contractor will schedule and complete the work in a manner 5 that assures that the facility maintains service throughout the duration of the 6 project. Prior to taking any service or operation off -line, Contractor shall 7 prepare a work sequence plan and coordinate all shut downs with the Owner 8 and /or Engineer. All temporary measures and materials required to meet this 9 condition during construction shall be provided, installed, maintained and 10 removed by the Contractor. All costs associated with this effort shall be borne 11 by the Contractor. All fines imposed by failure to meet this operating 12 condition, due to the Contractor's Work Sequence, shall be borne by the 13 Contractor. 14 15 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) 16 17 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 18 19 20 END OF SECTION 21 CONTROL OF WORK 01015 -6 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01030 2 3 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 WORKMANSHIP, MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 8 9 A. When a particular product is specified or called for, it is intended and shall be 10 understood by the Contractor that the Contractor's proposal includes those 11 products in its bid. Should the Contractor desire to incorporate products equal 12 to those specified, the Contractor shall furnish information as described in the 13 General Conditions. The alternate product or products submitted by the 14 Contractor shall meet the requirements of the Specifications and shall, in all 15 respects, be equal to the products specified by name herein. 16 17 B. All apparatus, mechanism, equipment, machinery and manufactured articles 18 for incorporation into the Work shall be the new and unused standard products 19 of recognized reputable manufacturers unless specifically noted otherwise. 20 21 1.02 CONNECTIONS TO EXISTING SYSTEMS 22 23 A. The Contractor shall perform all work necessary to locate, excavate and 24 prepare for connections to the existing systems, as shown on the Drawings. 25 All connections to existing systems shall be coordinated with the Owner and /or 26 Engineer prior to commencing the work. All connections to existing systems 27 shall be attended by the Owner and /or Owner's Representative. The costs for 28 this work and for the actual connection to the existing systems shall be 29 included in the various prices bid and shall not result in any additional cost to 30 the Owner. 31 32 1.03 EXISTING UNDERGROUND PIPING, STRUCTURES AND UTILITIES 33 34 A. The attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that during excavation, 35 the possibility exists that the Contractor may encounter water, gas, telephone, 36 electrical, and /or other utilities not shown on the Drawings. The Contractor 37 shall exercise extreme care before and during excavation to locate and flag 38 these lines so as to avoid damage thereto. Should damage occur to an 39 existing line, the Contractor shall immediately contact the utility and the 40 Owner. If the repair is to be completed by the Contractor it shall be carried out 41 in a timely and quality manner. Costs associated with such damage shall be 42 borne by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 43 44 B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to ensure that all utility or other poles, 45 the stability of which may be endangered by the close proximity of excavation, 46 are temporarily supported in position while work proceeds in the vicinity of the SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -1 06/24/14 1 pole and that utility or other companies concerned be given reasonable 2 advance notice of any such excavation by the Contractor. 3 4 C. The locations of existing utilities are shown without express or implied 5 representation, assurance, or guarantee that they are complete or correct or 6 that they represent a true picture of underground piping to be encountered. 7 Encountering existing utilities at different depths or locations than shown on 8 the Drawings shall not be cause for additional costs to the Owner. 9 10 D. The existing piping and utilities that interfere with new construction shall be 11 rerouted as shown, specified or required. The Contractor shall excavate test 12 pits sufficiently ahead of the proposed work to predict potential conflicts. 13 Before any piping and utilities not shown on the Drawings are disturbed, the 14 Contractor shall immediately notify the Engineer of the locaiion of the pipeline 15 or utility and shall reroute or relocate the pipeline or utility as directed. 16 17 E. The Contractor shall exercise care in any excavation to locate all existing 18 piping and utilities. All utilities that do not interfere with cornpleted work shall 19 be carefully protected against damage. Any existing utilities damaged in any 20 way by the Contractor shall be restored or replaced by the Contractor at his 21 expense, as directed by the Engineer. 22 23 F It is intended that wherever existing utilities such as water, gas, telephone, 24 electrical, or other service lines must be crossed, deflection of the pipe within 25 recommended limits and cover shall be used to satisfactorily clear the 26 obstruction unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. However, when in 27 the opinion of the Owner or Engineer this procedure is not feasible, he may 28 direct the use of fittings for the utility crossing. The Contractor shall verify 29 utility crossings with test pits prior to construction as required by the Engineer. 30 31 1.04 SERVICES OF MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICE TECHNICIAN 32 33 A. Bid prices for equipment furnished shall include the cost of a competent field 34 service technician of the manufacturers of all equipment to assist in the 35 installation, adjustment and testing of the equipment, and to instruct the 36 Owner's operating personnel on operation and maintenance. The approved 37 manufacturer's operation and maintenance data shall be delivered to the 38 Engineer prior to instructing the Owner's personnel. This supervision may be 39 divided into two or more time periods, as required by the installation program 40 or as directed by the Engineer. 41 42 B. After installation of the equipment has been completed and the equipment is 43 presumably ready for operational testing, but before it is operated by others, 44 the manufacturer's field service technician shall inspect, operate, test and 45 adjust the equipment. The inspection shall include at least the following points 46 where applicable: 47 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. Soundness (without damaged parts). 2 3 2. Completeness in all details, as specified and required. 4 5 3. Correctness of setting, alignment, and relative arrangement of various 6 parts. 7 8 4. Adequacy and correctness of packing, sealing and lubricants. 9 10 5. Calibration and adjustment of all related instrumentation and controls. 11 12 6. Energize equipment. 13 14 7. Deficiency correction. 15 16 8. Demonstration of compliance with applicable performance specification. 17 18 C. The operation, testing and adjustment shall be as required to prove that the 19 equipment has been left in proper condition for satisfactory operation under 20 the conditions specified prior to start-up testing. 21 22 D. Upon completion of this work, the manufacturer's field service technician shall 23 submit to the Engineer, a complete, signed report of the results of his 24 inspection, operation, adjustments and tests. The report shall include detailed 25 descriptions of the points inspected, tests and adjustments made, quantitative 26 results obtained if such are specified, and suggestions for precautions to be 27 taken to ensure proper maintenance. 28 29 E. Each equipment manufacturer shall provide instruction and training to the 30 Owner's operating personnel in accordance with Section 01820. Training shall 31 not be performed until the requirements of Paragraphs B, C and D above have 32 been fully satisfied and shall be completed before any specified start-up 33 testing is completed as specified in Section 01625. Training shall be provided 34 for the number of days specified in each equipment section of these 35 specifications. Training shall be provided on an 8 -hour per day basis. Partial 36 days of less than eight (8) full working hours shall not be credited toward the 37 specified duration. Training shall not be concurrent with on -going testing, 38 debugging or installation activities; but shall be on a separate activity devoted 39 exclusively to the instruction of the Owner's personnel in the operation and 40 maintenance of the manufacturer's equipment. Qualified representatives of 41 each equipment manufacturer specifically skilled in providing instruction to 42 operations personnel shall perform training. Training shall provide an 43 overview of operations and maintenance requirements and shall include as a 44 minimum, but not be limited to: 45 46 1. Description of unit and component parts. 47 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -3 06/24/14 1 1 1 2. Operating capabilities and performance criteria. 2 I 3 3. Operating procedures. 4 5 4. Maintenance procedures. 6 I 7 5. Servicing and lubrication schedules. 8 9 6. Troubleshooting. 10 11 7. Electrical instrumentation and control requirements and interface. 12 13 F A written "Certificate of Proper Installation" executed by the manufacturer 14 stating that the installation of the equipment is satisfactory, that the equipment 15 has been satisfactorily tested and ready for operational start-up, and that the 16 operating personnel have been instructed in the operation and maintenance of 17 the equipment shall be submitted before start-up by the Owner. The 18 Certificate shall indicate date and time instruction was given and names of 19 operating personnel in attendance. This certification shall be submitted on a 20 certification form approved by the Engineer. 21 1 22 G. See the Technical Specifications for additional requirements for furnishing the 23 services of the manufacturer's field service technician. 24 25 H. For other equipment furnished, the Contractor, unless otherwise specified, 26 shall furnish the services of accredited field services technicians of the 27 manufacturer only when some evident malfunction or over-heating makes 28 such services necessary in the opinion of the Engineer. 29 30 1.05 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 31 32 A. Operating and maintenance data for each piece of equipment furnished shall 33 be delivered directly to the Engineer for approval within 60 days of shop 34 drawing approval. No payment shall be made for equipment installed or 35 stored on -site until the Engineer has approved the adequacy and 36 completeness of operating and maintenance data. Final approved copies of 37 operating and maintenance data shall have been delivered to the Engineer 38 prior to scheduling the instruction period with the Owner. 39 40 1.06 EQUIPMENT DATA LIST 41 42 A. Obtain, prepare and submit a complete, detailed listing of equipment and 43 motor data for all electrical items furnished under this Contract. This listing 44 shall be submitted with the preliminary draft of Operations and Maintenance 45 Data Manuals on Equipment Data Sheets. 46 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.07 SPARE PARTS 2 3 A. Spare parts for certain equipment to be provided are specified in the pertinent 4 sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare 5 parts in a manner approved by the manufacturer. In addition, the Contractor 6 shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the equipment 7 they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, and the 8 delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item shall be 9 furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. The Contractor 10 shall deliver the spare parts to the Engineer ten (10) days prior to start-up 11 testing. 12 13 B. All spare parts shall be furnished in containers clearly identified in indelible 14 markings as to contents. Each container shall be packed for prolonged 15 storage. 16 17 C. No start-up activities shall take place until the specified spare parts have been 18 furnished. 19 20 1.08 INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT 21 22 A. Special care shall be taken to ensure proper alignment of all equipment, with 23 particular attention to mechanical equipment such as pumps and electric 24 drives. The units shall be carefully aligned on their foundations by qualified 25 millwrights after their sole plates have been shimmed to true alignment at the 26 anchor bolts. The anchor bolts shall be set in place and the nuts tightened 27 against the shims. After the foundation alignments have been approved by 28 the manufacturer, the bedplates or wing feet of the equipment shall be 29 securely bolted in place. The alignment of equipment shall be further checked 30 after securing to the foundations, and after confirmation of all alignments, the 31 sole plates shall be finally grouted in place. The Contractor shall be 32 responsible for the exact alignment of equipment with associated piping and, 33 under no circumstances, will "pipe springing" be allowed. 34 35 B. All wedges, shims, filling pieces, keys, packing, or other materials necessary 36 to properly align, level and secure apparatus in place shall be furnished by the 37 Contractor. All parts intended to be plumb or level must be proven exactly so. 38 Any grinding necessary to bring parts to proper bearing after erection shall be 39 done at the expense of the Contractor. 40 41 1.09 MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION SCHEDULES 42 43 A. For all mechanical and electrical equipment furnished, the Contractor shall 44 provide a list including the equipment name; address and telephone number of 45 the manufacturer's representative and service company so that service and /or 46 spare parts can be readily obtained. 47 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -5 06/24/14 1 1.10 INSTALLATION LISTS 2 3 A. All manufacturers or equipment suppliers who propose to furnish equipment or 4 products shall submit an installation list to the Engineer along with the required 5 Shop Drawings. 6 7 B. The installation list shall include all installations (minimum of two) where 8 identical equipment has been installed and has been in operation for a period 9 of at least one (1) year. 10 11 1.11 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS 12 13 A. The Contractor shall provide all openings, channels, chases, etc., and install 14 anchor bolts and other items to be embedded in concrete, as required to 15 complete the work under this Contract, together with those required by 16 subcontractors, and shall do all cutting and patching, excepting cutting and 17 patching of materials of a specified trade and as stated otherwise in the 18 following paragraph. 19 20 B. The Contractor shall coordinate with the subcontractors to provide all sleeves, 21 inserts, hangers, anchor bolts, etc., of the proper size and material for the 22 execution of the work. The Contractor shall be responsible for any corrective 23 cutting and refinishing required to make the necessary openings, chases, etc. 24 In no case shall beams, lintels or other structural members be cut without the 25 written approval of the Engineer. 26 27 1.12 PROVISIONS FOR CONTROL OF EROSION 28 29 A. Sufficient precautions shall be taken during construction to minimize the run - 30 off of polluting substances such as silt, clay, fuels, oils, bitumens, calcium 31 chloride, or other polluting materials harmful to humans, fish, or other life, into 32 the supplies and surface waters of the state. Control measures must be 33 adequate to assure that turbidity in the receiving water will not be increased 34 more than 10 nephelometric turbidity units (NTU), or as otherwise required by 35 the state or other controlling body, in water used for public water supply or fish 36 unless limits have been established for the particular water. In surface water 37 used for other purposes, the turbidity must not exceed 25 NTU unless 38 otherwise permitted. Special precautions shall be taken in the use of 39 construction equipment to prevent operations that promote erosion. 40 41 B. The Contractor shall comply with the requirements of the EPA -NPDES generic 42 permit for storm water discharges and the storm water pollution prevention 43 plan developed for the project. 44 45 1.13 VALVE INDICES 46 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -6 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing tags for all valves required 2 on the work and installing the tags required for his own work. Tags on above 3 ground valves shall be non - corrosive metal or plastic, 2 inches in diameter, 19- 4 gauge thickness. Tags for buried valves shall be secured to a concrete base 5 as shown on the Drawings. Submit to the Engineer for approval, two (2) 6 samples of each type of tag proposed and manufacturer's standard color chart 7 and letter styles. Tags shall have stamped on them the information shown on 8 the Drawings and the data described herein. The Contractor shall submit to 9 the Engineer for review, not Tess than 120 days before start-up, a valve 10 schedule containing all valves required for the work. The schedule shall 11 contain for each valve, the location, type, a number, words to identify the 12 valve's function, and the normal operating position. The information contained 13 in the valve schedules shall be coded on the tags in a system provided by the 14 Owner. Above ground valve tags shall be furnished with non - corrosive metal 15 wire for attachment thereof. 16 17 1.14 HURRICANE PREPAREDNESS PLAN 18 19 A. Within 30 days of the date of Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall submit to 20 the Engineer and Owner a Hurricane Preparedness Plan. The Plan should 21 outline the necessary measures that the Contractor proposes to perform at no 22 additional cost to the Owner in case of a hurricane warning. 23 24 B. In the event of inclement weather, or whenever Engineer shall direct; the 25 Contractor shall carefully protect the Work and materials against damage or 26 injury from the weather. If, in the opinion of Engineer, any portion of Work or 27 material has been damaged or injured by reason of failure on the part of the 28 Contractor or subcontractors to set protect the Work, such Work and materials 29 shall be removed and replaced at the expense of the Contractor. 30 31 1.15 WARRANTIES 32 33 A. The Contractor and the equipment manufacturers shall warranty all equipment 34 supplied under these Specifications for a minimum period of one (1) year 35 unless otherwise specified. Warranty period shall commence on the date that 36 the Work is accepted by the Owner as substantially complete. 37 38 B. The equipment shall be warranted to be free from defects in workmanship, 39 design and materials. If any part of the equipment should fail during the 40 warranty period, it shall be replaced and returned to service at no expense to 41 the Owner. 42 43 C. If, within the warranty period, repairs or changes are required in connection 44 with work that in the opinion of the Engineer is rendered necessary as the 45 result of the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that is inferior, 46 defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract, the Contractor SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -7 06/24/14 1 shall promptly upon receipt of notice from the Owner and without expense to 2 the Owner: 3 4 1. Place in satisfactory condition in every particular all of such work and 5 correct all defects herein. 6 7 2. Repair or replace all damage to buildings, the site, or equipment or 8 contents thereof, which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is the result of 9 the use of materials, equipment or workmanship that are inferior, 10 defective, or not in accordance with the terms of the Contract. 11 12 3. Repair or replace any work or material or equipment disturbed in 13 fulfilling any such guarantee. 14 15 D. If within ten (10) days after receiving notice, the Contractor fails to proceed to 16 comply with the terms of the warranty, the Owner may have the defects 17 corrected, and the Contractor and his surety shall be liable for all expenses 18 incurred, provided, however, that in case of an emergency where, in the 19 opinion of the Owner, delay would cause loss or damage, repairs may be 20 started without notice being given to the Contractor and the Contractor shall 21 pay the cost thereof. 22 23 E. All special guarantees or warranties applicable to specific parts of the work, as 24 may be stipulated in the Contract Documents, shall be subject to the terms of 25 this paragraph during the first year following acceptance. All special 26 guarantees and manufacturers' warranties shall be assembled by the 27 Contractor and delivered to the Engineer, along with a surnmary list thereof, 28 before the acceptance of the Work. 29 30 F The manufacturer's warranty period shall run concurrently with the 31 Contractor's warranty or guarantee period. No exception to this provision shall 32 be allowed. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining equipment 33 warranties from each of the respective suppliers or manufacturers for all the 34 equipment specified. The form of warranty may be included in the Contract 35 Documents, or shall otherwise be acceptable to the Owner. 36 37 G. In the event that the manufacturer is unwilling to provide a one -year warranty 38 commencing at the time of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall obtain 39 from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty starting at the time that the 40 manufacturer certified proper installation as specified elsewhere herein. This 41 three -year warranty shall not relieve the Contractor of the one -year warranty 42 commencing upon Substantial Completion. 43 44 H. The Contractor's one -year warranty or guarantee period shall be part of the 45 project's Performance Bond. 46 47 1.16 WATERTIGHTNESS SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -8 06/24/14 I 2 A. Special precautions shall be taken in the curing of concrete to reduce concrete 3 cracking. All water - retaining structures (those that are intended to hold a 4 liquid) shall be filled and tested for leaks by the Contractor, with water I 5 acceptable to the Engineer, prior to surface coating or painting. Procedure 6 and manner in which any leaks are repaired must meet the approval of the 7 Engineer. All costs associated with the testing and repair of leaks shall be at I 8 the expense of the Contractor. 9 10 1.17 CONSTRUCTION CONDITIONS 11 I12 A. The Contractor shall strictly adhere to the specific requirements of the 13 governmental unit or agencies having jurisdiction over the work. Wherever I 14 there is a difference in the requirements of a jurisdictional body and these 15 Specifications, the more stringent shall apply. 16 17 1.18 PUBLIC NUISANCE I18 19 A. The Contractor shall not create a public nuisance including, but not limited to, 20 encroachment on adjacent lands, flooding of adjacent lands, or excessive I 21 noise. 22 23 B. Sound levels measured by the Engineer personnel shall not exceed 45 dBA 7 I 24 PM to 7 AM or 55 dBA 7 AM to 7 PM. This sound level shall be measured at 25 the exterior of the exterior wall of the nearest residence. Levels at the equip - 26 ment shall not exceed 85 dBA measured five (5) feet from the equipment at I 27 any time. Sound levels in excess of these values are sufficient cause to have 28 the work suspended. Work stoppage by the Engineer or Owner for excessive 29 noise shall not relieve the Contractor of completing the Work in accordance I 30 with the Contract Time(s), at no additional cost to the Owner. 31 32 C. No extra charge may be made for time lost due to work stoppage resulting I 33 from the creation of a public nuisance. 34 35 1.19 HAZARDOUS LOCATIONS I36 37 A. Contractor shall perform work in accordance with OSHA, state and local safety 38 requirements. I 39 40 1.20 SUSPENSION OF WORK DUE TO WEATHER 41 I 42 A. During inclement weather, all work that could be damaged or rendered inferior 43 by such weather conditions shall be suspended. The orders and decisions of 44 the Engineer as to suspensions shall be final and binding. The ability to issue 45 such an order shall not be interpreted as a requirement to do so. During 46 suspension of the work for any cause, the work shall be suitably covered and 1 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -9 06/24/14 1 1 1 protected so as to preserve it from injury by the weather or otherwise; and, if 2 the Engineer shall so direct, rubbish and surplus materials shall be removed. 3 4 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for documenting all inclement weather 5 conditions. 6 7 1.21 RELOCATIONS 8 9 A. The Contractor shall be responsible for the relocation of structures, including 111 10 but not limited to Tight poles, signs, sign poles, fences, piping, conduits and 11 drains that interfere with the positioning of the work as set out on the 12 Drawings. The cost of all such relocations shall be borne by the Contractor at 13 no additional cost to the Owner. 14 15 1.22 SALVAGE 16 17 A. Any existing equipment or material including, but not limited to, valves, pipes, 18 fittings, couplings, etc., which is removed or replaced as a result of 19 construction under this project may be designated y the Owner to be salvaged. 20 Any existing equipment or material to be salvaged shall remain onsite and the 21 Contractor shall be responsible for delivering the salvage equipment/materials 22 to the exact location onsite as directed by the Engineer. 23 24 1.23 PERMITS 25 26 A. Upon notice of award, the Contractor shall immediately apply for all applicable 27 permits, not previously obtained by the Owner, from the appropriate 28 governmental agency or agencies. No work shall commence until all 29 applicable permits have been obtained and copies delivered to the Engineer. 30 The costs for obtaining all permits shall be borne by the Contractor. 31 32 1.24 PUMPING 33 34 A. The Contractor with his own equipment shall perform all pumping necessary to 35 prevent flotation of any part of the structures during construction operations. 36 All water collected during pumping operations shall be properly disposed of in 37 accordance with these specifications and /or regulatory requirements, 38 whichever is more stringent. 39 40 B. The Contractor shall, with his own equipment, pump out water that may seep 41 or leak into the excavations or structures. All water collected during pumping 42 operations shall be properly disposed of in accordance with these 43 specifications and /or regulatory requirements, whichever is more stringent. 44 Below grade galleries and other operating areas shall be kept dry at all times. 45 The extent of pumping required in tanks, channels and ol:her non - operating 46 areas will be determined by the Owner /Engineer. 47 48 1.25 NOTIFICATION OF WORK ON EXISTING FACILITIES SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -10 06/24/14 2 A. Before commencing work on any of the existing structures or equipment, the 3 Contractor shall notify the Owner /Engineer, in writing, at least 10 calendar 4 days in advance of the date he proposed to commence such work. 5 6 1.26 OWNER OCCUPANCY AND OPERATION OF COMPLETED FACILITIES 7 8 A. It is assumed that portions of the work will be completed prior to completion of 9 the entire work. Upon completion of construction of each individual facility, 10 including testing, if the Owner, at his sole discretion, desires to accept the 11 individual facility, the Contractor will be issued a dated certificate of completion 12 for each individual facility. The Owner will assume ownership and begin 13 operation of the individual facility on that date and the one -year guaranty 14 period shall commence on that date. The Owner has the option of not 15 accepting any individual completed facility, but accepting the entire work as a 16 whole when it is completed and tested. 17 I 18 19 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) 20 21 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 22 23 24 END OF SECTION 25 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -11 06/24/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK SPECIAL PROJECT PROCEDURES 01030 -12 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01040 2 3 COORDINATION 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.1 PROJECT COORDINATION 8 9 A. The Contractor shall provide for the complete coordination of all construction 10 efforts. This shall include but not necessarily be limited to coordination of the 11 following: 12 13 1. The work of subcontractors. 14 15 2. The flow of material and equipment from suppliers. 16 17 3. The effort of equipment manufacturers during testing and start-up. 18 19 4. The interrelated work with public and private utility companies. 20 21 5. The interrelated work with the Owner where tie -ins to existing facilities 22 are required. 23 24 6. The effort of independent testing agencies. 25 26 7. The work to be provided under allowances. 27 28 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) 29 30 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 31 32 33 END OF SECTION 34 COORDINATION 01040 -1 06/24/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK COORDINATION 01040 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01050 2 3 FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. The Contractor shall provide and pay for all field engineering and survey 10 services required. Such work shall include survey work to establish existing 11 and /or proposed lines and grades and to locate and lay out site boundaries 12 and easements, project control, site improvements, structures, controlling lines 13 and levels and all other survey required for the construction of the work. Also 14 included are such engineering services as are specified or required to execute 15 the Contractor's construction methods. Engineers and surveyors shall be 16 licensed professionals registered in the State of Florida. 17 18 B. The accuracy of any method of staking shall be the responsibility of the 19 Contractor. All surveying for vertical and horizontal control shall be the 20 responsibility of the Contractor. 21 22 C. The Contractor shall be held responsible for the preservation of all stakes and 23 marks. If any stakes or marks are carelessly or willfully disturbed by the 24 Contractor, the Contractor shall not proceed with any work until he has 25 established such points, marks, lines and elevations as may be necessary for 26 the prosecution of the work. 27 28 1.02 SURVEY REFERENCE POINTS 29 30 A. Existing basic horizontal and vertical control points for the project are those 31 designated on the Drawings. The Contractor shall locate and protect control 32 points prior to starting site work and shall preserve all permanent reference 33 points during construction. In working near any permanent property corners or 34 reference markers, the Contractor shall use care not to remove or disturb any 35 such markers. In the event that markers must be removed or are disturbed 36 due to the proximity of construction work, the Contractor shall have them 37 referenced and reset by a Registered Land Surveyor. 38 39 1.03 PROJECT SURVEY REQUIREMENTS 40 41 A. The Contractor shall engage the services of a Florida Registered Land 42 Surveyor to establish all lines and grades on the Drawings necessary to fully 43 construct the work in accordance with Chapter 5J -17 of the Florida 44 Administrative Code. 45 46 B. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish and stake all pipeline and 47 roadway right -of -way adjacent to construction at 100' intervals on tangents, 50' FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01050 -1 06/24/14 1 1 1 intervals on curves and at all changes in direction. The surveyor shall place 2 lath and hub at such points with stations indicated. Tack in hub shall not be 3 permitted. 4 5 1. The Registered Land Surveyor shall utilize current right -of -way maps, 6 plats and property deeds, all being of public record, in conjunction with 7 existing monumentation to establish the existing right -oif -way lines and 8 utility easement boundaries. 9 10 C. The Registered Land Surveyor shall establish a temporary benchmark system 11 in accordance with Chapter 5J -17 F.A.C. and shall provide a written list to the 12 Contractor for his use. 13 14 D. The Contractor shall provide an as -built survey of all pipes and structures 15 constructed under the project that shall be signed and sealed by a Florida 16 Registered Surveyor and Mapper. At minimum, the As -Built Survey shall 17 include: 18 1 19 1. Top of concrete elevations and northings and eastings for all basins 20 and structures, 21 2. Weir elevations for all basins and structures, 22 3. Pipe inverts for gravity pipelines and top of pipe elevations for pressure 23 pipelines for all yard piping, and northings and eastings of all changes 24 in pipe direction. 25 26 1.04 RECORDS 27 28 A. Contractor shall maintain a complete, accurate log of all control and survey 29 work as construction progresses. Survey notes indicating the information and 30 measurements used in establishing locations and grades shall be kept in 31 notebooks and furnished to the Engineer with the Record Drawings. 32 33 1.05 SUBMITTALS 34 35 A. Submit name and address of surveyor to the Engineer. 36 37 B. On request of the Engineer, submit documentation to verify accuracy of field 38 engineering work. 39 40 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) 41 42 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 43 44 45 END OF SECTION FIELD ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING 01050 -2 06/24/14 1 1 I 1 SECTION 01065 2 3 PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 14 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 1 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. The Contractor shall be responsible to ensure that the construction of the I 10 project adheres to City, County, State, and Federal standards and regulations, 11 and to all permits and easements acquired for the project. 12 I 13 B. The Contractor shall coordinate all work within rights -of -way with the agency 14 having jurisdiction, including all road /lane closures, road /lane narrowing and 15 detours. 16 1 17 C. Copies of any Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements or License Agreements 18 that the Owner has obtained will be available for review by prospective bidders 19 at the City of Clearwater's Plan Room — website address: 1 20 www .myclearwater.com /cityprojects. The Contractor shall conduct all 21 operations in accordance with the requirements of all Permits, Easements and 22 License Agreements. I 23 24 D. Where Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or License Agreements 25 require that certain Work is to be performed only in the presence of a I 26 representative of the permitting entity, the Contractor shall provide all 27 coordination and notification required to assure full compliance with the permit 28 conditions. I 29 30 E. The Owner has obtained or will obtain certain Permits, Deeds, 31 Easement Agreements, or License Agreements required for construction of I 32 the project. A listing of those Permits, Deeds, Easement Agreements, or 33 License Agreements that the Owner has obtained or applied for is listed 34 below. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all other Permits, I 35 36 Easement Agreements, or License Agreements necessary for the proper execution of the Work not specifically noted to be obtained by the Owner. 37 I 38 F. The Contractor shall comply with all terms, conditions, provisions and 39 requirements of all permits issued or to be issued for the Project. Should the 40 Contractor's failure to comply with said permits lead to enforcement action I 41 by any of the permitting or jurisdictional agencies, any resultant costs in 42 the forms of repairs, fines, penalties, administrative costs, attorney's fees or 43 consultant fees shall be deducted from the Contract Price or shall be I 44 otherwise collectible from the Contractor and its Surety, jointly and severally. 45 46 G. The Contractor shall notify the Owner a minimum of 30 days prior to the 47 expiration of a permit if said expiration occurs prior to completion of the Work. IPERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01065 -1 06/24/14 1 1 H. 2 3 4 5 102 PERMITS 6 7 8 Prior to any land clearing or tree removal, the Contractor shall construct a soil tracking device in accordance with current Florida Department of Transportation design standards. 9 10 11 12 13 14 A. Permits obtained by, or applied for by, the Owner are as follows: None. Permit Title Agency Permit/File Number B. Each bidder shall be familiar with the requirements of the permit conditions that relate to construction activities and shall include the cost of satisfying these permit conditions in developing a bid for the project. 15 C. At a minimum, the Contractor shall register with appropriate authorities, obtain 16 the following permits, comply with their respective conditions, and submit 17 copies of all applications and final permits to Engineer and Owner: 18 19 1. City of Clearwater building permit(s) 20 2. Generic Permit for the Production of Groundwater. 21 3. Storm Water NPDES 22 23 D. The Contractor shall obtain all construction permits required including those 24 necessary for clearing, grubbing, and tree removal. No clearing shall occur 25 and no earth- moving equipment shall be placed on -site until after the permits 26 have been issued. 27 28 E. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with all local and state 29 permits required for dewatering, including consumptive or water use 30 permitting, if required for construction from the Southwest Florida Water 31 Management District. 32 33 F. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining, and complying with, all 34 required permits relating to discharges from dewatering shall obtain a State of 35 Florida Department of Environmental Protection Generic Permit for the 36 Discharge of Produced Ground Water From Any Non - Contaminated Site PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01065 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Activity in accordance with 62- 621.300(2) FAC. See specification Section 2 02140 Temporary Dewatering. 3 4 G. The Contractor shall obtain, implement and comply with the requirements of a 5 Generic Permit for Storm Water Discharge from Large and Small Construction 6 Activities (CGP), in accordance with 62- 621.300(4) FAC. The Contractor shall 7 submit a CGP Notice of Intent (NOI) to the Florida Department of 8 Environmental Protection (FDEP) and develop and submit a Storm Water 9 Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) as part of the CGP. The Contactor shall: 10 11 1. Obtain the CGP form and NOI Application Form from the FDEP or its 12 website, DEP Documents 62- 621.300(4)(a) and 62- 621.300(4)(b), 13 respectively. 14 15 2. Develop an SWPPP in compliance with FDEP storm water permitting 16 rules that shall include, at a minimum, the following: 17 18 a. A site evaluation of how and where pollutants may be mobilized 19 by storm water. 20 b. A site plan for managing storm water runoff. 21 c. Identification of appropriate erosion and sediment controls 22 including Best Management Practices to reduce erosion, 23 sedimentation, and storm water pollution. 24 d. A maintenance and inspection schedule. 25 e. Plan and procedures for record keeping. 26 f. A map depicting storm water exit areas. 27 28 3. Complete and submit the NOI Application, including all attachments, to 29 the local FDEP office along with the appropriate application fee. 30 31 4. The Contractor shall furnish a copy of the FDEP Notice of Permit, along 32 33 34 1.03 EASEMENTS with a copy of the SWPPP, to the Engineer. 35 36 37 38 A. The Contractor shall comply with all provisions of the various easements for the following parcels: Easement Number Owner County Parcel ID 39 40 PART 2 — PRODUCTS PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01065 -3 06/24/14 1 (NOT USED) 2 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION 4 (NOT USED) 5 6 7 END OF SECTION PERMITS AND EASEMENTS 01065 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01090 2 3 REFERENCE STANDARDS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Abbreviations and acronyms are used in the Contract Documents to identify 10 reference standards. 11 12 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 13 14 A. Application: When a standard is specified by reference, comply with 15 requirements and recommendations stated in that standard, except when 16 requirements are modified by the Contract Documents or applicable codes 17 establish stricter standards. 18 19 B. Publication Date: The publication in effect on the date of issue of Contract 20 Documents, except when a specific publication date is specified. 21 22 1.03 ABBREVIATIONS, NAMES, AND ADDRESSES OF ORGANIZATIONS 23 24 Obtain copies of referenced standards direct from publication source, when needed 25 for proper performance of Work, or when required for submittal by Contract 26 Documents. 27 28 AA Aluminum Association 29 900 19th Street NW 30 Washington, DC 20006 31 32 AASHTO American Association of State Highway 33 and Transportation Officials 34 444 North Capitol Street, NW Suite 249 35 Washington, DC 20001 36 37 ACI American Concrete Institute 38 38800 Country Club Drive 39 Farmington Hills, MI 48331 40 41 Al Asphalt Institute 42 2696 Research Park Drive 43 Lexington KY 40511 44 45 AISC American Institute of Steel Construction 46 One East Wacker Drive 47 Suite 3100 48 Chicago, IL 60601 -2001 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 -1 06/24/14 1 AISI American Iron and Steel Institute 2 1140 Connecticut Avenue 3 Suite 705 4 Washington DC 20036 5 6 ANSI American National Standards Institute 7 1819 L Street, NW 8 Washington, DC 20036 9 10 ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 11 Three Park Avenue 12 New York, NY 10016 -5990 13 14 ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 15 100 Barr Harbor Drive 16 West Conshohocken, PA, 19428 17 18 AWWA American Water Works Association 19 6666 W. Quincy Avenue 20 Denver, CO 80235 21 22 AWS American Welding Society 23 550 N.W. LeJeune Road 24 Miami, FL 33126 25 26 CRSI Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute 27 933 N. Plum Grove Road 28 Schaumburg, IL 60173 -4758 29 30 FS Federal Specification General Services 31 Administration Specifications and Consumer 32 Information Distribution Section (WFSIS) 33 470 L'enfant Plaza — Suite 8100 34 Washington, DC 20407 35 36 NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers' Association 37 1300 North 17th Street 38 Suite 1847 39 Rosslyn, VA 22209 40 41 PCA Portland Cement Association 42 5420 Old Orchard Road 43 Skokie, IL 60077 44 45 PCI Prestressed Concrete Institute 46 209 W. Jackson Blvd. 47 Chicago, IL 60606 48 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 -2 06/24/14 1 SSPC Society for Protective Coatings 2 40 24th Street,. 6th floor 3 Pittsburgh, PA 15222 4 5 UL Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. 6 333 Pfingston Road 7 Northbrook, IL 60062 8 9 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 10 11 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 12 13 14 END OF SECTION 15 REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 -3 06/24/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK REFERENCE STANDARDS 01090 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01150 2 3 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. This section defines the Work included in each bid item in the Bid / Proposal 10 section of the Contract Documents. Payment will be made based on the 11 specified items included in the description in this section for each pay item 12 number. 13 14 B. All prices included in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall be full 15 compensation for all labor, supervision, materials, tools, equipment, and 16 incidentals necessary to complete the Work as shown on the Drawings and /or 17 as specified in the Contract Documents. Actual quantities of each item bid on 18 a unit price basis will be determined upon completion of the construction in the 19 manner established for each item in this section. Payment for all items listed 20 in the Bid Form / Schedule of Prices shall constitute full compensation for all 21 work shown and /or specified to be performed under the Contract. 22 23 C. Restoration is considered to be an integral part of the Work, and all bid prices 24 shall include the cost of restoration necessitated by the Work related to that 25 bid item. All existing structures and property including, but not limited to, 26 paving, stabilized roads, drainage piping and ditches, catch basins, head 27 walls, yard culverts, lawns, fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, walkways, 28 sidewalks, driveways, alleys, curbs, gutters, irrigation systems, buildings, 29 structures and equipment that are altered, removed or damaged during 30 construction shall be restored to the same or better condition than existed prior 31 to construction at no additional cost to the Owner. Cleanup is an integral part 32 of restoration process. 33 34 D. The Contractor shall exercise care to preserve and protect existing facilities 35 during all periods for the construction phase. All existing structures, 36 equipment, and private property, including, but not limited to paving, stabilized 37 roads, drainage piping and ditches, latch basins, head walls, yard culverts, 38 lawns, fences, trees, shrubs, ground areas, walkways, driveways, alleys, 39 curbs, gutters and irrigations systems that are altered, removed or damaged 40 during construction and are not included in the proposed alterations of the new 41 work shall be restored to the same or better condition than existed prior to 42 construction. 43 44 E. The Contractor shall be responsible for all traffic maintenance requirements 45 necessitated by the construction /installation of those specific bid items MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -1 06/24/14 1 1 1 requiring traffic maintenance. The cost for this work shall be included in the I 2 specific unit price submitted for that particular bid item. 3 4 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) I 5 6 PART 3 — EXECUTION 7 I 8 3.01 MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT — BASE BID WORK 9 10 A. Equipment for Clarifiers 5 thru 8 at the Northeast WRF (Bid Item 1A) I 11 12 1. Owner Direct Purchase: The Owner will purchase the equipment listed 13 below directly from the supplier /vendor selected by the Contractor in I14 accordance with the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Documents 15 included in the Appendix. 16 1 17 • Clarifier mechanical equipment included in Section 11225. 18 • RAS pumps included in Section 11310 19 20 20 The price bid for Bid Item 1A shall include all equipment, materials, 1 21 spare parts, special tools, O &M manuals, factory testing, field services, 22 warranty and other items normally provided by the manufacturer of the 23 equipment. 1 24 25 2. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for 26 Item 1A Equipment for Clarifiers 5 thru 8 at the Northeast WRF shall be I 27 made in accordance with the ODP Documents included in the 28 Appendix. 29 30 3. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 1A shall be made directly by the Owner 31 to the equipment vendor in accordance with the ODP Documents 32 included in the Appendix. The cost of the equipment will be deducted I 33 from the Contract Price by Change Order in accordance with the ODP 34 Documents included in the Appendix. 35 I 36 B. ODP — Sales Tax Savings Retained by the City (Bid Item 1 B) 37 38 1. Measurement: Measurement of the lump sum price stipulated in the ' 39 Bid Form for Bid Item 1B, ODP — Sales Tax Savings Retained, shall be 40 the actual amount of sales tax savings associated with the Owner's 41 Direct Purchase of the equipment furnished under Bid Item 1A. I 42 43 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 1B shall not be macle. The ODP - 44 Sales Tax Savings shall be deducted from the Contract by Change 111 45 Order in accordance with the Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) 46 Documents included in the Appendix. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 111 01150 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. Northeast WRF Clarifiers 1 -4 Rehabilitation (Bid Item 1C) — Not in Contract 2 3 D. SCADA Software Implementation Services Allowance (Bid Item 1 D) 4 5 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the amount stipulated for 6 Bid Item 1D shall be made in accordance with the appropriate written 7 Authorization by the Owner. The allowance is for the Owner's Systems 8 Integrator to perform the PLC programming, HMI programming, and 9 other related work as described in Section 13630. 10 11 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 1D shall be made in accordance with 12 the terms of the Authorization. 13 14 E. Northeast WRF Clarifier 5 -8 Rehabilitation (Bid Item 2). 15 16 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for 17 Item 2 Clarifiers 5 -8 Rehabilitation shall not be made and all items shall 18 be included in the lump sum price bid. 19 20 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 2 shall be made in accordance with the 21 Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of 22 all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision required to 23 perform the work as shown on the Drawings and Specifications as 24 indicated herein including, but not limited to, the design, installation, 25 operation, and maintenance of a groundwater removal system; 26 measurement of existing clarifier structures and equipment; the 27 disassembly, removal and disposal (unless otherwise indicated) of all 28 existing clarifier components, center columns, drives, weir plates, scum 29 baffles, scum baffle supports, scum beach plates and supports, 30 walkway bridges and handrails, scum pipe wall penetrations, chlorine 31 solution piping, reclaimed water piping to the limits shown on the 32 Drawings, flush water piping for the scum troughs, RAS pumps, motors, 33 bases and electrical controls and other equipment and materials as 34 shown on the Drawings; the installation of new clarifier components 35 including center columns, drives, bridges and walkways, rotating 36 mechanisms, scum baffles and supports, scum beaches with supports, 37 scum pipes and wall penetrations, reclaimed water piping on the 38 walkway bridges, scum beach flush water systems and weir plates; 39 modifications to the clarifier RAS piping, clarifier influent piping, and to 40 the clarifier concrete floor as required to accommodate the new clarifier 41 equipment and to maintain the drains in service; the removal and 42 furnishing and installation of new RAS pumps and RAS valves, control 43 panels, electrical work; and pipe supports; furnishing and installing a 44 line stop in the RAS piping in the north and south pump houses, the 45 removal of an existing WAS flow meter and the furnishing and 46 installation of a new WAS flow meter in the South RAS Pump House; MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -3 06/24/14 1 the removal of existing WAS valves and furnishing and installing new 2 WAS valves in the North RAS Pump House; the removal and 3 replacement of the existing telescoping sludge valve seals; the 4 excavation for removal and replacement of existing clarifier drain 5 valves; the removal and replacement of the existing pressure relief 6 valves in the clarifier floors; the removal of existing concrete stairs to 7 each clarifier, furnishing and installation of new aluminum stairs to each 8 clarifier, the removal and replacement of the existing motor control 9 center and associated wiring and controls with new electrical power and 10 control conduit, wire and equipment; provisions for temporary electrical 11 power and controls as required to maintain electrical service; removal 12 and replacement of the existing RAS wet well liquid level detector and 13 float switches with a new RAS well level detector and float switches; the 14 removal, salvage and replacement of four existing sludge blanket level 15 detector probes, support brackets, and existing sludge blanket 16 controllers (two) including wiring and connecting the sludge level 17 detectors and transmitters to power and to the existing plant SCADA 18 system; incorporating new equipment status and process variables into 19 the existing plant SCADA system; furnishing and installing new 20 instrumentation, control panels, input/output modules, power supplies 21 and SCADA communication cables; modifying existing control panels; 22 providing the services of a Systems Integrator; SCADA start-up, testing, 23 and training; all pertinent Division 1 requirements; and, all other 24 equipment, materials and services necessary for the complete 25 Rehabilitation of Clarifiers 5 Thru 8 and South RAS Pump House 26 Equipment plus additional work for Clarifiers 1 -4 and the North RAS 27 Pump House at the Northeast WRF as detailed in the Contract 28 Documents. 29 30 F Northeast WRF Clarifiers 5 -8 Grouting (Bid Item 3) 31 32 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of Bid Item 3 shall be the 33 actual number of square feet of grout as measured in place. No 34 payment will be made to the Contractor for grout placed beyond the 35 limits set forth by the Engineer. Material lost in hauling, handling or 36 storage shall not be measured for or included in payment, nor will 37 material required to restore grout outside of the approved limits or other 38 unauthorized areas. 39 40 2. Payment: Payment of the unit price bid per square foot under Item 3 for 41 Northeast WRF Clarifiers 5 -8 Grouting shall be full compensation for all 42 labor materials, equipment and other work necessary to complete the 43 Work shown on the Drawings including, but not limited to, submittals, 44 samples, disposal of waste materials and construction debris; removal 45 and disposal of delaminated grout, cleaning of existing concrete 46 surface, application of bonding agent and installation of grout necessary MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 for the proper completion of the Work included in the Contract 2 Documents. 3 4 G. Marshall Street WRF Clarifiers 1 -4 Rehabilitation (Bid Item 4) — Not In 5 Contract 6 7 H. East WRF Clarifiers Rehabilitation (Bid Item 5) — Not In Contract 8 9 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for 10 Item 5 East WRF Clarifiers Rehabilitation of the shall not be made and 11 all items shall be included in the lump sum price bid. 12 13 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 5 shall be made in accordance with the 14 Schedule of Values and shall be full compensation for the furnishing of 15 all labor, materials, tools, equipment, and supervision required to 16 perform the work as shown on the drawings and specified herein 17 including but not limited to disassembly and removal of the east clarifier 18 walkway; removal of drives, scum baffles, scum beaches, scum beach 19 supports, weirs, and chlorine solution piping on each clarifier; reclaimed 20 water piping on the east clarifier walkway bridge, scum trough flush 21 water system on the east clarifier; and corroded skimmer arm assembly 22 at the surface of both clarifiers; sandblast and paint the rotating 23 mechanisms and the center columns on each clarifier, the access 24 platform on the west clarifier walkway bridge; furnish and install new 25 scum baffles, scum baffle supports, scum beaches, scum beach 26 supports, skimmer assemblies, chlorine solution piping, reclaimed water 27 piping on the walkway bridge, flush water piping system for the scum 28 trough, furnish and install a new walkway bridge on the east clarifier, 29 new drives for each clarifier, furnish and install new telescoping sludge 30 valve seals; replace the scum pump discharge valve and check valves 31 with new valves, excavate and replace the west clarifier effluent valve 32 and the east clarifier drain valve, inspection, startup, testing, and 33 coordination services by the manufacturer's authorized representative; 34 all pertinent Division 1 requirements; and, all other services necessary 35 for the complete rehabilitation of the Clarifiers at the East WRF as 36 detailed in the Contract Documents. 37 38 I. Mobilization (Bid Item 6) 39 40 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the lump sum price bid for 41 Mobilization shall be on a lump sum basis, but the cost shall not exceed 42 four percent (4 %) of the proposed Base Bid Total. 43 44 2. Payment: Payment for Bid Item 6 shall be full compensation for all 45 costs associated with initiating the project as limited by other sections of 46 the agreement including the Contractor's Performance and Payment MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -5 06/24/14 1 Bonds. Payment for these performances shall be based on the terms 2 of Section 01505 and in accordance with the Schedule of Values. 3 4 J. Indemnification (Bid Item 7) 5 6 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment of the amount stipulated 7 under Bid Item 7 Indemnification shall not be made and all items shall 8 be included in the lump sum. 9 10 2. Payment: Payment of One Hundred Dollars ($100.00) for Bid Item 7 11 shall be full compensation for Indemnification of the Owner and the 12 Owner's Engineer as specified in the General Conditions, and shall be 13 included in the first payment request. 14 15 K. Contingency Allowance (Bid Item 8) 16 17 1. Measurement: Measurement for payment shall be as agreed upon by 18 the Owner and Contractor. 19 20 2. Payment: Payment shall be made in accordance with the terms of the 21 Contingency Request and, if applicable, in accordance with the 22 Schedule of Values. 23 24 25 26 END OF SECTION MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT 01150 -6 06/24/14 1 1 I 1 SECTION 01152 2 3 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 14 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 I 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Submit Applications for Payment to the Engineer in accordance with the I 10 approved payment schedule and in the format established by the Owner. 11 12 B. Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review, the proposed Application 13 for Payment electronic form, prior to the first payment request. I14 15 1.02 FORMAT AND DATA REQUIRED 16 17 A. Submit applications in electronic format using Microsoft Excel 18 19 B. Provide itemized data in the same spreadsheet as the Pay Application Form 20 using different TAB(s). 21 22 1. Format, schedules, line items and values: those of the Schedule of I 23 Values accepted by the Engineer. 24 25 1.03 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR EACH PROGRESS PAYMENT I 26 27 A. Application Form: 28 I 29 1. Fill in required information, including that for Change Orders executed 30 prior to date of submittal of application. 31 I 32 33 2. Fill in summary of dollar values to agree with respective totals indicated on continuation sheets. 34 35 3. Execute certification with signature of a responsible officer of the 36 Contractor. 37 I 38 B. Continuation Sheets: 39 40 1. Fill in total list of all scheduled component items of work, with item I 41 number and scheduled dollar value for each item. 42 43 2. Fill in dollar value in each column for each scheduled line item when I 44 work has been performed or products stored. 45 3. List each Change Order executed prior to date of submission, at the 46 end of the continuation sheets. 1 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152 -1 06/24/14 1 a. List by Change Order Number, and description, as for an original 2 component item of work. 3 4 4. To receive approval for payment on component material stored on site, 5 submit electronic copies of the original invoices with the Application for 6 Payment. The application for payment must also include an electronic 7 table summarizing the amount of each invoice and the schedule of 8 values line item to which the stored materials apply. 9 10 1.05 SUBSTANTIATING DATA FOR PROGRESS PAYMENTS 11 12 A. Provide substantiating data, in electronic format, containing suitable 13 information for review of costs requested with a cover letter identifying: 14 15 1. Project. 16 17 2. Application number and date. 18 19 3. Detailed list of enclosures. 20 21 4. For stored products: 22 23 a. Item number and identification as shown on application. 24 25 b. Description of specific material. 26 27 c. Supplier invoices. 28 29 d. A table identifying stored material, amount stored, amount 30 installed, and schedule of values item, which the material 31 applies. 32 33 B. Submit one copy of data and cover letter for each copy of application. 34 35 C. The Contractor shall maintain an updated set of drawings to be used as record 36 drawings. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor 37 shall exhibit the updated record drawings for review by the Owner and the 38 Engineer. 39 40 D. Contractor shall maintain an updated construction schedule in accordance 41 with these Specifications. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, 42 Contractor shall submit the updated construction schedule with the 43 applications for progress payments. If the Contractor fails to submit the 44 required updated schedule within the time prescribed, the Engineer may 45 withhold approval of progress payment estimates until such a time as the 46 Contractor submits the required updated schedule. APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152 -2 06/24/14 1 E. Contractor shall maintain an updated set of As -Built Drawings in accordance 2 with these Specifications. As a prerequisite for monthly progress payments, 3 Contractor shall exhibit for the Engineer's review the updated As -Built 4 Drawings with the applications for progress payments. If the Contractor fails 5 to exhibit the updated As -Built Drawings for the Engineer's review, the 6 Engineer may withhold approval of progress payment estimates until such a 7 time as the Contractor submits same. 8 9 1.06 PREPARATION OF APPLICATION FOR FINAL PAYMENT 10 11 A. Fill in application form as specified for progress payments. 12 13 B. Use continuation sheet for presenting the final statement of accounting as 14 specified in the Specification. 15 16 C. All appropriate information must be entered on the application form. 17 18 1. The line title, "Application Period ", must indicate the dates between 19 which all work was completed during the pay period. These dates must 20 be consecutive with the dates of the previous Payment Request and 21 they must not overlap. 22 23 2. All blank lines within the "Contract Data" and "Summary of Project 24 Status" section of the application must be completed. Also, if any 25 Change Orders have been approved, the "Change Orders" section 26 must include that information. 27 28 3. All calculations and arithmetic must be precise to the penny. 29 30 4. The application must be signed and dated by an authorized 31 representative of the Contractor. 32 33 1.07 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURE 34 35 A. Prior to submitting a completed Application for Payment request, the 36 Contractor shall arrange a field meeting with the Owner and /or Engineer to 37 review and verify all installed quantities and /or stored materials. Only when 38 the Owner /Engineer and Contractor agree on installed quantities and 39 percentages, should the Application for Payment be submitted. 40 41 B. Submit six (6) copies of Applications for Payment to the Engineer at the times 42 stipulated in the General Conditions. 43 44 C. When the Engineer finds Application properly completed and correct, he will 45 transmit certificate for payment to Owner, with copy to Contractor. 46 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152 -3 06/24/14 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 4 5 6 END OF SECTION APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT 01152 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01153 2 3 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Promptly implement Change Order procedures. 10 11 1. Provide full written data required to evaluate changes. 12 13 2. Maintain detailed records of work done on a time and material /force 14 account basis. 15 16 3. Provide full documentation to Engineer on request. 17 18 B. Designate in writing the member of Contractor's organization: 19 20 1. Who is authorized to accept changes in the work. 21 22 2. Who is responsible for informing others in the Contractor's employ of 23 the authorization of changes in the work. 24 25 1.02 DEFINITIONS 26 27 A. Change Order: See General Conditions. 28 29 B. Work Directive Change: A written order to the Contractor, signed by Owner 30 and Engineer, which amends the Contract Documents as described, 31 authorizes Contractor to proceed with a change that affects the Contract Sum 32 or the Contract Time, and that will be included in a subsequent Change Order. 33 34 C. Engineer's Supplemental Instructions: A written order, instructions, or 35 interpretations, signed by Engineer making minor changes in the Work not 36 involving a change in Contract Sum or Contract Time. 37 38 D. Field Order: A written order to the Contractor, signed by the Engineer and the 39 Contractor, which is issued to interpret/clarify the Contract Documents, order 40 minor changes in the work. The work described by a Field Order is to be 41 accomplished without change to the Contract Sum, Contract Time, and /or 42 claims for other costs. 43 44 1.03 PRELIMINARY PROCEDURES 45 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -1 06/24/14 1 A. Owner and Engineer may initiate changes by submitting a Work Directive 2 Change to the Contractor. Request will include: 3 4 1. Detailed description of the change, products, and location of the change 5 in the Project. 6 7 2. Supplementary or revised Drawings and Specifications. 8 9 3. The projected time span for making the change, and a specific 10 statement as to whether overtime work is or is not authorized. 11 12 4. A specific period of time during which the requested price will be 13 considered valid. 14 15 B. Contractor may initiate changes by submitting a written notice to the Engineer, 16 containing: 17 18 1. Description of the proposed changes. 19 20 2. Statement of the reason for making the changes. 21 22 3. Statement of the effect on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time. 23 24 4. Statement of the effect on the work of separate contractors. 25 26 5. Documentation supporting any change in Contract Sum or Contract 27 Time, as appropriate. 28 29 1.04 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE AUTHORIZATION 30 31 A. Work Directive Change will describe changes in the Work, both additions and 32 deletions, with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of 33 the change and will designate the method of determining any change in the 34 Contract Sum and any change in Contract Time. 35 36 B. Owner and Engineer will sign and date the Work Directive Change as 37 authorization for the Contractor to proceed with the changes. 38 39 1.05 DOCUMENTATION OF PROPOSALS AND CLAIMS 40 41 42 43 44 45 B. On request, provide additional data to support time and cost computations: 46 A. Support each quotation for a lump sum proposal, and for each unit price, which has not previously been established, with sufficient substantiating data to allow the Engineer to evaluate the quotation. CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 w 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. Labor required. 2 3 2. Equipment required. 4 5 3. Products required. 6 7 a. Recommended source of purchase and unit cost. 8 9 b. Quantities required. 10 11 4. Taxes, insurance, and bonds. 12 13 5. Credit for work deleted from Contract, similarly documented. 14 15 6. Overhead and profit. 16 17 7. Justification for any change in Contract Time. 18 19 C. Support each claim for additional costs, and for work done on a time -and- 20 material /force account basis, with documentation as required for a Lump Sum 21 proposal, plus additional information: 22 23 1 Name of the Owner's authorized agent who ordered the work and date 24 of the order. 25 26 2. Dates and times work was performed and by whom. 27 28 3. Time record, summary of hours worked, and hourly rates paid. 29 30 4. Receipts and invoices for: 31 32 a. Equipment used, listing dates, and times of use. 33 34 b. Products used, listing of quantities. 35 36 c. Subcontracts. 37 38 1.06 PREPARATION OF CHANGE ORDERS AND FIELD ORDERS 39 40 A. Engineer will prepare each Change Order and Field Order. 41 42 B. Change Order will describe changes in the Work, both additions and deletions, 43 with attachments of revised Contract Documents to define details of the 44 change. 45 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -3 06/24/14 1 C. Change Order will provide an accounting of the adjustment in the Contract 2 Sum and in the Contract Time. 3 4 D. Field Order will describe interpretations or clarifications of Contract 5 Documents, order minor changes in the Work, and/ or memorialize trade -off 6 agreements. 7 8 E. Field Order work will be accomplished without change in the Contract Sum, 9 Contract Time, and /or claims for other costs. 10 11 1.07 LUMP SUM /FIXED PRICE CHANGE ORDER 12 13 A. Engineer initiates the form, including a description of the changes involved and 14 attachments based upon documents and proposals submitted by Contractor, 15 or requests from Owner, or both. 16 17 B. Once Engineer has completed and signed the form, all copies should be sent 18 to Contractor for approval. After approval by Contractor, all copies should be 19 sent to Owner for approval. Engineer should make distribution of executed 20 copies. 21 22 1.08 UNIT PRICE CHANGE ORDER 23 24 A. Content of Change Orders will be based on either: 25 26 1. Engineer's definition of the scope of the required changes. 27 28 2. Contractor's Proposal for a change, as recommended by Engineer. 29 30 3. Survey of complete work. 31 32 B. The amounts of the unit prices to be: 33 34 1. Those stated in the Agreement. 35 36 2. Those mutually agreed upon between Owner and Contractor. 37 38 C. When quantities of each of the items affected by the Change Order can be 39 determined prior to start of the work: 40 41 1. Owner and Engineer will sign and date a Work Directive Change as 42 authorization for Contractor to proceed with the changes. 43 44 D. When quantities of the items cannot be determined prior to start of the work: 45 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. Engineer or Owner will issue a Work Directive change directing the 2 Contractor to proceed with the change on the basis of unit prices, and 3 the Engineer will cite the applicable unit prices. 4 5 2. Upon completion of the change, the Engineer will determine the cost of 6 such work based on the unit prices and quantities used. Contractor 7 shall submit documentation to establish the number of units of each 8 item and any claims for a change in Contract Time. 9 10 3. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change 11 in Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 12 13 4. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate their 14 agreement with the terms therein. 15 16 5. Owner will then sign the change order. 17 18 1.09 TIME AND MATERIAUFORCE ACCOUNT CHANGE ORDER/CONSTRUCTION 19 CHANGE AUTHORIZATION 20 21 A. Engineer and Owner will issue a Work Directive Change directing Contractor 22 to proceed with the changes. 23 24 B. Upon completion of the change, the Contractor shall submit itemized 25 accounting and supporting data. 26 27 C. Engineer will determine the allowable cost of such work, as provided in 28 General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions. 29 30 D. Engineer will sign and date the Change Order to establish the change in 31 Contract Sum and in Contract Time. 32 33 E. Contractor will sign and date the Change Order to indicate agreement 34 therewith. 35 36 F. Owner will then sign the Change Order. 37 38 1.10 CORRELATION WITH CONTRACTOR'S SUBMITTALS 39 40 A. Not greater than monthly revise Schedule of Values and Application for 41 Payment forms to record each change as a separate item of work and to 42 record the adjusted Contract Amount. 43 44 B. Not greater than monthly revise the Progress Schedule to reflect each change 45 in Contract Time. Revise sub - schedules to show changes for other items of 46 work affected by the Change Order. 47 48 C. Upon completion of work under a Change Order, enter pertinent changes in 49 Record Documents. 50 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -5 06/24/14 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 2 3 PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED) 4 5 END OF SECTION CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES 01153 -6 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01200 2 3 MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 PRE - CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE 8 9 A. In accordance with the Contract Documents, prior to the commencement of 10 Work, a preconstruction conference shall be held at a mutually agreed time 11 and place. 12 13 B. The purpose of the conference shall be to designate responsible personnel 14 and establish a working relationship. Matters requiring coordination shall be 15 discussed and procedures for handling such matters established. The agenda 16 shall include as a minimum: 17 18 1. Contractor's Initial Construction Schedule 19 20 2. Procedures for Transmittal, Review and Distribution of Shop Drawings 21 22 3. Procedures for Submittal and Review of Monthly Applications for 23 Payment 24 25 4. Maintaining As -Built Drawings 26 27 5. Critical Work Sequencing and Construction Restrictions 28 29 6. Field Decisions and Change Orders 30 31 7. Field Office, Storage Areas and Security 32 33 8. Equipment and Material Deliveries 34 35 9. Safety Meetings and Program 36 37 10. Traffic Control Plan 38 39 11. Pre - construction Video 40 41 C. The Engineer shall preside at the conference, and shall arrange for 42 preparation and distribution of the minutes. 43 44 1.02 PROGRESS MEETINGS 45 46 A. The Owner shall schedule and conduct regular project meetings at least MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 01200 -1 06/24/14 1 monthly and at other times as deemed necessary by the progress of the work. 2 The Contractor and the Engineer shall be represented at each meeting. The 3 Contractor and /or Engineer may request attendance by representatives of 4 material Supplier(s) and Subcontractor(s). 5 6 B. The Engineer shall preside at the conference and shall arrange for keeping 7 the minutes and distributing them to all persons in attendance. The purpose of 8 the meetings shall include but not be limited to reviewing the progress of the 9 Work, maintaining coordination of efforts, discussing changes in scheduling 10 and resolving problems that may develop; claims review; and future 11 scheduling. 12 13 PART 2 — PRODUCT (Not Used) 14 15 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 16 17 18 END OF SECTION MEETINGS AND CONFERENCES 01200 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01300 2 3 SUBMITTALS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 GENERAL SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 8 9 A. All submittals, regardless of origin, shall be transmitted in the format provided 10 to the Contractor by the Engineer, certified and signed by the Contractor 11 indicating the submittal to be correct and in accordance with the Contract 12 Documents, and noting any special instructions regarding the submittal. Each 13 submittal shall identify the submittal number in the format required by the 14 Engineer, with the name and number of this contract, the Contractor's name, 15 and references to applicable specification paragraphs and Contract Drawings. 16 Each submittal shall indicate the intended use of the item in the Work. When 17 catalog pages are submitted, applicable items shall be clearly identified. The 18 current revision, issue number, and date shall be indicated on all drawings and 19 descriptive data. 20 21 B. Contractor shall stamp each submittal and said stamp shall be Contractor's 22 representation to Owner and Engineer that Contractor accepts full 23 responsibility for determining and verifying all quantities, dimensions, field 24 construction criteria, materials, catalog numbers, and similar data, and that he 25 has reviewed or coordinated each submittal with the requirements of the Work 26 and the Contract Documents. 27 28 C. All deviations from the Contract Documents shall be identified on each 29 submittal and shall be tabulated in Contractor's letter of transmittal. Such 30 submittals shall indicate, as pertinent to the deviation, essential details of all 31 changes proposed by Contractor (including modifications to other facilities that 32 may be a result of the deviation) and all required piping and wiring diagrams. 33 34 D. Contractor shall accept full responsibility for the completeness of each 35 submission, and, in the case of a resubmission, shall verify that all exceptions 36 previously noted by Engineer have been taken into account. In the event that 37 more than one resubmission is required because of the Contractor's failure to 38 account for exceptions previously noted, Contractor shall reimburse Owner for 39 the charges of Engineer for review of the additional resubmissions. 40 41 E. Resubmittals shall be made within seven (7) days of the date of the letter 42 returning the material to be modified or corrected, unless within seven (7) days 43 the Contractor submits an acceptable request for an extension of the 44 stipulated time period, listing the reasons the resubmittal cannot be completed 45 within that time. 46 SUBMITTALS 01300 -1 10/09/14 1 F. Any need for more than one resubmission, or any other delay in obtaining 2 Engineer's review of submittals, will not entitle Contractor to extension of the 3 Contract Time unless delay of the Work is directly caused by a change in the 4 work authorized by a Change Order. 5 6 G. Contractor's letter of resubmittal shall list the date of his original submittal, the 7 date of the Engineer's letter returning the submittal, and the dates of 8 submission and return of any previous resubmittals. 9 10 H. Engineer's review of drawings and data submitted by Contractor will cover 11 only general conformity to the drawings and specifications, external 12 connections, and dimensions that affect the layout. Engineer's review does 13 not indicate a thorough review of all dimensions, quantities, arid details of the 14 material, equipment, device or item shown. Engineer's review of submittals 15 shall not relieve Contractor from the responsibility for errors, omissions, or 16 deviations, or responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents. 17 18 I. It is intended that submittals be handled electronically whenever possible, 19 however, when necessary to employ paper copies, five copies of each drawing 20 and necessary data, plus the number of copies that the Contractor wants 21 returned, shall be submitted to Engineer. 22 23 J. Engineer will not accept submittals from anyone but Contractor. Submittals 24 shall be consecutively numbered as directed by Engineer or in direct 25 sequence of submittal and without division by subcontracts or trades. 26 Resubmittals shall bear the number of the first submittal followed by a letter 27 (A, B, etc.), to indicate the sequence of the resubmittal. If applicable, the 28 Engineer will provide the Contractor with an electronic file of the submittal 29 format to be followed. 30 31 K. When submittals are returned marked CONFIRM or REJECTED - RESUBMIT, 32 the corrections shall be made as noted thereon and as instructed by Engineer 33 and corrected copies shall resubmitted. 34 35 L. When corrected copies are resubmitted, Contractor shall in writing direct 36 specific attention to all revisions and shall list separately any revisions made 37 other than those called for by Engineer on previous submissions. 38 39 M. When the submittals are returned marked APPROVED, NO EXCEPTIONS 40 TAKEN or MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED resubmittal is not required. 41 42 1.02 SCHEDULE OF SUBMITTALS 43 44 A. The Contractor shall prepare and submit for approval a Schedule of Submittals 45 identifying the date of the initial submission, the beginning of manufacture as 46 applicable, and the delivery to the site. This Schedule shall be submitted as a SUBMITTALS 01300 -2 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 separate submittal and be approved as a prerequisite to the submission of any 2 other submittal. No other submittal or shop drawing will be reviewed until the 3 Schedule of Submittals is approved. 4 5 B. The Schedule of Submittals shall include all submittals specified to be 6 submitted including shop drawings, schedules, permits, warranties, 7 certifications, reports, and other items specified to be submitted. 8 9 C. The Schedule of Submittals shall show the submittal of each submittal and 10 shop drawing sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other 11 applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work sections 12 of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing 13 times, including disapproval and resubmittal (if required), coordination with 14 other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar 15 sequenced activities. 16 17 D. The Schedule of Submittals shall indicate those submittals that are critical to 18 the progress schedule. The Schedule shall show other, non - critical shop 19 drawing submittals spread out over the contract time as required to minimize 20 the number of concurrent reviews being performed, or as directed by the 21 Engineer. All equipment testing certifications, certifications of proper 22 installation, warranties, O &M manuals, spare parts and Owner training 23 materials specified to be provided shall be submitted in accordance with this 24 specification, and shall either be submitted with the shop drawing submittal for 25 the equipment, or submitted separately. 26 27 E. The Contractor shall so develop the Schedule of Submittals such that the total 28 number of submittals shall not exceed sixty (60). In developing the 29 Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor shall identify separate submittals for: 30 31 1. Each item of equipment specified in Divisions 11 through 14 and major 32 items of equipment listed in Division 16. 33 2. Each pipe material of construction (ductile iron, steel, PVC, HDPE, etc.) 34 3. Construction and start-up schedules. 35 4. Field testing and equipment start-up reports specified to be performed and 36 prepared by equipment suppliers. 37 38 In developing the Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor may identify a single 39 submittal for a given Division, such as Division 5 Miscellaneous Metals, or a 40 given Section, such as 15100 Valves, incorporating all items into a single 41 submittal. However, no submittal shall include items from two (or more) 42 different Divisions. 43 44 In developing the Schedule of Submittals, the Contractor may identify 45 equipment- related submittals for warranties, spare parts, O &M manuals, and 46 training plans separately, or with the specific equipment submittal, or in groups SUBMITTALS 01300 -3 10/09/14 1 of common items (i.e., O &M manuals, warranties, etc.). 2 3 As specified elsewhere, the Contractor will be required to submit certificates of 4 proper installation, sign -in sheets for equipment/systems training sessions, 5 and proof of delivery receipts for O &M manuals and spare parts, however, 6 such submittals will not count against the total number of subrnittals specified 7 above. Similarly, monthly schedule and narrative updates that are submitted 8 with Applications for Payment will not count against the total number of 9 submittals specified above. 10 11 F. In accordance with Section IIIA, the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner for 12 Engineer's cost to review excess submittals and re- submittals and /or 13 confirmations that exceed a total twelve (12) beyond the 60 specified above 14 (total of 72 submittals, re- submittals and confirmations). 15 16 G. Following is an example listing of the anticipated submittals for this project. 17 18 1 Schedule of Submittals 19 2 Surveyor Information 20 3 Schedule of Values 21 4 Construction Schedule 22 5 Schedule of Payments 23 6 Hurricane Preparedness Plan 24 7 Project Sign 25 8 Video Subcontractor and Pre Construction Video 26 9 NPDES Stormwater Permit 27 10 Building Department Permits 28 11 Dewatering Plan 29 12 Equipment Training Plan 30 13 Concrete 31 14 Grout, Bonding Agents 32 15 Clarifier Pressure Relief Valves 33 16 Stone and Geoweb for Groundwater PRVs 34 17 Aluminum Stairs, Miscellaneous Metals 35 18 FRP Weir Plates and Baffles 36 19 Paint and Coatings 37 20 Clarifier Mechanical Equipment 38 21 Clarifier O &M Manual & Training Manual 39 22 RAS Pump Equipment 40 23 RAS Pump O &M Manual & Training Manual 41 24 RAS Pump Shop Testing Results 42 25 RAS VFD Equipment 43 26 RAS VFD O &M Manual & Training Manual 44 27 WAS VFD Equipment 45 28 WAS VFD O &M Manual & Training Manual 46 29 Line Stops SUBMITTALS 01300 -4 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 30 DI Pipe, Fittings, Couplings & Accessories 2 31 C900, C905, PVC Pipe, Accessories 3 32 Pipe Supports 4 33 Small Diameter Metal Pipe, Fittings & Accessories for Seal Water 5 34 Butterfly Valves, all sizes, including O &M Manual 6 35 Check Valves, all sizes, including O &M Manual 7 36 Plug Valves, all sizes, including O &M Manual 8 37 Solenoid Valves, including O &M Manual 9 38 Temporary Power Plan 10 39 Clarifier Starters 11 40 Clarifier Starter O &M Manual & Training Manual 12 41 New Power Panel Equipment 13 42 New Low and High Voltage Panels, Transformer 14 43 New Scum Spray Control Box 15 44 Electrical Wiring, Raceways, and Cables and Electrical Boxes 16 and Fittings 17 45 Electrical Wiring Devices and Supporting Devices 18 46 Electrical Identification and Grounding 19 47 Electrical Motors, Starters, Disconnects 20 48 Surge Protection Devices 21 49 Sludge Blanket Detector Equipment 22 50 Sludge Blanket Detector O &M Manual & Training Manual 23 51 WAS Flow Meter 24 52 WAS Flow Meter O &M Manual & Training Manual 25 53 RAS Wet Well Level Sensor and Float Equipment 26 54 RAS Wet Well Level Sensor O &M Manual & Training Manual 27 55 Control System Training Manual 28 56 Segmented Rubber Wall Seals (Link Seals) 29 57 Hose Rack and Telescoping Valve Gaskets 30 58 Startup Schedule and Training Plan 31 59 Final Shop Drawings and O &M Manuals in Electronic Format 32 60 Contract Closeout Submittals 33 34 1.03 SCHEDULE OF VALUES 35 36 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review a Schedule of Values 37 after review of the tentative schedule and before submission of the first 38 application for payment. The schedule of values, showing the value of each 39 kind of work in sufficient detail as requested by the Engineer, shall be 40 acceptable to Engineer before any application for payment is prepared or 41 approved. 42 43 B. The sum of the items listed in the Schedule of Values shall equal the Contract 44 Price. Such items as Bond premium, temporary construction facilities, may be 45 listed separately in the schedule of values, provided the amounts can be 46 substantiated. Overhead and profit shall not be listed as separate items. The SUBMITTALS 01300 -5 10/09/14 1 Schedule of Values shall contain at minimum a complete listing of the various 2 project milestones that are "critical path" items according to the approved 3 construction schedule. 4 5 C. In addition to those items listed in Paragraph B, the O &M manuals, as -built 6 drawings, start-up, training, and any other individualized component that the 7 Contractor or Engineer wants separately itemized for payment shall also be 8 included on the Schedule of Values. 9 10 D. An unbalanced Schedule of Values providing for overpayment of Contractor 11 on items of Work that would be performed first will not be accepted. The 12 Schedule of Values shall be revised and resubmitted until acceptable to 13 Engineer. Final acceptance by Engineer shall indicate only consent to the 14 Schedule of Values as a basis for preparation of applications for progress 15 payments and shall not constitute an agreement as to the value of each 16 indicated item. 17 18 E. The minimum items to be included in the schedule of values are listed below: 19 a. Mobilization and Demobilization 20 b. Performance and Payment Bonds and Insurance 21 c. Schedule Submittal 22 d. Schedule of Values Submittal 23 e. Schedule of Shop Drawings Submittal 24 f. Schedule of Pay Applications Submittal 25 g. Dewatering Plan and Laydown Area 26 h. Clarifier Shop Drawing O &M and Training Submittals 27 i. RAS Pump Shop Drawing, O &M and Training Submittals 28 j. RAS and WAS VFD Shop Drawings, O &M and Training Submittals 29 k. Pipe and Valve Submittals 30 I. PRV Submittals 31 m. Power Panel Shop Drawing Submittal 32 n. Temporary Power Plan Submittal 33 o. Stairway Shop Drawings 34 p. Line Stop Shop Drawings 35 q. Paint Submittals 36 r. Sludge Blanket Detector Submittals 37 s. Clarifier 5 Demo 38 t. Clarifier 5 Floor Repair and PRV Replacement 39 u. Clarifier 5 Rotating and Ancillary Equipment Installation 40 v. Clarifier 5 Torque Testing and Startup 41 w. Clarifier 6 Demo 42 x. Clarifier 6 Floor Repair and PRV Replacement 43 y. Clarifier 6 Rotating and Ancillary Equipment Installation 44 z. Clarifier 6 Torque Testing and Startup 45 aa. Clarifier 7 Demo 46 bb. Clarifier 7 Floor Repair and PRV Replacement SUBMITTALS 01300 -6 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 cc. Clarifier 7 Rotating and Ancillary Equipment Installation 2 dd. Clarifier 7 Torque Testing and Startup 3 ee.Clarifier 8 Demo 4 ff. Clarifier 8 Floor Repair and PRV Replacement 5 gg. Clarifier 8 Rotating and Ancillary Equipment Installation 6 hh.Clarifier 8 Torque Testing and Startup 7 ii. RAS Pump 1 and Suction and Check Valve Replacement 8 jj. RAS Pump 1 Startup 9 kk. RAS Pump 2 and Suction and Check Valve Replacement 10 II. RAS Pump 2 Startup 11 mm. Install South Pump House RAS Piping Line Stop and Replace RAS 12 Pump Discharge Valves 13 nn. Install North Pump House RAS Piping Line Stop and Replace RAS Pump 14 Discharge Valves 15 00. Demo Existing RAS Pump 1 VFD and Install New VFD 16 pp. Demo Existing RAS Pump 2 VFD and Install New VFD 17 qq. Demo Existing WAS Pump 1 VFD and Install New VFD 18 rr. Demo Existing WAS Pump 1 VFD and Install New VFD 19 ss. Install Temporary Power Panel and Demo Existing MCC 20 tt. Install New Permanent Power Panel and Remove Temporary Power Panel 21 uu. Replace Telescopic Valve Tube Seals 22 vv. Replace WAS Valves and Modify Piping in North RAS Building 23 ww. Replace Clarifier Drain Valves 24 xx. Install Sludge Blanket Level Detectors 25 yy. Install RAS Wet Well Level Detector and Floats 26 zz. Perform SCADA Integration Work 27 aaa. Install WAS Flow Meter in South RAS Pump Building 28 bbb. Paint Structures and Piping 29 ccc. Pavement, Sidewalk, and Sodded Area Restoration 30 ddd. Record Drawings and Contract Closeout Documents 31 32 1.04 SCHEDULE OF PAYMENTS 33 34 A. Within thirty (30) days after Notice to Proceed, the Contractor shall furnish to 35 the Engineer a schedule of estimated monthly payments. The schedule shall 36 be revised and resubmitted each time an application for payment varies more 37 than 10 percent from the estimated payment schedule. 38 39 1.05 SURVEY DATA 40 41 A. All field books, notes, and other data developed by Contractor in performing 42 surveys required as part of the Work shall be available to Engineer for 43 examination throughout the construction period. All such data shall be 44 submitted to Engineer with the other documentation required for final 45 acceptance of the Work. 46 SUBMITTALS 01300 -7 10/09/14 1 1.06 SHOP DRAWING SUBMITTALS, WORKING DRAWINGS AND ENGINEERING 2 DATA 3 4 A. Shop drawings, working drawings, and engineering data shall be included in 5 the Schedule of Submittals identifying the dates for the initial submission of 6 shop and working drawings, the beginning of manufacture, testing and 7 installation of materials, supplies and equipment. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 C. The Schedule of Submittals shall indicate those submittals that are on the 18 project's critical path schedule, and shall show other submittals spread out 19 over the contract time as required to minimize the number of concurrent 20 reviews as directed by the Engineer. 21 22 D. Engineering data covering all equipment and fabricated materials that will 23 become a permanent part of the Work shall be submitted to Engineer, for 24 review. These data shall include drawings and descriptive information in 25 sufficient detail to show the kind, size, arrangement, and operation of 26 component materials and devices; the external connections, anchorages, and 27 supports required; performance characteristics; and dimensions needed for 28 installation and correlation with other materials and equipment. 29 30 1.07 SUBMITTALS FOR COLOR SELECTION 31 32 A. The following is a list of items that must be submitted together for color 33 selection. No single item on this list will be approved without the submittal of 34 all other items. 35 36 1. Paint for piping, valves, valve box covers, meter box covers, etc. 37 38 2. Paint for equipment. 39 40 PART 2 — PRODUCT (NOT USED) 41 42 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 43 44 45 END OF SECTION 46 B. The Schedule of Submittals shall show the submittal of each shop drawing sufficiently in advance of performing the related work or other applicable activities, or within the time specified in the individual work sections of the Specifications, so that the installation will not be delayed by processing times including re- review and resubmittal (if required), coordination with other submittals, testing, purchasing, fabrication, delivery, and similar sequenced activities. SUBMITTALS 01300 -8 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01310 2 3 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 4 5 6 PART 1 — GENERAL 7 8 1.01 GENERAL 9 10 A. Construction under this contract must be coordinated to assure that construction 11 is completed within the time allowed by the Contract Documents. The 12 Contractor will also coordinate his activities with the other contractors to allow 13 orderly and timely completion of all the work. 14 15 B. All construction schedules shall be of the critical path method, bar chart type, 16 and shall be prepared using SURETRACK, PRIMAVERA, or equal. 17 18 C. The Contractor is advised that the construction schedule must reflect that no 19 major pieces of equipment or systems may be shut down or started up within 20 one week prior to the toxicity screening and compliance testing events 21 highlighted on the City TRE Schedule at the end of this section. It is anticipated 22 that the 2015 TRE Schedule will look similar to the 2014 Schedule. 23 24 1.02 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULING GENERAL PROVISIONS 25 26 A. Within 15 calendar days after the issuance of the Notice of Award, the 27 Contractor shall prepare and submit to the Engineer a preliminary construction 28 progress schedule. The schedule shall contain a sufficient number of tasks such 29 that no single task has a value that exceeds 2.0% of the total Contract Price. 30 Partial payments will not be approved until an acceptable construction progress 31 schedule has been approved by the Engineer. 32 33 B. The schedule shall be updated monthly reflecting the approved baseline 34 schedule and the Contractor's progress on each activity. No progress payment 35 will be approved until the updated schedule is submitted and approved by the 36 Engineer. 37 38 C. Night work may be established by the Contractor as regular procedure only with 39 the prior written pemiission of the Owner. Such permission, however, may be 40 revoked at any time by the Owner if the Contractor fails to maintain adequate 41 equipment and supervision for the proper execution and control of the work at 42 night. 43 44 D. The Contractor shall designate an authorized representative who shall be 45 responsible for development and maintenance of the schedule and of progress 46 and payment reports. This representative of the Contractor shall have direct CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -1 10/14/14 1 project control and complete authority to act on behalf of the Contractor in 2 fulfilling the commitments of the Contractor's schedule. 3 4 1.03 PROGRESS OF THE WORK 5 6 A. The work shall be executed with such progress as may be required to prevent 7 any delay to the general completion of the work. The work shall be executed at 8 such times and in or on such parts of the project, and with such forces, materials 9 and equipment to assure completion of the work in the time established by the 10 Contract. 11 12 B. If the Contractor, for his convenience and at his own expense, should desire to 13 carry on his work at night or outside regular hours, he shall submit written notice 14 to the Engineer and he shall allow ample time for satisfactory arrangements to 15 be made for inspecting the work in progress. The Contractor shall reimburse the 16 Owner for extra inspection required for work outside regular hours. The 17 Contractor shall Tight the different parts of the project as required to comply with 18 all applicable Federal and State regulations and with all applicable requirements 19 of the municipality in which the work is being done. 20 21 PART 2 — PROGRESS SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS 22 23 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 24 25 A. As required within the General Conditions, the Contractor shall submit a critical 26 path progress schedule as described herein. The schedule shall take into 27 considerations all work phasing and restrictions as specified elsewhere in the 28 Contract Documents. 29 30 B. The critical path progress schedule requirement shall consist of a detailed 31 schedule, monthly status reports (Monthly Reports), a start-up schedule, and 32 revisions to the schedules and analyses as described. The planning, 33 scheduling, management and execution of the work are the sole responsibilities 34 of the Contractor. The progress schedule shall allow the Engineer to review 35 Contractor's planning, scheduling, management and execution of the work; to 36 assist Engineer in evaluating work progress and make progress payments; to 37 allow other contractors to cooperate and coordinate their activities with those of 38 the Contractor; and to provide Owner with information about "construction 39 schedule" and "cumulative outlay schedule." 40 41 C. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall not relieve Contractor from the 42 responsibility for any deviations from the Contract Documents unless Contractor 43 has in writing called Engineer's attention to such deviations at the time of 44 submission and Engineer has given written concurrence to the specific 45 deviations, nor shall any concurrence by Engineer relieve Contractor from 46 responsibility for errors and omissions in the submittals. CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -2 10/14/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 D. Float or slack time is not for the exclusive benefit of the Owner, the Engineer or 3 the Contractor. Extensions of time for performance, as specified in the General 4 and Supplementary Conditions, will be granted only to the extent that equitable 5 time adjustments for the network activity, or activities affected, exceed the total 6 float or slack time along the affected network paths, as shown in the precedence 7 diagram and report in effect at the instant of either (a) a notice to proceed with a 8 change, or (b) a notice of suspension of work or possession, or (c) detection of a 9 subsequently acknowledged differing site condition, or (d) occurrence of cause 10 for an excusable delay. Further, use of float time in the schedule, or the 11 allocation of float time to activities by means of special logic restraints or 12 imposed dates, shall be shared to the benefit of Owner, Engineer, Contractor, 13 and his subcontractors and suppliers in proportion of their scope of 14 responsibilities. Excessive use of float time to the detriment of succeeding 15 activities may be cause for denying an extension of time if it can be 16 demonstrated that the float along the network paths affected at the instant of the 17 delaying condition would have been larger than the delay had it not been for the 18 excessive and unreasonable float usage in violation of the sharing concept 19 required by this Specification. 20 21 E. Engineer's review of the schedule submittals shall be only for conformance with 22 the information given in the Contract Documents and shall not extend to the 23 means, methods, sequences and techniques or procedures of construction or to 24 safety precautions or programs incident thereto. Engineer's review of the 25 schedule submittals will be predicated on a Contractor's stamp of approval 26 signed off by Contractor. Contractor's stamp of approval on any schedule 27 submittals shall constitute a representation to Owner and Engineer that 28 Contractor, has either determined or verified all data on the submittal, or 29 assumes full responsibility for doing so, and that Contractor and his 30 subcontractors and suppliers have reviewed and coordinated the sequences 31 shown in the submittal with the requirements of the work under the Contract 32 Documents. 33 34 2.02 SUPPLEMENTARY REQUIREMENTS 35 36 A. Graphic network diagrams shall be on a time - scaled precedence network format. 37 The graphic network diagram shall include the following format: 38 39 1. Description of each activity, or restraint, shall be brief but convey the 40 scope of work described. 41 42 2. Activities shall identify all items of work that must be accomplished to 43 achieve Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion, 44 such as the major disciplines of work; items pertaining to the approval of 45 regulatory agencies; contractor's time required for submittals, fabrication 46 and deliveries; the time required by Engineer to review all submittals as CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -3 10/14/14 1 1 1 set forth in the Contract Documents; items of work required of Owner to 2 support pre - operational and start-up testing; time required for the 3 relocation of utilities. Activities shall also identify interface milestones with 4 the work of other contract work under separate contracts with Owner. I 5 6 3. Any activities not shown on the graphic network diagram shall be 7 considered to have no effect on the Contractor's ability to achieve 8 Substantial Completion, or any interim substantial completion, within the 9 Contract Time. Any delays to activities that do not appear in the 10 concurred detailed schedule shall give rise only to non - prejudicial delays. 11 Attempts to impose after - the -fact logic constraints where none existed 12 previously to justify time extensions will not be permitted. 13 I14 4. Activity durations shall be in whole working days. 15 16 5. Graphic diagrams shall be time - scaled and sequenced by work areas. 17 The Diagram of Activities shall show numerical values for total float and 18 be shown on their early schedules. The diagram shall be neat and legible 19 and submitted on sheets no larger than 24 inches by 36 inches on a 20 medium suitable for reproduction. 21 22 B. Printout reports shall contain the following data for each activity or restraint: 23 24 1. Activity identification, activity description, activity duration, activity 25 man -days, computed or specified early start date, computed early finish 26 date, computed late start date, computed or specified late finish date, and 27 total float and free float. 28 29 2. Five separate reports shall be provided, including all activities and 30 restraints, and shall be submitted monthly as follows: 31 32 a. Activity, sort by early start dates in order of ascending numbers. 33 b. Activity, sort by department. 34 c. Float report, in order of ascending total float values. 35 d. Successor /predecessor report. 36 37 PART 3 — EXECUTION 38 I 39 3.01 DETAILED SCHEDULE SUBMITTAL 40 41 A. Submittal shall include a time - scaled graphic diagram showing all Contract 42 activities, computer printout reports, and a supporting narrative. The initial 43 Detailed Schedule submittal shall be delivered within 10 calendar days after the 44 Notice to Proceed, and shall use the Notice to Proceed as the "data date ". Upon 45 receipt of Engineer's comments, Contractor shall meet with Engineer and 46 discuss an appraisal and evaluation of the proposed work plan. Necessary CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -4 10/14/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 revisions resulting from this review shall be made by Contractor and the detailed 2 schedule resubmitted within 15 calendar days after the meeting. The re- 3 submittal, if agreed to by the Owner, and unless subsequently changed with the 4 concurrence of or at the direction of Owner, shall be the work plan to be used by 5 the Contractor for planning, scheduling, managing and executing the work. If 6 Contractor fails to provide an acceptable Detailed Schedule submittal, he will be 7 deemed not to have provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, 8 which will further constitute reasons for refusing to recommend payment. 9 10 B. The graphic diagram shall be formatted in accordance with Article 2.02(A) 11 above. The diagram shall include (1) all detailed activities grouped by major 12 areas of work. The critical path activities shall be identified, including critical 13 paths for interim dates, if applicable, by clearly highlighting the path on the 14 graphics diagram. 15 16 C. This submittal shall include five copies of the graphic diagram, the printout 17 reports and the narrative, in accordance with Article 2.02 of these scheduling 18 requirements. 19 20 D. The narrative shall include sufficient data to explain the basis of Contractor's 21 determination of durations, describe the contract conditions and restraints 22 plugged into the schedule, and provide a "what -if' analysis pertaining to potential 23 problems and practical steps to mitigate them. Should Engineer require 24 additional data, this information shall be supplied by Contractor within ten 25 calendar days. 26 27 3.02 MONTHLY STATUS REPORTS 28 29 A. Beginning with the first month, and every month thereafter, Contractor shall 30 submit to Engineer, with each Application for Payment, a Monthly Status Report 31 (based on the Detailed Schedule) with data as of the last day of the pay period. 32 The monthly Status Report shall include a revised copy of the currently accepted 33 graphic diagram, computer printouts and a narrative. The Monthly Status Report 34 will be reviewed by the Engineer. The Contractor shall address the Engineer's 35 comments in the subsequent Monthly Status Report. If Contractor fails to 36 provide acceptable Monthly Status Reports, he will be deemed not to have 37 provided a basis upon which progress may be evaluated, which will be reason 38 for refusing to recommend progress payments. 39 40 B. The revised diagram shall show, for the currently accepted detailed diagram, 41 percentages of completion for all activities, actual start and finish dates, and 42 remaining durations, as appropriate. Activities not previously included in the 43 currently accepted detailed schedule shall be added, except that contractual 44 dates will not be changed except by Change Order. Review of a revised 45 diagram by the Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with the 46 time frames, duration, or sequencing for such added activities; instead the CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -5 10/14/14 1 corresponding data as ultimately incorporated into an appropriate change order 2 shall govern. 3 4 C. The narrative shall include the information shown in the following outline in a 5 narrative form: 6 7 1. Construction progress (refer to activity number in the Detailed Schedule) 8 including: 9 10 a. Activities completed this reporting period; 11 b. Activities in progress this reporting period; 12 c. Activities scheduled to commence next reporting period. 13 14 2. Description of problem areas 15 16 3. Current and anticipated delays 17 18 a. Cause of the delay; 19 b. Corrective action and schedule adjustments to correct the delay; 20 c. Impact of the delay on other activities, on milestones, and on 21 completion dates. 22 23 4. Changes in construction sequence 24 25 5. Pending items and status thereof 26 27 a. Permits 28 b. Change Orders 29 c. Time extensions 30 d. Other 31 32 6. Contract completion date status 33 34 a. Ahead of schedule and number of days 35 b. Behind schedule and number of days 36 37 3.03 REVISIONS 38 39 A. All revised Detailed Schedule submittals shall be in the same form and detail as 40 the initial submittal and shall be accompanied by an explanation of the reasons 41 for such revisions, all of which shall be subject to review by Engineer. The 42 revision shall incorporate all previously made changes to reflect current as -built 43 conditions. Minor changes to the submittal may be reviewed at monthly 44 meetings. Changes to activities having adequate float shall be considered a 45 minor change. 46 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -6 10/14/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. A revised detailed work plan submittal shall be submitted for review, when 2 required by Engineer, for one of the following reasons: 3 4 1. Owner or Engineer directs a change that affects the date(s) specified in 5 the Agreement or alters the length of a critical path. 6 7 2. Contractor elects to change any sequence of activities so as to affect a 8 critical path of the currently accepted detailed schedule documents. 9 10 C. If, prior to agreement on an equitable adjustment to the Contract Time, Engineer 11 requires revisions to the Detailed Schedule in order to evaluate planned 12 progress, Contractor shall provide an interim revised submittal for review with 13 change effect(s) incorporated as directed. Approved interim revisions to the 14 documents will be incorporated during the first subsequent Monthly Status 15 Report. 16 17 3.04 START -UP SCHEDULE SUBMITTALS 18 19 A. At least 60 calendar days prior to the date when the first two clarifiers are 20 scheduled to be placed in service, and at least 60 calendar days prior to the date 21 of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall submit time - scaled (days after notice 22 to proceed) graphic diagrams detailing the work to take place in the time period 23 between 30 calendar days prior to when the first two clarifiers are scheduled to 24 be placed in service, and 30 calendar days prior to the date of Substantial 25 Completion, together with a supporting narrative in the same format as the 26 approved project schedule. Engineer shall respond within 10 calendar days 27 after receipt of the submittal. Upon receipt of Engineer's comments, Contractor 28 shall make the necessary revisions and submit the revised schedule within ten 29 calendar days. If Contractor fails to provide acceptable Start -up Schedule 30 Submittals, he will be deemed not to have provided a basis upon which progress 31 may be evaluated, which will be reason for refusing to recommend payment. 32 33 B. The Start -up Schedule may not be combined with the Detailed Schedule. The 34 Start-up Schedule shall show much greater detail than the Detailed Schedule for 35 start -up activities. Typical information required includes, but is not limited to, the 36 timing of vendor representatives, pre-op testing, individual equipment start -ups, 37 Owner's training, and performance certification testing. 38 39 C. The graphic diagram shall use the currently accepted Detailed Schedule for 40 those activities completed ahead of the last 30 calendar days prior to when the 41 first two clarifiers are scheduled to be placed in service, and 30 calendar days 42 prior to the date of Substantial Completion, and detailed activities for the 43 remaining period within the time frames outlined in the currently accepted 44 Detailed Schedule. 45 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -7 10/14/14 1 D. Contractor will be required to continue the requirement for monthly reports, as 2 outlined above. In preparing these reports, Contractor must assure that the 3 Detailed Schedule is consistent with the progress noted in the Start-up 4 Schedule. 5 6 E. In addition, Contractor will be required to submit a revised copy of the start-up 7 graphic diagram on a monthly basis with a start-up narrative, This revised 8 diagram shall highlight percentages of completion, actual start and finish dates, 9 and remaining durations as applicable. Activities not previously included in the 10 accepted detailed work plan shall be added in these submittals, except that 11 contractual dates shall not be changed except by Change Order. Reviews of 12 these submittals by Engineer will not be construed to constitute concurrence with 13 the time frames, durations or sequence of work for each added activity. 14 15 3.05 CONSTRUCTION PERIOD 16 17 A. Whenever it becomes apparent from the current monthly progress evaluation 18 and updated schedule data that any milestone and /or Contract completion date 19 will not be met, the Contractor shall take appropriate action to bring the work 20 back on schedule. Actions could include: 21 22 1. Increase construction manpower in such quantities arid crafts as to 23 substantially eliminate the backlog of work; 24 25 2. Increase the number of working hours per shift, shifts per work day, work 26 days per week, or the amount of construction equipment, or any 27 combination of the foregoing sufficient to substantially eliminate the 28 backlog of work; and 29 30 3. Reschedule work items to achieve concurrency of accomplishment. 31 32 B. The addition of equipment or construction forces, increasing the working hours 33 or any other method, manner, or procedure to return to the current Detailed 34 Schedule shall be at the Contractor's own cost and shall not be considered 35 justification for a Change Order or treated as an acceleration order. 36 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -8 10/14/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Preliminary Schedule of THE activities for City of Clearwater East/Northeast 2 facility: 3 4 9/18/13 — Perform Phase I TIE on toxic 8 -9 September 2013 sample 5 6 11/5/13 — Conduct quarterly compliance testing (samples collected 3 -8 November) 7 8 12/10/13 — Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (8 -9 9 December sample) 10 11 12/30/13 — Submit quarterly progress report to FL DEP 12 13 1/7/14 — Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (5 -6 14 January sample) 15 16 2/4/14 — Conduct quarterly compliance testing (samples collected 2 -7 February) 17 18 3/4/14 — Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (2 -3 19 March sample) 20 21 3/28/14 — Submittal date for the Jan -Mar quarterly report 22 23 4/8/14 — Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (6 -7 24 April sample). 25 26 5/6/14 — Conduct quarterly compliance testing (samples collected 4 -9 May) — 27 Collect and save additional volume of sample at each collection date. 28 6/3/14 — Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (1 -2 29 June sample). 30 31 6/27/14 — Submittal date for the Apr -Jun quarterly TCP progress report. 32 33 7/8/14 — Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (6 -7 34 July sample). 35 36 8/5/14 — Conduct quarterly compliance testing (samples collected 3 -8 August) — 37 Collect and save additional volume of sample at each collection date. 38 39 9/9/14 — Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (7 -8 40 September sample). 41 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -9 10/14/14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 9/29/14 — 10/7/14 — 11/4/14 — 12/9/14 — 12/29/14 — Submittal date for Jul -Sep quarterly TCP progress report. Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (5-6 October sample). Conduct quarterly compliance testing (samples collected 2 -7 November) — Collect and save additional volume of sample at each collection date. Conduct monthly 100% chronic toxicity screening for potential TIE (7 -8 December sample). Submittal date for Oct -Dec quarterly TCP progress report END SECTION CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES 01310 -10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/14/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01340 2 3 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer for review such working drawings, 10 shop drawings, test reports and data on materials and equipment (hereinafter 11 in this Section called data), and material samples (hereinafter in this Section 12 called samples) as are required for the proper control of work, including but 13 not limited to those working drawings, shop drawings, data and samples for 14 materials and equipment specified elsewhere in the Specifications and in the 15 Contract Drawings. 16 17 B. The Contractor shall note that there are specific submittal requirements in 18 other sections of these Specifications, including the requirement to submit and 19 have approved a Schedule of Shop Drawing Submittals prior to the submittal 20 of any other shop drawing, as described in Section 01300. 21 22 1.02 SHOP DRAWINGS 23 24 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "shop drawings" shall be 25 considered to mean Contractor's Drawings for material and equipment that will 26 become an integral part of the Project. These drawings shall be complete and 27 detailed. Shop drawings shall consist of fabrication, erection and setting 28 drawings and schedule drawings, manufacturer's scale drawings, bills of 29 material, wiring and control diagrams, and inspection and test reports including 30 performance curves and certifications as applicable to the Work. 31 32 B. All details on shop drawings submitted for review shall show clearly the 33 elevations of the various parts to the main members and lines of the structure 34 and /or equipment, and where correct fabrication of the work depends upon 35 field measurements, such measurements shall be made and noted on the 36 shop drawings before being submitted for review. 37 38 1.03 PRODUCT DATA 39 40 A. Product data as specified in individual sections, include, but are not 41 necessarily limited to, standard prepared data for manufactured products 42 (sometimes referred to as catalog data), such as the manufacturers product 43 specification and installation instructions, availability of colors and patterns, 44 manufacturer's printed statements of compliances and applicability, roughing - 45 in diagrams and templates, catalog cuts, product photographs, standard wiring 46 diagrams, printed performance curves and operational -range diagrams, SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -1 06/24/14 1 1 1 production or quality control inspection and test reports and certifications, mill 2 reports, product operating and maintenance instructions and recommended 3 spare -parts listing storage instructions, and printed product warranties, as 4 applicable to the work. 5 6 1.04 WORKING DRAWINGS 7 8 A. When used in the Contract Documents, the term "working drawings" shall be 9 considered to mean the Contractor's Drawings for temporary structures such 10 as temporary bulkheads, support of open cut excavation, support of utilities, 11 ground water control systems, forming and falsework for underpinning; and for 12 such other work such as bypass and dewatering plans as may be required for 13 construction but does not become an integral part of the Project. 14 15 B. Working drawings shall be signed and sealed by a registered Professional 16 Engineer, currently licensed to practice in the State and shall convey, or be 17 accompanied by, calculations or other sufficient information to completely 1 18 explain the structure, machine, or system described and its intended manner 19 of use. Prior to commencing such work, working drawings must have been 20 reviewed without specific exceptions by the Engineer. Such review will be for 1 21 general conformance and will not relieve the Contractor in any way from his 22 responsibility with regard to the fulfillment of the terms of the Contract. All 23 risks of error are assumed by the Contractor. The Owner and Engineer shall 24 have no responsibility for errors on the working drawings or the finished work. 25 26 1.05 SAMPLES 27 28 A. The Contractor shall furnish, for review of the Engineer, samples required by 29 the Contract Documents or requested by the Engineer. Samples shall be 30 delivered to the Engineer as specified or directed and in quantities and sizes 31 as specified. A minimum of two samples of each item shall be submitted 32 unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall prepay all shipping charges 33 on samples. Materials or equipment for which samples are required shall not 34 be used in work until reviewed by the Engineer. 35 36 B. Samples specified in individual sections, include, but are not necessarily 37 limited to, physical examples of the work such as sections of manufactured or 38 fabricated work, small cuts or containers of materials, complete units of 39 repetitively -used products, color /texture /pattern swatches and range sets, 40 specimens for coordination of visual effect, graphic symbols, and units of work 41 to be used by the Engineer or Owner for independent inspection and testing, 42 as applicable to the Work. 43 44 C. The Contractor shall prepare a transmittal letter for each shipment of sample, 45 shall enclose a copy of this letter with the shipment, and shall send a copy of 46 this letter to the Engineer. Review of a sample shall be only for the SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 characteristics or use named in such review and shall not be construed to 2 change or modify any Contract requirements. 3 4 1.06 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 5 6 A. The Contractor shall review, approve, and submit, with reasonable 7 promptness and in such sequence, so as to cause no delay in the Contract 8 Work or in the Work of the Owner or any separate contractor, all shop 9 drawings, product data, working drawings and samples required by the 10 Contract Documents. 11 12 B. It is intended that all shop drawing be submitted electronically using email, 13 however, when electronic submittals cannot be made, the Contractor shall 14 submit to the Engineer five (5) copies of the shop drawing, plus the number of 15 copies he wants returned. The Engineer will review the submittal and 16 electronically return to the Contractor appropriate review comments and /or 17 marked -up copies of the shop drawings if applicable. 18 19 C. Shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples shall be 20 transmitted using a form provided by the Engineer and furnished with the 21 following information: 22 23 1. Number and title of the drawing. 24 25 2. Date of drawing or revision. 26 27 3. Name of project building, facility or system. 28 29 4. Name of contractor, subcontractor, and manufacturer submitting 30 drawing. 31 32 5. Clear identification of contents, location of the work, and the sheet 33 numbers where the product is found in the contract drawings. 34 35 6. Contractor Certification Statement. 36 37 7. Submittal Identification Number. 38 39 8. Contract Drawing Number Reference. 40 41 9. Statement indicating any deviations from the Contract Documents. 42 43 D. All items specified are not necessarily intended to be a manufacturer's 44 standard product. Variations from specified items will be considered on an "or 45 equal" basis. If submittals show variations from Contract requirements 46 because of standard shop practice or for other reasons, the Contractor shall SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -3 06/24/14 1 1 1 describe such variations in his letter of transmittal and on the shop drawings I 2 along with notification of his intent to seek contract adjustment. If acceptable, 3 proper adjustment in the Contract shall be implemented where appropriate. If 4 the Contractor fails to describe such variations he shall not be relieved of the I 5 responsibility for executing the work in accordance with the Contract, even 6 though such drawings have been reviewed. Variations submitted but not 7 described may be cause for rejection. Any variations initiated by the I 8 Contractor will not be considered as an addition to the scope of work unless 9 specifically noted and then approved as such in writing by the Engineer. 10 I 11 E. Data on materials and equipment shall include materials and equipment lists 12 giving, for each item thereon, the name and location of the supplier or 13 manufacturer, trade name, catalog reference, material, size, finish and all 1 14 other pertinent data. 15 16 F For all mechanical and electrical equipment, the Contractor shall provide a 17 single list that includes the equipment name, and address and telephone I 18 number of the manufacturer's representative and service company, so that 19 service and /or spare parts can be readily obtained. In addition, a maintenance 20 and lubrication schedule for each piece of equipment shall be submitted as 1 21 specified in Section 01730. 22 23 G. The Contractor shall use the color "green" to make his remarks on the I 24 Submittals. Only the Engineer will utilize the color "red" in marking submittals. 25 26 1.07 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY 27 28 A. It is the duty of the Contractor to check, and coordinate with the work of all 29 trades, all drawings, data, schedules and samples prepared by or for him I 30 before submitting them to the Engineer for review. Each copy of every 31 drawing or data sheet 11 "x17" and larger shall bear Contractor's stamp 32 showing that they have been so checked and approved. Drawings or data I 33 sheets 11"x17" and smaller shall be bound together in an orderly fashion and 34 bear the Contractor's stamp on the cover sheet. The cover sheet shall fully 35 describe the packaged data and include a list of all sheet numbers within the 36 package. Shop drawings submitted to the Engineer without the Contractor's 37 stamp will be returned to the Contractor, without review at the Engineer's 38 option. I 39 40 B. The Contractor shall review shop drawings, product data, and samples prior to 41 submission to determine and verify the following: 42 43 1. Field measurements. 44 I 45 2. Field construction criteria. 46 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3. Manufacturer's catalog numbers and similar data. 2 3 4. Conformance with Specifications. 4 5 C. Shop drawings shall indicate any deviations in the submittal from the 6 requirements of the Contract Documents. 7 8 D. No extension of time will be authorized because of the Contractor's failure to 9 transmit complete and acceptable submittals sufficiently in advance of the 10 Work. 11 12 E. The Contractor shall not begin any work affected by a submittal returned, 13 "Confirm" or "Rejected- Resubmit ". Before starting this work, all revisions 14 must be corrected by the Contractor. After resubmittal they will be reviewed 15 and returned by the Engineer. If returned marked, "No Exceptions Taken" or 16 "Make Corrections Noted ", the Contractor may begin this work. Any 17 corrections made to these shop drawings shall be followed without exception. 18 19 F. The Contractor shall submit to the Engineer all shop drawings and data 20 sufficiently in advance of construction requirements to provide not less than 21 twenty -one (21) calendar days for Engineer's review from the time the 22 Engineer receives them. 23 24 G. The Contractor shall be responsible for and bear all cost that may result from 25 the ordering of any material or from proceeding with any part of work prior to 26 review by the Engineer of the necessary shop drawings. 27 28 H. All shop drawings, product data, working drawings and samples submitted by 29 subcontractors for review shall be sent directly to the Contractor for checking. 30 The Contractor shall be responsible for their submission according to the 31 approved shop drawing schedule so as to prevent delays in delivery of 32 materials and project completion. 33 34 I. The Contractor shall check all subcontractor's shop drawings, product data, 35 working drawings and samples regarding measurements, size of members, 36 materials, and details to satisfy him that they are in conformance to the 37 Contract Documents. Shop drawings found to be inaccurate or otherwise in 38 error shall be returned to the subcontractors for correction before submission 39 to the Engineer. 40 41 1.08 ENGINEER'S REVIEW OF SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING 42 DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 43 44 A. The Engineer's review is for general conformance with the design concept and 45 contract drawings. Markings or comments shall not be construed as relieving 46 the Contractor from compliance with the Contract Drawings and Specifications SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -5 06/24/14 1 1 1 or departures thereof. The Contractor remains responsible for details and I 2 accuracy, for coordinating the work with all other associated work and trades, 3 for selecting fabrication processes, for techniques of assembly, and for 4 performing work in a safe manner. I 5 6 B. The review of shop drawings, data, and samples will be general. The review 7 shall not be construed as: I 8 9 1. Permitting any departure from the Contract requirements; 10 I 11 2. Relieving the Contractor of responsibility for any errors, including 12 details, dimensions, and materials; 13 I14 3. Approving departures from details furnished by the Engineer, except as 15 otherwise provided herein. 16 1 17 C. If the shop drawings, data or samples as submitted describe variations and 18 show a departure from the Contract Documents, which Engineer finds to be in 19 the interest of the Owner and to be so minor as not to involve a change in 20 Contract Price or Time, the Engineer may return the reviewed drawings I 21 without noting an exception. 22 23 D. Shop drawings will be returned to the Contractor under one of the following: I 24 25 "NO EXCEPTIONS TAKEN" is assigned when there are no notations or 26 comments on the submittal. When returned under this code the Contractor I 27 may release the equipment and /or material for manufacture. 28 29 "MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED" is assigned when notations or comments I 30 have been made on the submittal pointing out minor discrepancies as 31 compared with the Contract Documents. Resubmittal or confirmation is not 32 necessary prior to release for manufacturing. I 33 34 "EXCEPTIONS AS NOTED" or "CONFIRM" is assigned when a confirmation 35 of the notations and comments is required from the Contractor. The I 36 Contractor may release the equipment or material for manufacture; however, 37 all notations and comments must be incorporated into the final product 38 addressing the omissions and /or nonconforming items that were noted. Only 39 the items to be "confirmed" need to be resubmitted. 40 41 "REJECTED - RESUBMIT" is assigned when the submittal is in I 42 noncompliance with the Contract Documents and must be corrected and the 43 entire package resubmitted. This code generally means that the equipment or 44 material cannot be released for manufacture unless the Contractor takes full I45 responsibility for providing the submitted items in accordance with Contract 46 Documents. SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -6 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 "FOR YOUR INFORMATION" is assigned when the package provides 2 information of a general nature that may or may not require a response. 3 4 E. Resubmittals will be handled in the same manner as first submittals. On 5 resubmittals the Contractor shall direct specific attention, in writing, on the 6 transmittal and on resubmitted shop drawings by use of revision triangles or 7 other similar methods, to revisions other than the corrections requested by the 8 Engineer on previous submissions. Any such revisions that are not clearly 9 identified shall be made at the risk of the Contractor. The Contractor shall 10 make corrections to any work done because of this type revision that is not in 11 accordance to the Contract Documents as may be required by the Engineer. 12 13 F If the Contractor considers any correction indicated on the shop drawings to 14 constitute a change to the Contract Documents, the Contractor shall give 15 written notice thereof to the Engineer at least seven (7) working days prior to 16 release for manufacture. 17 18 G. The number of shop drawings the Engineer will review is limited as described 19 in Section IIIA. The Contractor will be back charged for costs incurred by the 20 Engineer from excessive shop drawing submittals or resubmittals as described 21 in Section IIIA 22 23 H. When the shop drawings have been completed to the satisfaction of the 24 Engineer, the Contractor shall carry out the construction in accordance 25 therewith and shall make no further changes therein except upon written 26 instruction from the Engineer. 27 28 I. Partial submittals may not be reviewed. The Engineer will be the only judge 29 as to the completeness of a submittal. Submittals not complete will be 30 returned to the Contractor. The Engineer may at his option provide a list or 31 mark the submittal directing the Contractor to the areas that are incomplete. 32 33 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 34 35 2.01. SHOP DRAWINGS 36 37 A. Final approved shop drawings shall be submitted in electronic format, 38 organized by submittal number, on CD. 39 40 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 41 42 43 END OF SECTION 44 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 01340 -7 06/24/14 1 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, WORKING DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES I 01340 -8 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01385 2 3 COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. Scope 10 11 The Contractor shall prepare color audio /video DVDs of all work areas within 12 20 days of the Notice to Proceed. These specifications shall supplement the 13 Owner's color audio -video construction records requirements, if any, and the 14 more stringent shall apply. 15 16 B. Requirements Included 17 18 Prior to commencing work, the Contractor shall have a continuous color 19 audio /video DVD recording taken of the entire Project, including access to the 20 site of the work. Streets, easements, rights -of way, lots or construction sites 21 within the Project must be recorded to serve as a record of pre- construction 22 conditions. One copy of the DVD recordings and video log shall be submitted 23 to the Owner. The Engineer will designate those areas, if any, to be omitted 24 from or added to the audio - visual coverage. All DVDs and written records 25 shall become the property of the Owner. 26 27 C. Scheduling 28 29 No construction shall begin prior to review of the DVDs covering the Project 30 construction area(s) by the Owner. The Owner will have the authority to reject 31 all or any portion of video DVD not conforming to specifications and order that 32 it be redone at no additional charge. The Contractor shall reschedule 33 unacceptable coverage within seven days after being notified. 34 35 D. Videographer Qualifications 36 37 The Contractor shall engage the services of a professional videographer 38 known to be skilled and regularly engaged in the business of preconstruction 39 color audio -video DVD documentation. The videographer, through the 40 Contractor, shall furnish to the Engineer a list of all equipment to be used for 41 the audio -video recording, i.e., manufacturer's name, model number, 42 specifications and other pertinent information. 43 44 Additional information to be furnished by the videographer is the names and 45 addresses of two references that the videographer has performed color audio - 46 video recording on projects of a similar nature within the last 12 months. COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385 -1 06/24/14 1 2 3 4 E. 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 F. 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 G. 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 1 1 Engineer's approval of the selected videographer is required prior to taking first audio -video DVD. Equipment The Contractor shall finish all equipment, accessories, materials and labor to perform this service. The total audio -video system shall reproduce bright, sharp, clear pictures with accurate colors and shall be free from distortion, tearing, rolls or any other form of imperfection. The audio portion of the recording shall reproduce the commentary of the camera operator with proper volume, clarity and be free from distortion and interruptions. In some instances, audio -video coverage may be required in areas not accessible by conventional wheeled vehicles. Such coverage shall be obtained by walking. The color video camera used in the recording shall be of Industrial Grade and shall have EIA Standard NTSC type color - 1.0V 75 OHMS. Video output from camera shall be capable of horizontal resolution of 350 lines at center and utilize a minimum of 8:1 zoom with a 2/3 Newvicon tube or CCD pick -up 1 element for optimum color imagery plus minimum lag through of one foot candle. The recording shall be made with Industrial Grade recorder. The recordings shall be high resolution, extended still frame capable, in color. The 1 recorded video DVDs shall be compatible for playback with any American TV Standard DVD player. Recorded Information, Audio Each DVD shall begin with the current date, project name andl be followed by the general location, i.e., viewing side and direction of progress. Accompanying the video recording of each video DVD shall be a corresponding and simultaneously recorded audio recording. This audio recording, exclusively containing the commentary of the camera operator or aide, shall assist in viewer orientation and in any needed identification, differentiation, clarification, or objective description of the features being shown in the video portion of the recording. The audio recording shall also be free from any conversations. Recorded Information, Video 1 All video recordings must continuously display transparent digital information to include the date and time of recording. The date information shall contain the month, day and year. The time information shall contain the actual hour, minutes and seconds of the day. Additional information shall be displayed periodically. Such information shall include, but not be limited to, project name, contract number, direction of travel and the viewing side. This transparent information shall appear on the extreme upper left hand third of the screen. Camera pan, tilt, zoom -in and zoom -out rates shall be sufficiently controlled such that recorded objects are clearly viewed during video DVD COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 playback. In addition, all other camera and recording system controls, such as 2 lens focus and aperture, video level, pedestal, chrome, white balance, and 3 electrical focus shall be properly controlled or adjusted to maximize picture 4 quality. The construction documentation shall be recorded in SP mode. 5 6 H. Viewer Orientation 7 8 The audio and video portions of the recording shall maintain viewer 9 orientation. To this end, overall establishing views of all visible house and 10 business addresses shall be utilized. In areas where the proposed 11 construction location will not be readily apparent to the video DVD viewer, 12 highly visible yellow flags shall be placed, by the Contractor, in such a fashion 13 as to clearly indicate the proposed centerline of construction. When 14 conventional wheeled vehicles are used as conveyances for the recording 15 system, the vertical distance between the camera lens and the ground shall 16 not exceed 10 feet. The camera shall be firmly mounted such that transport of 17 the camera during the recording process will not cause an unsteady picture. 18 19 I. Lighting 20 21 All recording shall be done during time of good visibility. No recording shall be 22 done during precipitation, mist or fog. The recording shall only be done when 23 sufficient sunlight is present to properly illuminate the subjects of recording 24 and to produce bright, sharp video recordings of those subjects. 25 26 J. Speed of Travel 27 28 The average rate of travel during a particular segment of coverage shall be 29 directly proportional to the number, size and value of the surface features 30 within that construction areas zone of influence. The rate of speed in the 31 general direction of travel of any vehicle used during recording of a linear 32 project site shall not exceed 44 feet per minute. 33 34 K. Video Log /Index 35 36 All video DVDs shall be permanently labeled and shall be properly identified 37 by video DVD number and project title. Each video DVD shall have a log of 38 that video DVD's contents. The log shall describe the various segments of 39 coverage contained on the video DVD in terms of the names of the streets or 40 location of easements, coverage beginning and end, directions of coverage, 41 video unit counter numbers, engineering survey or coordinate values (if 42 reasonably available) and the date. 43 44 L. Area of Coverage 45 46 DVD coverage shall include all surface features located within the zone of COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385 -3 06/24/14 1 influence of construction supported by appropriate audio coverage. Such 2 coverage shall include, but not be limited to, existing driveways, sidewalks, 3 curbs, pavements, drainage system features, mailboxes, landscaping, 4 culverts, fences, signs, Contractor staging areas, adjacent structures, etc., 5 within the area covered by the project. Of particular concern shall be the 6 existence of any faults, fractures, or defects. DVD coverage shall be limited to 7 one side of the site, street, easement or right -of -way at any one time. 8 9 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 10 (NOT USED) 11 12 PART 3 — EXECUTION 13 14 3.01 GENERAL 15 16 A. Prior to requesting Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall review the 17 pre - construction video with the Owner /Engineer and identify any work needed 18 to restore the site to pre- construction conditions. 19 20 21 END OF SECTION COLOR AUDIO -VIDEO CONSTRUCTION RECORDS 01385 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 y t s 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 e f 1 SECTION 01410 2 3 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Contractor shall employ and pay for the services of an Independent Testing 10 Laboratory to perform that geotechnical testing (concrete, compaction) 11 specifically indicated on the Contract Documents or specified in the 12 Specifications or at any other time Contractor elects to have materials and 13 equipment tested for conformity with the Contract Documents. 14 15 1. Contractor shall coordinate with the laboratory to facilitate the execution 16 of its required services. 17 18 2. Employment of the laboratory shall in no way relieve Contractor's 19 obligations to perform the Work of the Contract. 20 21 B. Contractor shall perform and pay for all other testing (pressure, torque, etc.) 22 required in the specifications. 23 24 1.02 LIMITATIONS OF AUTHORITY OF TESTING LABORATORY 25 26 A. Laboratory is not authorized to: 27 28 1. Release, revoke, alter or enlarge on requirements of Contract 29 Documents. 30 2. Approve or accept any portion of the Work. 31 32 3. Perform any duties of the Contractor. 33 34 1.03 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES 35 36 A. Coordinate with laboratory personnel, provide access to Work, to 37 Manufacturer's operations. 38 39 B. Secure and deliver to the laboratory adequate quantities of representational 40 samples of materials proposed to be used and which require testing. 41 42 C. Provide to the laboratory the preliminary design mix proposed to be used for 43 concrete, and other materials mixes, which require control by the testing 44 laboratory. 45 TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 -1 07/15/14 1 D. Materials and equipment used in the performance of work under this Contract 2 are subject to inspection and testing at the point of manufacture or fabrication. 3 Standard specifications for quality and workmanship are indicated in the 4 Contract Documents. The Engineer may require the Contractor to provide 5 statements or certificates from the manufacturers and fabricators that the 6 materials and equipment provided by them are manufactured or fabricated in 7 full accordance with the standard specifications for quality and workmanship 8 indicated in the Contract Documents. All costs of this testing and providing 9 statements and certificates shall be a subsidiary obligation of the Contractor, 10 and no extra charge to the Owner shall be allowed on account of such testing 11 and certification. 12 13 E. Furnish incidental labor and facilities: 14 15 1. To provide access to work to be tested. 16 17 2. To obtain and handle samples at the Project site or at the source of the 18 product to be tested. 19 20 3. To facilitate inspections and tests. 21 22 4. For storage and curing of test samples. 23 24 F. The Contractor shall be responsible for notifying the laboratory sufficiently in 25 advance (minimum 48 hours) of operations to allow for laboratory assignment 26 of personnel and scheduling of tests. 27 28 G. Employ and pay for the services of the same or a separate, equally qualified 29 independent testing laboratory to perform additional inspections, sampling and 30 testing required for the Contractor's convenience and as reviewed by the 31 Engineer. 32 33 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 34 35 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 36 37 38 END OF SECTION TESTING AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 01410 -2 07/15/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 SECTION 01500 2 3 TEMPORARY FACILITIES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SANITARY FACILITIES 8 9 A. The Contractor shall furnish temporary sanitary facilities at the site, as 10 provided herein, for the needs of all construction workers and others 11 performing work or furnishing services on the Project. 12 13 B. Sanitary facilities shall be of reasonable capacity, properly maintained 14 throughout the construction period, and obscured from public view to the 15 greatest practical extent. If toilets of the chemically treated type are used, at 16 least one toilet will be furnished for each 20 persons. The Contractor shall 17 enforce the use of such sanitary facilities by all personnel at the site. 18 19 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC 20 21 A. Contractor shall conduct his work to interfere as little as possible with public 22 travel, whether vehicular or pedestrian. Whenever it is necessary to cross, 23 obstruct, or close roads, driveways and walks, whether public or private, 24 Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable and safe bridges, detours, or 25 other temporary expedients for the accommodation of public and private 26 travel, and shall give reasonable notice to owners of private drives before 27 interfering with them. Driveway access to commercial properties shall be 28 maintained at all times. Such maintenance of traffic shall not be required 29 when Contractor has obtained permission from the owner and tenant of private 30 property, or from the authority having jurisdiction over public property involved, 31 to obstruct traffic at the designated point. At all times, the Contractor shall 32 perform the Work in accordance with the permits and easement agreements. 33 34 B. Traffic control shall be in accordance with DOT Roadway and Traffic Design 35 Standards for Traffic Control Through Work Zones. All local Traffic 36 Regulations shall be followed. 37 38 C. In making open -cut street crossings, the Contractor shall not block more than 39 one -half of the street at a time. Whenever possible, Contractor shall widen the 40 shoulder on the opposite side to facilitate traffic flow. Temporary surfacing 41 shall be provided as necessary on shoulders. 42 43 1.03 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS 44 45 A. All streets, roads, highways, and other public thoroughfares that are closed to 46 traffic shall be protected by effective barricades on which shall be placed TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 -1 06/24/14 1 acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest 2 intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section. 3 4 B. All open trenches and other excavations shall have suitable barricades, signs, 5 and lights to provide adequate protection to the public. Obstructions such as 6 material piles and equipment shall be provided with similar warning signs and 7 lights. Contractor shall be responsible for public safety within the construction 8 area. 9 10 C. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated with warning lights from 11 sunset to sunrise. Material storage and conduct of the Work on or alongside 12 public streets and highways shall cause the minimum obstruction and 13 inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades, signs, lights and other 14 protective devices shall be installed and maintained in conformity with 15 applicable statutory requirements and, where within railroad and highway 16 rights -of -way, as required by the authority having jurisdiction thereof. 17 18 D. Open trenches and other excavations shall not be left open over weekends 19 and holidays, or greater than one calendar day, except during extreme 20 weather conditions. 21 22 1.04 PROTECTION OF PUBLIC AND PRIVATE PROPERTY 23 24 A. Contractor shall protect, shore, brace, support, and maintain all underground 25 pipes, conduits, drains, and other underground construction uncovered or 26 otherwise affected by his construction operations. All pavement, surfacing, 27 driveways, curbs, walks, buildings, utility poles, guy wires, fences, and other 28 surface structures affected by construction operations, together with all sod 29 and shrubs in yards and parking areas, shall be restored to their original 30 condition, whether within or outside the easement. All replacements shall be 31 made with new materials. 32 33 1.05 PARKING 34 35 A. Contractor shall provide and maintain suitable parking areas for the use of all 36 construction workers and others performing work or furnishing services in 37 connection with the Project, as required to avoid any need for parking personal 38 vehicles where they may interfere with public traffic, Owner's operations, or 39 construction activities, where indicated on the drawings or directed by the 40 Engineer. 41 42 1.06 DUST CONTROL 43 44 A. Contractor shall take reasonable measures to prevent unnecessary dust. 45 Earth surfaces subject to dusting shall be kept moist with water or by 46 application of a chemical dust suppressant. Dusty materials in piles or in TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 -2 06/24/14 1 transit shall be covered when practicable to prevent blowing. 2 3 B. Buildings or operating facilities that may be adversely affected by dust shall be 4 adequately protected from dust. Existing or new machinery, motors, 5 instrument panels or similar equipment, shall be protected by suitable dust 6 screens. Proper ventilation shall be included with dust screens. 7 8 1.07 SWEEPING 9 10 A. The Contractor shall sweep loose material from all pavement at the end of 11 each workday. 12 13 1.08 POLLUTION CONTROL 14 15 A. Contractor shall prevent the pollution of drains and watercourses by sanitary 16 wastes, sediment, debris and other substances resulting from construction 17 activities. No sanitary wastes will be permitted to enter any drain or 18 watercourse other than sanitary sewers. No sediment, debris or other 19 substance will be permitted to enter sanitary sewers and reasonable measures 20 will be taken to prevent such materials from entering any drain or watercourse. 21 22 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) 23 24 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 25 26 27 END OF SECTION TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 -3 06/24/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TEMPORARY FACILITIES 01500 -4 06/24/14 f 1 A t 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01505 2 3 MOBILIZATION 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DEFINITION AND SCOPE 8 9 A. Mobilization shall include the obtaining of all permits, insurance, and bonds; 10 moving onto the site of all plant and equipment; furnishing and erecting plants, 11 temporary facilities, and other construction facilities; all as required for the 12 proper performance and completion of the Work. Mobilization shall include, 13 but not be limited to, the following principal items: 14 15 1. Move onto the site all plant and equipment required for first month's 16 operations. 17 18 2. Install temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities. 19 20 3. Establish fire protection plan and safety program. 21 22 4. Secure construction water supply. 23 24 5. Provide on -site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities. 25 26 6. Arrange for and erect Contractor's work and storage yard and 27 employees' parking facilities. 28 29 7. Submit all required insurance certificates and bonds. 30 31 8. Obtain all required permits. 32 33 9. Post all OSHA, Environmental Protection Agency, Department of Labor, 34 and all other required notices. 35 36 10. Have superintendent at the job site full time. 37 38 11. Submit a detailed construction schedule acceptable to the Engineer. 39 40 12. If required, erect project construction sign(s). 41 42 13. Submit a finalized schedule of values and schedule of payments 43 acceptable to the Owner. 44 45 14. Submit a finalized schedule of submittals. 46 MOBILIZATION 01505 -1 06/24/14 1 15. Construct, maintain, and restore temporary access and haul roads. 2 3 16. Provide a continuous color audio - videotape recording of existing 4 conditions. 5 6 PART 2 — PRODUCT (Not Used) 7 8 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 9 10 11 END OF SECTION MOBILIZATION 01505 -2 06/24/14 1 1 r 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01510 2 3 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Furnish, install and maintain temporary utilities required for construction, 10 remove on completion of Work. 11 12 1.02 REQUIREMENTS OF REGULATORY AGENCIES 13 14 A. Comply with National Electric Code. 15 16 B. Comply with Federal, State and local codes and regulations and with utility 17 company requirements. 18 19 C. Comply with Local City and County Health Department Regulations. 20 21 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 22 23 2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL 24 25 A. Materials may be new or used, but must be adequate in capacity for the 26 required usage, must not create unsafe conditions, and must not violate 27 requirements of applicable codes and standards. 28 29 2.02 TEMPORARY ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING 30 31 A. Arrange with utility company and Owner to provide service required for power 32 and lighting, and pay all costs for service and for power used in the 33 construction, testing and trial operation prior to final acceptance of the work by 34 the Owner. All cost associated with obtaining temporary and permanent 35 power shall be at Contractor expense. 36 37 B. Provide adequate artificial lighting for all areas of work when natural light is not 38 adequate for work, and for areas accessible to the public. 39 40 2.03 TEMPORARY TELEPHONE SERVICE 41 42 A. Arrange with local telephone service- company to provide direct line telephone 43 service at the construction site for the use by personnel and employees. 44 45 B. Pay all costs for installation, maintenance and removal, and service charges. 46 TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510 -1 06/24/14 1 C. In lieu of direct telephone service, provide cellular phone service for site 2 superintendent(s) and for all foremen when the site superintendent is not on- 3 site 4 5 2.04 TEMPORARY WATER 6 7 A. The Contractor shall install at each connection to the local water supply 8 system a backflow preventer and meter meeting local utility requirements. 9 10 B. The Contractor shall pay for all temporary water facilities, including the 11 backflow preventers and meters, and the actual amount of water used during 12 construction. 13 14 2.05 TEMPORARY SANITARY FACILITIES 15 16 A. Provide sanitary facilities in compliance with laws and regulations. 17 18 B. Service, clean and maintain facilities and enclosures. 19 20 PART 3 — EXECUTION 21 22 3.01 GENERAL 23 24 A. Maintain and operate systems to assure continuous service. 25 26 B. Modify and extend systems as work progress requires. 27 28 C. Allow the Owner and Engineer reasonable use of all temporary utilities. 29 30 3.02 REMOVAL 31 32 A. Completely remove temporary materials and equipment when their use is no 33 longer required as determined by the Engineer. 34 35 B. Clean and repair damage caused by temporary installations or use of 36 temporary facilities. 37 38 39 END OF SECTION TEMPORARY UTILITIES 01510 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01600 2 3 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Material and equipment incorporated into the Work shall: 10 11 1. Conform to applicable specifications and standards. 12 13 2. Comply with size, make, type and quality specified, or as specifically 14 approved in writing by the Engineer. 15 16 B. Manufactured and Fabricated Products: 17 18 1. Design, fabricate and assemble in accord with the best engineering and 19 shop practices. 20 21 2. Manufacture like parts of duplicate units to standard sizes and gauges, 22 to be interchangeable. 23 24 3. Two or more items of the same kind shall be identical, by the same 25 manufacturer. 26 27 4. Products shall be suitable for service conditions. 28 29 5. Equipment capacities, sizes and dimensions shown or specified shall 30 be adhered to unless variations are specifically approved in writing. 31 32 C. Do not use material or equipment for any purpose other than that for which it is 33 designed or is specified. 34 35 1.02 APPROVAL OF MATERIALS 36 37 A. All materials and equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be subject to the 38 inspection and approval of the Engineer. No material shall be delivered to the 39 work without prior review of the Engineer. 40 41 B. Facilities and labor for handling and inspection of all materials and equipment 42 shall be furnished by the Contractor. If the Engineer requires, either prior to 43 beginning or during the progress of the work, the Contractor shall submit 44 samples of materials for such special tests as may be necessary to demon - 45 strate that they conform to the specifications. Such samples shall be 46 furnished, stored, packed, and shipped as directed at the Contractor's MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -1 06/24/14 1 expense. Except as otherwise noted, the Owner will make arrangements for 2 and pay for the tests. 3 4 C. The Contractor shall submit data and samples sufficiently early to permit 5 consideration and review before materials are necessary for incorporation in 6 the work. Any delay resulting from the Contractor's failure to submit samples 7 or data promptly shall not be used as a basis of claims against the Owner or 8 the Engineer. 9 10 D. The materials and equipment used on the work shall correspond to the 11 approved samples or other data previously submitted to the Engineer for 12 review. 13 14 1.03 MANUFACTURER'S INSTRUCTIONS FOR INSTALLATION 15 16 A. When Contract Documents require that installation of work shall comply with 17 manufacturer's printed instructions, obtain and distribute copies of such 18 instructions to parties involved in the installation, including four copies to the 19 Engineer. 20 21 1. Maintain one set of complete instructions at the job site during 22 installation and until completion. 23 24 B. Handle, install, connect, clean, condition and adjust products in strict accord 25 with such instructions and in conformity with specified requirements. 26 27 1. Should job conditions or specified requirements conflict with 28 manufacturer's instructions, consult with Engineer for further 29 instructions. 30 31 2. Do not proceed with work without clear instructions. 32 33 C. Perform work in accord with manufacturer's instructions. Do not omit any 34 preparatory step or installation procedure unless specifically modified or 35 exempted by Contract Documents. 36 37 1.04 TRANSPORTATION AND HANDLING 38 39 A. Arrange deliveries of Products in accord with construction schedules, 40 coordinate to avoid conflict with work and conditions at the site. 41 42 1. Deliver Products in undamaged condition, in manufacturer's original 43 containers or packaging, with identifying labels intact and legible. 44 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 t 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 e 1 1 2. Immediately on delivery, inspect shipments to assure compliance with 2 requirements of Contract Documents and approved submittals, and that 3 Products are properly protected and undamaged. 4 5 B. Provide equipment and personnel to handle Products by methods to prevent 6 soiling or damage to Products or packaging. 7 8 1.05 STORAGE AND PROTECTION 9 10 A. The Contractor shall furnish a covered, weather - protected storage structure 11 providing a clean, dry, non - corrosive environment for all mechanical 12 equipment, valves, architectural items, electrical and instrumentation 13 equipment, and special equipment to be incorporated into this project. 14 Storage of equipment shall be in strict accordance with the "instructions for 15 storage" of each equipment supplier and manufacturer including connection of 16 heaters, placing of storage lubricants in equipment, etc. The Contractor shall 17 furnish a copy of the manufacturer's instructions for storage to the Engineer 18 prior to storage of all equipment and materials. Corroded, damaged or 19 deteriorated equipment and parts shall be replaced before acceptance of the 20 project. Equipment and materials not properly stored will not be included in a 21 payment estimate. 22 23 B. Store Products in accord with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and 24 labels intact and legible. 25 26 1. Store products subject to damage by the elements in weather tight 27 enclosures. 28 29 2. Maintain temperature and humidity within the ranges required by 30 manufacturer's instructions. 31 32 3. Store fabricated products above the ground, on blocking or skids, 33 prevent soiling or staining. Cover products which are subject to 34 deterioration with impervious sheet coverings, provide adequate 35 ventilation to avoid condensation. 36 37 4. Store loose granular materials in a well- drained area on solid surfaces 38 to prevent mixing with foreign matter. 39 40 C. All materials and equipment to be incorporated in the work shall be handled 41 and stored by the Contractor before, during, and after shipment in a manner to 42 prevent warping, twisting, bending, breaking, chipping, rusting, and any injury, 43 theft or damage of any kind whatsoever to the material or equipment. 44 45 D. Cement, sand and lime shall be stored under a roof and off the ground and 46 shall be kept completely dry at all times. All miscellaneous steel, and MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -3 06/24/14 1 reinforcing steel shall be stored off the ground or otherwise to prevent 2 accumulations of dirt or grease, and in a position to prevent accumulations of 3 standing water and to minimize rusting. Precast concrete sections shall be 4 handled and stored in a manner to prevent accumulations of dirt, standing 5 water, staining, chipping or cracking. Brick, block and similar masonry 6 products shall be handled and stored in a manner to reduce breakage, 7 chipping, cracking, and spilling to a minimum. 8 9 E. All materials that, in the opinion of the Engineer, have become so damaged as 10 to be unfit for the use intended or specified shall be promptly removed from 11 the site of the work, and the Contractor shall receive no compensation for the 12 damaged material or its removal. 13 14 F. Arrange storage in a manner to provide easy access for inspection. Make 15 periodic inspections of stored Products to assure that Products are maintained 16 under specified conditions, and free from damage or deterioration. 17 18 G. Protection After Installation: 19 20 1. Provide substantial coverings as necessary to protect installed products 21 from damage from traffic and subsequent construction operations. 22 Remove covering when no longer needed. 23 24 H. The Contractor shall be responsible for all material, equipment, and supplies 25 sold and delivered to the Owner under this Contract until final inspection of the 26 work and acceptance thereof by the Owner. In the event any such material, 27 equipment, and supplies are lost, stolen, damaged, or destroyed prior to final 28 inspection and acceptance, the Contractor shall replace same without 29 additional cost to the Owner. 30 31 I. Should the Contractor fail to take proper action on storage and handling of 32 equipment supplied under this Contract within seven days after written notice 33 to do so has been given, the Owner retains the right to correct all deficiencies 34 noted in previously transmitted written notice and deduct the cost associated 35 with these corrections from the Contractor's Contract. These costs may be 36 comprised of expenditures for labor, equipment usage, administrative, clerical, 37 engineering and any other costs associated with making the necessary 38 corrections. 39 40 1.06 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 41 42 A. Contractor's Options: 43 44 1. For products specified only by reference standard, select any product 45 meeting that standard. 46 MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. For products specified by naming several products or manufacturers, 2 submit the products or manufacturers named in the Proposal, which 3 complies with the specifications. 4 5 3. For products specified by naming one or more products or 6 manufacturers and "or equal ", Contractor shall submit a request as for 7 substitutions for any product or manufacturer not specifically named. 8 9 B. Substitutions: 10 11 1. After the Effective Date of the Agreement, the Engineer will consider 12 written requests from Contractor for substitution of products. 13 14 2. Submit a separate request for each product, supported with complete 15 16 17 a. Comparison of the qualities of the proposed substitution with that 18 specified. 19 20 b. Changes required in other elements of the work because of the 21 substitution. 22 23 c. Effect on the construction schedule. 24 25 d. Cost data comparing the proposed substitution with the product 26 specified. 27 28 e. Any required license fees or royalties. 29 30 f. Availability of maintenance service, and source of replacement 31 materials. 32 33 3. The Engineer shall solely determine the the acceptability of the 34 proposed substitution. 35 36 C. Contractor's Representation: 37 38 1. A request for a substitution constitutes a representation that Contractor: 39 40 a. Has investigated the proposed Product and determined that it is 41 equal to or superior in all respects to that specified. 42 43 b. Shall provide the same warranties or bonds for the substitution 44 as for the product specified. 45 data, with drawings and samples as appropriate, including: MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -5 06/24/14 1 c. Will coordinate the installation of an accepted substitution into 2 the Work, and make such other changes as may be required to 3 make the Work complete in all respects. 4 5 d. Waives all claims for additional costs, under his responsibility, 6 which may subsequently become apparent. 7 1.07 SPECIAL TOOLS 8 9 A. Manufacturers of equipment and machinery shall furnish any special tools 10 (including grease guns or other lubricating devices) required for normal 11 adjustment, operations and maintenance, together with instructions for their 12 use. The Contractor shall preserve and deliver to the Owner these tools and 13 instructions in good order no later than upon completion of the Contract. 14 15 1.08 WARRANTY 16 17 A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment 18 manufacturer as specified in Section 01740. The manufacturer's warranty 19 period shall be concurrent with the Contractor's warranty. 20 21 1.09 SPARE PARTS 22 23 A. Spare parts for certain equipment have been specified in the pertinent 24 sections of the Specifications. The Contractor shall collect and store all spare 25 parts so required in an area to be designated by the Engineer. In addition, the 26 Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer an inventory listing all spare parts, the 27 equipment they are associated with, the name and address of the supplier, 28 and the delivered cost of each item. Copies of actual invoices for each item 29 shall be furnished with the inventory to substantiate the delivered cost. 30 31 1.10 GREASE, OIL, AND FUEL 32 33 A. All grease, oil, and fuel required for testing of equipment shall be fumished 34 with the respective equipment. The Owner shall be furnished with a year's 35 supply of required lubricants including grease and oil of the type 36 recommended by the manufacturer with each item of equipment supplied. 37 38 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for changing the oil in all drives and 39 intermediate drives of each mechanical equipment after initial break -in of the 40 equipment, which in no event shall be any longer than three weeks of 41 operation. 42 43 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) 44 45 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 46 END OF SECTION MATERIAL AND EQUIPMENT 01600 -6 06/24/14 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01625 2 3 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Prior to requesting a Certificate of Substantial Completion, the Contractor shall 10 perform start-up testing services as specified herein. 11 12 B. Start-up of the facilities and appurtenances will require completion of all 13 structures, installation of all equipment, and all connections to existing 14 systems. All components of the new system shall be installed as if each were 15 ready for use by the Owner for their intended purposes. The Contractor shall 16 provide a written startup plan, for review by the Engineer, for individual 17 facilities and systems. As applicable, the startup plan shall be in accordance 18 with the construction phasing plan described in Section 01310 Construction 19 Schedules. 20 21 C. The Engineer will attend the start -up of up to six (6) systems. It is anticipated 22 that the Engineer will attend one system start-up related to the first pair of 23 clarifiers (max. 8 hrs.), one system start-up related to the second pair of 24 clarifiers (max. 8 hrs.), one system start -up related to each of the RAS pumps 25 (max. 4 hrs. each), including VFDs (max. 4 hrs. each), one system start -up 26 related to the temporary power distribution system (max. 4 hrs.), and one 27 system start -up related to the permanent power (max. 4 hrs.). The Contractor 28 may schedule the various systems start-up differently, but shall limit the total 29 number of systems start-ups to the maximum number indicated above. 30 Systems start-up must be completed for all equipment and systems for which 31 the Contractor may request substantial completion. 32 33 D. All equipment will be tested, approved, and accepted by the Engineer prior to 34 placement of the new facilities into operation. 35 36 E. All lubricants, water, air, fuel and power necessary for initial operation and 37 tests shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 38 39 F. In addition to furnishing, delivering, installing, and testing each piece of 40 equipment, the Contractor shall provide the services of competent factory 41 certified representatives for the periods indicated in other sections of these 42 Specifications. Such representatives shall instruct the operating personnel of 43 the Owner in the maintenance and operation of the equipment, conduct tests, 44 and make recommendations for producing the most efficient results. These 45 services shall be made during the initial operation of the completed facilities 46 and be in addition to services necessary during erection or to correct defective 47 materials or workmanship during the guarantee period. These representatives 48 shall be specially trained and qualified to provide installation services, START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -1 10/09/14 1 adjustment, start-up, and testing work and shall not be sales representatives 2 only. The cost of such representation, including subsistence and travel, shall 3 be provided by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 4 5 G. Equipment or systems start-up shall not be permitted until all applicable O &M 6 Manuals have been submitted and approved, all applicable spare parts have 7 been turned over to the City, all applicable training requirements have been 8 fulfilled, and all manufacturers' certifications of proper installation have been 9 received as described elsewhere in these Specifications. The Contractor shall 10 submit electronic copies of all relevant transmittals as proof of documentation 11 for these items. 12 13 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) 14 15 PART 3 — EXECUTION 16 17 3.01 PRELIMINARY MATTERS 18 19 A. General Requirements: 20 21 1. Successfully execute the start-up of the system and demonstrate 22 satisfactory performance of the intended use thereof. The start-up and 23 performance demonstration shall be successfully executed prior to the 24 Engineer's issuance of Substantial Completion. 25 26 2. Field acceptance tests shall be witnessed by the Engineer. At least 27 thirty (30) calendar days prior to testing, Contractor shall submit details 28 of all test procedures to the Engineer for review, comment, and 29 approval. Test procedures shall be submitted to the Engineer in 30 accordance with Specification Sections 01310 and 01340. This 31 notification shall be shown on the Progress Schedule. 32 33 3. All performance tests and inspections shall be scheduled at least ten 34 (10) working days in advance with the Engineer. All performance tests 35 and inspections shall be conducted during the normal work week of 36 Monday through Friday, unless otherwise authorized, in writing, by the 37 Engineer. 38 39 4. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for the proper operation of 40 equipment during start-up systems testing and shall neither have nor 41 make any claim for damage that may occur to equipment prior to the 42 time when the Owner takes over the operation thereof. 43 44 5. The Contractor shall be responsible for furnishing and installing all 45 necessary valves, whether shown on the Drawings or not, in order to 46 facilitate testing of pumping systems, tanks, and all other system start- 47 up testing, at no additional cost to the Owner. START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -2 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 B. Preparation for Systems Start-Up: 3 4 1. All mechanical and electrical equipment shall be checked to ensure that 5 each component is in good working order and properly installed and 6 connected. All systems shall be purged as required. All sumps, tanks, 7 basins, chambers, wet wells, and pipelines that are hydraulically 8 checked shall be drained and returned to their original condition once 9 the water testing is complete. All pipelines that have been filled and 10 flushed shall be drained clean. 11 12 2. All instruments and controls shall be calibrated through their full 13 operational distribution range. Any other adjustments required for 14 proper operation of all instrumentation and control equipment shall be 15 made and confirmed by the specific factory authorized service 16 representative. 17 18 3. The Contractor shall work with each factory certified technician to 19 complete any remaining tasks, connections, adjustments, and 20 preparations needed to ensure proper equipment and /or system 21 operation. 22 23 4. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has 24 confirmed that all specified safety equipment has been installed and is 25 in good working order. 26 27 5. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Engineer has 28 verified that all maintenance equipment, spare parts, and approved 29 equipment Operation and Maintenance manuals have been furnished 30 as specified. 31 32 6. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the factory certified 33 technician for that particular component has confirmed that all 34 lubricants, electrical connections, drains, fuel and exhaust systems 35 have been provided and installed in accordance with the manufacturer's 36 recommendations. 37 38 7. No testing or equipment operation shall occur until the Contractor has 39 submitted and the Engineer has approved the manufacturer's 40 Certificate of Proper Installation. 41 42 3.02 PRESSURE TESTS 43 44 A. Field pressure tests shall be made to confirm compliance with the Contract 45 Documents. The Contractor shall perform field tests as herein specified. All START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -3 10/09/14 1 tanks, water mains, piping and equipment shall be tested in the field in the 2 presence of the Engineer or his authorized agent. 3 4 B. Hydrostatic and leakage tests shall be performed in accordance with the 5 applicable sections of the American Water Works Association Standard for 6 Installation of Cast Iron /Ductile Iron Water Mains, AWWA C- -600, Concrete 7 Pressure Pipe, AWWA M9, and Underground Installation of Polyvinyl Chloride 8 (PVC) Pressure Pipe and Fittings for Water Mains, AWWA C -605, except as 9 herein modified. 10 11 C. The Contractor shall submit his plan for pressure testing to the Engineer for 12 review at least ten (10) days before starting the work. The Contractor shall 13 remove and adequately dispose of all blocking material and equipment after 14 completion and acceptance of the field hydrostatic test, unless otherwise 15 directed by the Engineer. Any damage to the pipe shall be repaired by the 16 Contractor. 17 18 D. After completion of all work and before final acceptance, a hydrostatic and 19 leakage test shall be conducted. Water required for testing new pipelines will 20 be provided by the Contractor at the Contractor's expense. Water mains shall 21 be tested with potable water and force mains and storm water lines shall be 22 tested with reclaimed water, if available. Where applicable, the Contractor 23 shall coordinate the development of the water supply with the pipeline work in 24 order that water will be available to meet these requirements. At no time are 25 valves on the water supply system to be operated without the prior 26 authorization of the Engineer. 27 28 E. Each newly installed pressure main shall be tested at a pressure equal 1.5 29 times the pipeline design pressure or 150 psi; whichever is greater. The 30 duration of each test shall be a minimum of two (2) hours. 31 32 F. Any test pump(s), piping connections, taps, fittings, pressure gauges, 33 compressors, and all necessary components thereof which might be required 34 for the hydrostatic tests, shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional 35 cost to the Owner. 36 37 G. All exposed pipe, fittings, valves, air valves, blow -offs and joints shall be 38 carefully examined during the test, and all joints showing a visible leakage 39 shall be made tight. All defective pipe, fittings, valves, hydrants and 40 accessories shall be removed from the line and replaced by the Contractor 41 with new components at no additional cost to the Owner. 42 43 H. The Contractor may backfill the trench before testing the line, but he shall 44 open up the trench at his own expense to repair any leaks. 45 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -4 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I. All visible leaks shall be corrected regardless of the total leakage revealed by 2 the test as compared to the allowable calculated losses. All lines that fail to 3 meet the test shall be repaired and retested as necessary, until test 4 requirements are complied with. All repairs and retests shall be performed at 5 the Contractor's own expense with no additional cost to the Owner. 6 7 J. The installation will not be accepted until the leakage is equal to or less than 8 the allowable leakage as determined by the formula below: 9 10 L = SD(P)o.5 11 133,200 12 13 in which "L" equals the allowable leakage, in gallons per hour; "S" is the length 14 of the pipe tested, in feet; "D" is the nominal pipe diameter, in inches; and "P" 15 is the average test pressure during the leakage test, in pounds per square 16 inch, gauge. 17 K. All tests shall be made under the supervision of the Engineer or authorized 18 agents thereof. No additional compensation will be paid to the Contractor for 19 performing the above required tests; the cost of all labor, materials, lubricants, 20 fuels, power, necessary appliances, and the coordination for testing purposes 21 shall be included in the unit price or prices bid for the various items of work. 22 23 L. The Contractor shall provide the Engineer a minimum of 72 hours advance 24 notice for scheduling hydrostatic and leakage tests. 25 26 3.03 DISINFECTION OF POTABLE WATER LINES 27 28 A. Prior to disinfection, the lines shall be cleaned and flushed. Flushing and 29 cleaning shall occur after all hydrostatic and leak tests have been performed 30 and approved. Lines shall be disinfected in accordance with the applicable 31 requirements of AWWA C651 and as described hereinafter. 32 33 B. Before being placed in service, all potable water pipelines installed under this 34 Contract shall be disinfected by chlorination in accordance with AWWA 35 Standards. Either of the following disinfectants may be allowed upon written 36 authorization from the Engineer. 37 38 1. Liquid Chlorine: A chlorine gas -water mixture shall be applied by 39 means of a solution -feed chlorination device. The device must provide 40 a means to prevent the backflow of water into the chlorine cylinder. 41 42 2. Calcium Hypochlorite Solution: A solution consisting of 5 percent 43 calcium hypochlorite powder and 95 percent water by weight shall be 44 prepared and this solution will be injected or pumped into the line. 45 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -5 10/09/14 1 C. The point of application of the chlorinating agent shall be at the beginning of 2 the pipeline extension and through a corporation stop inserted in the top of the 3 newly installed pipe. The water injector for delivering the chlorine- bearing 4 water into the pipe may be supplied from a tap on the pressure side of the 5 valve controlling the flow into the pipeline extension. 6 7 D. Water from the existing distribution system or other source of supply shall be 8 controlled so as to flow slowly into the newly installed pipeline during the 9 application of chlorine. The Contractor shall not allow the chlorine solution in 10 the line being treated to flow back into the line supplying the water. 11 12 E. Treated water shall be retained in the new pipeline at least 24 hours, after 13 which the chlorine residual in the line shall be at least 50 mg /I. Should the 14 initial procedure fail to result in the conditions specified, the chlorination 15 procedure shall be repeated until acceptable results are obtained, at the 16 Contractor's expense. 17 18 F. The Contractor shall tap the lines at points designated by the Engineer and 19 provide necessary piping to discharge water from the line to a designated 20 location as directed by the Engineer. 21 22 G. Following chlorination, all treated water shall be thoroughly flushed from the 23 line, at its extremities, until the replacement water throughout its length, upon 24 testing, is proved comparable to the quality of water in the existing distribution 25 system. 26 27 H. Water for flushing will be provided through connections to the Owner's piping 28 systems. The Contractor shall pay for all water used in flushing the pipelines. 29 At no time are valves on the distribution system to be operated without the 30 presence of a duly qualified representative of the Engineer. 31 32 I. After the water lines have been disinfected and flushed, samples of water shall 33 be taken from several points in sterilized containers, and samples forwarded to 34 the Engineer, or its designated representative, for bacterial examination. If 35 repeated tests of such samples show the presence of coliform organisms, the 36 disinfection shall be repeated or continued until tests indicate absence of 37 contamination. Final approval of the bacterial samples shall be received prior 38 to placing the system into operation. 39 40 J. The Contractor shall submit his plan for disinfection of the potable water 41 pipelines to the Engineer for review at least ten (10) days before starting the 42 work. Lines shall be totally free and clean prior to final acceptance. 43 44 3.04 LEAKAGE TEST — GRAVITY SEWERS AND OTHER PIPELINES 45 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -6 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. All gravity sewer will be tested by the Contractor prior to final acceptance of 2 the work. All tests will be conducted in a manner to minimize any interference 3 with the Contractor's work or progress. The Contractor shall notify the 4 Engineer 72 hours in advance of such tests and, at his option, the Engineer 5 shall witness such tests. 6 7 B. The Contractor shall notify the Engineer when the work is ready for testing, 8 and tests shall be made as soon thereafter as practicable, under the 9 observation of the Engineer. Reading meters, gauges or other measuring 10 devices shall be new and furnished by the Contractor. The Contractor shall 11 furnish all other labor, materials, services and equipment including power, fuel, 12 meters and gauges; water and other items and apparatus necessary for 13 making leakage tests, preparing guidelines for testing, assembling, placing, 14 and removing testing equipment and placing in service. 15 16 C. Air Leakage Test 17 18 1. Tests by this method shall be limited to sewers 36 inches in diameter 19 and smaller. The maximum allowable air leakage is based on 20 pre- wetted pipe walls. The Contractor may therefore fill the pipe with 21 clear water and then empty the pipe prior to air testing. When pipe 22 walls are pre- wetted, air leakage tests shall be completed within 24 23 hours after filling the sewer section to be tested. 24 25 2. Air pressure tests shall be made by placing the sewer under 3.0 psig air 26 pressure and measuring the volume of air required to maintain this 27 pressure. The rate of air leakage shall be determined when the system 28 reaches an equilibrium state and air flow shall be read by means of an 29 approved rotometer. 30 31 3. The maximum rate of air Toss shall be 0.003 cfm per square foot of 32 interior pipe surface and the maximum air flow shall not exceed 2.0 cfm 33 when the total pressure on the sewer is maintained at 3.0 psig. When 34 the groundwater level is above the invert of the sewer, but below a level 35 adequate for infiltration testing, the maximum air loss shall be reduced 36 6 percent for each foot of groundwater above the sewer invert. 37 38 4. Air testing equipment shall be arranged so that compressors, valving, 39 gauges, and other test devices are located at the ground surface. Air 40 testing equipment shall have an approved air relief arrangement to 41 prevent the sewer from being pressurized to greater than 10.0 psig. 42 43 D. Manhole Vacuum Tests: Each manhole shall be visually inspected for leakage 44 or evidence thereof after assembly, installation, and backfilling activities have 45 been completed. This inspection shall occur by the Engineer or the Engineer's 46 authorized agent. The Contractor shall demonstrate the integrity of the START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -7 10/09/14 1 installed materials and construction procedures by conducting a vacuum test 2 in accordance with ASTM C1244 -93. If the manhole shows signs of leakage, 3 it shall be repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer at no additional cost to 4 the Owner. 5 6 E. Repairing Leaks: When leakage occurs in excess of the specified amount, 7 defective manholes, pipe, pipe joints, or other appurtenances shall be located 8 and repaired at the expense of the Contractor. If the defective portions cannot 9 be located, the Contractor shall remove, reconstruct, and retest as much of the 10 original work as necessary to obtain satisfactory test results. 11 12 3.05 SYSTEM START -UP 13 14 A. Contractor Responsibilities 15 16 1. The Contractor shall provide notice in writing to the Engineer ten (10) 17 days in advance of his intent to perform systems start -up. 18 19 2. The Contractor shall provide sufficient personnel to test equipment, 20 monitor and record data, as directed by the Engineer. 21 22 3. The Contractor shall obtain, install, calibrate and operate all test 23 equipment, gauges, pressure recorders, communications systems, etc., 24 as directed by the Engineer. 25 26 4. The Contractor shall cooperate with the Engineer, providle access to the 27 work, provide all incidental labor and facilities, and provide any 28 temporary utilities or construction aids required. 29 30 5. The Contractor shall ensure that all equipment, subsystems, and other 31 separable parts of the Work have been adjusted and balanced and that 32 any and all field tests have been conducted and demonstrated to be in 33 proper operating condition to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 34 35 B. Start-Up Tests 36 37 1. Start -Up Systems Testing shall include, but not be limited to the 38 following: 39 40 a. The Contractor shall verify that all valves (new and existing, 41 manual and automatic) are in their proper operating position in 42 accordance with the specific operating scenario being tested. 43 44 b. The Contractor shall fill all pipes and /or tanks with water, in an 45 approved manner, taking care to allow the gradual release of air 46 from all high points. START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -8 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 c. In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall 3 demonstrate the operation of all equipment and facilities 4 including all instrumentation and controls and all manual and 5 automatic control systems. The Contractor shall be responsible 6 for calibrating and verifying the accuracy of all new instruments. 7 The Contractor shall demonstrate the proper operation of all 8 auto - shutdown features and standby power systems or devices. 9 10 d. The Contractor shall demonstrate proper operation of all aspects 11 of the Control System, PLC's, Operator Interface Terminals, and 12 all hardware and software furnished. If applicable, the 13 Contractor shall also demonstrate the full integration of the 14 SCADA System with the Owner's existing network. The 15 Contractor shall make modifications to the existing HMI screens 16 as required or as directed by the Engineer for a fully functional 17 system. 18 19 e. Following the successful completion of these tests, the 20 Contractor shall demonstrate automatic controlled operation of 21 the equipment and facilities over a period of not less than 72 22 hours of continuous successful operation. 23 24 f. The Contractor shall also be responsible for performing all tests 25 outside of those previously described as may be required by the 26 manufacturers for all equipment, pumps and control valves. 27 28 g. Data records shall be kept by the Contractor. This information 29 shall be submitted to the Engineer for review at the end of the 30 test period. 31 32 2. Should the Contractor fail to demonstrate satisfactory performance on 33 the first and any subsequent attempt, he shall make all necessary 34 alterations, adjustments, repairs and replacements. When the facility is 35 again ready for operation, it shall be brought on line and new tests shall 36 be started. This procedure shall be repeated as often as necessary 37 until the facility has operated continuously to the satisfaction of the 38 Engineer, for the specified test duration. 39 40 41 END OF SECTION 42 START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -9 10/09/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK START -UP SYSTEMS TESTING 01625 -10 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01640 2 3 QUALITY CONTROL 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SECTION INCLUDES 8 9 A. Quality assurance and control of installation. 10 11 B. References. 12 13 C. Field samples. 14 15 D. Mock -up. 16 17 E. Inspection and testing laboratory services. 18 19 F. Manufacturers' field services and reports. 20 21 1.02 RELATED SECTIONS 22 23 A. Section 01090 - Reference Standards. 24 25 B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Submission of Manufacturers' Instructions and 26 Certificates. 27 28 C. Section 01410 - Testing Laboratory Services. 29 30 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE /CONTROL OF INSTALLATION 31 32 A. Monitor quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site 33 conditions, and workmanship, to produce Work of specified quality. 34 35 B. Comply fully with manufacturers' instructions, including each step in sequence. 36 37 C. Should manufacturers' instructions conflict with Contract Documents, request 38 clarification from Engineer before proceeding. 39 40 D. Comply with specified standards as a minimum quality for the Work except 41 when more stringent tolerances, codes, or specified requirements indicate 42 higher standards or more precise workmanship. 43 44 E. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified 45 quality. 46 QUALITY CONTROL 01640 -1 04/24/14 1 F Secure Products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized 2 to withstand stresses, vibration, physical distortion or disfigurement. 3 4 1.04 REFERENCES 5 6 A. Conform to reference standard by date of issue current on date of Owner Bids. 7 8 B. Should specified reference standards conflict with Contract Documents, 9 request clarification for Engineer before proceeding. 10 11 C. The contractual relationship of the parties to the Contract shall not be altered 12 from the Contract Documents by mention or inference otherwise in any 13 reference document. 14 15 1.05 FIELD SAMPLES 16 17 A. Install field samples at the site as required by individual specifications Sections 18 for review. 19 20 B. Acceptable samples represent a quality level for the Work. 21 22 C. Where field sample is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear 23 area after field sample has been accepted by Engineer. 24 25 1.06 MOCK -UP 26 27 A. Tests will be performed under provisions identified in this section. 28 29 B. Assemble and erect specified items, with specified attachment and anchorage 30 devices, flashings, seals, and finishes. 31 32 C. Where mock -up is specified in individual Sections to be removed, clear area 33 after mock -up has been accepted by Engineer. 34 35 1.07 INSPECTION AND TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES 36 37 A. Contractor shall employ, and pay for the services of an independent firm to 38 perform inspection and testing. 39 40 B. The independent firm shall perform inspections, tests, and other services 41 specified in individual specification Sections and as required by the Engineer. 42 43 C. Reports shall be submitted by the independent firm to the Engineer, in 44 duplicate, indicating observations and results of tests and indicating 45 compliance or non - compliance with Contract Documents. 46 QUALITY CONTROL 01640 -2 04/24/14 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D. Cooperate with independent firm; furnish samples of materials, design mix, 2 equipment, tools, storage and assistance as requested. 3 4 1. Notify Engineer and independent firm 48 hours prior to expected time 5 for operations requiring services. 6 7 2. Make arrangements with independent firm and pay for additional 8 samples and tests required for Contractor's use. 9 10 E. Retesting required because of non - conformance to specified requirements 11 shall be performed by the same independent firm on instructions by the 12 Engineer. 13 14 1.08 MANUFACTURERS' FIELD SERVICES AND REPORTS 15 16 A. Submit qualifications of observer to Engineer 30 days in advance of required 17 observations. Observer shall be subject to approval of Engineer and Owner. 18 19 B. When specified in individual specification Sections, require material or Product 20 suppliers or manufacturers to provide qualified staff personnel to observe site 21 conditions, conditions of surfaces and installation, quality of workmanship, 22 start-up of equipment, test, adjust, and balance of equipment as applicable, 23 and to initiate instructions when necessary. 24 25 C. Individuals to report observations and site decisions or instructions given to 26 applicators or installers that are supplemental or contrary to manufacturers' 27 written instructions. 28 29 D. Submit report in duplicate within 30 days of observation to Engineer for review. 30 31 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 32 33 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 34 35 36 END OF SECTION 37 QUALITY CONTROL 01640 -3 04/24/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK QUALITY CONTROL 01640 -4 04/24/14 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01670 2 3 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. General: 10 11 1. This section covers furnishing of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, 12 and performing all work and services for furnishing, submission, 13 processing and handling of requests for substitution and product 14 options. See items as indicated on drawings and as specified. Any 15 substitution or option shall be in accord with provisions of Contract 16 Documents, and completely coordinated with work of other trades. 17 18 2. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish all 19 supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices 20 incidental to or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation. 21 22 3. See appropriate sections for specific items specified. See General 23 Conditions for additional information. 24 25 B. Procedure: 26 27 1. For equipment and materials that are listed in the proposal, observe 28 procedures outlined in Section V. 29 30 2. For products, equipment, and materials which are named in drawings or 31 specifications for which a request for substitution is made, observe 32 procedures outlined in these specifications. 33 34 C. Costs: Cost incurred by requester in providing information, catalogs, and 35 samples - including but not limited to labor, materials, freight postage, and 36 transportation - are sole cost of "Requestor" with no cost assessed Owner or 37 Engineer. 38 39 1.02 REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION - GENERAL: 40 41 A. Base all bids on materials, equipment and procedures specified. 42 43 B. Certain types of equipment and kinds of material are described in 44 specifications by means of trade names and catalog numbers and /or 45 manufacturer's names. Where this occurs, it was not intended to exclude from 46 consideration such types of equipment and kinds of material bearing other SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670 -1 06/24/14 1 trade names, catalog numbers and /or manufacturer's names, capable of 2 accomplishing purpose of types of equipment or kinds of material specifically 3 indicated. 4 5 C. Other types of equipment and kinds of material may be acceptable to Owner 6 and Engineer. 7 8 D. Types of equipment, kinds of material and methods of construction, if not 9 specifically indicated must be approved in writing by Engineer and be agreed 10 upon by Owner. 11 12 E. Conditional bids will not be accepted. 13 14 1.03 SUBMISSION OF REQUESTS FOR SUBSTITUTION: 15 16 A. Within no more than 30 days after award of the Contract, the Engineer will 17 consider requests for substitutions of products, materials, systems or other 18 items. Requests must be received by Engineer within 30 calendar days after 19 the date of Contract award. All requests for substitution shall be completed as 20 specified below. 21 22 B. Substitute items must comply with color and pattern of base specified items 23 unless specifically approved otherwise. 24 25 C. Submit two (2) copies of request for substitution. Include in request: 26 27 1. Name of product located by Drawing No. or Specification No., followed 28 by a detail or line number the particular item(s) for which request for 29 substitution is initiated. 30 31 2. Complete data substantiating compliance of proposed substitution with 32 Contract Documents. 33 34 3. For Products: 35 36 a. Product identification by schedule or tag no., including 37 manufacturer's name. 38 39 b. Manufacturer's literature, marked to indicate specific model, 40 type, size, and options to be considered: 41 42 1) Product Description 43 2) Performance and test data 44 3) Reference standards 45 4) Difference in power demand 46 5) Dimensional differences for specified unit SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 c. Submit samples, full size if so required. Engineer reserves right 2 to impound sample until physical units are installed on project for 3 comparison purposes. All costs of furnishing and return of 4 samples shall be paid by requester. Engineer is not responsible 5 for Toss of or damage to samples. 6 7 d. Name and address of similar projects where product was used, 8 date of installation, and field performance data on installation. 9 10 4. For construction methods: 11 12 a. Detailed description of proposed method. 13 14 b. Drawings illustrating methods. 15 16 5. Itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product or method 17 specified. 18 19 6. Data relating to changes in construction schedule. 20 21 7. Accurate cost data on proposed substitution in comparison with product 22 or method specified. 23 24 8. Include with any request a specific statement defining changes in 25 contract time or amount. 26 27 D. In making request for substitution, or in using an approved substitute item, 28 Supplier /Manufacturer represents: 29 30 1. He has personally investigated proposed product or method, and has 31 determined that it is equal or superior in all respects to that specified, 32 and that it will perform function for which it is intended. 33 34 2. Will provide same or better warranty for substitute item as for product or 35 method specified. 36 37 3. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution into work, to include 38 but not be limited to the following: 39 40 a. Building and structure modifications as necessary; 41 42 b. Additional ancillary equipment to accommodate change; 43 44 c. Piping, vaiving, mechanical, electrical, or instrumentation 45 changes, and 46 SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670 -3 06/24/14 1 d. All other changes required for work to be complete in all respects 2 to permit incorporation of substitution into project. 3 4 4. Waives all claims for additional costs related to substitution which 5 subsequently become apparent. 6 7 E. Written acceptance or rejection of items presented for alternative 8 consideration will be given within two weeks after request is received. 9 10 F. In the event the acceptance of an alternate results in a change in contract 11 price or time, or is a deviation from the Contract Documents, a change order 12 will be issued to reflect such change. In the event the acceptance of an 13 alternate does not result in a change in Contract price or time, a field order 14 shall be issued. 15 16 G. Alternates may be rejected for the following reasons: 17 18 1. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents or 19 building spaces. 20 21 2. If they are in Engineer's opinion, not equal to base product specified, or 22 will not adequately perform function for which intended. 23 24 3. If request is not initiated by the Contractor in accordance with this 25 specification section. 26 27 1.04 SUBSTITUTION DUE TO UNAVAILABILITY 28 29 A. Unavailability of specified item due to strikes, lockouts, bankruptcy, 30 discontinuance of production, proven shortage, or similar occurrences are 31 reasons for substitution after Contract award. 32 33 B. Notify Engineer in writing, as soon as condition of unavailability becomes 34 apparent; include substantiating data. Submit request for substitution 35 sufficiently in advance to avoid delays. 36 37 C. Submit data as required in paragraph 1.03 above. 38 39 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 40 41 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 42 43 44 END OF SECTION SUBSTITUTIONS AND PRODUCT OPTIONS 01670 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01700 2 3 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Comply with requirements stated in General Conditions and in Specifications 10 for administrative procedures in closing out the Work. 11 12 B. Electronic Shop Drawings and O &M Manuals 13 14 1. The Contractor shall furnish final approved Shop Drawings and 15 Operations and Maintenance Data in electronic ".pdf" format for all 16 equipment furnished under all Specification Sections in Divisions 11, 17 12, 13, 14, 15 and 16. 18 19 2. The Contractor shall organize all electronic Shop Drawings and 20 Operations and Maintenance Data by specification division and section 21 number, and submit two (2) copies on compact disk media (CDROM). 22 23 1.02 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION 24 25 A. When Contractor considers the Work, or portion thereof, to be substantially 26 complete, he shall submit to the Engineer: 27 28 1. A written notice that the Work, or designated portion thereof, is 29 substantially complete. 30 31 2. A list of items to be completed or corrected. 32 33 B. Within a reasonable time after receipt of such notice, the Engineer will make 34 an inspection to determine the status of completion. 35 36 C. Should the Engineer determine that the Work is not substantially complete: 37 38 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor, in writing, giving the 39 reasons therefore. 40 41 2. Contractor shall remedy the deficiencies in the Work, and send a 42 second written notice of substantial completion to the Engineer. 43 44 3. The Engineer will re- inspect the Work. 45 46 D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is substantially complete, he will: CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -1 06/24/14 1 1 Prepare and deliver to Owner a tentative Certificate of Substantial 2 Completion with a tentative list of items to be completed or corrected 3 before final payment. 4 5 2. After consideration of any objections made by the Owner as provided in 6 General Conditions, and when the Engineer considers the Work 7 substantially complete, he will execute and deliver to the Owner and the 8 Contractor a definite Certificate of Substantial Completion with a 9 revised tentative list of items to be completed or corrected. 10 11 1.03 FINAL INSPECTION 12 13 A. When Contractor considers all the Work to be complete, he shall submit 14 written certification that: 15 16 1. Contract Documents have been reviewed. 17 18 2. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents. 19 20 3. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents. 21 22 4. Equipment and systems have been tested in the presence of the 23 Owner's representative and are operational. 24 25 5. Work is completed and ready for final inspection. 26 27 B. The Engineer will make an inspection to verify the status of completion with 28 reasonable promptness after receipt of such certification. 29 30 C. Should the Engineer consider that the Work is incomplete or defective: 31 32 1. The Engineer will promptly notify the Contractor in writing, listing the 33 incomplete or defective work. 34 35 2. Contractor shall take immediate steps to remedy the stated 36 deficiencies, and send a second written certification to the Engineer that 37 the Work is complete. 38 39 3. The Engineer will re- inspect the Work. 40 41 D. When the Engineer finds that the Work is acceptable under the Contract 42 Documents, he shall request the Contractor to make closeout submittals. 43 44 1.03 PARTIAL SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION ACCEPTANCE 45 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. For the purpose of construction phasing and for the commencement of the 2 warranty period for equipment, the Owner may accept portions of process 3 systems. Partial Substantial Completion shall be allowed for a complete 4 process system only, or combination of process systems working together, 5 and the Owner shall only consider for partial Substantial Completion those 6 systems as specified herein. 7 8 B. The following general requirements must be completed prior to the Owner 9 accepting partial Substantial Completion of a system. Owner shall accept 10 stand -alone ancillary systems for consideration of partial substantial 11 acceptance. 12 13 1. An equipment manufacturer representative shall be present for all initial 14 start-up and testing as specified in Section 01625 and all other start-up 15 and testing as required in the equipment specifications in Division 11. 16 17 2. The Contractor shall provide training of Owner personnel in the 18 operation of new equipment, according to the equipment specifications 19 outlined in Division 11 and Section 01820. 20 21 3. Contractor shall provide Operating and Maintenance Data to the Owner 22 as required by Section 01730. 23 24 4. All electrical equipment including controls, conduit, wiring and safety 25 interlocks for each piece of equipment as shown on the Drawings must 26 be completed as outlined in Divisions 13 and 16. 27 28 5. All Control System equipment must be installed and operational for the 29 system that is being tested for partial substantial completion as outlined 30 in Divisions 13 and 16. 31 32 6. All inlet and discharge piping must be connected and tested for each 33 system that is being tested for partial substantial completion in 34 compliance with Division 01. 35 36 7. Certifications of Proper Installation shall be furnished, along with spare 37 parts, calibration certificates, and the results of all tests. 38 39 C. Partial substantial completion will be considered only for each pair of two 40 clarifiers, and for each RAS pump, as they are tested and placed in service. 41 42 1.05 RE- INSPECTION FEES 43 44 A. Should the Engineer perform re- inspections, due to failure of the Work, to 45 comply with the claims of status of completion made by the Contractor: 46 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -3 06/24/14 1 1. Owner will compensate the Engineer for such additional services. 2 3 2. Owner will deduct the amount of such compensation from the final 4 payment to the Contractor. 5 6 1.06 CONTRACTOR'S CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS TO ENGINEER 7 8 A. Evidence of compliance with requirements of governing authorities. 9 10 B. Project Record Documents. 11 12 C. Operating and Maintenance Data, Instructions to Owner's Personnel. 13 14 D. Warranties and Bonds. 15 16 E. Keys and Keying Schedule. 17 18 F. Spare Paris and Maintenance Materials. 19 20 G. Evidence of Payment and Release of Liens. 21 22 H. Certificate of Insurance for Products and Completed Operations. 23 24 I. Contractor's Final Affidavit. 25 26 J. Lien Waivers from Subcontractors and Suppliers. 27 28 K. Consent of Surety from the bonding company. 29 30 L. Contractor's Guarantee. 31 32 1.07 FINAL ADJUSTMENT OF ACCOUNTS 33 34 A. Submit a final statement of accounting to the Engineer. 35 36 B. Statement shall reflect all adjustments to the Contract Sum: 37 38 1. The original Contract Sum. 39 40 2. Additions and deductions resulting from: 41 42 a. Previous Change Orders. 43 44 b. Unit Prices. 45 46 c. Deductions for uncorrected Work. CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 d. Penalties and Bonuses. 3 4 e. Deductions for liquidated damages. 5 6 f. Deductions for re- inspection payments. 7 8 g. Other adjustments. 9 10 3. Total Contract Sum, as adjusted. 11 12 4. Payments. 13 14 5. Sum remaining due. 15 16 C. Engineer will prepare a final Change Order, reflecting approved adjustments to 17 the Contract Sum, which were not previously made by Change Orders. 18 19 1.08 FINAL APPLICATION FOR PAYMENT 20 21 A. Contractor shall submit the final Application for Payment in accordance with 22 procedures and requirements stated in the General Conditions. 23 24 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 25 26 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 27 28 29 END OF SECTION 30 CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -5 06/24/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CONTRACT CLOSEOUT 01700 -6 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01710 2 3 CLEANING 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. The Contractor shall execute cleaning during progress of Work and at 10 completion of the Work as required by the General Conditions. 11 12 1.02 DISPOSAL REQUIREMENTS 13 14 A. The Contractor shall conduct cleaning and disposal operations to comply with 15 all applicable Laws and Regulations. 16 17 B. Disposal of waste materials shall be in accordance with the Section III, 17.7 18 and local Ordinances. 19 20 PART 2 — MATERIALS 21 22 2.01 MATERIALS 23 24 A. The Contractor shall use only those cleaning materials which do not create 25 hazards to health or property and which do not damage surfaces. 26 27 B. The Contractor shall use only those cleaning materials and methods 28 recommended by the Manufacturer of the surface material to be cleaned. 29 30 C. The Contractor shall use cleaning materials only on surfaces so recommended 31 by cleaning material Manufacturer. 32 33 PART 3 — EXECUTION 34 35 3.01 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION 36 37 A. The Contractor shall execute daily cleaning to keep the Work, the site and 38 adjacent properties free from accumulations of waste materials, water, eroded 39 material, rubbish and windblown debris resulting from construction operations. 40 41 B. The Contractor shall provide suitable on -site containers for the daily collection 42 of all waste materials, debris and rubbish. 43 44 C. The Contractor shall remove waste materials, debris and rubbish from site 45 containers periodically and dispose of in accordance with Section 1.02. 46 CLEANING 01710 -1 06/24/14 1 D. The Contractor shall schedule operations so that dust and other contaminants 2 resulting from the cleaning process do not fall on wet or newly- coated 3 surfaces. 4 5 E. The Contractor shall remove from the site all surplus materials and temporary 6 structures when no further need therefore develops and as approved by 7 the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible and liable for all spillage 8 and shall incur all associated costs including, but not limited to, costs related 9 to repair and maintenance resulting from any such damage. 10 11 3.02 FINAL CLEANING 12 13 A. The Contractor shall employ skilled workmen for final cleaning. 14 15 B. The Contractor shall remove all grease, mastic, adhesives, dust, dirt, stains, 16 fingerprints, labels and all other foreign materials from sight - exposed interior 17 and exterior surfaces. 18 19 C. Prior to Final Completion, the Contractor shall conduct an inspection of sight - 20 exposed interior and exterior surfaces and all Work areas, to verify that the 21 entire Work and the entire construction area of the Work are clean. 22 23 24 END OF SECTION CLEANING 01710 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01720 2 3 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Maintain at the site for the Owner one record copy of: 10 11 1. Drawings 12 13 2. Specifications 14 15 3. Addenda 16 17 4. Change Orders and other Modifications to the Contract 18 19 5. Engineer's Field Orders or written instructions 20 21 6. Approved Shop Drawings, Working Drawings and Samples 22 23 7. Field Test Records 24 25 8. Construction Photographs, if provided 26 27 9. Detailed progress schedule 28 29 1.02 MAINTENANCE OF DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES 30 31 A. Store documents and samples in Contractor's field office apart from 32 documents used for construction. 33 34 1. Provide files and racks for storage of documents. 35 36 2. Provide locked cabinet of secure storage space for storage of samples. 37 38 B. File documents and samples in accordance with CSI format. 39 40 C. Maintain documents in a clean, dry, legible condition and in good order. Do 41 not use record documents for construction purposes. 42 43 D. Make documents and samples available at all times for inspection by the 44 Engineer. 45 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 -1 06/24/14 1 E. As a pre- requisite for monthly progress payments, the Contractor shall exhibit 2 the updated "record documents" for review by the Engineer and Owner. 3 4 1.03 MARKING DEVICES 5 6 A. Provide felt tip marking pens for recording information in the color code 7 designated by the Engineer. 8 9 1.04 RECORDING 10 11 A. Label each document "PROJECT RECORD" in neat large printed letters. 12 13 B. Record information concurrently with construction progress. 14 15 1. Do not conceal any work until required information is recorded. 16 17 C. Drawings: Legibly mark to record actual construction: 18 19 1. Depths of various elements of foundation in relation to finish first floor 20 datum. 21 22 2. Denote all underground piping elevations and dimensions; all changes 23 to piping location; horizontal and vertical locations of underground 24 utilities and appurtenances, all referenced to perrnanent surface 25 improvements. Actual installed pipe material, class, etc. 26 27 3. Locations of internal utilities and appurtenances concealed in the 28 construction, referenced to visible and accessible features of the 29 structure. 30 31 4. Field changes of dimension and detail. 32 33 5. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. 34 35 6. Details not on original Contract Documents. 36 37 7. Equipment and piping relocations. 38 39 8. Major architectural and structural changes including relocation of doors, 40 windows, etc. 41 42 9. Architectural schedule changes according to Contractor's records and 43 shop drawings. 44 45 D. Specifications and Addenda; legibly mark each Section to record: 46 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 1.05 SUBMITTAL 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 30 31 32 PART 3 — EXECUTION 33 34 35 36 1. Manufacturer, trade name, catalog number, and supplier of each product and item of equipment actually installed. 2. Changes made by Field Order or by Change Order. E. Shop Drawings (after final review and approval): 1. Two (2) CDs of shop drawings for each piece of process equipment, piping, electrical and instrumentation system. A. At contract close -out, deliver Record Documents to the Engineer for the Owner. B. Accompany submittal with transmittal letter in duplicate, containing: 1. Date, 2. Project title and number, 3. Contractor's name and address, 4. Title and number of each Record Document, and 5. Signature of Contractor or his authorized representative. (NOT USED) (NOT USED) END OF SECTION PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 -3 06/24/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 01720 -4 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01730 2 3 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Compile product data and related information appropriate for Owner's 10 maintenance and operation of new equipment and processes furnished and or 11 installed by the Contractor. 12 13 1. Prepare operating and maintenance data as specified in this Section 14 and as referenced in other pertinent sections of Specifications. 15 16 2. The information in the O &M Manual shall be specific and targeted for 17 the equipment and processes supplied for this project. 18 19 3. Incorporate operating and maintenance data furnished by the Owner, if 20 previously defined in the scope of work. 21 22 B. Furnish all labor, equipment, materials, and all other items required to supply 23 and deliver to the Engineer, O &M Manuals for the work, mechanical 24 equipment, instrumentation equipment, electrical equipment, process control 25 equipment, and software on a facility wide, system by system, and individual 26 equipment basis as pertinent to the project. 27 28 C. One (1) electronic copy or five (5) hard copy draft O &M Manuals for each 29 piece of equipment shall be submitted to the Engineer upon delivery of the 30 equipment. The draft O &M Manuals shall include the manufacturer's test 31 results and specification and may be used as a training aid (but not in lieu of 32 the training manual). 33 34 D. Furnish the Owner five (5) approved complete hardcopy sets of operation and 35 maintenance data and two (2) approved complete set of operation and 36 maintenance data in electronic "pdf' format on a CD as specified herein for the 37 project. 38 39 1. Any modifications required after final O &M submission shall be made to 40 the manuals by issuance of all new manuals with the revised or 41 additional information included and clearly identified. 42 43 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 44 45 A. Preparation of data shall be done by personnel: 46 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -1 06/24/14 1 1. Trained and experienced in maintenance and operation of described 2 products. 3 4 2. Familiar with requirements of this Section. 5 6 3. Skilled and technical writer to the extent required to communicate 7 essential data. 8 9 4. Skilled as draftspersons competent to prepare required Drawings. 10 11 1.03 FORM OF SUBMITTALS 12 13 A. Prepare data in form of an instructional manual for use by Owner's personnel. 14 15 B. Format: 16 17 1. Size: 8 -1/2 inches x 11- inches. 18 19 2. Paper: 20 pound minimum white, for typed pages. 20 21 3. Text: Manufacturer's printed data, or neatly typewritten. 22 23 4. Drawings: 24 25 a. Provide reinforced punched binder tabs, bind in with text. 26 b. Reduce larger Drawings to 11- inches x 17- inches and fold to 27 size of text pages and printed only on one side. 28 29 5. Provide tabbed fly -leaf for each separate product, or each piece of 30 operating equipment. 31 32 a. Provide typed description of the product, and of each major 33 component part of equipment. 34 b. Provide indexed tabs. 35 36 6. Cover: Identify each volume with typed or printed title "OPERATING 37 AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS." List: 38 39 a. Title of Project 40 b. Identity of separate structure as applicable. 41 c. Identity of general subject matter covered in the manual. 42 43 C. Binders: 44 45 1. Commercial quality three -post binders with durable and cleanable 46 plastic covers. 47 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Maximum post width: 2- inches. Each binder filled to not more than 2 75% capacity. 3 4 3. When multiple binders are used, correlate the data into related 5 consistent groupings. 6 7 D. Refer to Specification Section 01300 for additional submittal requirements. 8 9 1.04 GENERAL CONTENT OF MANUAL 10 11 A. Neatly typewritten table of contents for each volume, arranged in systematic 12 order. If more than one volume is required, the table of contents of each 13 volume shall be included with all volumes. 14 15 B. The contact information, address, and phone number for the Contractor and 16 the responsible principal shall be included. 17 18 C. A list of each product included, indexed to content of the volume. 19 20 D. A list, with each product, name, address, and telephone number of: 21 22 a. Manufacturer 23 b. Subcontractor or installer. 24 c. Maintenance contractor, as appropriate. 25 d. Local source of supply for parts and replacement. 26 27 E. Identify each product by product name and other identifying symbols as set 28 forth in Contract Documents. 29 30 F. Product Data: 31 32 1. Include only those sheets which are pertinent to the specific product. 33 34 2. Annotate each sheet to: 35 36 a. Clearly identify specific product or part installed. 37 b. Clearly identify data applicable to installation. 38 c. Delete references to inapplicable information. 39 40 G. Drawings: 41 42 1. Supplement product data with Drawings as necessary to clearly 43 illustrate: 44 45 a. Relations of component parts of equipment and systems. 46 b. Control and flow diagrams. 47 c. Owner Tag Numbers. OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -3 06/24/14 1 d. Exploded views with part numbers listed and identified. 2 3 2. Coordinate drawings with information in Project Record Documents to 4 assure correct illustration of completed installation. 5 6 H. Written text, as required to supplement product data for the particular 7 installation: 8 9 1. Organized in consistent format under separate headings for different 10 procedures. 11 12 2. Provide logical sequence of instructions of each procedure. 13 14 3. Provide an overview of how the complete system should operate. 15 16 I. Provide a copy of each warranty, bond, and service contract issued. 17 18 1. Provide information sheet for Owner's personnel with the following 19 information: 20 21 a. Proper procedures in event of failure. 22 b. Circumstances and events that may affect validity of warranties 23 or bonds. 24 25 1.05 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR ARCHITECTURAL PRODUCTS, MOISTURE - 26 PROTECTED, WEATHER- EXPOSED, AND APPLIED MATERIALS, AND FINISHES 27 28 A. Manufacturer's data, giving full information on products. 29 30 1. Catalog number, size, and composition. 31 2. Applicable Standards 32 3. Chemical Composition 33 4. Details of Installation or Application 34 5. Color and texture designations. 35 6. Information required for re- ordering special - manufactured products. 36 7. Storage instructions and shelf life information. 37 38 B. Instructions for care and maintenance. 39 40 1. Manufacturer's recommendation for types of cleaning agents and 41 methods. 42 43 2. Cautions against cleaning agents and methods that are detrimental to 44 product. 45 46 3. Recommended schedule for cleaning and maintenance. 47 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4. Instructions for inspection, maintenance, and repair. 2 3 1.06 CONTENT OF MANUAL FOR EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS 4 5 A. Content, for each electrical, mechanical, instrumentation, and communication 6 system, as appropriate: 7 8 1. A table identifying each piece of equipment, each associated control or 9 instrument, the location of the control or instrument, and the function of 10 the control or instrument. 11 12 2. A description of the system and its component parts. 13 14 3. Function, normal operating characteristics, and limiting conditions for 15 the system, the sub - system, and the component parts. 16 17 4. Performance curves, engineering data, and tests. 18 19 5. Complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replaceable parts. 20 21 6. Assembly drawings. 22 23 7. The manufacturer's parts list, illustrations, assembly drawings, and 24 diagrams, and exploded views required for operations and 25 maintenance. 26 27 8. Manufacturer's model and serial number. 28 29 9. List of all special tools required to service equipment and /or systems 30 including where the tools are stored. 31 32 10. Circuit directories of panel boards. 33 34 a. Electrical service. 35 b. Controls. 36 c. Communications. 37 38 11. As- installed color -coded wiring diagrams and control diagrams. 39 40 12. Instrument loop diagrams showing the path that a control or 41 instrumentation signal takes from its origin to the action it takes. 42 43 13. An electrical schematic for each item. 44 45 14. A chart listing the controls /instruments in a loop identifying the 46 equipment's abbreviated symbol, a description of the symbol, design 47 criteria, process flow, quantity supplied, and manufacturer's model and OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -5 06/24/14 serial number. 15. Operating procedures. a. Routine and normal operating instructions. b. Sequences required. c. Special operating instructions. d. Start-up, break -in, routine, and normal operating instructions. e. Regulation, control, stopping, shut -down, and emergency instructions. f. Special operating instructions. g. Control settings and ranges. 16. Maintenance procedures. a. Routine maintenance. b. Guide to "trouble- shooting." c. Disassembly, repair, and re- assembly. d. Alignment, adjustment, tolerances, and checking. e. Type and frequency of preventive maintenance activities required for each piece of equipment. f. List of lubricants required. g. Period between lubrications. h. Servicing and lubrication schedule. 17. The manufacturer's printed operating and maintenance instructions. 18. Abnormal and emergency operations. a. Potential overloads. b. Procedures for equipment breakdown. c. Action to be taken in a power outage. d. Identity of alarms by equipment location and action to correct. e. Equipment safety features, requirements, and potential hazards. 19. Programming manuals for programmable devices including list of standard programming. 20. Other data as required under pertinent Sections of the Specifications. 21. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts, manufacturer's current prices, recommended quantities to be maintained in storage, and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 22. The final approved manual shall include the startup report for each piece of equipment and documentation that the Owner's designated OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -6 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 personnel attended a formal training session as applicable for each 2 piece of equipment. 3 4 23. Charts of equipment, instrument, and valve tag numbers with location, 5 function, sheet number, model number, serial number, and actuator 6 type identified. 7 8 1.07 INSTRUCTION OF OWNER'S PERSONNEL 9 10 A. Refer to Specification 01820 for Training and Instruction of Owner's personnel. 11 12 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Used) 13 14 PART 3 — EXECUTION (Not Used) 15 16 17 END OF SECTION 18 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -7 06/24/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA 01730 -8 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01740 2 3 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED 8 9 A. Compile warranties and bonds, as specified in the General Conditions. 10 11 B. Co- execute submittals when so specified. 12 13 C. Review submittals to verify compliance with Contract Documents. 14 15 D. Submit to the Engineer for review and transmittal to Owner. 16 17 1.02 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 18 19 A. Assemble warranties, bonds, and service and maintenance contracts, 20 executed by each of the respective manufacturers, suppliers and 21 subcontractors. 22 23 B. Number of original signed copies required. Two each. 24 25 C. Table of Contents. Neatly typed in orderly sequence. Provide complete 26 information for each item. 27 28 1. Product or work item. 29 30 2. Firm, with name of principal, address and telephone number. 31 32 3. Scope. 33 34 4. Date of beginning warranty, bond or service and maintenance contract. 35 36 5. Duration of warranty, bond or service maintenance contract. 37 38 6. Provide information for Owner's personnel: 39 40 a. Proper procedure in case of failure. 41 42 b. Instances which might affect the validity of warranty or bond. 43 44 7. Contractor, name of responsible principal, address and telephone 45 number. 46 WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 -1 06/24/14 1 2 1.03 WARRANTY SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS 3 4 A. For all major pieces of equipment, submit a warranty from the equipment 5 manufacturer. The manufacturer's warranty period shall be concurrent with 6 the Contractor's for one (1) year, unless otherwise specified, commencing at 7 the time of substantial completion and /or final acceptance by the Owner, 8 whichever is later. 9 10 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining certificates for equipment 11 warranty for all major equipment that has a 1 HP motor or that has a list price 12 of more than $1,000. The Engineer reserves the right to request warranties 13 for equipment not classified as major. The Contractor shall still warrant 14 equipment not considered to be "major" in the Contractor's one -year warranty 15 period even though certificates of warranty may not be required. 16 17 C. In the event that the equipment manufacturer or supplier is unwilling to provide 18 a one -year warranty commencing at the time of Owner acceptance, the 19 Contractor shall obtain from the manufacturer a three (3) year warranty 20 commencing at the time of equipment delivery to the job site. The two -year 21 warranty from the manufacturer shall not relieve the Contractor of the one -year 22 warranty starting at the time of Owner acceptance of the equiprnent. 23 24 1.04 WARRANTY START DATE 25 26 A. No warranty shall start until the Engineer has issued a "Notice of Substantial 27 Completion ". 28 29 PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 30 31 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 32 33 34 END OF SECTION WARRANTIES AND BONDS 01740 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 01820 2 3 TRAINING 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 The Contractor shall be responsible for performing and /or coordinating the following work 10 relating to training the Owners designated personnel for this project: 11 12 A. Formalized training shall be provided on the following components and 13 equipment: 14 15 1. Clarifiers 16 2. RAS Pumps 17 3. VFDs 18 4. Sludge Blanket Detectors 19 5. WAS Flow Meter 20 6. Clarifier Starters 21 7. Control System 22 23 B. Instruct and train the Owner's personnel in the operation and maintenance of 24 the equipment and systems supplied and /or installed under this Contract as 25 listed in 1.01 A. 26 27 C. Incorporate operation and maintenance data and training services furnished 28 by the suppliers into the training program such as shop drawings, equipment 29 manuals, and start -up, engineering, and training assistance. 30 31 D. Ensure that system suppliers provide qualified training instructors experienced 32 in the proper operation and maintenance of all applicable equipment and 33 systems. 34 35 E. Prepare instructors and training materials required for complete factory, field, 36 classroom, and hands -on training. 37 38 F. Furnish training videos and training manuals during the training program. The 39 training manual shall be a separate document from the O &M Manual. 40 41 G. Include in the Contract Price the cost for training equipment; preparing training 42 manuals in addition to O &M manuals; conducting classroom instructions; 43 performing field, factory, and hands -on training; and coordinating and 44 incorporating training service provided by suppliers and all other activities 45 required to provide a comprehensive training program of sufficient length, as 46 determined by the Owner. TRAINING 01820 -1 06/24/14 1 1.02 SUBMITTALS 2 3 A. TRAINING MANUAL AND TRAINING PLAN 4 5 In conjunction with submittal of draft O &M Manuals, and at least 30 days 6 before equipment or systems startup, the Contractor shall submit to the 7 Engineer a proposed training manual and detailed training plan with specific 8 information as identified in PART 2 of this specification. 9 10 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 11 12 A. Preparation of training materials and instructions to be provided shall be 13 performed by personnel: 14 15 1. Trained and experienced in operation and maintenance of equipment 16 and systems installed under this Contract. 17 18 2. Familiar with the training requirements of the Owner. 19 20 B. The Contractor shall furnish the resumes and references for each instructor to 21 be used in the training program. 22 23 C. The Engineer and Owner may review the resumes. Based on the review of 24 the resumes and contacts with references, the Engineer shall approve, 25 request additional information, or reject proposed instructors for the training 26 program. If a proposed instructor is rejected, the Contractor shall submit the 27 resume and references of another candidate within a reasonable time. 28 29 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 30 31 2.01 TRAINING PLAN 32 33 A. A detailed training plan specific to the project or equipment shall be prepared 34 with specific information as follows: 35 36 1. Title and objectives. 37 2. Training schedule. 38 3. Prerequisite training and experience of attendees. 39 4. Recommended types of attendees (e.g., managers, engineers, 40 operators, maintenance staff). 41 5. Course description and outline of course content. 42 6. Duration. 43 7. Location (e.g., training center or site). 44 8. Format (e.g., lecture, self- study, demonstration, hands -on). 45 9. Instruction materials and equipment requirements. 46 10. Training manual. TRAINING 01820 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 B. The factory training program shall be completed before start-up of the Owner's 3 system and shall use equipment similar to the Owner's equipment. 4 5 C. The field training programs shall be conducted in accordance with the 6 approved schedule. 7 8 D. In conjunction with start-up of, the Contractor shall provide a competent and 9 experienced person thoroughly familiar with the Work for one 8 -hour day to 10 instruct the Owner's designated personnel in the operation, maintenance, and 11 control of the equipment or systems. 12 13 E. The Contractor shall coordinate and submit a training schedule to the 14 Engineer 30 days before the first training event. 15 16 2.02 VIDEOTAPED TRAINING MATERIAL 17 18 A. The Contractor shall produce or provide video training material subject to 19 approval of the Owner. 20 21 B. Provide four copies of each videotape in DVD format in plastic case with title, 22 the Owner's name, and date on a label in a clear plastic sleeve. 23 24 C. Bear all costs associated with production and provision of the DVDs. 25 26 PART 3 — EXECUTION (NOT USED) 27 28 29 END OF SECTION 30 TRAINING 01820 -3 06/24/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TRAINING 01820 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02062 2 3 REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, tools, equipment, materials, and incidentals required to 10 remove all existing structures, equipment, pipe, fittings, valves, electrical, 11 instrumentation and controls, and all appurtenances as noted on the Contract 12 Drawings, as reasonably inferred and as required in order to perform the work 13 as described in the Contract Documents. 14 15 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 16 17 PART 3 — EXECUTION 18 19 3.01 GENERAL 20 21 A. The Contractor shall not proceed with the removal of any removal without 22 specific approval of the Engineer. Any facilities removed without proper 23 authorization shall be replaced to the satisfaction of the Engineer at the 24 Contractor's expense. 25 26 B. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and 27 supports not required to be reused and not designated as being turned over to 28 the Owner, shall become the property of the Contractor immediately upon 29 removal from their present locations. The Contractor shall remove such 30 material from the plant site at his own expense and it shall not be reused. 31 32 C. All existing equipment, valves, hardware, tubing, insulation, hangers, and 33 supports designated as being turned over to the Owner, shall be identified, 34 cleaned, protected, crated or boxed and stored at the plant site. 35 36 D. Pieces of equipment weighing 150 lbs or more shall be provided with suitable 37 skids before storing. 38 39 E. Wherever piping is removed for disposition, adjacent pipe, and headers that 40 are to remain in service shall be blanked off or plugged and then supported or 41 anchored in an approved manner. 42 43 G. The Contractor shall take all necessary precautions against damaging the 44 material and equipment to be stored and reused. The Contractor shall repair 45 any damage resulting from his operations, as directed by and to the 46 satisfaction of the Engineer. Itemized lists of materials removed and stored 47 shall be given to the Resident Project Representative daily. A final typed REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 02062 -1 06/24/14 1 itemized list shall be furnished to the Engineer in 6 copies at the completion of 2 construction. The list shall include items, method of packaging, and place of 3 storage. 4 5 3.02 EQUIPMENT TO BE RETAINED 6 7 A. All equipment removed shall remain the property of the Owner unless 8 designated otherwise by the Owner. 9 10 B. If the Owner elects not to retain ownership of a certain item, the item shall 11 become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from the plant 12 site at the Contractor's expense. 13 14 C. If the Owner requests that the Contractor utilize a specific hauling service for 15 the removal of existing equipment or facilities, the Contractor shall utilize that 16 service at no additional cost to the Owner. 17 18 19 END OF SECTION REMOVAL OF EXISTING EQUIPMENT 02062 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02064 2 3 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to modify, 10 alter and /or convert existing structures as shown or specified and as required 11 for the installation of new mechanical equipment, piping, and appurtenances. 12 Existing piping and equipment shall be removed and dismantled as necessary 13 for the performance of structural alterations in accordance with the 14 requirements herein specified. 15 16 1.02 DEWATERING FOR STRUCTURES 17 18 A. The specific attention of the Contractor is directed to the fact that all of the 19 clarifiers, except Clarifiers 1 thru 4 at the Northeast WRF, are equipped with 20 ground water pressure relief valves installed in the bottom of the clarifiers. 21 The operability, capacity and functionality of these valves are unknown. The 22 Contractor shall take any and all precautions necessary to assure that the 23 clarifiers, or any other structure including the telescoping valves, do not 24 become buoyant and are not damaged in any way when draining the clarifier 25 or structure. 26 27 B. The East Plant has a permanent underdrain type groundwater dewatering 28 system installed in the vicinity of the clarifiers that must be used at all times 29 while any clarifier is empty. The Contractor shall furnish, install, operate, and 30 maintain the pump and a backup pump for this system while it is in operation. 31 32 C. The Contractor shall furnish, install, maintain, operate, and remove a 33 temporary dewatering system, in accordance with Section 02140, as required 34 to lower and control the groundwater level, such that there is no danger of any 35 structure becoming buoyant. In no event shall ground water rise to such a 36 level to cause unbalanced pressure on structures. Flotation shall be 37 prevented by maintaining a positive and continuous operation of the 38 dewatering system. The Contractor shall be fully responsible and liable for all 39 damages to existing structures, piping or equipment that may result from 40 failure of the groundwater dewatering system. 41 42 D. Dewatering System 43 44 1. The dewatering system shall be adequate to lower the groundwater 45 levels to required levels. The dewatering system must maintain the 46 lowered water table at all times until no longer needed. 47 MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT 02064 -1 05/31/13 1 2. The Contractor shall provide and have ready on -site for immediate use 2 at all times standby pumping and /or power systems to serve the 3 dewatering system in case of failure of the primary pumping /power 4 systems. 5 6 3. The Contractor shall be responsible for creating and implementing a 7 dewatering plan and a groundwater disposal plan. The plans shall be 8 submitted to the Engineer for approval and shall be approved prior to 9 initiating any dewatering activities. The Contractor shall also comply 10 with the requirements of the Florida Department of Environmental 11 Protection (FDEP) Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced 12 Groundwater from any Non - Contaminated Site Activity (rule 62- 13 621.300) for all discharges to surface waters or systems that flow into 14 surface waters. 15 16 4. Removal of the dewatering system shall be accomplished after the 17 dewatering system is no longer required. 18 19 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (NOT USED) 20 21 PART 3 — EXECUTION 22 23 3.01 GENERAL 24 25 A. The Contractor shall cut, repair, reuse, excavate, demolish, or otherwise 26 remove parts of the existing structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the 27 Contract Drawings, herein specified, or necessary to permit completion of the 28 work under this Contract. He shall dispose of surplus materials resulting from 29 the above work in an approved manner. The work shall include all necessary 30 cutting and bending of reinforcing steel, structural steel, or miscellaneous 31 metal work found embedded in the existing structures. Any item called for to 32 be removed shall be assumed to include connecting conduit, wiring and 33 supports, unless as otherwise directed by the Engineer. 34 35 B. The Contractor shall dismantle and remove all existing equipment, piping and 36 other appurtenances required for the completion of the work. Where called for 37 or required, the Contractor shall cut existing pipelines for the purpose of 38 making connections thereto. Anchor bolts for equipment and structural steel 39 removed shall be cut off one inch below the concrete surface. Surface shall 40 be finished as specified in Specification 03740. 41 42 C. At the time that a new connection is made to an existing pipeline, additional 43 new piping, extending to and including a new valve, shall be installed. 44 45 D. No existing structure, equipment, or appurtenance shall be shifted, cut, 46 removed, or otherwise altered except with the express approval of and to the 47 extent approved by the Engineer. MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT 02064 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 t 1 t 1 1 t 1 1 1 r 1 1 2 E. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making 3 openings in walls and partitions, the Contractor shall take all precautions and 4 use all necessary barriers and other protective devices so as not to damage 5 the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, and not to 6 damage the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise 7 permitted, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete. 8 9 F Materials and equipment removed in the course of making alterations and 10 additions shall remain the property of the Owner, except that items not 11 salvageable, as determined by the Engineer and the Owner, shall become the 12 property of the Contractor to be disposed of by him off the work site at his own 13 place of disposal. Operating equipment shall be thoroughly cleaned, 14 lubricated, and greased for protection during prolonged storage. 15 16 G. All alterations to existing structures shall be done at such time and in such 17 manner as will comply with the approved time schedule. So far as possible 18 before any part of the work is started, all tools, equipment and materials shall 19 be assembled and made ready so that the work can be completed without 20 delay. 21 22 H. All workmanship and new materials involved in constructing the alterations 23 shall conform to the General Specifications for the classes of work insofar as 24 such specifications are applicable. 25 26 I. All cutting of existing concrete or other material to provide suitable bonding to 27 new work shall be done in a manner to meet the requirements of the 28 respective section of these Specifications covering the work. When not 29 covered, the work shall be carried on in the manner and to the extent directed 30 by the Engineer. 31 32 J. Surfaces of seals visible in the completed work shall be made to match as 33 nearly as possible the adjacent surfaces. 34 35 K. Non - shrink grout shall be used for setting wall castings, sleeves, leveling 36 pump bases, doweling anchors into existing concrete and elsewhere as 37 shown. 38 39 L. Where necessary or required for the purpose of making connections, the 40 Contractor shall cut existing pipelines /couplings in a manner to provide an 41 approved joint. Where required, the Contractor shall weld beads, flanges, or 42 provide Dresser Couplings or equal, all as required. 43 44 M. The Contractor shall provide flumes, hoses, piping, and other related items to 45 divert or provide suitable plugs, bulkheads, or other means to hold back the 46 flow of water or other liquids, all as required in the performance of the work 47 under this Contract. MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT 02064 -3 05/31/13 1 2 N. Blasting will not be permitted to complete any work under this Contract. Care 3 shall be taken not to damage any part of existing buildings or foundations or 4 outside structures. 5 6 3.02 CONNECTING TO EXISTING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 7 8 A. The Contractor shall verify the exact location, material, alignment, joint, etc., of 9 existing piping and equipment prior to making the connections called out in the 10 Drawings. These verifications shall be performed with adequate time to 11 correct any alignment issues prior to the actual time of connection. 12 13 3.03 CLEANING EXISTING STRUCTURES 14 15 A. After dewatering and before commencing work on any tank, structure, 16 channels, clarifier, conduit or other structures, the Contractor shall remove and 17 dispose of the grit and other solids remaining in such structures in a lawful 18 manner. 19 20 21 END OF SECTION MODIFICATIONS TO EXISTING STRUCTURES, PIPING, AND EQUIPMENT 02064 -4 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02140 2 3 TEMPORARY DEWATERING 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. The Work to be performed includes the furnishing of all equipment, materials 10 and labor necessary to design, furnish, install, operate, and maintain 11 temporary dewatering systems to remove subsurface ground waters as 12 required by local conditions in accordance with all applicable laws, the 13 requirements set forth and as shown on the Drawings, as specified herein, or 14 as required for the completion of the work. 15 16 B. The Contractor is directed to the investigations and reports concerning the 17 installation of a groundwater monitoring well at the Northeast WRF site as 18 included in Appendix A. 19 20 C. Groundwater quality testing has been conducted by the City and the results 21 have shown elevated levels of TOC. Follow up testing has been conducted by 22 the City and the results show the elevated levels of TOC are not caused by 23 petroleum hydrocarbons and are believed to be consistent with background 24 levels of TOC in this area. As such, the Contractor shall utilize this data to 25 apply for and secure a State of Florida Department of Environmental 26 Protection Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water From 27 Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity in accordance with 62- 621.300(2) FAC. 28 Results of the groundwater testing are included in Appendix A. Any additional 29 groundwater testing required to obtain the Generic Permit shall be performed 30 by the Contractor. 31 32 D. It is anticipated that ground water dewatering will be required at all times when 33 any of the four clarifier structures are empty, being drained, or are otherwise 34 susceptible to becoming buoyant in order to perform the rehabilitation work of 35 this project. 36 37 E. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to conduct the necessary soil testing 38 required to design a dewatering system for this project, and to retain the 39 services of a Geotechnical Engineer to design the dewatering system. Submit 40 the geotechnical engineer's signed and sealed plan for review. The 41 Contractor shall be required to dispose of the product water from dewatering 42 activities in accordance with all laws applicable thereto. 43 44 F. The Contractor will be responsible for all costs associated with both 45 dewatering and with disposing of product water from dewatering activities. 46 TEMPORARY DEWATERING 02140 -1 05/31/13 1 I 1 G. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for the sizing, design, and 2 construction of the dewatering system and for the disposal of product water 3 from dewatering. The Contractor may utilize the existing stormwater collection 4 and treatment system for disposal of produced groundwater. 5 I 6 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 7 8 A. Groundwater dewatering and disposal of product water from cewatering shall 9 be in strict accordance with the latest revision of all Laws and Regulations; 10 with the local, State and Federal permits for the project; and, with the 11 Contractor's approved Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan (SWPPP) and 12 the Contractor's approved Dewatering Plan. 13 14 1.03 DEWATERING PLAN 15 16 A. Prior to commencing any excavations, the Contractor shall submit a written 17 Dewatering Plan to the Engineer for review. The Contractor shall make any 18 and all field investigations and tests necessary to properly design and 19 construct a temporary dewatering system and temporary disposal or 20 infiltration /percolation system. 21 I 22 B. The Dewatering Plan shall include calculations based on field measured 23 geotechnical /hydrogeological data identifying the amount of water that will be 24 produced from dewatering. The Plan shall indicate the rate at which product 25 water from dewatering is produced as well as the length of time it will be 26 produced for each distinct construction phase applicable to each dewatering 27 activity identified below: 28 29 1. Those times when any clarifier is prone to buoyancy, including those times 30 when the installation or replacement of ground water relief valves and 31 installation of internal structural and rotating components. 32 33 C. The Dewatering Plan shall be in conformity with the overall construction plan 34 and shall itemize all pumping equipment, ground penetration equipment and 35 piping. The pumping and piping arrangement, the volurne of proposed 36 discharge, and the location of the proposed discharge shall be identified in the 37 Dewatering Plan. I 38 39 D. The Dewatering Plan shall be signed and sealed by a Florida Registered 40 Professional Engineer. 41 42 1.04 UPLIFT AND FLOTATION 43 44 A. Uplift of a structure could occur if the groundwater elevation is higher than the 45 elevation of water inside the structure. The Contractor shall monitor the 46 groundwater elevation, by constructing piezometers where necessary, at all TEMPORARY DEWATERING 02140 -2 05/31/13 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 t 1 A 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 times any of the clarifiers are dewatered (drained), under rehabilitation, or with 2 water levels below their typical operating level. 3 4 B. The Contractor shall be fully responsible for ensuring that ground water levels 5 are controlled as required to prevent flotation and shall be fully responsible 6 and liable for all damages to structures and or pipes that may result from the 7 operation and /or failure of the dewatering system. 8 9 PART 2 — PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) 10 11 PART 3 — EXECUTION 12 13 3.01 TEMPORARY DEWATERING 14 15 A. The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment for the removal of surface or 16 subsurface waters that may accumulate in the tanks or in the excavation. The 17 Contractor shall prevent flotation and migration of fines by maintaining a 18 positive and continuous operation of the dewatering system. 19 20 B. If subsurface water is encountered, the Contractor shall utilize suitable 21 equipment to adequately dewater the tanks or the excavation so that it will be 22 dry to the bottom or to a depth of 12- inches below the subgrade compaction 23 level or over - excavation level, as appropriate. A well point system, trench 24 drain, sump pump operation, or other dewatering method selected by the 25 Contractor shall be utilized to maintain the work area in a dry condition for 26 preparation of the bottom and until the fills, structures or pipes to be built 27 thereon have been completed to such extent that they will not be floated or 28 otherwise damaged by allowing water levels to return to natural levels. No 29 water shall be allowed to contact masonry or concrete within 24 hours after 30 being placed. 31 32 C. Dewatering shall at all times be conducted in such a manner as to preserve 33 the undisturbed bearing capacity of the subgrade soils at the proposed bottom 34 of excavations and to preserve the integrity of adjacent structures and utilities. 35 Well or sump installations shall be constructed and operated continuously with 36 proper sand filters to prevent drawing of finer grained soil from the surrounding 37 ground. 38 39 D. In the event that satisfactory dewatering cannot be accomplished due to 40 subsurface conditions, or where dewatering could damage existing structures, 41 the Contractor shall obtain the Engineer's approval of wet trench construction 42 or procedure before commencing construction. 43 44 E. Engine- driven dewatering pumps shall be equipped with residential type 45 mufflers. Where practical and feasible, electrical "power drops" and electric 46 motor - driven equipment shall be used in lieu of portable generators. 47 TEMPORARY DEWATERING 02140 -3 05/31/13 1 F The Contractor shall take all additional precautions to prevent uplift of any 2 structure during construction, including the installation of piezorneters for water 3 level monitoring. 4 5 G. The Contractor shall take all precautions to preclude the accidental discharge 6 of fuel, oil, etc. to prevent adverse effects on groundwater quality. All costs 7 associated with any such adverse effects shall be borne by the Contractor. 8 9 H. The Contractor shall, at no expense to the Owner, be required to excavate 10 below grade and refill with approved fill material if the Engineer determines 11 that adequate drainage has not been provided. 12 13 3.02 DISPOSAL 14 15 A. The Contractor shall not cause flooding by overloading or blocking up the flow 16 in the drainage facilities, and shall leave the facilities unrestricted and as clean 17 as originally found. Any damage to existing facilities shall be repaired or 18 restored as directed by the Engineer or the authority having jurisdiction, at no 19 cost to the Owner. 20 21 B. The Contractor shall be responsible for acquiring and complying with all 22 permits required to dispose of the product water from dewatering and shall 23 protect adjacent waterways from product water run -off and turbidity while the 24 system is in operation. 25 26 C. In areas where adequate disposal sites are not available, partially backfilled 27 trenches may be used for water disposal. The Contractor's pllan shall include 28 temporary culverts, barricades and other protective measures to prevent 29 damage to property or injury to any person or persons. 30 31 D. No flooding of streets, roadways, driveways or private property shall be 32 permitted. 33 34 3.03 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL AND AREA RESTORATION 35 36 A. Removal of dewatering equipment shall be accomplished after the system is 37 no longer required. All materials and equipment constituting the system shall 38 be removed by the Contractor. 39 40 B. All sock drains shall be filled with flowable fill when no longer needed, and 41 abandoned in place. 42 43 C. All areas shall be restored in accordance with Specification Section 02485. 44 45 46 END OF SECTION TEMPORARY DEWATERING 02140 -4 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02221 2 3 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. This section includes, except as elsewhere provided, all excavation for 10 pipelines and appurtenances including drainage, filling, backfilling, grading, 11 disposal of surplus material and restoration of trench surfaces. 12 13 B. Excavation shall provide suitable room for installing pipe, structures and 14 appurtenances. Pavement shall be cut with pneumatic chisels along straight 15 lines before excavating. 16 17 C. The Contractor shall furnish and place all sheeting, bracing and supports, and 18 shall remove from the excavation all materials which the Engineer may deem 19 unsuitable for backfilling. The bottom of the excavation shall be firm, dry and 20 in all respects, acceptable. The length of open trench shall be related closely 21 to the rate of installing pipe. All excavation shall be made in open trenches. 22 23 D. All pipe and fittings shall be clearly marked with the name or trademark of the 24 manufacturer, the batch number, the location of the plant and strength 25 designation, as applicable. All pipe shall be laid with a 2 -inch metallic tape, 26 appropriately color -coded and imprinted with the type of service, 12- inches 27 below final grade, directly above the utility for identification and ease of 28 location. The appropriate tape color codes are as follows: 29 30 Gray - Gravity Sewer 31 Green - Sanitary force main 32 Blue - Potable water 33 Lavender - Reclaimed water 34 35 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 36 37 2.01 MATERIALS 38 39 A. General 40 41 1. Materials for use as fill shall be described below. For each material, the 42 Contractor shall notify the Testing Lab of the source of the material at 43 least ten calendar days prior to the date of anticipated use of such 44 material. 45 46 2. Materials shall be furnished as required from offsite sources and hauled 47 to the site. EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -1 10/14/14 1 3. Disposal of unsuitable material is specified in this Section. See 2 Paragraph 3.10. 3 4 B. Common Fill 5 6 1. Common fill shall consist of mineral soil, free of organic material, loam, 7 wood, trash and other objectionable material which may be 8 compressible or which cannot be compacted properly. Common fill 9 shall not contain stones larger than 10 -in. in any dimension, broken 10 concrete, masonry, rubble, or other similar materials. It shall have 11 physical properties such that it can be readily spread and compacted 12 during filling. 13 14 2. Material falling within the above specification, encountered during the 15 excavation, may be stored in segregated stockpiles for reuse. All 16 material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is not suitable for reuse 17 shall be spoiled as specified herein for disposal of unsuitable materials. 18 19 C. Crushed Stone 20 21 1. Crushed stone shall be used for manhole bases, as a drainage layer 22 below structures with underdrains and at other locations indicated on 23 the Drawings. 24 25 2. Crushed stone for pipe bedding shall be size No. 67 with gradation as 26 defined in Table 1 of Section 901 of Florida Department of 27 Transportation Standard Specifications for Road & Bridge Construction. 28 29 D. Select Fill 30 31 1. Select fill shall be noncohesive, non - plastic material free of all debris, 32 lumps or clods. Fill material shall be clean earth fill composed of sand 33 or an approved mixture of clay and sand. Backfill material placed within 34 one foot of piping and appurtenances shall not contain any stones or 35 rocks larger than 2 inches in diameter, or 3/4 -inch in diameter for PVC 36 pipe. 37 38 PART 3 — EXECUTION 39 40 3.01 DISPOSAL OF MATERIALS 41 42 A. Excavated material shall be stacked without excessive surcharge on the 43 trench bank. Inconvenience to traffic and abutters shall be avoided as much 44 as possible. Excavated material shall be segregated for use in backfilling as 45 specified below. 46 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -2 10/14/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Surplus excavated material which, in the opinion of the Engineer, is suitable 2 for use in backfilling or for replacing rock and boulders shall be stockpiled at a 3 satisfactory site to be obtained by the Contractor to be used as required. 4 Unsatisfactory surplus material including paving, rock or boulders, muck, 5 stumps and other material, as directed by the Engineer, shall be disposed of 6 by the Contractor. 7 8 C. It is expressly understood that no excavated material shall be removed from 9 the site of the work or disposed of by the Contractor except as directed by the 10 Engineer. When removal of surplus material has been approved by the 11 Engineer, the Contractor shall dispose of such surplus material. 12 13 D. Should conditions make it impracticable or unsafe to stack material adjacent to 14 the trench, the material shall be hauled and stored at a location provided by 15 the Contractor. When required, it shall be rehandled and used in backfilling 16 the trench. No extra compensation will be made for rehandling material. 17 18 3.02 SHEETING AND BRACING 19 20 A. The Contractor shall furnish, put in place, and maintain sheeting and bracing 21 required to support the sides of the excavation and prevent loss of ground 22 which could damage or delay the work or endanger adjacent structures. If the 23 Engineer is of the opinion that at any point sufficient or proper supports have 24 not been provided, he may order additional supports placed at the expense of 25 the Contractor from his responsibility for the sufficiency of such supports. 26 Care shall be taken to prevent voids outside of the sheeting, but if voids are 27 formed, they shall be immediately filled and rammed. 28 29 3.03 TEST PITS 30 31 A. The Contractor may be required to excavate test pits for the purpose of 32 locating underground utilities or structures as an aid in establishing the precise 33 location of new work. Test pits shall be backfilled as soon as the desired infor- 34 mation has been obtained. The backfilled surface shall be maintained in a 35 satisfactory condition for travel until resurfaced as hereinafter specified. 36 37 B. Excavation of test pits shall be considered work incidental to the project and 38 shall be done at the Contractor's expense. 39 40 C. If, for any reason, a test pit is left open for any period of time, it shall be 41 properly barricaded and lighted by the Contractor, when directed by the 42 Engineer, in accordance with State and Local laws. 43 44 3.04 DRAINAGE 45 46 A. The Contractor shall furnish all materials and equipment and perform all 47 incidental work required to install and maintain the drainage system he EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -3 10/14/14 1 proposes for handling ground water or surface water encountered. He shall 2 assume all responsibility for the adequacy of the methods, materials, and 3 equipment employed. Construction shall not begin until the Engineer is 4 assured that the proposed method will be satisfactory. The requirements for a 5 stable subgrade are indicated below, and the Contractor must alter his 6 drainage methods, if, in the opinion of the Engineer, the trench bottom is 7 unsatisfactory. 8 9 B. The Contractor shall provide pumping equipment and devices to properly 10 remove and dispose of all water entering trench and excavation. The grade 11 shall be maintained acceptably dry until structures and pipe to be constructed 12 therein are completed. All drainage shall be performed without damage to the 13 trench, pavements, pipes, electrical conduits, or other utilities. 14 15 C. Pipe and masonry shall not be laid in water or submerged within 24 hours after 16 being placed. Water shall not flow over new masonry within four days after 17 placement. 18 19 D. In no event shall water rise to cause unbalanced pressure on structures until 20 the concrete or mortar has set at least 24 hours. The Contractor shall prevent 21 flotation of the pipe promptly placing backfill. 22 23 E. If the Contractor elects to use underdrains for handling water, he shall furnish 24 and install pipe and crushed stone graded from course to fine, and shall 25 furnish and install all pumps and equipment necessary to maintain the water 26 level continuously at the required elevation. Pipe underdrains shall be laid 27 with open joints and bedded in crushed stone for the full width of trench, and 28 to a depth of 6 -in. below the invert of underdrain. 29 30 F. The invert of underdrain shall be 12 -in. below the normal subgrade. Pipe 31 underdrains shall have no permanent outlet and shall be sealed at the 32 completion of the work. The length of continuous underdrain to be used shall 33 be limited as conditions require. An impervious bulkhead of clay or concrete 34 shall be constructed in the trench bottom between 100 ft ,. lengths of the 35 underdrain system to obstruct the free flow of ground water after construction 36 is completed. All excavation below normal grade for the purpose of installing 37 underdrains, the crushed stone and underdrain pipe shall be considered a part 38 of the drainage work to be done under the pipe items. The Contractor shall 39 continuously guard against the loss of earth through subbase or the 40 underdrain. Should loss of either take place, the Contractor shall alter the 41 stone size to provide a satisfactory barrier or filter. 42 43 G. Where other methods of handling water prove inadequate, the Contractor shall 44 furnish, install, operate, and remove proper well point facilities. 45 46 H. The Contractor shall submit a dewatering plan to the Engineer prior to 47 commencement of work in accordance with Section 02140. 48 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -4 10/14/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.05 TRENCH EXCAVATION 2 3 A. Excavation shall be made for all trenches which are required for the 4 installation of pipes, culverts, manholes and drainage structures. 5 6 B. Trench width at the ground surface may vary depending on depth, type of soil, 7 and position of surface structures. The minimum clear width of the trench, 8 sheeted or unsheeted, measured at the springline of the pipe should be 1 foot 9 greater than the outside diameter of the pipe. The maximum recommended 10 clear width of the trench at the top of the pipe is equal to the pipe outside 11 diameter plus 2 feet. If the maximum recommended trench width must be 12 exceeded or if the pipe is installed in a compacted embankment, then pipe 13 embedment should be compacted to a point of at least 2 -1/2 pipe diameters 14 from the pipe on both sides of the pipe or to the trench walls, whichever is 15 less. 16 17 C. The trench may be excavated by machinery to, or just below the designated 18 subgrade provided that the material remaining in the bottom of the trench is no 19 more than slightly disturbed. 20 21 D. Rock shall be removed to a minimum of 8 -in. clearance around the bottom and 22 sides of the pipe being laid. 23 24 E. The trench bottom should be constructed to provide a firm, stable and uniform 25 support for the full length of the pipe. Bell holes should be provided at each 26 joint to permit proper assembly and pipe support. Any part of the trench 27 bottom excavated below grade should be backfilled to grade and should be 28 compacted as required to provide firm pipe support. When an unstable 29 subgrade condition is encountered that could provide inadequate pipe support, 30 additional trench depth should be excavated and refilled with suitable 31 foundation material. Ledge rock, boulders, and large stones should be 32 removed to provide 4- inches of soil cushion of all sides of the pipe and 33 accessories. 34 35 3.06 PIPE BEDDING 36 37 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install pipe on the type of bedding shown on 38 the Drawings or as specified by the Engineer but shall be Type 4 bedding at a 39 minimum. Regardless of the type of bedding used by the Contractor, holes in 40 the trench shall be provided to receive the pipe bell. The hole excavated shall 41 be sufficient to relieve pipe bells of all loads and yet provide support over the 42 total length of the pipe barrel. 43 44 B. Pipe shall be installed with proper bedding providing uniform longitudinal 45 support under the pipe. Backfill material shall be worked under the sides of 46 the pipe to provide satisfactory support under the haunches of the pipe. All 47 bedding material shall be select fill. Sharp stones and crushed rock (larger EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -5 10/14/14 1 than 3 /4 -in.), which could cause significant scratching or abrasion of the pipe, 2 shall be excluded from the embedment material. Proper compaction 3 procedures shall be exercised. 4 5 C. Where required to provide a firm bedding for the pipe, and with the approval of 6 the Engineer, a crushed stone bedding shall be provided from a depth of 12" 7 below the pipe up to the pipe haunches. 8 9 3.07 BACKFILLING 10 11 A. As soon as practicable after the pipe has been laid, joined and bedded, 12 backfilling shall begin and thereafter be prosecuted expeditiously. 13 14 B. Select backfill material, free from stones and other foreign material, shall be 15 placed to a depth of 12- inches over the top of the pipe. Backfill shall be 16 thoroughly compacted by hand - tamping as placed. The remainder of the 17 trench shall be backfilled in loose 12 -inch lifts of common or structural fill as 18 applicable. 19 20 C. Any space remaining between the pipe and side of the trench shall be packed 21 full by hand shovel with selected earth, free from stones having a diameter 22 greater than 2 -inch, and thoroughly compacted with a tamper as fast as placed 23 up to a level of 12- inches above the top of the pipe. 24 25 D. Backfilling shall be carried up evenly on both sides with at least one person 26 tamping for each person shoveling material into the trench. 27 28 E. The remainder of the trench above the compacted backfill, as just described 29 shall be filled thoroughly compacted by rolling, ramming, as the Engineer may 30 direct, sufficiently to prevent subsequent settling. 31 32 F. Backfill around manholes shall be selected material and thoroughly 33 compacted. All backfill shall be compacted, especially under and over pipes 34 connected to the structures. 35 36 G. All fill shall be placed in a dry condition. 37 38 3.08 COMPACTION 39 40 A. Gravel and crushed stone in open areas, shall be placed in layers not to 41 exceed eight (8) inches in depth as measured before compactiion. Each layer 42 shall be compacted by a minimum of four (4) coverages. Incidental 43 compaction due to traffic by construction equipment will not be credited toward 44 the required minimum four (4) coverages. 45 46 B. Fill shall be placed in loose lifts not exceeding 12- inches and should be 47 compacted to a minimum of 98% of the maximum modified Proctor dry EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -6 10/14/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 density, as established in accordance with ASTM D -1557. Density tests 2 should be performed in each fill lift to confirm compaction before the next lift is 3 placed. 4 5 C. Areas adjacent to structures and other confined inaccessible to the roller or 6 truck shall be compacted with approved hand guided mechanical compaction 7 equipment. 8 9 D. Backfill and compaction for manholes and drainage structures shall be in 10 accordance with the requirements of FDOT. 11 12 E. It is the intention that the fill materials, with respect to moisture, be used in the 13 condition they are excavated insofar as this is practicable. Material that is too 14 wet shall be spread on the fill area and permitted to dry, assisted by harrowing 15 if necessary, until the moisture content is reduced enough to allow for proper 16 compaction as determined by the Engineer. Muck, mud, or organic material 17 shall not be utilized as trench fill. Such matter shall be removed from the 18 trench and replaced with suitable fill material. 19 20 3.09 GRADING 21 22 A. Grading shall be performed at such places as are indicated on the Drawings, 23 to the lines, grades, and elevations shown or as directed by the Engineer and 24 shall be made in such a manner that the requirements for formation of 25 embankments can be followed. All unacceptable material encountered, or 26 whatever nature within the limits indicated, shall be removed and disposed of 27 as directed. During the process of excavation, the grade shall be maintained 28 in such condition that it will be well drained at all times. When directed, 29 temporary drains and drainage ditches shall be installed to intercept or divert 30 surface water which may affect the progress or condition of the work. 31 32 B. The right is reserved to make small adjustments or revisions in lines or grades 33 if found necessary as the work progresses, due to discrepancies on the 34 Drawings of in order to obtain satisfactory construction. 35 36 C. Stones or rock fragments larger than 4 -in. in their greatest dimensions will not 37 be permitted in the top 6- inches of the subgrade. 38 39 D. All fill slopes shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross - section and 40 alignment shown on the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 41 42 E. In cuts, all loose or protruding rocks on the back slopes shall be jarred loose or 43 otherwise removed to line or finished grade of slope. All cut and fill slopes 44 shall be uniformly dressed to the slope, cross - section and alignment shown on 45 the Drawings or as directed by the Engineer. 46 47 EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -7 10/14/14 1 3.10 DISPOSAL OF UNSUITABLE SURPLUS MATERIAL 2 3 A. Unsuitable and surplus excavated materials and pavement shall become the 4 property of the Contractor and removed and disposed of by him off the project 5 site. 6 B. Suitable excavated materials may be used for fill or backfill if it meets the 7 Specification for common fill and is approved by the Engineer. Excavated 8 material so approved may by neatly stockpiled at the site where designated by 9 the Engineer provided there is an area available that will not interfere with the 10 operation of the plant or inconvenience traffic or adjoining property owners. If 11 space limitations do not permit stockpiling on the site, the Contractor will be 12 required to make arrangements for off -site stockpiling. Transport of such 13 material from and to the immediate site including any stockpiling agreements 14 shall by entirely at the Contractor's expense and shall not constitute grounds 15 for additional payment. 16 17 C. Surplus excavated material shall be used to fill depressions or other purposes 18 as the Engineer may direct. 19 20 3.11 DISPOSAL AND REPLACING OF ROCK 21 22 A. The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all pieces of rock which are not 23 suitable for use in other parts of the work. Rock disposed of by hauling away 24 to spoil areas is to be replaced and approved surplus excavation obtained 25 elsewhere on the site, insofar as it is available. Any deficiency in the backfill 26 material shall be made up with acceptable material from outside sources. 27 28 B. Rock may be used in fill only with the approval of the Engineer. 29 30 31 END OF SECTION EXCAVATION, BACKFILL, FILL, AND GRADING FOR PIPES 02221 -8 10/14/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02485 2 3 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, and equipment necessary to satisfactorily return all 10 construction areas to their original conditions or better. 11 12 B. Work includes furnishing and placing seed, sod, fertilizer, gravel, concrete, 13 asphalt, planting, watering and maintenance until acceptance by the Owner. 14 15 C. The restoration of grassed areas under this project shall be by sodding. 16 17 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 18 19 A. The Contractor shall provide a satisfactory stand of grass as specified. If 20 necessary, the Contractor shall repeat any or all of the work, including grading, 21 fertilizing, watering, and seeding or sodding at no additional cost to the Owner 22 until a satisfactory stand is obtained. 23 24 B. A satisfactory stand of grass is defined herein as a full lawn cover over areas 25 to be seeded or sodded, with grass free of weeds, alive and growing, leaving 26 no bare spots larger than 3/4 sq. yd. within a radius of 10 ft. 27 28 1.03 SUBMITTALS 29 30 A. Provide technical data as required for shop drawings on all materials or 31 installation procedures required under this Section and in accordance with the 32 contract documents. 33 34 B. Submit representative topsoil samples for analysis by a private laboratory to 35 determine nutrient deficiencies and outline a proper fertilization program. 36 37 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 38 39 2.01 MATERIALS 40 41 A. Fertilizer shall be a complete fertilizer, the elements of which are derived from 42 organic sources. Fertilizer shall be a standard product complying with State 43 and Federal fertilizer laws. 44 45 1. Percentages of nitrogen, phosphorus and potash shall be based on 46 laboratory tests on soils outlined in Paragraph 1.03B and approved by 47 the Engineer. For purpose of bidding, assume 6% nitrogen, 6% SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -1 05/31/13 1 phosphorus and 6% potash by weight. At least 50% of the total 2 nitrogen shall contain no Tess than 3% water - insoluble nitrogen. 3 4 2. Fertilizer shall be delivered to the site, mixed as specified, in the original 5 unopened standard size bags showing weight, analysis and name of 6 manufacturer. Containers shall bear the manufacturer's guaranteed 7 statement of analysis, or a manufacturer's certificate of compliance 8 covering analysis shall be furnished to the Engineer. Store fertilizer in a 9 weatherproof place and in such a manner that it will be kept dry and its 10 effectiveness will not be impaired. 11 12 3. Superphosphate shall be composed of finely ground phosphate rock as 13 commonly used for agricultural purposes containing not Tess than 20% 14 available phosphoric acid. 15 16 B. Grass seed shall be the same as existed prior to construction or as approved 17 by the Engineer and shall be 99 percent minimum purity, 80 percent minimum 18 germination and 1 percent maximum weed seed, labeled in accordance with 19 U.S. Department of Agriculture Rules and Regulations under Federal Seed Act 20 in effect. Seed which has become wet, moldy, or otherwise damaged in transit 21 or storage shall not be acceptable. 22 23 C. All disturbed areas with the limits of construction shall receive vegetative 24 treatment after final grading in accordance with these plans or landscaping 25 plans. Disturbed areas not specifically designated with a vegetative cover 26 shall be vegetated as follows: 27 28 1. Side slopes constructed at 4:1 (H to V) shall be sodded with argentine 29 Bahia or seeded and then covered with an erosion control blanket. 30 The blanket shall be the S75BN blanket as manufactured by North 31 America Gree or approved equal. 32 33 2. Side slopes less than 4:1 (H to V) shall be seeded and mulched. 34 35 D. Sodding 36 37 1. Sod shall be Argentine Bahia of firm texture having a compacted growth 38 and good root development. 39 40 2. Sod shall be certified to meet Florida State Plant Board Specifications, 41 absolutely true to varietal type, and free from weeds or other 42 objectionable vegetation, fungus, insects and disease of any kind. 43 44 3. Before being cut and lifted the sod shall have been mowed 3 times with 45 the final mowing not more than a week before cutting into uniform 46 dimensions. 47 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. Mulch shall be fresh hay. Rate of application specified herein shall correspond 2 to depth not Tess than 1 inch or more than 3 inches according to texture and 3 moisture content of mulch material. 4 5 F. It is the Contractor's responsibility to water the site, as required during 6 seeding and sodding operations and through the maintenance period and 7 until the work is accepted. The Contractor shall make whatever 8 arrangements may be necessary to ensure an adequate supply of water to 9 meet the needs for his work. The Contractor shall also furnish all necessary 10 hose, equipment, attachments and accessories for the adequate irrigation of 11 lawns and planted areas as may be required. 12 13 G. Asphaltic concrete surface shall consist of either Type S -1 or Type S -3 14 asphaltic concrete meeting the specified criteria outlined by the Florida 15 Department of Transportation Specifications, and Placement & Compaction 16 Procedures. 17 18 H. Base material shall consist of either limerock or shell material complying with 19 FDOT specifications and meeting a minimum LBR of 100. 20 21 PART 3 — EXECUTION 22 23 3.01 INSTALLATION 24 25 A. Following the subgrade preparation, the Contractor shall commence work on 26 lawns and grassed areas. Areas to be seeded or sodded shall be free from 27 soft spots and uneven grades. Apply 20 lbs. of 12 -3 -6 fertilizer per 1,000 sq. 28 ft. 29 30 B. Seeded and sodded areas shall be protected from traffic or other use by 31 placing warning signs or erecting barricades as necessary. Any areas 32 damaged prior to actual acceptance by the Owner shall be repaired by the 33 Contractor as directed by the Engineer. 34 35 3.02 LAWN BED PREPARATION 36 37 A. Areas to be sodded shall be cleared of all rough grass, weeds, and debris and 38 the ground brought to an even grade as approved. 39 40 B. The soil shall then be thoroughly tilled to a minimum 8 -inch depth. 41 42 C. Superphosphate at a rate for bidding purposes of 5 pounds per 1,000 square 43 foot and complete fertilizer at a rate for bidding purposes of 16 pounds per 44 1000 square foot shall be evenly distributed over entire area and cross - disked 45 into a depth of 4 -6 inches. 46 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -3 05/31/13 1 D. The areas shall then be brought to proper grade, free of sticks, stones, or 2 other foreign matter over 1 -inch in diameter of dimension. The surface shall 3 conform to finish grade, less the thickness of sod, free of water - retaining 4 depressions, the soil friable and of uniformly fill texture. 5 6 3.03 SOD HANDLING AND INSTALLATION 7 8 A. A one -foot wide strip of sod shall be provided around all structures, except 9 fencing, along the edges of slabs and along the edge of pavement. 10 11 B. During delivery, prior to planting, and during the planting of the lawn areas, the 12 sod panels at all times be protected from excessive drying and unnecessary 13 exposure of the roots to the sun. All sod shall be stacked during construction 14 and planting so as not to be damaged by sweating or excessive heat and 15 moisture. 16 17 C. After completion of soil conditioning as specified above, sod panels shall be 18 laid tightly together so as to make a solid sodded lawn area. On mounds and 19 other slopes, the long dimension of the sod shall be laid perpendicular to the 20 slope. Immediately following sod laying the lawn areas shall be rolled with a 21 lawn roller customarily used for such purposes, and then thoroughly watered. 22 23 D. Bring the sod edge in a neat, clean manner to the edge of all paving and shrub 24 areas. Top dressing with approved, clean, weed free, sand rnay be required 25 at no additional cost to the Owner if deemed necessary by the Engineer. 26 27 3.07 CLEANUP 28 29 A. Soil, mulch, seed, or similar materials spilled onto paved areas shall be 30 removed promptly, keeping those areas as clean as possible at all times. 31 Upon completion of seeding and sodding operations, all excess soil, stones, 32 and debris remaining shall be removed from the construction areas. 33 34 3.08 MAINTENANCE 35 36 A. Any existing landscape items damaged or altered during construction by the 37 Contractor shall be restored or replaced as directed by the Engineer. 38 39 B. Maintain landscape work until Owner accepts project. Watering, weeding, 40 cultivating, restoration of grade, mowing and trimming grass, protection from 41 insects and diseases, fertilizing and similar operations as needed to ensure 42 normal growth and good health for live plant material shall be the responsibility 43 of the Contractor and at no additional cost to the Owner. Sodded areas shall 44 receive no less than 1.5 inches of water per week. 45 46 3.09 REPAIRS TO LAWN AREAS DISTURBED BY CONTRACTOR'S OPERATIONS 47 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -4 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Lawn areas planted under this Contract and all lawn areas damaged by the 2 Contractor's operation shall be repaired by proper soil preparation, fertilizing, 3 and reseeding, in accordance with these Specifications. 4 5 6 END OF SECTION 7 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -5 05/31/13 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 SURFACE RESTORATION AND SIDEWALKS 02485 -6 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 02626 2 3 TEMPORARY LINE STOP SYSTEM 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. Furnish and install temporary line stops at the location shown on the drawings. 10 The line stops shall remain installed while new valves are installed on the 11 depressurized side of the line stop. Remove the temporary line stop 12 equipment and plug the installation fitting after the new valves have been 13 installed and tested. The line stop installation fitting shall be subject to the 14 same standards and testing as other pipe fittings and shall provide a leak free 15 connection to the host pipe for the duration of the temporary operation and 16 after the temporary equipment is removed. 17 18 B. The line stop system shall include, but not be limited to, a compression type 19 316 stainless steel or ductile iron split sleeve tee with flanged connection, a 20 gate valve that bolts to the flanged connection, a drilling machine that bolts to 21 the gate valve, a stop device insertion machine that bolts to the gate valve, 22 and the actual stop device that is inserted into the existing piping using the 23 insertion machine to isolate the area of proposed work. The system shall 24 include a permanent plug or cap device to be installed upon removal of the 25 line stop machine. The plug or cap shall provide a leak free sealed connection 26 to the gate valve. 27 28 C.. All work, materials, and incidentals necessary for the construction and testing 29 of the line stop system including scaffolding, excavation, excavation support 30 systems, shoring, dewatering, hauling, removal, and disposal of excess and 31 unsuitable material, test pit to locate the pipe section where the line stop 32 sleeve will be installed, providing and installing the sleeve on the existing pipe, 33 suitable backfill material, backfilling, compaction, furnishing all materials, 34 cutting and removal of existing pipe, testing, protection of existing surface 35 features and utilities, all miscellaneous materials, labor, equipment, tools, and 36 incidentals necessary to complete the work per the requirements of the 37 Specifications, except as may be modified herein. 38 39 D. Line stop systems shall be as manufactured by Rangeline Tapping Services., 40 TDW Services Inc., Hydra Stop, Inc., or approved equal. 41 42 1.02 SUBMITTALS 43 44 A. Submit complete information on the company that will install the temporary line 45 stop system. The Company shall have a minimum of 5 years experience in 46 the design and installation of line stops on existing pipelines. The submittal 47 shall include a client list where line stops have been installed on existing TEMPORARY LINE STOP SYSTEM 02626 -1 05/31/13 1 ductile iron pipe. The client list shall include the names and telephone 2 numbers of the client contacts. 3 4 B. Contractor shall make all submittals in accordance with Section 01300 of 5 these Technical Specifications. 6 7 C. Shop Drawings shall be required for all components of the line stop system. 8 9 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 10 11 A. Quality control shall be in accordance with Section 01640 of these Technical 12 Specifications. 13 14 1.04 EXISTING UTILITIES 15 16 A. Existing utilities have been indicated on the Contract Drawings based on the 17 best available information. The Contractor shall excavate test pits as required 18 and verify the horizontal and vertical location of the piping systems (sewage 19 force mains) and all existing and known conflicting utilities prior to 20 construction. Existing utilities and services shall be carefully investigated and 21 protected by the Contractor. Damage caused by the Contractor or the 22 Contractor's work to existing utilities shall be immediately reported to the 23 Owner and the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for repairing the 24 damage as directed by the Owner of the utility. 25 26 B. The Contractor shall verify all materials of construction, pipe wall thicknesses, 27 roundness, and any other information needed for performing the line stopping 28 operation. 29 30 PART 2 — MATERIALS 31 32 2.01 GENERAL 33 34 A. Line stop equipment shall be water tight with construction suitable for the 35 internal pressure of the RAS pumping system, and the mechanical toad 36 inflicted by the by the wet tapping procedure. The line stop sleeve and valve 37 shall installed on the RAS piping and shall be rated for a maximum operating 38 pressure of 150 psi. 39 40 2.02 SHELL CUTTER 41 42 A. The shell cutter shall be cylindrical design, with and O.D. (outside diameter) 43 tolerance that will allow for the I.D. (inside diameter) of the valve. The cutting 44 tips will be constructed of carbide or high strength carbon steel to enable a 45 complete and smooth cut. The coupon section cut from the host pipe shall be 46 removed and submitted to the City. 47 TEMPORARY LINE STOP SYSTEM 02626 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.03 PILOT BIT 2 3 A. The pilot bit shall be designed with a carbide or high strength carbon steel tip. 4 The pilot bit shall be constructed to ensure the retrieval of the coupon section 5 of pipe. The coupon section cut from the host pipe shall be removed and 6 submitted to the City. 7 8 2.04 TEMPORARY LINE STOP VALVE 9 10 A. The valve shall be supplied by the contractor for the duration of the line - 11 stopping procedure. Upon the completion of the project, the valve shall be 12 removed by contractor. 13 14 2.05 LINE STOP SPLIT SLEEVE, GASKET, AND FLANGE 15 16 A. The wet tapping sleeves shall be manufactured in two sections. The bottom 17 (back) section shall be solid and designed within an outside diameter range 18 specific to the pipe it is being installed on. The top (front) half shall be of full 19 encirclement design with a welded nozzle and flange outlet. Tapping Sleeves 20 shall be the high strength type having a wide body, made of a minimum 21 material strength of ASTM 285 Grade C, ASTM A -36 Steel, or equal that 22 conforms to and reinforces the pipe. The sleeve shall have a minimum 7/8" 23 wide gasket of Nitrile Butadiene Rubber (NBR, Buna -N) per ASTM D2000 with 24 hydro mechanical activated lip, captured in a recessed groove around the 25 outlet; 3/4" corrosion resistant alloy bolts (per ANSI 21.11 /AWWA C -111) and 26 nuts (per A563) or equal, and a 3/4" forged steel test outlet. Flanged outlet 27 shall be AWWA C207 Class D, ANSI 150 Ib. drilling, recessed for tapping 28 valve per MSS -SP60. Minimum blind flange thickness shall comply with 29 AWWA C -207. 30 31 B. Finish: Line stop fittings and hardware that remain after the temporary 32 equipment is removed shall be painted to match the color of the existing RAS 33 piping. 34 35 2.06 PLUGS 36 37 A. Completion plugs shall be manufactured from ASTM -36 grade material. 38 Completion plugs shall be designed with a groove for the placement of an 0- 39 Ring that will aid in the permanent sealing of the line -stop fitting to permit the 40 recovery of the temporary valve used in the line -stop procedure. 41 42 PART 3 — EXECUTION 43 44 3.01 GENERAL 45 46 A. Tapping the RAS piping must be accomplished under pressure while the RAS 47 pumping system is in operation. TEMPORARY LINE STOP SYSTEM 02626 -3 05/31/13 1 2 B. The Contractor shall provide written notification to the City two weeks in 3 advance of performing the line stop procedure. 4 C. The line stop system shall be installed per the manufacturers' instructions and 5 recommendations. 6 7 D. Preparation of Main: The pipe shall be thoroughly cleaned being free of any 8 rust, dirt or debris. 9 10 11 END OF SECTION TEMPORARY LINE STOP SYSTEM 02626 -4 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 03600 2 3 GROUT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install 10 grout complete as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. 11 12 1.02 SUBMITTALS 13 14 A. Submit to the Engineer shop drawings and product data showing materials of 15 construction and details of installation for: 16 17 1. Commercially manufactured non - shrink cementitious grout. The 18 submittal shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage 19 requirements, product life, working time after mixing, temperature 20 considerations, conformity to required ASTM standards and Material 21 Safety Data Sheet. 22 23 2. Commercially manufactured non - shrink epoxy grout. The submittal 24 shall include catalog cuts, technical data, storage requirements, product 25 life, working time after mixing, temperature considerations, conformity 26 to required ASTM standards and Material Safety Data Sheet. 27 28 3. Cement grout. The submittal shall include the type and brand of the 29 cement, the gradation of the fine aggregate, product data on any 30 proposed admixtures and the proposed mix of the grout. 31 32 4. Concrete grout. The submittal shall include the mix design, constituent 33 quantities per cubic yard, the water /cement ratio, and fiber 34 reinforcement. 35 36 B. Laboratory Test Reports 37 38 1. Submit laboratory test data as requested by the Engineer. 39 40 C. Certifications 41 42 1. Where applicable, certify that commercially manufactured grout 43 products and concrete grout admixtures are suitable for use in contact 44 with potable water after 30 days curing. 45 46 D. Qualifications 47 GROUT 03600 -1 05/31/13 1 1. Grout manufacturers shall submit documentation that they have at least 2 10 years' experience in the production and use of the proposed grouts 3 to be supplied. 4 5 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 6 7 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 8 9 1. ASTM C531 - Standard Test Method for Linear Shrinkage and 10 Coefficient of Thermal Expansion of Chemical Resistant Mortars, 11 Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and Polymer Concretes 12 13 2. ASTM C579 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Strength of 14 Chemical Resistant Mortars, Grouts and Monolithic Surfacings and 15 Polymer Concretes 16 17 3. ASTM C827 - Standard Test Method for Change in Height at Early 18 Ages of Cylindrical Specimens from Cementitious Mixtures 19 20 4. ASTM C1107 - Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, 21 Hydraulic- Cement Grout (Non- shrink) 22 23 B. U.S. Army Corps of Engineers Standard (CRD) 24 25 1. CRD C -621 - Corps of Engineers Specification for Non - shrink Grout 26 27 C. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect 28 at the time of bid opening shall apply. 29 30 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 31 32 A. Qualifications 33 34 1. Grout manufacturer shall have a minimum of 10 years' experience in 35 the production and use of the type of grout proposed for the work. 36 37 B. Pre - installation Conference 38 39 1. Where specifically required, and well in advance of grouting, conduct a 40 pre - installation meeting to review the requirements for surface 41 preparation, mixing, placing and curing procedures for each product 42 proposed for use. Parties concerned with grouting shall be notified of 43 the meeting at least 10 days prior to its scheduled date. 44 45 C. Services of Manufacturer's Representative 46 47 1. A qualified field technician of the non - shrink grout manufacturer, GROUT 03600 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 specifically trained in the installation of the products, shall attend the 2 pre - installation conference and shall be present for the initial installation 3 of each type of non - shrink grout. Additional services shall also be 4 provided, as required, to correct installation problems. 5 6 D. Field Testing 7 8 1. All field testing and inspection services required shall be provided by 9 the Owner. The Contractor shall assist in the sampling of materials and 10 shall provide any ladders, platforms, etc, for access to the work. The 11 methods of testing shall comply in detail with the applicable ASTM 12 Standards. 13 14 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 15 16 A. Deliver materials to the jobsite in original, unopened packages, clearly labeled 17 with the manufacturer's name, product identification, batch numbers and 18 printed instructions. 19 20 B. Store materials in full compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 21 Total storage time from date of manufacture to date of installation shall be 22 limited to 6 months or the manufacturer's recommended storage time, 23 whichever is less. 24 25 C. Material that becomes damp or otherwise unacceptable shall be immediately 26 removed from the site and replaced with acceptable material at no additional 27 cost to the Owner. 28 29 D. Non - shrink, cement -based grouts shall be delivered as pre - blended, 30 prepackaged mixes requiring only the addition of water. 31 32 E. Non - shrink epoxy grouts shall be delivered as pre- measured, prepackaged, 33 three component systems requiring only blending as directed by the 34 manufacturer. 35 36 1.06 DEFINITIONS 37 38 A. Non - shrink Grout: A commercially manufactured product that does not shrink 39 in either the plastic or hardened state, is dimensionally stable in the hardened 40 state and bonds to a clean base plate. 41 42 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 43 44 2.01 GENERAL 45 46 A. The use of a manufacturer's name and product or catalog number is for the 47 purpose of establishing the standard of quality desired. GROUT 03600 -3 05/31/13 1 2 B. Like materials shall be the products of one manufacturer or supplier in order to 3 provide standardization of appearance. 4 5 2.02 MATERIALS 6 7 A. Non - shrink Cementitious Grout 8 9 1. Non - shrink cementitious grouts shall meet or exceed the requirements 10 of ASTM C1107, Grades B or C and CRD C -621. Grouts shall be 11 Portland cement based, contain a pre - proportioned blend of selected 12 aggregates and shrinkage compensating agents and shall require only 13 the addition of water. Non - shrink cementitious grouts shall not contain 14 expansive cement or metallic particles. The grouts shall exhibit no 15 shrinkage when tested in conformity with ASTM C827. 16 17 2. General purpose non - shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the 18 standards stated above and shall be SikaGrout 212 by Sika Corp.; Set 19 Grout by Master Builders, Inc.; Gilco Construction Grout by Gifford Hill 20 & Co.; Euco NS by The Euclid Chemical Co.; NBEC Grout by U. S. 21 Grout Corp. or equal. 22 23 3. Flowable (Precision) non - shrink cementitious grout shall conform to the 24 standards stated above and shall be Masterflow 928 by Master 25 Builders, Inc.; Hi -Flow Grout by the Euclid Chemical Co.; SikaGrout 212 26 by Sika Corp.; Supreme Grout by Gifford Hill & Co.; Five Star Grout by 27 U. S. Grout Corp. or equal. 28 29 B. Non - shrink Epoxy Grout 30 31 1. Non - shrink epoxy -based grout shall be a pre - proportioned, three 32 component, 100 percent solids system consisting of epoxy resin, 33 hardener, and blended aggregate. It shall have a compressive strength 34 of 14,000 psi in 7 days when tested in conformity with ASTM D695 and 35 have a maximum thermal expansion of 30 x 10 -6 when tested in 36 conformity with ASTM C531. The grout shall be Ceilcote 648 CP by 37 Master Builders Inc.; Five Star Epoxy Grout by U.S. Grout Corp.; 38 Sikadur 42 Grout -Pak by Sika Corp.; High Strength Epoxy Grout by the 39 Euclid Chemical Co. or equal. 40 41 C. Cement Grout 42 43 1. Cement grouts shall be a mixture of one part portland cement 44 conforming to ASTM C150, Types I, II, or III and 1 to 2 parts sand 45 conforming to ASTM C33 with sufficient water to place the grout. The 46 water content shall be sufficient to impart workability to the grout but not 47 to the degree that it will allow the grout to flow. GROUT 03600 -4 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 D. Concrete Grout 3 4 1. Concrete grout shall proportioned with cement, [pozzalan,] coarse and 5 fine aggregates, water, water reducer and air entraining agent to 6 produce a mix having an average strength of 2900 psi at 28 days, or 7 2500 psi nominal strength. Coarse aggregate size shall be [3/8] [1 /2] -in 8 maximum. Slump should not exceed 5 -in and should be as low as 9 practical yet still retain sufficient workability. 10 11 2. Synthetic reinforcing fibers shall be added to the concrete grout mix at 12 the rate of 1.5 Ibs of fibers per cubic yard of grout. Fibers shall be 13 added from the manufacturer's premeasured bags and according to the 14 manufacturer's recommendations in a manner that will ensure complete 15 dispersion of the fiber bundles as single monofilaments within the 16 concrete grout. 17 18 E. Water 19 20 1. Potable water, free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic 21 matter, or other deleterious substances. 22 23 PART 3 — EXECUTION 24 25 3.01 PREPARATION 26 27 A. Grout shall be placed over cured concrete which has attained its full design 28 strength unless otherwise approved by the Engineer. 29 30 B. Concrete surfaces to receive grout shall be clean and sound; free of ice, frost, 31 dirt, grease, oil, curing compounds, Iaitance and paints and free of all loose 32 material or foreign matter that may affect the bond or performance of the 33 grout. 34 35 C. Roughen concrete surfaces by chipping, sandblasting, or other mechanical 36 means to ensure bond of the grout to the concrete. Remove loose or broken 37 concrete. Irregular voids or projecting coarse aggregate need not be removed 38 if they are sound, free of Iaitance and firmly embedded into the parent 39 concrete. 40 41 1. Air compressors used to clean surfaces in contact with grout shall be 42 the oil -less type or equipped with an oil trap in the air line to prevent oil 43 from being blown onto the surface. 44 45 D. Remove all loose rust, oil or other deleterious substances from metal 46 embedments or bottom of base plates prior to the installation of the grout. 47 GROUT 03600 -5 05/31/13 1 E. Concrete surfaces shall be washed clean and then kept moist for at least 24 2 hours prior to the placement of cementitious or cement grout. Saturation may 3 be achieved by covering the concrete with saturated burlap bags, use of a 4 soaker hose, flooding the surface, or other method acceptable to the Engineer. 5 Upon completion of the 24 hour period, visible water shall be removed from 6 the surface prior to grouting. The use of an adhesive bonding agent in lieu of 7 surface saturation shall only be used when approved by the Engineer for each 8 specific location of grout installation. 9 10 F. Epoxy -based grouts do not require the saturation of the concrete substrate. 11 Surfaces in contact with epoxy grout shall be completely dry before grouting. 12 13 G. Construct grout forms or other leak -proof containment as required. Forms 14 shall be lined or coated with release agents recommended by the grout 15 manufacturer. Forms shall be of adequate strength, securely anchored in 16 place and shored to resist the forces imposed by the grout and its placement. 17 18 1. Forms for epoxy grout shall be designed to allow the formation of a 19 hydraulic head and shall have chamfer strips built into forms. 20 21 H. Level and align the structural or equipment bearing plates in accordance with 22 the structural requirements and the recommendations of the equipment 23 manufacturer. 24 25 I. Equipment shall be supported during alignment and installation of grout by 26 shims, wedges, blocks or other approved means. The shims, wedges and 27 blocking devices shall be prevented from bonding to the grout by appropriate 28 bond breaking coatings and removed after grouting unless otherwise approved 29 by the Engineer. 30 31 3.02 INSTALLATION - GENERAL 32 33 A. Mix, apply and cure products in strict compliance with the manufacturer's 34 recommendations and this Section. 35 36 B. Have sufficient manpower and equipment available for rapid and continuous 37 mixing and placing. Keep all necessary tools and materials ready and close at 38 hand. 39 40 C. Maintain temperatures of the foundation plate, supporting concrete, and grout 41 between 40 and 90 degrees F during grouting and for at least 24 hours 42 thereafter or as recommended by the grout manufacturer, whichever is longer. 43 Take precautions to minimize differential heating or cooling of base plates and 44 grout during the curing period. 45 46 D. Take special precautions for hot weather or cold weather grouting as 47 recommended by the manufacturer when ambient temperatures and /or the GROUT 03600 -6 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 temperature of the materials in contact with the grout are outside of the 60 and 2 90 degrees F range. 3 4 E. Install grout in a manner that will preserve the isolation between the elements 5 on either side of the joint where grout is placed in the vicinity of an expansion 6 or control joint. 7 8 F. Reflect all existing underlying expansion, control and construction joints 9 through the grout. 10 11 3.03 INSTALLATION - CEMENT GROUTS AND NONSHRINK CEMENTITIOUS 12 GROUTS 13 14 A. Mix in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. Do not add cement, 15 sand, pea gravel or admixtures without prior approval by the Engineer. 16 17 B. Avoid mixing by hand. Mixing in a mortar mixer (with moving blades) is 18 recommended. Pre -wet the mixer and empty excess water. Add 19 premeasured amount of water for mixing, followed by the grout. Begin with 20 the minimum amount of water recommended by the manufacturer and then 21 add the minimum additional water required to obtain workability. Do not 22 exceed the manufacturer's maximum recommended water content. 23 24 C. Placements greater than 3 -in in depth shall include the addition of clean, 25 washed pea gravel to the grout mix when approved by the manufacturer. 26 Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for the size and amount of 27 aggregate to be added. 28 29 D. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner that will avoid segregation 30 or entrapment of air. Do not vibrate grout to release air or to consolidate the 31 material. Placement should proceed in a manner that will ensure the filling of 32 all spaces and provide full contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. 33 Provide grout holes as necessary. 34 35 E. Place grout rapidly and continuously to avoid cold joints. Do not place cement 36 grouts in layers. Do not add additional water to the mix (retemper) after initial 37 stiffening. 38 39 F. Just before the grout reaches its final set, cut back the grout to the substrate at 40 a 45 degree angle from the lower edge of bearing plate unless otherwise 41 approved by the Engineer. Finish this surface with a wood float (brush) finish. 42 43 G. Begin curing immediately after form removal, cutback, and finishing. Keep 44 grout moist and within its recommended placement temperature range for at 45 least 24 hours after placement or longer if recommended by the manufacturer. 46 Saturate the grout surface by use of wet burlap, soaker hoses, ponding or 47 other approved means. Provide sunshades as necessary. If drying winds GROUT 03600 -7 05/31/13 1 1 1 inhibit the ability of a given curing method to keep grout moist, erect wind 2 breaks until wind is no longer a problem or curing is finished. 3 4 3.04 INSTALLATION - NONSHRINK EPDXY GROUTS 5 6 A. Mix in accordance with the procedures recommended by the manufacturer. 7 Do not vary the ratio of components or add solvent to change the consistency 8 of the grout mix. Do not overmix. Mix full batches only to maintain proper 9 proportions of resin, hardener and aggregate. 10 11 B. Monitor ambient weather conditions and contact the grout manufacturer for 12 special placement procedures to be used for temperatures below 60 or above 13 90 degrees F. 14 15 C. Place grout into the designated areas in a manner which will avoid trapping 16 air. Placement methods shall ensure the filling of all spaces and provide full 17 contact between the grout and adjoining surfaces. Provide grout holes as 18 necessary. 1 19 20 D. Minimize "shoulder" length (extension of grout horizontally beyond base plate). 21 In no case shall the shoulder length of the grout be greater than the grout 1 22 thickness. 23 24 E. Finish grout by puddling to cover all aggregate and provide a smooth finish. 25 Break bubbles and smooth the top surface of the grout in conformity with the 26 manufacturer's recommendations. 27 28 F. Epoxy grouts are self curing and do not require the application of water. 29 Maintain the formed grout within its recommended placement temperature 30 range for at least 24 hours after placing, or longer if recommended by the 31 manufacturer. 32 33 3.05 INSTALLATION - CONCRETE GROUT 34 35 A. Screed underlying concrete to the grade shown on the Drawings. Provide the 36 surface with a broomed finish, aligned to drain. Protect and keep the surface 37 clean until placement of concrete grout. 38 39 B. Remove the debris and clean the surface by sweeping and vacuuming of all 40 dirt and other foreign materials. Wash the tank slab using a strong jet of 41 water. Flushing of debris into tank drain lines will not be permitted. 42 43 C. Saturate the concrete surface for at least 24 hours prior to placement of the 44 concrete grout. Saturation may be maintained by ponding, by the use or 45 soaker hoses, or by other methods acceptable to the Engineer. Remove 46 excess water just prior to placement of the concrete grout. Place a cement 47 slurry immediately ahead of the concrete grout so that the slurry is moist when GROUT 03600 -8 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 the grout is placed. Work the slurry over the surface with a broom until it is 2 coated with approximately 1/16 to 1 /8 -in thick cement paste. A bonding grout 3 composed of 1 part portland cement, 1.5 parts fine sand, an approved bonding 4 admixture and water, mixed to achieve the consistency of thick paint, may be 5 substituted for the cement slurry. 6 7 D. Place concrete grout to final grade using the scraper mechanism as a guide 8 for surface elevation and to ensure high and low spots are eliminated. Unless 9 specifically approved by the equipment manufacturer, mechanical scraper 10 mechanisms shall not be used as a finishing machine or screed. 11 12 E. Provide grout control joints as indicated on the Drawings. 13 14 F. Finish and cure the concrete grout as specified for cast -in -place concrete. 15 16 3.06 SCHEDULE 17 18 A. The following list indicates where the particular types of grout are to be used: 19 20 1. General purpose non - shrink cementitious grout: Use at all locations 21 where non shrink grout is called for on the plans except for base plates 22 greater in area than 3 -ft wide by 3 -ft long and except for the setting of 23 anchor rods, anchor bolts or reinforcing steel in concrete. 24 25 2. Flowable non - shrink cementitious grout: Use under all base plates 26 greater in area than 3 -ft by 3 -ft. Use at all locations indicated to receive 27 flowable non - shrink grout by the Drawings. The Contractor, at his /her 28 option and convenience, may also substitute flowable non - shrink grout 29 for general purpose non - shrink cementitious grout. 30 31 3. Non - shrink epoxy grout: Use for the setting of anchor rods, anchor 32 bolts and reinforcing steel in concrete and for all locations specifically 33 indicated to receive epoxy grout. 34 35 4. Cement grout: Cement grout may be used for grouting of incidental 36 base plates for structural and miscellaneous steel such as post base 37 plates for platforms, base plates for beams, etc. It shall not be used 38 when nonshrink grout is specifically called for on the Drawings or for 39 grouting of primary structural steel members such as columns and 40 girders. 41 42 5. Concrete grout: Use for overlaying the base concrete under scraper 43 mechanisms of clarifiers to allow more control in placing the surface 44 grade. 45 46 END OF SECTION 47 GROUT 03600 -9 05/31/13 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK GROUT 03600 -10 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 03740 2 3 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and cut, 10 remove, repair or otherwise modify parts of existing concrete structures or 11 appurtenances as shown on the Drawings and as specified herein. Work 12 under this Section shall also include bonding new concrete to existing 13 concrete. 14 15 1.02 SUBMITTALS 16 17 A. Submit to the Engineer a Schedule of Demolition and the detailed methods of 18 demolition to be used at each location. 19 20 B. Submit manufacturer's technical literature on all product brands proposed for 21 use, to the Engineer for review. The submittal shall include the manufacturer's 22 installation and /or application instructions. 23 24 C. When substitutions for acceptable brands of materials specified herein are 25 proposed, submit brochures and technical data of the proposed substitutions 26 to the Engineer for approval before delivery to the project. 27 28 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS 29 30 A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 31 32 1. ASTM C881 - Standard Specification for Epoxy- Resin -Base Bonding 33 Systems for Concrete. 34 35 2. ASTM C882 - Standard Test Method for Bond Strength of Epoxy -Resin 36 Systems Used with Concrete by Slant Sheer. 37 38 3. ASTM C883 - Standard Test Method for Effective Shrinkage of 39 Epoxy -Resin Systems Used with Concrete. 40 41 4. ASTM D570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics. 42 43 5. ASTM D638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 44 45 6. ASTM D695 - Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of 46 Rigid Plastics. 47 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -1 05/31/13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 7 ASTM D732 - Punch Tool. 8. ASTM D790 Unreinforced Materials. Standard Test Method for Shear Strength of Plastics by - Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating B. Where reference is made to one of the above standards, the revision in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. No existing structure or concrete shall be shifted, cut, removed, or otherwise altered until authorization is given by the Engineer. B. When removing materials or portions of existing structures and when making openings in existing structures, all precautions shall be taken and all necessary barriers, shoring and bracing and other protective devices shall be erected to prevent damage to the structures beyond the limits necessary for the new work, protect personnel, control dust and to prevent damage to the structures or contents by falling or flying debris. Unless otherwise permitted, shown or specified, line drilling will be required in cutting existing concrete. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: The manufacturer of the specified products shall have a minimum of 10 years' experience in the manufacture of such products and shall have an ongoing program of training, certifying and technically supporting the Contractor's personnel. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver the specified products in original, unopened containers with the manufacturer's name, labels, product identification and batch numbers. B. Store and condition the specified product as recommended by the manufacturer. PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. General 1. Materials shall comply with this Section and any state or local regulations. B. Epoxy Bonding Agent MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1. General 2 3 a. The epoxy bonding agent shall be a two- component, 4 solvent -free, asbestos -free moisture insensitive epoxy resin 5 material used to bond plastic concrete to hardened concrete 6 complying with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type II and the 7 additional requirements specified herein. 8 9 2. Material 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 4000 psi minimum at 14 17 days. 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882) Hardened to Plastic: 1500 29 psi minimum at 14 days moist cure. 30 31 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM C883): Passes Test. 32 33 8) Color: Gray. 34 35 3. Approved manufacturers include: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, 36 NJ - Sikadur 32, Hi -Mod; Master Builder's, Cleveland, OH - Concresive 37 Liquid (LPL) or equal. 38 39 C. Epoxy Paste 40 41 1. General 42 43 a. Epoxy Paste shall be a two- component, solvent -free, asbestos 44 free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material used to bond 45 dissimilar materials to concrete such as setting railing posts, 46 dowels, anchor bolts and all- threads into hardened concrete and 47 shall comply with the requirements of ASTM C881, Type I, MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -3 05/31/13 a. Properties of the cured material: 1) Compressive Strength (ASTM D695): 8500 psi minimum at 28 days. 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 6,300 psi minimum at 14 days. 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 5000 psi minimum at 14 days. 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): One percent maximum at 14 days. 1 Grade 3 and the additional requirements specified herein. It may 2 also be used to patch existing surfaces where the glue line is 3 1 /8 -in or Tess.. 4 5 2. Material 6 7 a. Properties of the cured material: 8 9 1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi 10 minimum at 28 days. 11 12 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 3,000 psi minimum at 14 13 days. Elongation at Break - 0.3 percent minimum. 14 15 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 16 3,700 psi minimum at 14 days. 17 18 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 2,800 psi minimum at 14 19 days. 20 21 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570): 1.0 percent maximum at 22 7 days. 23 24 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,000 psi at 14 days moist 25 cure. 26 27 7) Color: Concrete grey. 28 29 3. Approved manufacturers include: 30 31 a. Overhead applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, 32 NJ - Sikadur Hi -mod LV 31; Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, 33 OH - Concresive 1438 or equal. 34 35 b. Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, N.J. - Sikadur Hi -mod LV 32; 36 Master Builders, Inc., Cleveland, OH - Concresive 1438 or equal. 37 38 D. Non - Shrink Precision Cement Grout, Non - Shrink Cement Grout, Non - Shrink 39 Epoxy Grout and Polymer Modified mortar are included in Section 03600 40 GROUT. 41 42 E. Adhesive Capsule type anchor system shall be equal to the. HVA adhesive 43 Anchoring System by Hilti Fastening Systems, Tulsa, OK. The capsule shall 44 consist of a sealed glass capsule containing premeasured amounts of a 45 polyester or vinylester resin, quartz sand aggregate and a hardener contained 46 in a separate vial within the capsule. 47 MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -4 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 F Acrylic Latex Bonding Agent 2 3 G. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive 4 5 1. General 6 7 a. Crack Repair Epoxy Adhesive shall be a two- component, 8 solvent -free, moisture insensitive epoxy resin material suitable 9 for crack grouting by injection or gravity feed. It shall be 10 formulated for the specific size of opening or crack being 11 injected. 12 13 b. All concrete surfaces containing potable water or water to be 14 treated for potable use that are repaired by the epoxy adhesive 15 injection system shall be coated with an acceptable epoxy 16 coating approved by the FDA for use in contact with potable 17 water. 18 19 2. Material 20 21 a. Properties of the cured material 22 23 1) Compressive Properties (ASTM D695): 10,000 psi 24 minimum at 28 days. 25 26 2) Tensile Strength (ASTM D638): 5,300 psi minimum at 14 27 days. Elongation at Break - 2 to 5 percent. 28 29 3) Flexural Strength (ASTM D790 - Modulus of Rupture): 30 12,000 psi minimum at 14 days (gravity); 4,600 psi 31 minimum at 14 days (injection) 32 33 4) Shear Strength (ASTM D732): 3,700 psi minimum at 14 34 days. 35 36 5) Water Absorption (ASTM D570 - 2 hour boil): 1.5 percent 37 maximum at 7 days. 38 39 6) Bond Strength (ASTM C882): 2,400 psi at 2 days dry; 40 2,000 psi at 14 days dry plus 12 days moist. 41 42 7) Effective Shrinkage (ASTM 883): Passes Test. 43 44 3. Approved manufacturers include: 45 46 a. For standard applications: Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, 47 NJ - Sikadur Hi -Mod; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -5 05/31/13 1 OH - Concressive 1380 or equal. 2 3 b. For very thin applications; Sika Corporation, Lyndhurst, 4 NJ - Sikadur Hi -Mod LV; Master Builders Inc., Cleveland, 5 OH - Concressive 1468 or equal. 6 7 PART 3 — EXECUTION 8 9 3.01 GENERAL 10 11 A. Cut, repair, reuse, demolish, excavate or otherwise modify parts of the existing 12 structures or appurtenances, as indicated on the Drawings, specified herein, 13 or necessary to permit completion of the Work. Finishes, joints, 14 reinforcements, sealants, etc, are specified in respective Sections. All work 15 shall comply with other requirements of this of Section and as shown on the 16 Drawings. 17 18 B. All commercial products specified in this Section shall be stored, mixed and 19 applied in strict compliance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 20 21 C. In all cases where concrete is repaired in the vicinity of an expansion joint or 22 control joint the repairs shall be made to preserve the isolation between 23 components on either side of the joint. 24 25 D. When drilling holes for dowels /bolts at new or existing concrete, drilling shall 26 stop if rebar is encountered. As approved by the Engineer, the hole location 27 shall be relocated to avoid rebar. Rebar shall not be cut without prior approval 28 by the Engineer. Where possible, rebar locations shall be identified prior to 29 drilling using "rebar locators" so that drilled hole locations may be adjusted to 30 avoid rebar interference. 31 32 3.02 CONCRETE REMOVAL 33 34 A. Concrete designated to be removed to specific limits as shown on the 35 Drawings or directed by the Engineer, shall be done by line drilling at limits 36 followed by chipping or jack- hammering as appropriate in areas where 37 concrete is to be taken out. Remove concrete in such a manner that 38 surrounding concrete or existing reinforcing to be left in place and existing in 39 place equipment is not damaged. Sawcutting at limits of concrete to be 40 removed shall only be done if indicated on the Drawings, or after obtaining 41 written approval from the Engineer. 42 43 B. Where existing reinforcing is exposed due to saw cutting /core drilling and no 44 new material is to be placed on the sawcut surface, a coating or surface 45 treatment of epoxy paste shall be applied to the entire cut surface to a 46 thickness of 1 /4 -in. 47 48 C. In all cases where the joint between new concrete or grout and existing MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -6 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 concrete will be exposed in the finished work, except as otherwise shown or 2 specified, the edge of concrete removal shall be a 1 -in deep saw cut on each 3 exposed surface of the existing concrete. 4 5 D. Concrete specified to be left in place which is damaged shall be repaired by 6 approved means to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 7 8 E. The Engineer may from time to time direct the Contractor to make additional 9 repairs to existing concrete. These repairs shall be made as specified or by 10 such other methods as may be appropriate. 11 12 3.03 CONNECTION SURFACE PREPARATION 13 14 A. Connection surfaces shall be prepared as specified below for concrete areas 15 requiring patching, repairs or modifications as shown on the Drawings, 16 specified herein, or as directed by the Engineer. 17 18 B. Remove all deteriorated materials, dirt, oil, grease, and all other bond 19 inhibiting materials from the surface by dry mechanical means, 20 i.e. - sandblasting, grinding, etc, as approved by the Engineer. Be sure the 21 areas are not less than 1 /2 -in in depth. Irregular voids or surface stones need 22 not be removed if they are sound, free of Iaitance, and firmly embedded into 23 parent concrete, subject to the Engineer's final inspection. 24 25 C. If reinforcing steel is exposed, it must be mechanically cleaned to remove all 26 contaminants, rust, etc, as approved by the Engineer. If half of the diameter of 27 the reinforcing steel is exposed, chip out behind the steel. The distance 28 chipped behind the steel shall be a minimum of 1 /2 -in. Reinforcing to be 29 saved shall not be damaged during the demolition operation. 30 31 D. Reinforcing from existing demolished concrete which is shown to be 32 incorporated in new concrete shall be cleaned by mechanical means to 33 remove all loose material and products of corrosion before proceeding with the 34 repair. It shall be cut, bent or lapped to new reinforcing as shown on the 35 Drawings and provided with 1 -in minimum cover all around. 36 37 E. The following are specific concrete surface preparation "methods" to be used 38 where called for on the Drawings, specified herein or as directed by the 39 Engineer. 40 41 1. Method A: After the existing concrete surface at connection has been 42 roughened and cleaned, thoroughly moisten the existing surface with 43 water. Brush on a 1/16 -in layer of cement and water mixed to the 44 consistency of a heavy paste. Immediately after application of cement 45 paste, place new concrete or grout mixture as detailed on the Drawings. 46 47 2. Method B: After the existing concrete surface has been roughened and MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -7 05/31/13 1 cleaned, apply epoxy bonding agent at connection surface. The field 2 preparation and application of the epoxy bonding agent shall comply 3 strictly with the manufacturer's recommendations. Place new concrete 4 or grout mixture to limits shown on the Drawings within time constraints 5 recommended by the manufacturer to ensure bond. 6 7 3. Method C: Drill a hole 1 /4 -in larger than the diameter of the dowel. The 8 hole shall be blown clear of loose particles and dust just prior to 9 installing epoxy. The drilled hole shall first be filled with [epoxy paste], 10 then dowels /bolts shall be buttered with paste then inserted by tapping. 11 Unless otherwise shown on the Drawings, deformed bars shall be 12 drilled and set to a depth of ten bar diameters and smooth bars shall be 13 drilled and set to a depth of fifteen bar diameters. If not noted on the 14 Drawings, the Engineer will provide details regarding the size and 15 spacing of dowels. 16 17 4. Method D: Combination of Method B and C. 18 19 5. Method E: Capsule anchor system shall be set in existing concrete by 20 drilling holes to the required depth to develop the full tensile and shear 21 strengths of the anchor material being used. The anchor bolts system 22 shall be installed per the manufacturer's recommendation in holes sized 23 as required. The anchor stud bolt, rebar or other embedment item shall 24 be tipped with a double 45 degree chamfered point, securely fastened 25 into the chuck of all rotary percussion hammer drill and drilled into the 26 capsule filled hole. The anchor may be installed in horizontal, vertical 27 and overhead positions. 28 29 3.04 GROUTING 30 31 A. Grouting shall be as specified in Section 03600. 32 33 3.05 CRACK REPAIR 34 35 A. Cracks on horizontal surfaces shall be repaired by gravity feeding crack 36 sealant into cracks per manufacturer's recommendations. If cracks are less 37 than 1/16 -in in thickness they shall be pressure injected. 38 39 B. Cracks on vertical surfaces shall be repaired by pressure injecting crack 40 sealant through valves sealed to surface with crack repair epoxy adhesive per 41 manufacturer's recommendations. 42 43 44 END OF SECTION MODIFICATIONS AND REPAIR TO CONCRETE 03740 -8 05/31/13 1 1 w 1 1 f 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 05500 2 3 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install 10 miscellaneous metals as shown on the Construction Drawings and as 11 specified herein. The miscellaneous metal items include but are not limited to 12 the following: 13 14 1. All metal frames, ladders, stair rails, floor opening frames including 15 gratings and supports. 16 17 2. Prefabricated access hatches and frames. 18 19 3. Anchors and anchor bolts except those specified to be furnished with all 20 equipment. 21 22 4. Railings, posts and supports both interior and exterior. 23 24 5. Cast iron frames, covers, grates, drain leaders and drains. 25 26 6. Stair nosings, steel plates, overhead steel door frames, angle frames, 27 plates and channels. 28 29 7. Guardrails 30 31 1.02 COORDINATION 32 33 A. The work in this section shall be completely coordinated with the work of other 34 Sections. Verify at the site both the dimensions and work of other trades 35 adjoining items of work in this Section before fabrication and installation of 36 items herein specified. 37 38 B. Furnish to the pertinent trades all items included under this Section that are to 39 be built into the work of all other Sections. 40 41 1.03 SHOP DRAWINGS AND SAMPLES 42 43 A. Detail Drawings, as provided for in the General Conditions, showing sizes of 44 members, method of assembly, anchorage, and connection to other members 45 shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval before fabrication. 46 47 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -1 09/30/14 1 B. For each fabricated item include drawings, elevations, and details. Show the 2 following: 3 4 1. Details of Sections 5 2. Jointing and Connections 6 3. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS symbols; indicate net 7 weld length. 8 4. Reinforcing 9 5. Fasteners and Anchors 10 6. Accessories 11 7. Location of each finish 12 13 C. Manufacturer's specifications, details and installation instructions. Submit for: 14 15 1. All manufactured products used in fabrications. 16 17 D. Samples shall be submitted at the request of the Engineer for concurrent 18 review with shop drawings. 19 20 1.04 JOB CONDITIONS 21 22 A. Field measurements shall be taken at the site to verify or supplement indicated 23 dimensions and to insure proper fitting of all items. 24 25 B. Where fabricated items or their anchors are to be embedded into concrete and 26 masonry work, deliver such items to those performing the installation, together 27 with all coordination Drawings and installation instructions required. Provide 28 temporary bracing or anchors in formwork where required for installation in 29 new concrete or other adjacent work. 30 31 1.05 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS 32 33 A. Design, manufacturing and assembly of elements of the materials herein 34 specified shall be in accordance with the standards of the below listed 35 organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where reference is 36 made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the version of the 37 standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 38 39 1. Welded and Seamless Steel Pipe ASTM A53 40 2. Gray Iron Castings ASTM A48 (Class 30) 41 3. Galvanizing, general ASTM A123 42 4. Galvanizing, hardware ASTM A153 43 5. Galvanizing, assemblies ASTM A:386 44 6. Stainless Steel Bolts, Fasteners AISI, Type 316 45 7. Stainless Steel Plate and Sheet Wire AISI, Type 316 46 8. Welding Rods for Steel AWS Spec. for Arc 47 Welding MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -2 09/30/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9. ANSI /AWS D1.1 -88 -- Structural Welding Code -- Steel; 1988. 2 10. ANSI /AWS D1.3 -81 -- Structural Welding Code -- Sheet Steel; 1981 3 11. ASTM A 36/A 36M -88d -- Standard Specification for Structural Steel; 4 1988. 5 12. ASTM A 307 -88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and 6 Studs, 60,000 PSI Tensile Strength; 1988. 7 13. ASTM A 501 -88 -- Standard Specification for Hot - Formed Welded and 8 Seamless Carbon Steel Structural Tubing; 1988. 9 14. ASTM A 563 -88a -- Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel 10 Nuts; 1988. 11 15. ASTM B 221 -85a -- Standard Specification for Aluminum and Alumi- 12 num -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes and Tubes; 1985. 13 16. FS FF -S -92B -- Screw, Machine: Slotted, Cross - Recessed or Hexagon 14 Head; 1974 (Amended 1975). 15 17. FS FF -W -84A -- Washers, Lock (Spring); 1967 (Amended 1980). 16 18. FS FF -W -92B -- Washer, Flat (Plain); 1974. 17 19. SSPC -PA 1 -- Shop, Field, and Maintenance Painting; Steel Structures 18 Painting Council; 1982. 19 20. SSPC -Paint 12 -- Cold- Applied Asphalt Mastic (Extra Thick Film); Steel 20 Structures Painting Council; 1982. 21 21. SSPC -Paint 13 -- Red or Brown One -Coat Shop Paint; Steel Structures 22 Painting Council; 1982. 23 22. SSPC -SP 1 - Solvent Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting Council; 24 1982. 25 23. SSPC -SP 3 - Power Tool Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting Council; 26 1982. 27 24. SSPC -SP 5 -- White Metal Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting 28 Council; 1985. 29 25. SSPC -SP 6 - Commercial Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting 30 Council; 1985. 31 26. SSPC -SP 8 -- Pickling; Steel Structures Painting Council; 1982. 32 27. SSPC -SP 10 -- Near -White Blast Cleaning; Steel Structures Painting 33 Council; 1985. 34 35 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 36 37 2.01 ANCHORS, BOLTS, AND FASTENING DEVICES 38 39 A. Anchors, bolts, etc., shall be furnished as necessary for installation of the work 40 of this Section. 41 42 B. Compound masonry anchors shall be of the type shown or required and shall 43 be equal to Star Slug in compounded masonry anchors manufactured by Star 44 Expansion Industries, equal by Phillips Drill Co., Rahlplug, or equal. Anchors 45 shall be minimum "two unit" type. 46 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -3 09/30/14 1 C. The bolts used to attach the various members to the anchors shall be the 2 sizes shown or required. Stainless steel shall be attached to concrete or 3 masonry by means of stainless steel machine bolts and iron or steel shall be 4 attached with steel machine bolts unless otherwise specifically noted. 5 6 D. For structural purposes, unless otherwise noted, expansion bolts shall be 7 Wej -it "Ankr- Tite ", Phillips Drill Co. "Wedge Anchors ", or Hilti "Kwik- Bolt ". 8 When length of bolt is not called for on the Construction Drawings, the length 9 of bolt provided shall be sufficient to place the wedge portion of the bolt a 10 minimum of 1 -inch behind the reinforcing steel within the concrete. Material 11 shall be as noted on the Construction Drawings. If not listed, all materials 12 shall be stainless steel. 13 14 2.02 ALUMINUM ITEMS 15 16 A. Aluminum gratings shall be of serrated I -Bar Aluminum Alloy 6063 -T6, and 17 shall be Thompson Fabricating Company, Aluminum I -Bar Grating; or equal. 18 Bearing bars shall be 1 -1/2 inch minimum. Grating to be of sufficient strength 19 to carry a uniformly distributed live load of not Tess than 200 pounds per 20 square foot with maximum deflection of 1/4" of the span length. Provide 21 bearing angles, anchors, and bolts constructed of aluminum or stainless steel 22 and as detailed. Grating shall be removable type with standard removable 23 fasteners. Aluminum surfaces in contact with concrete surfaces shall be 24 protected with a special protective lacquer or bituminous coating or other 25 approved coating in order to keep stains to a minimum. Top surface of all bars 26 shall be flush; ends of gratings shall be provided with binding strips of same 27 depth and thickness as the main bars welded thereto. All openings 2 inches 28 and greater in diameter shall be banded with a bar of the same depth and 29 thickness as the main bearing bars of the grating, or furnished with continuous 30 cross bridges. Each cut bar shall be welded to the band if banding is utilized. 31 The ends of all grating sections shall be likewise banded. Clamps and bolts 32 used for attaching grating to supporting members shall be stainless steel. All 33 grating shall be clamped unless noted otherwise. Clamps shall be as 34 recommended by the manufacturer. 35 36 B. Stair treads shall be as specified above for grating and shall have abrasive 37 nonslip nosing. 38 39 C. Aluminum nosing at concrete stairs shall be an extrusion of 4 -inch minimum 40 width with abrasive filled and shall be Wooster Products, Inc., Alumogrit 41 Treads, Type 116; equal by Barry Pattern and Foundry Co.; Andco; or equal. 42 Embedded anchors shall be furnished with a minimum of three anchors per 43 tread. 44 45 D. Aluminum ladders shall be fabricated to the dimensions and details and 46 installed as shown on the Construction Drawings. 47 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -4 09/30/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 E. Aluminum Handrails, Mechanically Fastened Type: 2 3 1. All aluminum mechanically fastened type pipe handrails and guardrails 4 shall be clear anodized aluminum finish and installed as specified 5 herein and indicated on the Construction Drawings. Handrails shall be 6 made of nominal 1 -1/2 inches inside diameter pipe (schedule 40 for 7 rails, schedule 80 for posts) fabricated of seamless 6105 -T5 or 6061 -T6 8 alloy, ASTM B -429 or ASTM B -221. The supplier of the handrail 9 system shall supply all necessary fittings, rackets, transition, corner and 10 connector pieces, toeboards, protective gaskets, etc., for a complete 11 job at the locations indicated on the Construction Drawings. All 12 mounting hardware including bolts, studs, nuts, etc., shall be stainless 13 steel Type 316. Bends shall be smooth and accurate to the details 14 shown. The handrail systems shall comply with all OSHA codes and 15 Section 1012 of the Florida Building Code. Railing systems 16 incorporating pop- rivets or glued fittings shall no be allowed. 17 18 2. Handrailings and components shall be as manufactured by Thompson 19 Fabricating Company, Birmingham, Alabama, or approved equal. 20 21 3. Handrails and stair rails shall be designed to withstand a 200 Ib 22 concentrated load applied in any direction at any point on the top rail. 23 Handrails and stair rails shall also be designed to withstand a Toad of 50 24 lb /ft. applied horizontally to the top rail. The 200 Ib load will not be 25 applied simultaneously with the 501b /ft. load. In addition, the handrails 26 shall be designed to withstand a load of 1001b/ft. applied vertically 27 downward to the top rail and simultaneously with the 501b /ft. horizontal 28 load. The 100lb /ft. vertical load does not apply to stair rails. 29 30 4. Spacing of posts where posts are required shall be as noted on shop 31 drawings, but in all cases shall be uniform and shall not exceed the 32 requirements of OSHA and Section 1013 of the Florida Building Code. 33 Shorter spacing may be used where required to maintain the maximum 34 spacing. The fabricator of the aluminum handrail and guardrail system 35 shall be responsible for the design and preparation of shop drawings 36 and design calculations (signed and sealed by Florida Registered 37 Engineer) to meet OSHA requirements and Section 1012 and 1013 of 38 the Florida Building Code. 39 40 5. All railings shall be erected in line and plumb. Field splicing and 41 expansion compensation shall be accomplished using internal splice 42 sleeves. Make provisions for removable railing sections, as detailed 43 and where shown on the Construction Drawings. 44 45 6. Where handrail or guardrail posts are set in concrete, as per the 46 manufacturer's requirements, the posts shall be set into aluminum 47 sleeves cast in the concrete and firmly cemented with 1651 epoxy resin MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -5 09/30/14 1 by E -Bond Epoxies, Oakland Park, Florida, or Moulded Reinforced 2 Plastics, Inc., Fort Lauderdale, Florida or equal. Collars shall be placed 3 on the posts and fastened in place, as shown and as detailed on 4 approved shop drawings. 5 6 7 Where handrail is supported from structural members, it shall be done 7 by the use of approved sockets, flanges, brackets, or other approved 8 means, which will provide neat and substantial support for the pipe 9 railing. 10 11 8. All railing shall be properly protected by paper, plastic or by an 12 approved coating or by both against scratching, splashes or mortar, 13 paint, or other defacements during transportation and erection and until 14 adjacent work by other trades has been completed. 15 16 F Toeboards: 17 18 1. Contractor shall furnish and install aluminum toeboards conforming to 19 latest OSHA requirements on all railings and other locations. 20 21 2. Toeboards shall consist of an extruded 6063 -T6 aluminum shape bolted 22 by means of a pipe clamp to the railing posts without requiring any 23 drilling or welding of the toeboard to the railing posts as manufactured 24 by Thompson Fabricating Company, or approved equal. Toeboards 25 shall have pitched top and tear drop bottom to prevent accumulation of 26 dirt, or other material. 27 28 3. Toeboards shall be aluminum alloy 6063 -T6. All fastening hardware 29 shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 30 31 4. Toe boards shall be provided with smooth edges and rounded corners. 32 Sharp edges and pointed corners shall not be acceptable. 33 34 G. Kickplates, if required, shall be fabricated and installed as shown on the 35 Drawings. 36 37 1. Kickplates shall be provided with smooth edges and rounded corners. 38 Sharp edges and pointed corners shall not be acceptable. 39 40 H. Aluminum safety gate shall be fabricated of extruded aluminum. 41 42 I. Prefabricated checkerplate aluminum floor hatches shall be Type "JD ", or "KD" 43 as manufactured by Bilco Co., equal by Babcock -Davis Associates, Inc.; Type 44 "AM" Inland- Ryerson Construction Products Co., Milcor Division; or equal, 45 sized as shown. Hatches with either dimension over 3 feet -6 inches shall be 46 double leaf type. Hatches shall be designed for a live Toad of 300 pounds per 47 square foot. Hatches shall be watertight. MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -6 09/30/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 l1 1 1 r r i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 J. Ship ladders shall be of all aluminum construction as detailed. Treads shall 3 have abrasive nosing as manufactured by Thompson Fabricating Company, 4 Birmingham, Alabama. 5 6 K. Checkplate aluminum cover plates shall be fabricated to the details shown and 7 installed at the locations shown. 8 9 L. Structural aluminum angle and channel door frames shall be provided as 10 shown on the Construction Drawings and shall be anodized. Frames shall be 11 fabricated with not less than three anchors on each jamb. 12 13 M. Miscellaneous aluminum shapes and plates shall be fabricated as shown. 14 Angle frames for hatches, beams, grates, etc., shall be furnished complete 15 with welded strap anchors attached. Furnish all miscellaneous aluminum 16 shown but not otherwise detailed. Structural shapes and extruded items shall 17 conform to the detail dimensions or the Shop Drawings within the tolerances 18 published by the American Aluminum Association. 19 20 2.03 STEEL ITEMS 21 22 A. Sleeves shall be steel or cast iron pipe in walls and floors with end joints as 23 shown on the Drawings. All pipe sleeves shall have center anchor around 24 circumference as shown. 25 26 B. Miscellaneous steel pipe for sleeves and lifting attachments and other uses as 27 required shall be Schedule 40 pipe fabricated according to the details as 28 shown on the Drawings. 29 30 C. Miscellaneous steel shall be fabricated and installed in accordance with the 31 Construction Drawings and shall include: beams, angles, support brackets, 32 closure angles in roof at edge of T -beam; base plates to support ends of 33 T- beams; door frames; splice plates, anchor bolts (except for Equipment 34 furnished in Divisions 11, 13, 14 and 15); lintels and any other miscellaneous 35 steel called for on the Drawings and not otherwise specified. 36 37 D. Guardrails shall be of a standard FDOT W -Beam design with reflectors. All 38 mounting hardware including bolts, washers, nuts shall be galvanized. 39 40 2.04 CAST IRON ITEMS 41 42 A. Outside pipe clean -out frames and covers, when and where shown on the 43 Construction Drawings, shall be heavy duty, R- 6013 -R -6099 series as 44 manufactured by Neenah Foundry Co., or equal. All outside pipe clean -outs 45 shall be 6 -inch diameter. 46 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -7 09/30/14 1 B. Frames, covers and grates for manholes, catch basins and inlets shall be of a 2 good quality, strong, tough even grained cast iron and capable of supporting 3 an H -20 loading. Castings shall be as manufactured by the U.S. Foundry, 4 Neenah Foundry, Mechanics Iron Foundry or equal. Sizes shall be as shown 5 on the Drawings. Covers to have letters 'WATER ", "SEWER" or "DRAIN ", as 6 applicable, embossed on top. 7 8 C. Electric and telephone manhole frames and covers, when and where shown 9 on the Construction Drawings, shall be ductile iron castings conforming to all 10 requirements of ASTM A536. The covers shall be watertight and shall have 11 the letters "HIGH VOLTAGE," "LOW VOLTAGE," "SIGNAL," "TELEPHONE," 12 as applicable, embossed on top in letters 2 inches high. The clear opening 13 shall be 36- inches. 14 15 2.05 STAINLESS STEEL ITEMS 16 17 A. Stainless steel items, where shown on the Drawings, shall be manufactured 18 using 316 S.S., unless otherwise noted. 19 20 2.06 MATERIALS - MISCELLANEOUS 21 22 A. Use fasteners of suitable size and length for the materials being fastened and 23 for the type of connection required. 24 25 1. For concealed interior and exterior use or built into exterior walls use 26 nonferrous stainless steel and zinc coated. 27 28 2. For embedded anchor that will be protected from the elements, use 29 fasteners of the same material as the miscellaneous stem being 30 fastened. 31 32 PART 3 — EXECUTION 33 34 3.01 FABRICATION 35 36 A. All miscellaneous metal work shall be formed true to detail, with clean, 37 straight, sharply defined profiles and smooth surfaces of uniform color and 38 texture and free from defects impairing strength or durability. 39 40 B. Connections and accessories shall be of sufficient strength to safely withstand 41 stresses and strains to which they will be subjected. Steel accessories and 42 connections to steel or cast iron shall be steel, unless otherwise specified. 43 Threaded connections shall be made so that the threads are concealed by 44 fitting. 45 MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -8 09/30/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C. Welded joints shall be rigid and continuously welded or spot welded as 2 specified or shown. The face of welds shall be dressed flush and smooth. 3 Exposed joints shall be close fitting and jointed where least conspicuous. 4 5 D. Welding of parts shall be in accordance with the Standard Code for Arc and 6 Gas Welding in Building Construction of the AWS and shall only be done 7 where shown, specified, or permitted by the Engineer. All welding shall be 8 done only by welders certified as to their ability to perform welding in 9 accordance with the requirements of the AWS Code. Component parts of 10 built -up members to be welded shall be adequately supported and clamped or 11 held by other adequate means to hold the parts in proper relation for welding. 12 13 E. Welding of aluminum work shall be on the unexposed side as much as 14 possible in order to prevent pitting or discoloration. 15 16 F. AM aluminum finish exposed surfaces, except as specified below, shall have 17 manufacturer's standard mill finish. Aluminum handrails shall be given an 18 anodic oxide treatment in accordance with the Aluminum Association 19 Specification AA- C22 -A41. A coating of methacrylate lacquer shall be applied 20 to all aluminum before shipment from the factory. 21 22 G. Castings shall be of good quality, strong, tough, even - grained, smooth, free 23 from scale, lumps, blisters, sand holes, and defects of any kind which render 24 them unfit for the service for which they are intended. Castings shall be 25 thoroughly cleaned and will be subjected to a hammer inspection in the field 26 by the Engineer. All finished surfaces shown on the Drawings and /or specified 27 shall be machined to a true plane surface and shall be true and seat at all 28 points without rocking. Allowances shall be made in the patterns so that the 29 thickness specified or shown shall not be reduced in obtaining finished 30 surfaces. Castings will not be acceptable if the actual weight is Tess than 95 31 percent of the theoretical weight computed from the dimensions shown. The 32 Contractor, if requested by the Owner or Engineer, shall provide facilities for 33 weighing castings in the presence of the Owner or Engineer showing true 34 weights, certified by the supplier. 35 36 H. All steel finish work shall be thoroughly cleaned, by effective means, of all 37 loose mill scale, rust, and foreign matter before shipment and shall be given 38 one shop coat of primer compatible with finish coats specified in Painting 39 Section after fabrication but before shipping. Paint shall be applied to dry 40 surfaces and shall be thoroughly and evenly spread and well worked into joints 41 and other open spaces. Abrasions in the field shall be touched up with primer 42 immediately after erection. Final painting is specified in Painting Section 43 09900. 44 45 I. Galvanizing, where required, shall be the hot -dip zinc process after fabrication. 46 Following all manufacturing operations, all items to be galvanized shall be 47 thoroughly cleaned, pickled, fluxed, and completely immersed in a bath of MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -9 09/30/14 1 molten zinc. The resulting coating shall be adherent and shall be the normal 2 coating to be obtained by immersing the items in a bath of molten zinc and 3 allowing them to remain in the bath until their temperature becomes the same 4 as the bath. Coating shall be not less than 2 oz. per sq. ft. of surface. 5 6 J. Provide for anchorage of type indicated; use anchors of same material and 7 finish as item except where specifically indicated otherwise. 8 9 K. Fabricate to prevent water intrusion or migration. 10 11 3.02 INSTALLATION 12 13 A. Install all items furnished except items to be imbedded in concrete or other 14 masonry which shall be installed under Division 03. Items to be attached to 15 concrete or masonry after such work is completed shall be installed in 16 accordance with the details shown. Fastening to wood plugs in masonry will 17 not be permitted. All dimensions shall be verified at the site before fabrication 18 is started. 19 20 B. All steel surfaces to come in contact with exposed concrete or masonry shall 21 receive a protective coating of an approved heavy bitumastic troweling mastic 22 applied in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions prior to installation. 23 24 C. Where aluminum is embedded in concrete, apply a heavy coat of approved 25 bitumastic troweling mastic in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions 26 prior to installation. 27 28 D. Where aluminum contacts masonry or concrete, provide a 1/32 -inch neoprene 29 gasket between the aluminum and the concrete or masonry. 30 31 E. Where aluminum contacts a dissimilar metal, apply a heavy brush coat of 32 zinc - chromate primer and provide a 1/32 -inch neoprene gasket between the 33 aluminum and the dissimilar metal. 34 35 F. Where aluminum contacts wood, apply two coats of aluminum metal and 36 masonry paint to the wood. 37 38 G. Anchor metal fabrications to substrata indicated; set all fasteners required. 39 40 H. Cut, drill and fit items as required for installation. 41 42 1. Fit exposed connection together accurately to form tight hairline joints. 43 44 2. Weld joints as indicated. 45 46 a. Comply with AWS code for welding procedures, for appearance 47 and quality of welds, and for corrective methods. MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -10 09/30/14 1 b. Grind exposed joints smooth. 2 3 I. Set items accurately in location, alignment and elevation; level, true and free 4 of rack, measured from established lines and levels. 5 6 J. Provide temporary bracing as required. 7 8 3.03 CLEANING AND TOUCH -UP 9 10 A. Touch up shop paint immediately after erection. 11 12 1. Clean field welds, bolted connections and abraded surfaces. 13 14 2. Paint with same material used for shop painting, minimum 2 mils dry 15 film thickness. 16 17 18 END OF SECTION MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -11 09/30/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK MISCELLANEOUS METAL 05500 -12 09/30/14 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 06600 2 3 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SUMMARY 8 9 A. This section includes all Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Products and 10 Fabrications, including but not limited to: 11 12 1. FRP Weir Plates 13 2. FRP Scum Baffles 14 3. FRP Splice Plates 15 4. FRP Scum Baffle Supports 16 5. FRP Accessories 17 18 B. The Contractor shall clean the existing clarifier walls where the new FRP scum 19 baffles and weir plates are to be installed to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 20 21 1.02 SCOPE OF WORK 22 23 A. The Contractor shall furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals as 24 required for the provision and proper installation of all of the FRP Products as 25 shown on the Drawings and specified herein. All anchor bolts, gaskets, 26 sealants, and other accessories and appurtenances, required for a complete 27 and operating installations shall be included whether specifically mentioned or 28 not. 29 30 1.03 REFERENCES 31 32 A. ANSI /NSF 61 — Drinking Water System Components — Health Effects. 33 B. ANSI /AWWA F101 — Contact - Molded, Fiberglass- Reinforced Plastic Wash 34 Troughs and Launders 35 C. ASTM D 638 — Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics. 36 D. ASTM D 695 — Standard Test Method for Compressive Properties of Rigid 37 Plastics 38 E. ASTM D 790 — Standard Test Methods for Flexural Properties of Unreinforced 39 and Reinforced Plastics and Electrical Insulating Materials. 40 41 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE 42 43 A. All FRP products and fabrications shall be supplied by an experienced firm 44 who has continually engaged in the manufacture and /or fabrication of 45 fiberglass reinforced plastics. Firms not listed in this specification must clearly 46 document a minimum of five years experience with similar projects of equal 47 scope or design. FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -1 05/31/13 1 2 B. The Contractor shall assure that all field dimensions are taken accurately and 3 communicated properly to the FRP Fabricator, that other trades will not affect 4 a proper installation of the FRP, and that all manufacturer's instructions and 5 recommendations are followed. 6 7 C. The scum baffle and scum baffle mounting brackets shall be manufactured 8 and installed such that no interference with the weir plate or weir plate 9 mounting hardware exists. With the exception of cutting to length, field 10 modifications to the scum baffle mounting brackets and to weir plates will not 11 be permitted. 12 13 1.05 SUBMITTALS 14 15 A. Submit shop drawings and product data for all FRP materials and fabrications 16 as required by this scope of work. 17 18 B. Product Data: 19 20 1. Manufacturer's catalog information, descriptive literature, specifications, 21 and identification of materials of construction, including resins and glass 22 fiber content and layout for FRP constructions. 23 24 2. Manufacturers catalog data with load and deflection charts for all FRP 25 gratings. 26 27 3. Manufacturers catalog data for all FRP Structural Shapes. 28 29 4. Manufacturer's 6 -inch square samples of FRP laminate of the same 30 construction, thickness, and color as the structural item. 31 32 5. Test results of FRP laminate. 33 34 6. Installation instructions and manufacturer certification that materials 35 comply with specified requirements and are suitable for the intended 36 application. 37 38 C. Shop Drawings: 39 40 1. Shop drawings shall show all FRP materials as required and include all 41 dimensions, connections, fasteners, structural supports, adjustments, 42 openings, anchors, tolerances, assembly, and installation details as 43 required and shall be based on field measurements by the Contractor to 44 ensure proper installation. 45 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.07 WARRANTY 2 3 A. The manufacturer shall warrant the weirs, scum baffles and bracket supports 4 to be free of defects in materials and workmanship in accordance with 5 Specification Section 01740. 6 7 1.08 COORDINATION 8 9 A. The Contractor and the manufacturer shall coordinate the weir and scum 10 baffle design and installation requirements with the clarifier mechanism, scum 11 box, scum beach, and effluent launder channel configurations. 12 13 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 14 15 2.01 GENERAL 16 17 A. All FRP materials shall be manufactured with vinylester, with chemical 18 formulations as necessary to provide the corrosion resistance, strength and 19 other physical properties compatible with domestic wastewater as required. 20 21 B. All structural shapes shall be constructed of continuous strand roving, 22 continuous transverse mat, and synthetic surface veil, and shall include 23 ultraviolet (UV) inhibitors. 24 25 C. After fabrication of FRP, all cuts, holes, and abrasion shall be sealed 26 according to Manufacturer's instructions to prevent corrosion. 27 28 2.02 FRP WEIRS, SCUM BAFFLES, SPLICE PLATES, AND SUPPORTS 29 30 A. Except for bolts and hardware specified herein, weirs, splice places, baffles, 31 and supports shall be polyester plastic resin, reinforced with glass fiber and 32 molded to produce uniform smooth surfaces. 33 34 B. The glass content of the finished laminate shall not be less than 30% and not 35 more than 32% using Type E silane glass with chrome or silane finish. Final 36 laminate thickness shall be within 10% of nominal specified thickness. 37 38 C. The surface shall be resin rich, free of voids and porosity, without dry spots, 39 crazes or unreinforced areas and shall provide for increased corrosion 40 resistance and UV protection. All machines or cut edges shall be sealed with 41 resin. The weirs, splice places, baffles, and supports shall all be the same 42 color and shall be green, white, or grey. 43 44 D. Ultraviolet resistance is required in all laminates. Surfacing veil is required on 45 all surfaces to increase chemical resistance and provide additional UV 46 protection. 47 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -3 05/31/13 1 E. The weirs, splice plates, baffles, supports, and washers shall be a minimum of 2 1/4" thick plastic laminate. Oversized mounting holes shall be provided for 3 vertical and horizontal alignment of at least 2" with 5" diameter FRP washers 4 to cover the holes. 5 6 F. Weirs and splice plates shall be mounted with 1/2" x 4 -1/4 inch stainless steel 7 anchors on 24 -inch centers. The weirs shall not exceed 12 -feet in length 8 unless otherwise noted. Cut ends of non - standard lengths shall be sealed 9 with resin. 10 11 G. The scum baffle panels shall be 12- inches high and shall not exceed 12 -feet in 12 length unless otherwise noted. Splice plates shall be minimum 6 -inch x 12- 13 inch. The scum baffle brackets shall be 7 -inch x 10 -inch x % -inch FRP with 14 gussets on both sides and slotted holes to provide horizontal, vertical and 15 radial adjustment of the baffle. The brackets shall be installed a maximum of 16 4 -feet on center or as shown on the Drawings. Fastening holes in the scum 17 baffle panel shall be countersunk to accommodate 3/8 -inch flat head 18 fasteners. Cut ends of non - standard lengths shall be sealed with resin. 19 20 G. Anchors, nuts, bolts, washers and all other hardware shall be Type 316 21 stainless steel. 22 23 H. Fiberglass Reinforced Plastic (FRP) Laminate Physical Properties: 24 25 26 Method Test Min. Value 27 ASTM D -638 Tensile Strength 24,000 psi 28 ASTM D -790 Flexural Strength 25,000 psi 29 ASTM D -790 Flexural Modulus 1.4 x 10 psi 30 ASTM D -2583 Barcol Hardness 40 31 ASTM D -570 Water Absorption 0.2% 32 I. Construction shall comply with all requirements of ANSI /AWWA/NSF 33 standards listed above, and manufacturer shall provide proof of such 34 certification. 35 36 J. Straight weirs shall be cut from a flat sheet. Curvilinear weirs (clarifier) cut 37 from a flat sheet will not be acceptable. 38 39 K. Weir notch configuration and dimensions shall match the existing weirs. 40 41 L. Caulking or weir gaskets shall be installed or applied to provide a leak free 42 seal between the weir plate and the concrete wall. The gasket shall be 1/4- 43 inch, closed cell neoprene or as recommended by the weir plate manufacturer. 44 The caulking shall be Sikaflex 1A or as recommended by the weir plate 45 manufacturer. 46 FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -4 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M. Weirs, splice plates, baffles, supports, and washers shall be as manufactured 2 by MFG Water Treatment Products or approved equal. 3 4 PART 3 — EXECUTION 5 6 3.01 INSPECTION 7 8 A. Upon receipt of material at job site, the Contractor shall inspect all materials 9 for shipping damage. Any damage is to be noted on the shipping receipt / 10 packing list and reported promptly to the shipper. 11 12 3.02 HANDLING AND STORAGE 13 14 A. Handle all FRP materials with reasonable care to prevent damage. Use 15 shipping pallets to move material. Do not drag FRP materials. 16 17 B. If FRP materials are not to be installed immediately, then store to prevent 18 twisting, bending, breaking, or damage of any kind. 19 20 3.03 INSTALLATION 21 22 A. The Contractor shall coordinate and verify that other construction trades and 23 materials have been installed per the Drawings, and, that they are accurate in 24 location, alignment, elevation, and are plumb and level. 25 26 B. Install FRP materials in accordance with the installation drawings and 27 instructions supplied by the FRP Manufacturer. 28 29 C. Install materials accurately in location and elevation, level, and plumb. Field 30 fabricate as necessary for accurate fit. 31 32 D. All field cuts, holes or abrasions must be sealed with Manufacturer's sealing 33 resin according to Manufacturer's instructions to prevent corrosion. 34 35 E. If the Work requires the Contractor to perform additional tasks that may 36 damage the installed FRP materials, the Contractor shall be responsible for 37 covering the FRP materials with plywood, or other suitable protective material. 38 39 F. Prior to installation of the weirs and scum baffle supports, the Contractor shall 40 pressure wash and grind smooth the concrete surface where those items will 41 be mounted to the existing structure. 42 43 3.04 CLARIFIERS WEIR INSTALLATION 44 45 A. V -notch weirs on all clarifiers shall be installed level around the entire 46 perimeter of the clarifier. The weirs shall be checked for level with a surveying 47 instrument at 12 locations around the circumference of each clarifier FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -5 05/31/13 representing the face of a clock. The weirs shall be adjusted to a tolerance of + 1/32 -inch at each of the 12 locations. END OF SECTION FIBERGLASS REINFORCED PLASTIC FABRICATIONS 06600 -6 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 09865 2 3 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required for the surface 10 preparation and application of shop primers necessary to complete this 11 Contract in its entirety. 12 13 1.02 SUBMITTALS 14 15 A. Submit to the Engineer for review, shop drawings, manufacturer's 16 specifications and data on the proposed primers and detailed surface 17 preparation, application procedures and dry mil thickness. 18 19 B. Submit representative physical samples of the proposed primers, if required by 20 the Engineer. 21 22 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 23 24 2.01 MATERIALS 25 26 A. Submerged Services: 27 28 1. Shop primer for ferrous metals that will be submerged or that are 29 subject to splash action or that are specified to be considered 30 submerged service shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 31 at 3.0 -5.0 mils (D.F.T.), PPG Pitt -Guard Epoxy Coating 97 -145 at 4.0- 32 6.0 mils (D.F.T.), or approved equal. 33 34 2. Voids and bugholes in concrete surfaces must be filled with Tnemec 35 Series 218 (up to 1/4" deep) or Tnemec Series 219 (1/4" to 1 1/2" deep) 36 or approved equal recommended by manufacturer of approved paint 37 system. 38 39 B. Non - submerged Services: 40 41 1. Shop primer for ferrous metals other than those covered by Paragraph 42 2.01A shall be sprayed with one coat of Tnemec Series 66 Epoxy Fast 43 Dry Primer 94 -109 (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) or approved equal. 44 45 C. Non - primed Surfaces: 46 SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 09865 -1 05/31/13 1 1 Gears, bearings surfaces, and other similar surfaces obviously not to be 2 painted shall be given a heavy shop coat of grease or other suitable 3 rust - resistant coating. This coating shall be maintained as necessary to 4 prevent corrosion during all periods of storage and erection and shall be 5 satisfactory to the Engineer up to the time of the final acceptance test. 6 7 D. Compatibility of Coating Systems: 8 9 1. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the 10 manufacturer to be compatible with their corresponding primers and 11 finish coats specified in Section 09900 for use in the field and which are 12 recommended for use together. 13 14 PART 3 — EXECUTION 15 16 3.01 APPLICATION 17 18 A. Surface Preparation and Priming: 19 20 1. Nonsubmerged components scheduled for priming, as defined above, 21 shall be sandblasted clean in accordance with SSPC -SP -6, Commercial 22 Grade, immediately prior to priming. Submerged components 23 scheduled for priming, as defined above, shall be sandblasted clean in 24 accordance with SSPC- SP -10. Near White, immediately prior to 25 priming. 26 27 2. Surfaces shall be dry and free of dust, oil, grease, dirt, rust, loose mill 28 scale, and other foreign material before priming. Concrete surfaces 29 shall be prepared in accordance with ICRI CSP 4 -6. 30 31 3. Shop prime in accordance with approved paint manufacturer's 32 recommendations. 33 34 4. Priming shall follow sandblasting before any evidence of corrosion has 35 occurred and within 24 hours. 36 37 5. Allow all new concrete to cure for a minimum of 28 days. Test for 38 moisture by plastic film tape down test (ASTM D4263). 39 40 41 END OF SECTION SURFACE PREPARATION AND SHOP PRIME PAINTING 09865 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 09900 2 3 PAINTING 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. The work of this section consists of furnishing all materials, labor, equipment 10 and incidentals required and performing all the painting necessary to complete 11 this Contract in its entirety. 12 13 B. It is the intent of these Specifications to paint all concrete where scheduled, 14 exposed miscellaneous metal, pipe, fittings, supports, valves, equipment and 15 all other work obviously required to be painted unless otherwise specified. 16 Minor items omitted in the schedule of work shall be included in the work of 17 this Section where they come within the general intent of the Specifications as 18 stated herein. 19 20 C. The following surfaces or items are not required to be painted: 21 22 1. Portions of metal, other than aluminum, embedded in concrete. This 23 does not apply to the back face of items mounted to concrete or 24 masonry surfaces that shall be painted before erection. Aluminum to 25 be embedded in or in contact with concrete or masonry shall be coated 26 to prevent electrolysis. 27 28 2. Stainless steel. 29 30 3. Fencing 31 32 4. Concealed surfaces of pipe or crawl spaces. 33 34 5. Acoustical ceilings. 35 36 6. Tile. 37 38 7. Fiberglass other than piping. 39 40 8. Packing glands and other adjustable parts and nameplates of 41 mechanical equipment. 42 43 9. Electrical switchgear, motor control centers, lighting and power panels, 44 and control panels. 45 46 10. Polyethylene chemical storage tanks. PAINTING 09900 -1 05/31/13 1 1.02 REFERENCES 2 3 A. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) 4 5 1. SSPC -SP -1 through SSPC -SP -10 Surface Preparation Specifications 6 7 B. International Concrete Repair Institute (ICRI) 8 9 1. ICRI CSP — 3 through ICRI CSP — 6 Concrete Surface Preparation 10 Standards. 11 12 1.03 SUBMITTALS 13 14 A. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions, 15 shop drawings, working drawings and product data including manufacturer's 16 specifications and data on the proposed paint systems and detailed surface 17 preparation, application procedures and dry film thickness. 18 19 B. Submit to the Engineer for review in accordance with the General Conditions, 20 color cards, including standard and special colors, for initial color selections. 21 22 C. Schedule of Painting Operations: Submit to the Engineer for review a 23 complete Schedule of Painting Operations in a timely manner and properly 24 notify and coordinate the fabricators' surface preparation and painting 25 operations with these Specifications. This Schedule shall include for each 26 surface to be painted, the brand name, the percent volume of solids, the 27 coverage and the number of coats the Contractor proposes to use in order to 28 achieve the specified dry film thickness, and color charts. When the Schedule 29 has been approved, apply all material in strict accordance with the approved 30 Schedule and the manufacturer's instructions. Wet and dry paint film gages 31 shall be made available to the Engineer to verify the proper application while 32 work is in progress. 33 34 1.04 SPARE MATERIAL 35 36 A. Furnish one unopened gallon can of each type and each color of paint used. 37 38 1.05 CONTRACTOR QUALIFICATIONS 39 40 A. Contractor shall submit a list of projects successfully completed during the 41 past 3 years of similar projects. Contractor shall also supply record of 42 Certificates of Approval from Manufacturers to show they have completed 43 technical product and application training. Contractors shall submit a list of 44 surface preparation and application equipment sufficient to mix and apply the 45 products specified. 46 PAINTING 09900 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2 3 2.01 MATERIALS 4 5 A. All painting materials shall be fully equal to those manufactured by the 6 Tnemec Company Inc., Carboline, PPG /Porter Coatings, and Sherwin 7 Williams. The painting schedule has been prepared on the basis of these 8 products and recommendations for applications. No brand other than those 9 named will be considered for approval, unless the brand and type of paint 10 proposed for each item in the following schedule, together with sufficient data 11 substantiated by certified tests conducted at no expense to the Owner, to 12 demonstrate its equality to the paint(s) named, is submitted in writing to the 13 Engineer for approval within 30 days after the issuance of the Notice to 14 Proceed. The type and number of tests performed shall be subject to the 15 Engineer's approval. 16 17 B. All painting materials shall be delivered to the mixing room in unbroken 18 containers, bearing the manufacturer's brand, date of manufacturer, batch 19 number, and name. They shall be used without adulteration and mixed, 20 thinned, and applied in strict accordance with manufacturer's directions for the 21 applicable materials and surface and with the Engineer's approval before 22 using. 23 24 C. Shop priming shall be done with primers that are guaranteed by the 25 manufacturer to be compatible with the finish paints to be used. 26 27 D. No paint containing lead will be allowed. Oil shall be pure boiled linseed oil. 28 29 E. Work areas will be designated by the Engineer for storage and mixing of all 30 painting materials. Materials shall be in full compliance with the requirements 31 of pertinent codes and fire regulations. Proper containers outside of the 32 buildings shall be provided and used for painting wastes, and no plumbing 33 fixture shall be used for this purpose. 34 35 F. All recommendations of the paint manufacturer in regard to the health and 36 safety of workmen shall be followed. 37 38 G. Where new painting is specified for surfaces with existing finishes, the 39 Contractor shall sample the existing coating(s) for compatibility with the 40 proposed new paint and notify the Engineer of any incompatibilities found. 41 42 2.02 PAINTING SYSTEMS 43 44 A. Colors for pipe shall match that of existing connected piping. Colors for 45 structural steel shall match that of existing connected structural steel. 46 PAINTING 09900 -3 05/31/13 1 B. The following surfaces shall have the types of paint scheduled below applied 2 at the dry film thickness (D.F.T.) in mils per coat noted. Some of the painting 3 systems listed below may not be used in this project. Some colors will require 4 an additional coat beyond that listed below to obtain the proper color 5 coverage. 6 7 1. Non - submerged concrete and precast concrete walls and ceilings: 8 9 a. Tnemec 10 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T. ) 11 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 12 13 b. Carboline 14 1st Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 15 2nd Coat : Carboguard 890 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 16 17 c. PPG /HPC 18 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 19 D.F.T.) 20 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 21 D.F.T.) 22 23 d. Sherwin Williams 24 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer 25 2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat 26 27 2. Submerged Concrete 28 29 a. Tnemec 30 1st Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (3.0 — 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 31 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series N69 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 32 33 b. Carboline 34 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0 -14.0 mils D.F.T.) 35 36 c. PPG /HPC 37 2 Coats: Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 38 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 39 40 d. Sherwin Williams 41 1st Coat : Cor Cote FRE (80 -100 mils D.F.T 42 43 44 3. Interior Exposed Masonry (above grade and interior partitions) 45 46 a. Tnemec 47 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 54 -660- (80 -100 sq. ft. per gal.) 48 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.) PAINTING 09900 -4 05/31/13 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 2 3 b. Carboline 4 1 Coat: Sanitile 600 /600TG (60 -80 sq. ft. per gal.) 5 2 Coats: Sanitile 655 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 6 7 c. PPG /HPC 8 1 Coat: Aquapon Polyamide Epoxy Block Filler 97- 685/686 (40 9 to 80 sq. ft. per gal @ 12.0 -24.0 mils D.F.T.) 10 11 2 Coats: Aquapon High Build Semi -Gloss Polyamide Epoxy 12 Coating 13 97 -130 Series. (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 14 15 d. Sherwin Williams 16 1st Coat: Concrete and Masonry Primer 17 2nd Coat: Loxon Topcoat 18 19 4. Interior and Exterior Exposed Masonry (Unpainted) 20 21 a. Tnemec 22 Regular CMU 23 2 Coats: Prime a Pell 200 @ 75 -100 SF /gallon /coat 24 Split face CMU 25 2 Coats: Prime a Pell Plus @ 65 -80 SF /gallon /coat 26 27 b. Carboline 28 CMU 29 1 Coat: Carbocrete Sealer WB @ 60 -80 SF /gallon 30 Split Face CMU 31 2 Coats: Carbocrete Sealer WB, 1st coat @ 40 -60 SF /gallon & 32 2nd coat @ 80 -120 SF /gallon 33 34 c. PPG /HPC 35 2 Coats: PPG /HPC Canyon Tone Stain Clear at 100 to 150 SF 36 per gallon. 37 38 5. Exterior Exposed Stuccoed Walls 39 40 a. Tnemec 41 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 — 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 42 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 180 smooth (4.0 —6.0 mils D.F.T.) 43 44 b. Carboline 45 1st Coat: Sanitile 100 (10.0 -12.0 mils D.F.T.) 46 2nd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils DFT) 47 3rd Coat: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T.) - OPTIONAL 48 PAINTING 09900 -5 05/31/13 1 c. PPG /HPC 2 1st Coat Pitt-Flex Elastomeric Coating 4 -110 (5.5 -7.3 mils 3 D.F.T.) 4 2nd Coat Pitt -Flex Elastomeric Coating 4 -110 (5.5 -7.3 mils 5 D.F.T.) 6 7 6. Ferrous metals submerged or subject to splashing 8 9 a. Tnemec 10 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 104 -1211 High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy 11 Coating (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 12 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 104 -Color High Solids Catalyzed Epoxy 13 Coating (8.0 - 10.0 mils D.F.T.) 14 15 b. Carboline 16 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0 -14.0 mils D.F.T.) 17 18 c. PPG /HPC 19 1 Coat: Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 20 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 21 1 Coat: Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949 22 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 23 24 d. Sherwin Williams 25 1st Coat: Cor -Cote HB 6.0 -9.0 mils (D.F.T.) 26 2nd Coat: Cor -Cote HB 6.0 -9.0 mils (D.F.T.) 27 28 7. Exterior non - submerged ferrous metals: 29 30 a. Tnemec 31 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 32 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 33 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 4.5 mils D.F.T.) 34 35 b. Carboline 36 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 37 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 38 3rd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 39 40 c. PPG /HPC 41 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 42 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 43 D.F.T.) 44 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95 -8800 (2.0 -6.0 45 mils D.F.T.) 46 47 d. Sherwin Williams 48 1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (3.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) PAINTING 09900 -6 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2nd Coat: HiSolids Polyurethane (2.0 -4.0 mils (D.F.T.) 2 3 8. Interior non - submerged ferrous metals: 4 5 a. Tnemec 6 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 7 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (4.0 - 6.0 mils D.F.T.) 8 9 b. Carboline 10 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 11 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 12 13 c. PPG /HPC 14 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 15 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 16 D.F.T.) 17 18 9. Exterior galvanized and non - ferrous metal: 19 20 a. Tnemec 21 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 22 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 1074 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 23 24 b. Carboline: 25 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 26 2nd Coat : Carbothane 133HB (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 27 28 c. PPG /HPC 29 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 30 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 31 D.F.T.) 32 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95 -8800 (2.0 -6.0 33 mils D.F.T.) 34 35 d. Sherwin Williams 36 1st Coat: Macropoxy 646 (2.5 -3.5 mils D.F.T.) 37 2nd Coat: H- Solids Polyurethane (2.5 -3.5 mills D.F.T.) 38 39 10. Interior galvanized and non - ferrous metals: 40 41 a. Tnemec 42 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 43 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 Color (3.0 - 5.0 mils D.F.T.) 44 45 b. Carboline: 46 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 47 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) 48 PAINTING 09900 -7 05/31/13 c. PPG /HPC 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 11. Galvanized and non - ferrous metal submerged or subject to splashing: a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 2 "d Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1 Coat: Carboguard 691 (10.0 -14.0 mils D.F.T.) c. PPG /HPC 1st Coat: PPG Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 2nd Coat: PPG Pitt-Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 3rd Coat: PPG Pitt -Guard All Weather D -T -R Epoxy Coating 97- 946/949 Series. (5.0 -7.0 mils D.F.T per coat) 12. Metal surfaces exposed to temperatures above 250 °F: a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 39- 1261(0.7 -1.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 39- 1261(0.7 -1.5 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1 Coat: Thermaline 450, up to 450 °F (8.0 -10.0 mils D.F.T.) or 1st Coat: Carbozinc 11 or 11 HS (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Thermaline 4700, 400 - 1000 °F (2.0 mils D.F.T.) c. PPG /HPC 2 Coats: Speedhide Int/Ext Aluminum Paint 6 -230. (1.0 -1.3 mils D.F.T. per coat) 13. Insulated Pipe: a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.) 2"d Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) PAINTING 09900 -8 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 c. PPG /HPC 2 2 Coats: PITT -TECH Interior /Exterior Satin DTM Industrial 3 Enamels 90 -474 Series.(2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 4 5 14. Aluminum in contact with dissimilar metals: 6 7 a. Tnemec 8 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 9 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 10 11 b. Carboline 12 1st Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 13 2nd Coat : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T.) 14 15 c. PPG /HPC 16 1st Coat: Epoxy Fast Dry Primer 94 -109 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 17 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils 18 D.F.T.) 19 20 15. Plastic Piping - Interior: 21 22 a. Tnemec 23 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 24 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 25 26 b. Carboline 27 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 28 2 Coats : Carboguard 893SG (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 29 30 c. PPG /HPC 31 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 32 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 33 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 34 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 35 36 16. Plastic Piping - Exterior 37 38 a. Tnemec 39 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 40 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 73 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 41 42 b. Carboline 43 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 44 2 Coats : Carbothane 133HB (3.0 -4.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 45 46 c. PPG /HPC 47 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 PAINTING 09900 -9 05/31/13 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 3rd Coat: Pitthane HB Semi -Gloss Urethane 95 -8800 (2.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) d. Sherwin Williams 1st Coat: Hi- Solids Polyurethane (2.5 -3.5 mils D.IF.T) 2nd Coat: Hi- Solids Polyurethane (2.5 -3.5 mils D.F.T) 17. Interior Drywall and Plaster - Industrial Areas a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51 -792 (1.0 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 66 (2.5 - 3.5 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0 -5.0 mils DFT) 3rd Coat : Sanitile 655 (4.0 -5.0 mils D.F.T.) c. PPG /HPC 1st Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97-130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Aquapon HB Semi -Gloss Epoxy 97 -130 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T.) 18. Interior Drywall and Plaster -Office Areas a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 51 -792 (1.0 - 1.5 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.) 3rd Coat: Tnemec Series 6 (2.0 - 3.0 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1st Coat : Carbocrylic 120 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 2 Coats: Sanitile 155 (2.0 -3.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) c. PPG /HPC 1st Coat: Speedhide Interior Latex Primer /Sealer 6 -2 (1 mil DFT) 2 Coats: Speedhide Int Latex Eggshell 6 -411 (2 mils D.F.T. per coat) 19. Interior Concrete Floors PAINTING 09900 -10 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 a. Tnemec 3 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 201 (5.0 — 7.0 mils D.F.T >) 4 2nd Coat: Tenemec Series 280 (8.0 — 10.0 mils D.F.T.) 5 6 Note: Apply 50 — 70 mesh silica sand at 5 lbs. per 150 sq. ft. 7 between 1st and 2nd coat to provide non -slip surface. 8 9 b. Carboline 10 1st Coat: Carboguard 1340 (1.0 -2.0 mils D.F.T.) 11 2 Coats: Carboguard 890 (4.0 -6.0 mils D.F.T. per coat) 12 13 Note: Utilize 40 -60 mesh silica sand to provide non -slip surface. 14 Consult with Carboline for application details. 15 16 17 c. PPG /HPC 18 1st Coat: Megaseal High Solids Primer 99 -6639 19 (5.0 — 7.0 mils D.F.T) 20 2nd Coat: Megaseal Self- Leveling Epoxy 99 -6680 21 (10.0 -12.0 mils D.F.T.) 22 23 20. Concrete in highly Corrosive Environment Special Coating 24 25 a. Tnemec 26 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 434 Perma - Shield H2S 27 (125 mils D.F.T.) 28 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma -Glaze 29 (12.0 -15.0 mils D.F.T.) 30 31 b. Carboline 32 1st Coat: Plasite 5371 (125 mils) 33 2nd Coat: Plasite 4500S (12.0 -15.0 mils D.F.T.) 34 35 c. PPG /HPC /Polyspec (Concrete Headworks) 36 37 1st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer 38 2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner 39 (100 mils) 40 3rd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner 41 (100 mils) 42 43 d. PPG /HPC /Polyspec (Manholes /Lift Stations -Force & Gravity 44 Mains) 45 46 1st Coat: 300EX Epoxy Primer 47 2nd Coat: TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner PAINTING 09900 -11 05/31/13 (100 mils) 3rd Coat: (100 mils) TuffRez 240 Chemical Resistant Epoxy Liner e. PPG /HPC /Enviroline (Concrete Headworks) 1st Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3 -5 mils DFT) 2nd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20 -40 mils DFT) 3rd Coat #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20 -40 mils DFT) f. PPG /HPC /Enviroline (Manholes /Lift Stations -Force & Gravity Mains) 1st Coat 2nd Coat 3rd Coat #54 High Solids Epoxy Primer (3 -5 mils DFT) #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (20 -40 mils DFT) #224 100% Solids Epoxy Novolac (2.0 -40 mils DFT) g. Sherwin Williams 1st Coat: CorCote FRE (80 -100 mils D.F.T) 21. Metals submerged or subject to splashing in highly Corrosive Environment Special Coating a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 435 Perma - Shield H2S (30 mils D.F.T.) b. Carboline 1 Coat: Plasite 4500S (35.0 -40.0 mils D.F.T.) c. PPG /HPC /Polyspec 1st Coat: 2nd Coat: d. Sherwin Williams 1st Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0 -9.0 mils D.F.T) 2nd Coat: Cor Cote HB (6.0 -9.0 mils D.F.T) 22. Secondary Containment Concrete 12.5% Sodium Hypochlorite a. Tnemec 1st Coat: Tnemec Series 61 -5002 Tenemeliner (8.0 -10.0 mils D.F.T.) 2nd Coat: Tnemec Series 61 -5001 Tenemeliner (8.0 -10.0 mils D.F.T.) PAINTING 09900 -12 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 b. Carboline 2 1st Coat: Semstone 800 primer 3 Finish Coats: Semstone 870 4 (reference Semstone 870 application spec for installation details) 5 6 c. PPG /HPC /Polyspec 7 1st Coat: 8 9 23. Buried Pipe Appurtenances (Coal Tar Epoxy / Bitumastic Coating) 10 11 a. Tnemec 12 1st Coat Tnemec Series 46H -413 Tneme -Tar 13 (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T) 14 2nd Coat Tnemec Series 46H -413 Tneme -Tar 15 (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T) 16 17 b. Carboline 18 1st Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T) 19 2nd Coat Carboline Bitumastic 300M (14.0 -20.0 mils D.F.T) 20 21 c. Sherwin Williams 22 1st Coat: Tar -Guard (16 -20 mils D.F.T) 23 2nd Coat: Tar -Guard (16 -20 mils D.F.T) 24 25 C. Any surfaces not specifically named in the Schedule and not specifically 26 excepted shall be prepared, primed and painted in the manner and with 27 materials consistent with these Specifications. The Engineer shall select 28 which of the manufacturer's products, whether the type is indicated herein or 29 not, shall be used for such unnamed surfaces. No extra payment shall be 30 made for this painting. 31 32 2.03 COLOR CODING FOR PIPES AND EQUIPMENT 33 34 A. Color coding shall consist of color code painting and identification of all 35 exposed conduits, through items and pipelines for the transport of gases, 36 liquid and semi - liquids including all accessories such as valves, insulated pipe 37 coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and all operating 38 accessories that are integral to be whole functional mechanical pipe and 39 electrical conduit system. Colors shall be as noted in the Paint and Color 40 Coding Schedules attached at the end of this Section. 41 42 B. All hangers and pipe support floor stands shall be painted the same color and 43 with the same paint as the pipe it supports. The system shall be painted up to, 44 but not including, the flanges attached to the mechanical equipment nor the 45 flexible conduit connected to electrical motors. When more than one pipe 46 system is supported on the same bracket, the bracket shall be painted the PAINTING 09900 -13 05/31/13 1 same color as the adjacent wall or ceiling. Colors shall be as noted in the 2 Paint and Color Coding Schedule. 3 4 C. All systems which are an integral part of the equipment, that is originating from 5 the equipment and returning to the same piece of equipment, shall be painted 6 between and up to, but not including, the fixed flanges or connections on the 7 equipment. 8 9 2.04 LETTERING OF TITLES 10 11 A. Each pipe system shall be labeled with the name of the materials in each 12 pipeline and alongside this an arrow indicating the direction of flow of liquids. 13 Titles shall be as so described in attached schedule. Titles shall not be 14 located more than twenty (20) linear feet apart and shall also appear directly 15 adjacent to each side of any wall the pipeline breaches, adjacent to each side 16 of the valve regulator, flowcheck, strainer clean -out, and all pieces of 17 equipment. 18 19 B. Titles shall identify the contents by complete name. Identification title 20 locations shall be determined by the Engineer but, in general, they shall be 21 placed where the view is unobstructed and on the two lower quarters of pipe 22 or covering where they are overhead. Title should be clearly visible from 23 operating positions especially those adjacent to control valves. 24 25 C. Titles on equipment shall be applied at eye level on machines, where possible, 26 or at the uppermost broad vertical surface of low equipment. Where more 27 than one piece of the equipment item to be titled exists, the items shall be 28 numbered consecutively, as indicated on the mechanical drawings, or as 29 directed by the Engineer; for example Pump No. 1, Pump No. 2, etc. Titles 30 shall be composed and justified on the left hand side as follows: Pump No. 1. 31 32 D. Application of titles. 33 34 1. The color of the titles shall be black or white, as approved, to best 35 contrast with the color of the pipes and equipment and shall be stencil 36 applied. 37 38 2. Stencil text is to be in ALL CAPS worded exactly as shown in the 39 Schedule. Titles are to be printed in a single line. 40 41 3. Letter sizes. 42 43 Outside Diameter 44 of Pipe or Size of Legend 45 Covering (inches) Letters (inches) 46 PAINTING 09900 -14 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3/4 to 1 -1/4 1/2 2 1 -1/2 to 2 3/4 3 2 -1/2 to 6 1 -1/4 4 8 to 10 2 -1/2 5 More than 10 3 -1/2 6 7 Equipment titles are to be two inches high. 8 9 4. Arrow sizes. Where "a" is equal to 3/4 of outside diameter of pipe or 10 covering, the arrow shaft shall be 2 "a" long by 3/8 "a" wide. The arrow 11 head shall be an equilateral triangle with sides equal to "a." Maximum 12 "a" dimension shall be 6 inches. 13 14 5. When using direction arrows, point arrowhead away from pipe markers 15 and in direction of flow. If flow can be in both directions, use a 16 double- headed directional flow. 17 18 2.05 FABRICATED EQUIPMENT 19 20 A. Unless otherwise indicated, all fabricated equipment shall be shop primed and 21 shop or field finished. 22 23 B. All items to be shop primed shall be thoroughly cleaned of all loose material 24 prior to priming. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, any prime coating shall 25 have been improperly applied or if material contrary to these Specifications 26 shall have been used, that coating shall be removed by sandblasting to white 27 metal and re- primed in accordance with these Specifications. 28 29 C. All shop prime coats shall be of the correct materials and applied in 30 accordance with these Specifications. Remove any prime coats not in 31 accordance with these Specifications by sandblasting and apply the specified 32 prime coat at no additional cost to the Owner. 33 34 D. Shop primed surfaces shall be cleaned thoroughly and damaged or bare spots 35 retouched with the specified primer before the application of successive paint 36 coats in the field. 37 38 E. Be responsible for and take whatever steps are necessary to properly protect 39 the shop prime and finish coats against damage from weather or any other 40 cause. 41 42 F A shop finish coat shall be equal in appearance and protection quality to a 43 field applied finish coat. If, in the opinion of the Engineer, a shop finish coat 44 does not give the appearance and protection quality of other work of similar 45 nature, prepare the surfaces and apply the coat or coats of paint, as directed 46 by the Engineer, to accomplish the desired appearance and protection quality. PAINTING 09900 -15 05/31/13 1 Submit to the Engineer sufficient evidence that the standard finish is 2 compatible with the specified finish coat. 3 4 G. Wherever fabricated equipment is required to be sandblasted, protect all 5 motors, drives, bearings, gears, etc., from the entry of grit. Any equipment 6 found to contain grit shall be promptly and thoroughly cleaned. 7 8 PART 3 — EXECUTION 9 10 3.01 PREPARATION OF SURFACES 11 12 A. All surfaces to be painted shall be prepared, as specified herein or in Section 13 09865, and shall be dry and clean before painting. Special care shall be given 14 to thoroughly clean interior concrete and concrete block surfaces of all marks 15 before application of finish. 16 17 B. All metal welds, blisters, etc., shall be ground and sanded smooth in 18 accordance with SSPC -SP -3 or in difficult and otherwise inaccessible areas by 19 hand cleaning in accordance with SSPC -SP -2. All pits and dents shall be 20 filled and all imperfections shall be corrected so as to provide a smooth 21 surface for painting. All rust, loose scale, oil, grease and dirt shall be removed 22 by use of approved solvents, wire brushing or sanding. 23 24 C. Concrete surfaces shall be finished as specified in Division 3. Report 25 unsatisfactory surface conditions to the Engineer. Concrete shall be free of 26 dust, oil, curing compounds, and other foreign matter. Concrete surfaces shall 27 have any laitance or weak layers removed prior to install of coatings or linings 28 using captive shot blasting systems. Concrete shall have a minimum surface 29 tensile strength of at least 300 PSI per ASTM D -4541 standard. Testing is 30 required to confirm this strength using ASTM D-4541 standard and methods. 31 Surface profile shall be CSP -3 to CSP -6 meeting ICRI (International Concrete 32 Repair Institute) standard guideline #03732 for Coating, Concrete, producing 33 an anchor profile equal to 60 -grit sandpaper or coarser. Prepare concrete 34 surfaces by mechanical (captive shot blast) means to achieve this desired 35 profile. Moisture Vapor Transmission should be 3 pounds or less per 1,000 36 square feet over 24 hour timeframe as confirmed through a calcium chloride 37 test as per ASTM E -1907. Quantitative relative humidity (RH) testing, ASTM 38 F -2170, should confirm concrete RH results < 75 %. Application of coatings 39 and linings should be made when out gassing of concrete is declining during 40 periods when surface temperatures of the concrete is falling. Use of a surface 41 thermometer to determine when surface temperatures are falling is required. 42 When in doubt, double priming may be required. All surface irregularities, 43 cracks, expansion joints and control joints should be properly addressed prior 44 to application of coatings and linings. Remove all contaminates and 45 contaminated surface layers prior to application of coatings and linings. 46 PAINTING 09900 -16 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 n Concrete block surface shall be smooth and cleaned of all dust, efflorescence, 2 chalk, loose mortar, dirt, grease, oil, tar and other foreign matter. 3 4 E. All plastic pipe surfaces shall be lightly sanded before painting. 5 6 F Wood surfaces shall be dry. Sand to obtain a smooth surface. All 7 encrustations shall be removed. 8 9 G. Exposed Pipe: Bituminous coated pipe shall not be used in exposed 10 locations. Pipe that will be exposed after project completion shall be primed in 11 accordance with the requirements herein. Any bituminous coated pipe that is 12 inadvertently installed in exposed locations shall be sandblasted clean before 13 priming and painting. After installation all exterior, exposed flanged joints shall 14 have the gap between adjoining flanges sealed with a single component 15 polysulfide sealant to prevent rust stains. 16 17 H. Primed or Previously Painted Surfaces and Nonferrous Surfaces: All coated 18 surfaces shall be cleaned prior to application of successive coats. All 19 nonferrous metals not to be coated shall be cleaned. This cleaning shall be 20 done in accordance with SSPC -SP -1, Solvent Cleaning. 21 22 I. Shop- Finished Surfaces: All shop- coated surfaces shall be protected from 23 damage and corrosion before and after installation by treating damaged areas 24 immediately upon detection. Abraded or corroded spots on shop- coated 25 surfaces shall be "Hand Cleaned" and then touched up with the same 26 materials as the shop coat. All shop coated surfaces which are faded, 27 discolored, or which require more than minor touch -up, in the opinion of the 28 Engineer, shall receive new surface preparation before being repainted. Cut 29 edges of galvanized sheets and exposed threads, and cut ends of galvanized 30 piping, electrical conduit and metal pipe sleeves, that are not to be finished 31 painted, shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and primed with zinc dust -zinc oxide metal 32 primer. 33 34 ' J. Galvanized and Zinc - Copper Alloy Surfaces: These surfaces to be painted 35 shall be "Solvent Cleaned" and treated as hereinafter specified. Such 36 surfaces not to be painted shall be "Solvent Cleaned." Brush off blasting per 37 SSPC -SP7 galvanized surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion. 38 39 K. Aluminum embedded or in contact with concrete must be painted with one 40 shop coat of zinc chromate followed by one heavy coat of aluminum 41 pigmented asphalt paint. Brush off blasting per SSPC -SP7 of galvanized 42 surfaces to insure optimum coating adhesion. 43 44 3.02 WORKMANSHIP 45 46 A. General: PAINTING 09900 -17 05/31/13 1 1. Primer (spot) and paint used for a particular surface shall, in general, be 2 as scheduled for that type of new surface. Confirm with the paint 3 manufacturer that the paint proposed for a particular repaint condition 4 will be compatible with the existing painted surface. Sample repainted 5 areas on the actual site will be required to insure this compatibility. 6 Finished repainted areas shall be covered by the same guarantee 7 specified for remainder of work. 8 9 2. At the request of the Engineer, samples of the finished work prepared in 10 strict accordance with these Specifications shall be furnished and all 11 painting shall be equal in quality to the approved samples. Finished 12 areas shall be adequate for the purpose of determining the quality of 13 workmanship. Experimentation with color tints shall be furnished to the 14 satisfaction of the Engineer where standard chart colors are not 15 satisfactory. 16 17 3. Protection of furniture and other movable objects, equipment, fittings 18 and accessories shall be provided throughout the painting operations. 19 Canopies of lighting fixtures shall be loosened and removed from 20 contact with surface, covered and protected and reset upon completion. 21 Remove all electric plates, surface hardware, etc., before painting, 22 protect and replace when completed. Mask all machinery name plates 23 and all machined parts not receiving a paint finish. Dripped or 24 spattered paint shall be promptly removed. Lay drop cloths in all areas 25 where painting is being done to adequately protect flooring and other 26 work from all damage during the operation and until the finished job is 27 accepted. 28 29 4. On metal surfaces apply each coat of paint at the rate specified by the 30 manufacturer to achieve the minimum dry mil thickness required. If 31 material has thickened or must be diluted for application by spray gun, 32 the coating shall be built up to the same film thickness achieved with 33 undiluted material. One gallon of paint as originally furnished by the 34 manufacturer shall not cover a greater area when applied by spray gun 35 than when applied unthinned by brush. Deficiencies in film thickness 36 shall be corrected by the application of an additional coat(s). On 37 masonry, application rates will vary according to surface texture, 38 however, in no case shall the manufacturer's stated coverage rate be 39 exceeded. On porous surfaces, it shall be the painter's responsibility to 40 achieve a protective and decorative finish either by decreasing the 41 coverage rate or by applying additional coats of paint. 42 43 5. Paints shall be mixed in proper containers of adequate capacity. All 44 paints shall be thoroughly stirred before use and shall be kept stirred 45 while using. No unauthorized thinners or other materials shall be added 46 to any paint. PAINTING 09900 -18 05/31/13 1 1 I 1 2 6. Only skilled painters shall be used on the work and specialists shall be 3 employed where required. I 4 5 B. Field Priming: 6 I 7 1. Steel members, metal castings, mechanical and electrical equipment 8 and other metals that are shop primed before delivery at the site will not 9 require a prime coat on the job. All piping and other bare metals to be I 10 painted shall receive one coat of primer before exposure to the 11 weather, and this prime coat shall be the first coat as specified in the 12 painting schedule. I 13 14 2. Equipment which is customarily shipped with a baked -on enamel finish 15 or with a standard factory finish shall normally be field painted unless I 16 the prefinished equipment is specifically color selected and unless the 17 finish has not been damaged in transit or during installation. Surfaces 18 that have been shop painted and have been damaged, or where the I 19 shop coats or coats of paint have deteriorated, shall be properly 20 cleaned and retouched before any successive painting is done on them 21 in the field. All such field painting shall match as nearly as possible the 22 original finish. II 23 24 C. Field Painting: 25 I 26 27 1. All painting at the site shall be designated as Field Painting. 28 2. All paint shall be at room temperature before applying, and no painting I 29 shall be done when the temperature is below 50 °F, in dust -laden air, 30 when rain or snow is falling, or until all traces of moisture have 31 completely disappeared from the surface to be painted. I 32 33 3. Successive coats of paint shall be tinted so as to make each coat easily 34 distinguishable from each other with the final undercoat tinted to the I 35 approximate shade of the finished coat. 36 37 4. Finish surfaces shall not show brush marks or other irregularities. I 38 Undercoats shall be thoroughly and uniformly sanded with No. 00 39 sandpaper or equal to remove defects and provide a smooth even 40 surface. Top and bottom edges of doors shall be painted and all I 41 exterior trim shall be back - primed before installation. 42 43 5. Painting shall be continuous and shall be accomplished in an orderly I 44 manner so as to facilitate inspection. All exterior concrete and masonry 45 paint shall be performed at one continuous manner structure by 46 structure. Materials subject to weathering shall be prime coated as I PAINTING 09900 -19 05/31/13 1 1 quickly as possible. Surfaces of exposed members that will be 2 inaccessible after erection shall be cleaned and painted before erection. 3 4 6. All materials shall be brush painted unless spray painting is specifically 5 approved by the Engineer. The Contractor shall be responsible for all 6 damage caused by overspray or drifting. 7 8 7. All surfaces to be painted, as well as the atmosphere in which painting 9 is to be done, shall be kept warm and dry by heating and ventilation, if 10 necessary, until each coat of paint has hardened. Any defective paint 11 shall be scraped off and repainted in accordance with the Engineer's 12 directions. 13 14 8. Before final acceptance of the work, all damaged surfaces of paint shall 15 be cleaned and repainted as directed by the Engineer. 16 17 9. Any pipe scheduled to be painted and having received a coating of a tar 18 or asphalt- compound shall be painted with two coats of PPG /HPC 19 PITT - GUARD® Epoxy Penetrating Sealer 95 -2328 or equal before 20 successive coats are applied per the schedule. Tnemec recommends 21 using 66 Hi -Build Epoxoline over tar, but a test patch must be run 22 initially to test the paint's compatibility with the tar. Carboline does not 23 recommend application of their coatings over tar. Instead, Carboline 24 recommends removal of the tar followed by the application of suitable 25 coatings based on the substrate and intended service application. 26 27 3.03 CLEANUP 28 29 A. The premises shall at all times be kept free from accumulation of waste 30 material and rubbish caused by employees or work. At the completion of the 31 painting remove all tools, scaffolding, surplus materials, and all rubbish from 32 and about the buildings and leave work "broom clean" unless more exactly 33 specified. 34 35 B. Upon completion, remove all paint where it has been spilled, splashed or 36 splattered on all surfaces, including floors, fixtures, equipment, furniture, etc., 37 leaving the work ready for inspection. 38 39 C. All cloths and waste that might constitute a fire hazard shall be placed in 40 closed metal containers or destroyed at the end of each day. Upon 41 completion of the work, the entire job left clean and acceptable to the 42 Engineer. 43 44 3.04 INSPECTION, TESTING EQUIPMENT AND PROCEDURES 45 46 A. Inspection PAINTING 09900 -20 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 . All phases of the work are subject to inspection by the Engineer to 3 assure proper performance and compliance with the specifications. 4 5 2. The Engineer shall be advised of the proper time to inspect surface 6 preparation, prime coat and each succeeding coat. The Contractor 7 shall apply additional coats only after the previous coat has been 8 approved by the Engineer or Owner's representative. 9 10 B. Testing 11 12 1. The Contractor shall have on the project site the following testing 13 equipment. Equipment shall be in calibration and proper working order. 14 Equipment shall be used in accordance with the manufacturers' 15 instructions or as directed by the Engineer. 16 17 a. Sling Psychrometer: Relative humidity and dew point readings 18 shall be taken at intervals throughout the days work. Readings 19 shall be taken at the start of the mornings work, mid day and 20 afternoon. Should environmental conditions change, additional 21 reading shall be taken to assure that coatings are being applied 22 under the conditions as outlined by the coatings manufacturer. 23 24 b. Surface Temperature Thermometer: Surface temperatures shall 25 be taken in areas where work is being performed. Surface 26 temperature shall be that as specified by the coatings 27 manufacturer. 28 29 c. Replica Tape & Micrometer: Testex X- Course Replica Tape 30 shall be employed to determine the surface profile of blasted 31 surfaces. Surface profile shall be as specified. 32 33 d. Dry Film Thickness Measurements: Dry film thickness reading 34 shall be taken with a properly calibrated (per the manufacturer's 35 instructions) Type 1 (magnetic) or Type 2 (electromagnetic) 36 instrument. Dry film thickness reading will be taken and 37 recorded in the in a frequency and manner as dictated by the 38 Engineer. 39 40 e. Holiday Detection: After completion of immersion coating 41 systems on steel surfaces, all surfaces shall be holiday detected 42 in accordance with ASTM G 62 low voltage holiday detection. 43 Holiday detector shall be a Tinker & Rasor Model M -1 or equal. 44 Areas found to have holidays shall be marked and repaired in 45 accordance with the paint manufacturer's instructions. The 46 Engineer shall be notified of time of testing so that he might be 47 present to witness testing. The Contractor shall provide ladders, PAINTING 09900 -21 05/31/13 1 2 3 4 3.05 PAINT 5 6 A. 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 rigging, etc. as necessary to allow the Engineer to spot check paint thickness of each coat. General Notes & Guidelines: 1. All color numbers and names herein refer to master color card. Colors of specified equal manufacturers may be substituted with approval of the Engineer. 2. Pipe lines, equipment, or other items which are not listed here shall be assigned a color by the Engineer and shall be treated as an integral part of the Contract. 3. When color coding is specified or directed by the Engineer, it shall consist of color code painting and identification of all exposed conduits, through lines and pipelines for the transport of gases, liquids or semi - liquids, including all accessories such as valves., insulated pipe coverings, fittings, junction boxes, bus bars, connectors and any operating accessories which are integral to a whole functional mechanical pipe and electrical conduit systems. 4. The colors of the Finish Schedule shall be interpreted as follows: COLORS White Ivory Red L. Green Green D. Green COLORS L. Brown Brown Bronze L. Gray M. Gray D. Gray TNEMEC # 11WH 01 BR 06SF 52GN 09SF 08SF TNEMEC # 06BR 84BR 86BR 31 GR 33GR 34GR COLORS Tank Blue Blue D. Blue L. Blue Aqua TNEMEC # 25BL 11SF 78BL 26BL 10GN COLORS Inter. Orange Orange Tan Yellow Safety Yellow TNEMEC # 05SF 04S F 04BR 03SF 02SF 5. All moving parts, drive assemblies, and covers for moving parts which are potential hazards, shall be Safety Orange 04SF. 6. All safety equipment shall be painted in accordance with OSHA standards. PAINTING 09900 -22 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 All in -line equipment and appurtenances not assigned another color 2 shall be painted the same base color as the piping. The pipe system 3 shall be painted with the pipe color up to, but not including, the flanges 4 attached to pumps and mechanical equipment assigned another color. 5 Tanks shall be painted the color of the piping system that they serve, 6 unless the tank is fiberglass or polyethylene. 7 8 8. All conduits shall be painted to match its background surface. 9 10 9. Building surface colors shall be painted, as scheduled in the Finish 11 Schedule, or as selected by the Engineer. 12 13 10. Control panels shall be factory finished. 14 15 3.06 GUARANTEE AND ANNIVERSARY INSPECTION 16 17 A. All work shall be warranted for a period of one year from date of acceptance of 18 the project. 19 20 B. The Owner will notify the Contractor at least 30 days prior to the anniversary 21 date and shall establish a date for the inspection. Any defects in the coating 22 system shall be repaired by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. 23 Should a failure occur to 25% of the painted surface, either interior or exterior, 24 the entire surface shall be cleaned and painted in accordance with these 25 specifications. 26 27 3.07 PAINT AND COLOR CODING SCHEDULE 28 29 Piping and Legend Color Bands 30 Backwash Waste Light Brown 31 Blower Air Green Orange 32 Coagulant Aqua 33 Compressed Air Dark Green Red 34 Drains Black 35 Fuel Red White 36 Potable Water Dark Blue 37 Process Sample Light Grey Red 38 Reclaimed Effluent Pantone Purple 522C 39 Return Activated Sludge Brown 40 Sodium Hypochlorite Yellow 41 Sprinkler Red 42 Thickened Sludge Dark Brown Orange 43 Wastewater Dark Gray 44 Waste Activated Sludge White 45 46 47 PAINTING 09900 -23 05/31/13 1 Equipment and Building Color 2 Exterior Equipment, Valves, Gates, Fans Match System 3 Interior Equipment and Pumps (including factory finished) Match System 4 Structural Steel (Interior) White 5 Ceiling White 6 Cranes and Hoists Yellow 7 Ductwork Match Surface Mounted 8 Interior Air Handling and Ventilation Equipment Match Surface Mounted 9 Valve and Gate Operators Match System 10 Electrical Conduit and Junction Boxes Match Surface Mounted 11 Submerged Concrete Black 12 13 3.08 PAINT SCHEDULE 14 15 A. New Clarifier drives shall be painted to match the color of the existing drives. 16 17 B. All new pumps, piping, fittings, valves, supports, and line stop fittings shall be 18 painted to match the color of the existing equipment. This applies to both 19 North and South RAS Pump Equipment Buildings. 20 21 C. All existing RAS piping and fittings inside the South RAS Pump Equipment 22 Building shall be painted to match the color of the existing piping. 23 24 D. All existing RAS piping and fittings inside the North RAS Pump Equipment 25 Building and downstream of the check valves shall be painted to match the 26 color of the existing piping. 27 28 29 E. All existing WAS piping, fittings, valves, supports, pumps, and pump bases in 30 the South RAS Pump Equipment Building shall be painted to match the color 31 of the existing RAS piping. 32 33 F. Walls, ceilings and all surfaces excluding the floor, stair treads, and crane 34 shall be painted to match the existing color in the North and South RAS Pump 35 Equipment Buildings. 36 37 38 39 40 END OF SECTION PAINTING 09900 -24 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 SECTION 11225 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PART 1 — GENERAL 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment, and incidentals required to install replacement parts, perform repairs, and rehabilitate the existing clarifiers at the locations shown on the Drawings and specified herein. • Northeast Plant • Northeast Plant • Marshall Street Plant • East Plant Clarifiers 1 thru 4 Clarifiers 5 thru 8 Clarifiers 1 thru 4 East Clarifier and West Clarifier B. Northeast Plant Clarifiers Nos. 1 through 4 (NOT IN CONTRACT) The Work at the Northeast Plant Clarifiers Nos. 1 through 4 consists of the removal of existing equipment and the furnishing and installing of new equipment including but not limited to: • Center Column (Assumed to be 30 -inch diameter) • Rotating Cage and Arm Mechanism (75 -foot diameter except #2) • Drive Assembly • Access Bridge Assembly • Energy Dissipating Baffle System • Dual Skimmer Assemblies • A Single Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly • Scum Trough Piping • All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors and Hardware • Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.60 - 2.25 • Assumed Design MLSS Avg Flow (MGD) = 2.25 Clarifiers No. 1 and No. 2 shall be rehabilitated first. Clarifiers No. 3 and No. 4 shall remain in service while No. 1 and No. 2 are being rehabilitated. Clarifiers No. 1 and No. 2 shall remain in service while No. 3 and No. 4 are being rehabilitated. At least one Return Activated Sludge (RAS) pump and one Waste Activated Sludge (WAS) pump shall remain in service at all times. The Contractor will be allowed to take all four Clarifiers Nos.1 through 4 out of service for not more than 72 consecutive hours for replacement of the telescoping valve seals in the RAS Wet Well and the RAS and WAS pump suction valves. CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -1 10/31/14 1 C. Northeast Plant Clarifiers Nos. 5 through 8 2 3 The Work at the Northeast Plant Clarifiers Nos. 5 through 8 consists of the 4 removal of existing equipment and the furnishing and installing of new 5 equipment including but not limited to: 6 7 • Center Column 8 • Rotating Cage and Arm Mechanism (75 -foot diameter) 9 • Drive Assembly 10 • Access Bridge Assembly 11 • Energy Dissipating Baffle System 12 • Dual Skimmer Assemblies 13 • A Single Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly 14 • Scum Trough Piping 15 • All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors and Hardware 16 • Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.60 - 2.25 17 • Assumed Design MLSS Avg Flow (MGD) = 2.25 18 19 At least two clarifiers, one Return Activated Sludge (RAS) pump and one 20 Waste Activated Sludge (WAS) pump shall remain in service at all times. The 21 Contractor will be allowed to take all four Clarifiers Nos.5 through 8 out of 22 service for not more than 72 consecutive hours for replacement of the 23 telescoping valve seals in the RAS Wet Well and the RAS pump suction 24 valves at a time pre- approved by the Owner. 25 26 No. 6 Clarifier is currently out of service and shall be rehabilitated first. 27 28 New clarifier topping grout is not anticipated for the floor area. However, the 29 Contractor shall provide a unit price for removal and replacement of topping 30 grout as noted on the bid form and described in the specifications. 31 32 D. Marshall Street Plant Clarifiers Nos. 1 through 4 (NOT IN CONTRACT) 33 34 The Work at the Marshall Street Plant Clarifiers Nos. 1 through 4 consists of 35 the removal of existing equipment and the furnishing and installing of new 36 equipment including but not limited to: 37 38 • Center Column (30 -inch diameter) 39 • Rotating Cage and Arm Mechanism (100 -foot diameter) 40 • Drive Assembly 41 • Access Bridge Assembly 42 • Energy Dissipating Baffle System 43 • Dual Skimmer Assemblies 44 • A Single Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly 45 • Scum Trough Piping CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -2 10/31/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors and Hardware 2 • Single Sludge Section Header 3 • Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.5 - 3.75 4 • Design RAS Flow Avg (MGD) = 1.25 5 • Design MLSS Flow Range (MGD) = 1.5 - 10 6 • Design MLSS Flow Avg (MGD) = 3.75 7 8 No. 2 Clarifier shall be rehabilitated first. A minimum of three clarifiers shall 9 remain in service at all times. 10 11 E. East Plant, East and West Clarifiers (NOT IN CONTRACT) 12 13 The Work at the East Plant, East and West Clarifiers consists of the removal 14 of existing equipment and the furnishing and installing of new equipment 15 including but not limited to: 16 17 • Center Column (Sandblast and Repaint) (30 -inch diameter) 18 • Single Skimmer Arm and Blade Assembly (Replace) (100 -foot 19 diameter) 20 • Remainder of Rotating Mechanism (Sandblast and Repaint) 21 • Drive (Replace) 22 • West Clarifier Access Bridge Assembly (Replace) 23 • East Access Bridge Assembly (Sandblast and Repaint Center Platform 24 • Influent Baffle Well (Sandblast and Repaint) 25 • Scum Beach Plate and Trough Assembly (Replace) 26 • All Associated Brackets, Supports, Anchors, and Hardware (Replace) 27 • Design RAS Flow Range (MGD) = 0.5 - 2.5 28 • Design RAS Flow Avg (MGD) = 1.9 29 • Design MLSS Flow Range (MGD) = 1.5 - 8.75 30 • Design MLSS Flow Avg (MGD) = 2.5 31 32 The East Clarifier shall be rehabilitated first. A minimum of one clarifier shall 33 remain in service at all times. 34 35 F. Existing equipment shall be removed and dismantled or demolished and 36 disposed of as necessary for the repairs and replacements in accordance with 37 the requirements specified herein. 38 39 • Orientation (with respect to bridge) of the center column mounting 40 anchor bolts. 41 42 G. The Contractor shall field verify all existing clarifier and equipment dimensions 43 and elevations for each individual clarifier as listed below prior to demolition 44 and before ordering equipment: 45 • Floor elevation at the base of the center column. CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -3 10/31/14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 H. 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 I. 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 1 1 • Floor elevation at the base of the side wall. • Floor elevations at 2 -foot increments between the center column and the sidewall. • Weir elevation. • Elevation of the clarifier bridge supporting structure at the tank wall. • Ground elevation at the base of the bridge stairway. • Mounting elevation at the base of the center column. • Length of the center column from the mounting elevation to the bottom of the Clarifier drive and to the bottom of the clarifier bridge. • Length of the bridge beams. I • Diameter of the center column. • Invert elevation of the scum pipe penetration. • Elevation of the scum beach trough inlet. I • Elevation of the RAS telescoping valve weir notches in the fully extended and fully retracted positions. • Elevation of the bottom of the bridge beams. I • All other elevations and dimensions as required. The floor elevations noted above shall be taken at 45 degree increments around the entire floor area. In order to determine the elevation of the base of the center column and the length of the center column it will be necessary to cut a temporary access opening in the existing sludge collection manifold at the base of the center column. After the required elevations are determined, the Contractor shall patch the temporary access opening using sheet metal and sheet metal screws such that the clarifier can be placed back in service. The elevations and equipment dimensions noted in paragraph G shall be determined for each clarifier. Only two clarifiers may be taken out of service at any one time. Depending on groundwater levels at the time of construction, this work may require dewatering of the groundwater surrounding the tank(s) as needed to allow the clarifier to be drained without flotation. This work shall be performed at no additional cost to the Owner. The new clarifier mechanisms are to be installed in the existing tanks. As such, the Contractor shall be responsible for determining the elevations and dimensions of each tank, which may not all be the same and coordinating with the manufacturer. The Contractor shall be responsible for fabricating the equipment to properly fit in the existing tanks, regardless of whether the tanks all have the same dimensions and elevations, including truss arm angles, perimeter wall and center column support elevations, and seal plate mounting dimensions and elevations. Modifications to the concrete tank, if needed to make the new equipment properly fit in the existing tanks, shall be made at no additional cost to the Owner. CLARIFIER REHABILITATION I 11225 -4 10/31/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM 2 3 A. All of the equipment specified herein is intended to be standard equipment for 4 use with the activated sludge waste treatment process and shall be designed 5 for use in center feed type circular clarifiers with peripheral weirs and troughs. 6 All clarifiers furnished under this project shall be of the same design in all 7 aspects. 8 9 B. Clarifiers with suction header type sludge collection and removal mechanisms 10 are approved for this project as described in Section 2.09. Clarifiers that use 11 scraper type mechanisms for sludge collection and removal are not acceptable 12 and will not be approved, nor will clarifiers that use multiple, individual suction 13 riser pipes or stepped -type mechanisms. 14 15 C. Control of sludge withdrawal is by existing telescoping valves, one dedicated 16 to each clarifier, located external of the clarifier basin. 17 18 D. Clarifier drives shall be of cast iron construction and shall be equipped with 19 horizontal or vertical speed reduction units with cast iron housings as 20 described in Sections 2.04 and 2.05. Clarifier drives using hydraulic pressure 21 to produce rotational force or hydraulic drives are not acceptable. Clarifier 22 drives constructed of fabricated steel are not acceptable. 23 24 E. Existing Clarifier Floor, Influent Piping, RAS Piping and Drain Piping 25 26 1. The existing clarifiers are equipped with drain piping connected to 27 sumps located in the floor near the center column (except the clarifiers 28 at the Marshall Street plant). 29 30 2. According to plant staff, there are no drains in the Marshall Street 31 clarifiers. 32 33 3. All of the existing drains must remain functional, and the equipment 34 furnished shall provide for continued operation of the drains after the 35 project has been completed. 36 37 4. The Contractor shall modify the floor, the existing drain sump, the 38 existing drain piping, the existing RAS pipe, and the existing influent 39 pipe in all clarifiers as necessary to accommodate the equipment 40 furnished. 41 42 F Clarifier #2 at the Northeast Plant 43 44 Clarifier #2 at the Northeast Plant has a side wall feature not found in any of 45 the other clarifiers. The interior of the perimeter circular clarifier wall has been 46 thickened. This thickened wall extends upwards from the floor approximately CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -5 10/31/14 1 5 feet and inwards from the original wall approximately 6 -8 inches. The 2 thickened wall appears to have been added after the clarifier was originally 3 constructed and no drawings of the thickened wall have been located. Due to 4 this feature, the radius of Clarifier #2 rotating mechanism below the water 5 surface will be 6 " -8" (nominal) less than the other 75 -foot diameter clarifiers. 6 The Contractor shall field verify all existing clarifier dimensions including basin 7 diameter at the floor, center of tank to center of the outer bridge supports, and 8 all relative elevations. 9 10 G. Clarifier Equipment 11 12 Except as noted on the Drawings, new clarifier equipment shall include: 13 14 1. Drive mechanism complete with reducer, motor, and overload trip 15 device; 16 2. Sludge removal equipment including supports, center cage, truss arm, 17 and sludge collection device; 18 3. Influent energy dissipating system and supports; 19 4. Influent flocculating well and supports; 20 5. Center support column, adapter if required, anchor bolt template, and 21 grout shield; 22 6. Access bridge and platform including hand railings, kick plates, and 23 walkway surface as shown on the Drawings; 24 7. New aluminum stairs and handrails; 25 8. Dual rotating surface skimmer assemblies with pivoted skimmers 26 except at the East Plant which shall have a single skimmer arm. 27 9. One scum trough and submerged shelf (beach plate); 28 10. All bolts, drill -in anchors, and hardware of Type 316 stainless steel; 29 11. All other appurtenances shown on the Drawings or as required for a 30 completely operational system. 31 32 H. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for field verifying all existing clarifier 33 tank and equipment dimensions and elevations. 34 35 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS 36 37 A. All clarifier equipment described herein shall be furnished by a Manufacturer 38 regularly engaged in the design, manufacture and production of the type of 39 equipment specified herein. At the time of bidding, the Manufacturer's 40 experience shall include not less than 10 (ten) different installlation locations 41 (facilities) where clarifiers that incorporate sludge removal mechanisms and 42 influent baffle systems as specified herein in tanks of the same or larger 43 diameter as those required for this project, have been in satisfactory 44 operation for not less than five (5) years. The following manufacturers are 45 approved for this project: Evoqua, Ovivo, WesTech. The specific attention of 46 the Contractor is directed to the fact that this approval does not relieve the CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -6 10/31/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r r 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 Contractor from furnishing and installing equipment and performing all work in 2 strict compliance with the requirements of this specification Section 11225. 3 4 B. The equipment shall be designed, constructed, delivered and installed in 5 accordance with the best practices and methods. Each component and 6 ancillary equipment item furnished under this specification shall be new and 7 unused. 8 9 C. All clarifier equipment shall be designed and the drawings sealed by a 10 registered professional engineer who is experienced with the manufacturer's 11 clarifier design. The equipment shall be designed, fabricated and installed in 12 accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations. 13 14 1.04 SUBMITTALS 15 16 A. All materials required to establish compliance with these Specifications shall 17 be submitted in accordance with the provisions of the General Conditions and 18 the General Requirements. Submittals shall include at least the following: 19 20 1. Certified shop drawings showing all important details of construction, 21 dimensions, minimum required spacing, and anchor bolt locations. 22 23 2. Complete installation instructions including anchor bolt layout, piping 24 details and mechanical connections. 25 26 3. Descriptive literature, bulletins and /or catalogs of the equipment. 27 28 4. Information required by Section 01340. 29 30 5. The total weight of the equipment, including the weight of the single 31 largest item or component. 32 33 6. A list of the manufacturer's recommended spare parts. 34 35 7. Electrical power and control data covering the following details: 36 37 a. Approximate enclosure dimensions including height, width, and 38 depth, maximum wire size (main terminal block or disconnect 39 device.) 40 41 b. A control schematic diagram shall be provided that shows power 42 and control circuits in sufficient detail to evaluate the control 43 system design. Control schematic shall be color coded. 44 45 8. Performance data covering all internal mechanical components. The 46 submittal shall contain any additional information necessary for the CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -7 10/31/14 1 Engineer to determine that the proposed equipment meets the specified 2 requirements. 3 4 B. Descriptive Information: 5 6 1. Performance data demonstrating how the proposed dlesign removes 7 sludge from the entire tank bottom. Data shall be from an existing 8 clarifier operating under the following field conditions: 9 10 a. Actual plant operation; 11 b. Similar diameter, side water depth, and floor slope; 12 c. Return sludge concentrations not Tess than 5,000 mg /I; 13 d. Return sludge flow range from 50% to 150% of the influent flow 14 for each clarifier; 15 e. Maximum velocity in the suction header shall not exceed 3.0 to 16 4.5 fps; and, 17 f. Maximum head Toss shall not exceed 12- inches in the suction 18 header. 19 20 2. Complete design, input, and output information from an industry specific 21 clarifier computer modeling program. 22 23 3. Complete test procedure for field testing the sludge collector 24 mechanism for the AGMA -rated torques specified. 25 26 4. Details of construction showing: 27 28 a. Type of material used for each component; 29 b. Dimensions, thicknesses, and weights of each component; 30 c. Size, shape, and cross - section of header if so equipped; 31 d. Size, shape, and location of inlet openings; and, 32 e. All manifold seals. 33 34 5. Complete assembly drawing of collector components giving type of 35 material, dimensions and thicknesses of each element. 36 37 6. General arrangement of drive unit verifying AGMA ratings, overload 38 protection, construction, housing material, horsepower, rotational 39 speed, and rotational RPM. Provide the design parameters used per 40 AGMA 6034 -B92 and the resulting values per AGMA 2001 -D04. 41 42 7 Weight of each complete collector, verified by the Contractor with 43 substantiating copy to the Engineer as the material is received on the 44 job site. 45 46 1.06 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE AND TRAINING MANUALS 47 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -8 10/31/14 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 A. Operating and Maintenance Manuals and Training Manuals shall be prepared 2 for each set of clarifiers as follows: 3 1. Northeast Plant Clarifiers 1 thru 4 shall have dedicated Manuals 4 2. Northeast Plant Clarifiers 5 thru 8 shall have dedicated Manuals 5 3. Marshall Street Clarifiers 1 thru 4 shall have dedicated Manuals 6 4. No new Manuals are required for the East Plant clarifiers 7 8 B. Copies of the operating and maintenance manuals and training manuals shall 9 be furnished to the Engineer in accordance with Section 01730 and 01820. 10 The manuals shall be prepared specifically for each set of clarifiers as 11 identified above and shall include all required drawings, equipment lists, 12 descriptions, and other materials required to instruct operation and 13 maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment. 14 15 C. Each Operating and Maintenance Manual shall contain a complete set of the 16 approved shop drawings for each piece of equipment provided and all startup 17 documentation. 18 19 D. A factory representative who has complete knowledge of the proper 20 equipment operation and maintenance shall be provided for a minimum of (1) 21 day to instruct representatives of the Owner and the Engineer on proper 22 operation and maintenance of the equipment. This work may be conducted in 23 conjunction with the inspection of installation and the test run as provided 24 under PART 3 of this Specification. If there are difficulties in operation of the 25 equipment due to the manufacturer's design or fabrication, additional service 26 shall be provided at no cost to the Owner. 27 28 1.07 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS 29 30 A. Furnish the Manufacturer's recommended tools and spare parts. Furnish 31 lubricants as required for all scheduled maintenance for a period of one (1) 32 year following Substantial Completion. 33 34 B. At minimum, the following shall be provided as spare parts: 35 36 • Twelve (12) shear pins of the same rating as installed in the clarifier drive 37 (if used). 38 • Two (2) secondary gear -motor assemblies or gearbox/motor combinations, 39 as applicable. 40 • One set of main gear bearings and replaceable bearing races for each 41 drive. 42 • Four (4) chain and sprocket assemblies as applicable. 43 • Four scum doctor blades and or wiper blades 44 • Four complete sets of underwater gaskets, seals, squeegees, and 45 neoprene blades and including all mounting hardware. 46 • Primary drive oil. CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -9 10/31/14 1 • Intermediate drive oil. 2 3 C. All tools and spare parts shall be properly packed and protected for long term 4 storage and placed in suitable wood or plastic containers clearly identified in 5 indelible markings as to contents. 6 7 1.08 WARRANTY 8 9 A. Provide a minimum one (1) year equipment warranty in accordance with 10 Section 01740 of these Specifications or as required for individual pieces of 11 equipment as noted. 12 13 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 14 15 2.01 GENERAL 16 17 A. These Specifications call attention to certain features, but do not purport to 18 cover all details of construction of the equipment. They are, however, 19 intended to cover the furnishing, delivery, installation and field testing of all 20 materials, equipment and apparatus, as required. Any additional auxiliary 21 equipment necessary for the proper operation of the proposed installation not 22 mentioned in these Specifications, nor shown on the Drawings, shall be 23 furnished and installed. 24 25 B. The material covered by these Specifications is intended to be standard 26 equipment of proven ability and as manufactured by reputable concerns 27 having experience in the production of such equipment. The equipment 28 furnished shall be designed, constructed, and installed in accordance with best 29 practice and methods and shall operate satisfactorily when installed as shown 30 on the Drawings. 31 32 C. All the rotating sludge collection equipment, including the sludge collection 33 suction header, trusses, sludge manifold, influent flocculation well and center 34 cage but excluding the skimmer A- frame, and center column, bridge and drive 35 unit, shall be fabricated using fixtures or jigs, assembled in the Manufacturer's 36 shop to insure proper fitting of parts, then match - marked for erection, and 37 disassembled for shipment. The assembled components shall be 38 photographed and delivered to the Engineer for review prior to disassembly. If 39 requested, the Manufacturer shall provide 21 days notification to the Engineer 40 to schedule an on -site inspection of the assembled equipment. 41 42 D. All components supplied shall conform to the size requirements as set forth on 43 the Drawings, to the requirements included in this Specification, and to the 44 overall design parameters. 45 46 2.02 STRUCTURAL MEMBERS CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -10 10/31/14 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A. Structural steel shall conform to ASTM A36. 2 3 B. All steel parts shall have a minimum thickness of %-inch. 4 5 C. Structural support members shall be shop welded or a field bolted assembly. 6 Field welding will not be permitted on structural members. 7 8 D. All steel structural components shall be designed so that stresses developed 9 do not exceed allowable stresses, as defined by current AISC standards when 10 designed for 200% of the specified AGMA -rated torque. 11 12 E. Panel lengths and member sizes shall be selected, such that slenderness 13 ratios do not exceed 200 for compression and 240 for tension. For strength, 14 the controlling member force shall be used to determine member size. 15 16 F. Maximum deflection in a span under combined live and dead loads shall not 17 exceed L/360. 18 19 2.03 DRIVE MECHANISM 20 21 A. The drive mechanisms shall be assemblies consisting of a primary gear 22 reduction unit, an intermediate gear reduction unit, and final reduction unit with 23 a pinion and internal spur gear mounted in a cast iron or ductile iron turntable 24 base, completely factory assembled and finish painted. Fabricated steel 25 housings and exposed gearing are unacceptable and will not be considered. 26 The primary and secondary reduction units shall have horizontal shafts as 27 defined in Section 2.04 or vertical shafts as defined in Section 2.05 herein. 28 Drive design criteria shall be as listed below. 29 30 1. Minimum internal gear pitch diameter: 38 - inches 31 2. Minimum ball race diameter: 42 - inches 32 3. Maximum motor horsepower: 1/2 - HP 33 4. AGMA rated torque: 16,875 ft-Ibs 34 5. Final Output Speed: 0.04 RPM 35 6. Overturning Moment (Vertical Drives) 305,700 ft -Ibs 36 37 2.04 HORIZONTAL SHAFT DRIVES 38 39 A. Horizontal Shaft Reduction Units 40 41 1. The drive unit shall be designed and manufactured by the clarifier 42 equipment Manufacturer. 43 44 2. All gearing shall be enclosed in gray cast iron ASTM A-48 Class 40B 45 housings. 46 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -11 10/31/14 1 3. The internal primary gear shall be either a one piece or split design. 2 3 4. All gearing shall be designed in accordance with the latest AGMA 4 standards for both strength and durability, based on 24 -hour 5 continuous, uniform load duty and 20 -year design life at the specified 6 output speed. Spur gearing shall be designed in accordance with 7 AGMA Standard 2001 -D04 "Fundamental Rating Factors and 8 Calculation Methods for Involute Spur and Helical Gear Teeth ". Worm 9 gearing shall be designed in accordance with AGMA Standard 6034- 10 B92 (February 1992) "Practice for Enclosed Cylindrical Worm Gear 11 Speed Reducers and Gearmotors" with a minimum 1.25 service factor. 12 The rated torque of the drive shall be the lowest value computed for the 13 worm gear set, spur gear and pinion for strength and durability. 14 Planetary and cycloidal gearing not covered by AGMA standards shall 15 not be used in Horizontal shaft drives. 16 17 5. All bearings shall be designed for a minimum B -10 life of 200,000 hours 18 of continuous duty at the output speed specified. Design and rating of 19 all other bearings, including pinion and thrust bearings, shall be based 20 on a B -10 life of not less than 100,000 hours of continuous duty. 21 22 6. The turntable base shall have an annular raceway to contain ball 23 bearings upon which the internal gear rotates. The ball race shall 24 ensure a low unit ball load, long life and stability, without the necessity 25 of guide shoes or steady bearings. The balls shall be alloy steel and 26 shall bear vertically and horizontally on four (4) renewable, specially 27 hardened (38-42 Rockwell C) steel liner strips force fitted (pins or cap 28 screws not permitted) into the turntable base and internal gear. The 29 liner strips shall be 3/8 -inch thick x 3/4 -inch wide. The internal gear, 30 pinion and ball race shall run in an oil bath and be protected by a felt 31 seal and steel dust shield. 32 33 7. The turntable base shall be bolted to the center column and be 34 designed to support the internal gear along with the rotating mechanism 35 and the access bridge. An oil filling and level pipe, along with a drain 36 plug and sight gauge, shall be furnished as part of this unit. A pipe 37 shall be attached to the bottom of the turntable for condensate removal. 38 The oil piping shall terminate within the center of the base for easy 39 access. 40 41 8. For one -piece solid gear designs, the turntable assembly shall be so 42 designed that the one -piece internal gear, bearings, and bearing races 43 are removable when the access bridge is removed. 44 45 B. Primary Reduction Unit 46 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -12 10/31/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Provide a commercially available gear reducer or gear motor in a cast 2 housing. 3 4 2. All bearings shall be anti - friction type running in oil. 5 6 3. The motor shall be totally enclosed, ball bearing type, of ample power 7 for starting and continuously operating the drive mechanism without 8 overloading. 9 10 4. The motor shall conform to NEMA standards and be suitable for 11 operation on 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60 Hertz current. 12 13 5. A primary reduction unit shall drive the intermediate reduction unit by a 14 close- coupled drive or through a chain and sprocket arrangement with 15 #80L self - lubricating chain and stainless steel OSHA approved 16 removable chain guard. 17 18 6. Provide proper chain tension by an adjustable steel base mounted on 19 the intermediate reduction unit. The tension shall be adjusted 20 according to the Manufacturer's recommendations. 21 22 C. Intermediate Reduction Unit 23 24 1. Provide worm gear type intermediate reduction units with grease and oil 25 lubricated anti - friction type bearings in a cast or ductile iron housing 26 securely bolted on the machined top face of the final reduction casting. 27 Worm and shaft shall be a two -piece assembly for ease of 28 maintenance. 29 30 2. The unit shall be mounted on a machined face on the top of the final 31 reduction unit. Align and maintain accurate centers with the final 32 reduction gearing. Swivel base mounting of the intermediate unit are 33 not acceptable. 34 35 3. Mount an electro- mechanical overload device on the thrust end of the 36 intermediate worm pinion shaft. The overload device shall be totally 37 enclosed in a cast aluminum, cast iron, ductile iron, or stainless steel 38 housing with a NEMA 4X rating. The overload device shall be 39 adjustable and sense end thrust or torque, be integrated into the drive 40 motor control circuit, and interrupt power to the motor. 41 42 4. A visual dial -type torque indicator shall be provided and oriented so it 43 may be read from the walkway. 44 45 5. Microswitches shall be factory set to: (1) sound an alarm when the load 46 on the mechanism reaches 100% of the AGMA -rated torque rating; and CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -13 10/31/14 1 (2) deactivate the motor when the load reaches 120% of the AGMA 2 rated torque. 3 4 6. Provide a shear pin device, set for 130% of the AGMA -rated torque 5 mounted on the drive unit. 6 7 D. Final Reduction Unit 8 9 1. Provide internal, full depth involute tooth design, ductile iron spur gear 10 driven by a heat treated steel pinion from the slow speed shaft of the 11 intermediate reduction unit. 12 13 2. Provide bearings at top and bottom of pinion to ensure complete tooth 14 contact between mating surfaces. Pinion and pinion shaft shall be 15 furnished as a one -piece or two -piece assembly. 16 17 3. Provide cast or ductile iron turntable base with annular raceway to 18 contain balls upon which the internal gear rotates. The ball race shall 19 ensure low unit ball load, long life and stability without the use of 20 submerged guide shoes, bumpers or steady bearings. 21 22 4. Provide an internal gear of either a one -piece or split design such that 23 the gear is replaceable when the access bridge is removed. For two - 24 piece (split) gear designs the bearings and bearing races shall be 25 replaceable without removing the bridge. 26 27 5. Internal gear, pinion and balls to run in an oil bath and be protected by 28 a felt seal and vertical steel dust shield. 29 30 6. Provide oil filling and level pipe along with a drain plug and sight gauge. 31 32 7. Turntable base shall be bolted to the center column and be designed to 33 support the bridge, internal gear and rotating mechanisrn. 34 35 8. The internal final gear shall be driven by a heat - treated steel pinion 36 from the slow speed shaft of the intermediate gear reduction unit. The 37 internal gear shall be of ductile iron and shall be designed to support 38 the center cage and sludge collector assembly. 39 40 2.05 VERTICAL SHAFT DRIVES 41 42 A. Vertical Shaft Reduction Units 43 44 1. The drive unit shall be designed and manufactured by the clarifier 45 equipment Manufacturer to ensure unit responsibility. The drive unit CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -14 10/31/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 shall be designed for the torque value and shall turn the mechanism at 2 the speed specified in Section 2.03. 3 4 2. The main bearing shall be designed for the total rotating mechanism 5 loads with a minimum L -10 life of 876,000 hours. The drive unit shall 6 be capable of producing and withstanding the peak momentary torque 7 while starting. 8 9 3. The drive main gear shall be designed to a minimum AGMA 6 rating 10 when rated in accordance with the latest AGMA standard. Gear teeth 11 shall be designed for proper load distribution and sharing. The main 12 bearing shall be capable of withstanding the overturning moment 13 without the aid of any underwater guides or bearings to ensure correct 14 tooth contact for AGMA rating of the main gear. 15 16 4. All spur gearing shall be designed to the latest AGMA spur gear 17 standard for strength and surface durability, based on a life of B -10 18 200,000 hours, continuous duty at the specified output speed. The 19 design running torque rating of the drive gearing shall be based on the 20 smaller of the strength and durability values determined from the above 21 AGMA standard. 22 23 5. All components of the drive shall be direct coupled. 24 25 B. Physical Characteristics 26 27 1. The drive unit shall consist of a solid internal main spur gear, bearing 28 turntable, pinion, secondary speed reducer, support base, and drive 29 unit bearing. 30 31 2. The drive shall be mounted on the center column and support the entire 32 rotating load of the mechanism. 33 34 35 36 37 38 4. The drive housing shall be cast iron or ductile iron. Lubricant and dust 39 shields shall be provided. 40 41 42 43 44 45 6. The drive shall be designed so that the balls and nylon spacers can be 46 3. The main internal gear shall be forged of alloy hardened steel. The pinion shall be heat treated alloy steel. All speed reducers shall be fully enclosed and running in grease. 5. The drive bearing shall include a forged steel precision gear /bearing set, with fully contoured raceways hardened to a minimum 58 -60 Rc and protected by a neoprene seal. replaced without removing the access walkway. CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -15 10/31/14 1 7 The gear housing shall be designed so that the main bearing and gear 2 teeth are 100% submerged in oil. It shall have an annular cavity for oil 3 and condensate storage. Any condensate that collects shall flow 180 4 degrees away from the lower pinion bearing. The oil bath shall be 5 enclosed and protected by a neoprene dust shield. A two inch diameter 6 "Bulls Eye" type oil sight glass, oil fill pipe, and drain line shall be 7 provided for the reservoir. 8 9 C. Overload Protection 10 11 1. An overload device shall be provided in a stainless steel, weatherproof 12 enclosure. The device shall be actuated by torque generated from the 13 main drive, which shall operate two independently adjustable, factory 14 calibrated overload switches. The alarm switch shall be set at 100 15 percent of running torque and the motor cutout switch shall be set at 16 120 percent of the running torque. 17 18 2. A visual torque indicator shall be provided and oriented so that it can be 19 read from the walkway. It shall be calibrated from 0 to 160 percent of 20 design AGMA torque rating. 21 22 D. Turntable 23 24 1. The turntable base shall be cast iron or ductile iron and have an annular 25 bearing raceway upon which the rotating assembly rests. It shall have 26 a maximum allowable deflection in accordance with the bearing 27 specifications. The allowable modulus of elasticity shall be a minimum 28 of 29 x 106 psi. 29 30 2. The center cage shall be fastened to and supported from the gear 31 casing. 32 33 3. Ball bearings shall be of high carbon chrome alloy 52100 steel running 34 in fully contoured races, as part of a precision gear /bearing set. The 35 balls shall be grease lubricated and protected by elastorner seals. 36 37 E. Speed Reducing Unit: 38 39 1. The speed reducing unit shall consist of cycloidal, helical, or planetary 40 speed reducers directly connected to a motor without the use of chains 41 or v- belts, and shall be keyed to the pinion. 42 43 2. The main ring gear of cycloidal drives shall be made of high carbon 44 chromium bearing steel and be fixed to the drive casing. An eccentric 45 bearing on the high speed shaft shall roll cycloidal discs of the same 46 material around the internal circumference of this main ring gear. The CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -16 10/31/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 lobes of the cycloid disc shall engage successively with pins in the fixed 2 ring gear. The movement of the cycloid discs shall be transmitted then 3 by pins to the low speed shaft. 4 5 3. The speed reducer efficiency shall be a minimum of 90% per reduction 6 stage. 7 8 4. The speed reducer helical or planetary gearing shall be manufactured 9 to AGMA standards and shall provide at least 95% power transmission 10 efficiency per stage. The speed reducer shall have a minimum service 11 factor of 1.25 based on the output torque rating of the drive. 12 13 5. The reducers shall be fitted with radial and thrust bearings of proper 14 size for all mechanism loads and be grease lubricated. 15 16 6. The speed reducer shall be reversible to release any stored energy as 17 the result of an over torque condition. 18 19 2.06 CENTER COLUMN 20 21 A. The center column shall be a cylindrical steel pipe and shall support the drive, 22 one end of the access bridge, and all rotating components. The center column 23 shall also provide a pathway for flow to enter the clarifier. 24 25 B. The top of the center column shall accept the drive unit. The center column 26 shall be set plumb, and shall be at the center of the diameter of the clarifier 27 structure. 28 29 C. The center column shall be fabricated of 1/4 -inch thick (minimum) steel plate 30 and shall be anchored to the concrete base with a minimum of eight (8) 1 -inch 31 diameter anchor bolts. The center pier base plate shall be drilled to allow the 32 installation of new drill -in anchors so located that the bridge maintains its 33 current alignment. The center column shall be hot dip galvanized after 34 fabrication. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. 35 36 D. The Manufacturer shall provide a steel template to accurately locate the 37 anchor bolts. 38 39 E. The center column shall serve as an influent pipe and shall have a minimum of 40 three (3) overflow areas at its upper end to diffuse flow into the influent well. 41 The combined total of the three areas shall be a minimum of 175% of the 42 center column cross sectional area. The diameter of the new center column 43 shall be 30 inches. 44 45 2.07 INFLUENT FLOCCULATION WELL 46 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -17 10/31/14 1 A. The influent flocculation well shall be fabricated of 3/16 -inch thick (minimum) 2 steel plate sections with bolted connections and 1/4 -inch thick (minimum) 3 structural steel trim angles top and bottom for shape and rigidity. The influent 4 well shall be supported from the drive cage. 5 6 B. The new influent flocculation well shall be 14' -9" diameter by 6' -0" deep for all 7 the 75 -foot diameter clarifiers and a minimum of 19' -9" diameter by 6' deep for 8 all the 100 -foot diameter clarifiers. 9 10 C. The influent flocculation well and all supports shall be hot dip galvanized after 11 fabrication. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. 12 13 D. The influent flocculation wells shall be of adequate size to diffuse the flow into 14 the tank at a uniform flow through velocity. Ports shall be cut into the influent 15 well to permit the escape of entrapped scum. The ports shall have adjustable 16 sized openings and contain baffles to prevent short circuiting to the effluent 17 weir. 18 19 2.08 INFLUENT ENERGY DISSIPATION SYSTEM 20 21 A. An energy dispersion system shall be located between the center column and 22 the influent flocculation well. The energy dispersion system shall be designed 23 to dissipate energy from the incoming flow by discharging the flow through 24 nozzles or ports in a counter clockwise, tangential direction or by decreasing 25 the velocity of the stream and forcing the influent to change direction multiple 26 times between the center column and the influent feed well. 27 28 B. The energy dissipation system shall promote effective mixing and tapered 29 flocculation within the influent well. 30 31 C. The energy dissipation system shall be fabricated from a minimum 3/16 -inch 32 thick steel plate. The system shall be supported from the drive cage and 33 influent well support beams. 34 35 D. The energy dissipation system and supports shall be hot dip galvanized after 36 fabrication. All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. 37 38 E. The Manufacturer shall provide hydraulic calculations showing dimensional 39 characteristics, port area, velocity, headloss, and mixing intenslity. 40 41 2.09 SLUDGE COLLECTION SUCTION HEADER 42 43 A. The sludge collector mechanism shall utilize a center drive mounted on a 44 stationary center support pier. A welded structural steel cage attached to the 45 drive shall support and rotate a single sludge suction header device. 46 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -18 10/31/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. The sludge suction header shall be located parallel to the tank bottom and 2 shall have a series of inlet orifices arranged such that in a single revolution of 3 the header the entire tank bottom is swept clean. The header shall 4 continuously remove settled sludge proportionally, resulting in a uniform 5 withdrawal over the entire radius of the tank. The header shall be hydraulically 6 designed to remove larger volumes of sludge at greater distances from the 7 tank center. 8 9 C. The mechanism shall collect the sludge from the tank bottom and carry it 10 through the suction header to the center outlet, the removal being 11 accomplished by hydrostatic pressure. Design movement through the header 12 shall be at a near - constant velocity. 13 14 D. The sludge suction header shall be fabricated of 1/4 -inch (minimum) thick 15 steel plate and hot -dip galvanized after fabrication. Header cross section shall 16 be rectangular in shape and shall taper in size from a maximum near the tank 17 center to a minimum at the outer end, to provide uniform sludge draw -off 18 velocities throughout. 19 20 E. The longitudinal cross - sectional axis of the headers shall be mounted at an 21 angle of 45° with the tank bottom to physically trap sludge for maximum solids 22 concentration. 23 24 F. A 2 -inch flexible neoprene squeegee fluidizing blade shall be installed as an 25 integral part of the header to direct the sludge into the area of influence of the 26 orifices with minimum sludge agitation. The squeegee shall have slotted holes 27 providing 1 -inch vertical adjustment. 28 29 G. At the inner end of each header, a flange shall be provided for bolting to the 30 center manifold. The header shall have a center scraper of % -inch steel plate 31 with a neoprene blade to clean the tank bottom around the manifold directing 32 the sludge to the first orifice. 33 34 H. At regular intervals, not to exceed 30- inches, the Manufacturer shall size and 35 space inlet orifices varying in size from a minimum diameter near the tank 36 center to a maximum at the outer end. 37 38 I. The design of each orifice shall be proportionate to the volume of sludge 39 withdrawn and the design of the orifices and header shall be such as to insure 40 hydraulic balance in the tank and uniform sludge withdrawal from the entire 41 tank bottom at all flows. 42 43 J. The suction header shall be fitted with a flange and bolted to a mating flange 44 on the center manifold. The suction header shall be supported from the center 45 cage and by one of the truss arms. The entire suction header assembly shall 46 be vertically adjustable using jack - bolts, steel tie -bars, or turnbuckles. CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -19 10/31/14 1 2 K. The center manifold shall be located at the base of the center column and 3 rotate around the stationary center column. The center manifold shall be 4 supported by the steel cage, connected to the suction header, form a ring 5 around the center column, receive sludge from the suction header and deliver 6 sludge to the sludge outlet pipe located in the floor of the clarifier. 7 8 L. The center manifold shall be fitted with two sealing rings and two seals 9 designed to ensure only sludge from the suction header enters the center 10 manifold. A bottom seal plate shall be securely anchored to the concrete floor 11 and grouted in place after proper alignment. The manifold to shall include an 12 adequately sized removable access panel to allow inspection and adjustment 13 of the center column and seal plate anchor bolts. 14 15 M. Two rotating truss arms located 180 degrees apart shall be provided and fitted 16 to support the two rotating skimmer assemblies. One of the truss arms shall 17 also support the suction header. 18 19 N. The truss arms shall be constructed of '/4 -inch minimum thickness members 20 pinned at the base and connected to the center cage through adjustable steel 21 tie -bars or turnbuckles. 22 23 O. Steel plate counterweights, not exceeding 50- pounds each, shall be installed 24 as necessary on the truss arm providing balance for the entire rotating 25 assembly. 26 27 P. The existing concrete floor, the influent piping, the drain piping, and the drain 28 sump shall be modified as necessary by the Contractor to accommodate the 29 equipment provided. 30 31 Q. If so equipped, the existing clarifier drain piping and drain sump shall be 32 modified or relocated as necessary and shall remain fully functional. 33 34 R. No field welding will be permitted on equipment supplied by the Manufacturer 35 except for spot welds to lock in the skimmer supports or as approved by the 36 Engineer. Field welding may be required to modify the sludge and influent 37 pipes below the level of the existing floor as required. 38 39 2.10 CENTER CAGE 40 41 A. Each new center cage shall be of an all- welded construction made up of 42 structural steel members having a minimum thickness of 14 -inch. The center 43 cage shall be hung under the drive, rotate continuously, and support all 44 rotating equipment. 45 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -20 10/31/14 1 B. All center cages shall be welded structural angle steel construction and shall 2 be provided by the clarifier manufacturer. 3 4 C. The entire center cage assembly shall be hot dip galvanized after fabrication. 5 All fasteners shall be 316 stainless steel. 6 7 2.11 ACCESS BRIDGES and PLATFORMS 8 9 A. All bridges shall be welded structural steel access bridges of wide flange beam 10 construction and shall be provided by the Manufacturer. 11 12 B. The access bridge shall extend from the tank wall to the center column with a 13 platform extension provided for 360 degree access around the drive. 14 Aluminum grating and dielectric gaskets shall be used on the access bridge(s) 15 and platform. 16 17 C. All ferrous components of the bridge shall be hot dip galvanized after 18 fabrication. All fasteners shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 19 20 D. The bridge shall be designed to support, in addition to the dead load, a live 21 load of 50 pounds per square foot (psf), with a deflection not exceeding 1/360 22 of the span. 23 24 E. The platform shall be a minimum 9 -foot x 8 -foot rectangular extension from the 25 access bridge to provide working clearance around the drive. 26 27 F. A two -rail handrail systems consisting of not less than 1 -1/2 -inch diameter, 28 Schedule 40 aluminum pipe for the rails and vertical posts, and a 3/16 -inch 29 thick x 4 -inch high aluminum toe plate, shall be furnished for both sides of the 30 access bridge(s), platform. Handrails shall meet the requirements of Section 31 05500. 32 33 G. At the Northeast and East Plants the Contractor shall furnish and install a new 34 sludge blanket level detection system as shown on the drawings. . The 35 existing probe mounting brackets, probes, cable, and instrument are to be 36 removed and replaced with new mounting brackets, new probes, new cable, a 37 new instrument, and new conduit and hardware as specified. The new system 38 shall be re- connected to the existing plant SCADA system as shown on the 39 Drawings and specified elsewhere. 40 41 H. The access bridge shall connect to new aluminum stairways at the perimeter 42 of the clarifier structure. 43 44 2.12 SCUM REMOVAL EQUIPMENT 45 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -21 10/31/14 1 1 A. A "full radius" surface skimmer, consisting of a scum blade, hinged skimmer, 2 scum trough, and scum beach shall be provided. All scum removal equipment 3 shall be fabricated of 304 stainless steel. The scum beach plate and trough 4 supports shall also be constructed of 304 stainless steel. All springs, pivot 5 points, threaded fasteners, and anchors shall be 316 stainless steel. 6 7 B. Scum removal equipment shall be installed on each clarifier as generally 8 described below: 9 10 1. Northeast Plant Clarifiers 1 thru 4 shall be equipped with dual scum 11 skimmers and a single 4 -foot scum beach, submerged shelf, and trough 12 assembly similar to the existing configuration. 13 14 2. Northeast Plant Clarifiers 5 thru 8 shall be equipped with dual scum 15 skimmers and a single 4 -foot scum beach, submerged shelf, and trough 16 assembly similar to the existing configuration. 17 18 3. Marshall Street Clarifiers 1 thru 4 shall be equipped with dual scum 19 skimmers and a single 4 -foot scum beach, submerged shelf, and trough 20 assembly similar to the existing configuration. 21 22 4. The East Plant shall be equipped with a single scum skimmer and a 23 single 6 -foot scum beach, submerged shelf, and trough assembly. The 24 single skimmer is similar to the existing configuration while the 6 -foot 25 beach and trough assembly is an upsize from the existing. 26 27 C. Scum Blade, Skimmer, And Hinged Wiper Assembly 28 29 1. The scum blade shall extend from the influent feed baffle to the scum 30 baffle and shall be supported from below by a rotating sludge scraper or 31 sludge suction header arm. 32 33 2. The skimmer assembly shall be mounted on the outer end of the scum 34 blade to form a pocket for trapping the scum. The skimmer assembly 35 shall ensure continual contact and proper alignment between the 36 hinged wiper, the scum baffle, and the scum beach plate and trough 37 assembly. Skimmer designs that use the rubber squeegees to operate 38 the hinged wiper component are not acceptable. 39 40 3. The hinged wiper shall have a wearing strip on its outer end, which 41 contacts the scum baffle and a neoprene strip on its lower and inner 42 edge. The scum shall be trapped as the wiper meets the scum beach 43 plate ramp and is raised up the ramp and discharged into the scum 44 trough. 45 46 4. Skimmers that rely on support from the scum baffle are not acceptable. CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -22 10/31/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D. Scum Beach Plate and Scum Trough 2 3 1. The scum beach plate and trough assembly shall be supported with 4 304 stainless steel structural elements attached to the wall. 5 6 2. The scum trough and beach plate shall be fabricated of 1/4 -inch thick 7 304 stainless steel plate, adequately supported from the tank wall. The 8 scum trough width shall be as specified in 2.12 B. All scum beach plate 9 and trough assemblies shall be designed to integrate with the scum 10 baffle and consist of a beach plate, inner radius baffle, 6 -inch discharge 11 pipe and flushing device. 12 13 3. The inner edge of the scum trough shall be furnished with a 4 -foot long 14 x 16 -inch deep stainless steel baffle plate extension to entrap additional 15 scum. 16 17 4. The beach plate shall slope at a nominal incline of 1 -3/4 -inch per foot to 18 a point approximately 5- inches below the maximum water surface 19 elevation. The submerged trough shall continue on a horizontal run for 20 an additional 4 -feet along the scum baffle. An inner radius baffle 21 extending 9- inches below and 3- inches above the maximum water level 22 shall run from the trough to the end of the submerged shelf. 23 24 5. A 6 -inch standard pipe flange shall be provided for connection to the 25 scum discharge piping. 26 27 E. Scum Pipes and Wall Penetrations 28 29 1. New scum pipes shall be installed to convey scum out of the scum 30 trough and out of the clarifier through the existing opening as shown on 31 the Drawings. New scum pipes shall be installed on all clarifiers except 32 at the East Plant. At the East Plant the existing scum pipes shall be 33 modified as required and be connected to the new scum troughs on 34 both clarifiers. 35 36 2. All new scum pipes shall be schedule 80 PVC of the same size as the 37 existing scum pipes but not smaller than 6 -inch. A flanged connection 38 shall be made at the scum troughs. 39 40 3. The new scum pipes shall extend through the wall and connect to the 41 existing scum pipes at the first pipe joint outside the clarifier wall using 42 the correct adapters and fittings. 43 44 4. New gaskets, new Link - Seals, new hardware, and all necessary fittings 45 or provisions associated with the actual wall penetrations shall be 46 furnished and installed on all clarifiers except at the East Plant. CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -23 10/31/14 1 2 2.13 HARDWARE 3 4 A. All equipment fasteners, bolts, drill -in anchors, and associated hardware shall 5 be 316 stainless steel, furnished in accordance with the Manufacturer's 6 recommendations and of ample size and strength for the purpose intended. 7 8 B. All equipment drill -in anchors and attachment bolts shall be set by the 9 Contractor in accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions and shall be of 10 316 stainless steel construction. 11 12 2.14 COATINGS 13 14 A. All carbon steel components of the clarifier mechanisms shall be hot dip 15 galvanized after fabrication. 16 17 2.15 ELECTRICAL CONTROL AND POWER 18 19 A. Electrical control and power for each clarifier shall be installed as shown on 20 the electrical drawings and specified in Division 16. 21 22 2.16 MOTORS 23 24 A. Motors shall meet the requirements of the electrical specifications and shall be 25 suitable for the type of service specified herein with a 1.15 service factor. 26 27 PART 3 — EXECUTION 28 29 3.01 MANUFACTURER'S SERVICES 30 31 A. In accordance with Specification 01820, the Contractor shall provide the 32 services of the Manufacturer's field service representative for a period of not 33 less one (1) eight -hour day to provide Owner training. 34 35 B. Prior to placing the clarifier in service for testing, the Contractor shall provide 36 the services of the Manufacturer's field service representative to ensure proper 37 assembly and in accordance with Specification 01625 as needed in order to 38 inspect the installed equipment, supervise testing, and supervise unit start up. 39 The Manufacturer's services shall be provided to verify proper mechanical 40 installation, adjust alarm and shut off switch settings, and to perform torque 41 tests. 42 43 C. Prior to placing the clarifier in service for testing, a written report of the 44 Manufacturer's field service representative's findings shall be submitted to the 45 Engineer covering all inspections and outlining in detail any deficiencies noted. 46 This report shall be included in the O &M Manual. CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -24 10/31/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 D. Prior to placing the clarifier in service for testing, the Manufacturer, through the 3 Contractor, shall provide an executed Certificate of Proper Installation to the 4 Engineer that all equipment has been installed in accordance with the 5 Manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and is ready to be placed in 6 service. 7 8 3.02 DEWATERING, DEMOLITION, AND MODIFICATIONS 9 10 A. The Contractor shall be solely responsible for designing, permitting, furnishing, 11 installing and operating a dewatering system as needed to protect the existing 12 clarifiers against flotation. The Northeast Plant clarifiers Nos. 1-4 are not 13 equipped with dewatering /hydrostatic pressure relief valves in the floor or wall 14 of the clarifier. All other clarifiers are equipped with hydrostatic pressure relief 15 valves, which may or may not be functional or capable of adequately 16 dewatering and protecting the clarifiers against hydrostatic uplift and floating. 17 Although the Work of this project includes the installation of new hydrostatic 18 pressure relief valves in all of the clarifiers, the Contractor shall be responsible 19 for installing piezometers, monitoring groundwater levels and providing and 20 operating such dewatering equipment as needed to protect the clarifiers from 21 flotation. The Contractor shall repair any damage to any clarifier and piping 22 caused by flotation, to the Engineer's satisfaction and at no cost to the Owner. 23 24 B. Equipment and hardware shall be designed and manufactured to replace or 25 upgrade the existing equipment being removed /demolished. Installation shall 26 require no modifications to the existing concrete structure with the exception of 27 influent piping and sludge piping floor penetrations area and the drain line 28 sump area in the floor of the Northeast WRF Clarifiers 1 thru 4. Otherwise all 29 equipment shall be "bolt in ". Unless otherwise stated, all equipment supplied 30 in this section shall be stainless steel or galvanized steel and all fasteners and 31 associated hardware shall be Type 316 stainless steel. 32 33 3.03 INSTALLATION 34 35 A. Installation shall be in strict accordance with the Manufacturer's instructions 36 and accurately aligned in orientation with related equipment in order to insure 37 proper operation. 38 39 B. Installation shall include furnishing the required oil and grease for initial 40 operation. The grades of oil and grease shall be in accordance with the 41 Manufacturer's recommendations. 42 43 C. Drill -in anchor bolts shall be furnished by the Manufacturer and installed by the 44 Contractor in accordance with the Manufacturer's templates and 45 recommendations. 46 CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -25 10/31/14 1 D. Each component shall be prefabricated in the factory of the manufacturer and 2 shall be shipped in assemblies complete and operable as detailed on the 3 Drawings and specified herein. Each component assembly shall be erected in 4 the field in accordance with the Manufacturer's installation drawings. 5 6 E. The Contractor shall install all equipment and supply all necessary temporary 7 construction equipment, power and labor in accordance with the General 8 Requirements and in accordance with the Manufacturer's recommendations to 9 provide a complete and satisfactory installation. 10 11 F. The Contractor shall plumb, adjust for true plane of rotation, grout beneath the 12 center column, grout beneath the center sludge collection assembly, grout 13 beneath the manifold seal plate, and grout beneath the bridge as required by 14 the Manufacturer. 15 16 G. Any field welding shall have weld spatter and burrs removed by chipping and 17 grinding to prevent operator injury and shall be coated in accordance with 18 Specifications 09865 and 09900. Any accessories mounted on or attached to 19 the exterior of the tank and supplied by the Manufacturer will) be considered 20 part of the Manufacturer's erection responsibility. 21 22 3.04 PAINTING 23 24 A. All areas where the factory applied galvanizing has been compromised shall 25 be coated with bituminous epoxy as specified in Section 09865 and Section 26 09900. 27 28 3.05 INSPECTION AND TESTING 29 30 A. The rotating mechanism of each unit shall be field tested, after erection, and in 31 the presence of the Engineer to confirm and verify the structural, mechanical, 32 and electrical integrity of the equipment. Each unit shall be loaded to 100% 33 and 120% of the design torque specified. This field test shall include checking 34 the operation of all alarm and drive shutdown electrical and electro- mechanical 35 equipment, as well as the SCADA functionality of all new and reconnected 36 equipment. 37 38 B. Testing shall be accomplished with the mechanism in operation and under its 39 own power. Loads shall be applied to the arms by tensioning cables attached 40 to the arms and the floor or wall. 41 42 1. Test by anchoring each of the lower arms of each rotating mechanism 43 to the floor or wall. 44 45 2. Demonstrate proper operation of high torque alarm, power cut -off and 46 shear pin break points for each clarifier under its own power. CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -26 10/31/14 3. Repeat test to verify results C. All labor, materials and test apparatus necessary for conducting the above tests shall be furnished by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner. END OF SECTION CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -27 10/31/14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CLARIFIER REHABILITATION 11225 -28 10/31/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 11310 2 3 RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 - DESCRIPTION 8 9 A. This specification covers non -clog, end suction, back pullout centrifugal pumps 10 designed specifically for return activated sludge (RAS) in municipal 11 wastewater treatment plants. 12 13 B. The RAS pumps shall serve to replace both existing RAS pumps in the South 14 RAS building. The replacement pumps shall be identical to the pumps in the 15 north RAS building except for the impellers and the motor HP. 16 17 C. The Contractor shall be responsible for any modifications to the existing 18 concrete maintenance pad, the existing pump suction piping, and the pump 19 discharge piping that may be needed to accommodate the new RAS pumps. 20 All such modifications shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. The 21 centerline dimensions and elevations of the existing pump suction and 22 discharge piping, including the eccentric reducers, shall not be modified. 23 24 1.02 - RELATED WORK SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE 25 26 A. Painting 27 28 B. Basic Mechanical Requirements 29 30 1.03 - QUALITY ASSURANCE 31 32 A. Pumps shall be in accordance with applicable Hydraulic Institute Standards. 33 34 B. Motors shall be in accordance with NEMA Standards. 35 36 C. Should equipment that differs from the specified requirements be offered and 37 determined to be equal to that specified, such equipment shall be acceptable 38 only on the basis that any revisions in the layout and construction of the 39 structures, piping and appurtenant equipment, electrical work, etc., required to 40 accommodate such a substitution shall be made at no additional cost to the 41 City and be as approved by the Engineer 42 43 1.04 - SUBMITTALS 44 45 A. Pump submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 and 01340. 46 RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -1 10/03/14 1 B. Submit dimensional drawings for approval showing weights and materials of 2 construction by ASTM reference and grade. Show pump surface preparation 3 and coatings. 4 5 C. Submit pump performance curves for approval showing the specified 6 operating points, including the pump head, efficiency, brake horsepower and 7 NPSH required at full speed; the impeller diameter and pump sphere size 8 capability; the reduced speed head, efficiency and brake horsepower curves 9 for all specified reduced speed operating points and speeds with a minimum of 10 two additional speeds (85 and 70% if not otherwise specified) in addition to the 11 full speed curve. 12 13 D. Submit motor data for approval including manufacturer, model or type, and 14 dimensional drawing. Show horsepower, service factor, full load speed, 15 NEMA design, frame size, weight, enclosure, winding insulation class and 16 treatment, rated ambient temperature, voltage, phase, frequency, full load 17 current and locked rotor current. Also show the guaranteed efficiency and 18 power factor at full, 3/4, and 1/2 loads. Provide a statement from the pump 19 manufacturer that the motors are compatible with the proposed VFDs. 20 21 E. Submit manufacturer's certified pump performance curve and dynamic 22 balance certificates for approval prior to shipment. 23 24 F. Submit manufacturer's short commercial motor test data prior to shipment. 25 26 G. Submit Operation and Maintenance manuals and Training manuals in 27 accordance with Section 01730 and Section 01820, respectively for approval 28 prior to shipment. These manuals shall include all of the approved and 29 corrected submittal data, installation, operation and maintenance requirements 30 and test data on all equipment furnished by the pump supplier. If test data has 31 not been completed at the time these manuals are prepared, this test data 32 may be furnished later. 33 34 H. In the event that it is impossible to conform to certain details of this Section 35 due to different manufacturing techniques, describe completely all 36 nonconforming aspects. 37 38 1.06 WARRANTY 39 40 B. Provide the Manufacturer's one (1) year equipment warranty in accordance 41 with Section 01740 of these Specifications. 42 43 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 44 45 2.01 - GENERAL 46 RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -2 10/03/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 A. All equipment for the pumps, including motors and bases, shall be furnished as a complete unit by the pump supplier. The Pump Data Sheet included at the end of this section shows the minimum pump requirements. B. The pumps and motors shall be rated for continuous duty and shall be capable of pumping the specified flow range without cavitation or excessive vibration. The pumps and drives shall not infringe upon the motor service factor at any point on the pump full speed curve. C. The amplitude of vibration shall not exceed the limits set forth in the latest edition of the Hydraulic Institute Standards. D. Corrosion resistant nameplates with the name of the manufacturer and the serial number shall be attached to each pump E. Corrosion resistant nameplates with the name of the manufacturer, serial number, horsepower, speed, voltage and amperes shall be attached to each motor. F. The pumping equipment shall be Xylem A -C Series 12x12x15 NSY, or approved equal, meeting the design requirements herein. 2.02 MATERIALS Part: Casing Suction Cover Suction Cover Wear Plate Impeller Impeller Nut & Set Screw Impeller Wear Ring Stuffing Box Bearing Frame Shaft Shaft Sleeve Base 2.03 PUMP CONSTRUCTION Material: Cast Iron Cast Iron Stainless Cast Iron Stainless Stainless Cast Iron Cast Iron Steel Stainless Stainless Designation: ASTM A48, Class 30 ASTM A48, Class 30 AISI 410 SS 2 -3% Nickel Cast Iron 18 -8 SS AISI 410 SS ASTM A48, Class 30 ASTM A48, Class 30 AISI 4140 316 SS ASTM A36 A. Casing - The pump casing shall be of sufficient strength, weight and metal thickness to insure long life, accurate alignment and reliable operation. The volute shall have smooth fluid passages large enough at all points to pass any size solid which can pass through the impeller and provide smooth, unobstructed flow. A large clean out opening with removable cover, having its interior surfaces match the volute contour, shall be located on the casing at RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -3 10/03/14 1 1 1 the impeller centerline to allow access to the interior of the impeller. The 2 casing shall be split perpendicular to the shaft with removable suction cover 3 and stuffing box cover. Machined fits for these parts shall be accurately 4 aligned and identical so that the casing may be installed for either clockwise or 5 counterclockwise direction of rotation. The casing shall be arranged so that 6 the impeller may be removed without disturbing either suction or discharge 7 piping. The discharge flange shall be ANSI 125# flat face. All flange bolt 8 holes shall be slotted for ease of assembly and disassembly. The discharge 9 flange shall be drilled and tapped for a gauge connection. 10 I 11 B. Suction Cover - The suction cover shall be removable to allow for access to 12 the impeller. The suction flange shall be 125# flat face with slotted bolt holes, 13 and shall be drilled and tapped for a gauge connection. 14 15 C. Suction Cover Wear Plate - A suction cover wear plate shall be furnished. It 16 shall provide1/4-inch minimum wear and shall be installed with its wear surface 17 parallel to the end of the impeller inlet. II 18 19 D. Impeller - The impeller shall be of the enclosed type and shall be keyed and 20 secured to the shaft by a lock nut and set screw. The impeller shall have a 1 21 tapered bore. It shall be readily removable without the use of special tools. 22 The impeller clearance adjustment shall be made through the use of shims 23 placed between the frame and the outboard bearing housing. Pump impellers 24 operating at 1200 RPM or greater or with a maximum diameter of greater than 25 12.5 inches shall be dynamically balanced. 26 27 E. Impeller Wear Ring - A replaceable "L" shaped wear ring shall be mounted on 28 the impeller to provide a renewable surface opposite the suction cover wear 29 plate. 30 31 F. Stuffing Box - The stuffing box cover shall be made with an integral stuffing 32 box and shall be designed to accept either packing or a mechanical seal. 33 Drilled and tapped sealing liquid connection and drain ports shall be provided. 34 35 1. The pumps shall be supplied with John Crane Type 3740 split 36 mechanical seal. 37 38 G. Bearing Frame - The pump bearing frame shall be a one piece rigid frame with 39 a cast iron bearing housing mounted at the outboard end and a cast iron end 40 cover mounted at the inboard end. Both ends of the frame shall be provided 41 with lip type grease seals and labyrinth type deflectors to prevent the entrance 42 of contaminants. The frame shall be provided with a 3h-inch tapped hole, 43 located as low as possible, to drain the leakage from the packing gland. 44 1 45 1. Pump bearings shall be designed for a minimum 50,000 hours life at 46 the worst -case design point specified. Inboard bearings shall be the RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -4 10/03/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 radial type and outboard bearings shall be the radial and axial type 2 suitable for thrust loads in two directions. Bearings shall be grease 3 lubricated with provisions for the addition and relief of grease. The 4 outboard bearing shall be locked to the shaft with a nut and lockwasher. 5 The lockwasher shall have a key seat tab on its inside diameter to 6 prevent it from turning and a set of tabs on its outside diameter, one of 7 which will align with a notch in the nut, to prevent it from turning. 8 9 H. Shaft - The pump shall be fully and accurately machined, tapered at the 10 impeller end and of sufficient size to transmit the full driver output. 11 12 I. Shaft Sleeve - A renewable 316 SS shaft sleeve shall be provided that 13 extends through the stuffing box and under the gland. An 0-ring seal shall be 14 provided between the sleeve and shaft. 15 16 J. Couplings - The pump shall utilize the manufacturer's standard flexible 17 coupling. Coupling halves shall be secured to the driver and driven shafts by 18 a set screw located over the key. Coupling guards shall be the expanded 19 metal type and shall meet OSHA standards. 20 21 K. Hardware - All machine bolts, nuts and cap screws shall be of the hex head 22 type. Hardware or parts requiring special tools shall not be used. 23 24 L. Cleanout Handhole - The pumps be provided with a separate cast iron 25 cleanout handhole. The handhole shall have a removable cast iron cover. 26 The handhole shall have a minimum diameter of 4 inches and shall have its 27 inner surface match the contour of the pump. The pumps shall have a drip rim 28 baseplate with a tapped hole at one end for draining. 29 30 2.04 TOOLS AND SPARE PARTS 31 32 A. Furnish the Manufacturer's recommended spare parts for each pump. Furnish 33 lubricants as required for all scheduled maintenance for a period of one (1) 34 year following Substantial Completion. 35 36 B. Furnish one set of all special tools required for normal operation and 37 maintenance. 38 39 C. The following spare parts shall be provided, at a minimum: 40 41 1. One mechanical seal for each pump. 42 2. One set of gaskets for each pump. 43 3. One Impeller Wear Ring for each pump 44 45 2.05 MOTORS 46 RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -5 10/03/14 1 1 1 A. Pump motors shall be in accordance with Section 16481. The motors shall be 2 3 phase, 60 hertz and 460 volts and shall be sized so that the service factor is 3 not infringed upon throughout the full speed performance curve of the pumps. 4 At minimum, motors shall have Class B insulation and a 1.15 service factor. 5 Motors shall have re- greaseable or oil lube bearings. Variable speed motors 6 shall be rated for inverter duty per NEMA MG -1, Part 31. 7 I 8 B. The motors shall be driven by variable frequency drives. 9 10 2.06 FACTORY TESTS 11 12 A. Each motor shall be given a non - witnessed short commercial test to determine 13 that the motor is free from electrical and mechanical defects and to provide 14 assurance that it meets the specifications. Testing shall be in accordance with 15 NEMA standards and shall consist of no Toad current, locked rotor current, 16 winding resistance, high potential and bearing inspection. 17 18 B. Each pumping unit, with a calibrated factory test motor, shall be given a 19 factory performance test to provide assurance that the unit meets the 20 specifications. Tests shall be performed in accordance with Hydraulic Institute 1 21 Standards. Variable speed pumps shall be tested at full speed and all 22 specified reduced speeds with a minimum of two reduced speeds. Copies of 23 the test reports shall be provided to the Engineer. 24 25 2.07 FACTORY PAINTING 26 I 27 A. The pumps shall be cleaned and blasted to SSPC -SP10 and shall be given 28 one coat of rust inhibitive primer to a minimum of 4 -6 mils DFT and one coat of 29 epoxy finish to 4 -8 mils DFT. 30 31 2.08 ROTATION 32 33 A. The rotation and discharge position shall be as shown on the Drawings. 34 35 PART 3 — EXECUTION 36 37 3.01 INSTALLATION 38 I 39 A. Pumps, drivers and bases shall be precisely leveled and aligned, accurately 40 anchored into position and grouted by the Contractor. Installation shall be in 41 strict accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and recognized industry 42 practices. The Contractor shall furnish the anchor bolts and the required 43 lubricants for initial operation. The existing concrete maintenance pads shall 44 be modified as necessary to accommodate the new base plates. 45 46 B. Pressure gauges shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor for the RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -6 10/03/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 suction and discharge flanges for each pump. The gauges shall have a 4.5 inch dial and be installed with a pressure snubber, brass tee handle and a seal with a 316 SS diaphragm. The gauge calibration ranges shall be as small as is practical so that that full range is utilized, but safely within maximum conditions. C. The Contractor shall connect the new seal water system to each pump as shown on the drawings such that seal water is automatically supplied to the inlet port of the stuffing box when the pump is started and in operation. 3.02 JOBSITE PAINTING A. The Contractor shall field paint the pumping equipment in accordance with Section 09900. 3.03 INSPECTION AND TESTING A. General - Furnish the services of a factory representative in accordance with Specification Section 01820 to inspect the final installation, supervise a test run of the equipment, and provide operator training. The factory representative shall provide a written certification that the pumps are installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. B. Motors - The Contractor shall check all motors for correct clearances and alignment, and for correct lubrication in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. The Contractor shall check the direction of rotation of all motors and reverse if necessary. C. Pumps - After the pumps have been completely installed and inspected by a factory representative, field tests shall be conducted on each unit in the presence of the Engineer to show conformance with the specifications. The Contractor shall supply all labor, equipment and incidentals required to complete these tests. The factory representative shall provide a complete startup report for each pump, documenting the pump operating conditions at startup. This report shall be made part of the operation and maintenance manual. Pumps that cannot be made to comply with the specifications shall be removed and replaced with pumps that satisfy the conditions specified. 3.04 PUMP DATA INFORMATION Service Location Position Driver Shaft Sealing Gauges North RAS Building Indoors Horizontal Variable Speed JC 3740 Split Seal Required RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -7 South RAS Building Indoors Horizontal Variable Speed JC 3740 Split Seal Required 10/03/14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 Quantity Specific Gravity Design Point: Capacity TDH Efficiency Runback Point: Minimum Capacity TDH Efficiency Runout Point: Minimum Capacity TDH Efficiency Max. NPSH Required Minimum Sphere Size Minimum Casing Thickness Min. Nominal Shaft Diameter Maximum Motor Speed Maximum Motor Size Minimum Shut -Off Head Min. Suction & Discharge Sizes Basis of Design: ITT A -C Series Basis of Design: 2 2 1.0 1.0 4,500 gpm 23' TDH 76.5% 2,400 gpm 36' TDH 70% 5,100 gpm 18' TDH 70% 27 ft. 4,700 gpm 29' TDH 78% 2,500 gpm 43' TDH 70% 5,500 gpm 20' TDH 70% 27 ft. 4.50 inches 4.5 inches 0.50 inches 0.50 inches 3.625 inches 3.625 inches 1,200 rpm 1,200 rpm 40 hp 50 HP 50 ft. 59 ft. 12" by 12" 12" by 12" 12x12x15 NSY 12x12x15 NSY Replacements for existing RAS Pumps Design criteria taken from existing pump design criteria. END OF SECTION RETURN ACTIVATED SLUDGE PUMPS 11310 -8 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 10/03/14 1 1 1 1 SECTION 13615 2 3 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install all instrumentation and controls 10 hereinafter specified to perform the intended function and achieve a fully 11 integrated and operational system. The equipment and services defined 12 herein shall be furnished by a single instrumentation system integrator who 13 shall coordinate the instrument and control system for proper operation with 14 related equipment and materials provided by other suppliers of the Owner. 15 16 B. Work shall include all labor, materials, plant facilities and equipment, 17 performance of all work necessary to complete the manufacture, to make 18 factory tests, to prepare and Toad for shipment, to deliver to the site, to provide 19 programming, calibration, installation supervision, training system start-up, 20 services and incidentals required to completely furnish and install an 21 instrumentation and control systems, including all work necessary during the 22 Warranty Period, as specified herein, in other specification sections as listed 23 below under related work, and as shown on the Contract Drawings. 24 25 C. The equipment and services to be provided include: 26 27 1. All general instrumentation requirements as specified herein. 28 2. All field and analytical equipment and services as specified herein. 29 3. All control panels and control panel mounted equipment and services 30 as specified herein and in Division 16 31 4. All coordination and interfacing with the control system equipment 32 specified under Section 13630. 33 5. All coordination and interfacing with each piece of equipment specified 34 under Division 11 (equipment), Division 15 (mechanical), and Division 35 16 (Electrical), where applicable. 36 37 D. Auxiliary and accessory devices necessary for system operation or 38 performance, such as transducers or relays to interface with existing 39 equipment or equipment provided by other suppliers under other Sections of 40 these Specifications, shall be furnished, coordinated and interfaced by the 41 instrumentation system integrator whether or not they are shown on the 42 drawings or specified herein. 43 44 E. Equipment shall be fabricated, assembled, installed, and placed in proper 45 operating condition in full conformity with detail Drawings and Specifications, 46 engineering data, instructions and recommendations of the equipment PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -1 10/09/14 1 manufacturer as approved by the Engineer. 2 3 1.02 SUBMITTALS 4 5 A. The submittals shall be in accordance with Section 01300 and shall include. 6 7 1. Manufacturer's data. 8 2. Shop drawings. 9 3. Certificates of compliance. 10 4. Certified test reports. 11 5. Operation and maintenance manual. 12 13 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 14 15 A. Instrumentation and control equipment furnished shall be manufactured by a 16 firm regularly and currently engaged in the design and manufacture of similar 17 equipment. Equipment furnished shall be new and of current design. 18 19 B. Equipment shall be designed for ease of maintenance and repair, and access 20 to critical parts shall not require a major disassembly. Internal field 21 adjustments where permitted or required herein shall be easily accessible 22 upon removal of a panel or cover. 23 24 C. Materials and Installation shall comply with the requirements of the referenced 25 electrical codes and standards, and the codes and standards referred to shall 26 be used for establishing the minimum quality of the materials and equipment 27 supplied and installed. Equipment of the same type shall be a product of the 28 same manufacturer. Capacities of equipment shall not be Tess than that 29 indicated on the drawings or specified. 30 31 D. All exposed pneumatic tubing shall be routed through a device designed to 32 protect the tubing from crushing through incidental contact. The pneumatic 33 tubing shall be attached to the protective track as required by manufacturer's 34 recommendations and shall be protected from crimping by those attachment 35 methods. The protective track devices shall be stainless steel and shall be 36 "Tube- Track" or approved equal. 37 38 E. All exterior mounted instruments shall be furnished with appropriately sized 39 stainless steel rain shields. 40 41 F. Model numbers and names for equipment listed herein are for the purpose of 42 establishing a standard of quality or matching existing instrumentation. Like 43 equipment of a different manufacturer must be pre- approved by the Engineer. PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -2 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1.04 PRODUCT HANDLING 2 3 A. Shipping Precautions 4 5 1. After completion of shop assembly, factory test and approval, all 6 equipment, cabinets and the panel insert shall be packed in protective 7 crates and enclosed in heavy duty polyethylene envelopes or secured 8 sheeting to provide complete protection from damage, dust and 9 moisture. Dehumidifiers shall be placed inside the polyethylene 10 coverings. Boxed weights shall be shown on shipping tags together 11 with instructions for unloading, transporting, storing and handling at job 12 site. 13 14 2. Special instructions for proper field handling, storage and installation 15 required by manufacturer for proper protection shall be securely 16 attached to each piece of equipment prior to packaging and shipment. 17 18 3. None of the central control and monitoring equipment shall be shipped 19 to the site until the room(s) is /are environmentally suitable. 20 21 B. Identification 22 23 1. Each component shall be tagged to identify its location, tag number and 24 function in the system. Identification shall be prominently displayed on 25 the outside of the package. 26 27 2. A permanent stainless steel or other non - corrosive material tag firmly 28 attached and permanently and indelibly marked with the instrument tag 29 number, as given in the tabulation, shall be provided on each piece of 30 equipment supplied. 31 32 C. Storage 33 34 1. Equipment shall not be stored out -of- doors. Equipment shall be stored 35 in dry permanent shelters including in -line equipment, and shall be 36 adequately protected against mechanical injury. If any apparatus has 37 been damaged, such damage shall be repaired by the contractor at his 38 own expense. If any apparatus has been subject to possible injury by 39 water, it shall be thoroughly dried out and put through such tests as 40 directed by the engineer. This shall be at the cost and expense of the 41 contractor, or the apparatus shall be replaced by the contractor at his 42 own expense. PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -3 10/09/14 1 1 1 2 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 3 4 2.01 INSTRUMENTATION GENERAL I 5 6 A. Type 7 8 1. All instrumentation supplied shall be of the manufacturer's latest design 9 and shall produce or be activated by signals, which are established 10 standards for the water and wastewater industries. 11 12 2. All electronic instrumentation shall be of the solid -state type and shall 13 utilize linear transmission signals of 4 to 20 mA DC. I14 15 3. Outputs of equipment that are not of the standard signals as outlined, 16 shall have the output immediately raised and/ or converted to 17 compatible standard signals for remote transmission. No zero based 1 18 signals will be allowed. 19 20 4. All instruments shall be provided with mounting hardware and floor 1 21 stands, wall brackets, or instrument racks as shown on the drawings or 22 as required. 23 111 24 5. Equipment installed in a hazardous area shall meet class, group and 25 division classification as shown on the electrical drawings, or comply 26 with the local or national electrical code, whichever requirement is most I 27 stringent. 28 29 6. All indicators and recorder readouts shall be linear in process units. I 30 31 7. All transmitters shall be provided with either integral indicators or 32 conduit mounted indicators in process units, accurate to two percent. 33 II 34 8. Electronic equipment shall be of the manufacturer's latest design, 35 utilizing printed circuitry and suitably coated to prevent contamination 36 by dust, moisture, and fungus. Solid -state components shall be 37 conservatively rated for their purpose, to assure optimum long term 38 performance and dependability over ambient atmosphere fluctuations ' 39 and 0 to 100 percent relative humidity. The field mounted equipment 40 and system components shall be designed for installation in dusty, 41 humid, and slightly corrosive service conditions. 42 43 9. All equipment, cabinets and devices furnished hereunder shall be 44 heavy -duty type, designed for continuous industrial service. The 45 system shall contain products of a single manufacturer, insofar as 46 possible, and shall consist of equipment models, which are currently in PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -4 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 production. All equipment provided shall be of modular construction 2 and shall be capable of field expansion. 3 4 B. Electrical 5 6 1. All equipment shall be designed to operate on a 60 hertz alternating 7 current power source at a nominal 120 volts, plus or minus 10 percent, 8 except where specifically noted. All regulators and power supplies 9 required for compliance with the above shall be provided between 10 power supply and interconnected instrument loop. Where equipment 11 requires voltage regulation, constant voltage transformers shall be 12 furnished and installed. 13 14 2. All analog transmitter and controller outputs shall be 4 to 20 milliamps 15 into a minimum load range of 0 -750 ohms, unless specifically noted 16 otherwise. 17 18 3. All switches shall have double -pole, double -throw contacts rated at a 19 minimum of 600 volts- amperes (VA), unless specifically noted 20 otherwise. 21 22 4. Materials and equipment used shall be U.L. approved wherever such 23 approved equipment and materials are available. 24 25 5. All equipment shall be designed and constructed so that in the event of 26 a power interruption, the equipment specified hereunder shall resume 27 normal operation without manual resetting when power is restored. 28 29 2.02 LIGHTNING /SURGE SUPPRESSION 30 31 A. General - in addition to manufacturer's standard, internal protection, 32 supplementary lightning /surge protection shall be provided to protect all 33 systems from surges propagating along the signal and power supply lines. 34 The protection systems shall be such that the protective level shall not 35 interfere with normal operation, but shall be lower than the instrument surge 36 withstand level, and shall be maintenance -free and self- restoring. Instruments 37 shall be housed in a suitable metallic case, and properly grounded. Ground 38 wires for all surge protectors shall be connected to a good earth ground and, 39 where practical, each ground wire shall be run individually and insulated from 40 each other. These protectors and specified instrumentation /transmitters shall 41 be mounted in a separate NEMA 3R stainless steel vented enclosure. The 42 units shall be manufactured by DEHN. Substitutions will not be considered by 43 the City. 44 45 B. Power supply - additional protection of all alternating current (ac) instrument 46 power supply lines shall be provided. Cabinet(s) /panel(s) and groups of field PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -5 10/09/14 1 1 1 instruments, as approved by the Engineer, shall be protected by isolation 2 transformers and surge suppressors. Individual field instruments shall be 3 protected by high discharge heavy -duty zinc oxide varistors /spark gap 4 combination. The ac suppressor shall have a response time of less than 25 I 5 nanoseconds, a surge current rating of 4kA, an input voltage of 120 VAC, 6 50/60 Hz, and have a 6kAms short- circuit withstand capability. Surge 7 protection device model 953 204 manufactured by DEHN. Substitutions will I 8 not be considered by the City. 9 10 C. Signal line - protection of all field analog, discrete, digital and telemetered 11 signal lines shall be provided. Protection devices shall be installed at the both 12 ends as close to the instrument being protected as possible. Where signal 13 lines enter control rooms through an interface cabinet, the protection devices 14 shall be mounted in the interface cabinet. Protection shall be with the use of 15 silicone avalanche diodes or approved equal. The suppressor shall be 16 capable of protecting a signal pair plus the cable shield with a DC clamping 17 level of 33V, be rated 20kA nominal discharge current and have at least a 1 18 .75A current rating. Surge protection device model 920 300 + 926 324 19 manufactured by DEHN. Substitutions will not be considered by the City. 20 21 2.03 SLUDGE BLANKET LEVEL SYSTEM 22 23 A. The sludge blanket level system shall be as manufactured by Entech Design, I 24 Inc., EchoSmart Interface Level Analyzer, or approved equal. 25 26 B. Smart Sensor 27 28 1. The primary element shall be a microprocessor based ultrasonic Smart 29 Sensor operating in the range of 550kHz to 750kHz. The sensor shall I 30 receive power from a Power Supply. It shall be capable of receiving 31 programming instructions from a Controller and from a PC or laptop 32 computer using the EchoSmart Console Program. The Smart Sensor I 33 process connection shall have a flexible mounting arrangement. All 34 necessary mounting hardware shall be furnished and installed. 35 36 2. A flexible mounting arrangement shall be furnished and installed to 37 rotate the sensor out of the path of a scum skimmer passing -by. 38 I 39 3. The Smart Sensor shall be furnished with sufficient lengths of cable to 40 connect the Smart Sensor to the Power Supply unit. 41 42 C. Controller III 43 44 1. One (1) Controller shall be furnished for every four (4) clarifiers. The I45 Controller shall consist of a multi- function graphical user interface with 46 integral membrane switch for instrument, programming, measurement PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -6 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 indication, and other instrument functions. It shall supply power to a sensor, and provide ports necessary to effect instrument communication connections. The Controller shall be outfitted with a fully integrated ZigBee Compliant two -way radio frequency module to permit communication with each of the sensors. The Controller shall have RS-485 serial communications using Modbus -RTU communication protocol. D. Power Supply Unit 1. The Power Supply Unit shall consist of a power supply for a sensor and shall have field connections for the 4 -20 mA signal for the sensor that is connected to it. The Power Supply Unit shall be outfitted with a fully integrated ZigBee Compliant two -way radio frequency module to permit communication with the Controller. E. Console Program 1. There shall be a Windows® -based software program that enables communication with the Smart Sensor(s) for programming, monitoring, data download and instrument diagnostics when connected to a PC or laptop computer via RS -485, Modbus protocol. The Console Program shall allow the user to take control of the sensor(s) with substantially the same functionality as a Controller. F Performance 1. The sludge blanket level detector shall utilize ultrasonic measurement principals and meet the following performance requirements: a. c. d. Measurement Range: Resolution: Accuracy: Operating Temperature: G. Communications 1.0 ft. to 32.0 0.12 in. at 10.0 ft. 0.1 ft. at 100 ft. Controller -40 °F to +140 °F 1. Each sludge blanket level sensor shall be connected to a Power Supply Unit. Each Power Supply Unit shall communicate wirelessly to a Controller using a 2.4 GHz Zigbee compliant radio. 2. The Contractor shall be responsible for performing a radio path survey to verify the location of the Controller as shown on the Drawing is the most optimal location for wireless communications. A radio path survey report shall be provided to the Engineer. PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -7 10/09/14 1 3. Should the Controller need to be relocated onsite, the Contractor shall 2 furnish and install all additional wiring and conduit for power and I/O 3 communications to the Controller. Any additional repeaters, ancillary 4 hardware require for complete wireless communications from the Power 5 Supply to the Controller shall be furnished by the equipment 6 manufacturer. 7 4. Smart Sensor: 8 9 a. RS -485 Modbus protocol4 -20mA Current Loop into Max. 600 10 ohms 11 12 5. Controller: 13 14 a. Display - 320 x 240 Backlit Graphical Monochrome (16 x 3.45 in. 15 viewing area) 16 17 b. RS-485 Modbus protocol, RS -232 Modbus protocol 18 19 c. 4 -2OmA Current Loop into Max. 600 ohms 20 21 d. USB (Type A Host), USS (Type B Device) 22 23 e. Relays: Four relays, 1 OA @ 250 VAC; IDA @3OVDC 24 25 6. Power Supply Unit: 26 27 a. Display — None 28 29 b. RS-485 Modbus -RTU protocol 30 31 c. Field connections for 4 -20 mA Current Loop into Max. 600 ohms 32 for sensor that is directly connect to Power Supply Unit 33 34 H. Mechanical 35 36 1. Smart Sensor: 37 38 39 a. Dimensions: 40 41 1. Standard Sensor, 2.44 x 2.95 in. 42 43 2. Controller: 44 45 a. NEMA 4X, IP65 Polycarbonate Enclosure 46 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -8 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 b. Dimensions: 9.25 x 9.0 x 4.5 in. 2 3 3. Power Supply Unit: 4 5 a. NEMA 4X, IP65 Polycarbonate Enclosure 6 7 b. Dimensions: 7.0 x 7.0 x 3.0 in. 8 9 10 I. Power Requirements 11 12 1. Smart Sensor 15 VDC, 20W 13 14 2. Controller 100 -240 VAC, 50/60 Hz (1A); 15 16 3. Power Supply Unit 100 -240 VAC, 50/60 Hz (1A) 17 18 2.04 MAGNETIC FLOWMETER 19 20 A. Primary Flow Head 21 22 1. Electromagnetic flowtube shall be AFTCO UniMag, Krohne Enviromag, 23 Endress Hauser PROline Promag 10W or Engineer approved equal. 24 25 2. Each meter will have an epoxy- coated steel metering tube welded at all 26 joints and a non - conductive liner, suitable for the liquid being metered. 27 28 3. Each connection will be steel flanged ANSI Class 150/300, for meter 29 sizes up to 24" and AWWA Class B, D or F for meters larger than 24 ". 30 31 4. There will be no electronic components on the primary flow head. An 32 integral or remote converter will supply coil drive power. Output signal 33 from the primary will be fed through cable supplied with the meter to the 34 signal converter. 35 36 5. Electrode material will be compatible with the process fluid. 37 38 6. Meter will have field replaceable electrodes with access ports. 39 40 7. When installed in lined or non - metallic piping, the meter will be provided 41 with corrosion - resistant grounding rings or electrodes. 42 43 8. Meter calibration will be performed by a volumetric comparison method. 44 A calibration certificate will accompany each meter. The calibration 45 facility will be certified to 0.5% accuracy. The calibration facility must 46 be traceable to national standards. PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -9 10/09/14 1 2 9. The instrument will be manufactured in an ISO 9001 approved facility. 3 4 10. The meter shall communicate by HART protocol. 5 6 B. Converter 7 8 1. The Magnetic Flowmeter Converter shall be integrally mounted. It will 9 provide precisely controlled and regulated primary field excitation. It 10 shall convert the primary flowmeter signal into a 4 -20 mA DC and pulse 11 output directly proportional to the flow rate. 12 13 2. The full scale measuring range shall be a direct digital input in 14 engineering units and fully adjustable over a range from 1.0 to 40 ft/sec. 15 16 3. Each converter shall contain internal self- diagnostics, automatic data 17 integrity checking, and be completely interchangeable with other 18 converters of the same type without need for recalibration. No auxiliary 19 test meter or primary simulator shall be required for commissioning, 20 zeroing, or interchanging of flow meter /converter. 21 22 4. Each converter shall contain the following features as standard 23 equipment: 24 • Simultaneous analog output (500 -ohm load) and a scaled pulse 25 output. 26 • Status output. 27 • Low flow cutoff. 28 • Forward / reverse flow measurement capabilities. 29 • Integral rate of flow indicator and 7 -digit resettable LCD totalizer. 30 • Capability of testing analog and frequency outputs. 31 • Engineering units for display and programming; flow and total shall 32 be user programmable in any engineering unit of measure. 33 34 5. All adjustments and changes of programming shall be by direct digital 35 input. 36 37 6. For ease of repair / replacement all converter configuration and totalizer 38 data shall be stored on a removable EPROM. When removed and 39 placed into a replacement / spare converter, no additional programming 40 shall be required. 41 42 7. For ease of wiring, power and output wiring terminals shall be a plug in 43 type, removable from the instrument without disconnecting wiring. 44 45 8. Repeatability shall be 0.10% of rate. 46 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -10 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 9. Accuracy of the system (Primary Flow Head and Converter) shall be: 2 3 • Meter sizes 3/8" — 40" +/- 0.3% of actual flow rate (for velocities >1 4 m /sec) 5 • Meter sizes 1/10" — 1/4" +/- 0.5% of actual flow rate (for velocities >1 6 m /sec) 7 8 10. The enclosures shall be rated NEMA 4X. The converter shall 9 incorporate EMI /RFI protection / suppression as well as overload 10 protection for output circuits and meet the requirements of the EU -EMC 11 Directives and bear the CE Approval symbol. 12 13 11. The instrument shall be manufactured in an ISO 9001 approved facility. 14 15 2.05 LIQUID LEVEL FLOAT SWITCH 16 17 A. Type SO ball float switch shall be installed in the following locations and as 18 shown on the drawings: 19 20 B. Functional /performance: 21 22 1. Differential - less than one -inch. 23 24 2. Switch rating - 4.5 amps at 115V AC, 3.0 amps at 230V AC 25 26 C. Physical: 27 28 1. Float - molded high density polyethylene. 29 30 2. Switch - totally encapsulated mercury switch. 31 32 3. Cable - heavy duty, synthetic rubber jacketed, integral to float. 33 34 D. Options /accessories required: 35 36 1. Provide 316 stainless steel adjustable clamp tubes, pipe brackets, and 37 u- bolts; 38 39 2. The floats shall be mounted on a vertical one -inch stainless steel pipe 40 with all stainless steel hardware; 41 42 3. The lead wire shall be a waterproof cable of sufficient length so that no 43 splice is required prior to the junction box; and, 44 45 4. Provide a castle - aluminum NEMA 4X junction box with terminals for all 46 floats and tapped as required for conduit connections. PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -11 10/09/14 1 1 1 2 E. Manufacturers: 3 4 1. Consolidated Electric Co., Model LS. 5 6 2. Flygt ENH -10 7 8 3. Roto -float 9 10 4. Engineer approved equal 11 12 2.06 ULTRASONIC LEVEL TRANSMITTER 13 14 A. Ultrasonic level transmitter systems shall be furnished for fluid level 15 measurement. The ultrasonic level transmitter system shall include an 16 ultrasonic transducer and transmitter connected by a cable. The ultrasonic 17 level transducer shall be designed to operate on the principle of sound 1 18 echoing to provide level measurement without contact of fluid. The transducer 19 shall provide electronic signal output to the transmitter proportional to the fluid 20 level. The transmitter shall be furnished with all equipment as necessary to 21 meet the requirements as set forth herein shall be included and connected so 22 as to provide a complete and operational system. 23 24 B. The Contractor shall furnish cable with sufficient length for connection of the 25 transducer and the transmitter. Contractor shall size ultrasonic transducer to 26 measure entire depth of wetwell structure. 27 28 C. The transmitter shall operate on 120 volts, 60Hz, and shall have a NEMA 4X 29 polycarbonate enclosure. The transmitter output shall be 4 -20 mA DC. 30 Calibration parameters shall be permanently stored even during power 31 interruptions. Contractor shall be responsible for calibration. 32 33 D. The ultrasonic level transducers shall be Siemens Echornax XPS and 34 transmitters shall be Siemens HydroRanger 200 or Engineer approved equal. 35 36 E. Ultrasonic level indicators shall be installed in the locations as shown on the 37 drawings using the manufacturers recommended mounting recommendations. 38 39 2.07 TRANSIENT PROTECTION /SURGE SUPPRESSION DEVICES 40 41 A. Surge and transient protection devices shall be two -stage units incorporating 42 gas discharge tube and diodes to earth. Surge protective device shall be 43 rated 10kA nominal discharge current for surge events and 1kA current for 44 lightning events. Surge protection shall be used on all 4 -20 rnA transmitters 45 (e.g. LIT, PIT, FIT). Surge protection devices for instrument loops of 4 -20 mA 46 shall be Model 929 921 manufactured by DEHN. Substitutions will not be PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -12 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 considered by the City. 2 3 PART 3 — EXECUTION 4 5 3.01 INSTALLATION 6 7 A. Field mounted elements shall be installed, calibrated, and started -up in strict 8 compliance with the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations. 9 Conflicts between the manufacturer's requirements and recommendations and 10 these Specifications or the Drawings shall be presented to the Engineer for 11 resolution before any affected work is started. Installed equipment shall be 12 certified as appropriate for the application and process by the Contractor. 13 14 B. Connections of instruments to process piping shall include, as close as 15 practical to the point of connection, a tight closing block valve suitable for the 16 maximum process pressure and temperature and for the material involved. If 17 connections are of threaded or welded pipe, there shall be a union or flanged 18 connection located to facilitate disassembly of the connection and removal of 19 the instrument without interrupting process operation. 20 21 C. All field- mounted instruments shall be protected and isolated from vibration, 22 temperature extremes, radiant heat, rain, sleet or falling water, and similar 23 adverse conditions. 24 25 D. Impulse lines of pressure instruments shall be as short as practical and shall 26 be installed with a minimum slope of I -inch per foot (1:12) downward toward 27 the instrument in liquid system and upward toward the instrument in gaseous 28 systems. If this preferred direction of slope cannot be maintained, the 29 contractor shall submit for approval an installation configuration utilizing traps, 30 drains, and /or vents at high and low points, which will ensure freedom from 31 mixed phase offset effects and provide ease of purging or draining. Pressure 32 lines of pressure instruments shall be insulated. 33 34 E. Field mounted elements shall be marked with data required for calibration 35 such as location of adjustments, span, offset, zero suppression, and test 36 voltages. If such data are not provided in permanent markings or on the 37 manufacturer's nameplate, a durable tag or label shall be affixed in a protected 38 location that will become readily visible in the normal course of servicing the 39 instrument. 40 41 F Provide DC power supplies for devices as required. Mount on a stanchion in 42 proximity of device in a NEMX 4X box. Provide conduit and wire to device. 43 44 3.02 EQUIPMENT TESTING AND CALIBRATION 45 46 A. Factory Tests and Calibration. All field- mounted elements shall be PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT 13615 -13 10/09/14 1 1 1 factory- tested by the manufacturer to assure satisfactory performance prior to 2 shipment to the job site. Whenever possible, this shall include calibration to 3 the actual range and conditions of use. Calibration shall be traceable to the 4 National Bureau of Standards with an uncertainty not more than 1/2 of the I 5 specified or claimed accuracy of the instruments. 6 7 B. Field Tests and Calibration. Field mounted elements which were not I 8 calibrated to final working values of range, span, and zero suppression at the 9 factory shall be so calibrated prior to or at the time of installation. This 10 calibration shall meet the same requirements for accuracy and be traceable, 11 as required for factory testing above. The Engineer shall be given 48 hours' 12 notice and the opportunity to witness this calibration. 13 1 14 15 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 PROCESS INSTRUMENTATION AND EQUIPMENT I 13615 -14 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 SECTION 13630 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM PART 1 — GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK A. The existing controls system at the Northeast consists of an Allen- Bradley PLC -5 system with Allen- Bradley 1794 Flex I/O communicating over a DeviceNet network. Existing DeviceNet panels and their locations are as follows: 1. DeviceNet Panel 100 (DNP -100): 2. DeviceNet Panel 101 (DNP -101): 3. DeviceNet Panel 102 (DNP -102): 4. DeviceNet Panel 103 (DNP -103): 5. DeviceNet Panel 104 (DNP -104): 6. DeviceNet Panel 105 (DNP -105): In front of Clarifier No. 5 End of Aerobic Digester Tank South RAS Pump Building North RAS Pump Building Adjacent to DNP 100 In front of Clarifier No. 5 Unless otherwise noted, all new instrumentation and I/O for the South Clarifiers, RAS, WAS pump stations shall be wired to the existing South DeviceNet Panel DNP -102, and all new instrumentation and I/O for the North Clarifiers, shall be wired to the existing North DeviceNet Panel DNP -103. Existing instrumentation currently wired to other DeviceNet panels shall remain. B. The existing DeviceNet Panel 102 and 103 will be converted by the Owner to communicate via Ethernet. The Owner will install a managed switch in the existing DeviceNet panel and upgrade the existing PLC to a CompactLogix PLC with Ethernet communications. As part of this project, all Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) and motor starters shall communicate with the DeviceNet Panel 102 via Ethernet through the managed switch (managed switch to be provided by the Owner). C. The Contractor shall furnish the services of a Systems Integrator to perform the work of this section and all related Division 13 specifications to install, program start-up, and test a complete and operable system as indicated on the Drawings and specified herein. The Systems Integrator shall have not less than 5 years verifiable experience in the water /wastewater field. The Systems Integrator shall be Rocha Controls, Commerce Controls, Curry Controls, or approved equal. D. The RAS and WAS pump variable frequency drives (VFD) are specified to be furnished with Ethernet communications modules. The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating between the VFD manufacturer /supplier and the LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -1 10/09/14 1 Systems Integrator to ensure that the proper hardware is provided to connect 2 the VFD's to the Ethernet network. 3 4 E. The "Owner's Systems Programmer" referred to in this specification shall 5 mean the Systems Programmer that will be performing PLC ladder logic 6 programming and development of HMI graphics for monitoring and controlling 7 the equipment specified herein and as shown in the I/O list. The cost for 8 performing the PLC programming and HMI graphics development by the 9 Owner's Systems Programmer shall be paid for under the SCADA Software 10 Implementation Services Allowance bid item. 11 12 F. PLC ladder logic programming of the existing PLC, HMI graphics, and alarms 13 for the monitoring and control of the equipment as specified herein shall be 14 performed by the Owner's Systems Programmer. The Contractor shall be 15 responsible for furnishing, installing and testing the complete control system. 16 The Contractor shall be responsible for all labor, materials, equipment, 17 calibration, coordination and incidentals required to furnish and install the 18 control system specified or required. 19 20 1. The Owner's Systems Programmer through the Contractor shall furnish 21 the Owner a detailed description for the proposed work and associated 22 costs based on labor effort required and hourly rates. The Contractor 23 shall obtain the Owner's written authorization of the scope and cost 24 prior to initiating the work. The following list generally summarizes the 25 Owner's Systems Programmer's Scope of Work: 26 27 • Develop and submit Citect graphic screens 28 • Configure VFD's and starters equipped with Ethernet to 29 communicate over the existing Ethernet network 30 • Prepare PLC application software 31 • Prepare Citect HMI application software 32 • Update the existing Plant2Business /Plant2Net databases 33 • Provide startup services 34 • Prepare and submit a control narrative 35 • Provide application software electronic backup files 36 37 G. These Specifications are intended to give a general description of what is 38 required, but do not cover all details, which will vary in accordance with the 39 requirements of the equipment furnished. They are, however, intended to 40 cover the furnishing, the shop testing, the delivery and complete installation 41 and field testing, of all materials equipment and appurtenances for the 42 complete system herein specified, whether specifically mentioned in the 43 Specifications or not. 44 45 H. For all systems there shall be furnished and installed all necessary and 46 desirable accessory equipment and auxiliaries whether specifically mentioned LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -2 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 in these Specifications or not. This installation shall include field- testing of the 2 entire installation and instruction of the regular operating personnel in the care, 3 operation and maintenance of all equipment. 4 5 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS 6 7 A. The Contractor, thru the Systems Integrator, shall assume full responsibility for 8 the satisfactory installation and operation of the pumping system. 9 10 B. All equipment furnished under these Specifications shall be new and unused 11 and shall be the standard cataloged product of a manufacturer having a 12 successful record of manufacturing and servicing the equipment and systems 13 specified herein. 14 15 1.03 SUBMITTALS 16 17 A. Copies of all materials required to establish compliance with the Specifications 18 shall be submitted in accordance with the General Conditions. Submittals 19 shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 20 21 1. Shop drawings prepared by the manufacturer and submitted to the 22 Engineer for review prior to the manufacture of the equipment. The 23 shop drawings shall include outline dimensions and external connection 24 diagrams. A list of components, interface cables, specifications and a 25 copy of the manufacturer's warranty shall be included with the 26 submitted data. 27 28 2. Operating Instructions: The Contractor shall submit operation and 29 maintenance manuals for the entire control system. 30 31 a. General - equipment function, description and normal and 32 limiting operating characteristics. 33 34 b. Installation instructions - assembly procedures and alignment 35 and adjustment procedures. 36 37 c. Operation instructions - start -up procedures, normal operating 38 conditions, emergency and normal shutdown procedure. 39 40 d. Maintenance instructions. 41 42 e. Trouble- shooting guide. 43 44 f. Parts list and predicted life of parts subject to wear. 45 46 g. Drawings - cross sectional view, assembly and wiring diagrams. 47 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -3 10/09/14 1 3. Complete master wiring diagrams and control schematics shall be 2 furnished for approval before proceeding with manufacture or 3 modification of an existing panel. 4 5 4. Ethernet Network Drawings: furnish an Ethernet network drawing 6 showing cable types, all equipment (new and existing) connected to the 7 Ethernet network, and IP addresses. 8 9 5. Certifications: The Contractor shall furnish the Engineer with a written 10 certification signed by the manufacturer's representative that the 11 equipment has been properly installed, tested, calibrated, and operated 12 under typical operating conditions, and satisfactory operation has been 13 obtained. 14 15 1.04 OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS 16 17 A. Operating and maintenance manuals shall be furnished in accordance with 18 Section 01730. The manuals shall be prepared specifically for this installation 19 and shall include all required cuts, drawings, equipment lists, descriptions, 20 programming logic, calibration requirements, etc., that are required to instruct 21 operating and maintenance personnel unfamiliar with such equipment the 22 number and special requirements shall be as specified. 23 24 1.05 SPARE PARTS 25 26 A. One (1) spare of each type of I/O module and terminal base shall be provided. 27 28 B. One (1) spare DC power supply of each size and type shall be provided 29 30 C. Fuses: 20 percent of each size and type use, but no less than ten of each size 31 and type. 32 33 D. Relays: 20 percent of each type used, but no less than ten of each type. 34 35 E. One copy of the PLC program, after debugging, recorded on CD -ROM for 36 each PLC. 37 38 F. Spare parts shall be properly protected for long periods of storage and packed 39 in a box clearly identified with indelible markings as to the contents. 40 41 G. Hand held programming devices needed to initialize VFDs and equipment 42 starters. 43 44 1.06 WARRANTY 45 46 A. The Contractor shall provide a warranty in accordance with Specification 47 01740 and shall guarantee that the equipment furnished is suitable for the LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -4 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 purpose intended and free from defects of design, material and workmanship. 2 In the event the equipment fails to perform as specified, the Contractor shall 3 promptly repair or replace the defective equipment without any cost to the 4 Owner (including handling, shipment and labor costs). 5 6 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 7 8 2.01 EXISTING PANEL MODIFICATIONS 9 10 A. All new instrumentation and I/O for the South Clarifiers, RAS, WAS pump 11 stations shall be wired to the existing South DeviceNet Panel DNP -102. The 12 Contractor shall remove all existing hardware, wiring, circuit breakers, contact 13 relays, and other components in the existing panels that are not being used or 14 that is not properly operating. Additional components and wiring in these 15 existing panels shall be installed in a manner that meets the specifications 16 herein to provide the monitoring and control of equipment specified in this 17 section. 18 19 B. Internal Electrical Wiring 20 21 1. Panel equipment shall be mounted and wired on or within the cabinet. 22 Wiring shall comply with the National Electrical Code. Wiring within the 23 panel shall be grouped together with harnesses or ducts and secured to 24 the structure. Wiring shall be numbered in compliance with the 25 numbering system used on the wiring /connection diagrams. Wiring and 26 connection diagrams shall comply with ISA 5.4 Instrument Loop 27 Diagrams and shall be submitted by the System Integrator as part of 28 the Shop Drawings for review by the Engineer. 29 30 2. Power and low voltage DC signal wiring shall be routed in separate wire 31 ways. Crossing of the two system wires shall be at right angles. 32 33 3. Control wire shall be 14 AWG Type THWN stranded and shall be insu- 34 lated for not less than 600 volts unless specified otherwise. Conductors 35 shall be of tinned copper construction. All interconnecting wiring, 36 except for electronic circuits, shall be rated for not less than 90 degrees 37 C. 38 39 4. Signal wire shall be 1 pair 16 AWG shielded. Conductors shall be of 40 tinned copper construction. 41 42 5. Wire color shall be: Line Power - Black; Neutral or Common - White; 43 AC Control - Red; DC Control - Blue; Equipment or Chassis 44 Ground - Green; specified externally powered circuits - Orange. 45 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -5 10/09/14 1 6. Wiring shall terminate at a master terminal board, rigid type and 2 numbered. The master terminal board shall have a minimum of 25 3 percent spares. 4 5 7. Terminal blocks shall be arranged in vertical rows and separated into 6 groups (Power, AC control, and DC signal). 7 8 8. Terminal blocks shall be barrier type with the appropriate voltage rating 9 (600 volts minimum). Terminal strips shall be provided for the purpose 10 of connecting all control and signal wiring. They shall be the raised 11 channel mounted type as manufactured by Allen Bradley or approved 12 equal. 13 14 9. Wiring trough for supporting internal wiring shall be plastic type with 15 snap on covers. The side walls shall be open top type to permit wire 16 changing without disconnecting. Trough shall be supported to the sub 17 panel by stainless steel screws. Trough shall not be bonded to the 18 panel with glue or adhesives. 19 20 10. Each wire shall be provided with numbered heat shrink tubing 21 identification markers at both ends and the numbering shall be in 22 accordance with the Control Panel Drawings. Identification markers 23 shall be pre- typed. Handwritten markers or paper markers will not be 24 permitted. 25 26 11. Direct interlock wiring between equipment will not be allowed. Only one 27 side of a terminal block row shall be used for internal wiring. The field 28 wiring side of the terminal shall not be within 6- inches of the side panel 29 or adjacent terminal. 30 31 12. Wiring troughs shall not be more than 60 percent visible fill. Wiring 32 trough covers shall be match marked to identify placement. If 33 component identification is shown on covers for visibility, the ID shall 34 also appear on the mounting sub - panel. 35 36 13. Each panel shall be provided with an isolated copper grounding bus for 37 all signal and shield ground connections. Shield grounding shall be in 38 accordance with the instrumentation manufacturer's recommendations. 39 40 14. Each panel shall be provided with a separate copper power grounding 41 bus (safety) in accordance with the requirements of the National 42 Electrical Code. 43 44 15. Each panel, where required, shall be provided with analog signal 45 isolation (111) where analog signals are sent from one panel or console 46 to another. 47 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -6 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 16. Each panel shall be provided with surge suppression protection 2 (electrical transients) for connections between AC power systems and 3 electrical and electronic equipment. Surge suppressor grounding shall 4 be in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations. 5 6 17. All wiring to hand switches and the like which are live circuits 7 independent of the panel's normal circuit breaker protection shall be 8 clearly identified as such. 9 10 C. Relays not provided under Division 11, 15, or 16 and required for properly 11 completing the control function defined in this Section or shown on the 12 Drawings shall be provided under this Section. For example, discrete field 13 control and status circuitry shall be isolated from PLC I/O termination boards 14 using relays. Relays shall have red LED indicators that illuminate upon coil 15 energization. 16 17 D. Relays shall be mounted in their respective panel and shall be clearly 18 identified as being live circuits independent of the panel's normal circuit 19 breaker protection. 20 21 E. Nameplates shall be provided for flush mounted equipment. The nameplates 22 shall be approximately 1 -in x 3 -in constructed of black and white laminated, 23 phenolic material having engraved Helvetica letters approximately 1 /4 -in high, 24 extending through the black face into the white layer. Nameplates shall be 25 beveled and attached to panels by self tapping stainless steel screws. 26 Adhesive bonded or glued on name plates shall not be accepted. 27 28 F. Components shall be mounted in a manner that permits servicing, adjustment, 29 testing, and removal without disconnecting, moving or removing any other 30 component. 31 32 G. Components shall be mounted on plates on the inside of panels in such a 33 manner that allows for removal of the components without removal of the 34 plate. Components shall not be mounted directly to the enclosure. 35 36 H. Internal components shall be identified with suitable plastic engraved name 37 plates attached with stainless steel drive pins adjacent to (not on) each 38 component identifying the component in compliance with the Drawings, 39 Specifications, and System Supplier's data. 40 41 I. The Contractor through the Systems Integrator shall provide to the Owner and 42 Engineer a completed as -built drawing showing the actual control components 43 and devices (show existing and new devices) that are mounted in the existing 44 panels after modification. Drawing shall also include identification of each wire 45 in the existing panel to which terminal strip it is connected, circuit breaker 46 identification, Flex I/O modules and corresponding I /O, etc. Two additional LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -7 10/09/14 1 copies of the panel as -built shall be placed in the pocket holder on the door of 2 the existing panel. 3 4 2.02 INSTRUMENT IDENTIFICATION 5 6 A. All components provided, both field and panel mounted, shall be provided with 7 permanently mounted name tags bearing the entire tag number of the 8 component. Panel mounted tags shall be white with black lettering Iamicoid 9 plastic; field mounted tags shall be stamped stainless steel. 10 11 B. Nameplates for panels and panel mounted equipment shall be as indicated on 12 the Drawings. 13 14 C. Field mounted tags shall be 16- gauge, of 304 stainless steel, with 3/16 -inch 15 high characters. 16 17 D. Tags shall be attached to equipment with a commercial tag holder using a 18 stainless steel band with a worm screw clamping device or by a holder 19 fabricated with standard stainless steel hose clamps and meeting the same 20 description. In some cases where this would be impractical, use 20 -gauge 21 stainless steel wire. 22 23 E. For field panels or large equipment cases use stainless steel screws, however, 24 such permanent attachment shall not be on an ordinarily replaceable part. In 25 all cases, the tag shall be plainly visible to a standing observer and not 26 obscure adjustment ports or impair the function of the instrument. Field 27 mounted control stations, recorders or indicators shall have a nameplate 28 indicating their function and the variable controlled or displayed. Nameplate 29 shall be attached by one of the above methods. 30 31 2.03 PANEL COMPONENTS 32 33 A. Industrial Relays and Time Delays 34 35 1. Type: 36 37 a. Industrial heavy duty relays. 38 39 2. Functional /Performance: 40 41 a. Contact arrangement/function shall be as required to meet the 42 specified control function specified. 43 44 b. Contacts shall be rated 10 amps continuous at 600 volts. 45 46 c. Relays shall be provided with convertible contact blocks. 47 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -8 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 d. Pneumatic time delay relays shall be used on than 180 seconds and shall be adjustable. e. Solid state time delay relays shall be used between 180 seconds and one -hour. 3. Options /Accessories Required: a. Provide all mounting rails, etc. that are required. 4. Manufacturers: time delays Tess on time delays a. Allen Bradley b. Square D B. General Purpose Relays and Time Delays 1. Relays shall be double pole, double throw, octal plug in type with a transparent dust cover. The relay shall be equipped with an indicating light to indicate when its coil is energized. The mechanical life of the relay shall be 10,000,000 operations minimum. a. Type: (1) Units shall be of the general purpose plug -in type. b. Functional /Performance: (1) (2) Coil voltage shall match supply voltage. Contact arrangement/function shall be as required to meet the specified control function. c. Mechanical life expectancy shall be in excess of 10,000,000. d. Duty cycle shall be rated for continuous operation. e. Units shall be provided with integral indicating light to indicate if relay is energized. f. Solid state time delays shall be provided with polarity protection (DC units) and transient protection. g. Time delay units shall be adjustable and available in ranges from 0.1 second to 4.5 hours. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -9 10/09/14 1 2 2. Physical: 3 4 a. For 120VAC service, provide contacts rated 10 amps at 5 120VAC; for 24VDC service provide contacts rated 5 amps at 6 28VDC, for electronic (milliamp/ millivolt) switching applicator 7 provide gold plated contacts rated for electronic service. 8 9 b. Relays shall be provided with dust and moisture resistant covers. 10 11 3. Options /Accessories Required: 12 13 a. Provide mounting sockets with pressure type terminal blocks 14 rated 300 volt and 10 amps. 15 16 b. Provide mounting rails /holders as required. 17 18 4. Manufacturers: 19 20 a. Allen Bradley 21 22 b. Potter & Brumfield 23 24 c. Eagle Signal Controls 25 26 C. Signal Isolators /Boosters /Converters 27 28 1. Type: 29 30 a. Externally powered solid state electronic type. Loop powered 31 devices are not acceptable. 32 33 2. Functional /Performance: 34 35 a. Accuracy - 0.15 percent. 36 37 b. Inputs - Current, voltage, frequency, temperature, or resistance 38 as required. 39 40 c. Outputs - Current or voltage as required. 41 42 d. Isolation - There shall be complete isolation between input 43 circuitry, output circuitry, and the power supply. 44 45 e. Adjustments - Zero and span adjustment shall be provided. 46 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -10 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 f. Protection - Provide RFI protection. 2 3 3. Physical: 4 5 a. Mounting - Suitable for mounting in an enclosure or instrument 6 rack. 7 8 4. Options /Accessories Required: 9 10 a. Mounting rack or general purpose enclosure as required. 11 12 5. Manufacturers: 13 14 a. Phoenix Contact or approved equal 15 16 17 D. Signal Relay Switches (Current Trips) 18 19 1. Type: 20 21 a. Solid state electronic type. 22 23 2. Functional /Performance: 24 25 a. Input - 4 -20 mA. 26 27 b. Output - Isolated contact output, double pole double throw, rated 28 5 amps at 120 VAC. 29 30 c. Accuracy - 0.1 percent. 31 32 d. Protection - Provide RFI protection. 33 34 e. Deadband - Adjustable between 0.1 to 5.0 percent of span. 35 36 f. Setpoint Adjustment - Provide graduated dial for each alarm 37 setpoint from 0 to full scale. Alarms shall be adjustable to trip on 38 rising or falling input signal. 39 40 g. Repeatability - Trip point repeatability shall be at least 0.1 41 percent of span. 42 43 3. Physical: 44 45 a. Mounting - Suitable for mounting in an enclosure or high density 46 instrument rack. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -11 10/09/14 1 2 4. Options /Accessories Required: 3 4 a. Mounting rack or general purpose enclosure as required. 5 6 5. Manufacturers: 7 8 a. Rochester Instrument Systems 9 10 b. Acromag Inc. 11 12 c. Moore Industries 13 14 E. Intrinsically Safe Relays 15 16 1. Type: 17 18 a. Relays shall be of the solid state electronic type in which the 19 energy level of the sensing or actuation circuit is low enough to 20 allow safe usage in hazardous areas. 21 22 2. Options /Accessories Required: 23 24 a. Relays shall match power supply provided. 25 26 b. Relays shall be located in non - hazardous areas. 27 28 3. Manufacturers: 29 30 a. Consolidated Electric 31 32 b. Gems Safe -Pak 33 34 c. Warrick Controls 35 36 d. R. Stahl, Inc. 37 38 F. All other relays, switches, timers, lights, and ancillary control devices, ancillary 39 wiring, and hardware whether specified herein or not, that is required for a 40 complete and operation pump control system shall be furnished and installed. 41 42 2.04 DISTRIBUTED I/O SYSTEM 43 44 A. General 45 46 1. The existing system is an Allen- Bradley 1794 -Flex I/O distributed I/O LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -12 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 system communicating using an existing Ethernet network for 2 communications. 3 4 2. All terminal bases, I/O modules, communications adapters, power 5 supplies shall be DIN rail mounted and be compatible with the existing 6 1794 -Flex I/O system. 7 8 3. All required mounting hardware for DIN -rail mounting shall be furnished 9 and installed by the Contractor. 10 11 4. Allen - Bradley part numbers with the "##" indicates the suffix for the part 12 number shall be determined /sized by the Contractor. 13 14 B. Terminal Bases 15 16 1. For each new Flex I/O module furnished, the Contractor shall furnish 17 and install appropriate terminal bases. The terminal bases shall 18 provide terminal connection points for I/O wiring and plug together to 19 form the backplane. Terminal bases shall have screw type terminal 20 connections. 21 22 2. All terminal bases shall be of the same series and type. 23 24 3. Terminal bases shall be model 1794 -TB##. 25 26 C. I/O Modules 27 28 1. Contractor shall furnish and install sufficient quantities of the 1794-## 29 digital input, digital output, analog input, and analog output modules 30 into the existing DeviceNet Panels (North and South) for all I/O signals 31 monitored and controlled as specified herein. Extender cables for I/O 32 modules shall be Allen- Bradley 1794 -CE3. 33 34 2. All of the input/output modules for each type shall be of the same series 35 to reduce spare parts inventory requirements, including cables, chassis, 36 power supplies, etc. 37 38 3. Ten (10) percent spare of each I/O type shall be installed with a 39 minimum of 8 digital inputs, 8 digital outputs, 2 analog inputs and 2 40 analog outputs. 41 42 4. All input/output shall be color coded and titled with a distinctive label. 43 44 F. Power Supplies 45 46 1. The existing Flex I/O System is equipped with a 1794 -PS13 power 47 supply. The Contractor shall remove the existing power supply and LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -13 10/09/14 1 install a new power supply as specified herein. 2 3 2. Sufficient quantities of DIN rail mounted power supplies shall be 4 furnished and installed for the Flex I/O System. Power supply shall be 5 compatible with the Flex I/O system and shall be model Allen- Bradley 6 1794 -PS3. 7 8 3. Power supplies shall be configured for 120VAC /60Hz power and shall 9 provide sufficient power to the I/O backplane to power all modules in 10 the rack with sufficient spare power available for future modules in the 11 spare slots. 12 13 F PLC Programming Software 14 15 1. The Owner's Systems Programmer possesses the appropriate versions 16 of Rockwell Automation Software, RS Linx, RSNetworx, RSLogix 17 Programming Software needed to program all PLC's. 18 19 2. The Owner's Systems Programmer shall supply all programming 20 necessary to provide a fully debugged and operating system. The 21 software required shall consist of those programs necessary for the 22 equipment to efficiently perform the functions specified herein, plus 23 enable convenient and efficient preparation of new programs. All 24 programs shall be completely debugged and operable prior to delivery 25 of the equipment. The Contractor shall provide whatever additional 26 controls required for smooth operation of the system, whether or not 27 specified herein, at no additional cost to the Owner. The Owner or 28 Engineer shall not be required to expend any programming effort in 29 order to achieve a fully operational system. 30 31 3. The Contractor shall provide hard copy (paper printouts) of the PLC 32 program. The program shall show an English annotated ladder or 33 boolean logic description of the PLC logic. 34 35 G. Ethernet Media 36 37 1. The network equipment shall be connected using pre - molded Cat -5e or 38 Cat -6 patch cords with RJ-45 connectors. Lengths shall be as required. 39 40 2. If it is not possible to use pre - molded cables due to installation 41 requirements, plenum rated Cat -5e or Cat -6 cable must be used. In 42 addition, a qualified installer must be employed to make the RJ-45 43 connections at each end of the Ethernet run as well as to test the cable. 44 Testing must include a computer generated print -out of the test results 45 including pin connections and dB loss in the cable. Furnish test results 46 to the Engineer. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -14 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2.05 DC POWER SUPPLY 3 4 A. 24VDC Power Supplies shall be provided in the control panels. 24VDC Power 5 Supplies shall be switching type, din rail mountable power supplies. 6 7 B. 24VDC Power Supplies shall be approved for use in UL -580 industrial control 8 cabinets. 9 10 C. Provide fuse or short- circuit protection. Provide a minimum of 1 set of dry 11 contacts configured to change state on failure for monitoring and signaling 12 purposes. 13 14 D. Operating temperature range: 0 degrees Celsius to 50 degrees Celsius. 15 16 E. Touch safe design: All connection terminals to be protected against accidental 17 touch. 18 19 F. Provide self - protecting power supplies with a means of limiting DC current in 20 case of short circuit. 21 22 G. Power supplies shall be as manufactured by Allen- Bradley or approved equal. 23 24 2.06 ETHERNET CABLE SURGE SUPPRESSION 25 26 A. All non -fiber communications cables leaving a PLC panel or a network 27 enclosure shall be equipped with surge suppression devices capable of 28 protecting the communications cards in the event of a voltage spike on the 29 communications line. 30 31 B. Additional Ethernet patch cords shall be provided when it is required to use the 32 Ethernet Data Surge Suppressor. 33 34 C. Ethernet surge suppression rated for Cat 5/6 and POE applications. Surge 35 protection devices must be fully shielded and provide protection for all pins: 36 DEHN 929 121. Substitutions will not be considered by the City. 37 38 2.07 IP ADDRESSING 39 40 A. The existing plant network has IP addresses defined for all existing equipment. 41 All new equipment requiring IP address shall be assigned with IP address 42 matching the existing plant network IP address scheme to allow the complete 43 and operational controls of all equipment as specified herein. 44 45 B. The Contractor shall submit a list of proposed IP addresses for all new 46 equipment requiring IP addresses to be approved by the Owner. LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -15 10/09/14 1 2.08 HMI GRAPHIC SCREENS 2 3 A. The Owner's System Programmer shall submit to the Owner for approval all 4 HMI graphic screens in color print on 8.5" x 11" sized paper. The Contractor 5 shall provide the following as a minimum for all HMI graphic screens: 6 7 1. All rotating equipment, such as pumps, shall be programmed with 8 elapsed run time meters and the cumulative run time shall be displayed 9 on the HMI. A separate screen shall be furnished to display elapsed 10 run times for all equipment. 11 12 2. All 4 -20mA level, pressure and flow signals shall be capable of being 13 "trended" (depict historical data) on the HMI. All flow meters shall be 14 totalized to show daily total flow on the HMI. 15 16 3. Each process shall have a minimum one (1) dedicated HMI graphic 17 screen for control and monitoring of process equipment related to the 18 structure /process. At minimum the following screens shall be provided. 19 20 Overall Clarifier Screen 21 RAS Pump Station — South 22 WAS Pump Station - South 23 Separate historical trending screens for each 4 -20mA Al 24 Elapsed time meters for rotating equipment 25 26 B. All HMI graphic screen development, SCADA training, SCADA documentation, 27 SCADA startup services, and any other related services shall be performed by 28 the Owner's Systems Programmer and paid for under the SCADA Software 29 Implementation Services Allowance. 30 31 C. Any other PLC /HMI programming requested by the Owner shall be performed 32 by the Owner's Systems Programmer and paid for under the SCADA Software 33 Implementation Services Allowance. 34 35 2.09 UPS AND SURGE SUPPRESSION 36 37 A. For any panel that is modified as part of this project, the existing UPS in each 38 panel shall be removed and delivered to the Owner. A new UPS shall be 39 provided in every existing panel that is modified or where additional I/O is 40 added. 41 42 B. The UPS shall provide backup power for all Flex I/O power supplies, and 43 24VDC power supplies and any other devices that were previously on the 44 existing UPS plus any new devices, such as I/O modules, that are added to 45 the existing panel. 46 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -16 10/09/14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 G. The UPS shall be capable of providing surge suppression for all equipment in 12 the event of a surge or spike on the incoming 120VAC power lines. 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2.10 I/O LIST 21 22 A. 23 C. The UPS shall be capable of sustaining the operation of the equipment for a minimum one (1) hour in the event of a power failure. D. There shall be no measureable break in the output power of the UPS during transfer from normal AC line supply to battery power or from battery power back to normal AC line supply. F Exact sizing of the UPS shall be the responsibility of the Systems Integrator. H. Acceptable UPS manufacturers are: 1. Allen Bradley 2. Approved equal Le' end Northeast Plant S stem 10X 20X 30X Tag Name Clarifier System RAS System WAS System CL5 -ZI -105 CL5- OA -105A CL5- OA -105B CL5 -LI -105 CL6 -ZI -106 CL6- OA -106A CL6- OA -106B CL6 -LI -106 CL7 -ZI -107 CL7- OA -107A CL7- OA -107B CL7 -LI -107 CL8 -ZI -108 CL8- OA -108A Description Clarifiers — South Clarifier #5 Run /Off Status (via motor starter /Ethernet) Clarifier #5 High Torque Alarm Clarifier #5 High Torque Shutoff Alarm Clarifier #5 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) Clarifier #6 Run /Off Status (via motor starter /Ethernet) Clarifier #6 High Torque Alarm Clarifier #6 High Torque Shutoff Alarm Clarifier #6 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) Clarifier #7 Run /Off Status (via motor starter /Ethernet) Clarifier #7 High Torque Alarm Clarifier #7 High Torque Shutoff Alarm Clarifier #7 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) Clarifier #8 Run /Off Status (via motor starter /Ethernet) Clarifier #8 High Torque Alarm LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -17 10/09/14 CL8- OA -108B CL8 -LI -108 Clarifier #8 High Torque Shutoff Alarm Clarifier #8 Sludge Blanket Level (existing) RASP1- ZI -S201 RASP1- OA -S201 RASP1- SI -S201 RASP2- ZI -N202 RASP2- OA -N202 RASP2- SI -N202 RAS Pumps — South RAS Pump #1 Run /Off Status (via VFD/ Ethernet) RAS Pump #1 Failed Status (via VFD/ Ethernet) RAS Pump #1 Speed Indication (via VFD/ Ethernet) RAS Pump #2 Run /Off Status (via VFD/ Ethernet) RAS Pump #2 Failed Status (via VFD/ Ethernet) RAS Pump #2 Speed Indication (via VFD /Ethernet) WASP1- HOR -S301 WASP 1- ZI -S301 WASP 1- OA -S301 WASP1 -HS -5301 WASP1- SI -S301 WASP1- HSC -S301 WASP2- HOR -S302 WASP2- ZI -S302 WASP2- OA -S302 WASP2- HS -S302 WASP2- SI -S302 WASP2 - HSC -S302 WAS Pumps - South WAS Pump #1 VFD HOR Switch Position Status (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #1 Run /Off Status (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #1 Failed Status (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #1 Start/Stop Command (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #1 Speed Indication (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #1 Speed Control (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #2 VFD HOR Switch Position Status (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #2 Run /Off Status (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #2 Failed Status (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #2 Start/Stop Command (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #2 Speed Indication (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #2 Speed Control (via VFD /Ethernet) FIT -S301 LIT -S201 LAH -S201 LAL -S201 Flow Meter South WAS Flow Meter Level Transmitters RAS South Wetwell Level Indication RAS South Wetwell High Level Alarm RAS South Wetwell Low Level Alarm LSL -S201 LAL -S201 Float Level Switches RAS South Wetwell Low Level Float Switch RAS South Wetwell Low Level Shutoff Alarm RASVFD- II -S201 RASVFD- SI -S201 RASVFD- II -S202 RASVFD- SI -S202 WASVFD- II -S301 WASVFD- SI -S301 WASVFD- II -S302 WASVFD- SI -S302 Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) - South RAS Pump #1 VFD Output Current (via VFD /Ethernet) RAS Pump #1 VFD Output Frequency (via VFD /Ethernet) RAS Pump #2 VFD Output Current (via VFD /Ethernet) RAS Pump #2 VFD Output Frequency (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #1 VFD Output Current (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #1 VFD Output Frequency (via VFD /Ethernet) WAS Pump #2 VFD Output Current (via VFD /Ethemet) WAS Pump #2 VFD Output Frequency (via VFD /Ethernet) LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -18 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2.11 CONTROL REQUIREMENTS 2 3 A. General 4 5 1. All I/O shown on the I/O list shall be programmed by the Owner's 6 Systems Programmer into the existing PLC and displayed on the 7 existing HMI SCADA graphics screens. 8 9 2. Any other control strategies, controls or HMI SCADA graphics screens 10 required by the Owner shall be provided by the Owner's Systems 11 Programmer. 12 13 B. RAS Pumps 14 15 1. The RAS pumps shall be automatically controlled by the controller 16 embedded in the VFD to maintain an operator adjustable level setpoint 17 as measured by the level indicating transmitter in the RAS wet well. 18 The programming of the VFD controller to maintain an operator 19 adjustable setpoint shall be programmed by the VFD supplier. The 20 Contractor shall be responsible for installing wiring and conduit from 21 the new level indicating transmitter to the VFD for control. Signal 22 isolators, if required, shall be furnished and installed. 23 24 2. All RAS Pumps shall have a low -level interlock via the existing RAS wet 25 well LIT to shut -off the RAS Pump(s) on low level in the corresponding 26 RAS wet well. Low level shutoff setpoint shall be operator adjustable 27 from the HMI. RAS Pump status as shown in the I/O list shall be 28 provided via the Ethernet network and displayed on the existing HMI 29 SCADA graphics screens by the Owner's Systems Programmer. 30 31 C. WAS Pumps 32 33 1. WAS Pump status and control as shown in the I/O list shall be provided 34 via the Ethernet network and displayed on the existing HMI SCADA 35 graphics screens by the Owner's Systems Programmer. 36 37 2. All WAS Pumps shall have a low -level interlock via the existing RAS 38 wet well LIT to shut -off the WAS Pump(s) on low level in the 39 corresponding RAS wet well. Low level shutoff setpoint shall be 40 operator adjustable from the HMI. WAS Pump status as shown in the 41 I/O list shall be provided via the Ethernet network and displayed on the 42 existing HMI SCADA graphics screens by the Owner's Systems 43 Programmer. 44 45 3. Each WAS Pump shall be equipped with a MANUAL -AUTO switch on 46 the HMI. In MANUAL, each WAS Pump shall be started /stopped using LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -19 10/09/14 1 1 1 software pushbuttons on the HMI. In AUTO, the each WAS Pump shall 2 be automatically controlled to start/stop and automatically 3 increase /decrease the speed of the pump to maintain an operator 4 adjustable flow rate (set on the HMI) as measured by the WAS Flow 5 Meter. In addition to maintaining the operator adjustable flow setpoint, 6 the HMI shall be equipped with an operator adjustable totalized flow 7 setpoint. In AUTO, when the totalized flow is equal to or greater than 8 the totalize flow setpoint, all WAS Pumps shall deactivate (shutoff). 9 10 D. Float Level Switches 11 12 2. RAS Pumps: Low level float switches shall be hardwired to the RAS 13 VFDs to shut the RAS pumps off upon a low level in the wet well and 14 only when the VFD is in automatic mode or in bypass mode. In manual 15 mode, the RAS VFDs shall ignore the low level float switch. An alarm 16 shall be displayed on the HMI when the pumps are shutoff by the low 17 level float switch when they are in automatic mode. The VFD shall be 18 equipped with a "Low Level Float Bypass" switch to enable the operator 19 to operate the VFD in any mode should the Low Level Float fail. 20 21 3. WAS Pumps: Low level float switches shall be hardwired to the WAS 22 VFDs to shut the WAS pumps off upon a low level in the wet well. The 23 floats shall be active in all VFD modes; automatic, manual, and bypass. 24 An alarm shall be displayed on the HMI when the pumps are shutoff by 25 the low level float switch when they are in automatic mode. The VFD 26 shall be equipped with an "Low Level Float Bypass" switch to enable 27 the operator to operate the VFD in any mode should the Low Level 28 Float fail. 29 30 E. Flow Meters 31 32 1. The flow meter shall measure, record, totalize and indicate flow. 33 34 2. The instantaneous flow, daily maximum flow, daily minimum flow and 35 today's totalized flow and yesterday's totalized flow shall be displayed 36 at the HMI/01T. 37 38 3. A flow meter general fault alarm shall be displayed at the HMI /OIT. 39 40 PART 3 - EXECUTION 41 42 3.01 INSTALLATION 43 44 A. The work included in this section consists of furnishing, installing and placing 45 in operation the instruments and appurtenances, including all conduit, wiring 46 and circuitry necessary to provide the Owner with a fully operable system LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -20 10/09/14 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 properly calibrated and installed. 2 3 B. Install and mount equipment in accordance with the Contract Documents, 4 manufacturer's instructions and installation detailed shop drawings. Mount 5 equipment so that they are rigidly supported, level and plumb, and in such a 6 manner as to provide accessibility; protection from damage; isolation from 7 heat, shock and vibration; and freedom from interference with other 8 equipment, piping and electrical. 9 10 C. Include the services of a factory trained, qualified service engineer of the 11 equipment manufacturer and the Instrumentation Systems Integrator to 12 inspect the complete equipment installation to assure that it is installed in 13 accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations, make all adjustments 14 necessary to place the system in trouble -free operation and instruct the 15 operating personnel in the proper care and operation of the equipment 16 furnished. 17 18 D. All workmanship utilized in the manufacture and installation of this system 19 shall be of the highest quality and performed in a manner consistent with all 20 accepted practices for industrial controls. 21 22 3.02 START -UP SUPERVISION 23 24 A. The Instrumentation Systems Integrator shall provide a qualified service 25 technician to inspect all final connections and check the system prior to start- 26 up. The service technician shall coordinate with the Owner's representative 27 for functional check -out of the complete system. 28 29 B. The Instrumentation Systems Integrator shall be provided on site during start 30 up of the system to make adjustments and tune the system as deemed 31 necessary by the Engineer. 32 33 3.03 FIELD TESTS AND ACCEPTANCE 34 35 A. Field tests shall consist of installation check -out, Field Acceptance Test, and 36 Final Inspection in sequence. Each stage of testing shall not be commenced 37 until the preceding stage is substantially complete as determined by the 38 Engineer. 39 40 B. After the Contractor has demonstrated that the pump station is capable of 41 being controlled under all conditions described in the Control Strategy, the 42 Contractor shall furnish the services of the Systems Integrator for a minimum 43 of two 8 -hour days to assist in the determination of operating setpoints based 44 on actual field conditions. Such services shall be furnished upon 48- hours' 45 notice. 46 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -21 10/09/14 1 C. Field Test: When the operating setpoints have been established to the 2 satisfaction of the Engineer and the facility is complete and ready for 3 operation, the PLC and associated components shall be inspected and tested 4 for compliance with the Contract Documents. Testing of the equipment shall 5 be made by the Contractor in the presence of the Systems Integrator, the 6 Engineer, the Electrical subcontractor, the pump equipment manufacturer's 7 representative, and the Owner's representative. The equipment shall include, 8 but not be limited to, the following: 9 10 1. Controls: Controls shall be tested to determine satisfactory 11 performance. 12 13 2. Electrical: Contractor shall record readings of voltage and amperage 14 on all electrical components at start and steady state operating 15 conditions. Such readings shall be recorded on a form provided by the 16 manufacturer and the results shall meet the manufacturers prescribed 17 limits. If a tested item fails to meet its requirements, then it shall be 18 replaced. Results of the tests, including the serial number of the 19 accessories tested, shall be furnished to the Engineer. 20 21 3. Inspection: A thorough inspection of all mechanical and electrical 22 equipment and controls, fittings, brackets, mountings, seals, conduit, 23 painting, components, and features shall be made while the facility is 24 being tested to determine performance and compliance with design 25 requirements and specifications. 26 27 4. Repairs, Adjustments and Replacements: The Instrumentation 28 Systems Integrator shall make any and all necessary repairs, 29 adjustments, and replacements until performance has been 30 demonstrated to the satisfaction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall 31 bear the cost of any repair, adjustment and replacement. 32 33 3.04 TRAINING 34 35 A. Provide up to eight (8) hours of operator training by the Systems Integrator in 36 accordance with Section 01820 to train operators not familiar the control 37 systems. Training shall highlight procedures on navigating through screens, 38 adjusting setpoints, turning on /off equipment through the HMI SCADA system. 39 Training shall also include the operation and maintenance of all networking 40 equipment. 41 42 3.05 AS -BUILT DRAWINGS 43 44 A. The Contractor through the Systems Integrator shall provide to the Owner and 45 Engineer complete as -built drawing(s) showing the actual control components 46 and devices (show existing and new devices) that are mounted in the existing LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -22 10/09/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 panels after modification. Drawings shall also include identification of each 2 wire in the existing panel, to which terminal strip it is connected, circuit breaker 3 identification, Flex I/O modules, corresponding I /O, etc. Two additional copies 4 of the panel as -built shall be placed in the pocket holder on the door of the 5 existing panel. 6 7 8 END OF SECTION 9 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -23 10/09/14 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 LOCAL CONTROL PANELS AND CONTROL SYSTEM 13630 -24 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15010 2 3 BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 77 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including all specification 10 sections apply to the work. 11 12 1.02 SUMMARY 13 14 A. This Section specifies the basic requirements for mechanical installations and 15 includes requirements common to more than one section of these 16 specifications. 17 18 1.03 ACCESSIBILITY 19 20 A. Equipment and materials shall be installed allowing for adequate access for 21 service and. Coordinate the final location of concealed equipment with the 22 final location of access panels and doors. Allow ample space to remove all 23 parts that may be replaced or require service. Extend all grease fittings to an 24 accessible location. 25 26 1.04 MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS 27 28 A. Coordinate mechanical equipment and materials installation with other building 29 components. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. Verify final 30 locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the requirements of 31 the actual equipment to be connected. Arrange for chases, slots, and 32 openings in other building components to allow for mechanical installations. 33 34 B. Coordinate the installation of supporting devices and sleeves to be set in 35 poured in place concrete and other structural components, as they are 36 constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical 37 materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular attention 38 to large equipment requiring positioning. 39 40 C. Where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install mechanical 41 services and overhead equipment to provide the maximum headroom 42 possible. Coordinate the installation of mechanical materials and equipment 43 above ceilings with suspension system, light fixtures, and other installations. 44 45 D. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and 46 overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 -1 05/31/13 1 regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide 2 required connection for each service. 3 4 1.05 NAMEPLATE DATA 5 6 A. Provide permanent operational data nameplate on each item of power 7 operated mechanical equipment, indicating manufacturer, product name, 8 model number, serial number, capacity, operating and power characteristics, 9 labels of tested compliances, and similar essential data. Locate nameplates in 10 an accessible location. 11 12 1.06 THIRD PARTY CERTIFICATION 13 14 A. All packaged equipment shall be Independently Third Party labeled as a 15 system for its intended us by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory 16 (NRTL) in accordance with OSHA Federal Regulation 29CFR1910.399 and 17 NFPA 70, "National Electrical Code" (NEC), Article 90 -7. 18 19 PART 2 — PRODUCTS -NOT USED 20 21 PART 3 — EXECUTION- NOT USED 22 23 24 25 END OF SECTION BASIC MECHANICAL REQUIREMENTS 15010 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15062 2 3 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, tools, labor, supervision and 10 appliances for and properly install, connect, adjust, test and place in 11 continuous satisfactory service all ductile iron pipe and fittings at the locations 12 and to the elevations indicated, specified or required for the proper completion 13 of all work. 14 15 B. Wherever Construction activities disturb existing conditions or work already 16 completed, Contractor shall restore the same to its original condition in every 17 detail. All such replacement and repair shall meet with the approval of the 18 Engineer and the Owner. 19 20 C. Ductile iron pipe and fittings are not necessarily completely indicated or 21 detailed on the Construction Drawings. The Drawings are schematic only, and 22 indicate pipe and fittings in a general way. It is the Contractor's responsibility 23 to furnish all materials, pipe and fittings required. 24 25 D. It is the intent of these Contract Documents to require an installation, complete 26 in every detail, whether or not indicated on the Construction Drawings, or 27 specified herein. Consequently, the Contractor shall be responsible for all 28 details, devices, accessories, and special construction necessary to properly 29 furnish, install, adjust, test, place into continuous satisfactory service, and 30 complete the Work in an acceptable manner. 31 32 E. Full responsibility for designing, fabricating, and installing the ductile iron pipe 33 and fittings, for selecting materials of construction, and for demonstrating 34 compliance with specified performance requirements shall rest with the 35 Contractor, and through the Contractor, the Manufacturer and the Material 36 Supplier. The Engineer's approval of 1) the manufacture and installation of 37 the ductile iron pipe and fittings 2) the use of materials included in this 38 Specification, and 3) alternative materials offered by the Contractor, shall not 39 relieve the Contractor and Supplier of full responsibility for meeting all 40 performance requirements and guarantees. 41 42 F. The requirements of this specification 15062 supersede relevant articles in 43 Section IV. 44 45 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM 46 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -1 05/31/13 1 A. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings and as 2 specified herein. 3 4 B. All pipe, fittings, specials and appurtenances used for potable water piping 5 shall be NSF -61 certified for continuous contact with potable water. 6 7 1.03 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS, CODES AND STANDARDS 8 9 A. All Work specified herein shall be in accordance with the standards of the 10 below listed organizations, except as otherwise shown or specified. Where 11 reference is made to a standard of one of these, or other organizations the 12 version of the standard in effect at the time of bid opening shall apply. 13 14 B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 15 16 1. BI.1 - Standard Specification for Unified Inch Screw Threads. 17 18 2. B16.5 - Standard Specification for Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings 19 and other special Alloys. 20 21 C. American Society for Testing Materials (ASTM) 22 23 1. A307 - Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Bolts and Studs, 60,000 24 psi Tensile Strength. 25 26 2. C33 - Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates. 27 28 3. C128 - Standard Specification for Specific Gravity and Absorption of 29 Fine Aggregate. 30 31 4. C144 - Standard Specification for Masonry Mortar. 32 33 5. C150 - Portland Cement. 34 35 6. D75- Standard Practice for Sampling Aggregates. 36 37 7. E8 - Methods of Tension Testing of Metallic Materials. 38 39 8. E23 - Methods for Notched Bar Impact Testing of Metallic Materials. 40 41 9. G95 - Cathodic Disbondment Test. 42 43 D. American Water Works Association (AWWA) 44 45 1. C104 - Standard for Cement - Mortar Lining for Ductile Iron Pipe and 46 Fittings for Water. 47 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. C105 - Standard for Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile -Iron Piping 2 for Water and Other Liquids. 3 4 3. C111 - Standard for Rubber - Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron Pressure 5 Pipe and Fittings. 6 7 4. C115 - American National Standard for Flanged Ductile -Iron Pipe with 8 Threaded Flanges. 9 10 5. C150 - Standard for the Thickness Design of Ductile Iron Pipe. 11 12 6. C151 - Standard for Ductile - Iron Pipe. Centrifugally Cast for Water or 13 Other Liquids. 14 15 7 C153 - Standard for Ductile Iron Compact Fittings. 3 -inch through 16 16 -inch for Water and Other Liquids. 17 18 8. C600 - Standard for Installation of Ductile Iron Water Mains and Their 19 Appurtenances. 20 21 9. C651 - Standard for Disinfecting Water Mains. 22 23 E. NSF International, The Public Health and Safety Company 24 25 1. No. 60 - Drinking Water Treatment Chemicals - Health Effects. 26 27 2. No. 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects. 28 29 1.04 SUBMITTALS 30 31 A. The Contractor shall submit Shop Drawings to the Engineer of pipe, fittings 32 and all appurtenances in accordance with these Contract Documents and 33 Sections 01300 and 01340. The requirements of AWWA C110, C150, C151 34 and the following supplemental requirements are applicable: 35 36 1. Certified dimensional drawings of all pipe, specials and fittings. 37 38 2. Joint and pipe /fitting wall construction details, which indicate the type 39 and thickness of the wall; manufacturing tolerances; performance 40 history; and all other pertinent information required for the manufacture 41 of the product. 42 43 3. Details of fittings and specials such as elbows, wyes, tees, outlets, 44 connections, test bulkheads, bosses and nozzles or other specials 45 where shown on the Construction Drawings, which indicate amount and 46 position of reinforcement. All fittings and specials shall be properly 47 reinforced to withstand the internal pressure both circumferential and DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -3 05/31/13 1 longitudinal, and the external loading conditions as indicated in the 2 Contract Documents. Shop Drawings shall clearly detail special 3 castings indicating all pertinent dimensions. 4 5 6 B. The Contractor shall furnish a certified affidavit of compliance for all pipe and 7 other products or materials furnished under this Section of the Specifications, 8 as specified in ANSI /AWWA C105, C110, C150, and C151; respectively, and 9 certified copies of the following supplemental data for all pipe, fittings, and 10 specials: 11 12 1. The Supplier shall provide, through the Contractor, a sworn statement 13 that the inspection and all specified tests have been made and all 14 results thereof comply with the requirements of these Specifications. 15 16 C. All expenses incurred in making samples for certification of tests and in the 17 preparation of any design reports shall be borne by the Contractor. 18 19 D. Approval of the Shop Drawings shall not relieve the Contractor of the 20 responsibility to ensure that the pipe is designed and installed in strict 21 accordance with the Contract Documents. 22 23 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 24 25 A. The Contractor shall furnish materials under this Section that are new, unused 26 and as specified, or if not particularized herein, which are the best of their 27 respective kind, free of defects and imperfections, and suitable for the service 28 intended, subject to the approval of the Engineer. 29 30 B. The Contractor shall provide workmanship that is first class in every respect, 31 and have the installation performed by workmen thoroughly experienced in 32 such work. A neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished Work shall be 33 required. 34 35 C. The Contractor shall perform Work in accordance with all applicable laws and 36 regulations and in accordance with all applicable permits and easements. 37 38 D. The ductile iron pipe furnished under this Specification shall comply with 39 AWWA C151 except as it may be modified herein. 40 41 E. Welders and welding methods shall be certified to a nationally recognized 42 welding specification for the type of ductile iron used to manufacture the pipe 43 and fittings. 44 45 F. All test equipment used in activities affecting quality control shall be calibrated 46 and certified at not longer than annual intervals, unless otherwise specified or DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -4 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 required. 2 3 G. All pipe shall be clean, sound, and without defects. No manner of repair will 4 be accepted, unless otherwise specified or approved by the Engineer. 5 6 H. The Contractor, at no additional cost to the Owner, shall perform all the testing 7 and recording that is required in these Specifications unless otherwise 8 specified. 9 10 I. The Engineer shall have the right to determine the amount of pipe to be 11 rejected as defined in AWWA C151 Section 5.7.1 "Determining Rejection." 12 13 1.06 SUPPLIER'S QUALIFICATIONS 14 15 A. All pipe shall be manufactured, fabricated, coated, cement mortar -lined or 16 epoxy -lined by a single qualified Manufacturer. Fittings may be fabricated and 17 the lining for force main pipe and fittings may be applied at a site other than 18 where the pipe is manufactured. The Manufacturer shall have at least 5 years 19 experience in work similar in specification to that which is to be furnished on 20 this project. The Manufacturer shall be required to show experience in 21 supplying pipe in environments similar to those expected to exist on this 22 project and that the pipe supplied in those environments has functioned 23 satisfactorily. 24 25 1.07 SHOP TESTS 26 27 A. All pipes shall be tested by the Manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C104, 28 C110, C150, and C151, the Manufacturer's standard procedures, and this 29 Specification. Shop Tests shall be subject to witness by the Engineer and /or 30 Owner, and /or the Owner's Representative and certified test reports shall be 31 submitted to the Engineer by the Contractor for approval. No lot of pipe shall 32 be shipped to the site of the Work until acceptable shop tests are completed 33 and approved. 34 35 1.08 INSPECTION 36 37 A. All Work under this Specification, including but not limited to proof of design 38 testing, shop testing and the production of the pipe, fittings and specials, shall 39 be subject to inspection by the Owner's representatives and /or the Engineer in 40 the Supplier's plant. All travel, lodging and meal costs associated with this 41 plant inspection shall be incurred by the Owner and /or the Engineer. 42 43 B. The Engineer shall have the right to order any pipe that, in the Engineer's 44 opinion, does not meet the Specifications to be rejected and not shipped to the 45 Project site. 46 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -5 05/31/13 1 PART2- PRODUCTS 2 3 2.01 GENERAL 4 5 A. All ductile iron pipes, including flanged, mechanical joint, push -on joint, 6 restrained joint, and plain end pipe, shall be manufactured in accordance with 7 ANSI /AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51. 8 9 B. Where ductile iron pipe is supplied for the Project or shown on the Drawings, 10 above ground pipe shall be flanged and buried (underground) pipe shall be 11 mechanical joint, restrained joint or push -on joint, as required. 12 13 C. All ductile iron fittings shall be marked in accordance with ,ANSI /AWWA C 14 110/A 21.10 Section 10 -9, "Markings on Fittings." All ductile iron pipe shall be 15 marked in accordance with Section 51 -10, "Marking Pipe" of ANSI /AWWA 16 Specification C 151/A 21.51. 17 18 D. Maximum pipe laying lengths shall be 20 feet with shorter lengths provided as 19 required by the Construction Drawings or to complete the Work and as 20 allowed by AWWA C151. 21 22 E. Shop cement -mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior surfaces and 23 shall be free from fracture, excessive interior surface crazing and roughness. 24 25 F. Pipe joints shall not be bonded for electrical conductivity in accordance with 26 these Specifications and the details as shown on the Construction Drawings 27 and the following schedule: 28 29 1. All blow -offs, air valve assemblies, and lateral connections to or from 30 the pipe shall not be fitted with dielectric gaskets and /or couplings. 31 32 G. All materials that may be in contact with the water being conveyed (linings, 33 gaskets, lubricants, grout, disinfecting agents, etc.) shall be in accordance with 34 and approved by the appropriate NSF Standard 60 or 61. 35 36 2.02 DESIGN CRITERIA 37 38 A. The pipe furnished under this section shall be ductile iron pipe, cement mortar 39 or epoxy lined and asphalt coated, with EPDM gasket joints. The pipe shall 40 consist of a cast ductile iron wall, shop lined with Portland cement mortar 41 (potable water and reclaimed water) or epoxy (sanitary force main) and an 42 exterior coating of asphalt. 43 44 B. The pipe shall be designed, manufactured, tested, inspected, and marked 45 according to applicable requirements stated herein and except as modified, 46 shall conform to ANSI /AWWA C104, C150, C151. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -6 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 C. Pipe supplied for this project shall be suitable for use with neutral pH 3 (approximately 7.0) meeting FDEP Part IV water quality standards (reclaimed 4 water), domestic raw sewage (force mains) or chloraminated drinking water 5 (potable water). 6 7 2.03 PIPE DESIGN 8 9 A. All ductile iron pipe shall have a minimum wall thickness corresponding to 10 Class 150, as calculated according to AWWA C150. 11 12 B. Where threaded flanges are used on ductile iron pipe, the minimum thickness 13 of the pipe wall at the last critical thread after threading shall not be less than 14 the minimum calculated thickness of the pipe including net thickness, casting 15 tolerance and service allowance. 16 17 C. The Contractor shall provide design data on the pipe including calculations 18 showing the separate and combined stresses in the wall of the pipe due to the 19 design loads. 20 21 2.04 MATERIALS 22 23 A. All ductile -iron pipes shall meet the requirements of ANSI /AWWA C 24 151/A21.51. The interior of the pipe shall be finished so that the 25 Hazen - Williams friction factor will not be Tess than 130. Each length of pipe 26 shall be hydrostatically tested to at least 500 psi by the manufacturer in 27 accordance with ANSI /AWWA C 151/A21.51. Additionally, 30 -inch and larger 28 pipe shall be hydrostatically tested to 75% of the yield strength of the metal, 29 based on the nominal thickness of the pipe. 30 31 B. Castings and connecting pieces, such as bell and bell, bell and spigot, bell 32 and flange, flange and flange, flange and spigot, and flange and flare, shall 33 meet the requirements of ANSI /AWWA C110/A21.10. Connecting pieces may 34 be fabricated. 35 36 C. The exterior of exposed ductile iron pipe, fittings, glands and bolts shall be 37 field coated with one prime coat of Tnemec 66, 3.0 to 5.0 mils minimum dry 38 film thickness, a second coat of compatible Tnemec Enamel, 4.0 to 6.0 mils 39 per coat minimum dry film thickness and a final coat of Tnemec 73, 2.5 to 4.5 40 mils per coat minimum dry film thickness. Field coatings shall be applied in 41 strict conformance with the coating manufacturer's recommendations and 42 Section 09900. 43 44 D. Pipe that is to be buried shall have the standard asphaltic outside coating 45 specified in ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51. 46 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -7 05/31/13 1 E. The weight and class designation shall be painted conspicuously in a 2 contrasting color on the outside of each pipe, fitting, and special casting after 3 the shop coat has cured. 4 5 F. Epoxy lining for force mains shall be an amine cured epoxy containing at least 6 20% ceramic quartz pigment by volume. The standard of quality is Proteco 7 401 Ceramic Epoxy or approved equal. 8 9 2.05 JOINTS 10 11 A. Flanges and flanged joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the 12 dimensions and requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1. Where threaded 13 flanges are used, they shall be ductile iron and conform to the requirements of 14 ANSI /AWWA Specification C 115/A 21.15. All flanged ductile iron pipe and 15 fittings shall be rated for 250 pound working pressure and shall be faced and 16 drilled to match ANSI B16.1 Class 125 flanges unless special drilling is called 17 for or required. Where tap or stud bolts are required, flanges shall be drilled 18 and tapped accordingly. 19 20 B. All pipe flanges shall be coated with a rust preventive coating;, as specified in 21 ANSI /AWWA Specification C 115/A 21.15, immediately after they have been 22 faced and drilled. 23 24 C. Flanged bolt holes on each end of flanged pipe and fittings shall accurately 25 straddle the same horizontal and vertical centerlines unless special drilling is 26 called for, or required. 27 28 D. The Contractor shall be responsible for assuring that the flanges of the pipe 29 are compatible with the flanges of the various components and /or 30 appurtenances. 31 32 E. Flanged pipe, approximately twelve (12) inches or less in length, shall have 33 flanges cast solidly to pipe barrel. Flanges on pipe longer than twelve (12) 34 inches in length may be of the threaded type. Pipe threads shall be of such 35 length that, with flanges screwed home, the end of the pipe shall project 36 beyond the face line of the flange. Flange and pipe shall then be faced to give 37 a flush finish to the flange and the flange surface shall be normal to the axis of 38 the pipe. Flanges shall be of such design that the flanged neck completely 39 covers the threaded portion of the pipe to protect it against damage and 40 corrosion. 41 42 F Push -on joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and 43 requirements of ANSI /AWWA Specification C111/A 21.11 as they apply to 44 push -on joints. 45 46 G. Mechanical joints for ductile iron piping shall conform to the dimensions and DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -8 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 requirements of ANSI /AWWA Specification C 111/A 21.11. Where stud bolts 2 are required, bells shall be drilled and tapped accordingly. The Contractor 3 shall tighten joint bolts by the use of approved wrenches, to a tension 4 recommended by the pipe Supplier. 5 6 H. Where joints are in contact with liquids, or buried underground, the Contractor 7 shall paint all bolts and nuts with two (2) heavy coats of coal tar pitch and 8 where joints are buried, the joints, including glands and bolts, shall be 9 wrapped with two laps of 8 mil polyethylene film and sealed to the pipe with 10 polyethylene adhesive tape. 11 12 I. Restrained Joints: 13 14 1. All buried pipe shall be restrained as shown on the Drawings and as 15 specified herein. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping 16 system shall be restrained based on the pressures shown on the 17 drawings or specified elsewhere herein. Pipes subject to gravity flow 18 shall be restrained based on 30 psi of working pressure. Restrained 19 joint length indicated in the Tables included on the Drawings represents 20 the length on all sides of fittings and valves within which all joints must 21 be restrained. As a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall 22 be restrained. 23 24 2. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line 25 pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure, but not less 26 than 200 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push -on joints or 27 restrained mechanical joints. 28 29 3. The pipe Supplier's standard restrained joints shall be of the type 30 utilizing cast lugs, shop welded retainer Tugs or retainer rings bearing 31 against pipe shoulders. Field installed joint restraint systems, such as 32 Megalugs, as manufactured by EBAA Iron, or approved equal, are 33 required for restraining mechanical joint fittings. Field welding or 34 grooving of the restrained joint or components shall not be acceptable. 35 Restrained joints shall be capable of withstanding full bulkhead thrust 36 that can be developed within the pipeline due to the sum of the working 37 and surge pressures. 38 39 4. Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically identified on the 40 Drawings. 41 42 5. Joints in tunnels and casings shall be restrained joints as defined 43 previously. 44 45 2.06 FITTINGS 46 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -9 05/31/13 1 1 1 A. All restrained joint, flanged, mechanical joint, and push -on joint shall be ductile I 2 iron and shall be manufactured in accordance with, and shall meet the 3 requirements of ANSI /AWWA Specification C 110/A 21.10 or C153. 4 I 5 B. Dimensions of flanged fittings not included under ANSI /AWV\IA Specification 6 C110 /A 21.10 shall conform to the requirements of ANSI Specification B 16.1, 7 Class 125. Fittings shall be short radius (compact) type were possible. 8 9 C. All fittings shall meet the requirements, as to dimensions and weights, as 10 shown in the current Edition of the "Handbook of Ductile Iron Pipe" of the 11 Ductile Iron Pipe Research Association. 12 13 D. All fittings furnished under ANSI /AWWA Specification C110 /A 21.10 or C153 14 shall be ductile iron and shall have the same minimum pressure rating as the 15 pipe to which it is connected. 16 17 E. Special fittings, where required, shall be of an approved design and have the I 18 same diameters and thickness as standard fittings, unless otherwise required, 19 but their laying lengths and other functional dimensions shall be determined by 20 their positions in the pipelines and by the particular piping materials to which 21 they connect. 22 23 2.07 INTERIOR LINING 24 25 A. Potable Water and Reclaimed Water Piping: 26 27 1. All ductile iron pipe and fittings shall be lined with standard single 1 28 thickness cement mortar lining and bituminous seal coated inside, at 29 the point of manufacture, in accordance with ANSI /AWVVA Specification 30 C 104/A 21.4. Portland cement for cement mortar lining shall be in I 31 accordance with the requirements of ASTM C150, Type II cement. 32 Shop cement -mortar lined pipe shall have smooth dense interior 33 surfaces and shall be free from fractures, excessive interior surface I 34 crazing, disbondment, and roughness. 35 36 2. The Contractor shall take precautions to prevent damage to the interior 37 lining and shall repair all damaged linings to the satisfaction of the 38 Engineer. 39 I 40 3. Test records shall be submitted to the Engineer for his review and 41 approval. 42 111 43 4. The use and type of any admixtures must be approved by the Engineer 44 prior to their use. All material batching shall be by weight. 45 46 5. The method of placing and curing of the mortar lining shall be one with I 47 which the manufacturer has experience and can demonstrate a DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -10 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 successful history. The lining shall be cured in a manner acceptable to 2 the Engineer so that it will provide a hard and durable lining with a 3 minimum of cracks, surface crazing and disbonded areas. 4 5 B. Epoxy Lining for Wastewater Service 6 7 1. Prior to abrasive blasting, the entire area to receive the protective 8 compound shall be inspected for oil, grease, etc. Any areas with oil, 9 grease, or any substance that can be removed by solvent, shall be 10 solvent cleaned to remove those substances. After the surface has 11 been made free of grease, oil or other substances, all areas to receive 12 the protective compounds shall be abrasive blasted using sand or grit 13 abrasive media. The entire surface to be lined shall be struck with the 14 blast media so that all rust, loose oxides, etc., are removed from the 15 surface. Only slight stains and tightly adhering oxide may be left on the 16 surface. Any area where rust reappears before lining must be re- 17 blasted. 18 19 2. After the surface preparation and within 8 hours of surface preparation, 20 the interior of the pipe shall receive 40 mils nominal dry film thickness of 21 Protecto 401. No lining shall take place when the substrate or ambient 22 temperature is below 40 degrees Fahrenheit. The surface also must be 23 dry and dust free. If flange pipe or fittings are included in the project, 24 the lining shall not be used on the face of the flange. 25 26 3. Due to the tolerances involved, the gasket area and spigot end up to 6 27 inches back from the end of the spigot end must be coated with 6 mils 28 nominal, 10 mils maximum using Protecto Joint Compound. The Joint 29 Compound shall be applied by brush to ensure coverage. Care should 30 be taken that the Joint Compound is smooth without excess buildup in 31 the gasket seat or on the spigot ends. Coating of the gasket seat and 32 spigot ends shall be done after the application of the lining. 33 34 4. The number of coats of lining applied shall be as recommended by the 35 lining manufacturer. However, in no case shall this material be applied 36 above the dry thickness per coat recommended by the lining 37 manufacturer in printed literature. The maximum or minimum time 38 between coats shall be that time recommended by the lining material 39 manufacturer. To prevent delamination between coats, no material 40 shall be used for lining which is not indefinitely recoatable with itself 41 without roughening of the surface. 42 43 5. Protecto Joint Compound shall be used for touch -up or repair in 44 accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 45 46 2.08 EXTERIOR COATINGS DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -11 05/31/13 1 2 A. The exterior of all pipe and fittings to be submerged in water and for 3 underground installation shall be given a bituminous coating at the point of 4 manufacture, in accordance with ANSI /AWWA Specification C 151/A 21.51. 5 6 2.09 PIPE APPURTENANCES 7 8 A. Threaded flanges shall be ductile iron and shall meet the requirements of 9 ANSI /AWWA C115/A21.15. Flanges with long hubs for flanged pipe shall be 10 screwed on the threaded end of the pipe in the shop. The face of the flange 11 and the end of the pipe shall be refaced together. There shall be no leakage 12 through the pipe threads, and the flanges shall be designed to prevent 13 corrosion of the threads from outside. Flanges shall meet the requirements of 14 ANSI B16.1, and shall be faced and drilled to that standard, unless special 15 drilling is called for or required. The Contractor shall be responsible for 16 assuring that the flanges of the pipe are compatible with the flanges of the 17 various components and /or appurtenances. They shall be faced accurately at 18 right angles to the pipe axis, drilled smooth and true, and the machined faces 19 covered with zinc dust and tallow or equivalent material. The back of the 20 flanges and bolt holes shall be coated with asphaltic coating meeting the 21 requirements of ANSI /AWWA C151/A21.51, Section 51 -8.1. Coating material 22 shall be applied immediately after facing and drilling. Where tap or stud bolts 23 are required, flanges shall be tapped. All flanged joints shall be thoroughly 24 bolted through, stud or tap bolts of required size. All flanged joints buried 25 underground shall also be protected as specified under Section 2.08. Only 26 flanges made in USA shall be supplied to the Project. 27 28 B. All bolts, studs, and threaded rods used in the finished work for flanges shall 29 be of carbon steel and shall conform to the ASTM A 307 Grade B. The ends 30 of all bolts shall be finished to the standard radius in an acceptable manner. 31 All screw threads shall be "American Standard, Coarse Thread (N.C.). Stud 32 bolts shall be hexagonal, cold pressed semi - finished and made of medium 33 open -hearth steel. All dimensions shall be in accordance with "American 34 Standard, Heavy." Nuts used shall be "Grade A Heavy Hex" in conformance 35 with ASTM A563 and be compatible with the bolts. Bolts and nuts shall be 36 cadmium or zinc plated at the point of manufacture by an approved process 37 with a plating thickness of 0.0003 to 0.0005 inches. All bolts and nuts 38 furnished shall be delivered to the field free from grease, rust, and dirt. 39 40 C. All nuts and bolts that come into contact with water or that are to be buried 41 shall be painted with two (2) heavy coats of an approved coat tar pitch, in 42 accordance with Section 09900. 43 44 D. Gaskets for flanged joints shall be full -faced type EPDM gaskets one - eighth 45 (1/8) inch thick. All gaskets for flanged joints shall be EPDM having a 46 Durometer of 75 to 85 or neoprene having a Durometer of 55 to 65. As an DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -12 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 alternate, the Contractor may supply the pipe Supplier's (manufacturer's) 2 gasket such as American Cast Iron Pipe Company's "Toruseal" gasket or U.S. 3 Pipe's "Flange Tyte" gasket. Gaskets for bell and spigot joints shall be 4 fabricated and tested in accordance with AWWA C111. 5 6 E. Subject to the Engineer's approval, welded outlets shall be allowed; however, 7 the welded -on outlet diameter shall not be greater than one quarter the 8 diameter of the main line. 9 10 2.10 COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS 11 12 A. The Contractor shall furnish and install where required or where shown on the 13 Drawings, manufactured compression couplings equal to Style 38 or Style 39 14 where isolating dielectric couplings are required, as manufactured by the 15 Dresser Manufacturing Division of Dresser Industries or an approved equal. 16 The compression couplings shall consist of two (2) steel follower flanges, one 17 (1) steel middle ring with pipe stops removed, and sufficient rolled thread, 18 track -head bolts to properly compress the gaskets. After fabrication, the 19 middle and follower rings shall be cold expanded to size and dimension. 20 Thickness of the middle ring shall be suitable for the pressures specified, and 21 the application, and in no case be less than one -half (1/2) inch thick. All parts 22 of the compression coupling shall be galvanized or heavily cadmium plated at 23 the point of manufacture and shall be epoxy coated in accordance with AWWA 24 C210 or AWWA C203. 25 26 B. The entire compression sleeve coupling unit shall be rated for working 27 pressure plus surge pressure as a minimum. 28 29 C. The Contractor shall provide field coating for buried couplings in accordance 30 with AWWA C203 and these Contract Documents. 31 32 D. Small deflections in the pipe alignment shall be allowed at compression type 33 coupling joints, but such deflections shall not exceed three (3) degrees 34 between any two (2) adjacent pipe sections. Where changes in line and /or 35 grade in excess of three (3) degrees are required the deflections shall be 36 made by deflecting multiple joints or by using fittings approved by the 37 Engineer. 38 39 PART 3 — EXECUTION 40 41 3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS 42 43 A. The Contractor shall transport, deliver and distribute along the line of the work, 44 the pipe, specials and appurtenances. All Work shall be in strict accordance 45 with the provisions of applicable permits and easements. 46 47 B. Pipe shall be loaded for shipment upon suitable cars or trucks that shall be DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -13 05/31/13 1 provided with padded bunks with nylon belt tie -down straps or padded 2 banding. In loading and unloading the pipe, more than ordinary care shall be 3 taken to prevent any injury to the pipe, ends, coatings and connections. Such 4 work shall be done slowly with the pipe at all times under control, and under 5 no condition shall the pipe be dropped. Field repair of damaged pipe shall not 6 be allowed, except for linings and coatings. The pipe shall be protected during 7 shipping by covering or some other means acceptable to the Engineer to 8 prevent contamination of the pipe and to protect the lining frorn drying during 9 transport. 10 11 C. All pipe, fittings, etc., shall be carefully handled and protected against damage 12 to the lining and coating /interior and exterior surfaces, impact shocks, and free 13 fall. All pipe handling equipment shall be acceptable to the Engineer. Pipe 14 handling equipment shall consist of wide belt slings, padded cradles, or other 15 devices designed and constructed to prevent damage to the pipe or coatings. 16 The use of forks, chains, hooks, or other equipment that may damage the pipe 17 or its lining or coating shall not be allowed. 18 19 D. In distributing the pipe in the field, each pipe shall be placed as nearly as 20 possible to the point where it is to be laid, and facing in the proper direction. 21 Pipe shall not be placed directly on rough ground but shall be supported in a 22 manner that will protect the pipe against injury whenever stored at the trench 23 site or elsewhere. Coated pipe shall be stored on padded skids, sand or dirt 24 berm, sand bags, or other suitable means so that coating will not be damaged. 25 Coated pipe shall be handled with wide belt slings. Pipe fittings and specials 26 which are placed in storage, streets or drives must be so arranged as not to 27 cause undue inconvenience to traffic and must be protected sufficiently to 28 prevent any damage including but not limited to the interior lining and exterior 29 coatings. Chains, cables or other equipment likely to cause damage to the 30 pipe, fitting or special coating or lining shall not be used. Pipe which has been 31 improperly distributed and which must be moved longitudinally along the 32 trench shall be reloaded on a suitable car or truck or lifted and swung by a 33 derrick or moved by such means as may be satisfactory to the Engineer. 34 35 E. If in the process of manufacture, transportation, or handling, any ductile iron 36 pipe, fitting or special receives any deformation to the pipe wall, ends or 37 connections, such pipe, fitting or special shall be rejected and replaced at the 38 Contractor's expense. 39 40 F. In the presence of the Engineer, the Contractor shall inspect upon delivery all 41 pipe, fittings, and specials and mark as "rejected" all pipe lengths and fittings 42 or specials exhibiting signs of damage to the exterior coating, interior cement 43 mortar linings, joint ends, or pipe wall and the Contractor shall at the 44 Contractor's expense immediately remove the same from the job site, or repair 45 to the Engineer's satisfaction. Any pipe, fittings or specials deemed not 46 suitable for installation shall be replaced in kind by the Contractor at the DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -14 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Contractor's own expense. 2 3 G. The Contractor shall inspect each pipe and fitting to insure that there are no 4 damaged portions of the pipe. If any defective pipe is discovered after having 5 been laid, it shall be removed and replaced with a sound pipe or fitting in a 6 satisfactory manner, by the Contractor at the Contractor's own expense. 7 8 H. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean each pipe or fitting of any foreign 9 substance that may have collected on or in it prior to the pipe or fitting being 10 placed in the trench. The openings of all pipes and fittings in the trench shall 11 be closed during any interruption of the Work. As pipe laying progresses, the 12 Contractor shall keep the pipe interior free of all debris. The Contractor shall 13 completely clean the interior of the pipe of all sand, dirt, mortar splatter, and 14 any other debris following completion of pipe laying, pointing of joints and any 15 necessary interior repairs prior to testing and disinfecting the completed 16 pipeline. 17 18 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PIPE 19 20 A. Ductile iron piping shall be installed in strict accordance with the manu- 21 facturer's instructions. Pipe shall be laid only after the trench has been 22 excavated as described Division 2 of the Specifications. Pipe laid in trench 23 shall be laid to a firm and even bearing for its full length. Precautions shall be 24 taken against flotation. The pipe shall be backfilled with selected fine 25 excavated material as shown on the Drawings and thoroughly compacted to 26 one foot above the top of the pipe and thereafter backfilled as specified in 27 Section 02221. 28 29 B. Precautions shall be taken against flotation. Pipe shall be laid directly on the 30 bedding material. Pipe shall be laid in the trench where the bedding forms a 31 continuous and uniform support for the full length of the pipe except that the 32 grade may be disturbed for the removal of lifting tackle. Bell holes shall be 33 formed at the ends of the pipe to prevent point loading at the bells or 34 couplings. Excavation shall be made as needed outside the normal trench 35 section at field joints to permit adequate access to the joints for field 36 connection operations. 37 38 C. Each section of pipe shall be laid in the order and position shown on the laying 39 schedule. In laying pipe, it shall be laid to the set line and grade, within plus or 40 minus one inch. 41 42 D. The maximum obtainable separation between raw water, potable water, 43 reclaimed water ad sewage lines shall be practiced. A minimum horizontal 44 separation of 3 feet, outside to outside, shall be maintained between raw water 45 lines, potable water mains and reclaimed water mains or a minimum of 6 feet 46 separation between sewage lines and either water or potable water lines. In DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -15 05/31/13 1 instances where water lines cross a potable water main or a sewage collection 2 line, a minimum vertical separation of 12 inches shall be maintained between 3 the invert of the upper pipe and the crown of the lower pipe. In instances 4 where a vertical separation of 12 inches between a raw water line and a 5 potable water main or a sewage collection line cannot be achieved, then the 6 raw water line shall be placed in a cast iron sleeve or encased in concrete 7 centered at the point of crossing. 8 9 E. Where necessary to raise or lower the pipe due to unforeseen obstructions or 10 other causes, the Engineer may change the alignment and /or the grades. 11 Such change shall be made by the deflection of joints, or by the use of 12 additional fittings. 13 14 F. Except for short runs that may be permitted by the Engineer, pipe shall not be 15 laid uphill on grades exceeding 10 percent. Pipe that is laid on a downhill 16 grade shall be blocked and held in place until sufficient support is furnished by 17 the following pipe to prevent movement. 18 19 G. Contractor shall coordinate yard piping installation such that a minimum of 36 20 inches of cover is maintained over piping at all times, unless otherwise 21 indicated on the plans. At crossings, a minimum of 6 inches of vertical 22 separation between pipes shall be maintained while also maintaining 36 -inch 23 minimum cover, unless otherwise indicated on the Drawings. 24 25 H. Bedding and backfilling shall be in accordance with Section 02221 of these 26 Specifications and the details shown on the Construction Drawings. 27 28 I. Bedding shall be carefully worked into the area between the trench bottom and 29 the pipe wall to keep it round. Bedding shall not be deposited on top of the 30 pipe, but alongside it, and in such a way that it rises evenly on both sides. 31 32 J. All joints shall be assembled in accordance with the Manufacturer's 33 recommended procedures. In general the procedure shall be as described 34 herein. Immediately before jointing pipe, the bell of the pipe shall be 35 thoroughly cleaned, and a clean gasket shall be placed in the bell groove. 36 The spigot shall be carefully cleaned and the bell containing the gasket and 37 the spigot lubricated with a vegetable -based lubricant. The spigot of the pipe 38 section shall then be aligned with the bell end and inserted into the bell of the 39 previously laid joint and telescoped into its proper position. Tilting of the pipe 40 to insert the spigot into the bell will not be permitted. 41 42 K. Restrained joints shall be assembled in a similar manner as described above 43 except that the restraining device shall be installed in accordance with the 44 Manufacturer's recommended procedures. 45 46 L. Bolt holes of flanges shall straddle the field horizontal and field vertical DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -16 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 centerlines of the pipe. The Contractor shall clean flanges by wire brushing 2 before installing flanged fittings. The Contractor shall clean flange bolts and 3 nuts by wire brushing. 4 5 M. The Contractor shall insert the nuts and bolts (or studs), finger tighten, and 6 progressively tighten diametrically opposite bolts uniformly around the flange 7 to the proper tension. The Contractor shall execute care when tightening 8 joints to prevent any strain upon valves, pumps and other equipment. After 9 tightening all bolts any stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe if it 10 is not to be buried. 11 12 N. If flanges leak under pressure testing, loosen or remove the nuts and bolts, 13 reset or replace the gasket, reinstall or retighten the bolts and nuts, and retest 14 the joints. Flanged joints shall be watertight. 15 16 O. Pipe stulls, if recommended by the Supplier, shall be left in place until bedding 17 and backfilling operations have been completed. After the backfill has been 18 placed, the stulls shall be removed and shall remain the property of the 19 Contractor. 20 21 P After stulls are removed, the Contractor shall check the inside diameter of the 22 pipe to verify that deflection has not exceeded the allowable 3 percent. The 23 frequency of checking shall be as directed by the Engineer but in no case shall 24 be less than the frequency of soil density testing. 25 26 Q. All pipes shall be laid with a 2 -inch metallic tape, appropriately color coded 27 and imprinted with the type of service, 12 inches below final grade and directly 28 above the utility, for identification and ease of location. The appropriate tape 29 color codes are as follows: 30 31 1. Sanitary Force Main: Green 32 2. Potable Water: Blue 33 3. Reclaimed Water: Purple 34 35 R. Care shall be taken in bolting flanged joints so that there is no restraint on the 36 opposite end of one piece which would induce stresses in the pipe or fitting or 37 prevent pressure from being evenly and uniformly applied upon the gasket. 38 The pipe or fitting shall be free to move in any direction while bolting. Bolts 39 shall be gradually tightened, each in turn, at a uniform rate of gasket 40 compression around the entire flange. 41 42 S. No pipe shall be installed upon a foundation into which frost has penetrated or 43 at any time that there is a danger of the formation of ice or penetration of frost 44 at the bottom of the excavation. No pipe shall be laid unless it can be 45 established that the trench will be backfilled before the formation of ice and 46 frost occurs. DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -17 05/31/13 1 2 T Pipes underneath structures and slabs shall be ductile iron and shall have a 6- 3 inch minimum concrete encasement for pipes 24 inches and smaller (except 4 pipes 3 inches and smaller, which shall be SCH 80 PVC). 8 -inch minimum 5 concrete encasement for pipes larger than 24 inches up to and including 36 6 inches and 9 inches minimum concrete encasement for pipes larger than 36 7 inches. Concrete encasement shall extend a minimum of 12 inches past edge 8 of structure or slab. 9 10 U. All pipe and fitting joints occurring within restrained joint limits as required on 11 the Construction Drawings, or as ordered, shall be properly secured to prevent 12 thrust forces from pulling the pipeline joints apart. All tied joints shall be 13 harnessed by using the pipe Manufacturer's standard restrained joint 14 arrangements conforming to these Specifications. Where approved by the 15 Engineer, joints may be restrained by the use of rods and clamps. The rods 16 and clamp harnessing arrangements shall be installed utilizing lugged fittings 17 and pipe with saddle clamps placed to bear against the pipe bells. Saddle 18 clamps around the barrel of the pipe that depend on friction or set screws to 19 prevent sliding of the clamp are not acceptable. The pipe clamps, tie rods and 20 their assembly shall meet the requirements of the National Fire Protection 21 Association Bulletin No. 24. After each tied joint is connected up, all pipe 22 clamps, bolts, heads, tie rods and nuts shall be coated as recommended by 23 the Supplier. 24 25 V. Careful inspection shall be made of every joint to insure a smooth continuous 26 interior surface. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean the interior of the pipe 27 and remove any obstructions that may reduce the pipe's carrying capacity. 28 Following completion of pipeline progressively or in sections, including 29 completion of inside inspections, insofar as might be possible or practicable, 30 the line shall be kept partially filled with water. 31 32 W. The Contractor shall patch the cement mortar lining of any pipe that has a 33 crack exceeding the allowable crack as determined by the Engineer. Lining 34 failures that exceed 100 square inches and that have dimension greater than 35 12- inches shall be cause for the pipe to be rejected. There shall not be more 36 than one patch on the lining of any one joint of pipe, fitting or special. 37 38 X. Wherever necessary and approved by the Engineer, patches shall be made by 39 the Contractor with a mortar of one part Portland cement and two parts clean, 40 sharp sand; all measurements to be by weight. No pipe requiring the lining to 41 be patched shall be installed until the patch is placed. Pipe thus patched shall 42 not be installed until the patch has been properly and adequately cured and 43 approved for laying by the Engineer. 44 45 Y. All buried process piping (excluding drainage and stormwater piping) shall be 46 restrained in accordance with the restrained joint table provided in the 47 Drawings. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a pumping system shall 48 be restrained based on a 150 psi working pressure. Pipes subject to gravity DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -18 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 flow shall be restrained based on a 30 psi working pressure. Restrained joint 2 length indicated in the Tables represents the length on all sides of fittings and 3 valves within which all joints must be restrained. As a minimum, the joints at 4 all fittings and valves shall be restrained. Restrained joints shall be capable of 5 holding against withdrawal for line pressures 50 percent above the normal 6 working pressure but not less than 150 psi on pipe subject to pressure and 30 7 psi on pipe subject to gravity flow. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained 8 mechanical joints. 9 10 3.03 CUTTING PIPE 11 12 A. Whenever pipes require cutting to fit into the lines, the work shall be done in a 13 satisfactory manner so as to leave a smooth end, at right angles to the axis of 14 the pipe. Pipe cutting shall only be done by saws specifically designed for that 15 purpose. After cutting, the end of the pipe shall be beveled to the dimensions 16 of the Manufacturer's specifications. 17 18 3.04. COMPRESSION SLEEVE COUPLINGS 19 20 A. The Contractor shall thoroughly clean with a wire brush all surfaces that will be 21 in contact with the gaskets. 22 23 B. The follower rings shall be placed over the pipe ends, then the Contractor shall 24 slip the gaskets that have been lubricated with an approved vegetable based 25 lubricant over the pipe ends. The Contractor shall place the middle ring over 26 the previously laid pipe then insert the end of the joining pipe into the middle 27 ring, and position both gaskets evenly in the middle ring gasket grooves. The 28 Contractor shall insert bolts in bolt holes of follower rings and tighten nuts in 29 the sequence and with the torque requirements of the coupling manufacturer. 30 After tightening all bolts the stulls shall be removed from the interior of the pipe 31 if it is not to be buried. 32 33 3.05 DRILLING AND TAPPING 34 35 A. Where shown on the Construction Drawings or where required, ductile iron 36 pipe, fittings or specials shall be drilled and tapped to receive drainage outlets, 37 air relief outlets, or other pipe or plugs for pressure testing and /or chlorination. 38 Holes shall be drilled accurately and at right angles to the axis of the pipe or 39 fitting. 40 41 B. Where size of the outlet pipe to be connected is such as to require bosses or 42 reinforcement saddles for making the connection, the Contractor shall furnish 43 such outlet connections with bosses or reinforcement saddles drilled and 44 tapped as indicated on the Construction Drawings or as approved by the 45 Engineer. 46 47 3.06 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -19 05/31/13 1 2 A. The Contractor shall remove all debris, dirt, grease, mortar and other foreign 3 material by the use of soap and water or other solvent as may be required. 4 5 B. After each joint has been made the Contractor shall give all steel bolts and 6 nuts a chemical wash of the phosphate type followed by one (1) coat of primer 7 especially prepared for the finish of the bolt and nut installed. After this 8 pretreatment, the Contractor shall coat all bolts and nuts as follows: 9 10 C. Give all bolts and nuts that will be exposed one (1) coat of primer. 11 12 D. Paint all bolts and nuts that will be underground in accordance with these 13 Contract Documents. 14 15 E. All piping and fittings shall have its surface prepared and painted as specified 16 in Sections 09865 and 09900. 17 18 3.07 SUPPLIER'S FIELD SERVICE 19 20 A. Contractor shall, at no additional cost to Owner, arrange for pipe 21 Manufacturer's field representative to be on -site and provide instruction to 22 each crew working during the installation of a minimum of four push -on joints 23 and four restrained joints The Manufacturer's field representative shall certify 24 that the installations observed were satisfactorily completed and all pipe 25 installation crews were familiar with the proper methods and procedures for 26 the pipeline installations. 27 28 3.08 FLUSHING AND TESTING 29 30 A. The Contractor shall remove all sand and foreign matter from the pipeline as 31 work progresses. The ends of all pipes shall be suitably closed, in a manner 32 approved by the Engineer, at each break or pause in pipe laying, and at the 33 end of each work day, so as to minimize the amount of materials that can 34 enter the pipe. 35 36 B. Prior to pressure testing, all 24 -inch and smaller mains shall be flushed to 37 remove all sand and other foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water 38 shall not be less than 2 feet per second. Flushing shall be terminated at the 39 direction of the Engineer. The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water 40 without causing property damage or violation of environmental regulations or 41 permits. 42 43 C. Prior to pressure testing, all 30 -inch and larger mains shall be televised. All 44 dirt and foreign matter shall be removed and the pipe shall be cleaned in a 45 manner approved by the Engineer. After cleaning, the mains shall be re- 46 televised. Pre -and post - cleaning videotapes shall be furnished to the Owner. 47 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -20 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D. Testing of lines shall be as specified in Section III. 2 3 4 END OF SECTION 5 6 DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -21 05/31/13 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK DUCTILE IRON PIPE AND FITTINGS 15062 -22 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15064 2 3 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required and install in 10 the locations as shown on the Drawings, the PVC piping, fittings and 11 appurtenances as specified herein. 12 13 B. The requirements of this specification 15064 supersede relevant articles in 14 Section IV. 15 16 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEM 17 18 A. Piping shall be installed in the locations as shown on the Drawings. 19 20 B. All pipe, fittings, valves, solvents and glue used for potable water piping shall 21 be NSF -61 certified for continuous contact with potable water. 22 23 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS 24 25 A. All PVC pipe, fittings and appurtenances shall be furnished by a single 26 manufacturer who is fully experienced, reputable and qualified in the 27 manufacture of the items to be furnished. The equipment shall be designed, 28 constructed, and installed in accordance with the best practices and methods 29 and shall comply with these Specifications. 30 31 1.04 SUBMITTALS 32 33 A. Shop drawings shall be submitted to the Engineer for review in accordance 34 with the General Conditions and shall include dimensioning and technical 35 specification for all piping to be furnished. 36 37 B. Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein. 38 39 1.05 TOOLS 40 41 A. Special tools, solvents, lubricants, and caulking compounds required for 42 normal installation shall be furnished with the pipe. 43 44 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 45 46 2.01 MATERIALS POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 -1 05/31/13 1 2 A. Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Pipe: 3 4 1. Class -rated PVC pipe and accessories four to twelve inches (4 " -12 ") in 5 diameter, where shown or as specified on the Drawings, shall meet the 6 requirements of AWWA Specification C900 "Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) 7 Pressure Pipe." Pipe shall be Class 235, meeting requirements of 8 Dimension Ratio (DR) 18 with cast iron outside diameters. Each length 9 of pipe shall be hydrotested to four (4) times its class pressure by the 10 manufacturer in accordance with AWWA C900. W3 RCW piping shall 11 be pipe Class 200 meeting requirements of Dimension Ratio (DR) 14. 12 13 2. Class -rated fourteen inch (14 ") or larger PVC pipe and accessories for 14 force main use only shall meet the requirements of AWWA Speci- 15 fication C905, "Polyvinyl Chloride Water Transmission Pipe ". Pipe shall 16 be Class 235, meeting the requirements of DR 18 with cast iron outside 17 diameters. Each length of pipe shall be hydrotested by the 18 manufacturer to two (2) times its class pressure in accordance with 19 AWWA C905. 20 21 3. Pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4" shall be 200 psi SDR -21 22 conforming to the requirements of ASTM D2241. Potable water main 23 pipe shall have EPDM gasket push -on joints conforming to ASTM F 24 477. Force main pipe shall have SBR gasket push -on joints conforming 25 to ASTM F-477. 26 27 4. PVC pipe less than 4" in diameter which is exposed to view shall be 28 ASTM D -1785 Schedule 80 pipe with UV inhibitors. 29 30 5. All PVC pipe shall be new, unused and manufactured for this project. 31 Polyvinyl chloride sewer pipe shall conform to ASTM D -3034, F794, 32 and D -1784 (PVC compound). The PVC pipe shall be manufactured by 33 Johns - Manville Corporation, Certain -Teed Corporation, or equal. All 34 PVC sewer pipe shall be green and conspicuously labeled with the 35 manufacturer's name, nominal pipe size, applicable material code or 36 PVC cell classification, standard dimension ratio number, product type, 37 standard specification designation, and production record code. 38 39 6. Pipe shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories. Provisions shall be 40 made for expansion and contraction at each joint with an elastomeric 41 ring, and shall have an integral thickened bell as part of each joint. 42 PVC Class pipe shall be installed in accordance with the Uni -Bell 43 Plastic Pipe Association Guide Specification UNI- B -3 -76, and as 44 recommended by the manufacturer. 45 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 7 Pipe shall be furnished in nominal lengths of approximately 20 feet, 2 unless otherwise directed by the Engineer. Pipe for potable water 3 supply and accessories shall bear the NSF mark indicating pipe size, 4 manufacturer's name, and AVWVA and /or ASTM Specification number, 5 working pressure and production code. Pipe and couplings shall be 6 made from Class 12454 -A or Class 12454 -B virgin compound, as 7 designed in ASTM D1784. 8 9 8. PVC pipe shall be color coded as follows: sanitary mains - green; 10 potable water mains - blue; reclaimed water mains — lavender, process 11 piping — brown. Specific colors shall match county standard colors as 12 applicable. 13 14 B. Joints: 15 16 1. Joints for PVC sewer shall be of the bell and spigot type conforming to 17 ASTM D -3212 using factory installed flexible elastomeric seals 18 (gaskets). These gaskets shall be SBR and shall conform to ASTM F- 19 477. Joints for PVC water pipe shall be of the bell and spigot type 20 using factory installed, flexible elastomeric seals (gaskets). These 21 gaskets shall be EPDM and shall conform to ASTM F -477. 22 23 2. The PVC joints for buried pipe shall be of the push -on type unless 24 otherwise directed by the Engineer so that the pipe and fittings may be 25 connected on the job without the use of solvent cement or any special 26 equipment. The push -on joint shall be a single rubber gasket joint 27 designed to be assembled by the positioning of a continuous, molded 28 rubber ring gasket in annular recess in the pipe or fitting socket and the 29 forcing of the plain end of the entering pipe into the socket, thereby 30 compressing the gasket radially to the pipe to form a positive seal. The 31 gasket and annular recess shall be designed and shaped so that the 32 gasket is locked in place against displacement as the joint is 33 assembled. The rubber ring joint shall be designed for thermal 34 expansion or contraction with a total temperature change of at least 75 35 degrees F in each joint per length of pipe. The bell shall consist of an 36 integral wall section with a solid cross - section elastomeric ring which 37 shall meet requirements of ASTM D1869. The thickened bell section 38 shall be designed to be at least as strong as the pipe wall. Lubricant 39 furnished for lubricating joints shall be nontoxic, shall not support the 40 growth of bacteria, shall have no deteriorating effects on the gasket or 41 pipe material, and shall not impart color, taste, or odor to the water. 42 43 3. PVC joints for exposed pipe shall be threaded or solvent welded joints 44 where called for on the Drawings, unless otherwise directed by the 45 Engineer. Teflon thread tape or liquid Teflon thread lubricant shall be 46 used on all threaded joints to serve as both a sealer and lubricant. POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 -3 05/31/13 1 Threaded joints should be made hand tight (hard). When the joint is 2 hand tight a strap wrench should be used to make up one to two (1 -2) 3 additional full turns past the hand tight point. Do not use pipe wrenches 4 or pump pliers on plastic pipe or fittings. 5 6 C. Fittings: 7 8 1. Fittings for pressure rated PVC pipe smaller than 4" in diameter shall be 9 solvent weld or threaded Schedule 80 PVC and shall conform to ASTM 10 Specification D 2467 or D D2464 as appropriate. 11 12 2. The manufacturer of the pipe shall supply all polyvinyl chloride 13 accessories as well as any adaptors and /or specials required to perform 14 the work as shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Standard 15 double bell couplings will not be accepted where the pipe will slip 16 completely through the coupling. 17 18 2.02 RESTRAINED JOINTS 19 20 A. All buried piping shall be restrained in accordance with the restrained joint 21 table provided in the Drawings. Pipes subject to pressure or being fed by a 22 pumping system shall be restrained based on a 150 psi working pressure. 23 Pipes subject to gravity flow shall be restrained based on a 30 psi working 24 pressure. Restrained joint length indicated in the Tables represents the length 25 on all sides of fittings and valves within which all joints must be restrained. As 26 a minimum, the joints at all fittings and valves shall be restrained. 27 28 B. Restrained joints shall be capable of holding against withdrawal for line 29 pressures 50 percent above the normal working pressure but not less than 30 150 psi. The pipe and fittings shall be restrained push -on joints or restrained 31 mechanical joints. 32 33 C. PVC push -on pipe bell and spigot joints shall be restrained with the Uni- Flange 34 Corp. Series 1390 Restrainer or approved equal. The restraining device and 35 Tee head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron meeting 36 ASTM A -536, Grade 65- 45 -12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be manufac- 37 tured of corrosion resistance high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel meeting 38 the requirements of ASTM A -242. 39 40 D. Ductile iron mechanical joint fittings used with PVC pipe shall be restrained 41 with the Uni - Flange Corp. Series 1300 Restrainer, EBAA Iron, Inc., Series 42 2000PV Mechanical Joint Restraint Gland, or approved equal. The restraining 43 device and Tee head bolts shall be manufactured of high strength ductile iron 44 meeting ASTM A -536, Grade 65- 45 -12. Clamping bolts and nuts shall be 45 manufactured of corrosion resistant high strength, low alloy CORTEN steel 46 meeting the requirements of ASTM A -242. 47 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 -4 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. Thrust blocks shall not be permitted unless specifically shown on the 2 Drawings. 3 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 5 6 3.01 HANDLING PIPE AND FITTINGS 7 8 A. Care shall be taken in loading, transporting, and unloading to prevent injury to 9 the pipe. Pipe or fittings shall not be dropped. Any damaged pipe or fittings 10 shall be replaced. 11 12 B. All pipe and fittings shall be subjected to a careful inspection just prior to being 13 laid or installed, and no piece shall be installed which is found to be defective. 14 15 C. If any defective pipe is discovered after it has been laid or installed, it shall be 16 removed and replaced with a sound pipe in a satisfactory manner at no 17 additional expense to the Owner. All pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly 18 cleaned before laying, shall be kept clean until they are used in the work, and 19 when installed or laid, shall conform to the lines and grades required. 20 21 3.02 INSTALLING EXPOSED PVC PIPE AND FITTINGS 22 23 A. All piping and fittings shall be installed true to alignment and rigidly supported 24 thrust anchors shall be provided where required. Each length of pipe shall be 25 cleaned out before erection. 26 27 B. Sleeves shall be installed of proper size for all pipes passing through floors or 28 walls as shown on the Drawings. Where indicated on the Drawings or 29 required for liquid or gas- tightness the pipe be sealed with a mechanical seal 30 equal to Link -Seal as manufactured by Thunderline Corp., Wayne, Michigan. 31 32 C. Concrete inserts for hangers and supports shall be furnished and installed in 33 the concrete as it is placed. The inserts shall in accordance with the 34 requirements of the piping layout and jointing method and their locations shall 35 be verified from approved piping layout drawings and the structural drawings. 36 Pipe hangers and supports are specified in Section 15094 of these 37 specifications. 38 39 D. All valves, fittings, equipment, and appurtenances needed upon the pipelines 40 shall be set and jointed as indicated on the Drawings or as required. Valves 41 and appurtenances are included in Section 15100 of these specifications. All 42 pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in such a 43 manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. When 44 manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not be 45 transmitted to their equipment, a certification shall be submitted stating that 46 such requirements have been complied with. 47 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 -5 05/31/13 1 3.03 FLUSHING AND TESTING 2 3 A. Prior to pressure testing, all mains shall be flushed to remove all sand and 4 other foreign matter. The velocity of the flushing water shall not be less than 2 5 feet per second. Flushing shall be terminated at the direction of the Engineer. 6 The Contractor shall dispose of the flushing water without causing a nuisance 7 or property damage. 8 9 B. Complete PVC piping systems shall be field pressure tested after installation 10 and including all components to 150 psi for 2 hours. Any leaks discovered 11 during testing shall be repaired. The repaired component or portion must be 12 retested until the entire system passes the pressure testing. 13 14 3.04 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING 15 16 A. All piping and fittings exposed to view shall have its surface prepared and be 17 painted as specified in Sections 09865 and 09900 of these specifications. 18 Surface preparation and shop priming is a part of the work of this Section. 19 Pipe marking is included in Section 09900, but it shall be part of the work of 20 this Section to assist as required by the Engineering in identifying pipe 21 contents, direction of flow and all else required for proper marking of pipe. 22 23 24 END OF SECTION 25 POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPE AND FITTINGS 15064 -6 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15080 2 3 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 WORK INCLUDED 8 9 The Contractor shall furnish all the materials, tools, labor, supervision and appliances 10 for and shall properly install, connect, adjust, test and place at the locations shown 11 on the Drawings, or as directed, all copper pipe and fittings and small diameter 12 miscellaneous pipe and fittings at the locations and to the elevations indicated, 13 specified or required, as necessary for the proper completion of the Work. 14 15 Attention is called to the fact that miscellaneous pipe and fittings are not necessarily 16 shown complete on the Drawings, which are more or less schematic, but the 17 Contractor shall do all piping work indicated or required for the proper operation of 18 all equipment and services requiring such piping, and all such work shall be done by 19 competent workmen in a thorough workmanlike manner, according to best custom 20 and practice, and in compliance with all Laws and Regulations, with proper provisions 21 for dismantling, draining, expansion and contraction. 22 23 Wherever the Work disturbs existing conditions or Work already completed, the same 24 shall be restored to its original condition in every detail. All such replacement and 25 repair shall meet with the approval of the Engineer. 26 27 It is the intent of these Contract Documents to require an installation under this 28 Section complete in every detail, whether or not indicated on the Drawings, or 29 specified herein. Consequently, the Contractor shall be responsible for all details, 30 devices, accessories and special construction necessary to properly furnish, install, 31 adjust, test and place in continuous and satisfactory service a complete installation of 32 miscellaneous pipe and fittings. 33 34 Full responsibility for fabricating, and installing the miscellaneous pipe and fittings, for 35 selecting materials of construction, and for demonstrating strict compliance with 36 specified performance requirements shall rest with the Contractor and, through the 37 Contractor, the Supplier. The Engineer's approval of the 1) Shop Drawings, 2) 38 construction of the miscellaneous pipe and fittings, 3) the use of materials included in 39 this Specification, shall not relieve the Contractor and Suppliers of full responsibility 40 for meeting all performance requirements and guarantees specified in the Contract 41 Documents. 42 43 1.02 REFERENCE TO OTHER SECTIONS 44 45 Requirements contained herein under the Specifications for Ductile Iron Pipe shall be 46 considered as and are hereby made a part of the Specifications for Small Diameter SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -1 06/24/14 1 Pipe and Fittings insofar as they may apply. 2 3 1.03 WORKMANSHIP AND MATERIALS 4 5 The Contractor shall furnish materials under this Specification which are new, unused 6 and as specified, or if not particularized herein, which are the best of their respective 7 kind, free of defects and imperfections, and suitable for the service intended, subject 8 to the approval of the Engineer. 9 10 The Contractor shall provide workmanship which is first class in every respect and 11 have the installation performed by workers thoroughly experienced in such work. A 12 neat and workmanlike appearance in the finished work shall be required. 13 14 The Contractor shall perform the Work in accordance with all Laws and Regulations. 15 16 1.04 SUBMITTALS 17 18 The Contractor shall submit detailed, dimensioned Shop Drawings and data 19 conforming to the requirements of Section 01300 and 01340 of the General 20 Requirements to the Engineer for approval before fabrication, shipment or Work 21 specified under this Section begins. 22 23 The Contractor shall make detailed drawings for pipe and fittings to a scale of not 24 Tess than 1/4 inch equals one (1) foot, indicating piping layout in plan and elevation 25 as may be required to clearly indicate all pipe and fittings. Completely dimension the 26 drawings and indicate connections to equipment and reference to approved shop 27 drawings of such equipment. 28 29 The Contractor shall include a complete schedule of pipe, fittings and specials with 30 mark numbers on the schedules and on drawings corresponding to the mark 31 numbers which will be on the pipe, fittings and specials when delivered to the job site, 32 as called for hereinafter. 33 34 The Contractor shall indicate location and type of pipe supports, hangers and 35 anchors on the Shop Drawings. 36 37 PART 2 - MATERIALS 38 39 2.01 STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 40 41 Steel pipe, when specifically called for, shall meet the "Standard Specification for 42 Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot - Dipped Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) Welded and Seamless, 43 for Ordinary Uses," - A.S.T.M. Designation: A 120 -83. Schedule 40 pipe shall be 44 "Standard Weight" pipe and used except as modified herein. Fittings used on black 45 steel pipe lines two and one -half (2 -1/2) inches or less in diameter, unless otherwise 46 specifically called for, shall be standard weight, one hundred fifty (150) pound, SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -2 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 beaded, malleable iron conforming to ASTM A338 for "Malleable Iron Flanges, Pipe 2 Fittings and Valve Parts for Railroad, Marine and other Heavy Duty Service" at 3 temperatures up to 650 °F (345 °C), Class 150. Fittings used on black steel pipe lines 4 three (3) inches and larger shall be of the welded American National Standards 5 Institute (A.N.S.I.) type, long radius design of standard weights, A.N.S.I. B 16.9 -1971, 6 "Factory- Made Wrought Steel Buttwelding Fittings." 7 8 Flanges shall be of the forged steel slip -on type, faced and drilled, of the one 9 hundred fifty (150) pound series, meeting A.N.S.I. Specification B 16.5 -1977 "Steel 10 Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings" , and "Standard Specification for Forging, Carbon 11 Steel for General Purpose Piping," A.S.T.M. Designation: A 181 -83. 12 13 All gaskets for flanged pipe joints except for air or steam service shall be full face 14 type with a minimum thickness of one - eighth (1/8) inch and shall be red rubber or 15 neoprene. Air and steam service gaskets shall be compressed non - asbestos material 16 Style No. 3000 Garlock Blue Gard, similar products by Cranite or equal. 17 18 The Contractor shall provide unions in each run of pipe and at equipment for easy 19 removal. Furnish unions of the ground joint type with brass seats. No gasketed 20 unions shall be permitted. 21 22 The Contractor shall provide fittings as required and expansion couplings in each run 23 of straight pipe and at structural expansion joints. Groove pipe for expansion 24 couplings where noted or specified. 25 26 The Contractor shall provide each length of pipe with a coupling. 27 28 Malleable iron screwed fittings shall meet the standards of A. N.S.I. B 16.3 -1977, 29 "Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings ". Hot - dipped galvanized malleable iron fittings 30 shall be used on all galvanized steel pipe lines. Malleable iron grooved end fittings 31 shall meet the requirements of "Standard Specification for Malleable Iron Castings ", 32 A.S.T.M. A 47 -77 and be hot - dipped galvanized. Furnish pipe and fittings with sound, 33 well fitting threads. Pieces having defective threads shall be rejected. 34 35 2.02 STAINLESS STEEL PIPE AND FITTINGS 36 37 All stainless steel pipe and fittings shall be made of Type 304 stainless steel, unless 38 shown or specified otherwise. Stainless steel pipe shall be seamless or welded and 39 furnished in strict accordance with "Standard Specification for Seamless and Welded 40 Austenitic Stainless Steel Pipe" , A.S.T.M. Designation A 312 -83 and fittings in 41 accordance with "Standard Specification for Wrought Austenitic Stainless Steel 42 Piping Fittings ", A.S.T.M. Designation A 403 -83a. Butt welded fittings shall meet the 43 standards of ANSI B 16.9 -1971. All pipe and fittings shall be annealed and pickled, 44 and shall have a surface finish equivalent to a No. 1 Mill Finish in accordance with 45 "Standard Specification for General Requirements for Flat - Rolled Stainless and Heat - 46 Resisting Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip ", A.S.T.M. Designation A 480/ A 480M -83a. SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -3 06/24/14 1 1 1 Schedule 40 pipe shall be "Standard Weight." Fittings shall have the same schedule 2 wall thickness as the pipe. 3 4 Where stainless steel pipe is connected by grooved -end couplings or flange 5 adaptors, the pipe shall be of the roll grooved (no metal removed) end type. 6 7 All welding shall be done by a fully automatic, shielded arc, inert gas method. Welds 8 shall be fully penetrated and gas shielded on both sides. All welds shall be smooth, 9 uniform bead and thickness, and brushed with stainless steel wire brush, with 10 deposits and discoloration removed. 11 12 2.03 COPPER PIPE AND FITTINGS 13 14 All copper pipe shall be of standard size, as indicated on the Drawings, specified or 1 15 required and shall conform in all respects to the "Standard Specification for Seamless 16 Copper Water Tube," A.S.T.M. Designation: B 88 -83. The Contractor shall provide 17 copper tubing manufactured by Anaconda American Brass Company, Revere Copper 1 18 and Brass, Inc., or equal. Copper water pipe, when used underground, shall be Type 19 K, soft temper, coil or straight lengths as directed and when used elsewhere shall be 20 Type L, hard temper, drawn copper tubing, unless otherwise specifically called for. 21 All fittings on these lines shall be cast bronze fittings, as manufactured by Mueller 22 Company; Stanley G. Flagg Co.; or equal. For soft temper tubing the Contractor shall 23 provide cast bronze flared tube type fittings. For hard drawn copper tube fittings the 24 Contractor shall provide the cast bronze sweat type. Unions shall be of the solder 25 type, with brass -to -brass seats. Gasketed unions shall not be acceptable. A liberal 26 amount of unions shall be installed to allow removal of valves and equipment. 27 28 Where copper piping is connected to steel pipe, the Contractor shall furnish and 29 install an insulating union by EPCO Sales, Incorporated, or Capital Manufacturing 30 Co., or equal. 31 32 Where copper pipe is connected to ductile iron pipe, the Contractor shall furnish and I 33 install a tapped cap, Clow F -1042, or ACIPCO Type A -338 or equal, and a brass 34 corporation stops, Type HI5025 by Mueller Co., or equal. 35 36 2.04 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS 37 38 Brass pipe shall meet the "Standard Specification for Seamless Brass Tube," 39 A.S.T.M. Designation: B 135 -82, drawn temper. Fittings shall be brass. 40 41 2.05 PIPING SCHEDULE 42 43 Unless otherwise called for by the Drawings or elsewhere in these Specifications, the 44 following schedule shall be a guide of minimum requirements for piping for the Work. 45 46 I. Pipe for Underground Service SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS I 15080 -4 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 A. Potable Water and Sealing Water 3 4 1. 3" and smaller - Type K (heavy wall) soft temper copper tube 5 with soldered fittings. 6 7 B. Compressed Air 8 9 1. 2" and smaller - Type K (heavy wall) soft temper copper tube 10 with soldered fittings. 11 12 2. 2 -1/2" to 4" - Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe with 13 screwed joints, slip -on flanges or compression couplings. 14 15 All ungalvanized (black) steel pipe for underground service shall be coated with a 16 polyethylene sheath. The coating system shall meet Federal Specification L -C- 17 530B. All joints shall be wrapped after laying, so that the finished job shall be 18 completely protected. 19 20 II. Pipe for Nonburied Service, Carrying: 21 22 A. Potable Water and Sealing Water 23 24 1. 3" and smaller - Type L (medium wall) hard temper copper pipe 25 with soldered fittings. Use red brass pipe around equipment, and 26 in other locations where vibration is expected. 27 28 B. Compressed Air 29 30 1. 2" and smaller - Type L (medium wall), hard temper copper pipe 31 with soldered fittings. Use red brass pipe around equipment, and 32 in other locations where vibration is expected. 33 34 2. 2 -1/4" to 6" - Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe, with screwed 35 joints, slip -on flanges or compression couplings. 36 37 C. Vent Gases 38 39 1. 3 -1/2" and smaller - Schedule 40 galvanized steel, with 40 screwed joints, slip -on flanges or compression couplings. 41 42 D. Hydraulic Piping 43 44 1. 1/2" and less - Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe with hydraulic 45 connectors. 46 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -5 06/24/14 1 2. 3/4" and larger - Schedule 40 stainless steel pipe with screwed 2 joints or welded joints. 3 4 All ungalvanized (black) steel piping for interior use, that is not covered by insulation, 5 shall be primed and painted as specified under the painting schedule of Section 6 09900. 7 8 Where more rigidity is required in erecting and supporting copper pipe, the Contractor 9 shall, with the approval of the Engineer or when so directed by the Engineer, 10 substitute brass pipe. 11 12 2.06 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 13 14 The Contractor shall provide all necessary hangers and supports for piping installed 15 in the Work. 16 17 Hangers and supports for all steel or other piping shall meet the following 18 requirements. No perforated strap hangers and no wire supports shall be permitted. 19 20 Hangers supporting insulated piping 2 -1/2" and larger shall be sized to fit the pipe 21 plus the insulation. The insulation at support points shall be provided with metal 22 shields to prevent damage to the insulation. 23 24 Pipe hangers used to support uninsulated copper piping shall be copper or copper 25 plated. 26 27 Guides shall be located not more than twenty (20) feet away from each expansion 28 loop or joint. 29 30 Horizontal runs of pipe shall have supports spaced so that the sag of the 31 unsupported length shall not create any pockets in the piping. 32 33 All vertical piping shall be supported at the base with fittings made for this purpose or 34 supported from the nearest horizontal member or floor with a riser extension pipe 35 clamp. The Contractor shall provide riser extension clamps at each floor. 36 37 All anchors that are installed in existing concrete shall be expansion case inserts. 38 The Contractor shall drill clean holes for insertion of case and patch concrete around 39 drill hole as required. 40 41 The Contractor shall furnish and install concrete inserts that shall be cast in the 42 concrete walls and slabs as required for the proper hanging and supporting of the 43 piping and equipment that is to be furnished and installed. 44 45 If approved by the Engineer, continuous slotted concrete inserts shall be shall be 46 used. The Contractor shall provide secondary angle supports between main inserts SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -6 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 to hang the various pipes where the Toads are such that they can be properly 2 supported by this arrangement. 3 4 All inserts and support bolts shall be galvanized. 5 6 2.07 SLEEVES AND FLOOR PLATES 7 8 Wherever pipes pass through floors, walls or ceilings, the Contractor shall provide 9 Standard Wall steel pipe sleeves of the proper size. The Contractor shall properly 10 cement or build sleeves into the masonry in a rigid position. The Contractor shall set 11 ends of the sleeves flush at wall and ceiling surfaces and to extend one inch above 12 floor surfaces. 13 14 For sleeves in walls below grade, the Contractor shall provide water stops and tightly 15 caulk after the pipe is installed. Such sleeves shall be completed tight and tested for 16 leaks. 17 18 PART 3 - EXECUTION 19 20 3.01 INSTALLATION 21 22 All pipe shall be carefully placed by the Contractor to proper lines and grades and 23 shall be connected up, unless otherwise shown or indicated, with screw fittings. 24 Screw joints shall be made tight, with an approved jointing compound, and screwed 25 home. If welding of pipe is called for, it shall be installed in accord with the 26 requirements of the Engineer. 27 28 All piping shall be installed in such manner and at such times as will require a 29 minimum of cutting and repairing of the building structures. In case any such cutting 30 and repairing is necessary, it shall be done only with the permission of the Engineer. 31 All cutting and repairing shall be performed by mechanics of the trade which originally 32 executed the work, with all repairs matching the original condition. 33 34 The following general piping practices, when applicable, shall be followed in installing 35 all steel, copper and brass piping: 36 37 1. Full lengths of pipe shall be used wherever possible; short lengths of pipe with 38 couplings shall not be permitted. 39 40 2. All pipe shall be cut to exact measurement and shall be installed without 41 forcing or springing. 42 43 3. Tool marks and unnecessary pipe threads shall not be allowed. Burrs formed 44 when cutting pipe shall be removed by reaming. Before installing any pipe, 45 care shall be taken that the inside is thoroughly clean and free of cuttings and 46 foreign matter. SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -7 06/24/14 1 2 4. In general, all changes in direction shall be made by using pipe fittings. Field 3 bends of pipe shall not be permitted. Wherever there is a galvanized steel 4 pipeline longer than 30 feet, the Contractor shall provide a plugged tee in the 5 line. 6 7 5. A liberal number of unions shall be used on pipe two and one -half (2 -1/2) 8 inches or smaller in diameter, and companion flanges on pipe three (3) 9 inches and larger, to permit the ready removal of any section. Unions shall 10 be installed in all piping connections to equipment, to regulating valves, and 11 wherever necessary to facilitate the removal of valves, strainers, accessories 12 and other items requiring maintenance. Flanges on equipment may be 13 considered as unions when connecting pipe is provided with companion 14 flanges. All unions shall be of the ground joint type, with brass -to -metal seats. 15 No gasketed unions will be permitted. Where wrought iron or steel pipe is to 16 be connected to copper pipe, a dielectric union, such as those 17 manufactured by EPCO Sales, Inc., Capital Manufacturing Company, or 18 equal, shall be used. 19 20 6. Exposed piping shall be neatly arranged, straight, run parallel and at right 21 angles to walls, unless otherwise directed or shown, and shall be so graded 22 that the entire system can be drained. Drain valves or stop and waste valves 23 shall be installed at all low points of piping. 24 25 7. Installed piping shall not interfere with the operation or accessibility of doors or 26 windows, shall not encroach on aisles, passageways, and equipment, and 27 shall not interfere with the servicing or maintenance of any equipment. 28 29 8. The Contractor shall cut annealed, Type K, copper tube square, ream ends 30 and flare using suitable tools. The Contractor shall use bending tools for 31 making bend on annealed copper pipe only and shall assemble hard drawn, 32 Type L, copper tubing, using solder alloy and flux as recommended by the 33 manufacturer of the tubing. The Contractor shall cut tubing square, ream ends, 34 and polish both fitting and tube with steel wool before fluxing; properly heat, 35 taking care not to overheat and after running solder, wipe the joint clean. The 36 Contractor shall install copper tubing only in accordance with the supplier's 37 instructions. 38 39 9. Where copper tubing is connected to ferrous piping or equipment with ferrous 40 fittings, the Contractor shall provide approved insulating bushings. 41 42 10. Where copper lines pass through exterior walls, the Contractor shall carry 43 Type K through a pipe sleeve provided for this purpose and connect Type L 44 inside the building by use of adapter fittings. 45 46 11. All welding of steel pipe shall be carried out in strict accordance with A.W.S. SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -8 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 procedures. Welding of black steel pipe shall be accomplished by means of 2 the manual, shielded metal -arc process. Welding of stainless steel pipe shall 3 be by the shielded arc, inert gas method. 4 5 All welding shall be performed by welders thoroughly qualified for this type of 6 work. 7 8 12. When cast iron companion flanges are required to connect steel piping to cast 9 iron piping, or in steel pipe two and one -half (2 -1/2) inches or larger in lieu of 10 unions, such flanges shall be furnished drilled and tapped, as necessary, and 11 included with the pipe. 12 13 13. After welding slip -on flanges to galvanized steel pipe, the disturbed galvanized 14 interior and exterior areas the Contractor shall clean and restore, by hot -dip 15 galvanizing or painting with a zinc -rich cold galvanizing paint. 16 17 14. After testing, exposed pipe threads on joints laid in the ground the Contractor 18 shall paint with one (1) coat of Bitumastic No. 50, Tnemecol or equal coal -tar 19 pitch paint. 20 21 15. In general, the Contractor shall furnish and install pipe expansion joints on all 22 piping where such piping crosses structure expansion joints, whether or not 23 shown on the Drawings. Pipe expansion joints shall be approved by the 24 Engineer. The Contractor shall assemble expansion couplings with bolts 25 drawn sufficiently tight to prevent leakage but not to prevent expansion and 26 contraction. 27 28 16. Where pipes pass through concrete or masonry walls or floors, the Contractor 29 shall provide galvanized pipe sleeves. For pipe two (2) inches and smaller in 30 diameter, provide sleeves two (2) sizes larger than the pipe itself. For pipe 2- 31 1/2 inches and larger in diameter, provide sleeves one (1) pipe size larger than 32 the pipe itself. The Contractor shall extend sleeves through the floor two (2) 33 inches above the finished slab, except in finished areas where the Contractor 34 shall finish the sleeve just above the finished slab, unless it is noted to be 35 flush. The Contractor shall make ends of sleeves flush with wall and ceiling 36 surface, shall render sleeves gas tight and caulk sleeves passing through 37 exterior walls watertight using lead wool. 38 39 17. Provide chromium plated floor, wall and ceiling plates to cover exposed piping 40 passing through surfaces; furnish Grinnell Fig. 10, American Standard, or 41 equal. 42 43 18. Underground piping shall be cradled and backfilled as specified. The use of 44 slag for cradle or backfill material under, around or over steel, copper and 45 brass pipe is prohibited. 46 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -9 06/24/14 1 3.02 TESTING 2 3 After all piping has been connected up in place, and before application of insulation 4 or covering, the Contractor shall test to the satisfaction of the Engineer all piping in 5 accordance with the requirements of Section 01625 and 15062 of these 6 Specifications, as such relate to testing. Any leaks which develop shall be made tight 7 before final acceptance of the work, by rewelding, tightening, renewing packing, or 8 replacing materials, as required or as ordered. Caulking is not permitted. All labor, 9 material and equipment for tests shall be furnished by the Contractor. After all lines 10 have been tested and approved, they shall be blow n dry with compressed air and 11 carefully cleaned by the Contractor. 12 13 3.03 DISINFECTION 14 15 All steel or copper or brass piping carrying potable water shall be disinfected after 16 testing, in accordance with the procedures specified in Section 01625. 17 18 19 END OF SECTION 20 21 22 23 24 SMALL DIAMETER METAL PIPE AND FITTINGS 15080 -10 06/24/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15094 2 3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. It is the intent of the project to remove existing pipe supports, hangers, and 10 straps and furnish and install new pipe supports, hangers, and straps as 11 shown on the Drawings. 12 13 B. Furnish all labor, materials, equipment and incidentals and install hangers, 14 supports, concrete inserts, and anchor bolts, including metallic hanging and 15 supporting devices for supporting exposed piping. 16 17 C. All new pipe supports, hangers, straps hardware, clips, unistrut, and anchors 18 shall be 304 stainless steel and shall match the number, type, location, and 19 capacity of the existing supports. 20 21 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS 22 23 A. Hangers and supports shall be of approved standard design and shall be 24 adequate to maintain the supported load in proper position under all operating 25 conditions. The minimum working factor for pipe supports shall be five (5) 26 times the ultimate tensile of the material, assuming 10 feet of water filled pipe 27 being supported. 28 29 B. All pipe and appurtenances connected to equipment shall be supported in 30 such a manner as to prevent any strain being imposed on the equipment. 31 When manufacturers have indicated requirements that piping loads shall not 32 be transmitted to their equipment, the Contractor shall submit a certification 33 stating that such requirements have been complied with. 34 35 1.03 SUBMITTALS 36 37 A. Submit to the Engineer for review, as provided in the General Conditions, shop 38 drawings of all items to be furnished under this section. 39 40 B. Submit to the Engineer, for review, samples of all materials specified herein. 41 42 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 43 44 2.01 GENERAL PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -1 05/31/13 1 1 1 2 A. All pipe and tubing shall be supported as required to prevent significant 3 stresses in the pipe or tubing material, valves and fittings, and to support and 4 secure the pipe in the intended position and alignment. All supports shall be 5 designed to adequately secure the pipe against excessive dislocation due to 6 thermal expansion and contraction, internal flow forces, and all probable 7 external forces such as equipment, pipe and personnel contact. All pipe 8 supports shall be approved prior to installation. 9 10 B. All materials used in manufacturing hangers and supports shall be capable of I11 meeting, the respective ASTM Standard Specifications with regard to tests 12 and physical and chemical properties, and be in accordance with MSS SP -58. 13 14 C. Hangers and supports shall be spaced in accordance with ANSI B31.1.0 that 15 the maximum unsupported span shall not exceed 10 feet otherwise specified 16 herein. 17 1 18 D. Unless otherwise specified herein, pipe hangers and supports shall be 19 manufactured by Piping Technology & Products, Inc. or equal. Any reference 20 to a specific figure or number is for the purpose of establishing a type and 1 21 quality of and shall not be considered as proprietary. Any itern in type, style, 22 quality, design and performance will be for approval. 23 I 24 2.02 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR METAL PIPE 25 26 A. Suspended single pipes shall be supported by 304 SS hangers suspended by I 27 steel from 304 SS concrete inserts, beam clamps or ceiling mounting as 28 follows: 29 I 30 1. Hangers: 31 32 Pipe Size, Inches Piping Technology & Products Fig. No. I 33 1/2" to 3" 50 34 3" to 30" 83 35 Above 30" See SPECIAL SUPPORTS, I 36 Paragraph 2.04 37 38 2. Hanger rods shall be rolled 304 stainless steel machine threaded with I 39 load ratings conforming to ASTM Specifications and the strength of the 40 rod shall be based on root diameter. Hanger rods shall have the 41 following minimum diameters: I 42 43 Pipe Size, Inches Min. Rod Diameter, In. 44 Less than 2 -1/2 3/8 1 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 -1/2 though 4 1/2 2 4 5/8 3 6 3/4 4 8 -12 7/8 5 14 -16 1 6 20 -30 1-1/2 7 Above 30 See SPECIAL SUPPORTS, 8 Paragraph 2.04 9 10 3. Where applicable, structural attachments shall be beam clamps. Beam 11 clamps, for rod sizes 1/2 -inch through 3/4 -inch shall be equal to Grinnell 12 Fig. No. 229, and for rod sizes 7/8 -inch through 1 -1/4 inches shall be 13 equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 228 or equal. 14 15 4. Concrete inserts for pipe hangers shall be designed to be used in 16 ceilings, walls or floors, spot inserts for individual pipe hangers or 17 ceiling mounting bolts for individual pipe hangers, and shall be as 18 manufactured by Ramset/Red Head, or equal, and shall be as follows: 19 20 a. 304 SS Multi Set II drop in style anchors shall be used where 21 applicable and shall be used for hanger rods up to and including 22 7/8 -inch diameter. 23 24 b. Ceiling mounting plates shall be used, where applicable, and be 25 for hanger rod sizes 1 -inch through and including 1 -1/4 inches, 26 shall be Fig. 47, Fig. 49 or Fig, 52 as manufactured by Grinnell 27 or approved equal. All pipe hangers shall be capable of vertical 28 adjustment under load and after erection. Turnbuckles, as 29 required and where applied, shall 304 SS be equal to Grinnell 30 Fig. No. 230. Wall or column supported pipes shall be 31 supported by welded steel brackets equal to Grinnell Fig. 194, 32 195, and 199, as required, for pipe sizes up to and including 33 20 -inch diameter. Additional wall bearing plates shall be 34 provided where required. 35 36 5. Where the pipe is located above the bracket, the pipe shall be set on a 37 0.5 -inch neoprene pad and U -bolt assembly supported by the bracket 38 for pipes 4- inches and larger or by a U -bolt for pipes smaller than 39 4- inches. U -bolts shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 120 and 137. 40 41 6. Where the pipe is located below the bracket, the pipes shall be 42 supported by pipe hangers suspended by steel rods from the bracket. 43 Hangers and steel rods shall be as specified above. 44 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -3 05/31/13 1 7. Wall or column supported pipes 8- inches and smaller may be supported 2 by hangers equal to Grinnell Figures 103, as required. 3 4 C. Floor supported pipes 3- inches and larger in diameter shall be supported by 5 either cast -in -place concrete supports or adjust -able pipe saddle supports as 6 directed by the Engineer. In general, concrete supports shall be used when 7 lateral displacement of the pipes is probable (unless lateral support is 8 provided), and adjustable pipe saddle type supports shall be used where 9 lateral displacement of the pipes is not probable. 10 11 1. Each concrete support shall conform to the details shown on the 12 Drawings. Concrete shall be poured after the pipe is in place with 13 temporary supports. Top edges and vertical corners of each concrete 14 support shall have 1 -inch bevels. Each pipe shall be secured on each 15 concrete support by a wrought iron or steel anchor strap anchored to 16 the concrete with cast -in -place bolts or with expansion bolts. Where 17 directed by the Engineer, vertical reinforcement bars shall be grouted 18 into drilled holes in the concrete floor to prevent overturning or lateral 19 displacement of the concrete support. Unless otherwise approved by 20 the Engineer, maximum height shall be five (5) feet. 21 22 2. Concrete piers used to support base elbows and tees shall be similar to 23 that specified above. Piers may be square or rectangular. 24 25 3. Adjustable pipe saddle support shall be screwed or welded to the 26 corresponding size 150 Ib. companion flanges or slip -on welding 27 flanges respectively. Supporting pipe shall be of Schedule 40 steel 28 pipe construction of the size recommended by the pipe support 29 manufacturer. Each flange shall be secured to the concrete floor by a 30 minimum of two (2) expansion bolts per flange. Adjustable saddle 31 supports shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. No. 259. Where used under 32 base fittings, a suitable flange shall be substituted for the saddle. Floor 33 supported pipes less than 3- inches shall be supported by fabricated 34 steel supports. 35 36 D. Vertical piping shall be supported as follows: 37 38 1. Where pipes change from horizontal to vertical, the pipes shall be 39 supported on the horizontal runs within 2 feet of the change in direction 40 by pipe supports as previously specified herein. 41 42 2. For vertical runs exceeding 15 feet pipes and greater than eight- inches 43 in diameter shall be supported by the fabricated pipe support as shown 44 in the drawings. PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -4 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3. Where vertical piping passes through a steel floor sleeve, the pipe shall 3 be supported by a friction type pipe clamp which is supported by the 4 pipe sleeve. Pipe clamps shall be equal to Grinnell Fig. 262. Anchor 5 bolts shall be equal to Kwik -Bolt as manufactured by the McCullock 6 Industries, Minneapolis, Minnesota or Wej -it manufactured by Wej -it 7 Expansion Products, Inc., Bloomfield, Colorado. 8 9 E. All rods, hangers, inserts, brackets, and components shall be 304 Stainless 10 Steel. 11 12 2.03 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLASTIC PIPE 13 14 A. Single plastic pipes shall be supported by pipe supports as previously 15 specified herein. 16 17 B. Multiple, suspended, horizontal plastic pipe runs, where possible, and rubber 18 hose shall be supported by ladder type cable trays such as the Electray 19 Ladder by Husky - Burndy, the Globetray by the Metal Products Division of 20 United States Gypsum, or equal. Ladder shall be of mild steel construction. 21 Rung spacing shall be approximately 18 inches for plastic pipe and 12 inches 22 for rubber nose. Tray width shall be approximately 6 inches for single runs of 23 rubber hose and 12 inches for double runs of rubber hose. Ladder type cable 24 trays shall be furnished complete with all hanger rods, rod couplings, concrete 25 inserts, hanger clips, etc., required for a complete support system. Individual 26 plastic pipes shall be secured to the rungs of the cable tray by strap clamps 27 fasteners equal to Globe Model M -CAC, Husky - Burndy Model SCR or equal. 28 Spacing between clamps shall not exceed 9 feet. The cable shall provide 29 continuous support along the length of the pipe. 30 31 C. Individual clamps, hangers, and supports in contact plastic pipe shall provide 32 firm support, but not so firm as to prevent longitudinal due to thermal 33 expansion and contraction. 34 35 2.04 SPECIAL SUPPORTS 36 37 A. Pipes, requiring special supports as defined in this specification or shown on 38 the drawing, shall be supported by means of a supporting framework anchored 39 into the floor or curbing. The vertical piping shall be suitably secured to 40 horizontal support members connected at each end vertical support members 41 and spaced as required to provide a rigid installation. 42 43 1. The complete supporting system shall be as manufactured by the 44 Unistrut Corporation, Globe -Strut as manufactured by the Metal PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -5 05/31/13 1 1 1 Products Division of U.S. Gypsum, or equal. Vertical and horizontal I 2 supporting members shall be U- shaped channels similar to Unistrut 3 Series P1000. 4 5 2. Vertical piping shall be secured to the horizontal members by pipe 6 clamps or pipe straps equal to Unistrut Series P1100M and Series 7 P2558. All components shall be of 304 stainless steel. I 8 9 3. The assemblies shall be furnished complete with all nuts, bolts, and 10 fittings required for a complete assembly. I 11 12 4. The design of each individual framing system shall be the responsibility 13 of the Contractor. Shop drawings shall be submitted and shall show all I14 details of the installation including dimensions and types of supports. 15 16 B. Any required pipe supports for which the supports specified in this Section are 17 not applicable, including pipe supports for above 30 -inch diameter pipe; high 18 temperature and high pressure (greater than 150 psi) shall be fabricated or 19 constructed from standard aluminum shapes in accordance with 20 Specifications, concrete and anchor hardware similar to items previously 1 21 specified herein and shall meet the minimum requirements listed below and be 22 subject to review by the Engineer. 23 I 24 1. Pipe support systems shall meet all requirements of this Section and all 25 related Sections of this Specification. 26 111 27 2. Complete design details of the entire pipe support systems shall be 28 provided, for review by the Engineer. 29 30 3. The pipe support system shall not impose loads on the supporting 31 structures, in excess of the loads for which the supporting structure is 32 designed. I 33 34 4. Hanger rods for above 30 -inch pipe shall be a minimum of 1 -1/2 -inch 35 diameter and shall not exceed the Manufacturer's standard maximum I 36 recommended safe load. 37 38 2.05 PIPE HANGER AND SUPPORT SPACING I 39 40 A. Pipe hanger and support spacing shall be in accordance with ANSI B31.1.1.0 41 and MSS SP -69. In no case shall the spacing of hangers or supports exceed I 42 the following: 43 44 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS I 15094 -6 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 PART 3 - EXECUTION 7 8 3.01 INSTALLATION 9 Maximum unsupported pipe span (FEET) Nominal Pipe Size - Inches Ductile Iron Steel PVC -1 and PVC -2 (Sch. 80) 1/2 N/A 5 3.5 3/4 N/A 6 3.5 1 N/A 7 3.8 1 -1/4 N/A 7 4.0 1 -1/2 -3 N/A 9 4.0 4 7 10 5.5 5 -10 10 10 10 12 -48 10 per manufacturer or as shown on drawings 10 10 A. All pipes, horizontal and vertical, shall be rigidly supported from the building 11 structure by approved supports. Supports shall be provided at changes in 12 direction and elsewhere as shown in the Drawings or specified herein. No 13 piping shall be supported from other piping or from metal stairs, ladders and 14 walkways, unless it is so indicated on the Drawings, or specifically directed or 15 authorized by the Engineer. 16 17 B. All pipe supports shall be designed with liberal strength and stiffness to 18 support the respective pipes under the maximum combination of peak loading 19 conditions to include pipe weight, liquid weight, liquid movement, and pressure 20 forces, thermal expansion and contraction, vibrations and all probable 21 externally applied forces. Prior to installation, all pipe supports shall be 22 approved by the Engineer. 23 24 C. Pipe supports shall be provided to minimize lateral forces through valves, both 25 sides of split type couplings, and sleeve type couplings and to minimize all 26 pipe forces on pump housings. Pump housings shall not be utilized to support 27 connecting pipes. 28 29 D. Pipe supports shall be provided as follows: 30 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -7 05/31/13 1 1 Cast iron and ductile iron shall be supported at a maximum support 2 spacing of 10 feet -0- inches with a minimum of one support per pipe 3 section at the joints. 4 5 2. Supports for multiple PVC pipes shall be continuous wherever possible. 6 Individually supported PVC pipes shall be supported as recommended 7 by the manufacturer except that support spacing shall not exceed five 8 (5) feet. 9 10 3. Support spacing for galvanized steel pipe and copper tubing shall not 11 exceed five (5) feet. 12 13 4. All vertical pipes shall be supported at each floor or at intervals of at 14 least 15 feet by approved pipe collars, clamps, brackets or wall rests, 15 and at all points necessary to insure rigid construction. 16 17 E. Pipe supports shall not result in point loadings, but shall distribute pipe loads 18 evenly along the pipe circumference. 19 20 F. Effects of thermal expansion and contraction of the pipe shall be accounted for 21 in pipe support selection and installation. 22 23 G. Inserts for pipe hangers and supports shall be installed on forms before 24 concrete is poured. Before setting these items, all Drawings and figures shall 25 be checked which have a direct bearing on the pipe location. Responsibility 26 for the proper location of pipe supports is included under this Section. 27 28 H. Continuous metal inserts shall be embedded flush with the concrete surface. 29 30 31 3.02 PRIME COATING 32 33 A. Prior to prime coating, all pipe hangers and supports shall be thoroughly clean, 34 dry, and free from all mill - scale, rust, grease, dirt, paint and other foreign 35 substances to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 36 37 B. All submerged pipe supports shall be prime coated with Koppers 654 Epoxy 38 Primer or equal. All other pipe supports shall be prime coated with Rust - 39 Inhibitive Primer No. 621 as manufactured by Koppers Company, Inc., 40 Pittsburgh, Pa. or equal. 41 42 C. Finish coating shall be compatible with the prime coating used and shall be 43 applied, as specified in Section 09900. 44 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -8 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 3.03 PROTECTION AGAINST ELECTROLYSIS 2 3 A. Where dissimilar metals are used in conjunction with each other, suitable 4 insulation shall be provided between adjoining surfaces to eliminate direct 5 contact and any resulting electrolysis. The insulation shall be bituminous 6 impregnated felt, heavy bituminous coatings, nonmetallic separators or 7 washers, or upon approval by the Engineer. 8 9 10 END OF SECTION 11 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -9 05/31/13 1 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS 15094 -10 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 15100 2 3 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 SCOPE OF WORK 8 9 A. All labor, materials, equipment and incidentals required to furnish and install 10 for complete and ready operation all valves and appurtenances shown on the 11 Construction Drawings and as specified herein. 12 13 B. All valves and appurtenances shall be of the size shown on the drawings. 14 15 C. All valves and appurtenances shall have the name of the manufacturer cast in 16 raised letters on some appropriate part of the body. 17 18 D. The equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 19 20 1. Eccentric Plug Valves 21 2. Slanting Disk Check Valve 22 3. Swing Check Valve 23 4. Telescopic Valves 24 5. Resilient Wedge Gate Valves 25 6. Butterfly Valves 26 7. Pressure Relief Valves 27 8. Ball Valves 28 9. Air Release Valves 29 10. Combination Air and Vacuum Release Valves 30 11. Valve Actuators 31 12. Valve Boxes 32 13. Gauges 33 14. Flange Adapter Couplings 34 15. Flexible Couplings 35 16. Quick Connect Couplings 36 17. Flexible Type Expansion Joints 37 18. Unions 38 39 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF SYSTEMS 40 41 A. All of the equipment and materials specified herein are intended to be 42 standard for use in controlling the flow of wastewater, waste activated sludge, 43 return activated sludge, scum, etc., depending on the application. 44 45 B. Unless otherwise specified herein or on the drawings all resilient seats, seals, 46 and other sealing components of valves and flexible fittings shall be of EPDM 47 construction. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -1 05/31/13 1 2 C. All replacement valves are to be provided with an actuator to match the type of 3 the existing actuator and mounted in an identical fashion as the existing 4 actuator. 5 6 D. In the case of existing valves that are being replaced with new valves, all 7 replacement valves shall have the identical lay length as the existing valves. 8 This applies to all types of valves. Prior to ordering any replacement valve, 9 the contractor shall notify the Engineer if the valve in questions has to be 10 special manufactured or ordered because of a non - standard lay length. 11 12 1.03 QUALIFICATIONS 13 14 A. All of the types of valves and appurtenances shall be products of well - 15 established reputable firms who are fully experienced and qualified in the 16 manufacture of the particular equipment to be furnished. The equipment shall 17 be designed, constructed and installed in accordance with the best practices 18 and methods and shall comply with these Specifications, as applicable. 19 20 1.04 SUBMITTALS 21 22 A. Complete shop drawings of all valves and appurtenances shall be submitted to 23 the Engineer for review. 24 25 1.05 TOOLS 26 27 A. Special tools, if required for normal operation and maintenance, shall be 28 supplied with the equipment. 29 30 1.06 VALVE INDICES 31 32 A. The Contractor shall submit a valve schedule containing all valves required for 33 the work. The schedule shall the location, type, a number, words to identify 34 the valve's function, and the normal operating position for each valve. 35 36 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 37 38 2.01 ECCENTRIC PLUG VALVES 39 40 A. Replacement plug valves for the RAS pumps shall be supplied with end 41 connections identical to those valves they are replacing and have identical lay 42 lengths as those valves they are replacing. 43 44 B. All plug valves shall be manufactured and installed in accordance with 45 standard ANSI /AWWA C517 Table 1, Resilient- Seated Cast -Iron Eccentric 46 Plug Valves, of the latest revision unless otherwise specified. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -2 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 MANUFACTURER shall provide affidavit of compliance with AWWA Standard. 2 Valves shall be as manufactured by DeZurik, Val - Matic, Homestead or 3 approved equal. 4 5 C. Plug valves shall be tested in accordance with AWWA C504, latest edition. 6 Each valve shall be performance tested in accordance with Paragraph 5.2 of 7 the above reference and shall be given a leakage test and hydrostatic test as 8 described in Paragraphs 5.2.2 and 5.2.3 of the above reference. The leakage 9 test shall be applied to the face of the plug tending to unseat the valve. The 10 manufacturer shall furnish certified copies of reports covering proof of design 11 testing as described in Section 5.2.4 of the above reference. 12 13 D. Valves shall be of the non - lubricated eccentric type with resilient faced plugs 14 and shall be furnished with end connections as shown on the plans. Flanged 15 valves shall be faced and drilled to the ANSI B16.1 125/150 Ib. standard. 16 Mechanical joint ends shall be in full compliance with ANSI/ AWWA 17 C111/A21.11. Screwed ends shall be to the NPT standard. 18 19 E. Valve bodies shall be of ASTM A126 Class B or ASTM A48, Class 40 cast 20 iron. 21 22 F Port areas for valves 20 inches and smaller shall be a minimum of 80 percent 23 of full pipe area. Valves 24 -inch and larger shall have a minimum port area of 24 100 percent of full nominal pipe area. 25 26 G. All exposed nuts, bolts, springs, washers, etc., shall be zinc or cadmium 27 plated. Valve plugs shall be constructed of ASTM A -48, Class 40 cast iron or 28 ASTM A -536 ductile iron. Resilient plug facings shall be of Neoprene. 29 30 H. Valves shall be furnished with permanently lubricated stainless steel, 31 oil- impregnated bronze or non - metallic upper and lower plug stem bearings. 32 33 I. Valve seats shall be either nickel or stainless steel. Epoxy seats are not 34 acceptable. 35 36 J. Plug valves greater than 6 inches in diameter shall be supplied with manual 37 gear actuators unless otherwise shown on the Drawings. 38 39 K. Shaft seals shall be of the multiple V -ring type with a packing gland follower. 40 Shaft seals shall be externally adjustable and repackable without removing the 41 actuator or bonnet from the valve. 42 43 L. Valves shall have a factory- applied, internal and external, fusion bonded 44 epoxy resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all 45 applicable requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard 46 C550 -90 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants ". 47 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -3 05/31/13 1 2.02 SLANTING DISK CHECK VALVE 2 3 A. Valve body shall be heavy two -piece ASTM A126 Grade B cast iron. The two 4 (2) body halves and body seat shall be 0 -ring sealed and bolted together in a 5 manner to sandwich the body seat on a 55° angle. Each body half shall have 6 a covered access hole for internal inspection and each body half and disc shall 7 be fully machined to accept the attachment of a bottom buffer oil dashpot. 8 9 B. The seat ring and disc ring shall permit replacement in the field without need 10 for special tools or machining. Disc and seat ring shall be bronze. The area 11 throughout the valve body must be equal to full pipe area. 12 13 C. The pivot pins in the body and the bushings in the disc lugs shall be stainless 14 steel of different hardness to prevent galling. The bushings shall be press fit 15 to prevent wear. 16 17 D. An indicator shall be provided to show position of the disc. 18 19 E. The valve shall have a bottom mounted buffer for free open and positive non - 20 slam closing. The buffer shall be designed to contact the disc during the last 21 10% of closure and thereafter control the disc closure until the valve is shut in 22 a manner to minimize or prevent water hammer. The rate of hydraulic control 23 and the initial point of buffer contact to the disc closure shall be externally 24 adjustable and variable to suit the water column reversal time. The bottom 25 buffer hydraulic system must be self- contained and independent from pipeline 26 media to prevent contamination of the media and protect the cylinder against 27 corrosion. The buffer rod, oil reservoir and buffer pneumatic tank shall be 28 stainless steel. 29 30 F. Valve shall be Apco Series 800B slanting disc check valve with bottom 31 mounted buffer or approved equal. 32 33 2.03 SWING CHECK VALVES 34 35 A. Replacement check valves for the RAS pumps shall be supplied with end 36 connections identical to those valves they are replacing and have identical lay 37 lengths as those valves they are replacing. 38 39 B. Swing check valves shall be constructed with heavy cast iron or cast steel 40 body with a bronze or stainless steel seat ring, and a noncorrosive shaft for 41 attachment of weight and lever. Flanges shall be drilled for ANSI Standard 42 B.16.1, 125 Ib. Class. Check valves shall absolutely prevent the return of 43 water or wastewater back through the valve when the inlet pressure decreases 44 below the delivery pressure. 45 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -4 05/31/13 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 C. The valves must be tight seating and must operate without hammer or shock. 2 The seat ring must be renewable and shall be securely held in place by a 3 threaded joint. 4 5 D. Check valves shall be the lever and weight type with an adjustable position 6 weight and lever arm attached to the disc assembly to allow adjustment of the 7 closure force. 8 9 E. The valves shall be as manufactured by the Mueller, Kennedy or approved 10 equal, and shall be suitable for horizontal installation. 11 12 2.04 TELESCOPING VALVES 13 A. New telescopic valve assemblies shall be installed at existing locations as 14 shown on the Drawings. The valves shall be sized and manufactured to be in- 15 kind replacements for the existing valves that are to be removed, except that 16 the new valves shall require a manual actuator (electrically operated actuator 17 not required). The new valves shall be mounted and function properly without 18 requiring modifications to the existing structure or the existing piping. 19 20 B. Each valve assembly shall be complete and include but not be limited to the 21 following components: 22 23 • Cast or ductile iron floor mounting pedestal. 24 • Manual, rising stem, rack and pinion lifting mechanism with handwheel and 25 gear reducer. 26 • Stem Rod (316 stainless steel) 27 • Stem Cover and graduated position indicator 28 • Stem Guide (bronze or UHMW polyethylene) 29 • Bail (stainless steel) 30 • Slip Tube with v -notch (minimum 1/8 thick, 304 Stainless Steel or Brass) 31 • Gasket Retainer and Flange (stainless steel) Neoprene Split Gasket 32 33 D. The slip tube shall be of 304 stainless steel and manufactured from seamless 34 tube or pipe with a minimum wall thickness of 1/8 -inch. The finish O.D. of the 35 tube shall be within ± 0.04 inches runout, cylindrical within 0.100 TIR and have 36 a smooth 125 micro -inch or better surface. The slip tube shall penetrate the 37 riser pipe a minimum of 9- inches in the up position and have a 48 -inch 38 maximum travel. 39 40 E. The bail shall be of the same material as the slip tube and shall be rigidly 41 welded to the slip tube and shall be connected to the stem with a flanged type 42 connection and multiple fasteners. 43 44 F. A stainless steel companion flange and double '/4 -inch thick neoprene wiper 45 gasket shall be installed and attached to the top of the existing riser pipe. The VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -5 05/31/13 1 I.D. of the gasket shall be 1/8 -inch smaller than the O.D. of the tube. The 2 gaskets shall be of split design, sandwiched between the riser pipe flange and 3 the companion flange, and replaceable without removing the slip tube from the 4 riser pipe. The drilled hole pattern and dimensions of the companion flange 5 shall match the drilled hole pattern of the existing riser pipe flange. 6 7 G. Lifts shall be handwheel type, mounted to a gearbox. The gearbox output 8 shaft shall rotate the pinion gear on the rack and pinion arrangement. The 9 rack shall be type 304 stainless steel with an integral self - locking device to 10 secure the stem in any infinite position throughout the travel range. The lifting 11 device and gearbox shall comply with the Section 2.04 Valve Actuators of this 12 specification. The rising stem lift shall use a stainless steel square tube with 13 torque nut design or a vee keyed shaft, with torque plate, to prevent valve tube 14 rotation. Handwheels shall be a minimum of 16- inches in diameter of cast 15 aluminum, cast iron, or stainless steel and control the pinion shaft via a gear 16 reducer mounted on a cast iron pedestal. The valves shall include a clear 17 plastic Butyrate stem cover with a mylar strip type position indicator, calibrated 18 in 1/4 inch increments to illustrate valve position. The mylar strip, provided by 19 the manufacturer, will be affixed by the Contractor after installation to provide 20 a true and accurate indication of the tube elevation by comparing it to the top 21 of the rising stem. Stainless steel anchor bolts shall be provided for all 22 pedestals. Pedestals shall be mounted to new supporting structural steel 23 mounted to the existing concrete structure. Cleaning, shop prime coating, and 24 finish painting of all new equipment and mounting supports shall be as 25 specified in Section 09865 and Section 09900. 26 27 H. The telescoping valve assemblies shall be manufactured by Waterman or 28 approved equal. 29 30 2.05 RESILIENT SEATED AND RESILIENT WEDGE GATE VALVES 31 32 A. All gate valves shall be resilient seated or resilient wedge, manufactured to 33 meet or exceed the requirements of AWWA C515 of latest revision and in 34 accordance with the following Specifications. Valves shall have an 35 unobstructed waterway equal to or greater than the full nominal diameter of 36 the valve. 37 38 B. The 30 -inch valves shall be non - rising stem with the stem made of cast, forged 39 or rolled bronze as shown in AVVWA C515. The 30 -inch valves shall be rated 40 for 250 psi. 41 42 C. All gaskets shall be pressure energized 0-ring type seals. The stem shall be 43 sealed with three 0-rings. The top two 0-rings shall be replaceable with the 44 valve fully open and exposed to full working pressure. Thrust washers shall 45 be installed on each side of the thrust collar. 46 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -6 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 D. The gate shall be ductile iron with an EPDM coating. The resilient sealing 2 mechanism shall provide zero leakage at the valve design pressure when 3 installed with the line flow in either direction. 4 5 E. All cast ferrous components shall be ductile iron ASTM A536. All internal and 6 external surfaces of the valve body and valve bonnet shall have an epoxy 7 coating complying with AWWA C550. All valves are to be tested in strict 8 accordance with AWWA C515. 9 10 F Each 30 -inch valve shall be equipped with a spur gear operator with a 2 -inch 11 square nut and a removable hand wheel that fits over the nut. The hand 12 wheel shall be turned left or counterclockwise to open the valves. 13 Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall have an arrow and the word 14 OPEN cast thereon to indicate the direction of opening. 15 16 G. Valves shall have a factory- applied, internal and external, fusion bonded 17 epoxy resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all 18 applicable requirements of the American Water Works Association Standard 19 C550 -90 entitled "Protective Interior Coatings for Valves and Hydrants ". 20 21 H. Valves shall be equal to those as manufactured by American Flow Control, 22 M &H, Mueller, Kennedy, Clow, or equal. 23 24 2.06 BUTTERFLY VALVES FOR WASTEWATER SERVICE 25 26 A. Replacement butterfly valves for the RAS pumps shall be supplied with end 27 connections identical to those valves they are replacing and have identical lay 28 lengths as those valves they are replacing. New valves shall have flanged 29 connections if above ground and exposed and mechanical joint connections if 30 buried. 31 32 B. Butterfly valves shall meet, exceed, or otherwise conform to the AWWA 33 Standard Specifications for Resilient Seated Butterfly Valves, Designation 34 C504, except as hereinafter specified. Valves, except as specified hereinafter, 35 shall be Class 150A or B, and equal to those manufactured by Bray, Henry 36 Pratt Company, DeZurik, American, Kennedy, Mueller, Homestead, or equal. 37 The valve discs shall be constructed of cast iron conforming to ASTM A-48, 38 Class 40, ASTM A -126, Class B or ductile iron conforming ASTM A536, Grade 39 65 -45 -12 for Class 150 or less. Ductile iron conforming to ASTM A536, Grade 40 65 -45 -12 shall be provided for all Class 250 valves. 41 42 C. All butterfly valves shall be in accordance with Table 1 and Table 2 of above - 43 mentioned AWWA Specification for short-body valves. Adequate two -way 44 thrust bearings shall be provided. Flange drilling shall be in accordance with 45 ANSI B16.1. 46 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -7 05/31/13 1 D. Valve seats for flanged valves shall be EPDM synthetic rubber compound. 2 Valve seats 24 inches and larger shall be field adjustable and replaceable 3 without dismounting operator disc or shaft and without removing the valve 4 from the line. All retaining segments and adjusting devices shall be of 5 corrosion resistant material with stainless steel screws and be capable of a 6 1/8 -inch adjustment. Valves 20 inches and smaller shall have bonded or 7 mechanically restrained seats as outlined in AWWA C504 except for the wafer 8 type valves. Where elastomer seat is mounted on the valve body, the mating 9 edge of the valve disc shall be 18 -8 stainless steel or Nickel- Chrome, 80 -20 %. 10 Where elastomer seat is mounted on the valve disc, the valve body shall be 11 fitted with an 18 -8 stainless steel seat offset from the shaft, mechanically 12 restrained and covering 360 degrees of the peripheral opening or seating 13 surface. 14 15 E. The valve body shall be constructed of ductile iron or close grain cast iron per 16 ASTM A -126, Class B with integrally cast hubs for shaft bearing housings of 17 the through boss -type. 18 19 F. The valve shaft shall be turned, ground, and polished constructed of 18 -8, 20 ASTM A -276, Type 304 stainless steel and designed for both torsional and 21 shearing stresses when the valve is operated under its greatest dynamic or 22 seating torque. Shaft shall be of either a one -piece unit extending full size 23 through the valve disc and valve bearing or it may be of a stub shaft design. 24 Shaft bearings shall be Teflon or nylon, self - lubricated type. 25 26 G. All valves shall be subject to hydrostatic and leakage tests at the point of 27 manufacture. The valves shall be tested in conformance with AWWA C -504. 28 29 H. The manufacturer shall certify that the required tests on the various materials 30 and on the completed valves have been satisfactory and that the valves 31 conform to all requirements of the Specification and the AWWA standard. 32 33 I. Where indicated on the Drawings, extension stems, floor stands, couplings, 34 stem guides and floor boxes, as required, shall be furnished and installed. 35 36 J. Valves shall have a factory- applied, internal and external, fusion bonded 37 epoxy resin coating with a minimum thickness of 8 mils, conforming to all 38 applicable requirements of the AWWA C550. 39 40 2.07 PRESSURE RELIEF VALVES 41 42 A. Floor type hydrostatic pressure relief valve shall be designed for installing in 43 the floor of concrete tanks and shall be type F -1493 as manufactured by Clow 44 Valve Company or equal. The valves shall be designed to open at a 45 hydrostatic head of 9- inches of water. 46 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -8 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. The assembly shall consist of three parts: cover, body, and grate. All three 2 parts shall be of cast iron conforming to ASTM specifications A -126 Class B. 3 They shall be designed so that neither the cover nor grate can become 4 separated from the body of the valve, due to ground water pressure around 5 the tank. However, when necessary, both may be easily removed by turning 6 them to right or left to free them from locking lugs cast integrally on the inside 7 of the body. 8 9 C. The seats shall be of Buna -N rubber, bonded to the cover, mating with a 10 machined bronze seat in the body. 11 12 2.08 BALL VALVES 13 14 A. PVC ball valves shall be of Type 1, Grade 1 PVC with union, socket, threaded 15 or flanged ends as required. Ball valves shall be full port, full flow, all plastic 16 construction, 150 psi rated with Teflon seat seals and T- handles. PVC ball 17 valves shall be as manufactured by Spears, Plastiline, Hayward, or equal. 18 19 B. True union, vented, PVC ball valves shall be used on the chemical clean 20 system and shall be manufactured to ASTM F 1970 specifications and 21 constructed from PVC Type I, ASTM D 1784 Cell Classification 1245. All 0- 22 rings shall be Latharge Viton. All valves shall have stem with double 0-ring 23 seals. All valve handles shall be polypropylene with built -in lockout 24 mechanism. All valve union nuts shall have Buttress threads. All seal carriers 25 shall be Safe -T- Blocked. All valve components shall be replaceable. All 26 valves shall be certified by NSF International for use in potable water service. 27 All 1/2" through 2" valves shall be pressure rated to 235 psi, all 2 -1/2" through 28 8" and all flanged valves shall be pressure rated to 150 psi for water at 73° F. 29 Valves shall have a vent hole in the ball to equalize internal fluid pressures. 30 Install valve with ball vent on the pressure (upstream) side when in closed 31 position. Vented ball valves shall be True Union 2000 Industrial Bali Valves as 32 manufactured by Spears, True Union Z -Ball Valves by Hayward, or Engineer 33 approved equal. 34 35 C. Bronze, brass or stainless steel ball valves shall be of 2 -piece (1" and smaller) 36 or 3 -piece (1 -1/2" and larger) construction. Valves shall be rated for 150 psi 37 saturated steam pressure and 400 psi WOG pressure. Valves shall have 38 stainless steel, bronze or brass body, stainless steel or chrome plated brass 39 ball, replaceable Teflon or TFE seats and seals, blowout proof stem and vinyl 40 covered steel handle. All end connections shall be threaded. 41 42 D. All valves shall be mounted in such a position that valve position indicators are 43 plainly visible when standing on the floor. 44 45 2.09 AIR RELEASE VALVES 46 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -9 05/31/13 1 A. The air release valves shall be installed as shown on the Construction 2 Drawings. The valves shall have a cast iron body cover and baffle, stainless 3 steel float, EPDM seat and stainless steel trim. The fittings shall be threaded. 4 Air release valves shall be equipped with a vacuum ball or check feature in 5 order to prevent air from entering the valve during vacuum conditions. The 6 valves for wastewater and sludge applications shall be Model D -025 as 7 manufactured by A.R.I. or equal. Air release valves for reclaimed and potable 8 water service shall be A.R.I. Model D- 040 -C -VAC or equal. 9 10 B. A stainless steel or brass ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of all air 11 release valves. Stainless steel or brass piping shall be provided for air release 12 valves on pumps. 13 14 2.10 COMBINATION AIR AND VACUUM RELEASE VALVES 15 16 A. The air and vacuum valves for the transfer pump discharge lines shall be 17 installed as shown on the Construction Drawings. The valves shall have a 18 cast iron body cover and baffle, stainless steel float, and an EPDM seat. The 19 valves shall be 2" threaded connection. Air and vacuum valves shall be 20 equipped with a baffle to protect the float from direct contact with the rushing 21 air and water and to prevent the float from closing prematurely in the valve. 22 The valves shall be Model D -040 -C as manufactured by A.R.I. or equal. 23 24 B. A stainless steel ball valve shall be provided on the inlet of all air and vacuum 25 valves. 26 27 2.11 QUARTER —TURN VALVE ACTUATORS 28 29 A. General 30 31 1. All valve actuators shall conform to the latest version of the AWWA 32 Standard Specifications for the respective type of valves and shall be 33 either manual, motor - operated, or air operated and shall match the 34 existing valve operator. 35 36 2. Actuators shall be capable of seating and unseating the disc against the 37 full design pressure and velocity, as specified for each class, into a dry 38 system downstream, and shall transmit a minimum torque to the valve. 39 Actuators shall be rigidly attached to the valve body. 40 41 3. The actuator manufacturer shall be responsible for properly sizing the 42 actuator for the installed pressure conditions. 43 44 4. The Contractor is responsible for handling and installing the valve and 45 actuator in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions. The 46 Contractor shall replace any damaged actuator without cost to the 47 Owner. VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -10 05/31/13 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 5. Valves located seven (7) feet or more above the floor level shall be 3 equipped with an actuator that allows operation of the valve less than 4 five (5) feet from floor level. Manual operators shall have a chainwheel 5 and electric actuator shall have a remote mounted control panel. 6 7 B. Manual Actuators 8 9 1. Manual actuators shall have permanently lubricated, totally enclosed 10 gearing with handwheel and gear ratio sized on the basis of required 11 opening and closing torque values. Actuators shall be equipped with 12 handwheel, position indicator, and mechanical stop - limiting locking 13 devices to prevent over travel in the open and closed positions. They 14 shall turn counter - clockwise to open valves. Manual actuators shall be 15 of the traveling nut, self - locking type and shall be designed to hold the 16 valve in any intermediate position between fully open and fully closed 17 without creeping or fluttering. Actuators shall be fully enclosed and 18 designed to produce the specified torque with a maximum pull of 80 19 pounds on the handwheel or chainwheel. Actuator components shall 20 withstand an input of 450 -foot pounds for 30" and smaller and 300 -foot 21 pounds for larger than 30" size valves at extreme actuator positions 22 without damage. Valves located above grade shall have handwheel or 23 chain wheel and position indicator, and valves located below grade 24 shall be equipped with a 2 -inch square AWWA operating nut located at 25 ground level and cast iron extension type valve box. Valve actuators 26 shall conform to AWWA C504, latest revision. 27 28 2. Handwheels or chainwheels shall be turned left or counterclockwise to 29 open the valves. Handwheels shall be of ample size and shall have an 30 arrow and the word OPEN cast thereon to indicate the direction of 31 opening. 33 3. Chainwheels shall be provided for valves 6 feet or more above the 34 operator walkway. Process air piping valves in the aeration basins shall 35 have actuators and handle extensions to allow actuation of the valve a 36 minimum of 24 inches above the operator walkway. 37 38 2.12 VALVE BOXES 39 40 A. All buried valves shall have cast -iron three -piece valve boxes. Valve boxes 41 shall be provided with suitable heavy bonnets and to extend to such elevation 42 at or slightly above the finished grade surface, as directed by the Engineer. 43 The barrel shall be two- piece, sliding type, having 5 -114 -inch shaft. The upper 44 section shall have a flange at the bottom having sufficient bearing area to 45 prevent settling and shall be complete with cast iron covers. 46 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -11 05/31/13 1 B. All valves shall have actuating nuts extended within 12 inches of the top of the 2 valve boxes. Valve boxes shall be provided with concrete base and valve 3 nameplate engraved with lettering 1/8 -inch deep as shown on the Construction 4 Drawings. 5 6 2.13 PRESSURE AND VACUUM GAUGES 7 8 A. All pumps furnished under this contract shall have pressure / vacuum gauges 9 installed on their respective suction lines and pressure gauges installed on 10 their discharge lines. All pressure and vacuum gauges furnished under this 11 Contract shall be mounted per manufacturer requirements. 12 13 B. Each gauge shall be direct mounted, phenolic, shock resistant or 304 stainless 14 steel case with a 4 -1/2 -inch diameter dial and furnished with a clear glass 15 crystal window, 1/4 -inch shut -off valve, and a bronze pressure snubber. 16 Provide stainless steel diaphragm seals between shut -off valve and pressure 17 gauge on all lines with unclear matter in suspension of solutiion. All gauges 18 shall be weatherproofed. The face dial shall be white finished aluminum with 19 jet black graduations and figures. The face dial shall read in units of both 20 pounds per square inch and feet of head. 21 22 C. Suction gauges shall read from 10 inches of mercury vacuum to 50 feet of 23 head. Discharge gauges shall read from zero feet of head to the expected 24 shutoff head of the respective pump. 25 26 D. Gauges shall be as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Marshalltown 27 Instruments, Dwyer, Ametek, Ashcroft, Helicoid, Wekslar or equal 28 29 2.14 FLANGE ADAPTER COUPLINGS 30 31 A. Flange adapter couplings shall be of the sizes shown on the Drawings. 32 33 B. Flange adapter couplings shall have a 150 psi minimum pressure rating. 34 35 C. All couplings shall be restrained and shall have a sufficient number of anchor 36 studs to meet or exceed the test pressure rating for this project, 150 psi 37 minimum. 38 39 D. Couplings shall be Ebaa Iron Series 24100 Megaflange Restrained Flange 40 Adapter or equal. 41 42 2.15 FLEXIBLE COUPLINGS 43 44 A. Flexible couplings shall be either the split type or the sleeve type as shown on 45 the Drawings. 46 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -12 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 B. Split type coupling shall be used with all interior piping and with exterior piping 2 as noted on the Drawings. The couplings shall be mechanical type for radius 3 groove piping. The couplings shall mechanically engage and lock grooved 4 pipe ends in a positive couple and allow for angular deflection and contraction 5 and expansion. 6 7 C. Couplings shall consist of malleable iron, ASTM Specification A47, Grade 8 32510 housing clamps in two or more parts, a single chlorinated butyl 9 composition sealing gasket with a "C" shaped cross - section and internal 10 sealing lips projecting diagonally inward, and two or more oval track head type 11 bolts with hexagonal heavy nuts conforming to ASTM Specification A183 and 12 A194 to assemble the housing clamps. Bolts and nuts shall be hot - dipped 13 galvanized after fabrication. 14 15 D. Victaulic type couplings and fittings may be used in lieu of flanged joints. 16 Pipes shall be radius grooved as specified for use with the Victaulic couplings. 17 Flanged adapter connections at fittings, valves, and equipment shall be 18 Victaulic Vic Flange Style 741, equal by Gustin -Bacon Group, Division of 19 Certain -Teed Products, Kansas City, Kansas or equal. 20 21 E. Sleeve type couplings shall be used with all buried piping. The couplings shall 22 be of steel and shall be Dresser Style 38 or 40, as shown on the Drawings, or 23 equal. The coupling shall be provided with hot dipped galvanized steel bolts 24 and nuts unless indicated otherwise. 25 26 F All couplings shall be furnished with the pipe stop removed. 27 28 G. Couplings shall be provided with gaskets of a composition suitable for 29 exposure to the liquid within the pipe. 30 31 H. If the Contractor decides to use victaulic couplings in lieu of flanged joints, he 32 shall be responsible for supplying supports for the joints. 33 34 2.16 QUICK CONNECT COUPLINGS 35 36 A. Quick connect couplings shall be Model 633 -E hose shank adapter and Model 37 633 -C hose shank coupler as manufactured by Dover Corporation OPW 38 Division, Cincinnati, Ohio, Ever -tite Coupling Co., Inc., New York, New York, 39 or equal. 40 41 2.17 FLEXIBLE TYPE EXPANSION JOINTS 42 43 A. Expansion joints shall be manufactured of molded EPDM rubber with filled 44 arches and wire reinforcement. Joints shall be reinforced with baked enamel 45 ductile iron or split galvanized steel retaining rings placed directly against the 46 inside of the flange to prevent damage to the rubber surface when the bolts 47 are tightened. Flanges shall be drilled to ANSI 150#. Rated working pressure VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -13 05/31/13 1 shall be 150 psi. Retaining rings, control rods, bolts, nuts, and washers shall 2 be coated according to Section 09900 or shall be 304 or 316 stainless steel. 3 4 B. Joints shall be rated for a minimum operating temperature of 180 °F. 5 6 C. Tapered expansion joints shall be eccentric, single arch, and shall be capable 7 of a 1/2" maximum lateral deflection. Double arch expansion joints shall be 8 required where called out on the drawings. 9 10 D. Joints shall be provided and installed with the manufacturer's standard control 11 rods. Total joint deflection shall not exceed the manufacturer's recommended 12 maximum. Joints shall be installed in neutral position. 13 14 E. Expansion joints shall be Mercer Series FER, Proco, Red Valve Redflex, or 15 equal. 16 17 2.18 UNIONS 18 19 A. Unions on ferrous pipe 2 inches in diameter and smaller shall be 150 pounds 20 malleable iron, zinc - coated. Unions on water piping 2 -1/2 inches in diameter 21 and larger shall be flange pattern, 125 -pound class, zinc - coated. Gaskets for 22 flanged unions shall be of the best quality EPDM. Unions shall not be 23 concealed in walls, ceilings, or partitions. 24 25 PART 3 — EXECUTION 26 27 3.01 INSTALLATION 28 29 A. All valves and appurtenances shall be installed in the locations shown, true to 30 alignment and rigidly supported. Any damage to the above items shall be 31 repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer before they are installed. 32 33 B. After installation, all valves and appurtenances shall be tested at least 2 hours 34 at the working pressure corresponding to the class of pipe, unless a different 35 test pressure is specified. If any joint proves to be defective, it shall be 36 repaired to the satisfaction of the Engineer. 37 38 C. Install all floor boxes, brackets, extension rods, guides, the various types of 39 operators and appurtenances as shown on the Drawings that are in masonry 40 floors or walls, and install concrete inserts for hangers and supports as soon 41 as forms are erected and before concrete is poured. Before setting these 42 items, the Contractor shall check all plans and figures which have a direct 43 bearing on their location and he shall be responsible for the proper location of 44 these valves and appurtenances during the construction of the structures. 45 D. Pipe for use with flexible couplings shall have plain ends as specified in the 46 respective pipe sections in Division 15. 47 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -14 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 E. Flanged joints shall be made with high strength, low alloy Corten bolts, nuts 2 and washers. Mechanical joints shall be made with mild corrosion resistant 3 alloy steel bolts and nuts. All exposed bolts shall be painted the same color as 4 the pipe. All buried bolts and nuts shall be heavily coated with two (2) coats 5 (14 -20 mils DFT) of bituminous paint comparable to Carboline Bitumastic 6 300M, Tnemec Series 46H -413 Tneme -Tar, or approved equal. 7 8 F Prior to assembly of split couplings, the grooves, as well as other parts, shall 9 be thoroughly cleaned. The ends of the pipes and outside of the gaskets shall 10 be moderately coated with petroleum jelly, cup grease, soft soap or graphite 11 paste, and the gasket shall be slipped over one pipe end. After the other pipe 12 has been brought to the correct position, the gasket shall be centered properly 13 over the pipe ends with the lips against the pipes. The housing sections then 14 shall be placed. After the bolts have been inserted, the nuts shall be tightened 15 until the housing sections are firmly in contact, metal -to- metal, without 16 excessive bolt tension. 17 18 G. Prior to the installation of sleeve -type couplings, the pipe ends shall be 19 cleaned thoroughly for a distance of 8 inches. Soapy water may be used as a 20 gasket lubricant. A follower and gasket, in that order, shall be slipped over 21 each pipe to a distance of about 6 inches from the end, and the middle ring 22 shall be placed on the substantial completion date unless otherwise requested 23 by the Owner. 24 25 H. Valve boxes with concrete bases shall be installed as shown on the 26 Construction Drawings. Mechanical joints shall be made in the standard 27 manner. Valve stems shall be vertical in all cases. Place cast iron box over 28 each stem with base bearing on compacted fill and top flush with final grade. 29 Boxes shall have sufficient bracing to maintain alignment during backfilling. 30 Knobs on cover shall be parallel to pipe. Remove any sand or undesirable fill 31 from valve box. 32 33 3.02 SHOP PAINTING 34 35 A. Ferrous surfaces of above ground valves and appurtenances to be painted 36 shall receive a coating of rust - inhibitive primer compatible to paint system 37 specified in Section 09900. All pipe connection openings shall be capped to 38 prevent the entry of foreign matter prior to installation. 39 40 3.03 FIELD PAINTING 41 42 A. All metal valves and appurtenances specified herein and exposed to view, 43 except ball valves, shall be painted as part of the work in Section 09900. 44 45 3.04 INSPECTION AND TESTING 46 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -15 05/31/13 1 A. Completed pipe shall be subjected to a hydrostatic pressure and leakage in 2 accordance with Section 01625. All leaks shall be repaired and lines retested. 3 Prior to testing, the pipelines shall be supported in an approved manner to 4 prevent movement during tests. 5 6 7 END OF SECTION 8 VALVES AND APPURTENANCES 15100 -16 05/31/13 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16010 2 3 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS 4 5 PART I - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including 8 General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply 9 to work of this Section. 10 11 1.02 CODES: 12 13 A. The work shall be in conformance with the latest adopted version of the 14 following: 15 16 NFPA 70 National Electric Code 17 FBC Florida Building Code 18 NFPA National Fire Protection Association Codes 19 20 B. The installation shall also comply with all applicable rules and regulations of 21 local and state laws and ordinances. Include in the work, without extra cost, 22 any labor, materials, services, apparatus and drawings required to comply 23 with all applicable laws, ordinances, rules and regulations. Inform the 24 engineer of any work or materials which conflict with any of the applicable 25 codes, standards, laws, and regulations before submitting their bid. 26 27 1.03 ROUGH -IN: 28 29 A. Verify final locations for rough -ins with field measurements and with the 30 requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. 31 32 B. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 15 for rough -in 33 requirements. 34 35 1.04 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS: 36 37 A. Existing services shall not be interrupted without prior consent of the owner's 38 authorized representative and may be interrupted only at, and for, the 39 specific time designated by the owner's authorized representative. 40 41 B. Make a thorough examination of the site and the contract documents. No 42 claim for extra compensation will be recognized if difficulties are encountered 43 which an examination of site conditions and contract documents prior to 44 executing contract would have revealed. 45 46 C. Coordinate electrical equipment and materials installation with other building BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OWNER'S REVIEW 16010 - 1 7/02/14 1 components. 2 3 D. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 4 5 E. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building cornponents to 6 allow for electrical installations. 7 8 F. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be 9 set in poured -in -place concrete and other structural components, as they are 10 constructed. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical 11 materials and equipment for efficient flow of the work. Give particular 12 attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing -in the 13 building. 14 15 G. Coordinate the cutting and patching of building components to accommodate 16 the installation of electrical equipment and materials. 17 18 H. Install electrical equipment to facilitate maintenance and repair or 19 replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect 20 equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other 21 installations. 22 23 I. Coordinate the installation of electrical materials and equipment above 24 ceilings with suspension system, mechanical equipment and systems, and 25 structural components. 26 27 J. Temporary electrical service and construction lighting shall be provided 28 under this section. Provide all Temporary electrical equipment as shown on 29 the drawings for the duration of the project. All Temporary electrical 30 equipment and its installation shall not interfere with the operation of the 31 facility and shall not interfere with access to the existing facility's equipment. 32 Provide for all electrical service for construction period, making all 33 connections and removal of same at job conclusion. Furnish and install 34 temporary lighting for construction period. At job completion, all temporary 35 lamps shall be removed and replaced with new lamps; and all temporary 36 electrical equipment shall be disconnected and removed from the project 37 site. 38 39 K. All existing and new conduit/raceways within the project area shall be 40 properly (maximum of 6 feet between supports) supported. Add support to 41 existing conduit as required to comply with the NEC. 42 43 L. All enclosures for new electrical equipment shall be NEMA 4X stainless (316) 44 steel. All enclosures shall have internal mounting plates for cornponents and 45 an interior safety door. 46 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OWNER'S REVIEW 16010 - 2 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 s 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 M. There shall be no penetrations of existing clarifier tank or process basin 2 walls. All conduits shall be run surface mounted or on top of walls. Conduit 3 supports or associated hardware shall NOT penetrate existing clarifier tank 4 walls or process basin walls. 5 6 7 1.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING: 8 9 A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: CUTTING AND PATCHING for general 10 requirements for cutting and patching. 11 12 B. Do not endanger or damage installed work through procedures and 13 processes of cutting and patching. 14 15 C. Arrange for repairs required to restore other work because of damage 16 caused as a result of electrical installations. 17 18 D. No additional compensation will be authorized for cutting and patching work 19 that is necessitated by ill- timed, defective, or non - conforming installations. 20 21 E. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of electrical equipment and materials 22 required to: 23 24 1. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill -timed work. 25 26 2. Remove and replace defective work. 27 28 3. Remove and replace work not conforming to requirements of the 29 contract documents. 30 31 4. Remove samples of installed work as specified for testing. 32 33 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 34 35 6. Upon written instructions from the engineer, uncover and restore work 36 to provide for engineer observation of concealed work. 37 38 F. Cut, remove and legally dispose of, selected electrical equipment, 39 components, and materials as indicated; including, but not limited to, removal 40 of electrical items indicated to be removed and items made obsolete by the 41 new work. 42 43 G. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not 44 indicated or scheduled to be removed. 45 46 H. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OWNER'S REVIEW 16010 - 3 7/02/14 1 prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas. 2 3 I. Locate, identify, and protect electrical services passing through remodeling 4 or demolition area and serving other areas required to be maintained 5 operational. When transit services must be interrupted, provide temporary 6 services for the affected areas and notify the owner prior to changeover. 7 8 1.06 ELECTRICAL SUBMITTALS: 9 10 A. Refer to the Conditions of the Contract (General and Supplementary) and 11 Division 1 Section: SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES 12 for submittal definitions, requirements, and procedures. 13 14 B. Submittal of shop drawings, product data, and samples will be accepted only 15 when submitted by the contractor. Data submitted from subcontractors and 16 material suppliers directly to the engineer will not be processed. 17 18 C. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manuals with part lists as specified in 19 Division 1 Project Closeout; for the following electrical equipment: Panel 20 boards, Control Panels, Variable Frequency Drives, Soft Starters. Motor 21 Starters, Motors, Transformers, and Programmable Logic Controllers. 22 23 1.07 PRODUCT OPTIONS AND SUBSTITUTIONS: Refer to the Instructions to Bidders 24 and the Division 1 Section: PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTION for requirements in 25 selecting products and requesting substitutions. 26 27 1.08 PRODUCT LISTING: 28 29 A. Prepare listing of major electrical equipment and materials for the project. 30 31 B. Submit this listing as a part of the submittal requirement specified in the 32 Division 1 Section: PRODUCTS AND SUBSTITUTIONS. 33 34 C. When two or more items of the same material or equipment are required, 35 they shall be of the same manufacturer. Product manufacturer uniformity 36 does not apply to raw materials, bulk materials, wire, conduit, fittings, sheet 37 metal, steel bar stock, welding rods, solder, fasteners, motors for dissimilar 38 equipment units, and similar items used in work, except as otherwise 39 indicated. 40 41 D. Provide products which are compatible within systems and other connected 42 items. 43 44 E. No substitution will be considered unless written request has been submitted 45 to the engineer at least ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids. 46 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OWNER'S REVIEW 16010 - 4 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 F. If the engineer approves any proposed substitutions, such approval will be 2 set forth in an addendum. 3 4 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 5 6 A. Deliver products to project properly identified with names, model numbers, 7 types, grades, compliance labels, and similar information needed for distinct 8 identifications; adequately packaged and protected to prevent damage 9 during shipment, storage, and handling. 10 11 B. Store equipment and materials at the site, unless off -site storage is 12 authorized in writing. Protect stored equipment and materials from damage. 13 14 C. Coordinate deliveries of electrical materials and equipment to minimize 15 construction site congestion. Limit each shipment of materials and 16 equipment to the items and quantities needed for the smooth and efficient 17 flow of installation. 18 19 1.10 RECORD DOCUMENTS: 20 21 A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or PROJECT 22 RECORD DOCUMENTS for requirements. The following paragraphs 23 supplement the requirements of Division 1. 24 25 B. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to conduit size and location, both exterior 26 and interior; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; 27 concealed equipment, dimensioned to column lines; distribution and branch 28 electrical circuitry; fuse and circuit breaker size and arrangements; support 29 and hanger details; change orders; concealed control system devices. 30 31 C. Mark Specifications to indicate approved substitutions; change orders; actual 32 equipment and materials used. 33 34 D. Contractor shall provide engineer with record drawings (AutoCAD compatible 35 file format) and one set of blueprints. 36 37 1.11 WARRANTIES: 38 39 A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: SPECIFIC WARRANTIES for procedures 40 and submittal requirements for warranties. Refer to individual equipment 41 specifications for warranty requirements. 42 43 B. Compile and assemble the warranties specified in Division 16 into a 44 separated set of vinyl- covered, three -ring binders, tabulated and indexed for 45 easy reference. 46 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OWNER'S REVIEW 16010 - 5 7/02/14 1 C. Provide complete warranty information for each item to include product or 2 equipment; date of beginning of warranty or bond; duration of warranty or 3 bond; and names, addresses, and telephone numbers and procedures for 4 filing a claim and obtaining warranty services. 5 6 1.12 CLEANING: 7 8 A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT or FINAL 9 CLEANING for general requirements for final cleaning. 10 11 12 13 END OF SECTION 16010 14 15 16 17 18 19 BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS OWNER'S REVIEW 16010 - 6 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 SECTION 16110 3 4 RACEWAYS 5 6 PART 1 — GENERAL 7 8 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 9 10 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 11 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 specification sections, apply to 12 work of this Section. 13 14 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 15 section and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to 16 electrical raceways specified herein. 17 18 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 19 20 A. Extent of raceway work is indicated by drawings and schedules. 21 22 B. Types of raceways specified in this section include the following: 23 24 Heavy Wall Aluminum 25 PVC Schedule 80 26 Liquid -tight flexible PVC coated metal conduit 27 Rigid nonmetallic conduit 28 29 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 30 31 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of raceway 32 systems of types and sizes require, whose products have been in 33 satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years. 34 35 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least three (3) years of successful 36 installation experience on projects with electrical raceway work similar to 37 that required for this project. 38 39 C. Codes and Standards: 40 41 1. UL Compliance Labeling: Comply with applicable requirements of 42 UL safety standards pertaining to electrical raceway systems. 43 Provide raceway products and components which have been UL 44 listed and labeled. 45 46 47 RACEWAYS 16110 - 1 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 PART 2 — PRODUCTS 2 3 2.01 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING 4 5 A. General: Provide aluminum conduit, tubing and fittings of types, grades, 6 sizes and weights (wall thickness) for each service indicated. 7 8 B. Where types and grades are not indicated, provide proper selection 9 determined by installer to fulfill wiring requirements and comply with 10 applicable portions of NEC for raceways. 11 12 C. Rigid aluminum Conduit: Provide rigid aluminum, heavy wall, threaded 13 type. 14 15 D. Liquid -Tight Flexible Non - metallic Conduit: Provide liquid -tight flexible 16 non - metallic conduit for all motor connections. 17 18 E. Conduit Fittings: Couplings and connectors for conduit sizes 2" and 19 smaller shall be aluminum hex -nut, expansion -gland type. Aluminum set 20 screw type fittings may be used for conduit sizes 21/2" and larger. 21 22 2.02 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND DUCTS 23 24 A. General: Provide nonmetallic conduit, ducts and fittings of types, sizes 25 and weights for each service indicated. Where types and grades are not 26 indicated, provide proper selection determined by installer to fulfill wiring 27 requirements which comply with provisions for NEC for raceways. 28 29 B. Electrical Plastic Conduit: 30 31 1. Heavy Wall Conduit: Schedule 80, 90 °C, UL- rated, constructed of 32 Schedule 80, 90 polyvinyl chloride. For direct burial, UL listed and in 33 conformity with NEC Article 347. 34 2. Standard Wall Conduit: PVC UL rated, constructed of Schedule 40 35 polyvinyl chloride. For exterior above grade exposure, direct exposure 36 to sunlight, UL listed for direct sunlight and in conformity with NEC 37 Article 352. 38 39 C. Conduit and Tubing Accessories: Provide conduit, tubing and duct 40 accessories of types, sizes and materials, complying with manufacturer's 41 published product information, which mate and match conduit and tubing. 42 43 D. Conduit Bodies: Provide galvanized cast -metal conduit bodies of types, 44 shapes and sizes as required to fulfill job requirements and NEC 45 requirements. Construct conduit bodies with threaded conduit- entrance 46 ends, removable covers, either cast or galvanized steel arid corrosion - 47 resistant screws. RACEWAYS 16110 - 2 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 PART 3 — EXECUTION 2 3 3.01 OBSERVATION 4 5 A. Examine areas and conditions under which raceways are to be installed 6 and substrate which will support raceways. Notify contractor in wiring of 7 conditions detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed 8 with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in manner 9 acceptable to installer. 10 11 3.02 INSTALLATION OF RACEWAYS 12 13 A. General: Raceways run below grade, under floors on grade or in concrete 14 shall be PVC heavy wall type (Schedule 80) conduit, provided rigid 15 aluminum conduit is used on elbows and risers to boxes, cabinets, etc. 16 17 B. Sizes of raceways shall be not less than NEC requirements and shall not 18 in any case be less than indicated on drawings. Larger size raceways 19 and /or pull boxes shall be installed if there is excessive length unbroken 20 run or excessive number of bends. Combining of circuits other than those 21 indicated on the drawings will not be permitted. 22 23 C. Coordinate with other work, including wires /cables, boxes and panel work 24 as necessary to interface installation of electrical raceways and 25 components with other work. 26 27 1. Avoid use of similar metals throughout system to eliminate 28 possibility of electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, 29 coast surfaces with corrosion inhibiting compound before 30 assembling. 31 32 2. Use roughing -in dimensions of electrically operated unit furnished 33 by supplier. Set conduit and boxes for connection to units only 34 after receiving review of dimensions and after checking location 35 with other trades. 36 37 3. Provide nylon pullcord in empty conduits where indicated. Test all 38 empty conduits with ball mandrel. Clear any conduit which rejects 39 ball mandrel. Pay costs involved for restoration of conduit and 40 surrounding surfaces to original condition. 41 42 4. Use liquid -tight flexible conduit where subjected to one or more of 43 the following conditions: 44 45 a. Exterior location. 46 b. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be 47 expected to accumulate. RACEWAYS 16110 - 3 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 c. Corrosive atmosphere. 2 d. Subjected to water spray or dripping oil, water or grease. 3 4 D. Cut conduits straight, ream properly and cut threads for heavy wall conduit 5 deep and clean. 6 7 E. Field -bend conduit with benders designed for purpose so as not to distort 8 nor vary internal diameter. 9 10 F. Fasten conduit terminations in sheet metal enclosures by two (2) Iocknuts 11 and terminate with bushing. Install lock nuts inside and outside enclosure. 12 13 G. Conduits are not to cross pipe shafts or ventilating duct openings. 14 15 H. Keep conduits a minimum distance of 6" from parallel runs of flues, hot 16 water pipes or other sources of heat. Do not install horizontal raceway 17 runs below water and steam piping. 18 19 1. Support riser conduit at each floor level with clamp hangers. 20 21 J. Use of running threads at conduit joints and terminations is prohibited. 22 Where required, use 3 -piece union or split couplings. 23 24 K. Complete installation of electrical raceways before starting installation of 25 cables /wires within raceways. 26 27 L. Concealed Conduits: 28 29 1. Metallic raceways installed underground or in floors below grade, or 30 outside are to have conduit threads painted with corrosion - inhibiting 31 compound before couplings are assembled. Draw up coupling and 32 conduit sufficiently tight to ensure water tightness. 33 34 2. For floors -on- grade, install conduits under concrete slab. 35 36 3. Install underground conduits a minimum of 24" below finished 37 grade. 38 39 4. All conduits installed below grade or under concrete slab to be 40 minimum of 1 inch. 41 42 M. Conduits in Concrete Slab: 43 44 1. Place conduits between bottom reinforcing steel and top reinforcing 45 steel. Place conduits either parallel or at 90° to main reinforcing 46 steel. 47 RACEWAYS 16110 - 4 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Separate conduits by not Tess than diameter of largest conduit to 2 ensure proper concrete bond. 3 4 3. Conduits crossing in slab must be reviewed for proper cover by 5 engineer. 6 7 4. Embedded conduit diameter is not to exceed one -third (1/3) of slab 8 thickness. 9 10 N. Install conduits as not to damage or run through structural members. 11 Avoid horizontal or cross runs in building partitions or side walls. 12 13 0. Exposed Conduits: 14 15 1. Install exposed conduits and extensions from concealed conduit 16 systems neatly, parallel with or at right angles to walls of building. 17 18 2. Install exposed conduit work as not to interfere with ceiling inserts, 19 lights or ventilation ducts or outlets. 20 21 3. Support exposed conduits by use of hangers, clamps or clips. 22 Support conduits minimum of 18" on each side of bends and outlet 23 boxes and on spacing not to exceed 6' -0 ". 24 25 4. Run conduits for outlets on waterproof walls exposed. Set anchors 26 for supporting conduit on waterproof wall in waterproof cement. 27 28 5. Above requirements for exposed conduits also apply to conduits 29 installed in space above hung ceilings and in crawl spaces. 30 31 P. Non - Metallic Conduits: 32 33 1. Make solvent cemented joints in accordance with recommendations 34 of manufacturer. 35 36 2. Install PVC conduits in accordance with NEC and in compliance 37 with local utility practices. 38 39 Q. Conduit Fittings: 40 41 1. Construct locknuts for securing conduit to metal enclosure with 42 sharp edge for digging into metal and ridged outside circumference 43 for proper fastening. 44 45 2. Bushings for terminating conduits smaller than 1" and are to have 46 flared bottom and ribbed sides, with smooth upper edges to prevent 47 injury to cable insulation. RACEWAYS 16110 - 5 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 2 3. Install insulated type bushings for terminating conduits 1" and 3 larger. Bushings are to have flared bottom and ribbed sides. 4 Upper edge to have phenolic insulating ring molded into bushing. 5 6 4. Bushing of standard or insulated type to have screw type grounding 7 terminal. 8 9 5. Miscellaneous fittings such as reducers, chase nipples, 3 -piece 10 unions, split couplings and plugs to be specifically designed for 11 their particular application. 12 13 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 14 15 A. General: Mechanically assemble metal enclosures and raceways for 16 conductors to form continuous electrical conductor and connect to 17 electrical boxes, fittings and cabinets as to provide effective electrical 18 continuity and rigid mechanical assembly. 19 20 B. Avoid use of dissimilar metals throughout system to eliminate possibility of 21 electrolysis. Where dissimilar metals are in contact, coat all surfaces with 22 corrosion- inhibiting compound before assembling. 23 24 C. Install expansion fittings in all raceways wherever structural expansion 25 joints are crossed. 26 27 D. Make changes in direction of raceway run with proper fittings supplied by 28 raceway manufacturer. No field bends of raceway sections will be 29 permitted. 30 31 E. Properly support and anchor raceways for their entire length by structural 32 materials. Raceways are not to span any space unsupported. 33 34 F. Use boxes as supplied by raceway manufacturer wherever junction, pull, 35 or device boxes are required. Standard electrical "handy" boxes, etc. shall 36 not be permitted for use with surface raceway installations. 37 38 G. Raceway penetrations of fire -rated walls and /or floors shall be sealed to 39 maintain integrity of construction. All products, materials and methods of 40 installation shall be UL approved and meet NFPA requirements. 41 42 H. Unless otherwise noted on drawings, notified by engineer and /or 43 authorities having jurisdiction, the following materials may be used: 44 45 1. Rock Wool: Minimum four pound cubit foot density; flame spread 46 15, smoke developed 0, fuel contribution 0 by ASTM 384; minimum 47 melting point 2000°F. 48 RACEWAYS 16110 - 6 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 2. Concrete and masonry are also approved fire stop materials by 2 NFPA 90A. 3 4 3. UL approved products such as Nelson Type CLK Silicon Sealant. 5 Manufacturer's recommendations shall be strictly followed. 6 7 I. Submit complete data on fire - stopping materials and construction methods 8 for review by engineer before proceeding with work. 9 10 END OF SECTION 11 RACEWAYS 16110 - 7 I OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK RACEWAYS 16110 - 8 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16120 2 3 WIRES AND CABLES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to 11 work of this Section. 12 13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wires 15 and cables specified herein. 16 17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 18 19 A. Extent of electrical wire and cable work is indicated by drawings and 20 schedules. 21 22 B. Types of electrical wire, cable, and connectors specified in this Section 23 include the following: 24 25 Copper conductors 26 Split -bolt connectors 27 Wirenut connectors 28 29 C. Applications of electrical wire, cable, and connectors required for project 30 are as follows: 31 32 1. For power distribution circuits 33 2. For lighting circuits 34 3. For motor - branch circuits 35 4. For control circuits 36 37 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 38 39 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical wire 40 and cable products of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products 41 have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not Tess than five years. 42 43 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three years of successful 44 installation experience with projects utilizing electrical wiring and cabling 45 work similar to that required for this project. 46 WIRES AND CABLES OWNER'S REVIEW 16120 - 1 7/02/14 1 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements as applicable to 2 construction, installation, and color- coding of electrical wires arid cables. 3 4 D. IEEE Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of IEEE Stds. 82, 5 "Test Procedures for Impulse Voltage Tests on Insulated Conductors ", 6 and Std. 241, "IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems 7 in Commercial Buildings" pertaining to wiring systems. 8 9 E. ASTM Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ASTM B1, 2, 10 3, 8 and D -753. Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less 11 than 98% at 20°C (68 °F). 12 13 F. The following systems of color- coding shall be strictly adhered to: 14 Grounded Leads Green 15 Grounded Neutral Leads White 16 277/480 Volt, Ungrounded Phase Wires Brown, Orange and Yellow 17 120/208 Volt, Ungrounded Phase Wires Red, Blue, Black 18 19 G. The color code assigned to each phase wire shall be consistently followed 20 throughout. 21 22 H. Where existing base building color- coding differs from color- coding 23 assigned herein. Contractor shall use existing color coding as required to 24 maintain consistency. Advise engineer in writing of color - coding to be 25 used. 26 27 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 28 29 A. Deliver wire and cable properly packaged in factory- fabricated type 30 containers, or wound on NEMA specified type wire and cable reels. 31 32 B. Store wire and cable in clean dry space in original containers. Protect 33 products from weather, damaging fumes, construction debris and traffic. 34 35 C. Handle wire and cable carefully to avoid abrading, puncturing and tearing 36 wire and cable insulation and sheathing. Ensure that dielectric resistance 37 integrity of wires /cables is maintained. 38 39 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 40 41 2.01 Building Wires: 42 43 A. Provide factory- fabricated wires of sizes, ampacity ratings, and materials 44 for applications and services indicated. 45 WIRES AND CABLES OWNER'S REVIEW 16120 - 2 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 e 1 1 1 1 1 1 B. Conductor insulation shall be dual type THHN/THWN 75°C (167°F) for 2 dry, damp, and wet locations. Conductor insulation with single type 3 marking THHN 90°C (194°F) may be used for dry locations only. 4 5 PART 3 — EXECUTION 6 7 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRES AND CABLES: 8 9 A. General: Install electrical cables, wires and wiring connectors as 10 indicated, in compliance with applicable requirements of NEC, NEMA, UL, 11 and NECA's "Standard of Installation" and in accordance with recognized 12 industry practices. 13 14 B. Unless otherwise noted, all branch circuit conductors shall be No. 12 15 AWG. Branch circuits over 75 feet in length shall be No. 10 AWG unless 16 noted otherwise. 17 18 C. Install UL Type THWN or THHN wiring in conduit, for feeders and branch 19 circuits. 20 21 D. Pull conductors simultaneously where more than one is being installed in 22 same raceway. 23 24 E. Use pulling compound or lubricant, where necessary. Compound used 25 must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. 26 27 F. Use pulling means including, fish tape, cable, rope, and basket weave 28 wire /cable grips which will not damage cables or raceway. 29 30 G. Keep conductor splices to minimum. 31 32 H. Install splices and tapes which possess equivalent -or- better mechanical 33 strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced. Use splices 34 and tap connectors which are compatible with conductor material. 35 36 3.02 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 37 38 A. Prior to energization of circuitry, check installed feeder wires and cables 39 with megohm meter to determine insulation resistance levels to ensure 40 requirements are fulfilled. A list of feeders tested shall be submitted to the 41 engineer indicating the insulation resistance level for each cable. 42 43 B. Prior to energization, test wires and cables for electrical continuity and for 44 short- circuits. 45 46 WIRES AND CABLES OWNER'S REVIEW 16120 - 3 7/02/14 1 C. Subsequent to wire and cable hook -ups, energize circuitry and 2 demonstrate functioning in accordance with requirements. Where 3 necessary, correct malfunctioning units, and then retest to demonstrate 4 compliance. 5 6 END OF SECTION 16120 WIRES AND CABLES OWNER'S REVIEW 16120 - 4 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16135 2 3 ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, RACEWAYS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to 11 work of this Section. 12 13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, 14 and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical wiring 15 boxes and fittings specified herein. 16 17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 18 19 A. Extent of electrical box and associated fitting work is indicated by drawings 20 and schedules. 21 22 B. Types of electrical boxes and fittings specified in this Section include the 23 following: 24 Control Panels 25 Outlet boxes. 26 Junction boxes. 27 Pull boxes. 28 29 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 30 31 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of electrical 32 boxes and fittings of types, sizes, and capacities required, whose products 33 have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) 34 years. 35 36 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least three (3) years of successful 37 installation experience on projects utilizing electrical boxes and fittings similar 38 to those required for this project. 39 40 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to construction and 41 installation of electrical wiring boxes and fittings. 42 43 D. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 50, UL 514- 44 Series, and UL 886 pertaining to electrical boxes and fittings. Provide 45 electrical boxes and fittings which are UL listed and labeled. 46 47 PART 2 - PRODUCTS ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, AND RACEWAYS OWNER'S REVIEW 16135 - 1 7/02/14 1 2 2.01 FABRICATED MATERIALS: 3 4 A. Outlet Boxes: Provide aluminum outlet wiring boxes, of shapes, cubic inch 5 capacities, and sizes (including box depths as indicated), suitable for 6 installation at respective locations. Construct outlet boxes with mounting 7 holes and with cable and conduit -size knockout openings in bottom and 8 sides. 9 10 1. Outlet Box Accessories: Provide outlet box accessories as required 11 for each installation; including box supports, mounting ears and 12 brackets, wallboard hangers, box extension rings, fixture studs, cable 13 clamps and metal straps for supporting outlet boxes, which are 14 compatible with outlet boxes being used to fulfill installation 15 requirements for individual wiring situations. 16 17 B. Device Boxes: Provide aluminum, non - gangable device boxes, of shapes, 18 cubic inch capacities, and sizes (including box depths as indicated), suitable 19 for installation at respective locations. Construct device boxes for flush 20 mounting with mounting holes, and with cable -size knockout openings in 21 bottom and ends and with threaded screw holes in end plates for fastening 22 devices. Provide cable clamps and corrosion - resistant screws for fastening 23 cable clamps and for equipment type grounding. 24 25 1. Device Box Accessories: Provide device box accessories as required 26 for each installation; including mounting brackets, device box 27 extensions, switch box supports, plaster ears, and plaster board 28 expandable grip fasteners, which are compatible with device boxes 29 being utilized to fulfill installation requirements for individual wiring 30 situations. 31 32 2. Flush mounted wall outlets shall be 4" square boxes or gang boxes, 33 not Tess than 11/2" deep. Boxes shall be provided with extension rings 34 and /or covers with sufficient depth to bring the covers flush with the 35 finished wall. 36 37 3. Boxes for flush mounting in concrete block work with one or two 38 devices shall have covers with square corners on the raised portion of 39 the cover. The covers shall have a sufficient amount of depth to be 40 flush with the face of the block. The bottom side of the covers or 41 boxes shall be installed at the masonry course nearest to the 42 dimension specified or noted. 43 44 45 4. Outlet boxes for exposed wall mounting and outdoor installation shall 46 be cast aluminum boxes with suitable cast aluminium covers. 47 Weatherproof receptacle covers shall have spring hinged lids. ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, AND RACEWAYS OWNER'S REVIEW 16135 - 2 7/02/14 I 2 C. Rain -Tight Outlet Boxes: Provide corrosion - resistant, cast - aluminum, rain - 3 tight outlet wiring boxes; of types, shapes and sizes (including depth of 4 boxes), with threaded conduit holes for fastening electrical conduit, cast- "' 5 aluminum face plates with spring- hinged watertight caps suitably configured 6 for each application, including face plate gaskets and corrosion- resistant 7 plugs and fasteners. I 8 9 D. Junction and Pull Boxes: Provide aluminum junction and pull boxes, with 10 screw -on covers; of types, shapes and sizes, to suit each respective location I 11 and installation; with welded seams and equipped with stainless steel nuts, 12 bolts, screws and washers. All junction boxes shall be designated with 13 permanent marker circuit numbers and panelboard numbers of circuits 14 contained within. 15 16 E. Control Panels /Enclosures: 17 I18 1. The control panel /enclosures shall contain, as a minimum, devices 19 and equipment indicated on the drawings or other sections of these 20 specifications. All control panel /enclosures shall contain interior 21 22 mounting plate. 23 2. The control panel enclosure shall be NEMA 4X stainless steel, 24 25 Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 50 type 4 listed. 26 3. There shall be permanently affixed to the interior side of the exterior I 27 enclosure door both a nameplate and a 10" x 12" pocket for drawing 28 storage. The nameplate shall contain the following information: 29 voltage, phase, date manufactured and intended use — equipment I 30 service or function. 31 32 4. Inner safety door (dead front) shall be aluminum. 1 33 5. Provide surge arrestor per county requirements. 34 35 6. Contractor shall furnish shop drawings for control panel. Include 36 dimension, mounting and material requirements of control panel. 37 Furnish wiring diagrams of all internal components and devices. I 38 Schematic diagram of system and PLC connection diagrams and data 39 sheet and programming functions. Furnish operating and 40 maintenance and programming manuals. 41 42 43 PART 3 - EXECUTION 44 1 45 3.01 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL BOXES AND FITTINGS: 46 1 1 ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, AND RACEWAYS OWNER'S REVIEW 16135 - 3 7/02/14 1 A. General: Install electrical boxes and fittings as indicated, in accordance with 2 manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, and in 3 accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill project requirements. 4 5 B. Coordinate installation of electrical boxes and fittings with wire /cable, wiring 6 devices, and raceway installation work. 7 8 9 C. Provide weather -tight outlets for interior and exterior locations exposed to 10 weather or moisture. 11 12 D. Provide knockout closures to cap unused knockout holes where blanks have 13 been removed. 14 15 E. Install electrical boxes in those locations which ensure ready accessibility to 16 enclosed electrical wiring. All existing and new junction boxes within the 17 project area shall be made accessible. Relocate existing junction boxes as 18 required to comply with the NEC. 19 20 F. Metallic and approved nonmetallic electrical outlet boxes may be installed in 21 vertical fire resistive assemblies classified as 2 -hour or less without affecting 22 the fire classification, provided such openings occur on one side only in each 23 framing space and that openings do not exceed 16 square inches. Boxes 24 located opposite sides of walls or partitions shall be separated by a 25 horizontal distance of 24 ". 26 27 G. In openings larger than 16 square inches, the wall shall be built around 28 openings so as not to interfere with the integrity of the wall rating. 29 30 H. All clearances between such boxes and the gypsum board shall be 31 completely filled with joint compound or other approved material. 32 33 I. Position recessed outlet boxes accurately to allow for surface finish 34 thickness. 35 36 J. Set floor boxes level and flush with finish flooring material. 37 38 K. Fasten electrical boxes firmly and rigidly to substrates, or structural surfaces 39 to which attached, or solidly embed electrical boxes in concrete or masonry. 40 41 L. Subsequent to installation of boxes, protect boxes from construction debris 42 and damage. 43 44 END OF SECTION 16135 ELECTRICAL BOXES, FITTINGS, AND RACEWAYS OWNER'S REVIEW 16135 - 4 7/02/14 1 1 1 SECTION 16142 I 2 3 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT 4 ' 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: I 8 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to I 11 12 work of this Section. 13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to 15 electrical connections for equipment specified herein. 16 I 17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 18 19 A. Extent of electrical connections for equipment is indicated by drawings I 20 and schedules. Electrical connections are hereby defined to include 21 22 connections used for providing electrical power to equipment. 23 B. Electrical connections for equipment, not furnished as integral part of 24 equipment, are specified in other Division 16 sections, and are work of 25 this Section. 26 I27 C. Motor starters and controllers not furnished as integral part of equipment 28 are specified in applicable Division 16 sections and are work of this 29 Section. 30 31 D. Junction boxes and disconnect switches required for connecting motors 32 and other electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division I 33 34 16 sections, and are work of this Section. 35 E. Electrical identification for wire /cable conductors is specified in Division 16 36 37 section, "Electrical Identification ", and is work of this Section. 38 F. Raceways and wires /cables required for connecting motors and other I 39 40 electrical units of equipment are specified in applicable Division 16 sections, and are work of this Section. 41 I 42 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 43 44 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical I 45 connectors and terminals, of types and ratings required, and ancillary 46 connection materials, including electrical insulating tape, soldering fluxes, 1 1 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT ONER'S REVIEW 16142 - 1 7/02/14 1 and cable ties; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar 2 service for not Tess than five (5) years. 3 4 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firms with at least two (2) years of successful 5 installation experience with projects utilizing electrical connections for 6 equipment similar to that required for this project. 7 8 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEC as to 9 type products used and installation of electrical power connections 10 (terminals and splices) for junction boxes, motor starters, and disconnect 11 switches. 12 13 D. UL Compliance: Comply with UL Std 486A, "Wire Connectors and 14 Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors" including, but not limited 15 to, tightening of electrical connectors to torque values indicated. Provide 16 electrical connection products and materials which are UL. listed and 17 labeled. 18 19 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 20 21 2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS: 22 23 A. General: For each electrical connection indicated, provide complete 24 assembly of materials; including, but not necessarily limited to, pressure 25 connectors, terminals (lugs), electrical insulating tape, cable ties, 26 solderless wirenuts, and other items and accessories as needed to 27 complete splices and terminations of types indicated. Metal shall not be 28 used for outdoor applications. The contractor shall use aluminum for 29 outdoor installations. 30 31 B. Metal Conduit, Tubing and Fittings, General: Provide metal conduit, 32 tubing and fittings of types, grades, sizes and weights (wall thicknesses) 33 indicated for each type service. Where types and gravies are not 34 indicated, provide proper selection as determined by installer to fulfill 35 wiring requirements and comply with NEC requirements for raceways. 36 Provide products complying with Division 16 Basic Electrical and in 37 accordance with the following listing of metal conduit, tubing and fittings: 38 39 Rigid aluminum conduit. 40 Rigid metal conduit fittings. 41 Electrical metallic tubing. 42 EMT fittings. 43 Flexible metal conduit. 44 Flexible metal conduit fittings. 45 Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit. 46 Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit fittings. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT ONER'S REVIEW 16142 - 2 7/02/14 1 1 1 I 2 3 C. Wires, Cables, and Connectors: 4 5 1. General: Provide wires, cables, and connectors complying with 6 Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials And Methods section "Wires 7 and Cables ". I 8 9 2. Wires /Cables: Unless otherwise indicated, provide wires /cables 10 (conductors) for electrical connections which match (including sizes I 11 and ratings) wires /cables which are supplying electrical power. 12 Provide copper conductors with conductivity of not less than 98% at 13 20°C (68 °F). I 14 15 D. Connectors and Terminals: Provide electrical connectors and terminals 16 which mate and match (including sizes and ratings) with equipment 17 terminals, and are recommended by equipment manufacturer for intended 18 applications. 19 I 20 PART 3 - EXECUTION 21 22 3.01 OBSERVATION: 23 I 24 A. Observe area and conditions under which electrical connections for 25 equipment are to be installed and notify contractor in writing of conditions 26 detrimental to proper completion of the work. Do not proceed with the 1 27 work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner 28 acceptable to installer. 29 30 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS: 31 32 A. Install electrical connections as indicated; in accordance with equipment I 33 manufacturer's written instructions, with recognized industry practices, and 34 complying with applicable requirements of UL and NEC to ensure that 35 products fulfill requirements. I 36 37 B. Coordinate with other work, including wires /cables, raceway, and 38 equipment installation as necessary to properly interface installation of I 39 electrical connections for equipment with other work. 40 41 C. Connect electrical power supply conductors to equipment conductors in I 42 accordance with equipment manufacturer's written instructions and wiring 43 diagrams. Mate and match conductors of electrical connections for proper 44 interface between electrical power supplies and installed equipment. 1 45 1 1 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT ONER'S REVIEW 16142 - 3 7/02/14 1 D. Maintain existing electrical service and feeders to occupied areas and 2 operational facilities unless otherwise indicated, or when authorized 3 otherwise in writing by owner or engineer. Provide temporary service 4 during interruptions to existing facilities. When necessary, schedule 5 momentary outages for replacing existing wiring systems with new wiring 6 systems. When that "cutting- over" has been successfully accomplished, 7 remove, relocate, or abandon existing wiring as indicated. 8 9 E. Cover splices with electrical insulating material equivalent to, or of greater 10 insulation resistivity rating, than electrical insulation rating of those 11 conductors being spliced. 12 13 F. Prepare cables and wires by cutting and stripping covering armor, jacket, 14 and insulation properly to ensure uniform and neat appearance where 15 cables and wires are terminated. Exercise care to avoid cutting through 16 tapes which will remain on conductors. Also avoid "ringing" copper 17 conductors while skinning wire. 18 19 G. Trim cables and wires as short as practicable and arrange routing to 20 facilitate inspection, testing, and maintenance. 21 22 H. Provide flexible conduit for motor connections and other electrical 23 equipment connections where subject to movement and vibration. 24 25 I. Provide liquid -tight flexible conduit for connection of motors and other 26 electrical equipment where subject to movement and vibration; and also 27 where connections are subjected to one or more of the following 28 conditions: 29 30 1. Exterior location. 31 2. Moist or humid atmosphere where condensate can be expected to 32 accumulate. 33 3. Corrosive atmosphere. 34 4. Water spray. 35 5. Dripping oil, grease, or water. 36 37 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 38 39 A. Upon completion of installation of electrical connections, and after circuitry 40 has been energized with rated power source, test connections to 41 demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. Ensure that 42 direction of rotation of each motor fulfills requirement. Correct 43 malfunctioning units at site, then retest to demonstrate compliance. 44 45 END OF SECTION 16142 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS FOR EQUIPMENT ONE R'S REVIEW 16142 - 4 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16143 2 3 WIRING DEVICES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to 11 work of this Section. 12 13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to wiring 15 devices specified herein. 16 17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 18 19 A. The extent of wiring device work is indicated by drawings and schedules. 20 Wiring devices are defined as single discrete units of electrical distribution 21 systems which are intended to carry but not utilize electric energy. 22 23 B. Types of electrical wiring devices in this section include the following: 24 25 Receptacles. 26 Ground -fault circuit interrupters. 27 Switches. 28 Wallplates. 29 30 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 31 32 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of electrical 33 wiring devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have 34 been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years. 35 36 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least two (2) years of successful 37 installation experience on projects utilizing wiring devices similar to those 38 required for this project. 39 40 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and 41 wiring of electrical wiring devices. 42 43 D. UL Compliance: Provide wiring devices which are UL listed and labeled. 44 45 1.04 SUBMITTALS: 46 47 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on electrical wiring devices. WIRING DEVICES OWNER'S REVIEW 16143 - 1 7/02/14 1 2 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 3 4 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 5 6 A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers 7 providing wiring devices which may be incorporated in the work include; 8 but are not limited to, the following (for each type and rating of wiring 9 device): 10 11 Arrow -Hart, Cooper Industries 12 Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co., Inc. 13 Harvey Hubbell Inc. 14 Pass and Seymour Inc. 15 16 17 2.02 FABRICATED WIRING DEVICES: 18 19 A. General: Provide factory- fabricated wiring devices, in types, colors, and 20 electrical ratings for applications indicated and which comply with NEMA 21 Stds. Pub /No. WD1. Provide ivory color devices except as otherwise 22 indicated. 23 24 B. Receptacles: 25 26 1. All receptacles shall be the grounding type with ground connection 27 made through an extra pole that shall be permanently connected to 28 the green grounding conductor. 29 30 2. Duplex receptacles for 20 ampere, 120 volt service shall be two - 31 pole, three -wire receptacles, rated 20 amperes at 125 volts. 32 Receptacles shall be Harvey Hubbell, Inc., Catalog No. 5362-1. 33 34 3. Single receptacles for 20 amps, 120 volts service shall be two -pole, 35 three -wire rated 20 amperes at 125 volts. Receptacles shall be 36 Harvey Hubbell Inc., Catalog No. 5361-1. 37 38 C. Switches: 39 40 1. Snap: Provide toggle switches, rated 20 amperes at 120/277 volts, 41 quiet type, and shall be UL approved without derating for tungsten 42 lamp loads or inductive loads. All switches shall have a grounding 43 terminal which shall be connected to the green grounding 44 conductor. The following catalog numbers are Harvey Hubbell, Inc. 45 46 47 WIRING DEVICES OWNER'S REVIEW 16143 - 2 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Type Catalog No. 2 3 Single Pole HBL 1221 -1 4 5 2.03 WIRING DEVICE ACCESSORIES: 6 7 A. 'In Use' covers for exterior receptacles. 8 9 B. Weatherproof caps for switches. 10 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 12 13 3.01 INSTALLATION OF WIRING DEVICES: 14 15 A. Install wiring devices as indicated, in accordance with manufacturer's 16 written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, NECA's "Standard of 17 Installation ", and in accordance with recognized industry practices to fulfill 18 project requirements. 19 20 B. Install wiring devices only in electrical boxes which are clean; free from 21 excess building materials, dirt, and debris. 22 23 C. Install wiring devices after wiring work is completed. 24 25 D. Install wallplates after painting work is completed. 26 27 3.02 PROTECTION OF WALLPLATES AND RECEPTACLES: 28 29 A. Upon installation of wallplates and receptacles, advise contractor 30 regarding proper and cautious use of convenience outlets. At time of 31 substantial completion, replace those items which have been damaged, 32 including those burned and scored by faulty plugs. 33 34 3.03 GROUNDING: 35 36 A. Provide equipment grounding connections for all wiring devices, unless 37 otherwise indicated. 38 39 3.04 TESTING: 40 41 A. Prior to energizing circuitry, test wiring for electrical continuity and for 42 short- circuits. Ensure proper polarity of connections is maintained. 43 Subsequent to energization, test wiring devices to demonstrate 44 compliance with requirements. 45 46 END OF SECTION 16143 47 WIRING DEVICES OWNER'S REVIEW 16143 - 3 7/02/14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK WIRING DEVICES OWNER'S REVIEW 16143 - 4 7/02/14 1 1 1 SECTION 16170 1 2 3 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS 4 I 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: I 8 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to 11 work of this Section. 12 13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods I 14 15 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to circuit and motor disconnects specified herein. 16 I 17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 18 19 A. Extent of circuit and motor disconnect switch work is indicated on I 20 drawings and schedules. 21 22 B. Types of circuit and motor disconnect switches in this Section include the 23 following: 24 25 Equipment disconnects. I 26 Appliance disconnects. 27 Motor - circuit disconnects. 28 I 29 C. Wires /cables, raceways, and electrical boxes and fittings required in 30 connection with circuit and motor disconnect work are specified in other 31 Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods sections. 32 1 33 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 34 35 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of circuit and 1 36 motor disconnect switches of types and capacities required, whose 37 products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not Tess than 38 three (3) years. I 39 40 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful 41 installation experience with projects utilizing circuit and motor disconnect I 42 work similar to that required for this project. 43 44 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC requirements pertaining to I 45 construction and installation of electrical circuit and motor disconnect 46 devices. 1 1 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS OWNER'S REVIEW 16170 - 1 7/02/14 1 D. UL Compliance: Comply with requirements of UL 98, "Enclosed and 2 Dead -Front Switches." Provide circuit and motor disconnect switches 3 which have been UL listed and labeled. 4 5 E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of NEMA Stds. 6 Pub No. KS 1, "Enclosed Switches" and 250, "Enclosures for Electrical 7 Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)." 8 9 1.04 SUBMITTALS: 10 11 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on circuit and motor 12 disconnect switches. 13 14 B. Submit shop drawings in booklet form with separate sheet for each circuit 15 and motor disconnect with proposed switch and accessories clearly 16 identified on each sheet. Identify each device with corresponding names, 17 abbreviations (numbers and lettering) to match terminology of contract 18 documents. 19 20 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 21 22 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 23 24 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, 25 manufacturers offering circuit and motor disconnects which may be 26 incorporated in the work are limited to: 27 28 Square D Company. 29 Westinghouse /Cutler- Hammer 30 General Electric Co. 31 32 2.02 FABRICATED SWITCHES: 33 34 A. Heavy -Duty Safety Switches: Provide surface- mounted, heavy -duty type, 35 NEMA 4X stainless steel enclosed safety switches, of types, sizes and 36 electrical characteristics indicated; incorporating quick -make, quick -break 37 type switches. Construct so that switch blades are visible in OFF position 38 with door open. Equip with operating handle which is integral part of 39 enclosure base and whose operating position is easily recognizable, and 40 is padlockable in OFF position. Construct current carrying parts of high - 41 conductivity copper, with silver- tungsten type switch contacts and positive 42 pressure type reinforced fuse clips. 43 44 1. All fuses for safety switches shall be dual element, cartridge type. 45 Fuses shall be Bussman "Fusetron" or Chase- Shawmut "Trionic." 46 The contractor shall furnish and install proper size fuses where CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS OWNER'S REVIEW 16170 - 2 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 required for all fusible equipment and shall furnish to the owner one 2 spare fuse for each fuse installed. 3 4 PART 3 - EXECUTION 5 6 3.01 INSTALLATION OF CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECT SWITCHES: 7 8 A. Install circuit and motor disconnect switches as indicated, complying with 9 manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, 10 NEMA, NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in accordance with 11 recognized industry practices. 12 13 B. Install disconnect switches for use with motor - driven appliances and 14 motors and controllers within sight of controller position unless otherwise 15 indicated. 16 17 C. Unless otherwise indicated, protective devices shall be mounted with top 18 of cabinet or enclosure 6' -6" above finished floor; shall be properly 19 aligned; and shall be adequately supported independently of the 20 connecting raceways and other equipment. All steel shapes, etc., 21 necessary for the support of the equipment shall be furnished and 22 installed where the building structure is not suitable for mounting the 23 equipment directly thereon. Unless otherwise indicated, all branch circuit 24 protective devices enclosures shall be NEMA type I, general purpose 25 type. Branch circuit protective devices installed outdoors or exposed to 26 the weather shall have weatherproof enclosures, NEMA Type 4X. 27 28 3.02 GROUNDING: 29 30 A. Provide equipment grounding connections sufficiently tight to assure a 31 permanent and effective ground for electrical disconnect switches where 32 indicated. 33 34 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: 35 36 A. Subsequent to completion of installation of electrical disconnect switches, 37 energize circuitry and demonstrate capability and compliance with 38 requirements. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at project site, 39 then retest to demonstrate compliance. Otherwise remove and replace 40 with new units and retest. 41 42 43 44 END OF SECTION 16170 45 46 CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS OWNER'S REVIEW 16170 - 3 7/02/14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK CIRCUIT AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS OWNER'S REVIEW 16170 - 4 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16190 2 3 SUPPORTING DEVICES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to 11 work of this Section. 12 13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 14 section, and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to 15 electrical supporting devices specified herein. 16 17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 18 19 A. Extent of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals is indicated by drawings 20 and schedules and /or specified in other Division 16 sections. 21 22 B. Types of supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals specified in this Section 23 include the following: 24 25 Clevis hangers. 26 One -hole conduit straps. 27 Two -hole conduit straps. 28 Round steel rods. 29 Expansion anchors. 30 Toggle bolts. 31 Wall and floor seals. 32 Corn Clamps. 33 34 C. Supports, anchors, sleeves, and seals furnished as part of factory 35 fabricated equipment are specified as part of that equipment assembly in 36 other Division 16 sections. 37 38 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 39 40 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in manufacture of supporting 41 devices, of types, sizes, and ratings required, whose products have been 42 in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than three (3) years. 43 44 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful 45 installation experience with projects utilizing electrical supporting device 46 work similar to that required for this project. SUPPORTING DEVICES OWNER'S REVIEW 16190 - 1 7/02/14 1 C. NECA Compliance: Comply with National Electrical Contractors 2 Association's "Standard of Installation ", pertaining to anchors, fasteners, 3 hangers, supports, and equipment mounting. 4 5 D. UL Compliance: Provide electrical components which are UL listed and 6 labeled. 7 8 1.04 SUBMITTALS: 9 10 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on supporting devices, 11 including catalog cuts, specifications, and installation instructions for each 12 type of support, anchor, sleeve, and seal. 13 14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 15 16 2.01 MANUFACTURED SUPPORTING DEVICES: 17 18 A. General: Provide supporting devices which comply with manufacturer's 19 standard materials, design and construction, in accordance with published 20 product information and as required for complete installation and as 21 herein specified. Where more than one type of supporting device meets 22 indicated requirements, selection is installer's option. 23 24 B. Supports: Provide supporting devices of types, sizes, and materials 25 indicated and having the following construction features: 26 27 1. Clevis Hangers: For supporting conduit; aluminum with 1/2' 28 diameter hole for round steel rod, approximately 54 pounds per 100 29 units. 30 31 2. Reducing Couplings: Aluminum rod reducing coupling, i 2' by 5/8 ", 32 approximately 16 pounds per hundred 100 units. 33 34 3. One -Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting conduit; aluminum. 35 36 4. Two -Hole Conduit Straps: For supporting conduit; aluminum. 37 38 5. Hexagon Nuts: For 1/2" rod size, aluminum. 39 40 6. Round Aluminum Rod: 1/2' diameter. 41 42 7. Offset Conduit Clamps: For supporting 2" rigid metal conduit; 43 aluminum. 44 45 C. Anchors: Provide anchors of types, sizes, and materials indicated with 46 the following construction features: (all aluminum) SUPPORTING DEVICES OWNER'S REVIEW 16190 - 2 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1. Expansion Anchors: '/z'. 2 3 2. Toggle Bolts: Springhead, 3/16" by 4 ". 4 5 D. Sleeves and Seals: Provide sleeves and seals, of types, sizes and 6 materials indicated, with the following construction features: 7 8 1. Wall and Floor Seals: Provide factory- assembled watertight wall 9 and floor seals, of types and sizes indicated, suitable for sealing 10 around conduit, pipe, or tubing passing through concrete floors and 11 walls. Construct seals with steel sleeves, malleable iron body, 12 neoprene sealing grommets and rings, metal pressure rings, 13 pressure clamps, and cap screws. Seals shall be fire -rated where 14 required. 15 16 E. U- Channel Strut Systems: Provide U- channel strut system for supporting 17 electrical equipment; aluminum of types and sizes indicated. Construct 18 with 3/16" diameter holes, 8" O.C. on top surface, and with the following 19 fittings which mate and match with U- channel: 20 21 Fixture hangers. 22 Channel hangers. 23 End caps. 24 Beam clamps. 25 Wiring studs. 26 Thinwall conduit clamps. 27 Rigid conduit clamps. 28 Conduit hangers. 29 30 2.02 FABRICATED SUPPORTING DEVICES: 31 32 A. Pipe Sleeves: Provide pipe sleeves of Aluminum Pipe: Fabricate from 33 schedule 40 galvanized aluminum pipe. Remove burrs. 34 35 B. Sleeve Seals: Provide sleeves for piping which penetrate foundation walls 36 below grade or exterior walls. Caulk between sleeve and pipe with 37 nontoxic, UL classified caulking material to ensure watertight seal. Seals 38 shall be fire -rated where required. 39 40 PART 3 - EXECUTION 41 42 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPORTING DEVICES: 43 44 A. Install hangers, anchors, sleeves, and seals as indicated, in accordance 45 with manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry 46 practices to insure supporting devices comply with requirements. Comply 47 with requirements of NECA and NEC for installation of supporting devices. SUPPORTING DEVICES OWNER'S REVIEW 16190 - 3 7/02/14 1 2 B. Coordinate with other electrical work, including raceway and wiring work, 3 as necessary to interface installation of supporting devices with other 4 work. 5 6 C. Install hangers, supports and attachments to support piping properly from 7 building structure. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal 8 conduits to be supported together on trapeze type hangers where 9 possible. Install supports with spacings indicated and in compliance with 10 NEC requirements. 11 12 END OF SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES OWNER'S REVIEW 16190 - 4 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16195 2 3 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to 11 work of this Section. 12 13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 14 section, and is part of each Division 16 section making reference to 15 electrical identification specified herein. 16 17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 18 19 A. Extent of electrical identification work is indicated by drawings and 20 schedules. 21 22 B. Types of electrical identification work specified in this Section include the 23 following: 24 25 Equipment/system identification signs. 26 27 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 28 29 2.01 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS: 30 31 A. Engraved Plastic- Laminate Signs: 32 33 1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate in 34 sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard 35 letter style of sizes and wording indicated; black face and white 36 core plies (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for 37 mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is 38 necessary because of substrate. 39 40 2. Signs shall be black face with white core plies (letter color). 41 42 a. Thickness: 1/16'', except as otherwise indicated. 43 b. Fasteners: Self- tapping stainless steel screws, except 44 contact -type permanent adhesive where screws cannot, or 45 should not, penetrate substrate. 46 c. Nameplates for essential electrical systems shall be red with 47 white letters. ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION OWNER'S REVIEW 16195 - 1 7/02/14 1 2 2.02 LETTERING AND GRAPHICS: 3 4 A. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations, and other designations used 5 in electrical identification work with corresponding designations shown, 6 specified, or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as 7 indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturer 8 or as required for proper identification and operation /maintenance of 9 electrical systems and equipment. 10 11 PART 3 - EXECUTION 12 13 3.01 APPLICATION AND INSTALLATION: 14 15 A. General Installation Requirements: 16 17 1. Install electrical identification products as indicated, in accordance 18 with manufacturer's written instructions and requirements of NEC. 19 20 2. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces 21 which require finish, install identification after completion of 22 painting. 23 24 3. Regulations: Comply with governing regulations and requests of 25 governing authorities for identification of electrical work. 26 27 B. Equipment/System Identification: 28 29 1. General: Install engraved plastic - laminate sign on each major unit 30 of electrical equipment in building; including central or master unit 31 of each electrical system including communication/ control /signal 32 systems, unless unit is specified with its own self - explanatory 33 identification or signal system. Provide text matching terminology 34 and numbering of the contract documents and shop drawings. 35 Provide signs for each unit of the following categories of electrical 36 work: 37 38 a. Panelboards, electrical cabinets and enclosures. 39 b. Access panels /doors to electrical facilities. 40 c. Transformers. 41 d. Fire alarm equipment cabinets. 42 e. Disconnect switches, motor starters, contactors, including 43 current origination. 44 45 2. Install signs at locations indicated or, where not otherwise 46 indicated, at location for best convenience of viewing without ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION OWNER'S REVIEW 16195 - 2 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. Secure 2 to substrate with fasteners, except use adhesive where fasteners 3 should not, or cannot, penetrate substrate. 4 5 END OF SECTION 16195 6 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION OWNER'S REVIEW 16195 - 3 7/02/14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION OWNER'S REVIEW 16195 - 4 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16452 2 3 GROUNDING 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to 11 work of this Section. 12 13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Materials and Methods section, and is 14 part of each Division 16 Section making reference to grounding specified 15 herein. 16 17 1.02 SUMMARY: 18 19 A. The extent of electrical grounding and bonding work is indicated by 20 drawings and schedules, and as specified herein. Grounding and bonding 21 work is defined to encompass systems, circuits, and equipment. All new 22 grounding electrodes (rods) and new ground conductors shall be bonded 23 to the existing grounding grid at four locations, minimum. All new control 24 panels, VFDs and electrical panels and cabinets shall be grounded with 25 new ground rods and shall also be bonded to the existing grounding grid. 26 All new connections to the existing grounding grid shall be made by 27 exothermic weld process. Contractor shall obtain approval the grounding 28 connections from owner before installation. Contractor shall furnish and 29 install one grounding test station at each Polymer control Panel and at 30 each VFD sample pump Panel. Test station shall include in grade box 31 with removable lid to exposed top of ground rod and grounding conductor; 32 all connections in test station shall be mechanical type — not exothermic 33 weld. 34 35 B. The type of electrical grounding and bonding work specified in this Section 36 includes the following: 37 38 Solidly grounded 39 40 C. Applications of electrical grounding and bonding work in this Section 41 includes the following: 42 43 Electrical power systems 44 Grounding electrodes 45 Separately derived systems 46 Raceways 47 Service equipment GROUNDING 16452 - 1 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 Enclosures /Control Panels 2 Equipment 3 4 D. Refer to other Division 16 sections for wires /cables, electrical raceways, 5 boxes and fittings, and wiring devices which are required in conjunction 6 with electrical grounding and bonding work; not work of this section. 7 8 1.03 SUBMITTALS: 9 10 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on grounding and bonding 11 products and associated accessories. 12 13 14 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 15 16 A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the 17 manufacture of grounding and bonding products, of types and ratings 18 required, and ancillary grounding materials; including stranded cable, 19 copper braid and bus, grounding electrodes and plate electrodes, and 20 bonding jumpers; whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar 21 service for not less than five (5) years. 22 23 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful 24 installation experience on projects with electrical grounding work similar to 25 that required for project. 26 27 C. Codes and Standards: 28 29 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local electrical 30 code requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC as 31 applicable to electrical grounding and bonding, pertaining to 32 systems, circuits, and equipment. 33 34 2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 35 Standards No.'s 467, "Electrical Grounding and Bonding 36 Equipment ", and 869, "Electrical Service Equipment ", pertaining to 37 grounding and bonding of systems, circuits, and equipment. In 38 addition, comply with UL Std. 486A, "Wire Connectors and 39 Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors." Provide 40 grounding and bonding products that are UL listed and labeled for 41 their intended usage. 42 43 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 44 45 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING: 46 47 A. Materials and Components, General: Except as otherwise indicated, 48 provide electrical grounding and bonding systems indicated; with GROUNDING 16452 - 2 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 assembly of materials, including, but not limited to, cables /wires, 2 connectors, solderless lug terminals, grounding electrodes and plate 3 electrodes, bonding jumper braid, surge arresters, and additional 4 accessories needed for a complete installation. Where more than one 5 type component product meets indicated requirements, selection is 6 installer's option. Where materials or components are not indicated, 7 provide products that comply with NEC and UL, requirements, and with 8 established industry standards for those applications indicated. 9 10 B. Conductors: Unless otherwise indicated, provide electrical grounding 11 conductors for grounding system connections that match power supply 12 wiring materials and are sized according to NEC. 13 14 C. Bonding Plates, Connectors, Terminals and Clamps: Provide electrical 15 bonding plates, connectors, terminals, Tugs, and clamps as recommended 16 by bonding plate, connector, terminal, and clamp manufacturers for 17 indicated applications. 18 19 D. Ground Electrodes: Solid copper, 5 Ohms, three - quarter inch (3/4') 20 diameter by twenty feet (20'). 21 22 PART 3 - EXECUTION 23 24 3.01 EXAMINATION: 25 26 A. Examine areas and conditions under which electrical grounding and 27 bonding connections are to be made, and notify contractor in writing of 28 conditions detrimental to proper completion of work. Do not proceed with 29 work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in a manner 30 acceptable to installer. 31 32 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ELECTRICAL GROUNDING AND BONDING SYSTEMS: 33 34 A. General: Install electrical grounding and bonding systems as indicated, in 35 accordance with manufacturer's instructions; applicable portions of NEC, 36 NECA's "Standard of Installation ", and in accordance with recognized 37 industry practices, to ensure that products comply with requirements. 38 39 B. Coordinate with other electrical work as necessary to interface installation 40 of electrical grounding and bonding system work with other work. 41 42 C. Ground electrical service system neutral at service entrance to the 43 building cold water line and to three (3) three - fourths inch (3/4 ") diameter, 44 twenty feet (20') long ground rods spaced ten feet (10') apart. 45 46 D. Ground each separately- derived system neutral to separate grounding 47 electrode. 48 GROUNDING 16452 - 3 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 E. Connect together system neutral, service equipment enclosures, exposed 2 noncurrent carrying metal parts of electrical equipment, metal raceway 3 systems, grounding conductor in raceways and cables, receptacle ground 4 connectors, and plumbing systems. 5 6 F. All raceways with No. 10 or 12 AWG phase conductors for receptacles, 7 lighting fixtures, and similar circuits shall be provided with a parity -sized 8 green equipment ground conductor. Ground conductor shall be installed 9 in entire raceway system, including wall switches and flexible conduit to 10 Tight fixtures. Equipment ground conductor sizes for circuits with phase 11 conductors larger than No. 12 AWG are indicated on drawings. Ground 12 conductors shall be connected to ground buss in panelboards. All power, 13 lighting, control circuits shall have a fully sized insulated copper conductor 14 run the entire length of the circuit. The raceway /conduit system shall not 15 be used as a means of the grounding system. 16 17 G. Terminate feeder and branch circuit insulated equipment - grounding 18 conductors with grounding lug, bus, or bushing. Conductors looped under 19 screw or bolt heads will not be permitted. 20 21 H. Connect grounding electrode conductors to one inch (1") diameter or 22 greater metallic cold water pipe, using a suitably sized ground clamp. 23 Provide connections to flanged piping at street side of flange. 24 25 I. Install clamp -on connectors on clean metal contact surfaces to ensure 26 electrical conductivity and circuit integrity. 27 28 J. Provide a grounding bushing and a continuous copper bonding jumper 29 from the bushing to the equipment ground bus in all feeders. The bonding 30 jumper shall be the same size as the equipment ground conductor. 31 32 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL 33 34 A. Upon completion of installation of electrical grounding and bonding 35 systems, test ground resistance with ground resistance tester. Where tests 36 show resistance -to- ground is over twenty -five (25) ohms, take appropriate 37 action to reduce resistance to twenty -five (25) ohms or Tess by driving 38 additional ground rods then retest to demonstrate compliance. 39 40 B. Submit test results (3 copies) to engineer of record. Test results shall 41 include grounding test method used, equipment used (manufacturer and 42 model number) with certification of calibration and data results. 43 44 45 END OF SECTION 16452 GROUNDING 16452 - 4 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 1 1 SECTION 16460 I 2 3 TRANSFORMERS 4 1 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: I 8 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to I 11 work of this Section. 12 13 B. This is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and is I 14 part of each Division 16 Section making reference to transformers specified 15 herein. 16 I 17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 18 19 A. Extent of transformer work is indicated by drawings and schedules. 20 I21 B. Types of transformers specified in this Section include the following: 22 23 Dry-Type Transformers 24 25 C. Electrical wiring connections for transformers are specified in applicable 26 Division 16 sections. I 27 28 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 29 I 30 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of 31 power /distribution transformers of types and ratings required; whose 32 products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five I 33 34 (5) years. 35 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least five (5) years of successful I 36 37 installation experience on projects utilizing electrical power and distribution transformers similar to those required for this project. 38 I 39 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to installation and 40 construction of electrical power /distribution transformers. 41 I 42 43 D. ANSI Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI Standards C57- Series pertaining to power /distribution transformers. 44 I 45 46 E. NEMA Compliance: Comply with requirements of NEMA Std Pub /No.'s ST 20; "Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications ", TR 1, and TR 27. 1 1 TRANSFORMERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16460 - 1 7/02/14 1 2 F. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of ANSI /UL 506; 3 "Safety Standard for Specialty Transformers ". 4 5 G. NESC Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of National 6 Electrical Safety Code (ANSI Std C2) pertaining to indoor and outdoor 7 installation of transformers. 8 9 1.04 SUBMITTALS: 10 11 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data; including rated 12 kVA, frequency, primary and secondary voltages, and percent taps. 13 14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 15 16 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 17 18 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, 19 manufacturers offering products which may be incorporated in the work, but 20 are not limited to, the following: 21 22 General Electric Co. 23 Square D Co. 24 Cutler Hammer /Eaton 25 26 2.02 POWER /DISTRIBUTION TRANSFORMERS: 27 28 A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide manufacturer's standard 29 materials and components as indicated by published product linformation, 30 designed and constructed as recommended by manufacturer, and as 31 required for complete installation. 32 33 B. Dry-Type Distribution Transformers: 34 35 1. Transformers sized 15 kVA and below shall have two (2) — 2 1/2 36 percent taps above and below rated primary voltage. 37 38 2. Transformers 15 kVA and below shall be 115°C temperature rise 39 above 40°C ambient, unless noted otherwise. 40 41 3. Limit transformer surface temperature rise to maximum of 50°C rise 42 above a 40 °C ambient. Provide wiring connectors suitable for copper 43 or aluminum wiring. Cushion -mount transformers with external 44 vibration isolation supports; sound -level ratings not to exceed 45 dB 45 for transformers 15 to 45 kVA and 50 dB for 50 to 150 kVA as 46 determined in accordance with ANSI /NEMA standards. Electrically TRANSFORMERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16460 - 2 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 ground core and coils to transformer enclosure by means of flexible 2 metal grounding strap. Provide transformers with fully - enclosed 3 sheet -steel enclosures. Provide transformers suitable for wall 4 mounting. 5 6 C. Equipment/System Identification: Provide equipment/system identification 7 nameplates complying with Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and 8 Methods section "Electrical Identification" in accordance with the following 9 listing: Equipment/System Identification. 10 11 D. Finishes: Coat interior and exterior surfaces of transformer, including bolted 12 joints, with manufacturer's standard color baked -on enamel. 13 14 PART 3 - EXECUTION 15 16 3.01 INSPECTION: Installer must examine areas and conditions under which 17 power /distribution transformers and ancillary equipment are to be installed, and 18 notify contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper completion of the 19 work. Do not proceed with the work until satisfactory conditions have been 20 corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. 21 22 3.02 INSTALLATION OF TRANSFORMERS: Install transformers as indicated, 23 complying with manufacturer's written instructions, applicable requirements of NEC, 24 NESC, NEMA, ANSI, and IEEE standards, and in accordance with recognized 25 industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. 26 27 3.03 GROUNDING: Provide equipment grounding connections for power /distribution 28 transformers as indicated. 29 30 3.04 TESTING: 31 32 A. Prior to energization of transformers, check all accessible connections for 33 compliance with manufacturer's torque tightening specifications. 34 35 B. Prior to energization, check circuitry for electrical continuity and for short - 36 circuits 37 C. Upon completion of installation of transformers, energize primary circuitry at 38 rated voltage and frequency from normal power source, and test 39 transformers; including (but not limited to) audible sound levels, to 40 demonstrate capability and compliance with requirements. 41 42 D. Where possible, correct malfunctioning units at site, then retest to 43 demonstrate compliance; otherwise, remove and replace with new units or 44 components, and proceed with retesting. 45 46 END OF SECTION 16460 47 48 TRANSFORMERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16460 - 3 7/02/14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK TRANSFORMERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16460 - 4 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16470 2 3 PANELBOARDS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to 11 work of this Section. 12 13 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, 14 and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to panelboards 15 specified herein. 16 17 1.02 SUMMARY: 18 19 A. Extent of panelboard and enclosure work, including cabinets and cutout 20 boxes, is indicated by drawings and schedules and as specified herein. 21 22 B. Types of panelboards and enclosures required for the project include the 23 following: 24 25 Power Distribution Panelboards 26 Lighting and Appliance Panelboards 27 28 C. Refer to other Division 16 Sections for wires /cables, electrical boxes and 29 fittings and raceway work required in conjunction with installation of 30 panelboards and enclosures. 31 32 1.03 SUBMITTALS: 33 34 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on panelboards and enclosures. 35 Shop drawings shall indicate arrangement of busses, branch circuits, 36 enclosures, dimensions, etc. 37 38 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 39 40 A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of 41 panelboards and enclosures, of types, sizes, and ratings required; whose 42 products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five 43 (5) years. 44 45 B. Installer's Qualifications: A firm with at least three (3) years of successful 46 installation experience on projects utilizing panelboards similar to those PANELBOARDS OWNER'S REVIEW 16470 - 1 7/02/14 1 required for this project. 2 3 C. Codes and Standards: 4 5 1. Electrical Code Compliance: Comply with applicable local code 6 requirements of the authority having jurisdiction and NEC Article 384 7 as applicable to the installation and construction of electrical 8 panelboards and enclosures. 9 2. UL Compliance: Comply with applicable requirements of UL 67, 10 "Electric Panelboards ", and UL codes 50, 869, and 1053 pertaining to 11 panelboards, accessories and enclosures. Provide panelboard units 12 that are UL listed and labeled. 13 14 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 15 16 2.01 MANUFACTURERS: 17 18 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, 19 manufacturers offering electrical panelboard products that may be 20 incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following: 21 22 General Electric Company 23 Square D Company 24 Cutler- Hammer / Eaton Corp 25 26 2.02 PANELBOARDS: 27 28 A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide panelboards, enclosures, 29 and ancillary components, of types, sizes, and ratings indicated, which 30 comply with manufacturer's standard materials; with the design and 31 construction in accordance with published product information. Equip with 32 proper number of unit panelboard devices as required for complete 33 installation. Where types, sizes, or ratings are not indicated, comply with 34 NEC, UL, and established industry standards for those applications 35 indicated. 36 37 B. Power Distribution Panelboards: Provide dead - front, safety -type power 38 distribution panelboards as indicated; with panelboard switching and 39 protective devices in quantities, ratings, types, and with arrangement shown; 40 with anti -turn, solderless pressure type main lug connectors approved for use 41 with copper conductors. Select unit with feeders connecting at top of panel. 42 Equip with copper bus bars with not less than 98 percent conductivity, and 43 with full -sized neutral bus. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for outgoing 44 feeders requiring neutral connections. Provide bolt -on, moldecl -case circuit 45 breaker types for each circuit, with toggle handles that indicate when tripped. 46 Provide panelboards with bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for PANELBOARDS OWNER'S REVIEW 16470 - 2 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 bolting to enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as 2 panelboards which mate and match properly with panelboards. 3 4 1. Power panelboards shall be General Electric type 'Spectra', Square D 5 type 'I Line', or Cutler- Hammer type 'PRL3a'. Voltage shall be as 6 indicated. 7 8 C. Lighting and Appliance Panelboards: Provide dead -front safety type lighting 9 and appliance panelboards as indicated; with switching and protective 10 devices in quantities, ratings, types and arrangements shown; with anti -burn 11 solderless pressure type lug connectors approved for use with copper 12 conductors. Construct unit for connecting feeders at top of panel. Equip with 13 copper bus bars, full -sized neutral bar, with bolt -in type heavy -duty, quick - 14 make, quick- break, circuit breakers, with toggle handles that indicate when 15 tripped. Provide suitable lugs on neutral bus for each outgoing feeder 16 required, and provide bare uninsulated grounding bars suitable for bolting to 17 enclosures. Select enclosures fabricated by same manufacturer as 18 panelboards that mate and match properly with panelboards. 19 20 1. Panelboards shall be General Electric A- Series, Square D type "NQ ", 21 or Cutler- Hammer type PRL2. Panelboard boxes shall be five and 22 three - fourths inches (5 3/4 ") deep. Voltage shall be as indicated. 23 24 D. Panelboard Enclosures: Provide galvanized sheet steel cabinet -type 25 enclosures, in sizes and NEMA types as indicated; code - gauge, minimum 26 16 -gauge thickness. Cabinets shall be furnished without knockouts and all 27 holes for raceways shall be drilled and punched on the job. Panelboard 28 enclosures shall be five and three - fourths inches (53/4") deep. Provide fronts 29 with adjustable trim clamps and doors with flush locks and keys; all 30 panelboard enclosures keyed alike, with concealed piano door hinges and 31 door swings as indicated. Provide baked gray enamel finish over a rust 32 inhibitor coating. Design enclosures for recessed mounting. Provide 33 enclosures that are fabricated by same manufacturer as panelboards that 34 mate and match properly with panelboards to be enclosed. 35 36 E. All panelboards shall be connected distributed phase with circuit numbering 37 as indicated on the drawings. Panelboards shall be numbered with odd 38 numbers on the left side of the panel and even numbers on the right side of 39 the panel. Panelboards shall have a circuit directory card mounted in a 40 frame with plastic cover, mounted on the inside of the door, and directory 41 cards shall be completed with a typewriter to indicated areas and /or devices 42 served by each circuit. All new and existing panelboards being used for this 43 project shall have new typed directories. 44 45 F. Molded -Case Circuit Breakers: Provide factory- assembled, bolt -on, molded - 46 case circuit breakers of frame sizes, characteristics, and ratings, including PANELBOARDS OWNER'S REVIEW 16470 - 3 7/02/14 1 RMS symmetrical interrupting ratings indicated. Select breakers with 2 permanent thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip, and with fault- current 3 limiting protection; ampere ratings as indicated. Multi -pole breakers shall 4 have a common trip bar so that the tripping of one pole will automatically trip 5 all poles of the breaker. Construct with over - center, trip -free, toggle -type 6 operating mechanisms with quick -make, quick -break action, and positive 7 handle trip indication. Construct breakers for mounting and operating in any 8 physical position and operating in an ambient temperature of 40°C. Provide 9 breakers with mechanical screw type removable connector lugs; AUCU 10 rated. 11 12 1. Individual Enclosed Circuit Breakers: Circuit breakers shall be 13 molded case type. Breakers shall have thermal- magnetic trip units 14 and magnetic trip shall be adjustable. Breakers shall have a common 15 trip bar so that the tripping of one pole will automatically trip all poles 16 of the breaker. Breakers shall be trip free and trip indicating and shall 17 have quick -make, quick- break contacts. Enclosure shall have 18 insulated, groundable neutral. 19 20 G. Panelboards shall be installed complete with connectors and associated 21 hardware for all circuit breakers and circuit breaker spaces (listed in the 22 panelboard schedule. 23 24 H. When connecting equipment to existing panelboards, the new and existing 25 circuit breakers shall be identified. A new circuit directory card shall be 26 provided. 27 28 PART 3 - EXECUTION 29 30 3.01 EXAMINATION: 31 32 Examine areas and conditions under which panelboards and enclosures are to be 33 installed and notify contractor in writing of conditions detrimental to proper 34 completion of work. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have 35 been corrected in a manner acceptable to installer. 36 37 3.02 INSTALLATION OF PANELBOARDS: 38 39 A. Install panelboards and enclosures as indicated, in accordance with 40 manufacturer's written instruction, applicable requirements of NEC 41 standards, NECA's "Standards of Installation ", and in compliance with 42 recognized industry practices to ensure that products fulfill requirements. 43 44 B. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance 45 with equipment manufacturer's published torque - tightening values for 46 equipment connectors. PANELBOARDS OWNER'S REVIEW 16470 - 4 7/02/14 1 2 C. Fasten enclosures firmly to walls and structural surfaces, ensuring that they 3 are permanently and mechanically anchored. 4 5 3.03 GROUNDING: 6 7 A. Provide equipment grounding connections for panelboard enclosures as 8 indicated. 9 10 B. Prior to energization, check panelboards for electrical continuity of circuits 11 and for short- circuits. 12 13 3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: 14 15 A. Adjust operating mechanisms for free mechanical movement. 16 17 B. Touch -up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finishes. 18 19 END OF SECTION 20 PANELBOARDS OWNER'S REVIEW 16470 - 5 7/02/14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK PANELBOARDS 16470 - 6 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 1 1 t 1 1 SECTION 16481 2 3 MOTORS 4 5 PART 1 — GENERAL 6 7 1.01 DESCRIPTION 8 9 Furnish and install the motors as hereinafter specified and as called for in other 10 sections of these Specifications. 11 12 1.02 QUALIFICATIONS 13 14 Motor shall be sufficient size for the duty to be performed and shall not exceed 15 their full -rated load when the driven equipment is operating at specified capacity. 16 17 1.03 SUBMITTALS 18 19 A. The motor manufacturer shall submit to the Engineer certified dimension 20 prints showing nameplate data and outline dimensions within three weeks 21 of the date they receive the order. 22 23 B. Submit Operation and Maintenance Manual and parts lists as specified in 24 Division 1 PROJECT CLOSEOUT. 25 26 C. Guarantee: All equipment furnished and installed under this Section shall 27 be guaranteed against defects of workmanship, materials and improper 28 installation for a period of eighteen month from date of acceptance. All 29 such equipment or parts proven defective, due to the above noted causes, 30 shall be replaced in the machines by the CONTRACTOR at no expense to 31 the Owner. 32 33 D. Provide equipment warranty in accordance with Division 1 SPECIFIC 34 WARRANTIES. 35 36 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 37 38 2.01 RATING 39 40 A. Unless otherwise noted, all motors shall be of the low voltage type. All 41 motors 2 through 100 horsepower shall be rated 230/460 volt, 3 phase, 60 42 Hertz A.C.; motors 125 horsepower through 300 horsepower shall be rated 43 460 volt, 3- phase, 60 Hertz, and motors below 2 horsepower shall be rated 44 115/230 volt, 1 phase, 60 Hertz A.C. 45 46 2.02 THREE PHASE INDUCTION MOTORS 47 MOTORS 16481 -1 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 2.03 CONSTRUCTION 19 20 A. General: 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 A. Motors 25 HP and larger shall have a 120 -volt space heater for moisture control. B. Unless specifically noted in other sections of these Specifications, all motors shall have an efficiency as indicated in the table below. Motors shall be "premium efficiency" type. TABLE 1 Motor HP Min. Eff. Max. dba Motor HP Min. Eff. Max. dba 1 -2 84.0% 74 25 -30 92.0% 92 3 -5 86.5% 79 40 -50 93.0% 97 7.5 -10 90.2% 84 60 -75 94.0% 100 15 -20 91.0% 89 100 94.1% 102 C. Motors operating with variable frequency drives shall indicate on the nameplate that they are suitable for their intended applications (Inverter duty Rated) and they shall be provided with an integral temperature switch that opens on high temperature. Motors operating with Variable Frequency Drives (VFD's) shall meet the requirements of NEMA MG1 Part 31. 1. All dripproof and weather protected Type I motors shall have epoxy encapsulated windings. Totally enclosed motors shall not be encapsulated. Motors not readily available with encapsulated windings may be standard type. Motors exposed to the outside atmosphere shall be totally enclosed fan cooled (TEFC) unless otherwise specified. 2. Squirrel -cage rotors shall be made from high - grade steel laminations adequately fastened together and to the shaft, or shall be cast aluminum or bar -type construction with brazed end rings. B. Low Voltage, Three Phase Motors: 1. Motors shall be of the squirrel -cage induction type, NEMA design B. Horizontal, vertical solid shaft, vertical hollow shaft, normal thrust and high thrust types shall be furnished as specified herein. All MOTORS 16481 -2 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 f 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 motors shall be built in accordance with current NEMA, IEEE, ANSI 2 and AFBMA standards where applicable. Motors shall be of the 3 type and quality described by these Specifications, fully capable of 4 performing in accordance with manufacturer's nameplate rating, and 5 free from defective material and workmanship. 6 7 2. Motors shall have normal or high starting torque (as required), low 8 starting current (not to exceed 600 percent full load current), and 9 low slip. 10 11 3. Outdoor motors shall be totally enclosed fan - cooled construction 12 with 1.15 service factor unless otherwise noted. Indoor motors shall 13 be ODP unless otherwise noted. 14 15 4. Outdoor motors shall be mill and chemical duty suitable for 16 operation in moist air with hydrogen sulphide gas present. 17 18 5. The output shaft shall be suitable for direct connection or belt drive 19 as required. 20 21 6. Motors shall have a Class B nonhygroscopic insulation system. 22 Class F insulation may be used but shall be limited to Class B 23 temperature rise. 24 25 7. All motors shall have a final coating of chemical resistant corrosion 26 and fungus protective epoxy fortified enamel finish sprayed over red 27 primer over all interior and exterior surfaces. Stator bore and rotor 28 of all motors shall be epoxy coated. 29 30 8. All fittings, bolts, nuts, and screws shall be 316 stainless steel. 31 Bolts and nuts shall have hex heads. 32 33 9. All machine surfaces shall be coated with rust inhibitor for easy 34 disassembly. 35 36 10. Conduit boxes shall be gasketed. Lead wires between motor frame 37 and conduit box shall be gasketed. 38 39 11. Totally enclosed motors shall be provided with condensate drain 40 hole and epoxy coated motor windings to protect against moisture. 41 42 12. Nameplates shall be stainless steel. Lifting lugs or "0" type bolts 43 shall be supplied on all frames 254T and larger. Enclosures will 44 have stainless steel screen and motors shall be protected for 45 corrosion, fungus and insects. 46 47 13. Low voltage, three phase motors shall be manufactured by General 48 Electric, U.S. Motors, Westinghouse or approved equal. MOTORS 16481 -3 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 2 14. Fractional Horsepower: 3 4 a. Fractional horsepower motors shall be rigid, welded - steel, 5 designed to maintain accurate alignment of motor 6 components and provide adequate protection. End shields 7 shall be reinforced, lightweight die -cast aluminum. Windings 8 shall be of varnish - insulated wire with slot insulation of 9 polyester film, baked -on bonding treatment to make the 10 stator winding strongly resistant to heat, aging, moisture, 11 electrical stresses and other hazards. 12 b. Motor shaft shall be made from high - grade, cold - rolled shaft 13 steel with drive -shaft extensions carefully machined to 14 standard NEMA dimensions for the particular drive 15 connection. 16 c. All motors shall be equipped with vacuum - degassed (sealed) 17 antifriction bearings made to AFBMA Standards, and be of 18 ample capacity for the motor rating. The bearing housing 19 shall be large enough to hold sufficient lubricant to minimize 20 the need for frequent lubrication, but facilities shall be 21 provided for adding new lubricant and draining out old 22 lubricant without motor disassembly. The bearing housing 23 shall have long, tight, running fits or rotating seals to protect 24 against the entrance of foreign matter into the bearings, or 25 leakage of lubricant out of the bearing cavity. 26 27 15. Integral Horsepower: 28 29 a. Motor frames and end shields shall be cast iron or heavy 30 fabricated steel of such design and proportions as to hold all 31 motor components rigidly in proper position and provide 32 adequate protection for the type of enclosure employed. 33 b. Windings shall be adequately insulated and securely braced 34 to resist failure due to electrical stresses and vibrations. 35 c. The shaft shall be made of high -grade machine steel or steel 36 forging of size and design adequate to withstand the load 37 stresses normally encountered in motors of the particular 38 rating. Bearing journals shall be gound and polished. 39 d. Rotors shall be made from high -grade steel laminations 40 adequately fastened together, and to the shaft. Rotor 41 squirrel -cage windings may be copper or bar -type 42 construction with brazed end rings. 43 e. All motors shall be equipped with vacuum - degassed (sealed) 44 antifriction bearings made to AFBMA Standards, and be of 45 ample capacity for the motor rating. The bearing housing 46 shall be large enough to hold sufficient lubricant to minimize 47 the need for frequent lubrication, but facilities shall be 48 provided for adding new lubricant and draining out old MOTORS 16481 -4 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 lubricant without motor disassembly. The bearing housing 2 shall have long, tight, running fits or rotating seals to protect 3 against the entrance of foreign matter into the bearings, or 4 leakage of lubricant out of the bearing cavity. 5 f. Bearings of high thrust motors will be locked for momentary 6 up thrust of 30% down thrust. All bearings shall have a 7 minimum B10 life rating of 100,000 hours in accordance with 8 AFBMA life and thrust values. 9 g. Vertical hollow -shaft motors will have nonreverse ratchets to 10 prevent backspin. 11 12 C. Low Voltage, Single Phase Motors: 13 14 1. Single phase motors shall be split -phase and capacitor -start 15 induction types rated for continuous horsepower at the rpm called 16 for on the Drawings. Motors shall be rated 115/230 volts, 60 Hertz, 17 single phase, open drip proof, or totally enclosed fan cooled as 18 called for on the Drawings, with temperature rise in accordance with 19 NEMA Standards for Class B insulation. 20 21 2. Totally enclosed fan cooled motors shall be designed for 22 severe -duty. 23 24 3. Motors shall have corrosion and fungus protective finish on internal 25 and external surfaces. All fittings shall have a corrosion protective 26 plating. 27 28 4. Mechanical characteristics shall be the same as specified for 29 polyphase fractional horsepower motors. 30 31 PART 3 - EXECUTION 32 33 3.01 INSTALLATION 34 35 A. Motor Connections: All motors shall be connected to the conduit system 36 by means of a short section of flexible conduit, 18 inch minimum and 60 37 inches maximum, unless otherwise indicated. For all motor connections, 38 the CONTRACTOR shall install a grounding conductor in the conduit and 39 terminate at the motor control center with an approved grounding clamp. 40 41 B. Connection to motor leads shall be compression type with 3M brand heat 42 shrink boot. 43 44 3.02 TESTS AND CHECKS 45 46 A. The following tests shall be performed on all motors after installation but 47 before putting motors into service. 48 MOTORS 16481 -5 OWNER'S REVIEW 7/02/14 . The CONTRACTOR shall megger each motor winding before energizing the motor, and, if insulation resistance is found to be low, shall notify the Engineer and shall not energize the motor. The CONTRACTOR shall check direction of rotation of all motors and reverse connections if necessary. The following table gives minimum acceptable insulation resistance in megohms at various temperatures and for various voltages with readings being taken after one minute of megger test run. TABLE 2 Degree Winding Temperature Voltage °F °C 115V 230V 460V 37 3.9 60 108 210 50 10 32 60 120 68 20 13 26 50 86 30 5.6 11 21 104 45 2.4 4.5 8.8 122 50 1 2 3.7 140 60 .5 .85 1.6 2. The CONTRACTOR shall check each motor for correct clearances and alignment and for correct lubrication, and shall lubricate if required in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. END OF SECTION 16481 MOTORS 16481 -6 OWNER;'S REVIEW 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 I I I 1 1 1 I I 1 I I I 1 I 1 SECTION 16483 2 3 Combination MOTOR STARTERS 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: 8 9 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 10 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to 11 work of this Section. 12 13 B. This is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, and 14 is part of each Division 16 Section making reference to motor starters 15 herein. 16 17 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: 18 19 A. Extent of motor starter work is indicated by drawings and schedules. 20 21 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE: 22 23 A. Manufacturers: Firms regularly engaged in the manufacture of motor 24 starters of types, ratings, and characteristics required; whose products 25 have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) 26 years. 27 28 B. Installer's Qualifications: Firm with at least three (3) years of successful 29 installation experience on projects utilizing motor starters similar to that 30 required for this project. 31 32 C. NEC Compliance: Comply with NEC as applicable to wiring methods, 33 construction, and installation of motor starters. 34 35 D. UL Compliance: Provide motor starters and components which are UL 36 listed and labeled. 37 38 1.04 SUBMITTALS: 39 40 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's data on motor starters. 41 42 IMOTOR STARTERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16483 1 7/02/14 I 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2 3 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS: 4 5 A. All Combination Starters Shall be Square D Class 8539 Combination 6 Motor Starters with TeSys T Intellegent Motor Management System for 7 Profibus DP Monitoring and Control. No alternates are acceptable. 8 9 2.02 MOTOR STARTERS: 10 11 A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, provide motor starters and 12 ancillary components which comply with manufacturer's standard 13 materials, design, and construction in accordance with published product 14 information, and as required for complete installation. 15 16 B. Manual motor starters for 115 volts, single phase motors one horsepower 17 and smaller shall be single pole, horsepower rated switches with thermal 18 overload units and heaters. Starters shall be Square D Class 2510, with 19 stainless steel cover plates or equal. 20 21 C. Magnetic full voltage starters for three phase motors shall be three pole, 22 horsepower- rated, electronic overload auxiliary contacts. Control voltage 23 shall be 120 volts supplied from a control power transformer. A Hand -Off- 24 Automatic, HOA switch shall be mounted in front cover. Starters shall be 25 Square D Class 8536 or equal. 26 27 D. Combination magnetic, full voltage starters for three phase motors shall 28 be three pole horsepower- rated, magnetically operated switches, with 29 three thermal overload units and four extra auxiliary contacts. Control 30 voltage shall be 120 volts supplied from a control power transformer. A 31 three pole horsepower- rated, non - fusible disconnect switch shall also be 32 included in the enclosure. An HOA switch shall be mounted in front cover. 33 Starters shall be Square D Class 8538 or equal. 34 35 E. Phase loss protection shall be provided on all starters serving motors 15 36 horsepower or larger. 37 38 F. Provide 0 -15 minute on -delay auto restart function after power outage. 39 40 2.03 MICROPROCESSOR -BASED MOTOR CONTROL 41 42 A. Motor Starters — Based Motor Control 43 44 1. Provide motor starters of the electromechanical type with coil 45 controlled by an application- specific microprocessor. MOTOR STARTERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16483 - 2 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. Provide one (1) current sensor accurate to 2% for each phase to 2 provide motor running overload protection that yeilds a time - current 3 curve closely paralleling that of the respective motor heating 4 damage boundary. Running overload protection shall be DIP 5 switch selectable for the specific motor full load amperes. 6 7 3. Provide DIP switch selectable overload trip class of 10, 20, and 30. 8 9 4. Provide phase Toss protection and phase unbalance protection. If 10 the phase unbalance on any two phases is greater than 30% of the 11 DIP switch selected trip rating, a phase loss /unbalance trip occurs. 12 13 5. Provide ground fault protection set at 20% of maximum continuous 14 ampere rating with a start delay of 17 seconds, and a run delay of 15 0.4 seconds to prevent nuisance tripping on startup. 16 17 6. Motor starters shall have replaceable fixed and movable contacts. 18 19 7. Accessories: 20 21 a. Motor starter shall be designed to acccommodate two (2) 22 auxiliary contact blocks, each capable of a combination of 23 up to four (4) normally closed or four (4) normally open 24 auxiliary contacts. Contacts to be color coded; black 25 designating NC and silver designatinv NO. Contacts to be 26 rated ten (1) amperes continuous, 7200 VA make, 720 VA 27 break for 120 through 600V AC, and 69 VA make and break 28 for 125 through 300V DC. Provide a minimum of one (1) 29 spare NO contact and one (1) spare NC contact in addition 30 to any auxiliary contacts required. 31 32 b. Provide a mechanical interlock on reversing or multispeed 33 contactors of the lever -type mechanism (with electrical 34 contacts included) to prevent closing of one contactor when 35 the other is closed. 36 37 c. Provide metering module capable of displaying control 38 voltage and staus where utilized in starter applications, 39 "cause of trip," "current at time of trip," and "current in each 40 phase" shall be capable of being displayed. 41 42 d. Provide an addressable communication card capable o 43 transmitting control and diagnostic data over an open 44 ethernet network to a personal computer or PLC. The 45 addition of the ethernet communication module shall not MOTOR STARTERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16483 - 3 7/02/14 1 1 1 increase the size of the controller. The starter shall also be 1 2 capable of transmitting the following data: 3 4 1) On -Off reset control functions 5 2) Status (On, Off, Tripped, No Response) 6 3) Current in each phase 7 4) Percent phase unbalance 8 5) Control voltage I 9 6) Overload protection settings 10 7) Trip current magnitude 11 8) Average motor current 1 12 9) Hand /Manual /Local Control 13 10) Cause of trip indication 14 1 15 e. Furnish Schneider Electric "TESYS T Motor Management 16 System" Ovelerload and Control Module 17 2.04 INTELLIGENT MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY (IMPR) 18 19 A. Introduction 20 21 1. This part of the specification describes the requirements for the low 22 voltage Intelligent Motor Protection Relay (IMPR). This relay must I 23 be integrated in the global Motor Management System for use 24 within standard IEC or NEMA, control gear. 25 I 26 2. The nominal values, the standard documents and the relays 27 minimum settings are defined in this document. Information 28 regarding motors and current transformers is not included in the I 29 specification. 30 B. General Requirements for the Intelligent Motor Protection Relay 31 1. Each individual Intelligent Motor Protection Relay (IMPR) shall be 32 mounted inside the combination motor starter enclosure. In option, 33 it can be completed by a local Human Machine Interface (HMI) 34 display and control unit mounted on the front panel of the 35 enclosure. 36 2. The IMPR shall include accurate measurement processing 37 functions and perform motor protection functions to prevent 38 damaging the motor and thus extend the life of the motor and the 1 39 availability of the process. 40 3. It shall be possible to display on the Human Machine Interface the 41 metering and operation data and the configuration data as well. MOTOR STARTERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16483 - 4 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 4. Thanks to network communication capabilities, the IMPR shall 2 support the integration in Power Monitoring Systems and in SCADA 3 systems. 4 5. In order to ease implementation and startup, the IMPR shall 5 include: 6 a. internal current transformers, at least for most usual 7 currents, up to 100 A. 8 9 b. several pre- defined operation modes and also allow for 10 customised mode. 11 12 c. an user - friendly configuration tool available on local HMI (at 13 least for main parameters) and on a laptop. 14 C. Environment and Applicable Standards 15 1. The IMPR shall comply with the most relevant national and 16 international standards and recommendations for industrial 17 electrical distribution. 18 2. The IMPR shall have certifications according to UL and CSA 19 standards, shall bear the CE marking, be CCC, EAC /GOST, 20 RCM /CTIC'K, marine approved (BV, LROS, DNV, RINA, ABS) and 21 Atex certified ; therefore it shall conform to standards IEC /EN 22 60947 -4 -1 and Chinese deviations, UL 60947 -4 -1A and CSA 22 -2 23 n °60947 -4 -1. 24 3. The IMPR shall be IP 20, according to IEC 60947 -1 (protection 25 against direct contact). I 26 27 4. The protection for the HMI mounted outside an enclosure shall be IP 54. 1 1 1 1 1 1 28 5. The following control power supplies shall be available in the range 29 of IMPR : 24 VDC and 100 -240 VAC. 30 D. Specific Requirements for the Intelligent Motor Protection Relay (IMPR) 31 1. Metering: The IMPR shall include as a minimum the following 32 features. 33 a. Measurements including line currents, ground fault current, 34 average line current, current phase imbalance, thermal 35 capacity level, motor temperature sensor and, as an option, 36 frequency, line to line voltage, line voltage imbalance, MOTOR STARTERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16483 - 5 7/02/14 1 average voltage, power factor, active power, reactive power, 2 active power consumption and reactive power consumption. 3 4 1) For line current measurements, the IMPR shall have 5 integrated Current Transformers rated up to 100 A. 6 7 2) For motors larger than 100 A, the connection of 8 external current transformers shall be possible. 9 For ground current, it shall be possible either to 10 calculate from line currents or, without need of any 11 additional component, to connect on the IMPR an 12 external ground Current Transformer. 13 14 3) The motor temperature measurement must be 15 possible through several types of sensors including 16 PTC binary, PTC analog, NTC analog and PT100. 17 Without any additional component, the IMPR shall 18 allow the connection of the temperature sensor. 19 4) Voltage measurement shall allow for line voltage up 20 to 690V. 21 22 b. Statistics including protection fault counts, protection 23 warning counts, diagnostic fault counts, motor control 24 function counts and fault history. 25 26 c. Diagnostics including internal watchdog results, controller 27 internal temperature, temperature sensor connections, 28 current connections, control commands (start, stop, run 29 check back and stop check back), control configuration 30 checksum, communication Toss and, as an option, voltage 31 connections. 32 33 d. Motor control states (motor starter/L01 starts/ LO2 starts, 34 operating time, motor starts per hour, last start max current, 35 last start time, time to trip and time to reset). 36 2. Motor Protection Functions 37 a. As a minimum, the IMPR shall allow the selection of the 38 following protection functions : thermal overload, current 39 phase imbalance, current phase Toss, current phase 40 reversal, long start, jam, undercurrent, overcurrent, ground 41 current, motor temperature sensor, rapid cycle lockout and, 42 as an option, voltage phase imbalance, voltage phase loss, 43 voltage phase reversal, undervoltage, overvoltage, voltage 44 dip management (autorestart and load shedding), power 45 limits and power factor limits. MOTOR STARTERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16483 - 6 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1) The thermal overload trip curve shall be selectable 2 between inverse (12t) and definite time (Ixt) curves. 3 2) The Auxiliary Fan Cooling application shall be also 4 selectable. 5 3. Control Functions 6 a. The IMPR shall come with the following pre- defined Motor 7 control modes : overload, independent, reverser, two -step, 8 two- speed. In addition it shall be possible to derive a 9 customised mode from any of the pre- defined modes. 10 11 b. For each mode, the IMPR shall come with the corresponding wiring diagram for 2 and 3 wires control. 12 4. Fault and alarm Monitoring 13 a. The IMPR shall include an Alarm management function and 14 a Fault Management function, that can be independently 15 enabled /disabled with the relevant threshold(s) for each 16 protection function. 17 b. The Faults reset mode must be selectable between manual 18 reset, automatic reset after a set time and remote reset via 19 communication. 20 c. The Fault Management function shall also record the five 21 most recent faults. 22 5. User Machine Interface 23 a. In option, the IMPR shall have a local Human - Machine 24 Interface (HMI). This unit is to be used both for 25 commissioning and /or for normal operation. It shall allow the 26 configuration of the IMPR and the display of operating data 27 such as measurements, counters, status, faults and 28 warnings information. 29 b. The HMI shall have the capability to adapt to local 30 languages by selection or download. During the operation of 31 the IMPR, it shall be possible to select the HMI language 32 between at least two languages. In addition it shall be 33 possible to download other languages. MOTOR STARTERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16483 - 7 7/02/14 1 6. Communication 2 a. The IMPR shall communicate through an integrated 3 communication port so that it can be connected to a 4 communication architecture with information remote access. 5 b. It shall be an open communication system, meaning that it 6 shall be directly connected to the main industrial network 7 communication protocols including Etheternet IP. The IMPR 8 shall have the options to connect with these nelworks, one 9 each per application, with native connectivity embedded 10 directly from the factory. 11 7. Configuration Software 12 a. The IMPR shall use a user - friendly setting and operating 13 multi - lingual software in a Windows environment with menus 14 and icons for fast direct access to the data required, with 15 guided navigation to go through all the data on the same 16 function together in the same screen and with a file 17 management. The IMPR shall allow customised logic by the 18 end user via the "custom mode." 19 20 PART 3 - EXECUTION 21 22 3.01 INSTALLATION OF MOTOR STARTERS: 23 24 A. Install motor starters as indicated, in accordance with equipment 25 manufacturer's written instructions and with recognized industry practices; 26 complying with applicable requirements of NEC, UL and NEMA standards 27 to insure that products fulfill requirements. 28 29 B. Motor starters or any other electrical equipment located in srnoke or fire 30 rated walls shall be mounted on Unistrut channels. Channels shall be 31 supported from floor and structure above ceiling. There shall be no 32 penetrations of the fire rated assembly pursuant to the equipment 33 installation. 34 35 C. Unless otherwise indicated, motor starters shown on the drawing shall be 36 furnished and installed under this Section. The full load current and 37 starting characteristics of each motor shall be verified for proper selection 38 of motor over load devices. 39 40 D. Furnish and install all steel shapes, etc., necessary for a support of all 41 motor starters. 42 MOTOR STARTERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16483 - 8 7/02/14 1 I 1 E. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in 2 accordance with equipment manufacturer's published torque tightening 3 values for equipment connectors. 14 5 F. Provide Two Hand Held Test's TProgramming Tools to the City 6 Representative 1 8 9 G. Provide Two Days of Factory Based Start Up, Commisioning and Training I 10 on the TeSys T Communications and Programming. 11 12 3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING: 13 I14 A. Inspect electrical starter's operating mechanisms for malfunctioning and, 15 where necessary, adjust units for free mechanical movement. 16 I 17 B. Touch -up scratched or marred surfaces to match original finish. 18 19 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL: I 20 21 A. Subsequent to connecting wires /cables, energize motor starter circuitry 22 and demonstrate functioning of equipment in accordance with I 23 requirements. Where necessary correct malfunctioning units, and then 24 retest to demonstrate compliance. Ensure that direction of rotation of 25 each motor fulfills requirements. I 26 27 END OF SECTION 16483 28 I 29 30 31 I 32 33 34 I 35 36 37 II 38 39 40 41 42 43 1 1 MOTOR STARTERS OWNER'S REVIEW 16483 - 9 7/02/14 THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16620 2 3 SURGE SUPPRESSION 4 5 SECTION 16620 - SURGE SUPPRESSION 6 7 PART I - GENERAL 8 9 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS 10 11 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and 12 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to 13 work of this Section. 14 15 B. This Section is a Division 16 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods section, 16 and is a part of each Division 16 section making reference to electrical surge 17 suppression specified herein. 18 19 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK 20 21 A. The work required under this division shall include all materials, labor, and 22 auxiliaries required to furnish and install complete surge suppression for the 23 protection of building electrical and electronics systems from the effects of 24 line - induced transient voltage surge and lightning discharge, as indicated on 25 drawings or specified in this section. 26 27 B. Types of surge suppression specified in this section include the following: 28 Service entrance type. 29 Distribution and branch circuit panels. 30 Point of use type (receptacle and plug -in units). 31 32 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 33 34 A. All surge suppression devices shall be manufactured by a company normally 35 engaged in the design, development, and manufacture of such devices for 36 electrical and electronics systems equipment. 37 38 B. The surge suppressor manufacturer shall offer technical assistance through 39 support by a factory representative and local stocking distributor. 40 41 C. Obtain suppression devices and accessories through one source, from a 42 single manufacturer. 43 44 1.04 WARRANTY 45 46 A. Manufacturer shall provide a product warranty for a period of not less than 47 five (5) years from date of installation. Warranty shall cover unlimited SURGE SUPPRESSION OWNER'S REVIEW 16620 - 1 7/02/14 1 replacement of suppressor's modules during the warranty period. Those 2 firms responding to this specification shall provide proof that they have 3 regularly engaged in the design, manufacturing and testing of suppressors 4 for not Tess than twenty five (25) years. 5 6 1.05 CODES AND STANDARDS 7 8 A. The following standards and publications are referenced in various parts of 9 this specification and shall apply: 10 11 UL 1449 -2009 (Third Edition): 12 Standard for Safety, Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors. 13 14 UL 1283- (listed as an electromagnetic interference filter that provides noise 15 attenuation) 16 17 IEEE C62.41 -2002 (IEEE 587): 18 Guide for Surge Voltages in Low - Voltage AC Power Circuits. 19 20 IEEE C62.33 -2002: 21 Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge Protection Devices. 22 23 IEEE C62.45 -2002: 24 IEEE Guide for Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to Low - 25 Voltage AC Power Circuits. 26 27 NEC 285, 250.56 — 2008 28 29 NFPA 780 and CSA — (National Fire Protection Association arid Canadian 30 Standards Associations) 31 32 ISO 9001:2000 — Quality standard / Military Standards (MIL -STD 220A) 33 34 UL 96A — Lightning Protection Master Label 35 36 B. The fusing element must be capable of allowing the suppressor's rated 37 single impulse current to pass through the suppressor at least one time 38 without failure. The system shall be tested to 1,000 sequential per C62.45- 39 2002 section B.38 referencing C62.41.1 and C62.41.2 Category C3 40 combination wave transients. The Category C3 combination wave is defined 41 as a 1.2 x 50µs wave at 20,000 volt open circuit voltage waveform and 8 x 42 20µs wave at 10,000 amperes short circuit current waveform. In addition, 43 the system components shall be tested repetitively 1,000 times testing based 44 on IEEE C62.33 (MOV test) and C62.35 (SAD test) without failure or 45 degradation exceeding ±10 %. 46 47 C. All manufacturers must comply with above listed standards and any additions SURGE SUPPRESSION OWNER'S REVIEW 16620 - 2 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 current revisions of industry standards. All products that do not comply with 2 current industry standards will not be accepted. 3 4 1.06 SUBMITTALS 5 6 A. Must have ten day prior approval to bid on project. Request for submittal 7 must be in writing and attached with independent documentation of the 8 following items. 9 10 B. Drawings: Electrical and mechanical drawings shall be provided by the 11 manufacturer which show unit dimensions, weights, mounting provisions, 12 connection notes, wire size and wiring diagram. 13 14 C. Equipment manual: The manufacturer shall furnish an installation manual 15 with installation notes, start -up and operating instructions for the specified 16 system. Installation instructions shall clearly state whether the system 17 requires an external overcurrent device to maintain the system's UL 1449 18 listing. 19 20 D. Independent Testing: 21 22 1. High exposure with the 10 x 1,000µs tests per IEEE C62.41.2 Section 23 7.2 24 25 2. Life Cycle /Repetitive Testing per 062.45 -2002 section B.38 minimum 26 of 1,000 to 2,000 times. 27 28 E. UL 1449 stipulation for fused TVSS — The manufacturer's authorized 29 representative is required to submit the following: 30 31 1. Certify that the TVSS system is UL 1449 listed (UL Card) with UL 32 Card. 33 34 2. Indicate the type of internal or external fusing that is incorporated in 35 the TVSS system and what impact the fusing has on the performance 36 of the device with respect to surge capacity and clamping levels. 37 38 1.07 REQUIRED SUPPRESSORS 39 40 A. Provide surge suppression for the equipment described herein: 41 42 1. On main electrical service entrance panels as shown in the project 43 drawings. 44 45 2. On distribution and branch circuit panels as shown in the project 46 drawings. 47 SURGE SUPPRESSION OWNER'S REVIEW 16620 - 3 7/02/14 1 3. On all equipment identified in the project drawings. 2 3 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 4 5 2.01 SERVICE ENTRANCE SUPPRESSORS 6 7 A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 8 9 LEA International — PV200 10 Current Technology — TG100 -L2 11 Liebert — SI- 025 -ANCE 12 13 B. The surge suppressor manufacturer shall offer a complete line of surge 14 suppression products to support the required suppressors listed in Part 1. 15 16 C. The surge suppressor's minimum surge current capacity shall be 200kA per 17 phase (L -N plus L -G) and 100kA per mode (L -N, L -G, L -L and N -G). 18 19 D. The system protection modules shall contain a technology that utilizes a 20 symmetrical array of balanced metal oxide varistors (MOV). Each MOV will 21 be individually coordinated to pass UL 1449. 22 23 E. The service entrance surge suppressors shall be designed with replaceable 24 modules for purposes of in- service replacement. The unit suppressor shall 25 be designed with redundant back -up surge protection in the event of a 26 module failure. 27 28 F. Module status indicators shall be provided to indicate individual module 29 status. When a module has failed, the module LED status indicator shall 30 indicate said failure. 31 32 G. Each protection module shall have a capacitive filtering system connected in 33 each Line to Neutral (L- N)(Wye) mode or Line to Line (L- L)(Delta) mode to 34 provide EMI /RFI noise attenuation (UL 1283) 35 36 H. Service entrance suppressors shall utilize normal and common modes of 37 protection - each phase line to neutral, each phase line to ground and neutral 38 to ground. 39 40 I. Surge suppressor shall provide the following monitoring features: dry 41 contacts, digital surge counter, and audible alarm with alarm disable switch. 42 Suppressor shall utilize a NEMA 4 or NEMA 12 enclosure. 43 44 J. Service entrance and panel type suppressors shall be installed with a means 45 of disconnecting the suppressor. If no dedicated circuit breaker is included in 46 panel, manufacturer shall provide an integral fused disconnect. 47 SURGE SUPPRESSION OWNER'S REVIEW 16620 - 4 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 r 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 2 K. Suppressors shall be of a hybrid design and include circuitry with tight, wave - 3 tracking clamping characteristics. 4 5 L. Suppressors shall be designed to withstand a maximum continuous 6 operating voltage of not less than 115% of nominal RMS line voltage. 7 8 M. Each suppressor shall have an internal disconnect switch when not 9 connected to a separate circuit breaker or fused disconnect switch which is 10 dedicated specifically for the suppressor. 11 12 N. Suppressors shall be failsafe, shall allow no follow- through current, shall 13 have repeated surge capability, shall be solid state, shall be self- restoring, 14 and shall be fully automatic. 15 16 O. Suppressors shall have an operating temperature range of -40EC to +85DC. 17 18 2.02 DISTRIBUTION BRANCH PANEL SUPPRESSORS 19 20 A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 21 22 LEA International — SP200 23 Current Technology — CG100 24 Liebert — AI I- 111 -RKE 25 26 B. Suppressors shall meet all specification requirements in section 2.1 except 27 as follows: 28 29 1. The suppressor's minimum surge current capacity shall be 200kA per 30 phase (L -N plus L -G) and 100kA per mode (L -N, L -G, L -L and N -G). 31 32 2. The suppressor protection modules shall contain a technology that 33 utilizes a symmetrical array of balanced metal oxide varistors (MOV). 34 Each MOV will be individually coordinated to pass UL 1449. The 35 suppressor is non - modular. 36 37 3. The suppressor shall provide the following monitoring features: dry 38 contacts, audible alarm and utilize a NEMA 4X enclosure. 39 40 2.03 BRANCH PANEL SUPPRESSORS 41 42 A. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 43 44 LEA International — SP100 45 Current Technology — CG060 46 Liebert — ACV - 111 -RKE 47 SURGE SUPPRESSION OWNER'S REVIEW 16620 - 5 7/02/14 1 B. Suppressors shall meet all specification requirements in section 2.1 except 2 as follows: 3 4 1. The suppressor's minimum surge current capacity shall be 100kA per 5 phase (L -N plus L -G) and 50kA per mode (L -N, L -G, L -L and N -G). 6 7 2. The suppressor protection modules shall contain a technology that 8 utilizes a symmetrical array of balanced metal oxide varistors (MOV). 9 Each MOV will be individually coordinated to pass UL 1449. The 10 suppressor is non - modular. 11 12 3. The suppressor shall provide the following monitoring features: dry 13 contacts, audible alarm and utilize a NEMA 4X enclosure. 14 15 PART 3 - EXECUTION 16 17 3.01 INSTALLATION OF SUPPRESSORS 18 19 A. Suppressors shall be installed as close as practical to the electric panel or 20 electronic equipment to be protected, consistent with available space. 21 Suppressors shall be close nippled to the device being protected in a 22 position near the point of connections, which will minimize lead length 23 between suppressor and the buses or control breaker to which the 24 suppressor connects. Must have a grounding of 25 Ohms (NEC 250.56) or 25 less and avoid any unnecessary or sharp bends. 26 27 B. For service entrance suppressors the lead length shall not exceed 36" from 28 power it is protecting and use a 3 pole 60 amp breaker for disconnection 29 means. For distribution and sub panels, the lead length shall not exceed 18" 30 from the power it is protecting and use a 3 pole 30 amp breaker for 31 disconnection means. 32 33 END OF SECTION 16620 SURGE SUPPRESSION OWNER'S REVIEW 16620 - 6 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 SECTION 16775 2 3 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 4 5 PART 1 - GENERAL 6 7 1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS: Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including 8 General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification sections, apply to 9 work of this Section. 10 11 1.02 DESCRIPTION OF WORK: Extent of variable frequency drives work required by this 12 Section is indicated on drawings and schedules, and by requirements of this Section. 13 14 A. For unity of responsibility, all VFD's shall be furnished by the respective pump 15 manufacturer as specified in Division 11. All VFD's furnished and installed under 16 this project shall be of a single manufacturer regardless of which pump 17 manufacturer supplies the VFD. 18 19 B. All Variable Frequency Drives (Drives) shall be provided with the complete control 20 and protective functions listed is part 2 of this specification, the Auto control 21 modes of the RAS and WAS shall be provided as follows: 22 23 1. WAS Pumps: When Drive Hand /Off /Auto selector switch is in AUTO 24 position, the Drive will be controlled via SCADA/PLC DeviceNet network. 25 26 2. RAS Pumps: When Drive Hand /Off /Auto selector switch is in AUTO 27 position the VFD will operate in PID /set -point mode where 4 -20mA signal 28 proportional to level will be wired to each drive from a level transducer. 29 The desired level set point will be entered directly into the Drives digital 30 keypad display. The drive shall automatically modulate speed as required 31 to maintain set point. The VFD manufacture will program the VFD for this 32 operation as part of the factory field start -up services. 33 34 3. The RAS pumps will respond to a low level float that shuts the VFD down 35 in both Hand and Auto modes. A door mounted selector switch labeled 36 "Low Level Float Bypass Normal /Bypass" shall be provided on VFD door 37 and wired so that when in "Bypass mode" the VFD will not react to the low 38 level float. 39 40 4. Both RAS and WAS pumps Drive will communicate via DeviceNet for 41 control and monitoring the Drive. 42 43 C. Contractor shall measure Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) for voltage and current 44 at the line side of the main breaker of the Motor Control Center feeding the VFDs. 45 46 47 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES OWNER'S REVIEW 16775 - 1 7/02/14 1 1.03 SUBMITTALS: 2 3 A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's drive specifications and installation and 4 start-up instructions. 5 6 B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's assembly -type shop drawings indicating 7 dimensions, weight loadings, required clearances, and methods of assembly of 8 components. 9 10 C. Maintenance Data: Submit Operation and Maintenance Manual and parts list. 11 12 D. Provide training material for proper operation. 13 14 1.04 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING: 15 16 A. Handle variable frequency drives and components carefully to prevent damage, 17 breaking, denting, and scoring. Do not install damaged drives or components; 18 replace with new. 19 20 B. Store drives and components in clean dry place. Protect from weather, dirt, 21 fumes, water, construction debris, and physical damage. 22 23 C. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for unloading drives and 24 moving them to final location. 25 26 1.05 WARRANTY: All units shall be warranted for a period of eighteen (18) months from the 27 date of Engineer's acceptance and beneficial use of the system by the Owner. Any 28 warranty expense during that time shall be born entirely by the manufacturer, including 29 any travel costs or living expenses necessary to repair in warranty equipment. 30 31 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 32 33 2.01 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVE: 34 35 A. The speed control for variable speed pumps shall be variable frequency drives 36 suitable for installation as shown on the drawings. 37 38 B. The variable frequency drives shall include all internal auxiliaries required to meet 39 the functional specifications. 40 41 C. The variable frequency drives shall conform to all requirements stipulated in this 42 section and Division 16 - Electrical, and shall be designed for an extended speed 43 range of 0% to 100% of full load motor speed. 44 45 D. Each drive shall have the following design features. 46 47 1. The drive shall employ microprocessor -based inverter logic isolated from 48 power circuits. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES OWNER'S REVIEW 16775 - 2 7/02/14 a 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2. The drive shall employ a diode or fully gated bridge on the input. 2 3 3. All drives shall employ a DC bus inductor to reduce line harmonics and 4 improve power factor. 5 6 4. Variable frequency drive harmonic distortion shall be limited in accordance 7 with IEEE 519 (1992) as measured at the MCC main breaker input 8 terminals. 9 10 5. The drive shall employ a common Main Control Board. 11 12 6. The drive shall employ a Pulse Width Modulated (PWM) inverter system 13 using third generator IGBT's to minimize audible motor noise and increase 14 overall performance. 15 16 7. The drive shall employ a switching logic power supply operating from the 17 DC bus. 18 19 8. The drive shall employ phase to phase and phase to ground MOV 20 protection. 21 22 9. The drive shall be provided with Ethernet IP control card for monitoring and 23 control as required. 24 25 10. The drive shall have a documented 10 years mean time between failure as 26 a minimum. 27 28 11. The drive shall be designed to have an adjustable 2 -16 kHz carrier 29 frequency to minimize audible motor noise. 30 31 12. All drives above 40 hp shall be provided as 18 -pulse dual rectifier input. 32 Full kva rated phase shifting transformers shall be provided and mounted 33 internal to the VFD enclosure. 34 35 13. The drive shall be designed to operate on an AC line which may contain 36 line notching and up to 10% harmonic distortion. 37 38 14. The drive shall be designed to shut down with no component failure in the 39 event of an output phase to phase or phase to ground short circuit and 40 provide annunciation of the fault condition. 41 42 15. The drive shall be designed with a common control connection diagram for 43 all ratings. 44 45 16. The drive shall be designed such that the inverter section power 46 semiconductors do not require commutation capacitors. 47 48 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES OWNER'S REVIEW 16775 - 3 7/02/14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 17. The drive shall be designed to be variable torque rated. The drive shall supply 110% of rated current for up to one minute. 18. The drive shall be designed to allow all parameter adjustments to be made with the door closed. 19. The drive shall be provided in a NEMA 3R304 Stainless Steel: a. 40HP and 50HP VFDs: 32 "W x 30 "D x 84 "H, floor standing. b. 10HP: 32 "W x 16" "D x 42 "H, wall mounted. 20. The drive shall be designed with a common Customer Interface for all horsepower ratings. The Interface shall include an LCD digital display, programming keypad and operator keys option. The drive shall be capable of storing the configuration in the keypad. 21. The drive shall provide multiple programmable stop modes, including ramp, coast, brake and S- curve. 22. The drive shall be designed to have an adjustable output frequency up to 60 Hz ±5 %. E. The drives shall have the following features: 1. Interface: The drive shall provide a removable Human Interface Module with integral display to show drive operating conditions, adjustments, and fault indications. The display shall be removable under power without causing a drive fault and be visible and operable without opening the enclosure door. This unit shall have backlit LCD display. It is used to display drive operating conditions, fault / alarm indications and programming information with full text support in English language. The drive can also be programmed and display all speed values in either Hertz or RPM. 2. Volts per Hertz Adjustment: Drive programming shall provide the ability to fully configure the volts per hertz for squared, cubed, straight line or full custom patterns. 3. Current Limit: The drive shall provide a programmable current limit from 20% to 150% of variable torque rating. Current limit shall be active for all drive states; accelerating, constant speed, and decelerating. The drive shall employ PI Regulation for smooth transition. 4. Acceleration /Deceleration: The Accel /Decel settings shall provide separate adjustments to allow either setting to be adjusted from 0 seconds to 600 seconds. The drive shall provide a second set of remotely selectable Accel /Decel settings. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES OWNER'S REVIEW 16775 - 4 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 A t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 5. Speed Regulation: The drive shall be capable of operating in a variety of 2 speed regulation modes, including slip compensation with 0.5% speed 3 regulation. 4 5 6. Speed Profiles: The drive shall be capable of producing speed profiles with 6 linear acceleration/ deceleration or 'S- Curve' profiles that provide changing 7 Accel /Decel rates. S -Curve profiles shall be selectable for fixed or 8 adjustable values. 9 10 7 Adjustments: The digital interface shall be used for all set -up, operation, 11 and adjustment settings. All adjustments shall be stored in non - volatile 12 memory for factory default values as well as a programmable set of user 13 defaults. 14 15 8. Auto Tuning: The drive shall be capable of automatically determining the 16 motor's stator resistance by outputting both an AC and DC voltage to the 17 motor and monitoring motor current. Stator resistance shall be stored in 18 drive memory for determining proper voltage and current requirements. 19 20 9. IR Compensation (DC Boost): The drive shall provide a selectable range 21 for offsetting motor losses at low frequency operation DC Boost shall be 22 current regulated and shall automatically adjust, on each start, to load 23 changes. DC Boost shall be programmable from 15% to 120% of drive 24 rated current. This function shall be part of the Auto Commissioning and 25 set by the VFD during Auto - Tuning. 26 27 10. Fault Reset/Run: The drive shall provide up to ten automatic fault reset 28 and restarts following a fault condition before locking out and requiring 29 manual restart. 30 31 11. Skip Tendencies: The drive shall provide three adjustable setpoints to lock 32 out continuous operation at frequencies which may product mechanical 33 resonance. The setpoints shall have an adjustable bandwidth of 0 Hz to 60 34 Hz. 35 36 12. Run On Power Up: The drive shall provide for automatic restart of 37 equipment after restoration of power after an outage. 38 39 13. Fault Memory: The drive shall provide a means to store the last Ten (10) 40 faults as well as operating frequency, drive status, and power mode at time 41 of fault. Information shall be maintained in the event of power loss. 42 43 14. Overload Protection: The drive shall provide NEC motor overload 44 protection testing in accordance with UL Standard 991. 45 46 15. Terminal Blocks: The drive shall provide separate terminal blocks for 47 control and power wiring. VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES OWNER'S REVIEW 16775 - 5 7/02/14 1 16. Operator's Devices: The drive shall be provided with the following door 2 mounted pilot devices in addition to the door mounted Human Interface 3 Module: 4 5 a. Hand /Off /Auto selector switch. 6 b. Power On pilot light. 7 c. Run pilot light. 8 d. Fault pilot light. 9 10 17. Control Inputs: The drive shall provide a separate control input terminal 11 block for customer wiring to remote start, stop, auxiliary, remote speed 12 reference access and enable inputs. Four additional inputs shall be 13 provided as programmable for functions such as preset speed access, job, 14 second Accel and Decel time access and local control selection. Inputs 15 shall be programmable to configure the drive for standard 3 wire, 2 wire, 16 EC and serial operation requirements. 17 18 18. Ride Through: Under voltage ride -thru qualified to SEMI -F47. 19 20 19. Loss of Reference: In the event of Toss of the 4 mA to 20 mA reference 21 signal, the drive shall be user programmable to the following: 22 23 a. Fault and stop. 24 b. Alarm and maintain last reference. 25 c. Alarm and got to preset speed. 26 27 20. Analog Output: The drive shall supply two analog outputs selectable 0 volt 28 DC to 10 volt DC or 0/4 mA to 20 mA which shall be user programmable 29 such that is proportional to output frequency, output current, bus voltage or 30 output power, KW, output volts, or output current. 31 32 21. Digital I /O: The drive contact output ratings shall be 115 volt AC / 30 volt 33 DC, 5.0 amps resistive, 2.0 amp inductive. The three contacts provided 34 shall be as follows 35 36 a. Form C Fault Contact b. Two programmable Form A contacts. 37 38 22. Reference Signals: 39 40 a. Digital: The drive shall be capable of operating from a pulse input 41 with programmable Phase Lock Loop for input/output 42 synchronization. 43 b. Analog: The drive shall be capable of operating from the following 44 speed reference signals: 45 46 i VFD Human Interface Module (Hand). 47 ii. 4 mA to 20 mA signal (Remote). VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES OWNER'S REVIEW 16775 - 6 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 iii. Internal set -point controller with 4 -20mA process variable 2 input signal from external transducer. 3 4 23. Water Solutions multi -pump card provided by Schneider Electric. 5 6 24. The following pump specific control and protective features shall be 7 provided. Protective features shall provide English language display on 8 drive digital display when active: 9 10 a. Loss of prime protection. 11 b. Over Cycling protection. 12 c. No flow detection. 13 d. Thrust bearing start. 14 e. Low input pressure. 15 f. Low /high flow level. 16 g. Anti -Jam protection. 17 h. De -scale operation. 18 19 F. Acceptable manufacturers for the variable frequency drive units are: 20 Square D /Schneider Electric to match existing VFDs on site reference 21 Q2C #30110119. No other manufactures will be accepted 22 23 24 PART 3 - EXECUTION 25 26 3.01 INSPECTION: Examine areas and conditions under which variable frequency drives are 27 to be installed. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been 28 corrected in manner acceptable to Installer. 29 30 3.02 INSTALLATION OF DRIVES: 31 32 A. General: Install variable frequency drives where indicated, in accordance with 33 manufacturer's published installation instructions, complying with recognized 34 industry practices to ensure that system complies with requirements and services 35 intended purposes. 36 37 B. Access: Provide access space around drives for service as indicated, but in no 38 case less than that recommended by the manufacturer. 39 40 3.03 HARMONIC DATA COLLECTION: 41 42 A. Furnish in tabular form the Voltage, Current and Total harmonic distortion at the 43 Line Side of the Main Breaker of the Motor Control Center feeding the VFDs. Data 44 collected shall be without any new VFDs in operation (all new VFD 'OFF') and 45 then with all new VFDs in operation (all new VFDs 'ON'). Measurements shall 46 include fundamental thru the 11th harmonic component. 47 48 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES OWNER'S REVIEW 16775 - 7 7/02/14 1 B. Harmonic Analysis Study — Preformed by the VFD manufacture: 2 3 1. A Harmonic Analysis Study shall be made to determine the levels of 4 harmonic voltages and currents in the system. The study shall be done 5 at the facility's point of common coupling with the utility. 6 7 2. The type and level of compensation needed to achieve the desired 8 power factor and acceptable levels of harmonics shall be considered. 9 10 3. Transient concerns shall be evaluated in order to determine the 11 optimum equipment size, location in the system, and configuration. 12 13 4. The study shall make appropriate recommendations in order to provide 14 proper protection and operation of the electrical system. 15 16 5. The study will shall be based on Toad data collected frorn on -site 17 measurements 18 19 6. Harmonic measurements will be performed in order to provide nonlinear 20 load characteristics, voltage distortion levels, and model) verification. The 21 measurements will be conducted over a 1 day 22 23 7. Harmonic source models will be developed for each nonlinear Toad 24 (drive, etc.) type. The load characteristics [will be determined by 25 measurement and used as harmonic sources for the computer 26 simulations.] 27 28 8. Frequency scan cases (impedance vs. frequency) will be completed in 29 order to determine the system frequency response characteristic for 30 various system conditions. 31 32 9. If required, the application of harmonic filters will be evaluated to 33 determine the optimum filter size and configurations. 34 35 10. Computer simulations shall be performed to determine the system 36 harmonic voltage and current levels and voltage distortion levels (and 37 compared with measured values to determine the effect of various 38 system conditions). 39 40 11. If required, harmonic filter specifications shall be developed with 41 consideration to cost, filtering options, and effectiveness of harmonic 42 filters. 43 44 12. Final study shall be signed and sealed by a Florida registered PE. 45 46 47 END OF SECTION 16775 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES OWNER'S REVIEW 16775 - 8 7/02/14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 APPENDIX ODP DOCUMENTS AND OTHER PROJECT DOCUMENTATION Table of Contents: OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS • ODP Instructions • Request to requisition Form PROJECT PERMITS The Owner has not obtained any permits for this project. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all City of Clearwater Building Department Permits and Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from Any Non- Contaminated Site Activity. GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT The following geotechnical information is included: • The Report of the Monitoring Well Installation Dated May 26, 2010 (18 Pages) • Initial Northeast Groundwater Monitoring Well Sampling Results Dated June 6, 2011 (4 Pages). • Follow up Northeast Groundwater Monitoring Well Sampling Results Dated August 2, 2011 (3 pages) ASBESTOS REPORT Not Applicable To This Project INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS Drawings from the initial construction of clarifiers 5 -8 and the South RAS pump house are available in electronic format upon request. Appendix.docx i 7/7/2014 OWNER DIRECT PURCHASE (ODP) DOCUMENTS Appendix.docx 7/7/2014 Owner Direct Purchase (ODP) Instructions 1. Upon contract award and execution, a Purchase Order (PO) shall be issued to Contractor for the full amount of contract. 2. Contractor shall submit a list (ODP Summary) of potential ODP vendors and estimated dollar amounts (minimum of $10,000) to the City for approval prior to initial pay application. Certain contracts will be awarded based upon the bid proposal with pre - determined item(s) for ODP and the accompanying tax savings. The ODP Summary shall list: (a) item cost, (b) sales tax savings, and (c) Contractor's costs associated with the item. 3. Contractor shall submit Request to Requisition forms (see attached) for each vendor to the City for review and approval, in electronic, MS Word format. The City will review and code, then return to Contractor for electronic signature. The City prefers that all Request to Requisitions be included in a single submittal. 4. A Change Order (CO) shall be issued to Contractor reducing their PO by the amount of the ODP purchase(s) and the sales tax savings (per Request to Requisitions). COs will be drafted by the City and will be forwarded to the Contractor for execution. Contractor shall submit two (2) originals, signed, sealed and witnessed, to the City for execution. One original shall be returned to the Contractor. 5. Concurrently, the City Purchasing Department shall issue ODP POs directly to each vendor (via email), per the Request to Requisition, along with an executed Certificate of Entitlement and the City's Certificate of Tax Exemption. The Contractor and City Project Manager will be copied. 6. Contractor shall coordinate delivery with Vendor. Material shall be delivered to the project site. Contractor shall instruct Vendor to send invoice to the Contractor, naming the City as the purchaser. 7. Contractor shall review, approve and submit executed invoices to the Project Manager with adequate documentation (delivery ticket, packing slips). Invoices shall include the ODP PO number, invoice number, and be addressed to the City of Clearwater, c/o Contractor. Two (2) executed invoices (1 — signed and 1 — copy) and one (1) signed packing slip shall be mailed to the City for processing. 8. City shall approve invoices and issue payment to the Vendor for materials received. 9. ODP POs must be closed out prior to closing out the contract/Contractor PO. If material costs needed for project exceeds the Vendor PO amount, the ODP PO will not be increased. Amounts in excess of the ODP PO will be paid for by the Contractor. Appendix.docx 7/7/2014 REQUEST TO REQUISITION 1 for Owner Direct Purchase Materials ' . a a er STANDARD PURCHASE ORDER City Project Name: City Contract #: General Item Description: Vendor: Contact Name: Street Address: Phone No: City /State /Zip: Receiving Location (Ship to): (Project location) Street Address: City /State /Zip: Email: 1 1 Attention: Phone No: Requested by: (General Contractor) Phone No: Contact Name: Email: Date Needed by: Line Quantity Units (LS, SF, etc.) Expense Code: (City will complete) Detailed Description (List shipping & handling charges, if applicable) •e Per 1 ch (refer to Line Item # and details from Bidder's Proposal, Section V) special delivery instructions Hold X% for retainage Send Original Invoices to: City of Clearwater c/o Contractor or Subcontractor Name (whoever installs the materials) Mailing Address, Attention To: Email address, Phone Number LS PO Total LS Sales Tax Savings to Owner (first $5,000 x 7.0 %, thereafter sales tax rate is 6.0 %) Equipment shall be in accordance with the applicable technical spec., and all other applicable provisions (shop drawings, O &Ms, warranties, etc.,) of contract referenced above. Spare parts provided as per specifications; freight included. Start up services and training are included in the above price. Contractor's signature Requesting Official - PRINT NAME Date: City Rep Signature Title and Name of Contracting Firm Engineering will provide records retention according to City of Cleanvater's Records Management Program. Appendix.docx 7/7/2014 Approving Official - PRINT NAME Date: City of Clearwater Representative Title t 1 1 1 1 1 e 1 1 PROJECT PERMITS (as applicable) The Owner has not obtained any permits for this project. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all City of Clearwater Building Department Permits and Generic Permit for the Discharge of Produced Ground Water from Any Non - Contaminated Site Activity. Appendix.docx 7/7/2014 GEOTECHNICAL SOIL REPORT The following geotechnical information and reports were relied upon by Engineer in preparation of the Drawings and Specifications: • The Report of the Monitoring Well Installation Dated May 26, 2010 (18 Pages) • Initial Northeast Groundwater Monitoring Well Sampling Results Dated June 6, 2011 (4 Pages). • Follow up Northeast Groundwater Monitoring Well Sampling Results Dated August 2, 2011 (3 pages) Appendix.docx 7/7/2014 1 REPORT OF THE MONITORING WELL INSTALLATION NORTHEAST WWTP CLEARWATER, FLORIDA Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated cJ IM i D R I G G E R S E N G I N E E R I N G S E R V I C E S I N C O R P O R A T E D Geotechnical Engineering & Construction Materials Testing King Engineering Associates, Inc. 4921 Memorial Highway Suite 300 Tampa, Florida 33634 Attention: Mr_ Christopher Kuzler, P.E. RE: Report of the Monitoring Well Installations Lakeside Station Plant City, Florida Our File: DES 106550 Dear Mr. Kuzler: May 26, 2010 In accordance with your request, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. is pleased to fumish a report of the monitoring well installation at the subject site. Presented herein is a brief discussion of the scope of services performed along with the completion report and well schematic. MONITORING WELL INSTALLATION As requested, we installed one (1) monitoring well to nominal depths of 14 feet below existing grade. The well was constructed of 2 inch flush joint schedule 40 PVC. The monitoring well has schedule 40, 0.010 slotted PVC well screen followed by schedule 40 PVC well casing. The well was excavated using 6 -1/4 inch hollow stem augers having an 8 inch outside diameter. The annulus between the 2 inch well and the borehole was backfilled using 20/30 silica sand from the tip to the top of the well screen which was then backfilled with native soil to existing grade. At existing grade a concrete pad was constructed and a 4 "x4 "x5' aluminum locking cover was installed. In addition to the aluminum locking cover, we installed four (4) PVC covered concrete bollards. A detailed schematic (Plate II) of the monitoring well has been attached along with the permit application completion report. Also attached as Plate I is a monitoring well location plan and the classification boring log. Sarasota Clearwater Phone: 941.371.3949 12220 49th Street North • Clearwater, Florida 33762 Fax: 941.371.8962 Phone: 727.571.1313 • Fax: 727.572.4090 sarcffice@driggers- eng.com ciwoffice@driggers.eng.com Tampa Phone: 813.948.6027 Fax: 813.948.7645 tpaoffice@driggers-eng.com 1 t 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. appreciates the opportunity to assist you on this project. Should you have any questions concerning the monitoring well installations, please do not hesitate to contact this office at your convenience. JAD JAD- REP \106550 Copies submitted: (3) Respectfully submitted, DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INC. Jeffs' A. Driggers, P.E. Project Engineer FL Registration No. 70598 Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated No. 70598 ;N �i i,; i 't' ; �t S �* STATE OF ;1 el: to FS,.4.NR1 ■•:‘111dF �r f i i i i i APPENDIX PLATE I - MONITORING WELL LOCATION PLAN PLATE II - MONITORING WELL DETAIL PERMIT APPLICATION AND COMPLETION REPORT BORING LOG Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 1 1 1 r PLATE I - MONITORING WELL LOCATION PLAN Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated [1. I I .. ro P:sk - • r i .14. CIZOICI Mi.pQ■ikit Ili0113 02011) N.:,:TEr... i-ct$1,,1 LEGEND: ® GROUNDWATER MONITORING WELL/ HAND AUGER BORING LOCATION SHEET TITLE GROUNDWATER MONITORING WELL LOCATION PLAN DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES, INCORPORATED SCALE: 1 = 120' DATE: 5/27/10 PREPARED BY PROJECT NAME SHEET NO. CLEARWATER NE WASTEWATER TREATMENT PLANT GROUNDWATER MONITORING WELL PLATE I CLEARWATER, FLORIDA 1 9 PLATE II - MONITORING WELL DETAIL Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated 4 "x4"x5' Aluminum Protective Casing Locking with Lid 2" Locking Cap Four — 5'x3" Dia. Concrete Bollards 7.66' of 2" Dia. PVC Casing (Schedule 40) Existing Grade 3.66' -- -- - 3'x3'x4" Concrete ' "- .... - Service Pad // 14.20' = 1 I • `= -` . `_ ' - �' i I-- "°= /��\ : 3.0' Native Soil _ - - `'A:- 11.2' 20/30 Silica Sand _ ;- : = ' • 10.0' of 2" Dia. PVC Slotted Screen ((Schedule 40) (Slot Size 0.010") "x2" 2 Well Point CAD ALE NAME: N: \ACLTMN \PROTOS \106550MW.DWG. DRAWN BY: R.D.B. DATE: 5/26/10 SHEET TITLE PREPARED BY GROUNDWATER MONITORING WELL INSTALLATION DETAIL - �VI�5 N ` INCORPORATED PROJECT NAME • SHEET NO. CLEARWATER NE WASTEWATER • TREATMENT PLANT GROUNDWATER MONITORING WELL CLEARWA1ER, FLORIDA PLATE II 1 1 1 1 1 II 1 1 li I1 1I 11 II I PERMIT APPLICATION AND COMPLETION REPORT Driggers Engineering Services Incorporated III if III IS 1111 ill AI 11111 III IR IN ill WELL COMPLETION REPORT (Please complete in black ink or type.) PERMIT #: 804821.1 CUPIWUP #: D1D#: Indicate the number of wells drilled/abandoned for this report: 1 Indicate the number of wells permitted but not drilled/abandoned that are being cancelled: WATER WELL CONTRACTOR'S SIGNATURE Digitally Signed License # 9222 I certify that the information provided in this report is accurate and true. Grout No. of Bags From (ft.) To (ft.) Neat Cement: Which is ft. Xi above ( j [ ] Galvanized PVC [ j Other: Bentonite: [ j Open Hole xj Screen Depth (feet) jOthen 8 4.2 14.2 WELL LOCATION: County PINELLAS 114 of 1/4 of Section 21 , Township 28 , Range 16 Latitude: 28° 1' 48.25" , Longitude: -82° 42' 13.42" DATE STAMP May 242010 Official Use Only CHEMICAL ANALYSIS WHEN REQUIRED Iron: __ppm Sulfate: ppm Chlorides: ppm TDS mg/1 Conductivity umhos /cm [ ] Lab Test [ ]Field Test Kit Pump Type Sketch of well location on property Give distances from septic tank and house, or other reference points r l r+..r.iriA knell r 1 In+ r 7 G dvnnroikln L J vcnunuyal L 1 %MI J vuainwrowly Horsepower. Capacity: Pump Depth: ft. Intake Depth: ft. Form LEG•R.005.00(10 /05) r 1 Turbine GPM: OWNER'S NAME: CITY OF CLEARWATER COMPLETION DATE: 05/13/2010 Florida Unique I.D.: Parcel # (Pin): 212816000003100000 WELL USE: [ ] Public Supply [ ] Irrigation [ ] Domestic [ ] Monitor [ ] Injection ()Q Other TEST WELL / PIEZOMETER DRILL METHOD: [ ] Rotary [ ]Cable Tool [ j Combination [ ] Jet IX] Auger [ ]Other Measured Static Water After Hours at Level: 8.70 Measured Pumping Water Level: GPM. Measuring below land surface Pt, {oes��e): T.O.G. Which is ft. Xi above ( j [ ] Galvanized PVC [ j Other: Casing: ( j Black Steel [ j Open Hole xj Screen Depth (feet) DRILL CUTTINGS LOG Examine cuttings every 20 ft. or at formation changes. Note cavities. depth to producing zones. Color I Grain Size I Type of Material Casing Diameter and Depth (ft.) From To Diameter: 2 p 4 brown Fine sand From: 0 a 11.8arav fine s pd To: 4.2 11,812.3tan fine sand Diameter: 1 2.314.2aray fine sand From: To: Liner (i or Casing [ ] Diameter: 2 From: 4.2 To: 14.2 Drillers Name (print or type): Mat Jaynes — — r — — r MN MI • r s • Mr OM all — — - 5/11/2010 Screen Interval from 1U to 20 Seal Material Sand Received: Tuesday, STATE OF FLORIDA PERMIT APPLICATION TO CONSTRUCT, REPAIR, MODIFY, OR ABANDON A WELL 14 Southwest El Northwest ❑ Si. Johns River ❑ South Florida ❑ Suwannee River CHECK 605 FOR APPROPArATE DISTFOCT ADDRESS ON MAC1r OF PENNEFOAAM THIS FORM MUST BE FILLED OUT COMPLETELY. The water well conbaclor is responsb)e /orcompkRng this loan and rorwanfulg the permit to the appropri ate delegated county where applicable. 1 CITY OF CLEARWATER Amer, Legal Name o/ Entity /1 Corportat)Dn 2. 3200 SR 580. Clearwater PO BOX 4748 Well Location _Address, Road Name or number, City Parcel # (Pin) 212816000003100000 Address Permit No. 804821 Florida Unique I D. Permit Stipulations Required (See attached) 34 23, 01,39 62 -524 Quad A O Delineation fl CUP/WUP 'cation No CLEARWATER FL 33758-4748 City �+P Telephone Number 3_ JIMMY W RANDOLPH Well Drilling Contractor 740 13Th AVENUE SW Address LARGO Fl City State 6. PINELLAS 9222 License No. 33770 County (7271585 -2220 Telephone No. • 4. 114 01 wdSedon 21 ae.,, (Indrale Well on Chen) 5. Township 28 Range 16 Subdivision Name Lot Block Unit NW NE I I I I I I t t I 7. Number ol proposed wells 1 Check the use ol well: ism hack a pmW b.ddliorW dohs) (s.. Broil Distance from septic system J Irrigation (Type) 8. Application for: Public Water Supply (type) Domestic SW SE Monitor (type) Ust Other TEST WELL / PIIZOMETER (ewe 100 11 Description of facility wrote Water treatmeIted start of construction date Repair/Modily Abandonment (Beason IorAbandonmenl) New Construction 9. Estimated: Well Depth 20 Casing Depth Casing Material: / X l / PVC Casing Diameter 2 smelled 10. If applicable: Proposed From to Seal Material Grouting Interval From to Seal Material From to Seal Material it Telescope Casing _ or liner (check one) Diameter BIk -Steel / Galvanized / PVC Other (specify:) 12. Method of Construction- Rotary Cable Tool Combination I Auger Other (specify) 13. Indicate total No. 01 wells on site _I. list number of unused wells on site o 14. Is this well or any other wel or water withdrawal on the owner's contiguous property covered undera Consumptive/Water Use Permit (CUP/WUP) or CUP/WUPApplication? J No Yes (1i YEA COMPLETE ME FOLLOWING) CUPANUP No. District well I.D. No. Latitude 25 01- Longitude 82° 42' 13.42' obtained kom GPS or map _ or survey _ (map datum NAD 27_ NAD 834 15. Hereby y ead y aid I Amanpq ale the appirNe rules of TOe 4D. Florida Adninsearke Cod. and Mal away, ma moil or respell mdnrg, pane. D seeded, has bare a roll be ehlaln.d prior In meson emeal all well wwsI,udJon. I bother eerily Pal all Wamabwi provided an this application Is nmawand are! I ea ohlaF Denman. approval Irom other I.deral, dale, or teal paererrees. 4 makable. I agree b prmtde o wall mmpleton report to the Mabel wM et 3O del, after 4iihp or the perrril oapratled wlidover aara pal. Digitally Signed nature of Contractor Approval Granted By: 9222 License No. Dale Stamp May 11, 2010 Diem a map of Mel location andbldhale well she wih an 8f- Identify brown road, and Pad maks pro (de distances beMen Ives end nerd adds. North South I only Del I am the owes on the papal', the IM a*ermadm provided is mare.. and that I am aeera ISM aaponeiiAw under Chapau 373, Flake aerobe, to aohpl.a properly Wanton la. roll: DO matey ilea I am the apes* W de owner. eel IM i lean glen provided and eel I Me informed W. owner ol li m- spanaLBMs as staled ah os. paver orients b pawner of de WMD or • rapowaarre amass to the eel aide. Digitally Signed Owner's or enrs S' DO NOT WRITE BELOW THIS LINE - FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY Automatically Issued Issue Date- 5/11/2010 ature pate Owner Number. Fee Received: $ 50.00 Receipt No.: 1N10739570 Hydrologist Approval Intpata Check No • THIS PERMIT NOT VALID UNTIL PROPERLY SIGNED BY AN AUTHORIZED OFFICER OR REPRESENTATIVE OF THE WMD. IT SHALL BE AVAILABLE AT THE WELL SITE DURING ALL DRILLING OPERATIONS. This permit Is valid for 90 days from the date of Issue. FORM 41.10 -410 (1) REV. 12/04 WHITE: YELLOW: PINK: ORIGINAL FILE DRILLING CONTRACTOR OWNER Recovery Pudic Water Supply (DEP) Community Non - Community Limited Use Public Supply (HRS; Livestock Landscape Irrigation Agricultural irrigation (crops, sod, orchards, nursery stock) Nursery Irrigation (retail outlets only) Pesticide Mixing & Loading Recreation Area irrigation (ball fields, playgrounds) Aquaculture (fish ponds) Golf Course Irrigation Class t Injection Well Class V Injection Heat Pump (AC Supply) Test (temporary) WUP Heat Pump (AC Return) Industrial WELL SETBACK DISTANCES: 25 ft. From a treated building slab. 75 ft. Domestic — From on site septic system. 100 ft. Public Supply and Limited Public Supply less than 2000 GPD Sewage Flow. 200 ft. Public Supply and Limited Public Supply greater than 2000 GPD Sewage Flow. These are common setback distances. However they are not all-Inclusive. Refer to other applicable rules for additional setbacks. I I i 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT STIPULATION NUMBER 39 - WELL AND DRILLHOLE ABANDONMENT It will be the water well contractor's responsibility to have any incomplete well or drillhole attempted under this permit properly abandoned. Any incomplete or abandoned well or drillhole as described in 40D -3, Florida Administrative Code (F.A.C.), shall be abandoned as follows: A. The well shall be examined from land surface to the original depth of construction for debris or obstructions (any debris or obstruction shall be removed prior to abandonment). B. The well shall be plugged from bottom to top by an approved method of grouting with either Portland neat cement grout or an approved Bentonite product as specified in 40D -3.517 2. (b), F.A.C. It will be the owner's responsibility to have any well completed under this permit, or any existing well on this property, which meets the definition of an abandoned well as defined in Chapter 40D- 3.021(1), F.A.C., properly abandoned in accordance with Chapter 40D- 3.531, F.A.C. It will be the owner's responsibility to have any inactive well, which does not meet the above criteria and is no threat to the water resource properly capped in an air and watertight manner with a threaded, welded or bolted cover or valve. If the pump and well seal are water tight, the pump may be left in place. If practical, a protective cover two (2) feet in height shall be placed around the well casing. A. Wells with a diameter of six (6) inches or more without pumping equipment shall have the well casing extended a minimum of two (2) feet above land surface. B. Wells with a diameter of less than six (6) inches without pumping equipment shall be securely set in a concrete slab and have either the well casing extended a minimum height of two (2) feet above land surface or a protective cover centered over the well casing. The concrete slab shall be a minimum of four (4) inches in thickness by two (2) feet by two (2) feet square. The protective cover shall be set in the concrete slab and extend a minimum of two (2) feet above land surface. In flood prone areas all wells shall extend a minimum of one (1) foot above the 100 year flood elevation, if practical, in accordance with Chapter 40D- 3.521(4), F.A.C. Any plugging operations shall be permitted separately from this permit by the Southwest Florida Water Management District and be witnessed by a designated District representative. Arrangement for a District representative shall be made with the local District Field Services office a minimum of 24 hours in advance of these operations. A District representative will be available for assignment during normal working hours (8:00 AM - 4:30 PM), Monday through Friday. Travel time must be taken into consideration. Exemptions may be made for extenuating circumstances. For scheduling, please contact the Field Service Supervisor in the Tampa office at (813) 985 -7481. Permit Number. 804821 (11/03) N 1 r 1 ■ ■ 1 SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT STIPULATION # 34 - PINELLAS COUNTY 1. The applicant shall comply with Chapters 62- 532, 64E -8, and 40D -3 Florida Administrative Code with applicable construction standards and grouting procedures. 2. No water supply shall be interconnected with any approved public water supply unless all the following conditions are met: a. The water supply (including well, distribution piping and treatment facilities as applicable) was properly approved and permitted as a domestic drinking water facility by state, local or other required regulatory agencies. b. The water supply shall currently be in compliance and good standing with said regulatory agencies. c. The agency supplying potable water to be interconnected with the water supply shall install the necessary back flow prevention device at the point where the agency looses jurisdiction over their water supply after determining the private system is not detrimental to their system. This shall be done prior to interconnection. d. Each installation shall require the public health unit and the agency supplying potable water to provide written approval to the plumbing inspection department prior to interconnection. 3. Compliance must be maintained with all other state, local or otherwise building and regulatory agency rules and regulations. Contact the Pinellas County Public Health Unit, Environmental Engineering Division at ( 727) 538 -7277 for more information. 4. Irrigation water wells shall not be connected to any potable plumbing system. 5. In the event the well is to be abandoned, a District abandonment permit will be obtained prior to commencing with abandonment operations. Permit No. 804821 COPY TO OWNER TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR (05/06) 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT STIPULATION # 23 - TEST/MONITOR WELL A. This well is to be used as a test/monitor well. If it is to be converted into a production well, an additional permit shall be obtained. B. There shall be no injection of fluids into the monitor well without prior written approval from the Florida Department of Environmental Protection (DEP) or the District. This includes, but is not limited to treated ground water, or the introduction of microbes for in -situ aquifer restoration. C. The well shall be constructed in such a manner to prevent the unauthorized interchange of water between different water bearing zones (i.e., breaching of confining beds, clays or hardpan intervals) as per Chapter 62- 532.500 (2)(C), Florida Administrative Code (F.A.C.). D. Prior written approval from the District shall be required if the monitor well will be pumped for use in hydrodynamic control and /or contaminant plume management, if quantities reach or exceed requirement of a Water Use Permit. E. All monitor wells constructed at any facility which has been designated as a ground water contamination site, or a possible ground water contamination site, shall adhere to the construction standards set forth by the DEP and other applicable rules. F. In the event the well needs to be abandoned, an abandonment permit shall be obtained prior to commencing with abandonment operations. G. An observer from our Regulation Department is required on all abandonments to ensure compliance with applicable 40D -3 regulations. Please contact the Field Service Supervisor in the Tampa Office at (813) 985 -7481 for additional information. Permit No. 804821 COPY TO OWNER TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR (11/03) 1 1 1 SOUTHWEST FLORIDA WATER MANAGEMENT DISTRICT STIPULATION # 1 - SALT WATER INTRUSION A. The location of the well is marginal due to potential salt -water encroachment. It rnay or may not yield water of acceptable quality in the near future. Therefore, this permit is granted with the understanding that if the well does not produce acceptable water, it will be properly abandoned. B. In the event the well needs to be abandoned, an abandonment permit shall be obtained prior to commencing with abandonment procedures. 1 1 1 1 1 i C. An observer from the District's Regulation Department is required on all abandonments to ensure compliance with Chapter 62 -532, Florida Administrative Code. Please contact the Field Service Supervisor in the Tampa Office at (813) 985 -7481 for additional information. Permit No.: 804821 COPY TO OWNER TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR (11/03) 1 1 1 1 1 BORING LOG Driggers Engineering Services incorporated DRIGGERS ENGINEERING SERVICES INCORPORATED HAND AUGER BORING LOG PROJECT: Clearwater NE Wastewater Treatment Plant Groundwater Monitoring Well Clearwater, Florida Project No.. DES 106550 CLIENT: King Engineering Associates Inc. WATER TABLE: 8.7' DATE: 5/13/10 TECHNICIAN: S.I=./M.J. DATE: 5/13/10 COMPLETION DEPTH: 14.2' LOCATION: See - Remarks" TEST NUMBER. PZ -1 ELEV. DESCRIPTION DEPTH SYMBOL REMARKS Brown Fine SAND with some roots, trace of shell fragments and trace of clayey Fine SAND pockets (SP) 0 •:% ,�.- Location: 6.0' North of East Tank Centerline • 6.1:.`:`," .*.ii 7-TJ Brown and Tight brown Fine SAND (SP) 2 4 Light brownish -gray clayey Fine SAND with shell fragments and seams of green CLAY (SP /CH) : %:.;./ ° a. Iv v= 1 v / / 6 Dark brownish -gray slightly silty Fine SAND with pieces of large roots (SP -SM) ME MEIN - g fir: t r t'�' -1.- /'r" t ' -i,;rc;.. .1:1:r.l. . :r. 1 Brownish -gray and Tight brownish -gray sandy CLAY with seams of dark y brownish -gray slightly silty Fine SAND (SC /SP -SM) Light brownish -gray and brownish -gray silty, slightly clayey Fine SAND (SM) per 01/0 Dark brownish -gray slightly silty Fine SAND with trace of finely divided organic material (SP -SM) - 10 Light brownish -gray sandy CLAY with trace of roots (CH) Light brownish - gray slightly silty Fine SAND (SP -SM) 12 ' '' • t-' P :5 r Light tannish -gray calcareous, silty Fine SAND with shell fragments and thin seams of green silty CLAY (SM/CH) Prl, Ail 14 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC. 1 10 BAY VIEWt3DLL_F_VG,RD, D_DSMAR, FL 34677 81 3 -855 -1944 FAX 813- 855 -2218 City of Clearwater Public Utilities 1605 Harbor Drive Clearwater, FL 33755 Laboratory Report June 6, 2011 Work Order: 1104350 Project Name Groundwater Discharge Permit Parameters Units Results * Method PQL MDL Prepared Analyzed By Sample Description Northeast Plant Well Matrix Groundwater SAL Sample Number 1104350 -01 Date/Time Collected 05/26/11 10:52 Collected by Sean Harmon Date/Time Received 05/26/11 11:20 Volatile Organic Compounds Benzene ug /L 0.1 U EPA 624 0.8 0.1 06/02/11 13:58 JRW Chlorobenzene ug /L 0.1 U EPA 624 0.8 0.1 06/02/11 13:58 JRW 1,2- Dichlorobenzene ug /L 0.1 U EPA 624 0.8 0.1 06/02/11 13:58 JRW 1,3- Dichlorobenzene ug /L 0.07 U EPA 624 0.8 0.07 06/02/11 13:58 JRW 1,4- Dichlorobenzene ug /L 0.2 U EPA 624 0.8 0.2 06/02/11 13:58 JRW Ethylbenzene ug /L 0.08 U EPA 624 0.8 0.08 06/02/11 13:58 JRW Methyl -t -butyl ether ug /L 0.2 U EPA 624 ** 1.6 0.2 06/02/11 13:58 JRW Toluene ug /L 3.5 EPA 624 0.8 0.09 06/02/11 13:58 JRW Xylene -m,p ug /L 0.2 U EPA 624 ** 1.6 0.2 06/02/11 13:58 JRW Xylene -o ug /L 0.2 U EPA 624 ** 0.8 0.2 06/02/11 13:58 JRW Xylenes- Total ug /L 0.1 U EPA 624 0.8 0.1 06/02/11 13:58 JRW Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons Naphthalene ug /L 0.23 U EPA 610 1.1 0.23 06/01/11 14:08 06/04/11 04:59 JKS Inorganics Total Organic Carbon mg /L 25 SM 5310B 1.0 0.50 06/06/11 07:08 ARM Metals Cadmium mg /L 0.00027 U EPA 200.8 0.00050 0.00027 06/02/11 09:22 06/03/11 02:58 VWC Chromium mg /L 0.0033 I EPA 200.8 0.0050 0.00035 06/02/11 09:31 06/03/11 14:32 VWC Chromium, Hexavalent mg /L 0.0050 U SM 3500Cr-B 0.040 0.0050 05/26/11 11:45 VWC Copper mg /L 0.00054 EPA 200.8 0.00050 0.00013 06/02/11 09:22 06/03/11 02:58 VWC Lead mg /L 0.00025 U EPA 200.8 0.00050 0.00025 06/02/11 09:22 06/03/11 02:58 VWC Mercury ug /L 0.0012 EPA 1631 0.00040 0.00020 05/31/11 11:13 06/02/11 08:32 AWS Zinc mg /L 0.0064 EPA 200.8 0.0050 0.00088 06/02/11 09:22 06/03/11 02:58 MC Sample Description Field Blank Matrix Groundwater SAL Sample Number 1104350 -02 Date/Time Collected 05/26/11 10:35 Collected by Sean Harmon Date/Time Received 05/26/11 11:20 Metals Mercury ug /L 0.0029 EPA 1631 0.00040 0.00020 05/31/11 11:13 06/02/11 08:32 AWS FDOH Laboratory No.E84129 Francis I. Daniels, Laboratory Director NELAP Accredited Leslie C. Boardman, Q.A. Manager Page 1 of 4 SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC. 1 1 D BAYVI W BOL LE VA=?D, OLDSMAR, FL 34877 8' 3 -85S -1 844 FAX 81 3-955-2219 City of Clearwater Public Utilities 1605 Harbor Drive Clearwater, FL 33755 * Qualifiers, Notes and Definitions June 6, 2011 Work Order: 1104350 Results followed by a "U" indicate that the sample was analyzed but the compound was not detected. Results followed by "I" indicate that the reported value is between the laboratory method detection limts and the laboratory practical quantitation limit. A statement of estimated uncertainty of test results is available upon request. For methods marked with ", all QC criteria have been met for this method which is equivalent to a SAL certified method. Test results in this report meet all the requirements of the NELAC standards. Any applicable qualifiers are shown below. Questions regarding this report should be directed to Client Services at 813 - 855 -1844. FDOH Laboratory No.E84129 Francis I. Daniels, Laboratory Director NELAP Accredited Leslie C. Boardman, Q.A. Manager Page 2 of 4 silig 1111111 — — — — NM 1 M M 1 — — ! M r all SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC. 110 BAWIEW BOULEVARD, OLDSMAR, FL 34677 813-855-1844 fax B13-855-2218 SAL. Project No. J) U'! 35D Client Name City of Clearwater Public Utilities Contact / Phone: Tara Kivett 727 - 224 -7520 Project Name / Location undwater Discharge to Surface Samplers: (Signature) C. Matrix Codes: DW- Drinking Water WW- Wastewater SW- SurfaceWater SL- Sludge SO -Soil GW- Groundwater SA- Saline Water O -Other R- Reagent Water it o co IE x m 'Composite a 1LaG, Cool 610IFID- napthalene 40m1 V, HCI 602- benzene 40m1 V, HCL TOC 250m1 P, HNO3 Cd, Cu- 200.8, Pb -200.8 Zn, Cr 250 ml aG, Cool Hg -1631 �O 'xaH 1000 'di!. a 3 E a lo. of Containers (Total 3er each location) SAL us. Only snnpN Nn. Sample Description 01 Northeast Plant Well- 0574 // /Or? GW X 2 2 2 1 1 1 _ 1 02 Flekl Blank ‘41/ 615 R X 1 03 Trip Blank .5.77/ /DOG' R X 1 Containers Prepared/ DateMmeAri rr ,,I "(J OS-.H - / / Re Date/Time: aid ^`C 0.5 Zs 1 1 �I h�� y N �'1 Sanples Intact upon arrival? N N/A/ lWA Received ice Ten Y N WA Instructions / Remarks 62 -621- It: roundwater discharging to 9 g 9 fresh or saline surface water? Hexavalent Chromium has 24 -hr holding 1104350 Relinquished: Relinquished: Date/Time: // O`. �/ 5' R Date/Time: Roper preservatives indicated? N N/A Recd w Rhin holding tine? Y N WA time. V olatiles recd w /out heads pact y Roper containers used? N N/A Reim' Date/Time: Received: Date/Tse: Relinquished: Date/Time: Received: Date/Time: Relinquished: Date/Time. Received: Date/Time: mean.* Rnv.D.1e 1111601 Chain of Custody SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC. 110 BAWIEW BOULEVARD, OLDSMAR, FL 34677 B13- 855-1844 fax 813-B55-221 B Sampling Log Date: O.SZ 6 ( Client Name: City of Clearwater Public Utilities Site Location: Northeast Plant Client Contact Phone: Outfall Description: (1}E V OM' (PA \ �7 Sample ID: l /�?J5O . 0 1 GPS Long. Coordinates: Lat. Sampling Data Sampled By/ Southem Analytical Laboratories Sampler �Affiliation: Signature: Sampling Device: SAL -SAM- Sampling 6 Initiated At: 10 6 Z- Readings: Meter IDs: pH (D. SAL- SAM-63 0 4 Specific Conductance (umhos) -7V-4 Temperature CC) ZZ . ( Dissolved Oxygen (mgIL) 8.q i SAL - SAM -55 • SAL - SAM -55 O Turbidity (NTU) q , 54 SAL-SAM- ID Z Sample Appearance GAP,f..r Sample Odor NO Lt., Field Decontamination: Cb N Field Filtered: Y 0 (Duplicate: Y d' Preservation Checked In the field? 1�N NA Initials: 5 R- Date: 0576 1) Site and Weather Conditions DTV LA-) ,t, . S3 `TD t7. q O 7` w4-1\ 1 03 1 we.t1 vo 1. 0.25 1/'4 wt 11 v01. eurG S 4er4- !OLIO Comments (use back of form if necessary) 4, me, Tu, �1n (ouS 1.25 1,-LS 0.1 4.3 104g 0.7S Z.00 (�.3 dos\ 0.75 Z•7S �.3 surlaceweter sampling log aneet xls Rev.Dete 05/20/09 CON 781 75,E 7 %3 Page 4 of 4 old \+ rL 0-7Z. 0.46 o,q3 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC. 1 1 0 E YVIEW BOILLE VA4D, 0L.._DSR,1AR, FL :34677 81 3-855-1844 FAX 81a855-2218 City of Clearwater Public Utilities 1605 Harbor Drive Clearwater, FL 33755 Laboratory Report August 2, 2011 Work Order: 1106215 Revised Report Project Name Groundwater Discharge Permit Parameters Units Results * Method PQL MDL Prepared Analyzed By Sample Description Matrix SAL Sample Number Date/Time Collected Collected by Date/Time Received Northeast Plant Well Groundwater 1106215 -01 07/18111 15:16 Sean Harmon 07118111 15:30 Field Parameters pH SU 6.4 DEP FT1100 0.1 0.1 07/18/11 15:16 SDH Water Temperature °C 29.6 DEP FT1400 0.1 0.1 07/18/11 15:16 SDH Specific conductance umhos /cm 879 DEP FT1200 0.1 0.1 07/18/11 15:16 SDH Pesticide Analyses 1,2- Dibromoethane ug /L 0.0054 U EPA 504.1 0.022 0.0054 07/20/11 15:00 07/21/11 12:24 BTJ Polynuclear Aromatic Hydrocarbons Acenaphthene ug /L 0.057 U EPA 610 1.1 0.057 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Acenaphthylene ug /L 0.54 U EPA 610 1.1 0.54 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Anthracene ug /L 0.020 U EPA 610 0.11 0.020 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Benzo(a)anthracene ug /L 0.023 U EPA 610 0.11 0.023 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Benzo(a)pyrene ug /L 0.0023 U EPA 610 0.011 0.0023 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20 :35 JKS Benzo(b)fluoranthene ug /L 0.087 U EPA 610 0.11 0.087 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Benzo(g,h,i)perylene ug /L 0.0057 U EPA 610 0.011 0.0057 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Benzo(k)fluoranthene ug /L 0.017 U EPA 610 0.11 0.017 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Chrysene ug /L 0.029 U EPA 610 0.11 0.029 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Dibenzo(a,h)anthracene ug /L 0.0053 U EPA 610 0.011 0.0053 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Fluoranthene ug /L 0.023 U EPA 610 0.11 0.023 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Fluorene ug /L 0.074 U EPA 610 0.22 0.074 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Indeno(1,2,3- cd)pyrene ug /L 0.024 U EPA 610 0.11 0.024 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS 1- Methylnaphthalene ug /L 0.11 U EPA 610" 1.1 0.11 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS 2- Methylnaphthalene ug /L 0.11 U EPA 610 ** 1.1 0.11 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Naphthalene ug /L 0.24 U EPA 610 1.1 0.24 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Phenanthrene ug /L 0.025 U EPA 610 0.11 0.025 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Pyrene ug /L 0.024 U EPA 610 0.11 0.024 07/20/11 12:23 07/27/11 20:35 JKS Semivolatile Analyses Total Petroleum Hydrocarbons mg /L 0.037 U FL -PRO 0.092 0.037 07/19/11 12:20 07/22/11 00:42 JRW FDOH Laboratory No.E84129 Francis I. Daniels, Laboratory Director NELAP Accredited Leslie C. Boardman, Q.A. Manager Page 1 of 3 SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC. 110 GAYVIEW BOULEVARD, OLDSMAR, FL 34877 813-855-1B44 FAX B13-255-2218 City of Clearwater Public Utilities 1605 Harbor Drive Clearwater, FL 33755 * Qualifiers, Notes and Definitions August 2, 2011 Work Order: 1106215 Revised Report Results followed by a "U" indicate that the sample was analyzed but the compound was not detected. Results followed by "1" indicate that the reported value is between the laboratory method detection Iimts and the laboratory practical quantitation limit. A statement of estimated uncertainty of test results is available upon request. For methods marked with * *, all QC criteria have been met for this method which is equivalent to a SAL certified method. Test results in this report meet all the requirements of the NELAC standards. Any applicable qualifiers are shown below. Questions regarding this report should be directed to Client Services at 813 - 855 -1844. FDOH Laboratory No.E84129 Francis II. Daniels, Laboratory Director NELAP Accredited Lesliie C. Boardman, Q.A. Manager Page 2 of 3 = OM 1111111 M N MI I W1111 I MN NM all all NM MI M • SOUTHERN ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES, INC. 1 10 BAYVIEW BOULEVARD, OLDSMAR. FL 34677 01 a-855-1844 fax 91:3-F355-221B Client Name SAL Project No. o(zr City of Clearwater Public Utilities Project Name / Location contact / Phone: -- ,./ Groundwater Discharge to Surface Samplers: C (Signature) -t Matrix Codes: DW- Drinking Water WW- Wastewater SW- SurfaceWater SL- Sludge SO -Soil W- Groundwater SA- Saline Water O -Other R- Reagent Water .o c" U C7 c a a o c U 0 C7 ° .-- crJ 0 d S u (7 = _0 r F- °o p U w of °0 o o '--+ Q_ ..—� f a) E F- x m Y v — n o i 0 0 .m •o .o = 0 U aj Z o. SAL Use Only Sample Na Sample Description p 01 Northeast Plant Well °71211 /5/L GW X 2 2 3 (D r L` 2q' (e S-79 y ct 0.3e4 )4, ? Containers Pre•ar Relinquished: @ ` nq , -1- ` i1 ` Date/Time: 1(,C i . 15 Date/Time C�/ C O ; / Date/Time: Seal intact? Y N A Samples intact upon arrival? Y /WA 1 Received on ice? Temp Y WA Instructions !Remarks Relin. ed: Date/rime. /S3` /� 7/S % / erred: 62 -621- Is groundwater discharging to fresh or saline surface water? 1106215 '� Proper preservatives indicated? . N/A Rec'd w ithin holding time? Y ) N/A timer- Volatiles rec'd w /out headspacr Y N Proper containers used? Y NA R gush -' Date/Time: Received: Date /Time: Relinquished: Date/Time: Received: Date/Time: Relinquished: Chain cusioay.ua Date/Time: Received: Date/Time d Chain of Custody ASBESTOS REPORT Not applicable to this project Appendix Updated.docx 7/15/2014 SECTION V CONTRACT DOCUMENTS Table of Contents: CONTRACT BOND 1 CONTRACT 3 CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT FOR FINAL PAYMENT 7 PROPOSAL BOND 8 AFFIDAVIT 9 NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT 10 PROPOSAL 11 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET 14 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL 15 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM 16 SectionV - for -sig. docx Pagei 9/12/2014 1 1 1 t AR °® CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE DATE /2015 /YYYY) 01/22/2015 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endorsed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder in lieu of such endorsement(s). PRODUCER MARSH USA, INC. 501 MERRITT 7 NORWALK, CT 06856 Attn: Emcor.Certrequest @marsh.com / Fax: 203 - 229 -6787 504917 -POO- TAM -14 -15 15703 CONTACT NAME: INC No. Ext): (A/C, Not: EMAIL ADDRESS: INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURER A : Continental Casualty Company 20443 INSURED POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA 1715 LEMON ST. TAMPA, FL 33606 INSURER B : American Casualty Company Of Reading, Pa 20427 INSURER C : Transportation Insurance Co 20494 INSURER D : $ 2,000,000 INSURER E : $ 1,000,000 INSURER F : COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: NYC - 007001841 -01 REVISION NUMBER:1 THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT TO WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN, THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS, EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE ADDL JNSR_ SUBR WVn POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFF IMM /DD/YYYY) POLICY EXP IMMIDD/YYYYI LIMITS A GENERAL X LIABILITY COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY GL 4025755651 10/01/2014 10/01/2015 EACH OCCURRENCE $ 2,000,000 DAMAGE TO RENTED PREMISES (Ea occurrence) $ 1,000,000 CLAIMS -MADE X OCCUR MED EXP (Any one person) $ 25,000 PERSONAL 8 ADV INJURY $ 2,000,000 GENERAL AGGREGATE $ 6,000,000 PRODUCTS - COMP /OP AGG $ 14,000,000 GEN'L AGGREGATE —1 POLICY X LIMIT APPLIES JECT PER: LOC $ A AUTOMOBILE X X LIABILITY ANY AUTO ALL OWNED AUTOS HIRED AUTOS X SCHEDULED AUTOS NON-OWNED AUTOS BUA 4025755696 10/01/2014 10/01/2015 COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT (Ea accident) 2,000,000 _$ $ BODILY INJURY (Per person) BODILY INJURY (Per accident) $ PROPERTY DAMAGE (Per accident) $ Auto Physical Damage $ Included UMBRELLA LIAB EXCESS LIAB OCCUR CLAIMS -MADE EACH OCCURRENCE $ AGGREGATE $ $ DED RETENTION $ B B COFFICER WORKERS COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYERS' LIABILITY ANY PROPRIETOR /PARTNER /EXECUTIVE /MEMBER EXCLUDED? (Mandatory In NH) If yes, describe under DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS below YIN N N / A WC 4025755584 (AOS) ' WC 4025755598 (CA) WC 4025755570 (AZ, OR, WI) ( ) 10/01/2014 10/01/2014 10/01/2014 10/01/2015 10/01/2015 10/01/2015 X WC STATU- TORY LIMITS OTH- ER E.L. EACH ACCIDENT $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - EA EMPLOYEE $ 1,000,000 E.L. DISEASE - POLICY LIMIT 1,000,000 $ DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS / VEHICLES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space Is required) RE: 15703 - NORTHEAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHAB, CONTRACT #12- 0025 -UT ADDITIONAL INSURED UNDER ALL POLICIES (EXCEPT WORKERS COMPENSATION & EMPLOYERS LIABILITY) WHERE REQUIRED BY CONTRACT: OWNER OF CLEARWATER AND ANY OTHER PERSONS OR ENTITIES IDENTIFIED IN THE SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS, THE RESPECTIVE OFFICERS AND EMPLOYEES OF ALL SUCH CONTRACTUAL LIABILITY COVERAGE IS INCLUDED. THE GENERAL LIABILITY POLICY HAS NO XCU EXCLUSION. CANCELLATION CITY OF CLEARWATER 100 S. MYRTLE AVENUE SUITE 220 CLEARWATER, FL 33756 I SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE of Marsh USA Inc. Heidi Bauermeister ...-5 teye., ACORD 25 (2010/05) © 1988-2010 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 1 I 1 1 1 1 AGENCY CUSTOMER ID: 504917 LOC #: Norwalk ADDITIONAL REMARKS SCHEDULE Page 2 of 2 AGENCY MARSH USA, INC. NAMED INSURED POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA 1715 LEMON ST. TAMPA, FL 33606 POLICY NUMBER CARRIER - __ _ _ -- — NAIC CODE EFFECTIVE DATE: THIS ADDITIONAL REMARKS FORM IS A SCHEDULE TO ACORD FORM, FORM NUMBER: 25 FORM TITLE: Certificate of Liability Insurance Auto Physical Damage Comp I Coll Deductible $500 In the event of cancellation or material change that reduces or restricts the insurance afforded by this Coverage Part (other than the reduction of aggregate limits through payment of claims as applicable), Insurer agrees to mail prior written notice of cancellation or material change to: Certificate Holder Schedule 1. Number of days advance notice: For any statutorily permitted reason other than non - payment of premium, the number of days required for notice of cancellation as provided in paragraph 2 of either the Cancellation Common Policy Conditions or as amended by the applicable state cancellation endorsement is increased to the lesser of 60 days or the number of days required in a written contract. For non - payment of premium, The greater of (1) the number of days required by state law or (2) the number of days required by written contract. 2. Name: Notice will be mailed to: Certificate holder ACORD 101 (2008/01) © 2008 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 1 1 1 ACORD CERTIFICATE OF PROPERTY INSURANCE DATE (MM /DD/YYYY) 1/22/2015 THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER(S), AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. If this certificate is being prepared for a party who has an insurable interest in the property, do not use this form. Use ACORD 27 or ACORD 28. PRODUCER Arthur J Gallagher Risk Management Services, Inc. 2 Westchester Park Dr 3rd Fl White Plains NY 10604 CONTACT NAME: Michael Greene PHONE FAX (A/C No Ext):914- 697 -6064 I (A/C,No):914- 323 -4564 E-MAIL michael ADDRESS: _greene @aj g . com PRODUCER CUSTOMER ID: 3608 INSURER(S) AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC # INSURED Poole & Kent Company of Florida 1715 W. Lemon Street Tampa, FL 33602 INSURER A:Lexington Insurance Company 19437 INSURER B : INSURER C : INSURER D : INSURER E INSURER F : COVERAGES CERTIFICATE NUMBER: • LOCATION OF PREMISES / DESCRIPTION OF PROPERTY (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, If mom space is required) . SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. INSR LTR TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER POLICY EFFECTIVE DATE(MM /DD/YYYY) POLICY EXPIRATION DATE(MM /DD/YYYY) COVERED PROPERTY LIMITS A X IPROPERTY OF LOSS DEDUCTIBLES 25031750 10/1/2014 10/1/2015 BUILDING PERSONAL PROPERTY BUSINESS INCOME EXTRA EXPENSE RENTAL VALUE BLANKET BUILDING BLANKET PERS PROP BLANKET BLDG & PP Per Value below $ CAUSES $ BASIC BUILDING $ BROAD $ CONTENTS SPECIAL EARTHQUAKE $ WIND $ FLOOD $ X All Risk X $See_below CAUSES INLAND MARINE OF LOSS NAMED PERILS TYPE OF POLICY $ $ POLICY NUMBER $ TYPE CRIME OF POLICY $ $ BOILER & MACHINERY I EQUIPMENT BREAKDOWN $ A BuildersRisk /Installatio (All Risk) 25031750 10/1/2014 10/1/2015 X Per value below $see below $ SPECIAL CONDITIONS / OTHER COVERAGES (Attach ACORD 101, Additional Remarks Schedule, if more space Is required) City of Clearwater is included as Loss Payee and /or Additional Insured as their interest may appear in respects to Job #: 15703 - Northeast Water Reclamation Facility Clarifiers 5 -8, Rehab, Contract #12- 0025 -UT with a total contract value of $1,680,000. CERTIFICATE HOLDER City of Clearwater 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Suite 220 Clearwater FL 33756 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE WILL BE DELIVERED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS. AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE ACORD 24 (2009/09) 1995 -2009 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved. The ACORD name and logo are registered marks of ACORD 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 106215134 (TR) Bond No.:82389067 (FE) PUBLIC CONSTRUCTION BOND (Front Page) This bond is given to comply with § 255.05, Florida Statutes, and any action instituted by a claimant under this bond for payment must be in accordance with the notice and time limitation provisions in subsections (2) and (10). Pursuant to § 255.05(1)(b), Florida Statutes, `Before commencing the work or before recommencing the work after a default or abandonment, the contractor shall provide to the public entity a certified couv of the recorded bond. Notwithstanding the terms of the contract or any other law governing prompt payment for construction services, the public entity may not make a payment to the contractor until the contractor has complied with this paragraph." CONTRACTOR Poole & Kent Company of Florida 1715 W. Lemon St. Tampa, FL 33606 (813) 251 -2438 SURETY Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America One Tower Square, Hartford, CT 06183 732- 321 -5600 Federal Insurance Company 15 Mountain View Road, Warren, NJ 07059 908-903-7908 OWNER City of Clearwater Engineering Department 100 S. Myrtle Avenue Clearwater, FL 33756 (727) 562-4630 PROJECT NAME: NORTHEAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY (WRF) CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION PROJECT NO.: 12- 0025 -UT PROJECT DESCRIPTION: the rehabilitation of four existing circular clarifiers (5-8) at the Northeast Water Reclamation Facility, including miscellaneous improvements to clarifiers 1-4 and to the South and North RAS pump houses, address is 3290 S.R. 580, Safety Harbor, Florida, 34695. FRONT PAGE All other Bond page(s) are deemed subsequent to this page regardless of any page number(s) that may be pre- printed thereon. 106215134 (TR) BOND NUMBER: 82389067 (FE) CONTRACT BOND (1) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Miami —Dade KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA as Contractor and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America & Federal Insurance Company (Surety) whose home address is One Tower Square, Hartford, CT 06183 (TR), & 15 Mountain View Road, Warren, NJ 07059 (FE) HEREINAFTER CALLED THE "Surety ", are held and firmly bound into the City of Clearwater, Florida (hereinafter called the "Owner ") in the penal sum of: ONE MILLION, SIX HUNDRED EIGHTY THOUSAND Dollars ($1,680,000) for the payment of which we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors, and assigns for the faithful performance of a certain written contract, dated the day of , 20 entered into between the Contractor and the City of Clearwater for: NORTHEAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY (WRF) CLARIFIERS 5-8 REHABILITATION YROiECT #12-0825-UT a copy of which said contract is incorporated herein by reference and is made a part hereof as if fully copied herein. NOW THEREFORE, THE CONDITIONS OF THIS OBLIGATION ARE SUCH, that if the Contractor shall in all respects comply with the terms and conditions of said contract, including the one year guarantee of material and labor, and his obligations thereunder, including the contract documents (which include the Advertisement for Bids, Form of Proposal, Form of Contract, Form of Surety Bond, Instructions to Bidders, General Conditions and Technical Specifications) and the Plans and Specifications therein referred to and made a part thereof and such alterations as may be made in said Plans and Specifications as therein provided for, and shall indemnify and save harmless the said Owner against and from all costs, expenses, damages, injury or conduct, want of care or skill, negligence or default, including patent infringements on the part of the said Contractor agents or employees, in the execution or performance of said contract, including errors in the plans furnished by the Contractor, and further, if such "Contractor" or "Contractors" shall promptly make payments to all persons supplying him, them or it, labor, material, and supplies used directly or indirectly by said Contractor, Contractors, Sub-Contractor, or Sub - Contractors, in the prosecution of the work provided for in said Contract, this obligation shall be void, otherwise, the Contractor and Surety jointly and severally agree to pay to the Owner any difference between the sum to which the said Contractor would be entitled on the completion of the Contract, and that which the Owner may be obliged to pay for the completion of said work by contract or otherwise, & any damages, direct or indirect, or consequential, which said Owner may sustain on account of such work, or on account of the failure of the said Contractor to properly and in all things, keep and execute all the provisions of said contract. SectionV- for - sig.docx 1 Page 1 of 16 9/12/2014 CONTRACT BOND (2) And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, that they will amply and fully protect the said Owner against, and will pay any and all amounts, damages, costs and judgments which may be recovered against or which the Owner may be called upon to pay to any person or corporation by reason of any damages arising from the performance of said work, or of the repair or maintenance thereof, or the manner of doing the same or the neglect of the said Contractor or his agents or servants or the improper performance of the said work by the Contractor or his agents or servants, or the infringements of any patent rights by reason of the use of any material furnished or work done; as aforesaid, or otherwise. And the said Contractor and Surety hereby further bind themselves, their successors, heirs, executors, administrators, and assigns, jointly and severally, to repay the owner any sum which the Owner may be compelled to pay because of any lien for labor material furnished for the work, embraced by said Contract. And the said Surety, for the value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the teens of the contract or to the work to be performed thereunder or the specifications accompanying the same shall in any way affect its obligations on this bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the contract or to the work or to the specifications. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, witness the hands and seals of the parties hereto this 29th of January , 2015 . ATTEST: Print ame: iavid A. Strickland, WITNESS: SVP & Asst. Secretary Print N �Neily Renchiwich COUNTERSIGNED: NA Print Name: NA SectionV- for- sig.docx Page 2 of 16 POOLE & KENT COMPANY' OF FLORIDA 1715 W. Lemon Street, Tampa, FL $3 ,) By: w PrintName: Patrick H. Carr' Title: President & CEO Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America & Federal Insurance Company SURE . Y By: ATTO '1 EY- -FACT Print Name: Rita Saaistano Non Resident License #P026098 TRAVELERS) Attorney -In Fact No. 227925 WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Certificate No. 0 0 6 0 4 8 1 3 0 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Farmington Casualty Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies "), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Thomas Bean, Rita Sagistano, Gerard S. Macholz, Susan Lupski, Robert T. Pearson, Camille Maitland, George O. Brewster, Colette R. Chisholm, Virginia M. Lovett, Vincent A. Walsh, Lee Ferrucci, Desiree Cardlin, and Nelly Renchiwich of the City of Uniondale , State of New York , their true and lawful Attorney(s) -in -Fact, each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. 4th IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Co ies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this day of September 201a State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company By: Robert L. Raney, enior Vice President 4th September 2014 On this the day of , before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2016. 58440 -8 -12 Printed in U.S.A. V\.04Ailt C • V Marie C. Tetreault, Notary Public WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER This Power of Attorney is granted under and by the authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Boards of Directors of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, which resolutions are now in full force and effect, reading as follows: RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary may appoint Attorneys -in -Fact and Agents to act for and on behalf of the Company and may give such appointee such authority as his or her certificate of authority may prescribe to sign with the Company's name and seal with the Company's seal bonds, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, and other writings obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking, and any of said officers or the Board of Directors at any time may remove any such appointee and revoke the power given him or her; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the Chairman, the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President may delegate all or any part of the foregoing authority to one or more officers or employees of this Company, provided that each such delegation is in writing and a copy thereof is filed in the office of the Secretary;'and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that any bond, recognizance, contract of indemnity, or writing obligatory in the nature of a bond, recognizance, or conditional undertaking shall be valid and binding upon the Company when (a) signed by the President, any Vice Chairman, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President or any Vice President, any Second Vice President, the Treasurer, any Assistant Treasurer, the Corporate Secretary or any Assistant Secretary and duly attested and sealed with the Company's seal by a Secretary or Assistant Secretary; or (b) duly executed (under seal, if required) by one or more Attorneys -in -Fact arid Agents pursuant to the power prescribed in his or her certificate or their certificates of authority or by one or more Company officers pursuant to a written delegation of authority; and it is FURTHER RESOLVED, that the signature of each of the following officers: President, any Executive Vice President, any Senior Vice President, any Vice President, any Assistant Vice President, any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary, and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any Power of Attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Resident Vice Presidents, Resident Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys -in -Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such Power of Attorney or certificate bearing such facsimile signature or facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding on the Company in the future with respect to any bond or understanding to which it is attached. I, Kevin E. Hughes, the undersigned, Assistant Secretary, of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company do hereby certify that the above and foregoing is a true and correct copy of the Power of Attorney executed by said Companies, which is in full force and effect and has not been revoked. IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand and affixed the seals of said Companies this 29th day of January Kevin E. Hughes, Assistant. Sec tary ,2015 To verify the authenticity of this Power of Attorney, call 1- 800 - 421 -3880 or contact us at www.travelersbond.com. Please refer to the Attorney -In -Fact number, the above -named individuals and the details of the bond to which the power is attached. WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER Florida State oIiN6#Ydlk, County of Miami —Dade 1st TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA HARTFORD, CT. 06183 AT I3 NEY ] N -FACT JUSTIFICATION PRINCIPAL'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT—IF A CORPORATION On this 2nd day of February 20 February ,before mepersonallyappeu�d Patrick H to are known, who being by mo duly swum, deposes and says: That he/she resides in the City er111ami Poole thathe/slltelathc President & CEO of corporation described in and which executed the within instrument; that he/she knows the seal of said corporation; that ti seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that he /she signed hislhcr name that rr t Company of Florida said inst anent s ' .oraie PRINCIPAL'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT —IF INDIVIDUAL OR FIRS Slate ofNew York, County of } ss. On this day of , 20 , before me personalty appeared to me known to be (the individual) (one oldie firm of ) described in and who executed the within instrument, and he /she thereupon duly acknowledged to me that he/she executed the same (as the act and deed of said firm). Slate of New York, County of Nassau SURETY COMPANY'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT' } n- On this 29th day of January 2015 before me personally "�e��Qppeearca Rita Sagistano to me known, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: That he/be resides in lliiC 16K Nassau County, NY that he/she Is Attorney -in -Fact of TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA, the corporation described In and which executed the within instrument; that he /she knows the corporate seal of said Company; that the seal affixed to said Instrument is such corporate seal; and that heake signed said instrument as Attomepin -Fad by authority of the Board of Directors of said Company; and affiant did fhrther depose and say that the Superintendent d Insurance of the State of New Yolk tau, pursuant to Chapter 882 of the Laws of the State of New York for the year 1939, constituting chapter 28 of the Consolidating Laws of the State of New York as the Insurance Law as amended, issued to TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA his/her certificate that said Company is qualified to become and be accepted as surety or guarantor on all bonds, undertakings, reoognizances, guarmties, and other obligations required or permitted by law; and that such certificate has aot been revoked. TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA Hartford, Connecticut 06183 FINANCIAL STATEMENT AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2013 AS FILED WITH THE INSURANCE DEPT. OF THE STATE OF NEW YORK CAPITAL STOCK $ 8,480,000 Notary Public CAMILLE MAITLAND Notary Public, State of New Yolk No. 011%6006044 Ouahfied in Kings County Commission Expires April 20, 20t0 ASSETS LIABILITIES CASH AND INVESTED CASH BONDS IM1E8TMENT INCOME DUE AND ACCRUED OTHER *NESTED ASSETS PREMIUM BALANCES NET DEFERRED TAX ASSET REINSURANCE RECOVERABLE SECURITIES LENDING RENVESTED COLLATERAL ASSETS RE ENABLES FROM PARENT, SUBSIDIARIES ANC AFFILIATES STATE SURCHARGES RECEIVABLE OTHER ASSETS TOTAL ASSETS $ 87,799,824 3,452,214,896 47,708,602 285,009,610 100,838,482 81,676,098 11881.414 4,010,772 30,772,481 268.771 14.872,822 $ 4,147 ,480.454 UNEARNED PREMIUMS LOSSES LOSS ADJUSTMENT EXPENSES CORROSIONS TAXES. LICENSES AND FEES OTHER EXPENSES FUNDS HELD UNDER REINSURANCE TREATIES CURRENT FEDERAL AND FOREIGN INCOME TAXES REMITTANCES AND ITEMS NOT ALLOCATED AMOUNTS WITHHELD 1 RETAINED BY COMPANY FOR OTHERS RETROACTIVE RENSURANCE RESERVE ASSUMED POLICYHOLDER DMDENDS PROVISION FOR REINSURANCE ADVANCE PREMIUM PAYABLE FOR SECURITIES LENDING DERIVATIVES CEDED REINSURANCE IET PREMIUMS PAYABLE ESCHEAT LVIBILire OTHER ACCRUE* EXPENSES AND LIABILITIES TOTAL LIABkmES CAPITAL STOCK PAID N SURPLUS OTHER SURPLUS TOTAL SURPLUS TO POL$CYHOLDE,RS TOTAL LIABILITIES &SURPLUS Securities carded at $8,174,873 In the above statement are deposited wNh publics authorities, as required by law. 5 808,717,871 809,883,178 480,810.453 31,781,138 12,482,322 38,437,893 84,401,484 18,387,407 13,677,603 23,816,367 1,611.874 8,482,613 3,910,484 1,078,809 4,910.772 112,003 184,984,284) 471,948 242,238 $ 2.05.740 467 5 8,480,000 433,803,780 1,441,438.327 $ 1,861,720.088 $ 4.147,40,46£ ICChubb Surety OMUNIS POWER Federal Insurance Company Attn: Surety Department OF Vigilant Insurance Company 15 Mountain View Road ATTORNEY Padfic Indemnity Company Warren, NJ 07059 Know All by These Presents, That FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, an Indiana corporation, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, a New York rrppoorr , and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY a Wisconsin corporation, do each hereby constitute and appoint Thomas Bean, George O. Brewster, Colette R. Chisholm Susan Lupski, Gerard S. Macholz, Camille Maitland, Robert T. Pearson and Rita Saglatano of Uniondale, New Fork — each as their true and lawful Attorney- in- Fad to execute under such designation in their names and to affix their corporate seals to and deliver for and on their behalf as surety thereon or otherwise, bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory In the nature thereof (other than ball bonds) given or executed in the course of business, end any instruments amending or altering the same, and consents to the modification or alteration of any instrument referred to In said bonds or obligations. In t+Ylbress Whereof, sold FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPWY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY have each executed these presents and affixed their corporate sees on this 24 day of September, 2014. Dawn M. Chloros, Assistant Secretary STATE OF NEW JERSEY County of Somerset On this 24th day of September, 2014 before me, a Notary Pubic or New Jersey, personally carne Dawn M. Chloros, to me known to be Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY, the companies which executed the foregoing Power of Attorney, and the said Dawn M. Chloros, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say that she I Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY and knows the corporate seals thereof, that the seals affixed to the foregoing Power of Attorney am such corporate seals and were thereto affixed by authority of Ale By- Laws of said Companies; and that she signed said Power of Attorney as Assistant Secretary of said Companies : byMus oidholity; :end that Ihrris:acqusintedvAllt:DaVid ' Nonis...:Jr„endriorowthinito be '•viotPresident #• Nato: Companes;< ardthatthaalpnalura :ofDavid:8:°Narris,Jr., subscribed to said Power of Attorney is in the genuine handwriing of David B. Norris, Jr., and was thereto subscribed by authority of said By- Laws and in deponent's presence. Notarial Seal TAiji 'ate PUBLIC Exact from the By- Laws of KATHERINE .). ADELAAR NOTARY PUBLIC OF JERSEY No. 2318885 Commission Expires July 16, 2019 CERTIFICATION INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY: All powers of attorney for and on behalf of the Company may and shall be executed In the name and on behalf of the Company, either by the Chairman or the President or a Vice President or an Assistant vice President, J061tly with the Secretary or an Assistant Secretary, under their respective designations. The signature of such officers may be engraved, printed or lrlhographed. The signature of each of the following offers. Ch airman, President, any Vice President, any Assistant MMoe President any Secretary, any Assistant Secretary and the seal of the Company may be affixed by facsimile to any power of attorney or to any certificate relating thereto appointing Assistant Secretaries or Attorneys- in- Fact for purposes only of executing and attesting bonds and undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof, and any such power of attorney or certificate bearing such tacsimie signature or facsimile seat shall be valid and binding upon the Company and any such power so executed and certified by such facsimile signature and facsimile seal shall be valid and binding upon the Company with respect to any bond or undertaking to which I Is attached' f Dawn M. Chimes, Assistant Secretary of FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY, VIGILANT INSURANCE COMPANY, and PACIFIC INDEMNITY COMPANY (the 'Companies') do hereby certify that (p the foregoing extract of the By- Laws cite Companies is true and correct. (0) the Companies are duly licensed and *authorized to tensed surety business In all 50 of the United States of America and the District of Columbia and are authorized by the U.S. Treasury Department; further, Federal and Vigilant we licensed in the U.S. Virgin islands, and Federal is licensed in Ameftoan Samoa, Guam, Puerto Rico, and each of the Provinces of Canada except Prince Edward island; and (id) the foregoing Power of Attorney is etre, correct and In MI force and effect. Given under my hand and seals of said Companies at Warren, NJ this 29th day of January, 2015 daTn. Dawn M. Chloros, Assistant Secretary IN THE EVENT YOU WISH TO NOTIFY US OF A CLAM, VERIFY THE AUTHENTICITY OF THIS 5050 OR NOTIFY US OF ANY OTHER MATTER. PLEASE CONTACT US AT ADDRESS LISTED MOVE. OR BY Telephone (900) 909- 3493 Fax (905) 803- MG a-ma: arch, cIsrbb0ern Fpm 15.10- 02258- U OEN CONSENT Soy. e2 -14) ACKNOWLEDGMENT OF SURETY COMPANY STATE OF .......... COUNTY OF ... J ........ f la On this January 29, 2015, before me y Caine „Rita Sagistano,...a..•••••6,0•404.1.0,10.41M.• to me known, who, being by me duly awom, did depose and say; that he/she resides in Nassau County. ty. ..................... . State of .. NY , that he/she Is the Attorney-In-Fact of the Federal Insurance Company . ...... the corporation destrbed In which executed the above instrument that he/she knows *the seal of said corporation; that the seal attticed to said Nutriment is such corporate seat; that is was so afThoed by the Board of Directors of said caporallan; end that he/she signed hislhsr name thereto by Mar order; and the 'Mint dkl further. depose and say that the Suped ntendent of Insurance of the State of New York. has, pursuant to Section 1111 of the insurance Law of the Stns of New York, Issued to Federal Insurance company (Suety) h.ait sr cerMioate of lair of the State of New York as /tor, the propriety aacoepling and � ft under such; and that such has not been revoked. Notary Public CAMILLE MAITLAND Notary Public, State of New Yak Na • 01. 6044 Qualified in Kings County Commission Expires Apra 20,2018 r 1 1 1 1 1 Form 15- 10 -0313A (Rev. 3/14) FEDERAL INSURANCE COMPANY STATEMENT OF ASSETS, LIABILITIES AND SURPLUS TO POLICYHOLDERS Statutory Basis DECEMBER 31, 2013 (in thousands of dollars) LIABILITIES AND ASSETS SURPLUS TO POLICYHOLDERS Cash and Short Term Investments $ 352,393 Outstanding Losses and Loss Expenses $ 12,129,450 United States Government, State and Unearned Premiums 3,504,583 Municipal Bonds 9,295,185 Ceded Reinsurance Premiums Payable 338,026 Other Bonds 5,535,360 Provision for Reinsurance 61,351 Stocks 1,000,938 Other Liabilities 986,628 Other Invested Assets 1,452,598 TOTAL INVESTMENTS 17,636,474 TOTAL LIABILITIES 17,020,038 Investments in Affiliates: Chubb Investment Holdings, Inc. 3,364,996 Capital Stock 20,980 Pacific Indemnity Company 2,771,422 Paid -In Surplus 3,106,809 Executive Risk Indemnity Inc 1,218,625 Unassigned Funds 11,613,523 Chubb Insurance Investment Holdings Ltd.... 1,111,941 CC Canada Holdings Ltd 629,592 Great Northern Insurance Company 478,838 SURPLUS TO POLICYHOLDERS 14,741,312 Chubb Insurance Company of Australia Ltd. 449,419 Chubb European Investment Holdings SLP .. 281,312 Vigilant Insurance Company 264,883 Other Affiliates 472,259 Premiums Receivable 1,586,676 Other Assets 1,494,913 TOTAL LIABILITIES AND SURPLUS TOTAL ADMITTED ASSETS $ 31,761,350 TO POLICYHOLDERS $ 31,761,350 Investments are valued in accordance with requirements of the National Association of Insurance Commissioners. At December 31, 2013, investments with a carrying value of $452,687,680 were deposited with government authorities as required by law. State, County & City of New York, — ss: Yvonne Baker, Assistant Secretary of the Federal Insurance Company being duly sworn, deposes and says that the foregoing Statement of Assets, Liabilities and Surplus to Policyholders of said Federal Insurance Company on December 31, 2013 is true and correct and is a true abstract of the Annual Statement of said Company as filed with the Secretary of the Treasury of the United States for the 12 months ending December 31, 2013. Subscribed and sworn to before me this March 11, 2014. k e w, I`,.`. , ; , / , JEANETTE SHIPSEY Assistant Secretary Notary Public, State of New York Notary Public No. 02SH5074142 Qualified in Nassau County Commission Expires March 10, 2015 Form 15- 10 -0313A (Rev. 3/14) CERTIFICATE OF SECRETARY OF POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA The undersigned, Mark M. Porto, certifies that he is the duly elected, qualified and acting Secretary of Poole & Kent Company of Florida, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of Delaware with a business address of 1781 N. W. North River Drive, Miami, FL 33125 and that as Secretary, he is the keeper of the corporate records and seal of said Corporation. 2015. The undersigned further certifies: 1. Attached hereto as Exhibit A is a true, correct and complete copy of resolutions adopted upon written consent of the sole director of this Corporation dated as of January 28, 2015; and said resolutions do not contravene any provision of the certificate of incorporation or by -laws of said Corporation, and have not been rescinded or modified in any respect but still remain in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this 28th day of January, Mark M. Porto, Secretary Poole & Kent Company of Florida, a Delaware Corporation 1781 N. W. North River Drive, Miami, FL 33125 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 EXHIBIT A RESOLVED, that Patrick H. Carr the duly elected President and Chief Executive Officer, David A. Strickland the duly elected Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, Brian D. MacClugage the duly elected Executive Vice President and David B. BuShea the duly elected Vice President of the Company, be and each hereby are, authorized, empowered and directed to execute a contract and all related bonds with the City of Clearwater for the Northeast WRF Clarifiers 5 -8 Rehabilitation Project #12- 0025 -UT and such other instruments in writing as may be necessary on behalf of the said Corporation, and that the Contract, Bond and other such instruments signed by him shall be binding upon the said Corporation as its own acts and deeds. CONTRACT (1) This CONTRACT made and entered into this jV day of F.?,i.ILt l- -4 , 20 dpi by and between the City of Clearwater, Florida, a municipal corporation, hereinafter designated as the "City ", and POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA, of the City of TAMPA, County of HILLSBOROUGH and State of Florida, hereinafter designated as the "Contractor ". WITNESSETH: That the parties to this contract each in consideration of the undertakings, promises and agreements on the part of the other herein contained, do hereby undertake, promise and agree as follows: The Contractor, and his or its successors, assigns, executors or administrators, in consideration of the sums of money as herein after set forth to be paid by the City and to the Contractor, shall and will at their own cost and expense perform all labor, furnish all materials, tools and equipment for the following: NORTHEAST WATER RECLAMATION FACILITY (WRF) CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION (PROJECT #12- 0025 -UT) in the amount of ONE MILLION, SIX HUNDRED EIGHTY THOUSAND Dollars ($1,680,000) In accordance with such proposal and technical supplemental specifications and such other special provisions and drawings, if any, which will be submitted by the City, together with any advertisement, instructions to bidders, general conditions, proposal and bond, which may be hereto attached, and any drawings if any, which may be herein referred to, are hereby made a part of this contract, and all of said work to be performed and completed by the contractor and its successors and assigns shall be fully completed in a good and workmanlike manner to the satisfaction of the City. If the Contractor should fail to comply with any of the terms, conditions, provisions or stipulations as contained herein within the time specified for completion of the work to be performed by the Contractor, then the City, may at its option, avail itself of any or all remedies provided on its behalf and shall have the right to proceed to complete such work as Contractor is obligated to perform in accordance with the provisions as contained herein. THE CONTRACTOR AND HIS OR ITS SUCCESSORS AND ASSIGNS DOES HEREBY AGREE TO ASSUME THE DEFENSE OF ANY LEGAL ACTION WHICH MAY BE BROUGHT AGAINST THE CITY AS A RESULT OF THE CONTRACTOR'S ACTIVITIES ARISING OUT OF THIS CONTRACT AND FURTHERMORE, IN CONSIDERATION OF THE TERMS, STIPULATIONS AND CONDITIONS AS CONTAINED HEREIN, AGREES TO HOLD THE CITY FREE AND HARMLESS FROM ANY AND ALL CLAIMS FOR DAMAGES, COSTS OF SUITS, JUDGMENTS OR DECREES RESULTING FROM ANY CLAIMS MADE UNDER THIS CONTRACT AGAINST THE CITY OR THE CONTRACTOR OR THE CONTRACTOR'S SUB CONTRACTORS, AGENTS, SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES RESULTING FROM ACTIVITIES BY THE AFOREMENTIONED CONTRACTOR, SUB CONTRACTOR, AGENT SERVANTS OR EMPLOYEES. SectionV - for -sig. docx Page 3 of 16 9/12/2014 CONTRACT (2) In addition to the foregoing provisions, the Contractor agrees to conform to the following requirements: In connection with the performance of work under this contract, the Contractor agrees not to discriminate against any employee or applicant for employment because of race, sex, religion, color, or national origin. The aforesaid provision shall include, but not be limited to, the following: employment, upgrading, demotion, or transfer; recruitment or recruitment advertising; lay off or termination; rates of pay or other forms of compensation; and selection for training, including apprenticeship. The Contractor agrees to post hereafter in conspicuous places, available for employees or applicants for employment, notices to be provided by the contracting officer setting forth the provisions of the non discrimination cl ause. The Contractor further agrees to insert the foregoing provisions in all contracts hereunder, including contracts or agreements with labor unions and /or worker's representatives, except sub contractors for standard commercial supplies or raw materials. It is mutually agreed between the parties hereto that time is of the essence of this contract, and in the event that the work to be performed by the Contractor is not completed within the time stipulated herein, it is then further agreed that the City may deduct from such sums or compensation as may be due to the Contractor the sum of $1,000.00 per day for each day that the work to be performed by the Contractor remains incomplete beyond the time limit specified herein, which sum of $1,000.00 per day shall only and solely represent damages which the City has sustained by reason of the failure of the Contractor to complete the work within the time stipulated, it being further agreed that this sum is not to be construed as a penalty but is only to be construed as liquidated damages for failure of the Contractor to complete and perform all work within the time period as specified in this contract. It is further mutually agreed between the City and the Contractor that if, any time after the execution of this contract and the surety bond which is attached hereto for the faithful performance of the terms and conditions as contained herein by the Contractor, that the City shall at any time deem the surety or sureties upon such performance bond to be unsatisfactory or if, for any reason, the said bond ceases to be adequate in amount to cover the performance of the work the Contractor shall, at his or its own expense, within ten (10) days after receipt of written notice from the City to do so, furnish an additional bond or bonds in such term and amounts and with such surety or sureties as shall be satisfactory to the City. If such an event occurs, no further payment shall be made to the Contractor under the terms and provisions of this contract until such new or additional security bond guaranteeing the faithful performance of the work under the terms hereof shall be completed and furnished to the City in a form satisfactory to it. Se ctionV- for -sig. docx Page 4 of 16 9/12/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 CONTRACT (3) The successful bidder /contractor will be required to comply with Section 119.0701, Florida Statutes (2013), specifically to: (a) Keep and maintain public records that ordinarily and necessarily would be required by the City of Clearwater in order to perform the service; (b) Provide the public with access to public records on the same terms and conditions that the City of Clearwater would provide the records and at a cost that does not exceed the cost provided in this chapter or as otherwise provided by law; (c) Ensure that public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements are not disclosed except as authorized by law; and (d) Meet all requirements for retaining public records and transfer, at no cost, to the City of Clearwater all public records in possession of the contractor upon termination of the contract and destroy any duplicate public records that are exempt or confidential and exempt from public records disclosure requirements. All records stored electronically must be provided to the public agency in a format that is compatible with the information technology systems of the City of Clearwater. SectionV - for -sig. docx Page 5 of 16 9/12/2014 CONTRACT (4) IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties to the agreement have hereunto set their hands and seals and have executed this Agreement, in duplicate, the day and year first above written. CITY OF CLEARWATER IN PINELLAS COUNTY, FLORIDA By: William B. Horne, II City Manager Countersigned: By: Q((,Q/` crt\do George N. Cretekos, Mayor (Contractor must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual.) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). SectionV-for-sig.docx Attest: (SEAL) ‘aRWAT p Rosemarie Call City Clerk Approved as to form: Ma ew M. Sm Assistant City Attorney POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA c By: _ (SEAL) Print Name: yti i4 Title: t3e ! C o Page 6 of 16 9/12/2014 CONSENT OF SURETY TO FINAL PAYMENT (replaces the Contractor's Affidavit for Final Payment page) TO OWNER: City of Clearwater Engineering Dept. 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 CONTRACTOR: Poole and Kent Co. of Florida PROJECT NAME: Northeast WRF Clarifiers 5 — 8 Rehabilitation PROJECT NO.: 12- 0025 -UT CONTRACT DATE: BOND NO.: , recorded in O.R. Book , Page , of the Public Records of Pinellas County, Florida. Pursuant to § 255.05(11), Florida Statutes, and in accordance with the provisions of the Contract between the Owner and the Contractor as indicated above, the: Name of Surety: Address: on bond of Poole & Kent Company of Florida 1715 W. Lemon St. Tampa, FL 33606 ,SURETY, ,CONTRACTOR, hereby approves of the final payment to the Contractor, and agrees that final payment to the Contractor shall not relieve Surety of any of its obligations to City of Clearwater Engineering Department 100 S. Myrtle Ave. Clearwater, FL 33756 as set forth in said Surety's bond. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Surety has hereunto set its hand this day of Attest: (Seal): SectionV - for -sig. docx ,OWNER, (Surety) (Signature of authorized representative) (Printed name and title) Page 7 of 16 9/12/2014 PROPOSAL BOND (Not to be filled out if a certified check is submitted) KNOWN ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That we, the undersigned, Poole & Kent Company of Florida 1715 W. Lemon Street, Tampa, FL 33606 as Principal, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America as Surety, who's address is One Tower Square Hartford, CT 06183 , are held and firmly bound unto the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the sum of Ten Percent of the Amount Bid Dollars ($ 10% of Amt. Bid ) (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount) for the payment of which, well and truly to be made, we hereby jointly and severally bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators, successors and assigns. The condition of the above obligation is such that if the attached Proposal of Poole & Kent Company of Florida as Principal, and Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America as Surety, for work specified as: Northeast Water Reclamation Facility Clarifiers 5-8 Rehabilitation Project Contract #12- 0025 -UT all as stipulated in said Proposal, by doing all work incidental thereto, in accordance with the plans and specifications provided herefor, all within Pinellas County, is accepted and the contract awarded to the above named bidder, and the said bidder shall within ten days after notice of said award enter into a contract, in writing, and furnish the required Performance Bond with surety or sureties to be approved by the City Manager, this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall be in full force and virtue by law and the full amount of this Proposal Bond will be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages. Signed this 25th day of November , 2014 . (Principal must indicate whether corporation, partnership, company or individual) (The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name, and his title; where the person is signing for a Corporation, he must, by Affidavit, show his authority to bind the Corporation). SectionV.docx Poole & Kent Company of Florida Prinal By: ( c Title 0.c 42— (coo Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America By: surety Rita Sagisigho, Attomey -In -Fact Non Resident License #P026098 Page 8oft6 9/1212014 TRAVELERSJ Attorney -In Fact No. 227925 WARNING: THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER POWER OF ATTORNEY Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company Certificate No. 006047382 KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That Farmington Casualty Company, St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company are corporations duly organized under the laws of the State of Connecticut, that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Iowa, and that Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., is a corporation duly organized under the laws of the State of Wisconsin (herein collectively called the "Companies "), and that the Companies do hereby make, constitute and appoint Thomas Bean, Rita Sagistano, Gerard S. Macholz, Susan Lupski, Robert T. Pearson, Camille Maitland, George O. Brewster, Colette R. Chisholm, Virginia M. Lovett, Vincent A. Walsh, Lee Ferrucci, Desiree Cardlin, and Nelly Renchiwich of the City of Uniondale State of New York their true and lawful Attorne s --Fact. Y(• ) m each in their separate capacity if more than one is named above, to sign, execute, seal and acknowledge any and all bonds, recognizances, conditional undertakings and other writings obligatory in the nature thereof on behalf of the Companies in their business of guaranteeing the fidelity of persons, guaranteeing the performance of contracts and executing or guaranteeing bonds and undertakings required or permitted in any actions or proceedings allowed by law. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the Companies have caused this instrument to be signed and their corporate seals to be hereto affixed, this day of September 2014 State of Connecticut City of Hartford ss. Farmington Casualty Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc. St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company 4th St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company By: Robert L. Raney, enior Vice President On this the 4th day of September 2014 before me personally appeared Robert L. Raney, who acknowledged himself to be the Senior Vice President of Farmington Casualty Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Company, Fidelity and Guaranty Insurance Underwriters, Inc., St. Paul Fire and Marine Insurance Company, St. Paul Guardian Insurance Company, St. Paul Mercury Insurance Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company, Travelers Casualty and Surety Company of America, and United States Fidelity and Guaranty Company, and that he, as such, being authorized so to do, executed the foregoing instrument for the purposes therein contained by signing on behalf of the corporations by himself as a duly authorized officer. In Witness Whereof, I hereunto set my hand and official seal. My Commission expires the 30th day of June, 2016. 58440 -8 -12 Printed in U.S.A. C• Marie C. Tetreault, Notary Public WARNING:THIS POWER OF ATTORNEY IS INVALID WITHOUT THE RED BORDER TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA HARTFORD, CT. 06183 ATTORNEY-IN-FACT JUSTIFICATION FLORIDA PRINCIPAL'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT -1F A CORPORATION State ofilri County of MIAMI —DADE } ss. on this 4TH day of DECEMBER 40 14 , before me personally appe PATRICK H. CARR to me known, who, being me dud sworn d es and says: That he/she resides In the City oIMIAMI that hddhe is the PRESIDENT & CEO of POOLE corporation described in and which executed the within instrument; that he/she knows the seal of said corporation; th seal; that it was so affixed by order of the Board of Directors of said corporation, and that he/she signed his/her name State ofNew York, County of PRINCIPAL'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT— IF INDIVIDUAL OR } 95. Y OF FLORIDA the instrument Is such corporate On this day of , 20 , before me personally appeared to me known to be (the individual) (one of the firm of ) described in and who executed the within instrument and he/she thereupon duly acknowledged to me that he/she executed the same (as the act and deed of said firm), State ofNew York, County of Nassau SURETY COMPANY'S ACKNOWLEDGMENT } SL On this 25th day of November 2014 , before me personally appeared Rita Sagistano me lohown, who, being by me duly sworn, did depose and say: That le/heresides in the Mit Nassau County, NY that he/she is Attorney-in-Pact of TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA, the corporation described In and which cxecut instrument; that he/she knows the corporate seal of said Company; that the seal affixed to said instrument is such corporate seal; and that he/she signed -sal Attomey -in -Fact by authority of the Board of Directors of said Company; and affiant did further depose and say that the Superintendent d' Insurance of has, pursuant to Chapter 882 of the Laws of the State of New York for the year 1939, constituting chapter 28 of the Consolideting`Laws of the S insurance Law as amended, issued to TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA hisJhe ✓,erttftce1ethat say4 became and be accepted as surety or guarantor on all bonds, undertakings, recognizances, guaranties, and other oblige ns required ospe certificate has not been revoked. to the within nstrument as ol'New'Yo k of New York'aass� the any god' Ed „ Taw an at4iAr!/Il J 7;41°f 07 TRAVELERS CASUALTY AND SURETY COMPANY OF AMERICA 6.08989.0 SPIEIMAH Hartford, Connecticut 06183 Notary Pubic, State of New York No.01SP6248741 FINANCIAL STATEMENT AS OF DECEMBER 31, 2013 ualified Nassau County Expires September 19, 2015 AS FILED WITH THE INSURANCE DEPT. OF THE STATE OF NEW YOi CAPITAL STOCK $ 8,480,000 ASSETS LIABILITIES DASH AND INVESTED CASH BONDS INVESTMENT INCOME DUE AND ACCRUED OTHER INVESTED ASSETS PREMIUM BALANCES NET DEFERRED TAX ASSET REINSURANCE RECOVERABLE SECU ITES LENDING REINVESTED COLLATERAL ASSETS RECEIVABLES FROM PARENT, SUBSmURIEB AND AFFILIATES STATE SURCHARGES RECEIVABLE OTHER ASSETS TOTAL ASSETS $ 87.799,824 3,452,214,898 47,788,502 285,099,810 190,838,462 81,575,098 11,281,414 4,910,772 30,772,481 258,771 14,872,822 5 4,147,480,454 UNEARNED PREMIUMS MAS LOSSES LOSS ADJUSTMENT EXPENSES COMMISSIONS TAXES. LICENSES AND FEES OTHER EXPENSES FUNDS HELD UNDER REINSURANCE TREATIES CURRENT FEDERAL AND FORFION INCOME TAXES REMITTANCES M10 ITEMS NOT ALLOCATED AMOUNTS WITHHELD / RETAINED BY COMPANY FOR OTHERS RETROACTIVE REINSURANCE RESERVE ASSUMED POLICYHOLDER DIVIDENDS PROVISION FOR REINSURANCE ADVANCE PREMIUM PAYABLE FOR SECURITIES LENDING DERNATIVES CEDED REINSURANCE NET PREMIUMS PAYABLE ESCHEAT LIABILITY OTHER ACCRUED EXPENSES AND LIABILITIES TOTAL LIABILITIES CAPITAL STOCK PND IN SURPLUS OTHER SURPLUS TOTAL SURPLUS TO POUCYHOLDER8 TOTAL LIABILITIES &SURPLUS Securities carried at $8,174,873 in the above statement are deposited with public authorities, as required by law. biic S 808,717871 809,883,176 480,870 453 31,781,138 12,482,322 38,437,893 94,401,484 18.387.407 13,577,809 23,816.387 1,511,874 8.482,813 3,970.484 1,078,609 4,910,772 112,003 (84,954,254) 471,948 242.238 S 2.285,740.387 3 8,480.000 433.603,780 1,441, 5 1,881,728 $ 4,147.460,454 AFFIDAVIT (To be filled in and executed if the bidder is a corporation) STATE OF FLORIDA COUNTY OF Miami -Dade ) David A. Strickland Assistant Secretary of Poole & Kent Company of Florida a corporation organized and existing under and by virtue of the laws of the State of Florida, and having its principal office at: being duly sworn, deposes and says that he /she is 1781 N.W. North River Drive (Street & Number) Miami Miami -Dade FL (City) (County) (State) Affiant further says that he is familiar with the records, minute books and by -laws of Poole & Kent Company of Florida (Name of Corporation) Affiant further says that Patrick 11. Carr (Officer's Name) of the corporation, is duly authorized to sign the Proposal for the City of Clearwater or said corporation by virtue of Written Consent of Sole Director dated November 19, 2014 is President & CEO (Title) (state whether a provision of by laws or a Resolution of Board of Directors. If by Resolution give dam ofado on). DAvid A. Strickland, Senior Vice President & Assistant Secretary Affiant Sworn to before me this 4th day of December ( \, 014 . t/l:21 SectionV.docx oo ary Public Christine Mendez Type /print/stamp name of Notary Bxecutive Assistant, EE 213393 Title or rank, and Serial No., if any 1 ;.43111:i �y. CHRISTINE MENDEZ ;.; " ' r MY COMMISSION i EE 213393 ' - . as EXPIRES: October 31, 2016 ' ' Bonded Thru Notary Public Underwriters Page 9 of 16 9/12/2014 CERTIFICATE OF SECRETARY OF POOLE & KENT COMPANY OF FLORIDA The undersigned, Mark M. Porto, certifies that he is the duly elected, qualified and acting Secretary of Poole & Kent Company of Florida, a corporation duly organized and existing under the laws of Delaware with a business address of 1781 N. W. North River Drive, Miami, FL 33125 and that as Secretary, he is the keeper of the corporate records and seal of said Corporation. The undersigned further certifies: 1. Attached hereto as Exhibit A is a true, correct and complete copy of resolutions adopted upon written consent of the sole director of this Corporation dated as of November 19, 2014; and said resolutions do not contravene any provision of the certificate of incorporation or by -laws of said Corporation, and have not been rescinded or modified in any respect but still remain in full force and effect. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, I have hereunto set my hand this 19th day of November, 2014. Mark M. Porto, Secretary Poole & Kent Company of Florida, a Delaware Corporation 1781 N. W. North River Drive, Miami, FL 33125 1715 Lemon Street Tampa, FL 33606 1 EXHIBIT A RESOLVED, that Patrick H. Carr the duly elected President and Chief Executive Officer, David A. Strickland the duly elected Senior Vice President and Assistant Secretary, Brian D. MacClugage the duly elected Executive Vice President and David B. BuShea the duly elected Vice President of the Company, be and each hereby are, authorized, empowered and directed to execute and submit a bid and all related bonds to the City of Clearwater, Florida for the Northeast Water Reclamation Facility Clarifiers 5 -8 Rehabilitation, Contract No. 12- 0025 -UT and such other instruments in writing as may be necessary on behalf of the said Corporation, and that the Contract, Bond and other such instruments signed by him shall be binding upon the said Corporation as its own acts and deeds. NON COLLUSION AFFIDAVIT STATE OF FLORIDA ) COUNTY OF Miami -Dade ) Patrick H. Carr being, first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is President & CEO Of Poole & Kent Company of Florida the party making the foregoing Proposal or Bid; that such Bid is genuine and not collusive or sham: that said bidder is not financially interested in or otherwise affiliated in a business way with any other bidder on the same contract; that said bidder has not colluded, conspired, connived, or agreed, directly or indirectly, with any bidders or person, to put in a sham bid or that such other person shall refrain from bidding, and has not in any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement or collusion, or communication or conference, with any person, to fix the bid price or affiant or any other bidder, or to fix any overhead, profit or cost element of said bid price, or that of any other bidder, or to secure any advantage against the City of Clearwater, Florida, or any person or persons interested in the proposed contract; and that all statements contained in said proposal or bid are true; and further, that such bidder has not directly or indirectly submitted this bid, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto to any association or to any member or agent thereof. Sworn to and subscribed before me this SectionV.docx 4th day of Affiant Patrick H. Carr, President & CEO embe Page 10 of 16 , 2014 ry Public Chr. e Mendez 0giRISTINE MENDEZ ;;a MY COMMISSION II EE 213393 ,' �. :: EXPIRES: October 31, 2016 =+ Bonded Thu Notary Pubic Undervrtiters 9/12/2014 PROPOSAL (1) TO THE CITY OF CLEARWATER, FLORIDA, for NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION (PROJECT #12- 0025 -UT) and doing such other work incidental thereto, all in accordance with the contract documents, marked NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION (PROJECT #12- 0025 -UT) Every bidder must take notice of the fact that even though his proposal be accepted and the documents signed by the bidder to whom an award is made and by those officials authorized to do so on behalf of the City of Clearwater, Florida, that no such award or signing shall be considered a binding contract without a certificate from the Finance Director that funds are available to cover the cost of the work to be done, or without the approval of the City Attorney as to the form and legality of the contract and all the pertinent documents relating thereto having been approved by said City Attorney; and such bidder is hereby charged with this notice. The signer of the Proposal, as bidder, also declares that the only person, persons, company or parties interested in this Proposal, are named in this Proposal, that he has carefully examined the Advertisement, Instructions to Bidders, Contract Specifications, Plans, Supplemental Specifications, General Conditions, Special Provisions, and Contract Bond, that he or his representative has made such investigation as is necessary to determine the character and extent of the work and he proposes and agrees that if the Proposal be accepted, he will contract with the City of Clearwater, Florida, in the form of contract; hereto annexed, to provide the necessary labor, materials, machinery, equipment, tools or apparatus, do all the work required to complete the contract within the time mentioned in the General Conditions and according to the requirements of the City of Clearwater, Florida, as herein and hereinafter set forth, and furnish the required surety bonds for the following prices to wit: SectionV.docx Page 11 of 16 9/12/2014 PROPOSAL (2) If the foregoing Proposal shall be accepted by the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the undersigned shall fail to execute a satisfactory contract as stated in the Advertisement herein attached, then the City may, at its option determine that the undersigned has abandoned the contract, and thereupon this Proposal shall be null and void, and the certified check or bond accompanying this Proposal, shall be forfeited to become the property of the City of Clearwater, Florida, and the full amount of said check shall be retained by the City, or if the Proposal Bond be given, the full amount of such bond shall be paid to the City as stipulated or liquidated damages; otherwise, the bond or certified check accompanying this Proposal, or the amount of said check, shall be returned to the undersigned as specified herein. Attached hereto is a bond or certified check on Bank, for the sum of 10% of Bid Amount (being a minimum of 10% of Contractor's total bid amount). The full names and residences of all persons and parties interested in the foregoing bid are as follows: (If corporation, give the names and addresses of the President and Secretary. If firm or partnership, the names and addresses of the members or partners. The Bidder shall list not only his name but also the name of any person with whom bidder has any type of agreement whereby such person's improvements, enrichment, employment or possible benefit, whether sub contractor, materialman, agent, supplier, or employer is contingent upon the award of the contract to the bidder). ($ ) NAMES: ADDRESSES: See attached Signature of Bidder: Patrick H. Carr, President & CEO (The bidder must indicate whether Corporation, Partnership, Company or Individual). SectionV.docx Page 12 of 16 9/12/2014 1 Officers 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 t 1 Poole & Kent Contractors An EMCOR Company Poole & Kent Company of Florida is a wholly owned subsidiary of EMCOR Group, Inc., a publicly traded company on the New York Stock Exchange. Patrick H. Carr - Chief Executive Officer, President, and Treasurer Richard Harrington - Chief Financial Officer Brian D. MacClugage - Executive Vice President David A. Strickland, P.E. - Senior Vice President & Assistant Secretary David B. BuShea - Vice President Duane Armstrong - Assistant Secretary Stephen Polk - Vice President R. Kevin Matz - Vice President Mark M. Porto - Secretary Headquarters - Miami Dade County Hillsborough County Palm Beach County 1781 N.W. North River Drive 1715 W. Lemon Street 801 Northpoint Parkway, Suite #64 Miami, FL 33125 Tampa, FL 33606 West Palm Beach, FL 33407 P:305 -325 -1930 P:813 -251 -2438 P:561- 721 -6439 Charlotte County 18245 Paulson Drive, Suite #125 Port Charlotte, FL 33954 P:941- 206 -2210 1 PROPOSAL (3) The person signing shall, in his own handwriting, sign the Principal's name, his own name and his title. Where the person signing for a corporation is other than the President or Vice President, he must, by affidavit, show his authority, to bind the corporation. Principal: < r By: l Title: � �� IC e= o Business Address of Bidder: 1715 W. Lemon Street City and State: Tampa, FL Dated at Miami -Dade SectionV.docx Zip Code 33606 , this 4th day of December , A.D., 20_1_4: Page 13 of 16 9/12/2014 CITY OF CLEARWATER ADDENDUM SHEET PROJECT: NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION (PROJECT #12- 0025 -UT) Acknowledgment is hereby made of the following addenda received since issuance of Plans and Specifications. Addendum No. 1 Date: 11/24/2014 Addendum No. 2 Date: 12/01/2014 Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: Addendum No. Date: SectionV.docx Page 14 of 16 Poole & Kent Company of Florida (Name of Bidder) (Signature of Officer) President & CEO (Title of Officer) December 4, 2014 (Date) 9/12/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 BIDDER'S PROPOSAL PROJECT: CLEARWATER CLARIFIER REHABILITATION PROJECT #12- 0025 -UT NORTHEAST WRF CLARIFIERS 5 -8 REHABILITATION CONTRACTOR: Poole & Kent Company of Florida BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: $ 11 I U( OQO BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL: O (, to \\ b N S,Y hWP Q 60[[0.5 (Numbers) Atlu 5 k (Words) BASE BID ITEM DESCRIPTION EST. QTY. UNIT UNIT PRICE TOTAL IA Equipment for Clarifiers 5 thru 8 in accordance with Section 01150, 3.01A. (ODP amount paid directly to vendors by the City) 1 LS $ (905�000 $ (VS000 1 B ODP - Sales Tax Savings Retained by the City, in accordance with Section 01150, 3.OIB 1 LS $ 3 b/ 3 SO $ 36 3 ID SCADA Software Implementation Services Allowance in accordance with Section 01150, 3.0ID. 1 LS $15,000 $15,000 2 Northeast WRF Clarifiers 5 -8 Rehabilitation in accordance with Section 01150, 3.01E. 1 LS $ o5 ©�/ $ 470 ��) 3 Northeast WRF Clarifiers 5 -8 Grouting in accordance with Section 01150, 3.OIF. 350 SF $ o $ 31500 6 Mobilization in accordance with Section 01150, 3.01I. 1 LS $ api QQp $ 40/ ooO 7 Indemnification in accordance with Section 01150, 3.O1J. 1 LS $ 100.00 $ 100.00 SUB -TOTAL ITEMS 1 -7 I/ 6o of oo 0 8 5% Owner's Contingency in accordance with Section 01150, 3.01K. (5% of Subtotal, Items 1 -7) 1 LS $ �� / � $ �� MO / BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL (BASE BID TOTAL OF ITEMS 1 -8) $ 1, (16 a No Line Items 1C, 4, and 5 were intentionally omitted. THE BIDDER'S GRAND TOTAL ABOVE IS HIS TOTAL BID BASED ON HIS UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICES AND THE ESTIMATED QUANTITIES REQUIRED FOR EACH SECTION. THIS FIGURE IS FOR INFORMATION ONLY AT THE TIME OF OPENING BIDS. THE CITY WILL MAKE THE TABULATION FROM THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE BID. IF THERE IS AN ERROR IN THE TOTAL BY THE BIDDER, IT SHALL BE CHANGED AS ONLY THE UNIT PRICES AND LUMP SUM PRICE SHALL GOVERN. SectionV.docx Page 15 of 16 9/12/2014 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 SCRUTINIZED COMPANIES AND BUSINESS OPERATIONS WITH CUBA AND SYRIA CERTIFICATION FORM PER SECTION HI, ITEM 25, IF YOUR BID IS $1,000,000 OR MORE, THIS FORM MUST BE COMPLETED AND SUBMITTED WITH THE BID PROPOSAL. FAILURE TO SUBMIT THIS FORM AS REQUIRED, MAY DEEM YOUR SUBMITTAL NONRESPONSIVE. The affiant, by virtue of the signature below, certifies that: 1. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is aware of the requirements of section 287.135, Florida Statutes, regarding companies on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Energy Sector List, or engaging in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 2. The vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner is eligible to participate in this solicitation and is not listed on either the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engaged in business operations in Cuba and Syria; and 3. Business Operations means, for purposes specifically related to Cuba or Syria, engaging in commerce in any form in Cuba or Syria, including, but not limited to, acquiring, developing, maintaining, owning, selling, possessing, leasing or operating equipment, facilities, personnel, products, services, personal property, real property, military equipment, or any other apparatus of business or commerce; and 4. If awarded the Contract (or Agreement), the vendor, company, individual, principal, subsidiary, affiliate, or owner will immediately notify the City of Clearwater in writing, no later than five (5) calendar days after any of its principals are placed on the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in Sudan List, the Scrutinized Companies with Activities in the Iran Petroleum Sector List, or engages in business operations in Cuba and Syria. Authorized Signature Patrick H. Carr Printed Name President & CEO Title Poole & Kent Company of Florida Name of Entity /Corporation STATE OF Florida COUNTY OF Miami -Dade The foregoing instrument was acknowledged before me on this 4th day of December , 20 14 by Patrick H. Carr (name of person whose signature is being notarized) as the President & CEO (title) of Poole & Kent Company - orida (name of corporation/entity), personally known to me as described herein or p oduced (type of identification) as identification, and who did/did not ake an o L ../. My Commission Expires: 10/31/2016 NOTARY SEAL ABOVE SectionV.docx Page 16 of 16 otary Public Christine Mendez Printed Name 9/12/2014